Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Integration of Sales, Production, and Direct Materials Budgets
Swanson, Inc., manufactures an advanced swim fin for scuba divers. Management is now preparing detailed budgets for the third quarter, July through September, and has assembled the following information to assist in preparing the budget:
a. The Marketing Department has estimated sales as follows for the remainder of the year (in pairs of swim fins). The selling price of the swim fins is $13 per pair.
|
July
|
5,600
|
October
|
3,600
|
|
August
|
6,600
|
November
|
2,600
|
|
September
|
4,600
|
December
|
2,600
|
b. All sales are on account. Based on past experience, sales are expected to be collected in the following pattern:
43% in the month of sale
48% in the month following sale
9% uncollectible.
The beginning accounts receivable balance (excluding uncollectible amounts) on July 1 will be $130,000.
c. The company maintains finished goods inventories equal to 9% of the following month’s sales. The inventory of finished goods on July 1 will be 504 pairs.
d. Each pair of swim fins requires 4 pounds of geico compound. To prevent shortages, the company would like the inventory of geico compound on hand at the end of each month to be equal to 20% of the following month’s production needs. The inventory of geico compound on hand on July 1 will be 4,552 pounds.
e. Geico compound costs $2.50 per pound. Crydon pays for 60% of its purchases in the month of purchase; the remainder is paid for in the following month. The accounts payable balance for Geico compound purchases will be $11,800 on July 1.
Required:
1. Prepare a sales budget, by month and in total, for the third quarter. (Show your budget in both pairs of swim fins and dollars.) Also prepare a schedule of expected cash collections, by month and in total, for the third quarter.
2. Prepare a production budget for each of the months July through October.
3. Prepare a direct materials budget for Geico compound, by month and in total, for the third quarter. Also prepare a schedule of expected cash disbursements for Geico compound, by month and in total, for the third quarter.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Various Reporting Formats
The following information was taken from the records of Roland Carlson Inc. for the year 2007. Income tax applicable to income from continuing operations $187,000; income tax applicable to loss on discontinued operations $25,500; income tax applicable to extraordinary gain $32,300; income tax applicable to extraordinary loss $20,400; and unrealized holding gain on available-for-sale securities $15,000.
|
Extraordinary gain
|
95,000
|
Cash dividends declared
|
150,000
|
|
Loss on discontinued operations
|
75,000
|
Retained earnings January 1, 2010
|
600,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
240,000
|
Cost of goods sold
|
850,000
|
|
Rent revenue
|
40,000
|
Selling expenses
|
300,000
|
|
Extraordinary loss
|
60,000
|
Sales
|
1,900,000
|
Shares outstanding during 2007 were 100,000.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a single-step income statement for 2007.
(b) Prepare a retained earnings statement for 2007.
(c) Show how comprehensive income is reported using the second income statement format.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparing amounts for ending inventory—perpetual inventory—FIFO and LIFO
Assume that a Models and More store bought and sold a line of dolls during December as follows:
|
Beginning inventory
|
13
|
units @
|
11.00
|
|
Sale
|
9
|
units
|
|
|
Purchase
|
17
|
units @
|
13.00
|
|
sale
|
13
|
units
|
|
Models and More uses the perpetual inventory system.
Requirements
1. Compute the cost of ending inventory using FIFO.
2. Compute the cost of ending inventory using LIFO.
3. Which method results in a higher cost of ending inventory?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing purchase and sales transactions—perpetual system
The following transactions occurred during February 2012, for Soul Art Gift Shop:
3-Feb Purchased $2,700 of inventory on account under terms of 4/10, n/eom (end of month) and FOB shipping point.
7 Returned $400 of defective merchandise purchased on February 3.
9 Paid freight bill of $110 on February 3 purchase.
10 Sold inventory on account for $4,350. Payment terms were 2/15, n/30. These goods cost the company $2,300
12 Paid amount owed on credit purchase of February 3, less the return and the discount.
16 Granted a sales allowance of $500 on the February 10 sale.
23 Received cash from February 10 customer in full settlement of her debt, less the allowance and the discount.
Requirement
1. Journalize the February transactions for Soul Art Gift Shop. No explanations are required.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A listing of budgeted selling and administrative expenses for Glide Tire Company in P7-2 for the year ended December 31, 2008, were as follows:
|
Advertising expense
|
942,000
|
|
Office rent expense
|
125,000
|
|
Office salaries expense
|
821,000
|
|
Office supplies expense
|
45,500
|
|
Officer’s salaries expense
|
661,000
|
|
Sales salaries expense
|
988,000
|
|
Telephone and fax expense
|
33,500
|
|
Travel expense
|
443,000
|
Required:
1. Prepare a selling and administrative expenses budget, in good form, for the year 2008.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fouch Company makes 30,000 units per year of a part it uses in the products it manufactures. The unit product cost of this part is computed as follows:
|
Direct Materials
|
$15.70
|
|
Direct Labor
|
$17.50
|
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead
|
$4.50
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead
|
$14.60
|
|
Unit Product Cost
|
$52.30
|
An outside supplier has offered to sell the company all of these parts it needs for $51.90 a unit. If the company accepts this offer, the facilities now being used to make the part could be used to make more units of a product that is in high demand. The additional contribution margin on this other product would be $219,000 per year.
If the part were purchased from the outside supplier, all of the direct labor cost of the part would be avoided. However, $6.20 of the fixed manufacturing overhead cost being applied to the part would continue even if the part were purchased from the outside supplier. This fixed manufacturing overhead cost would be applied to the company’s remaining products.
Required:
i. How much of the unit product cost of $52.30 is relevant in the decision of whether to make or buy the part?
ii. What is the net total dollar advantage (disadvantage) of purchasing the part rather than making it?
iii. What is the maximum amount the company should be willing to pay an outside supplier per unit for the part if the supplier commits to supplying all 30,000 units required each year?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Open Accounts Receivable aging is as follows for December 31, 2008:
|
Current
|
1-30
|
31-60
|
61-90
|
Over 90 days
|
|
75000
|
38000
|
15000
|
8000
|
12000
|
Using the following estimated percentage uncollectible
|
Current
|
3%
|
|
1-30 days past due
|
8%
|
|
31-90 days past due
|
27%
|
|
Over 90 days
|
52%
|
A. Calculate the estimated uncollectible
B. Assuming there is a debit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts of $1,712. Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2008 to record bad debt expense.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented here are the components in Pedersen Company’s income statement.
Determine the missing amounts.
|
Sales
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
Gross Profit
|
Operating Expenses
|
Net Income
|
|
71,200
|
(b)
|
30,000
|
(d)
|
10,800
|
|
108,000
|
70,000
|
(c)
|
(e)
|
29,500
|
|
(a)
|
71,900
|
109,600
|
46,200
|
(f)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Top managers of Medical Products, Inc., have asked for your help in comparing the company’s profit performance and financial position with the average for the industry. The accountant has given you the company’s income statement and balance sheet and also the following data for the industry:
Medical Products, Inc.
Income Statement Compared with Industry Average
Year Ended December 31, 20X5
Medical Industry Average
|
Net sales
|
$957,000
|
100.0%
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
652,000
|
55.9
|
|
Gross profit
|
305,000
|
44.1
|
|
Operating expenses
|
200,000
|
28.1
|
|
Operating income
|
105,000
|
16.1
|
|
Other expenses
|
3,000
|
2.4
|
|
Net income
|
$102,000
|
13.6%
|
Medical Products, Inc.
Balance Sheet Compared with Industry Average
December 31, 20X5
Medical Industry Average
|
Current assets
|
$486,000
|
74.4%
|
|
Fixed assets, net
|
117,000
|
20.0
|
|
Intangible assets, net
|
24,000
|
0.6
|
|
Other assets
|
3,000
|
5.0
|
|
Total
|
630,000
|
100.0
|
|
Current liabilities
|
245,000
|
45.6
|
|
Long-term liabilities
|
114,000
|
19.0
|
|
Stockholder’s equity
|
271,000
|
35.4
|
|
Total
|
$360,000
|
100.0%
|
Requirements
1. Prepare a common-size income statement and balance sheet for Medical Products. The first column of each statement should present Medical Products’ common-size statement, and the second column should show the industry averages.
2. For the profitability analysis, compute Medical Products’ (a) ratio of gross profit to net sales (b) ratio of operating income to net sales, and (c) ratio of net income to net sales. Compare these figures with the industry averages. Is Medical Products’ profit performance better or worse than the average for the industry?
3. For the analysis of financial position, compute Medical Products’ (a) ratios of current assets and current liabilities to total assets and (b) ratio of stockholders’ equity to total assets. Compare these ratios with the industry averages. Is Medical Products’ financial position better or worse than the average for the industry?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ries Corporation has received a request for a special order of 8,000 units of product R34 for $34.60 each. The normal selling price of this product is $36.60 each, but the units would need to be modified slightly for the customer. The normal unit product cost of product R34 is computed as follows:
|
Direct materials
|
10.80
|
|
Direct labour
|
2.00
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
6.80
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
2.70
|
|
Unit product cost
|
$22.30
|
Direct labor is a variable cost. The special order would have no effect on the company’s total fixed manufacturing overhead costs. The customer would like some modifications made to product R34 that would increase the variable costs by $5.80 per unit and that would require a one-time investment of $39,000 in special molds that would have no salvage value. This special order would have no effect on the company’s other sales. The company has ample spare capacity for producing the special order.
Required:
Determine the effect on the company’s total net operating income of accepting the special order. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to the nearest dollar amount.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Schefter Mining operates a copper mine in Wyoming. Acquisition, exploration, and development costs totaled $8.2 million. Extraction activities began on July 1, 2011.
After the copper is extracted in approximately six years, Schefter is obligated to restore the land to its original condition, including constructing a park. The company’s controller has provided the following three cash flow possibilities for the restoration costs:
|
|
Cash Flow
|
Probability
|
|
1
|
700,000
|
30%
|
|
2
|
800,000
|
25%
|
|
3
|
900,000
|
45%
|
The company’s credit-adjusted, risk-free rate of interest is 5%, and its fiscal year ends on December 31.
Required:
a. What is the initial cost of the copper mine? (Round computations to nearest whole dollar.)
b. How much accretion expense will Schefter report in its 2011 income statement?
c. What is the carrying value (book value) of the asset retirement obligation that Schefter will report in its 2011 balance sheet?
d. Assume that actual restoration costs incurred in 2017 totaled $860,000. What amount of gain or loss will Schefter recognize on retirement of the liability?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
DK Super Stores Inc. uses the average cost retail method to estimate its ending inventory. Information at June 30, 2011, is as follows:
|
Cost
|
Retail
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
105,000
|
|
Net purchases
|
375,000
|
|
Ending inventory
|
64,000
|
Required:
Compute the cost-to-retail percentage used by DK.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In 2011, KP Building Inc. began work on a four-year construction project (called ,Cincy
One,). The contract price is $300 million. KP uses the percentage-of-completion
method of accounting. At the end of 2011, the following financial statement information
indicates the results to date for Cincy One:
INCOME STATEMENT
Gross Profit (before-taxes) recognized in 2011 $22 million
BALANCE SHEET
Accounts Receivable from construction billings $10 million
Construction in progress $66 million
Less: Billings on construction ($75 million)
Net billings in excess of construction in progress $9 million
Required: Compute the following, placing your answer in the spaces provided and
showing supporting computations:
Items to compute:
Cash collected by KP on Cincy One during 2011
Actual costs incurred by KP on Cincy One during 2011
At 12/31/2011, the estimated remaining costs to complete Cincy One
The percentage of Cincy One that was completed during 2011
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Canton Corporation reported the following items in its adjusted trial balance for the year ended December 31, 2011::
|
Income from continuing operations before income taxes
|
110,000
|
|
Extaordinary
|
28,000
|
|
Conton is subject to a 3% tax rate.
|
|
Required:
Prepare the December 31, 2011, income statement for Canton Corporation, starting with income from continuing operations before income taxes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Houston-based Advanced Electronics manufactures audio speakers for desktop computers. The following data relates to the period just ended when the company produced and sold 42,000 speaker sets:
|
Sales
|
3,360,000
|
|
Variable Costs
|
840,000
|
|
Fixed Costs
|
2,80,000
|
Management is considering relocating its manufacturing facilities to Northern Mexico to reduce costs. Variable costs are expected to average $18 per set; annual fixed costs are anticipated to be $1,984,000. (Ignore income taxes)
Required:
1. Calculate the company’s current income and determine the level of dollar sales needed to double that figure, assuming that manufacturing operations remain in the United States.
2. Determine the break even point in speaker sets if operations are shifted to Mexico
3. Assume that management desires to achieve the Mexican break even point; however, operations remain in the United States.
a) If variable costs remain constant, what must management do to fixed costs? By how much must fixed costs change?
b) If fixed costs remain constant, what must management do to the variable cost per unit? By how much must unit variable cost change?
4. Determine the impact (increase, decrease, or no effect) of the following operating changes.
a) Effect of an increase in direct material costs on the break-even point
b) Effect of an increase in fixed administration costs on the unit contribution margin.
c) Effect of an increase in the unit contribution margin on net income.
d) Effect of an decrease in the number of units sold on the break even point.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jonathan Macintosh is a highly successful Pennsylvania orchardman who has formed his own company to produce and package applesauce. Apples can be stored for several months in cold storage, so applesauce production is relatively uniform throughout the year. The recently hired controller for the firm is about to apply the high-low method in estimating the company’s energy cost behavior. The following costs were incurred during the past 12 months:
|
Month
|
Pints of Appleasauce
|
Produced Energy Cost
|
|
January
|
35,000
|
23,000
|
|
February
|
21,000
|
22,100
|
|
March
|
22,000
|
22,000
|
|
April
|
24,000
|
22,450
|
|
May
|
30,000
|
22,900
|
|
June
|
32,000
|
23,350
|
|
July
|
40,000
|
28,000
|
|
August
|
30,000
|
22,800
|
|
September
|
30,000
|
23,000
|
|
October
|
28,000
|
22,700
|
|
November
|
41,000
|
24,100
|
|
December
|
39,000
|
24,950
|
Required:
1. Use the high-low method to estimate the company’s energy cost behavior and express it in equation form. Use the formula Y = a + bX, where Y denotes energy cost for a month and X denotes pints of applesauce produced.
2. Predict the energy cost for a month in which 26,000 pints of applesauce are produced
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Flexible budget for factory overhead
Presented below are the monthly factory overhead cost budget (at normal capacity of 5,000 units or 20,000 direct labor hours) and the production and cost data for a month.
Factory Overhead Cost Budget
Fixed cost:
|
Depreciation on building and machinery
|
1,200
|
|
Taxes on building and machinery
|
500
|
|
Insurance on building and machinery
|
500
|
|
Superintendent’s salary
|
1,500
|
|
Supervisor’s salaries
|
2,300
|
|
Maintenance wages
|
1,000 7,000
|
|
Variable cost
|
|
|
Repairs
|
400
|
|
Maintenance supplies
|
300
|
|
Other supplies
|
200
|
|
Payroll taxes
|
800
|
|
Small tools
|
300 2,000
|
|
Total standard factory overhead
|
$9,000
|
Required:
1. Assuming that variable costs will vary in direct proportion to the change in volume, prepare a flexible budget for production levels of 80%, 90% and 110% of normal capacity. Also determine the rate for application of factory overhead to work in process at each level of volume in both units and direct labor hours.
2. Prepare a flexible budget for production levels of 80%, 90% and 110%, assuming that variable costs will vary in direct proportion to the change in volume, but with the following exceptions. (Hint: Set up a third category for semifixed expenses).
a. At 110% of capacity, an assistant department head will be needed at a salary of $10,500 annually.
b. At 80% of capacity, the repairs epxense will drop to one-half of the amount at 100% capacity.
c. Maintenance supplies expense will remain constant at all levels of production.
d. At 80% of capacity, one part-time maintenance worker, earning $6,000 a year, will be laid off.
e. At 1105% of capacity, a machine not normally in use and on which no depreciation is normally recorded will be used in production. Its cost was $12,000, it has a ten-year life, and straight-line depreciation will be taken.
3. Using the facts and the flexible budget prepared in 1., determine the budgeted cost at 96% of capacity, using interpolation.
4. Using the flexible budget prepared in 1., determine the budgeted cost at 104% capacity, using a method other than interpolation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Units gained; cost of production summaries
Logan Chemicals Inc., which uses the process cost system, has two departments: A and B. In both departments, all of the materials are put into production at the beginning of the process. The materials added in Department B increase the number of units being processed by 25%. Labor and factory overhead are incurred uniformly throughout the process in all departments.
A record of the factory operations for Many follows:
|
Cost Summary.
|
Dept. A
|
Dept. B
|
|
Materials
|
25000
|
7500
|
|
Labor
|
10800
|
10140
|
|
Factory overhead
|
8100
|
7215
|
Production summary
|
Started in process
|
10000
|
|
|
Received from prior department
|
8500
|
|
|
Added to units in process
|
1500
|
|
|
Finished and transferred
|
8500
|
9500
|
|
Units in process, end of month
|
1500
|
500
|
|
Stage of completion
|
1/3
|
½
|
Required:
Prepare a cost of production summary for each department for the month of May.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Joint cost allocation with costs after split-off and by-product revenue
Mega Oil Company transports crude oil to its refinery where it is processed into main products gasoline, kerosene, and diesel fuel, and by product base oil. The base oil is sold at the split-off for $500,000 of annual revenue, and the joint processing cost to the get the crude oil to split-off are $5,000,000. Additional information includes:
|
Product
|
Barrels produced
|
Cost of Split-off
|
Selling Price per Barrel
|
|
Gasoline
|
500,000
|
2,000,000
|
25
|
|
Kerosene
|
100,000
|
500,000
|
30
|
|
Diesel fuel
|
250,000
|
1,000,000
|
20
|
Required:
Determine the allocation of joint costs, using the relative sales value method, (Hint: Reduce the amount of the joint costs to be allocated by the amount of the by-product Revenue)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On May 1, Skyline Flying School, a company that provides flying lessons, was started with an investment of $45,000 cash in the business. Following are the assets and liabilities of the company on May 31, 2008, and the revenues and expenses for the month of May.
|
Cash
|
5,600
|
Notes Payable
|
30,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
7,200
|
Rent Expense
|
1,200
|
|
Equipment
|
64,000
|
Repair Expense
|
400
|
|
Lesson Revenue
|
7,500
|
Fuel Expense
|
2,500
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
500
|
Insurance Expense
|
400
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
800
|
|
|
No additional investments were made in May, but the company paid dividends of $1,500 during the month.
Instructions
(a) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the month of May and a balance sheet at May 31.
(b) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for May assuming the following data are not included above: (1) $900 of revenue was earned and billed but not collected at May 31, and (2) $1,500 of fuel expense was incurred but not paid.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected transactions for Evergreen Lawn Care Company are listed below.
1. Sold common stock for cash to start business.
2. Paid monthly rent.
3. Purchased equipment on account.
4. Billed customers for services performed.
5. Paid dividends.
6. Received cash from customers billed in (4).
7. Incurred advertising expense on account.
8. Purchased additional equipment for cash.
9. Received cash from customers when service was performed.
Instructions
List the numbers of the above transactions and describe the effect of each transaction on assets, liabilities, and stockholders’ equity. For example, the first answer is: (1) Increase in assets and increase in stockholders’ equity.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mesa Company produces a single product. Operating data for the company and its absorption costing income statement for the last year are presented below:
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
2,000
|
|
Units produced
|
9,000
|
|
Units sold
|
10,000
|
|
Sales
|
$100,000
|
|
Less cost of goods sold:
|
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
12,000
|
|
Add cost of goods manufactured
|
54,000
|
|
Goods available for sale
|
66,000
|
|
Less ending inventory
|
6,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
60,000
|
|
Gross margin
|
40,000
|
|
Less selling and admin. expenses
|
28,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
$12,000
|
Variable manufacturing costs are $4 per unit. Fixed factory overhead totals $18,000 for the year. This overhead was applied at a rate of $2 per unit. Variable selling and administrative expenses were $1 per unit sold.
Required:
Prepare a new income statement for the year using variable costing. Comment on the differences between the absorption costing and the variable costing income statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Data for January concerning Del Mar Corporation’s two major business segments- Fibers and Feedstocks-appear below:
|
Sales revenues, Fibers
|
$870,000
|
|
Sales revenues, Feedstocks
|
$800,000
|
|
Variable expenses, Fibers
|
$426,000
|
|
Variable expenses, Feedstocks
|
$344,000
|
|
Traceable fixed expenses, Fibers
|
$148,000
|
|
Traceable fixed expenses, Feedstocks
|
S156,000
|
Common fixed expenses totaled $314,000 and were allocated as follows: $129,000 to the Fibers business segment and $185,000 to the Feedstocks business segment.
Required:
Prepare a segmented income statement in the contribution format for the company. Omit percentages; show only dollar amounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cuisine Master is a division of a major corporation. The following data are for the latest year of operations.
|
Sales
|
$30,000,000
|
|
Net Operating income
|
$1,170,000
|
|
Average operating assets
|
$8,000,000
|
|
The company’s minimum required rate of return
|
18%
|
Required:
i. What is the division’s margin?
ii. What is the division’s turnover?
iii. What is the division’s ROI?
iv. What is the division’s residual income?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The management of Union Co. is considering dropping product L57V. Data from the company’s accounting system appear below.
|
Sales
|
$480,000
|
|
Variable Expenses
|
$202,000
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Expenses
|
$158,000
|
|
Fixed Selling and Administrative Expenses
|
$130,000
|
All fixed expenses of the company are fully allocated to products in the company’s accounting system. Further investigation has revealed that $86,000 of the fixed manufacturing expenses and $67,000 of the fixed selling and administrative expenses are avoidable if product L57V is discontinued.
Required:
i. What is the net operating income earned by product L57V according to the company’s accounting system? Show your work!
ii. What would be the effect on the company’s overall net operating income of dropping product L57V? Should the product be dropped? Show your work!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Van Buren Co. manufactures and sells medals for winners of athletic and other events. Its manufacturing plant has the capacity to produce 15,000 medals each month; current monthly production is 14,250 medals. The company normally charges $115 per medal. Cost data for the current level of production are shown below.
|
Variable Costs
|
|
|
| |
Direct Materials
|
$969,000
|
| |
Direct Labor
|
$270,750
|
| |
Selling and Administrative
|
$270,075
|
|
Fixed Costs
|
|
|
| |
Manufacturing
|
$370,550
|
| |
Selling and Administrative
|
$89,775
|
The company has just received a special one-time order for 600 medals at $102 each. For this particular order, no variable selling and administrative costs would be incurred. This order would also have no effect on fixed costs.
Required:
Should the company accept this special order? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sacramento Corporation uses part B78 in one of its products. The company’s accounting department reports the following costs of producing the 4,000 units of the part that are needed every year.
| |
Per Unit
|
|
Direct Materials
|
$2.80
|
|
Direct Labor
|
$6.30
|
|
Variable Overhead
|
$8.50
|
|
Supervisor’s Salary
|
$2.60
|
|
Depreciation of Special Equipment
|
$6.80
|
|
Allocated General Overhead
|
$6.10
|
An outside supplier has offered to make the part and sell it to the company for $28.00 each.
If this offer is accepted, the supervisor’s salary and all of the variable costs, including direct labor, can be avoided. The special equipment used to make the part was purchased many years ago and has no salvage value or other use. The allocated general overhead represents fixed costs of the entire company. If the outside supplier’s offer were accepted, only $4,000 of these allocated general overhead costs would be avoided.
Required:
i. Prepare a report that shows the effect on the company’s total net operating income of buying part B78 from the supplier rather than continuing to make it inside the company.
ii. Which alternative should the company choose?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Refer to the data in the preceding exercise for Golden Gate Construction Associates. The company has two divisions: the real estate division and the construction division. The divisions’ total assets, current liabilities, and before-tax operating income for the most recent year are as follows:
|
Division
|
Total Assets
|
Current Liabilities
|
Before-Tax Operating Income
|
|
Real estate
|
100,000,000
|
6,000,000
|
20,000,000
|
|
Construction
|
60,000,000
|
4,000,000
|
18,000,000
|
Required:
Calculate the economic value added (EVA) for each of Golden Gate Construction Associates’ divisions. (You will need to use the weighted-average cost of capital, which was computed in the preceding exercise.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Golden Gate Construction Associates , a real estate developer and building contractor in San Francisco, has two sources of long-term capital: debt and equity. The cost to Golden Gate of issuing debt is the after-tax cost of the interest payments on the debt, taking into account the fact that the interest payments are tax deductible.
The cost of Golden Gate’s equity capital is the investment opportunity rate of Golden Gate’s investors, that is, the rate they could earn on investments of similar risk to that of investing in Golden Gate Construction Associates. The interest rate on Golden Gate’s $60 million of long-term debt is 10 percent, and the company’s tax rate is 40 percent. The cost of Golden Gate’s equity capital is 15 percent. Moreover, the market value (and book value) of Golden Gate’s equity is $90 million.
Required:
Calculate Golden Gate Construction Associates’ weighted-average cost of capital.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Countywide Cable Services, Inc. is organized with three segments: Metro, Suburban, and Outlying. Data for these segments for the year just ended follow.
| |
Metro
|
Suburban
|
Outlying
|
|
Service revenue
|
1,000,000
|
800,000
|
400,000
|
|
Variable expenses
|
200,000
|
150,000
|
100,000
|
|
Controllable fixed expenses
|
400,000
|
320,000
|
150,000
|
|
Fixed expenses controllable by others
|
230,000
|
200,000
|
90,000
|
In addition to the expenses listed above, the company has $95,000 of common fixed expenses. Income-tax expense for the year is $145,000.
Required:
1. Prepare a segmented income statement for Countywide Cable Services, Inc. Use the contribution format.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wyalusing Industries has manufactured prefabricated houses for over 20 years. The houses are constructed in sections to be assembled on customers’ lots. Wyalusing expanded into the precut housing market when it acquired Fairmont Company, one of its suppliers. In this market, various types of lumber are precut into the appropriate lengths, banded into packages, and shipped to customers’ lots for assembly. Wyalusing designated the Fairmont Division as an investment center. Wyalusing uses return on investment (ROI) as a performance measure with investment defined as average productive assets. Management bonuses are based in part on ROI. All investments are expected to earn a minimum return of 15 percent before income taxes. Fairmont’s ROI has ranged from 19.3 to 22.1 percent since it was acquired. Fairmont had an investment opportunity in 20×1 that had an estimated ROI of 18 percent. Fairmont’s management decided against the investment because it believed the investment would decrease the division’s overall ROI. The 20×1 income statement for Fairmont Division follows. The division’s productive assets were $12,600,000 at the end of 20×1, a 5 percent increase over the balance at the beginning of the year.
FAIRMONT DIVISION
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 20×1
(in thousands)
|
Sales revenue
|
24,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
15,800
|
|
Gross margin
|
8,200
|
|
Operating expenses:
|
|
|
Administrative
|
2,140
|
|
Selling
|
3,600
|
5,740
|
|
Income from operations before income taxes
|
2,460
|
|
Required:
1. Calculate the following performance measures for 20×1 for the Fairmont Division.
a. Return on investment (ROI).
b. Residual income.
2. Would the management of Fairmont Division have been more likely to accept the investment opportunity it had in 20×1 if residual income were used as a performance measure instead of ROI? Explain your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the beginning of the current period, Huang Corp. had balances in Accounts Receivable of $200,000 and in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts of $9,000 (credit). During the period, it had net credit sales of $800,000 and collections of $743,000. It wrote off as uncollectible accounts receivable of $7,000. However, a $4,000 account previously written off as uncollectible was recovered before the end of the current period. Uncollectible accounts are estimated to total $25,000 at the end of the period.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the entries to record sales and collections during the period.
(b) Prepare the entry to record the write-off of uncollectible accounts during the period.
(c) Prepare the entries to record the recovery of the uncollectible account during the period.
(d) Prepare the entry to record bad debts expense for the period.
(e) Determine the ending balances in Accounts Receivable and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.
(f) What is the net realizable value of the receivables at the end of the period?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cyclone, Inc. reports the following liabilities (in thousands) on its January 31, 2007, balance sheet and notes to the financial statements.
|
Accounts payable
|
3,263.9
|
Notes payable—long-term
|
5,746.7
|
|
Accrued pension liability
|
1,215.2
|
Operating leases
|
1,641.7
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
1,258.1
|
Loans payable—long-term
|
335.6
|
|
Bonds payable
|
1,961.2
|
Payroll-related liabilities
|
558.1
|
|
Current portion of long-term debt
|
1,992.2
|
Short-term borrowings
|
2,563.6
|
|
Income taxes payable
|
235.2
|
Unused operating line of credit
|
3,337.6
|
|
Warranty liability-current
|
1,417.3
|
|
|
Instructions
(a) Identify which of the above liabilities are likely current and which are likely long term. Say if an item fits in neither category. Explain the reasoning for your selection.
(b) Prepare the liabilities section of Cyclone’s balance sheet as at January 31, 2007.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected comparative statement data for the giant bookseller Barnes & Noble are presented here. All balance sheet data are as of December 31:
|
(in million)
|
2004
|
2003
|
|
Net sales
|
4,873.60
|
5,951.00
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
3,386.60
|
4,323.80
|
|
Net income
|
143.30
|
151.90
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
74.60
|
60.50
|
|
Inventory
|
1,274.60
|
1,526.10
|
|
Total assets
|
3,301.50
|
3,301.50
|
|
Total common stockholders’ equity
|
1,165.90
|
1,259.70
|
Instructions
Compute the following ratios for 2004:
(a) Profit margin.
(b) Asset turnover.
(c) Return on assets.
(d) Return on common stockholders’ equity.
(e) Gross profit rate.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct Labor and Manufacturing Overhead Budgets:
The production department of Raredon Corporation has submitted the following forecast of units to be produced by quarter for the upcoming fiscal year:
|
|
1st Quarter
|
2nd Quarter
|
3rd Quarter
|
4th Quarter
|
|
Units to be produced
|
12,000
|
14,000
|
13,000
|
11,000
|
Each unit requires 0.70 direct labor-hours, and direct labor-hour workers are paid $10.50 per hour.
In addition, the variable manufacturing overhead rate is $1.50 per direct labor-hour. The fixed manufacturing overhead is $80,000 per quarter. The only noncash element of manufacturing overhead is depreciation, which is $22,000 per quarter.
Requirements:
a. Prepare the company’s direct labor budget for the upcoming fiscal year, assuming that the direct labor workforce is adjusted each quarter to match the number of hours required to produce the forecasted number of units produced.
b. Prepare the company’s manufacturing overhead budget.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct Materials and Direct Labor Budgets:
The production department of Hareston Company has submitted the following forecast of units to be produced by quarter for the upcoming fiscal year:
|
|
1st Quarter
|
2nd Quarter
|
3rd Quarter
|
4thquarter
|
|
Units to be produced
|
7,000
|
8,000
|
6,000
|
5,000
|
In addition, the beginning raw materials inventory for the first quarter is budgeted to be 1,400 pounds and the beginning accounts payable for the first quarter is budgeted to be $2,940.
Each unit requires 2 pounds of raw material that costs $1.40 per pound. Management desires to end each quarter with an inventory of raw materials equal to 10% of the following quarter’s production needs.
The desired ending inventory for the fourth quarter is 1,500 pounds. Management plans to pay for 80% of raw material purchases in the quarter acquired and 20% in the following quarter. Each unit requires 0.60 direct labor-hours and direct labor-hour workers are paid $14.00 per hour.
Requirements:
a. Prepare the company’s direct materials budget and schedule of expected cash disbursements for purchases of materials for the upcoming fiscal year.
b. Prepare the company’s direct labor budget for the upcoming fiscal year, assuming that the direct labor workforce is adjusted each quarter to match the number of hours required to produce the forecasted number of units produced.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sales and Production Budgets:
The marketing department of Jessi Corporation has submitted the following sales forecast for the upcoming fiscal year (all sales are on account):
|
|
1st Quarter
|
2nd Quarter
|
3rd Quarter
|
4th Quarter
|
|
Units to be produced
|
11,000
|
12,000
|
14,000
|
13,000
|
The selling price of the company’s product is $18.00 per unit. Management expects to collect 65% of sales in the quarter in which the sales are made, 30% in the following quarter, and 5% of sales are expected to be “‘uncollectible.
The beginning balance of accounts receivable, all of which is expected to be collected in the first quarter, is $70,200. The company expects to start the first quarter with 1,650 units in finished goods inventory.
Management desires an ending finished goods inventory in each quarter equal to 15% of the next quarter’s budgeted sales. The desired ending finished goods inventory for the fourth quarter is 1,850 units.
a. Prepare the company’s sales budget and schedule of expected cash collections.
b. Prepare the company’s production budget for the upcoming fiscal year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tiger Golf Accessories sells golf shoes, gloves, and a laser-guided range-finder that measures distance. Shown below are unit cost and sales data.
|
|
Pairs of Shoes
|
Pairs of Gloves
|
Range Finder
|
|
Unit sales price
|
100
|
30
|
250
|
|
Unit variable costs
|
60
|
10
|
200
|
|
Unit contribution margin
|
$40
|
$20
|
$50
|
|
Sales mix
|
40%
|
50%
|
10%
|
Fixed costs are $620,000.
Instructions:
a. Compute the break-even point in units for the company. (Round computation for weighted-average contribution margin to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50, and final answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)
b. Determine the number of units to be sold at the break-even point for each product line. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)
c. Verify that the mix of sales units determined in (b) will generate a zero net income.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 2, 2006, Speedway Delivery Service purchased a truck at a cost of $63,000. Before placing the truck in service,Speedway spent $2,200 painting it, $800 replacing tires, and $4,000 overhauling the engine. The truck should remain in service for 6 years and have a residual value of $14,200. The truck’s annual mileage is expected to be 18,000 miles in each of the first four years and 14,000 miles in each of the next two years—100,000 miles in total. In deciding which depreciation method to use, Jerry Speers, the general manager, requests a depreciation schedule for each of the depreciation methods (straight-line, units-of-production, and double-declining-balance).
Requirements
1. Prepare a depreciation schedule for each depreciation method, showing asset cost, depreciation expense, accumulated depreciation, and asset book value.
2. Speedway prepares financial statements using the depreciation method that reports the highest net income in the early years of asset use. For income-tax purposes, the company uses the depreciation method that minimizes income taxes in the early years. Consider the first year that Speedway uses the truck. Identify the depreciation methods that meet the general manager’s objectives, assuming the income tax authorities permit the use of any of the methods.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sandburg Co., Inc. began operations on January 1 of the current year. After five months of losses, management expects to earn a profit during June. However, Allan Johnson, the president and founder, was disappointed by the June income statement.
Sandburg Company
Income Statement
For the Month Ended June 30
|
Sales
|
445,000
|
|
|
Less: Operating Expenses:
|
|
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
65,000
|
|
|
Raw materials purchased
|
165,000
|
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
85,000
|
|
|
Selling and admin expenses
|
142,000
|
457,000
|
|
Net Operating Loss
|
|
$(12,000)
|
Johnson was also concerned because the income statement was prepared by Stuart Smiley, a newly hired accounting assistant who had never worked for a manufacturing company before. His only experience was as an accounting clerk for a Las Vegas casino where reconciled poker chip accounts.
The former controller, Susan King, had resigned in May. Johnson recalled from his managerial accounting course, which he had taken over 20 years ago, that there was a way to calculate the cost of goods manufactured and the cost of goods sold based on cost data and inventory balances. He asked Stuart for inventory information, which looked liked this:
Inventory Balances
|
|
June 1
|
June 30
|
|
Raw Materials
|
9,000
|
14,000
|
|
Work in Process
|
16,000
|
21,000
|
|
Finished Goods
|
40,000
|
60,000
|
Johnson got out his managerial accounting textbook and stayed up all night trying to figure out whether Sandburg Co. was losing money or not. He isn’t sure how to do it, so he asks you for the following:
1. Prepare a schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured for June.
2. Prepare a new income statement.
3. Explain to Johnson why your income statement is different from Stuart’s.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lone Star Express is a luxury passenger carrier in Texas. All seats are first class, and the following data are available:
|
Number of seats per passenger train car
|
80
|
|
Average loan factor (percentage of seats filled)
|
70%
|
|
Average full passenger fare
|
$160
|
|
Average variable cost per passenger
|
$75
|
|
Fixed operating cost per month
|
$3,000,000
|
Questions
a. What is the break-even point in passengers and revenues per month?
b. What is the break-even point in number of passenger train cars per month?
c. If Lone Star Express raises its average passenger fare to $190, it is estimated that the average load factor will decrease to 60 percent. What will be the monthly break-even point in number of passenger cars?
d. (Refer to original data.) Fuel cost is a significant variable cost to any railway. If crude oil increases by $ 20 per barrel, it is estimated that variable cost per passenger will rise to $90. What will be the new break-even point in passengers and in number of passenger train cars?
e. Lone Star Express has experienced an increase in variable cost per passenger to $ 85 and an increase in total fixed cost to $ 3,400,000. The company has decided to raise the average fare to $ 195. If the tax rate is 30 percent, how many passengers per month are needed to generate an after-tax profit of $ 575,000?
f. (Use original data except as noted). Lone Star Express is considering offering a discounted fare of $ 120, which the company believes would increase the load factor to 80 percent. Only the additional seats would be sold at the discounted fare. Additional monthly advertising cost would be $ 180,000. How much pre-tax income would passengers traveling on the discounted fare provide Lone Star Express if the company has 50 passenger train cars per day, 30 days per month?
g. Lone Star Express has an opportunity to obtain a new route that would be traveled 20 times per month (i.e., 20 train cars per month). The company believes it can sell seats at $ 175 on the route, but the load factor would be only 60 percent. Fixed cost would increase by $ 250,000 per month for additional personnel, additional passenger train cars, maintenance, and so on. Variable cost per passenger would remain at $ 75.
1. Should the company obtain the route?
2. How many passenger train cars must Lone Star Express operate to earn pre-tax income of $120,000 per month on this route?
3. If the load factor could be increased to 75 percent, how many passenger train cars must be operated to earn pre-tax income of $ 120,000 per month on this route?
4. What qualitative factors should be considered by Lone Star Express in making its decision about acquiring this route?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Breakfasttime Cereal Company manufactures two breakfast cereals in a joint process. Cost and quantity information is as follows:
|
Joint Cost
|
Cereal Quantity at
|
Split-Off Point
|
Sales Price per Kilogram
|
|
$30,000
|
Yummies
|
12,000 kilograms
|
$2.00
|
| |
Crummies
|
8,000 kilograms
|
$2.50
|
Required:
Use the physical-units method to allocate the company’s joint production cost between Yummies and Crummies.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cookie Creations is gearing up for the winter holiday season. During the month of December 2011, the following transactions occur.
Dec. 1 Natalie hires an assistant at an hourly wage of $8 to help with cookie making and some administrative duties.
5 Natalie teaches the class that was booked on November 25. The balance outstanding is received.
8 Cookie Creations receives a check for the amount due from the neighborhood school for the class given on November 30.
9 Cookie Creations receives $750 in advance from the local school board for five classes that the company will give during December and January.
15 Pays the cell phone invoice outstanding at November 30.
16 Issues a check to Natalie’s brother for the amount owed for the design of the website.
19 Receives a deposit of $60 on a cookie class scheduled for early January.
23 Additional revenue earned during the month for cookie-making classes amounts to $4,000. (Natalie has not had time to account for each class individually.) $3,000 in cash has been collected and $1,000 is still outstanding. (This is in addition to the December 5 and December 9 transactions.)
23 Additional baking supplies purchased during the month for sugar, flour, and chocolate chips amount to $1,250 cash.
23 Issues a check to Natalie’s assistant for $800. Her assistant worked approximately 100 hours from the time in which she was hired until December 23.
28 Pays a dividend of $500 to the common shareholder (Natalie).
As of December 31, Cookie Creations’ year-end, the following adjusting entry data are provided.
1. A count reveals that $45 of brochures and posters were used.
2. Depreciation is recorded on the baking equipment purchased in November. The baking equipment has a useful life of 5 years. Assume that 2 months’ worth of depreciation is required.
3. Amortization (which is similar to depreciation) is recorded on the website. (Credit the Website account directly for the amount of the amortization.) The website is amortized over a useful life of 2 years and was available for use on December 1.s
4. Interest on the note payable is accrued. (Assume that 1.5 months of interest accrued during November and December.) Round to nearest dollar.
5. One month’s worth of insurance has expired.
6. Natalie is unexpectedly telephoned on December 28 to give a cookie class at the neighborhood community center on December 31. In early January Cookie Creations sends an invoice for $450 to the community center.
7. A count reveals that $1,025 of baking supplies were used.
8. A cell phone invoice is received for $75. The invoice is for services provided during the month of December and is due on January 15.
9. Because the cookie-making class occurred unexpectedly on December 28 and is for such a large group of children, Natalie’s assistant helps out. Her assistant worked 7 hours at a rate of $8 per hour.
10. An analysis of the unearned revenue account reveals that two of the five classes paid for by the local school board on December 9 still have not been taught by the end of December. The $60 deposit received on December 19 for another class also remains unearned.
Instructions
Using the information that you have gathered and the general ledger accounts that you have prepared through Chapter 3, plus the new information above, do the following.
(a) Journalize the above transactions.
(b) Post the December transactions. (Use the general ledger accounts prepared in Chapter 3.)
(c) Prepare a trial balance at December 31, 2009. (c) Totals $8,160
(d) Prepare and post adjusting journal entries for the month of December.
(e) Prepare an adjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2009.
(f) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the 2-month period ending December 31, 2009, and a classified balance sheet as of December 31, 2009.
(g) Prepare and post closing entries as of December 31, 2009.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
What are the rate of return on stockholders’ equity and the rate of return on common stockholders’ equity (rounded to the nearest one-tenth of a percent) given the following information:
|
Net Income
|
$350,000
|
|
Preferred Dividends
|
20,000
|
|
Common Stock
|
48,000
|
|
Common Stockholders’ Equity 1/1/2011
|
4,400,000
|
|
Total Stockholders’ Equity 1/1/2011
|
5,300,000
|
|
Total Stockholders’ Equity 12/31/2011
|
5,500,000
|
A. Return on Stockholders’ Equity: 6.5 %; Return on Common Stockholders’ Equity: 7.6%
B. Return on Stockholders’ Equity: 8.1 %; Return on Common Stockholders’ Equity: 9.2%
C. Return on Stockholders’ Equity: 7.8 %; Return on Common Stockholders’ Equity: 8.9%
D. Return on Stockholders’ Equity: 5.6 %; Return on Common Stockholders’ Equity: 6.7%
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Materials and labor variances analyses
Accelerator, Inc. manufactures a fuel additive, Stomp, that has a stable selling price of $44 per drum. The company has been producing and selling 80,000 drums per month.
In connection with your examination of Accelerator’s financial statements for the year ended September 30, management has asked you to review some computations made by Accelerator’s cost accountant. Your working papers disclose the following about the company’s operations:
Standard costs per drum of product manufactured:
|
Materials:
|
|
|
|
8 gallons of chemicals@$2
|
$16
|
|
|
1 empty drum @ $1/drum
|
1
|
$17
|
|
Direct labor: 1 hour @ $8/hour
|
|
$ 8
|
|
Factory Overhead
|
|
$ 6
|
|
Costs and expenses during September:
|
|
|
Stomp: 600,000 gallons purchased at a cost of $1,140,000; 645,000 gallons used.
Empty drums: 94,000 purchased at a cost of $94,000; 80,000 drums used.
Direct labor: 81,000 hours worked at a cost of $654,480.
Factory overhead: $768,000.
Required:
Calculate the following variances for September
1. Materials quantity variance.
2. Materials purchase price variance.
3. Labor efficiency variance.
4. Labor rate variance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Materials and labor variance analyses
The standard cost summary for the most popular product of Excelsior Products Company is shown as follows, together with production and cost data for the period.
Standard Cost Summary
|
Materials:
|
|
|
|
2 gallons of liquid lead@$2.00/gallon
|
$4.00
|
$10.00
|
|
2 gallons of varnish@$3.00/gallon
|
$6.00
|
|
|
Labor:
|
|
|
|
1 hour@$12.00/hour
|
12.00
|
|
|
Factory overhead:
|
|
|
|
$1.00 per direct labor hour
|
1.00
|
|
|
Total standard unit cost
|
$23.00
|
|
|
Production and Cost Summary
|
|
|
|
Units completed during the month
|
9,000
|
|
|
Ending units in process (one-fourth completed)
|
2,000
|
|
|
Gallons of liquid lead used
|
21,000
|
|
|
Gallons of varnish used
|
20,000
|
|
|
Direct labor hours worked
|
10,000
|
|
|
Cost of liquid lead used
|
41,160
|
|
|
Cost of varnish used
|
60,000
|
|
|
Cost of direct labor
|
117,000
|
|
One gallon each of liquid lead and varnish are added at the start of processing. The balance of the materials is added when the process is two-thirds complete. Labor and overhead are added evenly throughout the process.
Required:
1. Calculate equivalent production. (Be sure to refer to the standard cost summary to help determine the percentage of materials in ending work in process.)
2. Calculate materials and labor variances and indicate whether they are favorable or unfavorable.
3. Determine the cost of materials and labor in the work in process account at the end of the month.
4. Prove that all materials and labor costs have been accounted for.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Folsom Shirts, Inc., manufactures men’s sport shirts for large stores. Folsom produces a single quality shirt in lots of a dozen according to each customer’s order and attaches the store’s label.
The standard costs for a dozen shirts include the following:
|
Direct materials
|
24yards@$0.55/yard
|
$13.20
|
|
Direct labor
|
3hours@$7.35/hour
|
22.05
|
|
Factory overhead
|
3hours@$2.00/hour
|
6.00
|
|
Standard cost per dozen
|
$41.25
|
During October, Folsum worked on three orders for shirts. Job cost records for the month disclose the following:
|
Lot
|
Units in Lot
|
Materials Used
|
Hours Worked
|
|
30
|
1,000 dozen
|
24,100 yards
|
2,980
|
|
31
|
1,700 dozen
|
40,440 yards
|
5,130
|
|
32
|
1,200 dozen
|
28,825 yards
|
2,890
|
The following information is also available:
a. Folsom purchased 95,000 yards of materials during October at a cost of $53,200. The materials price variance is recorded when goods are purchased, and all inventories are carried at standard cost.
b. Direct labor incurred amounted to $81,400 during October. According to payroll records, production employees were paid $7.40 per hour.
c. Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. Factory overhead totaling $22,800 was incurred during October.
d. A total of $288,000 was budgeted for overhead for the year, based on estimated production at the plant’s normal capacity of 48,000 dozen shirts per year. Overhead is 40% fixed and 60% variable at this level of production.
e. There was no work in process at October 1. During October, Lots 30 and 31 were completed, and all materials were issued for Lot 32, which was 80% completed as to labor and overhead.
Required:
1. Prepare a schedule computing the October standard cost of Lots 30, 31, and 32.
2. Prepare a schedule computing the materials price variance for October and indicate whether it is favorable or unfavorable.
3. For each lot produced during October, prepare schedules computing the following (indicate whether favorable or unfavorable):
a. Materials quantity variance in yards.
b. Labor efficiency variance in hours. (Hint: Don’t forget the percentage of completion.)
c. Labor rate variance in dollars.
4. Prepare a schedule computing the total controllable and volume overhead variances for October and indicate whether they are favorable or unfavorable.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cole Laboratories makes and sells a lawn fertilizer called Fastgro. The company has developed standard costs for one bag of Fastgro as follows:
| |
Standard Quantity
|
Standard Cost per bag
|
|
Direct material
|
20 pounds
|
$8.00
|
|
Direct labor
|
0.1 hours
|
$1.10
|
|
Variable overhead
|
0.1 hours
|
$0.40
|
The company had no beginning inventories of any kind on January 1. Variable overhead is applied to production on the basis of standard direct-labor hours. During January, the company recorded the following activity:
– Production of Fastgro: 4,000 bags
– Direct materials purchased: 85,000 pounds at a cost of $32,300
– Direct-labor worked: 390 hours at a cost of $4,875
– Variable overhead incurred: $1,475
– Inventory of direct materials on January 31: 3,000 pounds
The materials price variance for January is
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Coles Company, Inc. makes and sells a single product, Product R. Three yards of Material K are needed to make one unit of Product R. Budgeted production of Product R for the next five months is as follows:
|
August
|
14,000 units
|
|
September
|
14,500 units
|
|
October
|
15,500 units
|
|
November
|
12,600 units
|
|
December
|
11,900 units
|
The company wants to maintain monthly ending inventories of Material K equal to 20% of the following month’s production needs. On July 31, this requirement wasn’t met because only 2,500 yards of Material K were on hand. The cost of Material K is $0.85 per yard. The company wants to prepare a Direct Materials Purchase Budget for the rest of the year.
The total cost of Material K to be purchased in August is
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyses; Review of chapter
On May 1, Magnus Company began the manufacture of a new mechanical device known as Triple X. The company installed a standard cost system in accounting for manufacturing costs. The standard costs for a unit of Triple X follow:
Raw materials (5lbs @ $1/lb) 5.00
Direct labor (1 hr @ $8/hr) 8.00
Overhead (50% of direct labor costs) 4.00
17.00
The following data came from Magnus’ records for the month of May:
| |
Units
|
|
Actual production
|
4,000
|
|
Units sold
|
2,500
|
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Sales
|
|
50,000
|
|
Purchases (22,000 pounds)
|
23,300
|
|
|
Materials price variance
|
1,300
|
|
|
Materials quantity variance
|
1,000
|
|
|
Direct labor rate variane
|
770
|
|
|
Direct labor efficiency variance
|
|
1,200
|
|
Manufacturing overhead total variance
|
500
|
|
The amount shown above for the materials price variance is applicable to raw materials purchased during May.
Required:
Compute each of the following items for Matrix for the month of May. Show computations in good form.
1. Standard quantity of raw materials allowed (in pounds) for actual production.
2. Actual quantity of raw materials used (in pounds). (Hint: Be sure to consider the materials quantity variance.)
3. Standard direct labor hours allowed.
4. Actual direct labor hours worked.
5. Actual direct labor rate. (Hint: Be sure to consider the direct labor rate variance.)
6. Actual total overhead
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Operating data for Gallup Corporation are presented below.
| |
2012
|
2011
|
|
Sales
|
750,000
|
600,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
465,000
|
390,000
|
|
Selling expenses
|
120,000
|
72,000
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
60,000
|
54,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
33,000
|
24,000
|
|
Net income
|
$72,000
|
$60,000
|
Complete the schedule showing a vertical analysis for 2012 and 2011. (List amounts from largest to smallest e.g. 10, 5, 3, 2. Round percentages to 1 decimal place, e.g. 10.5. Enter all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fowler Company manufactures a single product. Annual production costs incurred in the manufacturing process are shown below for two levels of production.
|
Costs Incurred
|
|
|
|
|
|
Production in Units
|
5,000
|
10,000
|
|
|
| |
Total Cost
|
Cost Unit
|
Total Costs
|
Cost Unit
|
|
Direct materials
|
8,250
|
1.65
|
16,500
|
1.65
|
|
Direct labor
|
9,400
|
1.88
|
18,800
|
1.88
|
|
Utilities
|
1,400
|
0.28
|
2,300
|
0.23
|
|
Rent
|
4,000
|
0.80
|
4,000
|
0.40
|
|
Maintenance
|
800
|
0.16
|
1,200
|
0.12
|
|
Supervisory salaries
|
1,000
|
0.20
|
1,000
|
0.10
|
Instructions
(a) Define the terms variable costs, fixed costs, and mixed costs.
(b) Classify each cost above as either variable, fixed, or mixed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available for year 1 for Dancer Components:
|
Revenues (300,000)
|
5,700,000
|
|
Manufacturing costs
|
|
|
Materials
|
336,000
|
|
Variable cash costs
|
284,800
|
|
Fixed cash costs
|
655,200
|
|
Depreciation (fixed)
|
1,998,000
|
|
Marketing and administrative
|
|
Marketing (variable, cash)
|
844,800
|
|
Marketing depreciation
|
299,200
|
|
Administrative (fixed, cash)
|
1,018,400
|
|
Administrative depreciation
|
149,600
|
|
Total costs
|
5,586,000
|
|
Operating profits
|
114,000
|
All depreciation charges are fixed and are expected to remain the same for year 2. Sales volume is expected to increase by 18 percent, but prices are expected to fall by 5 percent.
Material costs per unit are expected to decrease by 8 percent. Other unit variable manufacturing costs are expected to decrease by 2 percent per unit. Fixed manufacturing costs are expected to increase by 5 percent.
Variable marketing costs will change with volume. Administrative cash costs are expected to increase by 10 percent. Inventories are kept at zero. Dancer operates on a cash basis.
Required
Prepare a budgeted income statement for year 2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lehne Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
|
Selling price
|
$ 125
|
|
Units in beginning inventory
|
600
|
|
Units produced
|
3000
|
|
Units sold
|
3500
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
100
|
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$ 15
|
|
Direct labor
|
$ 50
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$ 8
|
|
Variable selling and admin
|
$ 12
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$ 75,000
|
|
Fixed selling and admin
|
$ 20,000
|
The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales in units vary from month to month. The company’s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.
Required:
a. What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?
b. What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?
c. Prepare an income statement for the month using the variable costing method.
d. Prepare an income statement for the month using the absorption costing method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A cement manufacturer has supplied the following data:
|
Tons of cement produced and sold
|
220,000
|
|
Sales revenue
|
$924,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing expense
|
$297,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing expense
|
$280,000
|
|
Variable selling and admin expense
|
$165,000
|
|
Fixed selling and admin expense
|
$82,000
|
|
Net operating income
|
$100,000
|
Required:
a. Calculate the company’s unit contribution margin.
b. Calculate the company’s unit contribution ratio.
c. If the company increases its unit sales volume by 5% without increasing its fixed expenses, what would the company’s net operating income be?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lindon Company uses 5,000 units of Part X each year as a component in the assembly of one of its products. The company is presently producing Part X internally at a total cost of $80,000 as follows:
|
Direct Materials
|
$18,000
|
|
Direct Labor
|
20,000
|
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead
|
12,000
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead
|
30,000
|
|
Total Costs
|
80,000
|
An outside supplier has offered to provide Part X at a price of $13 per unit. If Lindon stops producing the part internally, one-third of the manufacturing overhead would be eliminated.
Required:
Prepare a make or buy analysis showing the annual advantage or disadvantage of accepting the outside supplier’s offer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Holton Company makes three products in a single facility. Data concerning these products follow:
|
Selling price per unit
|
76.10
|
72.70
|
77.10
|
|
Direct materials
|
33.10
|
40.60
|
46.40
|
|
Direct labor
|
24.00
|
13.10
|
7.20
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
4.60
|
4.40
|
3.30
|
|
Variable selling cost per unit
|
1.60
|
3.20
|
2.00
|
|
Mixing minutes per unit
|
2.80
|
1.90
|
2.60
|
|
Monthly demand in units
|
3,000
|
1,000
|
2,000
|
The mixing machines are potentially the constraint in the production facility. A total of 14,700 minutes are available per month on these machines.
Direct labor is a variable cost in this company.
Required:
a. How many minutes of mixing machine time would be required to satisfy demand for all three products?
b. How much of each product should be produced to maximize net operating income? (Round off to the nearest whole unit.)
c. Up to how much should the company be willing to pay for one additional hour of mixing machine time if the company has made the best use of the existing mixing machine capacity? (Round off to the nearest whole cent.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Luft Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system.
Operating data for the first processing department for the month of June appear below:
| |
Units
|
Percent Complete with respect to Conversion
|
|
Beginning work in process inventory
|
11,000
|
90%
|
|
Started in production during June
|
58,000
|
|
|
Ending work in process inventory
|
17,000
|
10%
|
According to the company’s records, the conversion cost in beginning work in process inventory was $79,893 at the beginning of June. Additional conversion costs of $343,830 were incurred in the department during the month.
What was the cost per equivalent unit for conversion costs for the month? (Round off to three decimal places.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A sporting goods manufacturer buys wood as a direct material for baseball bats. The Forming Department processes the baseball bats, and the bats are then transferred to the Finishing Department where a sealant is applied. There was no beginning work in process inventory in the Forming Department in May. The Forming Department began manufacturing 15,000 Casey Slugger baseball bats during May. Costs for the Forming Department for the month of May were as follows:
|
Direct materials
|
40,500
|
|
Conversion costs
|
27,025
|
A total of 10,000 bats were completed and transferred to the Finishing Department during May. The ending work in process inventory was 100% complete with respect to direct materials and 35% complete with respect to conversion costs. The company uses the weighted-average method of process costing.
The cost of the units transferred to the Finishing Department during May was: (Do not round your intermediate calculations.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
McMullen Co. manufactures automatic door openers. The company uses 15,000 electronic hinges per year as a component in the assembly of the openers. You have been engaged by McMullen to assist with an evaluation of whether the company should continue producing the hinges or purchase them from an outside vendor. The Accounting Department provided the following detail regarding the annual cost to produce electronic hinges:
|
Direct materials
|
54,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
60,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
36,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
90,000
|
|
Total costs
|
240,000
|
The Procurement Department provided the following supplier pricing:
Supplier A price per hinge $11.00
Supplier B price per hinge $10.75
Supplier C price per hinge $10.50
The supplier pricing was obtained in response to a formal request for proposal (RFP).
Procurement has determined these suppliers meet McMullen’s technical specifications and quality requirements. If McMullen stops producing the part internally, 10% of the manufacturing overhead would be eliminated.
Required:
Prepare a make-or-buy analysis showing the annual advantage or disadvantage of accepting an outside supplier’s offer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Iacollia Company makes two products from a common input. Joint processing costs up to the split-off point total $47,600 a year. The company allocates these costs to the joint products on the basis of their total sales values at the split-off point. Each product may be sold at the split-off point or processed further. Data concerning these products appear below:
|
|
Product X
|
Product Y
|
Total
|
|
Allocated joint processing costs
|
23,800
|
23,800
|
47,600
|
|
Sales value at split-off point
|
34,000
|
34,000
|
68,000
|
|
Costs of further processing
|
20,900
|
21,800
|
42,700
|
|
Sales value after further processing
|
53,600
|
60,100
|
113,700
|
Required:
a. What is the net monetary advantage (disadvantage) of processing Product X beyond the split-off point?
b. What is the net monetary advantage (disadvantage) of processing Product Y beyond the split-off point?
c. What is the minimum amount the company should accept for Product X if it is to be sold at the split-off point?
d. What is the minimum amount the company should accept for Product Y if it is to be sold at the split-off point?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transaction Analysis and Statement Preparation.
The transactions that follow relate to Burton Enterprises for March 20X1, the company’s first month of activity.
3/1: Joanne Burton, the owner invested $20,000 into the business.
3/4: Performed $2,400 of services on account.
3/7: Acquired a small parcel of land by paying $6,000 cash.
3/12: Received $700 from a client, who was billed previously on March 4.
3/15: Paid $800 to the Journal Herald for advertising expense.
3/18: Acquired $9,000 of equipment from Park Central Outfitters by paying $7,000 down and agreeing to remit the balance owed within the next 2 weeks, (Accounts Payable).
3/22: Received $300 cash from clients for services.
3/24: Paid $1,500 on account to Park Central Outfitters in partial settlement of the balance due from the transaction on March 18.
3/28: Rented a car from United Car Rental for use on March 28. Total charges amounted to $75, with United billing Burton for the amount due.
3/31: Paid $900 for March wages.
3/31: Processed a $600 cash withdrawal from the business for Joanne Burton.
Instructions
a. Determine the impact of each of the preceding transactions onBurton’s assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity. See exhibit 1.5. Use the following format:
Assets = Liabilities + Owner’s Equity
Cash, Accounts Receivable, Land, Equipment Accounts Payable (+)Investments (+) Revenues (-) Withdrawals (-) Expenses
a. Record each transaction on a separate line. Calculate balances only after the last transaction has been recorded.
b. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity, and a balance sheet,
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Basic Transaction Processing.
On November 1 of the current year, Richard Parker established a sole proprietorship. The following transactions occurred during the month:
1: Parker invested $19,000 into the business.
2: Paid $9,000 to acquire a used minivan.
3: Purchased $1,800 of office furniture on account.
4: Performed $2,100 of consulting services on account.
5: Paid $300 of repair expenses.
6: Received $800 from clients who were previously billed in item 4.
7: Paid $500 on account to the supplier of office furniture in item 3.
8: Received a $150 electric bill, to be paid next month.
9: Parker withdrew $600 from the business.
10: Received $250 in cash from clients for consulting services rendered.
Instructions
a. Arrange the following asset, liability, and owner’s equity elements of the accounting equation: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Office Furniture, Van, Accounts Payable, Investments/Withdrawals, and Revenues/Expenses.
b. Record each transaction on a separate line. After all transactions have been recorded, compute the balance in each of the preceding items.
c. Answer the following questions for Parker.
(1) How much does the company owe to its creditors at month-end? On which financial statement(s) would this information be found?
(2) Did the company have a “good” month from an accounting viewpoint? Briefly explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Balance Sheet Preparation.
The following data relate to Preston Company as of December 31, 19XX:
|
Building
|
44,000
|
Accounts Receivable
|
24,000
|
|
Cash
|
17,000
|
Loan Payable
|
30,000
|
|
J.Preston, Owners Equity
|
65,000
|
Land
|
21,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
?
|
|
|
Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 19XX.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following selected balances were extracted from the accounting records of Rossi Enterprises on December 31, 20X3:
|
Accounts Payable
|
3,200
|
Interest Expense
|
2,500
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
14,800
|
Land
|
18,000
|
|
Auto Expense
|
1,900
|
Loan Payable
|
40,000
|
|
Building
|
30,000
|
Tax Expense
|
3,300
|
|
Cash
|
7,400
|
Utilities Expense
|
4,100
|
|
Fee Revenue
|
56,900
|
Wage Expense
|
37,500
|
a. Determine Rossi’s total assets as of December 31.
b. Determine the company’s total liabilities as of December 31.
c. Compute 20X3 net income or loss.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lee Adkins is a portrait artist. The following schedule represents Lee’s combined chart of accounts and trial balance as of May 31.
|
Account number
|
Account name
|
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
110
|
Cash
|
$ 2,700
|
|
|
120
|
Accounts Receivable
|
12,100
|
|
|
130
|
Equipment and Supplies
|
2,800
|
|
|
140
|
Studio
|
45,000
|
|
|
210
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
$2,600
|
|
310
|
Lee Adkins, Owners Equity
|
|
57,400
|
|
320
|
Lee Adkins, Drawing
|
30,000
|
|
|
410
|
Revenue
|
|
39,000
|
|
510
|
Advertising Expense
|
2,300
|
|
|
520
|
Salaries Expense
|
2,100
|
|
|
540
|
Utilities Expense
|
2,000
|
$99,000
|
The general ledger also revealed account no. 530, Legal and Accounting Expense. The following transactions occurred during June:
6/2: Collected $7,500 on account from customers.
6/7: Sold 25% of the equipment and supplies to a young artist for $700 for cash 6/10: Received a $500 bill from the accountant for preparing last quarter’s financial statements.
6/15: Paid $2,100 to creditors on account.
6/27: Adkins withdrew $1,000 cash for personal use.
6/30: Billed a customer $3,000 for a portrait painted this month.
a. Record the necessary journal entries for June on page 2 of the company’s general journal.
b. Open running balance ledger “T” accounts by entering account titles, account num¬bers, and May 31 balances.
c. Post the journal entries to the “T” accounts.
d. Prepare a trial balance as of June 30.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computer Superstores, Inc., has a strong belief in using highly decentralized management. You are the new manager of the company’s store in the Mall of America.
You know much about how to buy, how to display, how to sell, and how to reduce shoplifting. You know little about accounting and finance, however. Top management is convinced that training for higher management should include the active participation of store managers in the budgeting process.
You have been asked to prepare a complete master budget for your store for June, July, and August. You are responsible for its actual full preparation. All accounting is done centrally, so you have no expert help on the premises. In addition, tomorrow the branch manager and the assistant controller will be here to examine your work; at that time, they will assist you in formulating the final budget document. The idea is to have you prepare the budget a few times so that you gain more confidence about accounting matters.
You want to make a favorable impression on your superiors, so you gather the following data as of May 31, 20X5:
|
Cash
|
29,000
|
Recent and Projected Sales
|
|
Inventory
|
420,000
|
April
|
300,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
369,000
|
May
|
350,000
|
|
Net furniture
|
168,000
|
June
|
700,000
|
|
Total assets
|
986,000
|
July
|
400,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
475,000
|
August
|
400,000
|
|
Owners’ equity
|
511,000
|
September
|
300,000
|
Credit sales are 90% of total sales. Credit accounts are collected 80% in the month following the sale and 20% in the following month.
Assume that bad debts are negligible and can be ignored. The accounts receivable on May 31 are the results of the credit sales for April and May:
(.20 x .90 x $300,000) + (1.0 x .90 x $350,000) = $369,000.
The average gross profit on sales is 40%. ; cost of goods sold is 60% The policy is to acquire enough inventory each month to equal the following month’s projected cost of goods sold. All purchases are paid for in the month following purchase.
Salaries, wages, and commissions average 20% of sales; all other variable expenses are 4% of sales.
Fixed expenses for rent, property taxes, and miscellaneous payroll and other items are $55,000 monthly. Assume that these variable and fixed expenses require cash disbursements each month. Depreciation is $2,500 monthly.
In June, $55,000 is going to be disbursed of $25,000 is to be maintained. Also assume that all borrowings are effective at the beginning of the month and all repayments are made at the end of the month of repayment. Interest is paid only at the time of repaying principal. The interest rate is 10% per annum; round interest computations to the nearest ten dollars. All loans and repayments of principal must be made in multiples of a thousand dollars.
Requirements:
1. Prepare a budgeted income statement for the coming quarter, a budgeted statement of monthly cash receipts and disbursements (for each of the next three months), and a budgeted balance sheet for August 31, 20X5. All operations are evaluated on a beforeincome- tax basis, so income taxes may be ignored here.
2. Explain why there is a need for a bank loan and what operating sources supply cash for repaying the bank loan.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transaction Analysis and Statement Preparation.
The transactions that follow relate to Burton Enterprises for March 20X1, the company’s first month of activity.
3/1: Joanne Burton, the owner invested $20,000 into the business.
3/4: Performed $2,400 of services on account.
3/7: Acquired a small parcel of land by paying $6,000 cash.
3/12: Received $700 from a client, who was billed previously on March 4.
3/15: Paid $800 to the Journal Herald for advertising expense.
3/18: Acquired $9,000 of equipment from Park Central Outfitters by paying $7,000 down and agreeing to remit the balance owed within the next 2 weeks, (Accounts Payable).
3/22: Received $300 cash from clients for services.
3/24: Paid $1,500 on account to Park Central Outfitters in partial settlement of the balance due from the transaction on March 18.
3/28: Rented a car from United Car Rental for use on March 28. Total charges amounted to $75, with United billing Burton for the amount due.
3/31: Paid $900 for March wages.
3/31: Processed a $600 cash withdrawal from the business for Joanne Burton.
Instructions
a. Determine the impact of each of the preceding transactions onBurton’s assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity. See exhibit 1.5. Use the following format:
Assets = Liabilities + Owner’s Equity
Cash, Accounts Receivable, Land, Equipment Accounts Payable (+)Investments (+) Revenues (-) Withdrawals (-) Expenses
a. Record each transaction on a separate line. Calculate balances only after the last transaction has been recorded.
b. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity, and a balance sheet,
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Indiana Corporation produces a single product that it sells for $9 per unit. During the first year of operations, 100,000 units were produced, and 90,000 units were sold.
Manufacturing costs and selling and administrative expenses for the year were as follows:
|
Fixed Costs
|
Variable Costs
|
|
|
Raw materials
|
|
$1.75 per unit produced
|
|
Direct labor
|
|
$1.25 per unit produced
|
|
Factory Overhead
|
$100,000
|
$0.50 per unit produced
|
|
Selling and administrative
|
$70,000
|
$0.60 per unit sold
|
What was Indiana Corporation’s net operating income for the year using variable costing?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lifsey Wedding Fantasy Company makes very elaborate wedding cakes to order. The owner of the company has provided the following data concerning the activity rates in its activity-based costing system:
|
Activity Cost Pools
|
Activity Rate
|
|
Size-related
|
$0.94 per guest
|
|
Complexity-related
|
$31.62 per tier
|
|
Order-related
|
$55.79 per order
|
The measure of activity for the size-related activity cost pool is the number of planned guests at the wedding reception. The greater the number of guests, the larger the cake.
The measure of complexity is the number of tiers in the cake. The activity measure for the order-related cost pool is the number of orders. (Each wedding involves one order.) The activity rates include the costs of raw ingredients, such as flour, sugar, eggs, and shortening. The activity rates don’t include the costs of purchased decorations, such as miniature statues and wedding bells, which are accounted for separately.
Data concerning two recent orders are listed here:
|
Pyburn
|
Smith
|
|
|
Wedding
|
Wedding
|
|
|
Number of reception guests
|
72
|
189
|
|
Number of tiers on the cake
|
4
|
5
|
|
Cost of purchased decorations for cake
|
$29.92
|
$68.75
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gargymal Company would like to estimate the variable and fixed components of its electrical costs and has compiled the following data for the past five months of operations.
|
Machine
|
|
|
|
Hours
|
|
Electrical Cost
|
|
August
|
1,000
|
$1,620
|
|
September
|
900
|
$1,510
|
|
October
|
1,500
|
$1,870
|
|
November
|
2,000
|
$1,950
|
|
December
|
1,300
|
$1,730
|
Using the high-low method of analysis, the estimated fixed cost per month for electricity is closest to which of the following?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recognition of concepts. Ron Carroll operates a small company that books enter – tainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company’s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) pre paid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing.
a. Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy
b. Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30
c. Repairs to the firm’s copy machine, incurred and paid in June
d. An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention
e. The payment in part (d) from the client’s point of view
f. Interest owed on the company’s bank loan, to be paid in early July
g. The bank loan payable in part (f)
h. Office supplies on hand at year-end
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Understanding the closing process. Examine the following list of accounts:
|
Interest Payable
|
Accumulated Depreciation: Equipment
|
|
Alex Kenzy, Drawing
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
Service Revenue
|
Cash
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
Interest Expense
|
|
Which of the preceding accounts
a. appear on a post-closing trial balance?
b. are commonly known as temporary, or nominal, accounts?
c. generate a debit to Income Summary in the closing process?
d. are closed to the capital account in the closing process?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Fixation Enterprises:
The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one third of this amount had been earned.
Fixation provided $2,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31.
Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,650.
The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period.
The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property Management. The payment was for 6 months’ rent of Fixation’s headquarters, beginning on November 1.
Fixation’s accounting year ends on December 31.
Instructions
Analyze the five preceding cases individually and determine the following:
a. The type of adjusting entry needed at year-end (Use the following codes: A, adjustment of a prepaid expense; B, adjustment of an unearned revenue; C, adjustment to record an accrued expense; or D, adjustment to record an accrued revenue.)
b. The year-end journal entry to adjust the accounts
c. The income statement impact of each adjustment (e.g., increases total revenues by $500)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting entries. You have been retained to examine the records of Kathy’s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following:
· On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $2,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31.
· Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31.
· All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned
· Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $75,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31.
- Depreciation on the school’s van was $3,000 for the year.
· On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $21,000. Kathy wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Pre paid Rent, a new account.
· Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday.
· Kathy’s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Pre paid Insurance:
|
Date Paid
|
Policy No.
|
Length of Policy
|
Amount
|
|
Feb. 1, 20X2
|
1033MCM19
|
1 year
|
$540
|
|
Jan. 1, 20X3
|
7952789HP
|
1 year
|
912
|
|
Aug. 1, 20X3
|
XQ943675ST
|
2 years
|
840
|
Instructions
The center’s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allowance method: estimation and balance sheet disclosure. The following pre- – adjusted information for the Maverick Company is available on December 31:
Accounts receivable $107,000
Allowance for uncollectible accounts 5,400 (credit balance)
Credit sales 250,000
a. Prepare the journal entries necessary to record Maverick’s uncollectible accounts expense under each of the following assumptions:
(1) Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 5% of Credit Sales.
(2) Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 14% of Accounts Receivable.
b. How would Maverick’s Accounts Receivable appear on the December 31 balance sheet under assumption (1) of part (a)?
c. How would Maverick’s Accounts Receivable appear on the December 31 balance sheet under assumption (2) of part (a)?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct write-off and allowance methods: matching approach. The December 31, 20X2, year-end trial balance of Targa Company revealed the following account information:
|
Debits
|
Credits
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
$252,000
|
|
Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts
|
$ 3,000
|
|
Sales
|
855,000
|
Instructions
a. Determine the adjusting entry for bad debts under each of the following condi tions:
(1) An aging schedule indicates that $12,420 of accounts receivable will be uncollectible.
(2) Uncollectible accounts are estimated at 2% of net sales.
b. On January 19, 20X3, Targa learned that House Company, a customer, had declared bankruptcy. Present the proper entry to write off House’s $950 balance using the allowance method.
c. Repeat the requirement in part (b), using the direct write-off method.
d. In light of the House bankruptcy, examine the allowance and direct write-off methods in terms of their ability to properly match revenues and expenses.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allowance method: analysis of receivables. At a January 20X2 meeting, the president of Sonic Sound directed the sales staff “to move some product this year.” The president noted that the credit evaluation department was being disbanded be cause it had restricted the company’s growth. Credit decisions would now be made by the sales staff.
By the end of the year, Sonic had generated significant gains in sales, and the president was very pleased. The following data were provided by the accounting department:
| |
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Sales
|
$23,987,000
|
$8,423,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable, 12/31
|
12,444,000
|
1,056,000
|
|
Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31
|
?
|
23,000 cr.
|
The $12,444,000 receivables balance was aged as follows:
|
Age of Receivable
|
Amount
|
Percentage of Accounts Expected to Be Collected
|
|
Under 31 days
|
$5,321,000
|
99%
|
|
31260 days
|
3,890,000
|
90
|
|
61290 days
|
1,067,000
|
80
|
|
Over 90 days
|
2,166,000
|
60
|
Assume that no accounts were written off during 20X2.
Instructions
a. Estimate the amount of Uncollectible Accounts as of December 31, 20X2.
b. What is the company’s Uncollectible Accounts expense for 20X2?
c. Compute the net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at the end of 20X1 and 20X2.
d. Compute the net realizable value at the end of 20X1 and 20X2 as a percentage of respective year-end receivables balances. Analyze your findings and comment on the president’s decision to close the credit evaluation department.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of transactions, balance sheet, income statement, and statement of owners equity completed.
Daniel Laird owns and operates an architectural firm called Laird Design. The following amounts summarize the financial position of his business an April 30 2009: As of April 30th, Laird had Cash of 1,720. He has 3,240 in accounts receivable, $24,100 in land. $5,400 in accounts payable, and Daniels capital is $23,660 Considering this info log below…
During May 2009, the following events occurred:
A- Laird received $12,000 as a gift and deposited the cash in the business bank account.
B- Paid off the beginning balance of Accounts Payable.
C- Performed services for a client and received cash of $1,100.
D- Collected cash from a customer on account, $750.00
E- Purchased supplies on account, $720.00
F- Consulted on the interior design of a major office building and billed the client for services performed, $5,000.
G- Invested personal cash of $1,700 in the business.
H- Paid Offices rent, $1,860
I- Sold supplies at cost to another interior designed for $80 cash
J- Withdrew cash of $4,000 for personal use.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of prepaid account balance.
The following information relates to Action Sign Company for 20X2:
|
Insurance expense
|
4,350
|
|
Prepaid insurance, December 31, 20X2
|
1,900
|
|
Cash outlays for insurance during 20X2
|
6,200
|
Compute the balance in the Prepaid Insurance account on January 1, 20X2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Week Two Exercise Assignment – Revenue and Expenses
1. Recognition of concepts.
Ron Carroll operates a small company that books enter tainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company’s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) pre paid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing.
a. Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy
b. Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30
c. Repairs to the firm’s copy machine, incurred and paid in June
d. An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention
e. The payment in part (d) from the client’s point of view
f. Interest owed on the company’s bank loan, to be paid in early July
g. The bank loan payable in part (f)
h. Office supplies on hand at year-end
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected transactions for D. Reyes, an interior decorator in her first month of business, are as follows.
Jan. 2 Invested $10,000 cash in business.
3 Purchased used car for $4,000 cash for use in business.
9 Purchased supplies on account for $500.
11 Billed customers $1,800 for services performed.
16 Paid $200 cash for advertising.
20 Received $700 cash from customers billed on January 11.
23 Paid creditor $300 cash on balance owed.
28 Withdrew $1,000 cash for personal use of owner.
Instructions
For each transaction indicate the following.
(a) The basic type of account debited and credited (asset, liability, owner’s equity).
(b) The specific account debited and credited (cash, rent expense, service revenue, etc.).
(c) Whether the specific account is increased or decreased.
(d) The normal balance of the specific account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Depreciation computations: change in estimate.
Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.
Instructions
a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of output, and double-declining-balance.
b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 20 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company’s depreciation expense for 20X5.
c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lee Choi opened Choi’s Window Washing, Inc. on July 1, 2008. During July the following transactions were completed.
July 1 Issued $12,000 of common stock for $12,000 cash.
1 Purchased used truck for $6,000, paying $3,000 cash and the balance on account.
3 Purchased cleaning supplies for $1,300 on account.
5 Paid $2,400 cash on one-year insurance policy effective July 1.
12 Billed customers $2,500 for cleaning services.
18 Paid $1,000 cash on amount owed on truck and $800 on amount owed on cleaning supplies.
20 Paid $1,200 cash for employee salaries.
21 Collected $1,400 cash from customers billed on July 12.
25 Billed customers $5,000 for cleaning services.
31 Paid gas and oil for month on truck $200.
31 Declared and paid $900 cash dividend.
The chart of accounts for Choi’s Window Washing contains the following accounts:
No. 101 Cash, No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 128 Cleaning Supplies, No. 130 Prepaid Insurance, No. 157 Equipment, No. 158 Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment, No. 201 Accounts Payable, No. 212 Salaries Payable, No. 311 Common Stock, No. 320 Retained Earnings, No. 332 Dividends, No. 350 Income Summary, No. 400 Service Revenue, No. 633 Gas & Oil Expense ,No. 634 Cleaning Supplies Expense, No. 711 Depreciation Expense, No. 722 Insurance Expense, and No. 726 Salaries Expense.
Instructions
(a) Journalize and post the July transactions. Use page J1 for the journal and the three column form of account.
(b) Prepare a trial balance at July 31 on a worksheet.
(c) Enter the following adjustments on the worksheet and complete the worksheet.
(1) Services provided but unbilled and uncollected at July 31 were $1,500.
(2) Depreciation on equipment for the month was $300.
(3) One-twelfth of the insurance expired.
(4) An inventory count shows $400 of cleaning supplies on hand at July 31.
(5) Accrued but unpaid employee salaries were $600.
(d) Prepare the income statement and a retained earnings statement for July and a classified balance sheet at July 31.
(e) Journalize and post adjusting entries. Use page J2 for the journal.
(f) Journalize and post closing entries and complete the closing process. Use page J3 for the journal.
(g) Prepare a post-closing trial balance at July 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rachel Ray recently opened her own basket weaving studio. She sells finished baskets in addition to the raw materials needed by customers to weave baskets of their own. Rachel has put together a variety of raw material kits, each including materials at various stages of completion. Unfortunately, owing to space limitations, Rachel is unable to carry all varieties of kits originally assembled and must choose between two basic packages.
The basic introductory kit includes undyed, uncut reeds, (with dye included) for weaving one basket. This basic package costs Rachel $14 and sells for $30. The second kit, called Stage 2, includes cut reeds that have already been dyed. With this kit the customer need only soak the reeds and weave the basket. Rachel is able to produce the second kit by using the basic materials included in the first kit and adding one hour of her own time, which she values at $18 per hour. Because she is more efficient at cutting and dying reeds than her average customer, Rachel is able to make two kits of the dyed reeds, in one hour, from one kit of undyed reeds. The Stage 2 kit sells for $35.
Instructions:
Determine whether Rachel’s basket weaving shop should carry the basic introductory kit with undyed and uncut reeds o2 the Stage 2 kit with reeds already dyed and cut. Prepare an incremental analysis to support your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kava Inc. manufactures industrial components. One of its products, which is used in the construction of industrial air conditioners, is known as K65. Data concerning this product are given below:
|
Per Unit
|
|
|
Selling price
|
$180
|
|
Direct materials
|
$ 29
|
|
Direct labor
|
$ 5
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$ 4
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$ 21
|
|
Variable selling expense
|
$2
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expense
|
$ 17
|
The above per unit data are based on annual production of 4,000 units of the component.
Direct labor can be considered to be a variable cost. (Source: CMA, adapted)
The company has received a special, one-time-only order for 500 units of component K65.
There would be no variable selling expense on this special order, and the total fixed manufacturing overhead and fixed selling and administrative expenses of the company wouldn’t be affected by the order.
Assuming that Kava has excess capacity and can fill the order without cutting back on the production of any product, what is the minimum price per unit on the special order below which the company shouldn’t go?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The management of Baggerly Corporation would like to investigate the possibility of basing its predetermined overhead rate on activity at capacity. The company’s controller has provided an example to illustrate how this new system would work. In this example, the allocation base is machine hours, and the estimated amount of the allocation base for the upcoming year is 81,000 machine hours. In addition, capacity is 95,000 machine hours, and the actual level of activity for the year is 84,900 machine hours. All od the manufacturing overhead is fixed and is $6,617,700 per year. For simplicity, its assumed that this is the estimated manufacturing overhead for the year as well as the manufacturing overhead at capacity. It’s further assumed that this is also the actual amount of manufacturing overhead for the year.
If the company bases its predetermined overhead rate on capacity, by how much was manufacturing overhead underapplied or overapplied?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Keego Company is planning a $200,000 equipment investment that has an estimated five-year life with no estimated salvage value.
The company has projected the following annual cash flows for the investment:
|
Year
|
Cash Inflows
|
|
1
|
$120,000
|
|
2
|
60,000
|
|
3
|
40,000
|
|
4
|
40,000
|
|
5
|
40,000
|
|
Total
|
$300,000
|
Assuming that the cash inflows occur evenly over the year, the payback period for the investment is _______ years.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sanker Inc. has provided the following data for the month of August. There were no beginning inventories; consequently, the direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead applied listed below are all for the current month.
| |
Work In Process
|
Finished Goods
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
Total
|
|
Direct materials
|
$2,790
|
$7,680
|
$18,240
|
$28,710
|
|
Direct labor
|
9,700
|
19,200
|
45,600
|
74,500
|
|
Manufacturing overhead applied
|
5,440
|
8,000
|
18,560
|
32,000
|
|
Total
|
$17,930
|
$34,880
|
$82,400
|
$135,210
|
Manufacturing overhead for the month was overapplied by $5,000. The company allocates any underapplied or overapplied overhead among work in process, finished goods, and cost of goods sold at the end of the month on the basis of the overhead applied during the month in those accounts.
The journal entry to record the allocation of any underapplied or overapplied overhead for August would include
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Clemson Company reported the following results last year for the manufacture and
|
sale of one of its products known as a Tam.
|
|
Sales (6,500 Tams at $130 each)
|
$845,000
|
|
Variable cost of sales
|
390,000
|
|
Variable distribution costs
|
65,000
|
|
Fixed advertising expense
|
275,000
|
|
Salary of product line manager
|
25,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
145,000
|
| |
$(55,000)
|
Clemson Company is trying to determine whether to discontinue the manufacture and sale of Tams. The operating results reported above for last year are expected to continue in the foreseeable future if the product isn’t dropped. The fixed manufacturing overhead represents the costs of production facilities and equipment that the Tam product shares with other products produced by Clemson. If the Tam product were dropped, there would be no change in the fixed manufacturing costs of the company.
Assume that discontinuing the manufacture and sale of Tams will have no effect on the sale of other product lines. If the company discontinues the Tam product line, the change in annual operating income (or loss) should be a
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brittman Corporation makes three products that use the current constraint-a particular type of machine. Data concerning those products appear below:
| |
IP
|
NI
|
YD
|
|
Selling price per unit
|
$183.57
|
$207.74
|
$348.15
|
|
Variable cost per unit
|
$144.42
|
$155.04
|
$269.50
|
|
Minutes on the constraint
|
2.90
|
3.40
|
5.50
|
Assume that sufficient constraint time is available to satisfy demand for all but the least profitable product. Up to how much should the company be willing to pay to acquire more of the constrained resource?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Part N19 is used by Malouf Corporation to make one of its products. A total of 7,000 units of this part are produced and used every year. The company’s Accounting Department reports the following costs of producing the part at this level of activity:
Per Unit
Direct materials $2.20
Direct labor $8.50
Variable manufacturing overhead $1.30
Supervisor’s salary $5.80
Depreciation of special equipment $7.20
Allocated general overhead $4.60
An outside supplier has offered to make the part and sell it to the company for $24.50 each.
If this offer is accepted, the supervisor’s salary and all of the variable costs, including the direct labor, can be avoided. The special equipment used to make the part was purchased many years ago and has no salvage value or other use. The allocated general overhead represents fixed costs of the entire company, none of which would be avoided if the part were purchased instead of produced internally. In addition, the space used to make part N19 could be used to make more of one of the company’s other products, generating an additional segment margin of $25,000 per year for that product. What would be the impact on the company’s overall net operating income of buying part N19 from the outside supplier?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Income Statement
Universal Services was organized on October 1, 2012. A summary of the revenue and expense transactions for October follows:
|
Fees earned
|
800,000
|
|
Wages expense
|
270,000
|
|
Rent expense
|
60,000
|
|
Supplies expense
|
9,000
|
|
Miscellaneous expense
|
12,000
|
Prepare an income statement for the month ended October 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions; Financial Statements
Kean Dry Cleaners is owned and operated by Wally Lowman. A building and equipment are currently being rented, pending expansion to new facilities. The actual work of dry cleaning is done by another company at wholesale rates. The assets and the liabilities of the business on March 1, 2012, are as follows: Cash, $ 15,000; Accounts Receivable, $ 31,000; Supplies, $ 3,000; Land, $ 36,000; Accounts Payable, $ 13,000. Business transactions during March are summarized as follows:
a. Wally Lowman invested additional cash in the business with a deposit of $ 28,000 in the business bank account.
b. Paid $ 14,000 for the purchase of land as a future building site.
c. Received cash from cash customers for dry cleaning revenue, $ 17,000.
d. Paid rent for the month, $ 5,000.
e. Purchased supplies on account, $ 2,500.
f. Paid creditors on account, $ 12,800.
g. Charged customers for dry cleaning revenue on account, $ 34,000.
h. Received monthly invoice for dry cleaning expense for March ( to be paid on April 10), $ 13,500.
i. Paid the following: wages expense, $ 7,500; truck expense, $ 2,500; utilities expense, $ 1,300; miscellaneous expense, $ 2,700.
j. Received cash from customers on account, $ 28,000.
k. Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $ 1,900; therefore, the cost of supplies used during the month was $ 3,600.
l. Withdrew $ 8,000 cash for personal use.
Instructions
1. Determine the amount of Wally Lowman’s capital as of March 1 of the current year.
2. State the assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity as of March 1 in equation form similar to that shown in this chapter. In tabular form below the equation, indicate increases and decreases resulting from each transaction and the new balances after each transaction.
3. Prepare an income statement for March, a statement of owner’s equity for March, and a balance sheet as of March 31.
4. (Optional). Prepare a statement of cash flows for March.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions and T-accounts
The following selected transactions were completed during August of the current year:
1. Billed customers for fees earned, $ 35,700.
2. Purchased supplies on account, $ 2,000.
3. Received cash from customers on account, $ 26,150.
4. Paid creditors on account, $ 800.
Instructions:
a. Journalize the above transactions in a two- column journal, using the appropriate number to identify the transactions. Journal entry explanations may be omitted.
b. Post the entries prepared in ( a) to the following T accounts: Cash, Supplies, Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable, Fees Earned. To the left of each amount posted in the accounts, place the appropriate number to identify the transactions.
c. Assume that the unadjusted trial balance on August 31 shows a credit balance for
Accounts Receivable. Does this credit balance mean an error has occurred?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job Cost Sheet for a Service Business
Libby and Sandman, Attorneys-at-Law, provided legal representation to Williams Equipment, Inc., in a product liability suit. Twenty partner hours and 65 associate hours were worked in defending the company. The cost of each partner hour is $325, which includes partner wages plus overheard based on direct labor cost. The cost of each associate hour is $145, which also includes both wages and overhead. Other costs that can be directly identified with the job are travel ($2,800) and telephone/fax charges ($1,740).
The date Williams contracted with Libby and Sandman was May 8, and the defense was successfully completed on December 21. The engagement number is 525.
Required:
Prepare a job order cost sheet, in good form, for Williams Equipment, Inc.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a revenue budget and a labor budget for a service business
Lynn and Paul, partners in a systems consulting firm, budgeted the following professional labor hours for the year ended December 31, 2008:
|
Partners
|
4,000
|
|
Associates
|
14,000
|
|
Staff
|
22,000
|
Partners have a billing rate of $225 per hour and actually earn $110 per hour. Associates bill out at $140 per hour and earn $85 per hour. Staff has a billing rate of $95 per hour and earns $55 per hour.
Required:
1. Prepare a revenue budget
2. Prepare a professional labor budget
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Absorption costing versus direct costing
Haille Corporation has determined the following selling price and manufacturing cost per unit based on normal production of 72,000 units per year:
|
Selling price per unit
|
22
|
|
Variable cost per unit:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
4
|
|
Direct labor
|
4
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
2
|
|
Variable cost per unit:
|
10
|
|
Fixed cost per unit:
|
|
|
Fixed factory overhead per year
|
324,000
|
|
Fixed selling and administrative expense per year
|
48,000
|
|
Normal unit production per year
|
72,000
|
|
Month
|
Units Produced
|
Units Sold
|
|
October
|
6,000
|
3,000
|
|
November
|
1,000
|
4,000
|
|
December
|
8,000
|
6,000
|
October has no beginning inventories.
Required:
Prepare comparative income statements for each month under each of the following:
1. Absorption costing (include under- or overapplied overhead)
2. Variable costing
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tarbell Manufacturing Company has a maximum productive capacity of 210,000 units per year. Normal capacity is 180,000 units per year. Standard variable manufacturing costs are $10 per unit. Fixed factory overhead is $360,000 per year, Variable selling expense is $5 per unit and fixed selling expenses is $252,000 per year.
The unit sales price is $20.
The operating results for the year are as follows: sales, 150,000 units; production 160,000 units; beginning inventory, 10,000 units. All variances are written off as additions to (or deductions from) the standard cost of sales.
Required:
1. What is the break-even point expressed in dollar sales?
2. How many units must be sold to earn a net income of $100,000 per year?
3. Prepare a formal income statement for the year under the following:
a. Absorption costing (Hint: Don’t forget to compute the volume variance.)
b. Variable costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allocations using simplified costing versus activity-based costing
Devine and O’Clock, architects, have been using a simplified costing system in which all professional labor costs are included in a single direct cost category (professional labor) and all overhead costs are included in a single indirect cost pool (professional support) and allocated to jobs using professional labor hours as the allocation base. Consider two clients: Shank Products, which required 50 hours of design work for a new addition; and Sayers Markets, which required plans for a new store that took 20 hours to draw. The firm has two partners who each earn a salary of $150,000 a year and four associates who each earn $60,000 per year. Each professional has 1,500 billable hours per year. The professional support is $590,000, which consists of $350,000 of design support and $240,000 of staff support. Shank’s job required 30 hours of partner time and 20 hours of
associate time. Sayers job required 5 hours of partner time and 15 hours of associate time.
Required:
1. Prepare job cost sheets for Shank Products and Sayers Markets, using a simplified costing system with one direct and one indirect cost pool.
2. Prepare job cost sheets for the two clients; using an activity based costing system with two direct cost categories (partner labor and associate labor) and two indirect cost categories (design support and associate labor). Use professional labor dollars as the cost allocation base for design support and use professional labor hours for staff support.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job Cost Sheet for a Service Business
Libby and Sandman, Attorneys-at-Law, provided legal representation to Williams Equipment, Inc., in a product liability suit. Twenty partner hours and 65 associate hours were worked in defending the company. The cost of each partner hour is $325, which includes partner wages plus overheard based on direct labor cost. The cost of each associate hour is $145, which also includes both wages and overhead. Other costs that can be directly identified with the job are travel ($2,800) and telephone/fax charges ($1,740).
The date Williams contracted with Libby and Sandman was May 8, and the defense was successfully completed on December 21. The engagement number is 525.
Required:
Prepare a job order cost sheet, in good form, for Williams Equipment, Inc.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Issuance of stock: organization costs.
Snowbound Corporation was incorporated in July. The firm’s charter authorized the sale of 200,000 shares of $10 par-value common stock. The following transactions occurred during the year:
1-Jul Sold 45,000 shares of common stock to investors for $18 per share. Cash was collected and the shares were issued.
11-Aug Sold 20,000 shares to investors for $22 per share. Cash was collected and the shares were issued.
1-Sep Declared a cash dividend on 9/1 for $1.00 a share for shareholders on record 10/1 with payment being made on 11/1.
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries for the two stock issues.
b. Prepare journal entries for the cash dividend declaration and payment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing pro form income statements with different assumptions.
Top executive officers of Zottoli Company, a merchandising firm, are preparing the next year’s budget. The controller has provided everyone with the current year’s projected income statement.
|
Sales revenue
|
2,000,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,400,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
600,000
|
|
Selling & admin. Expenses
|
260,000
|
|
Net income
|
340,000
|
Cost of goods sold is usually 70 percent of sales revenue, and selling and administrative expenses are usually 10 percent of sales plus a fixed cost of $60,000. The president has announced that the company’s goal is to increase net income by 15 percent.
Required
a. What percentage increase in sales would enable the company to reach its goal? Support your answer with a pro forma income statement.
b. The market may become stagnant next year, and the company does not expect an increase in sales revenue. The production manager believes that an improved production procedure can cut cost of goods sold by 2 percent. What else can the company do to reach its goal? Prepare a pro forma income statement illustrating your proposal.
c. The company decides to escalate its advertising campaign to boost consumer recognition, which will increase selling and administrative expenses to $340,000. With the increased advertising, the company expects sales revenue to increase by 15 percent.
Assume that cost of goods sold remains a constant proportion of sales. Can the company reach its goal?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the payback period and unadjusted rate of return to evaluate alternative investment opportunities
Louis Gallo owns a small retail ice cream parlor. He is considering expanding the business and has identified two attractive alternatives. One involves purchasing a machine that would enable Mr. Gallo to offer frozen yogurt to customers. The machine would cost $8,100 and has an expected useful life of three years with no salvage value. Additional annual cash revenues and cash operating expenses associated with selling yogurt are expected to be $5,940 and $900, respectively.
Alternatively, Mr. Gallo could purchase for $10,080 the equipment necessary to serve captional annual cash revenues and cash operating expenses associated with selling cappuccino are expected to be $8,280 and $2,430, respectively. Income before taxes earned by the ice cream parlor is taxed at an effective rate of 20 percent.
Required.
a. Determine the payback period and unadjusted rate or return (use average investment) for each alternative.
b. Indicate which investment alternative you would recommend. Explain your choice.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Flexible Budget Planning
Luke Chou, the president of Digitech Computer Services, needs your help. He wonders about the potential effects on the firm’s net income if he changes the service rate that the firm charges its customers. The following basic data pertain to fiscal year 2012.
Standard Rate & Variable Costs:
|
Service Rate per Hour 80.00
|
|
Labor
|
40.00
|
|
Overhead
|
7.20
|
|
General, selling
|
4.30
|
|
Expected Fixed Costs:
|
|
|
Facility Repair
|
525,000
|
|
General, Selling & Admin
|
150,000
|
Required
a. Prepare the pro forma income statement that would appear in the master budget if the firm expects to provide 30,000 hours of services in 2012.
b. A marketing consultant suggests to Mr. Chou that the service rate may affect the number of service hours that the firm can achieve. According to the consultant’s analysis, if Digitech charges customers $75 per hour, the firm can achieve 38,000 hours of services. Prepare a flexible budget using the consultant’s assumption.
c. The same consultant also suggests that if the firm raises its rate to $85 per hour, the number of service hours will decline to 25,000. Prepare a flexible budget using the new assumption.
d. Evaluate the three possible outcomes you determined in Requirements a, b, and c and recommend a pricing strategy.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct-Material and Direct-Labor Variances
During May, Joliet Fabrics Corporation manufactured 500 units of a special multilayer fabric with the trade name Stylex. The following information from the Stylex production department also pertains to May.
Direct material purchased: 18,000 yards at $1.38 per yard 24,840
Direct material used: 9,500 yards at $1.38 per yard 13,110
Direct labor: 2,100 hours at $9.15 per hour 19,215
The standard prime costs for one unit of Stylex are as follows:
Direct material: 20 yards at $1.35 per yard 27
Direct labor: 4 hours at $9.00 per hour 36
Total standard prime cost per unit of output 63
Required: Compute the following variances for the month of May, indicating whether each variance is favorable or unfavorable.
1. Direct-material price variance.
2. Direct-material quantity variance.
3. Direct-labor rate variance.
4. Direct-labor efficiency variance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fundamental Accounting Principles
Pebblebrook Supply uses a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursements journal, and a general journal. The following transactions occur in the month of April.
3-Apr Purchased merchandise for $3,300 on credit from Scott, Inc., terms 3/10, n/30.
9 Issued check no. 210 to Kidman Corp. to buy store supplies for $528.
12 Sold merchandise costing $578 on credit to C. Meyers for $971, terms n/30.
17 Issued check no. 211 for $1,500 to pay off a note payable to City Bank.
20 Purchased merchandise for $3,900 on credit from LeBron, terms 3/10, n/30.
28 Issued check no. 212 to LeBron to pay the amount due for the purchase of April 20, less the discount.
29 Paid salary of $2,250 to B. Decker by issuing check no. 213.
30 Issued check no. 214 to Scott, Inc., to pay the amount due for the purchase of April 3.
Journalize the April transactions that should be recorded in the cash disbursements journal assuming the perpetual inventory system is used. (Record the transactions in the given order. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a sales budget and schedule of cash receipts
McCarty Pointers Corporation expects to begin operations on January 1, 2012; it will operate as a specialty sales company that sells laser pointers over the Internet. McCarty expects sales in January 2012 to total $200,000 and to increase 10 percent per month in February and March. All sales are on account. McCarty expects to collect 70 percent of accounts receivable in the month of sale, 20 percent in the month following the sale, and 10 percent in the second month following the sale.
Required:
a. Prepare a sales budget for the first quarter of 2012.
b. Determine the amount of sales revenue McCarty will report on the first 2012 quarterly pro forma income statement.
c. Prepare a cash receipts schedule for the first quarter of 2012.
d. Determine the amount of accounts receivable as of March 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Depreciation computations: change in estimate.
Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.
Instructions
a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of utput, and double-declining-balance.
b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 20 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company’s depreciation expense for 20X5.
c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lavender Company has decided to use a predetermined rate to assign factory overhead to production. The following predictions have been made for 2014:
Total factory overhead costs $150,000
Direct labor hours 40,000 hours
Direct labor costs $200,000
Required
a. Compute the predetermined factory overhead rate assuming Lavender uses direct labor hours as the activity base.
b. Assume that actual factory overhead was $152,500 and that Lavender applies factory overhead to Work in Process based on direct labor hours. If actual direct labor was 42,000 hours for 2014, was factory overhead overapplied or underapplied? By how much?
c. Lavender Company follows the policy of writing off any under- or overapplied factory overhead balance to Cost of Goods Sold at the end of the year. Make the entry necessary at the end of 2014 to dispose of the factory overhead balance (variance) determined in Part (b).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Juicy Manufacturing Corporation incurred the following costs.
|
Beginning direct materials inventory
|
$24,000
|
|
Beginning work-in-process inventory
|
$10,500
|
|
Beginning finished goods inventory
|
$28,500
|
|
Ending direct materials inventory
|
$24,000
|
|
Ending work in process
|
$21,000
|
|
Ending finished goods
|
$39,000
|
|
Factory supervisor’s salary
|
$42,000
|
|
Depreciation on plant
|
$18,000
|
|
Sales
|
$1,200,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
$187,500
|
|
Plant maintenance
|
$9,000
|
|
Plant utilities
|
$16,500
|
|
Direct material purchases
|
$322,500
|
|
Direct labor
|
$360,000
|
Required: Calculate the following.
a. Direct materials used
b. Cost of goods manufactured
c. Cost of goods sold
d. Operating income
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a statement of cash flows.
The condensed income statement and comparative balance sheet of Jackson Corporation as of December 31, 2013 and 2012, are provided below. Other financial data is also given.
Jackson Corporation
Condensed Income Statement
Year Ended December 31, 2013
|
Revenues
|
675,500
|
|
Costs and Expenses
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
429,000
|
|
Salaries expense
|
125,000
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
15,000
|
|
Advertising expense
|
14,900
|
|
Utilities expense
|
18,000
|
|
Total costs and expenses
|
601,900
|
|
Net income before income taxes
|
73,600
|
|
Income taxes expense
|
18,400
|
|
Net income after income tax
|
$55,200
|
Jackson Corporation
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2013 and 2012
|
Assets
|
2013
|
2012
|
|
Cash
|
81,000
|
70,000
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
55,650
|
52,000
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
49,000
|
54,000
|
|
Prepaid advertising
|
8,000
|
10,000
|
|
Property, Plant and Equipment
|
120,000
|
100,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
(25,000)
|
(10,000)
|
|
Total Assets
|
$288,650
|
$276,000
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’Equity
|
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
50,450
|
79,000
|
|
Salaries payable
|
4,500
|
3,500
|
|
Unearned Revenues
|
4,000
|
5,000
|
|
Income Taxes Payable
|
6,000
|
5,000
|
|
Notes payable, 2015
|
–
|
30,000
|
|
Total Liabilities
|
64,950
|
122,500
|
|
Stockholders’Equity
|
|
|
|
Common Stock, $2 par
|
75,000
|
50,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
148,700
|
103,500
|
|
Total Stockholders’Equity
|
223,700
|
153,500
|
|
Total Liabilities & Stockholders’Equity
|
$288,650
|
$276,000
|
Instructions:
Prepare a statement of cash flows for Jackson Corporation for 2013. Additional information for the year that is pertinent to its preparations follow:
a. No items of property, plant and equipment were disposed of during the year.
b. Paid cash for the additions to property, plant and equipment during the year.
c. Paid $10,000 dividends on the common stock in cash during the year.
d. Issued common stock at par value for cash.
e. Paid cash to retire the long-term note payable.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On August 31, the balance sheet of Nashville Veterinary Clinic showed Cash $9,000, Accounts Receivable $1,700, Supplies $600, Office Equipment $6,000, Accounts Payable $3,600, Common Stock $13,000, and Retained Earnings $700. During September the following transactions occurred.
1. Paid $2,900 cash on accounts payable.
2. Collected $1,300 of accounts receivable.
3. Purchased additional office equipment for $2,100, paying $800 in cash and the balance on account.
4. Earned revenue of $8,000 of which $2,500 is paid in cash and the balance is due in October.
5. Paid cash dividends of $1,000.
6. Paid salaries $1,700 rent for September $900, and advertising expenses $300.
7. Incurred utility expenses for month on account $170.
8. Received $10,000 from Capital Bank – money borrowed on a note payable.
Instructions:
(a) Complete the table below. (Show the amount of increase or decrease for each transaction using a + for an increase (+500) and a – for a decrease (-500) and a 0 for no change. Please do not leave any fields blank. List multiple entries from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)
(b) Prepare an income statement for September, an retained earnings statement for September, and a balance sheet at September 30. (If there is a net loss, record amount using either a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -45 or parentheses e.g. (45). Enter all other amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary. List amounts from largest to smallest e.g. 10, 5, 3, 2. For balance sheet list assets in order of liquidity
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nash Company was organized on April 1, 2011 of the current year. After six months of startup losses, management had expected to show a profit during October. Management was disappointed however, when the income statement for October showed a loss. October’s income statement follows:
Nash Company
Income Statement
For the month ended October 31, 2011
|
Sales
|
565,000
|
|
|
Less: Operating Expenses
|
|
|
Direct Labor Costs
|
103,000
|
|
|
Raw Materials Purchased
|
196,000
|
|
|
Manufacturing Overhead
|
113,000
|
|
|
Selling and Administrative Expenses
|
222,000
|
634,000
|
|
Net Operating Loss
|
(69,000)
|
|
After seeing the $69,000 loss for October, Nash’s president stated the following, “I expected to be profitable within the six month time frame and this loss for October is even worse than September’s. I am beginning to feel we should consider selling the company assets and if we do not sell the assets, we may not find a buyer. By the way, I do not believe we should look for a new controller. We will proceed with Barry for the time being.”
The company controller resigned back in September. Barry, is the new assistant in controller’s office was hired back in August, prepared the income statement above. Barry is very inexperienced when it comes to manufacturing operations.
Inventory balances at the beginning and end of September were:
|
Raw Materials, October 1, 2011
|
16,000
|
|
Raw Materials, October 31, 2011
|
19,000
|
|
Work In Process, October 1, 2011
|
22,000
|
|
Work in Process, October 31, 2011
|
25,000
|
|
Finished Goods, October 1, 2011
|
45,000
|
|
Finished Goods, October 31, 2011
|
59,000
|
The president has asked you to check over the income statement and make a recommendation as to whether the company should look for a buyer for its assets.
Requirements:
1. While gathering data for a recommendation to the president, prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured for October.
2. As a second step, prepare a new income statement for October.
3. Based on your statements prepared in (1) and (2) above, would you recommend that the company look for a buyer?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The ledger of Elburn Company at the end of the current year shows Accounts Receivable $143,300, Sales Revenue $856,800, and Sales Returns and Allowances $29,900. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
a. If Elburn uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectible accounts, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming Elburn determines that T. Thum’s $2,000 balance is uncollectible.
b. If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $2,300 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 1% of net sales, and (2) 11% of accounts receivable.
c. If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a debit balance of $310 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 2% of net sales and (2) 8% of accounts receivable.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hunsicker Corporation has provided the following data for the month of January:
|
Inventories
|
Beginning
|
Ending
|
|
Raw materials
|
$30,000
|
$33,000
|
|
Work In process
|
$20,000
|
$18,000
|
|
Finished goods
|
$52,000
|
$60,000
|
|
Additional Information
|
|
|
Raw material purchases
|
$63,000
|
|
Direct labor costs
|
$92,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead cost incurred
|
$75,000
|
|
Indirect materials included in manufacturing overhead costs incurred
|
$6,000
|
|
Manufacturing overhead cost applied to work in process
|
$69,000
|
Prepare a Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured and a Schedule of Cost of Goods Sold in good form.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tasha Orin is unable to reconcile the bank balance at January 31. Tasha’s reconciliation is shown here.
|
Cash balance per bank
|
3,677.20
|
|
Add: NSF check
|
450.00
|
|
Less: Bank service charge
|
28.00
|
|
Adjusted balance per bank
|
4,099.20
|
|
Cash balance per books
|
3,975.20
|
|
Less: Deposits in transit
|
590.00
|
|
Add: Outstanding checks
|
770.00
|
|
Adjusted balance per books
|
4,155.20
|
Instructions
(a) What is the proper adjusted cash balance per bank?
(b) What is the proper adjusted cash balance per books?
(c) Prepare the adjusting journal entries necessary to determine the adjusted cash balance per books.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At Reyes Company, checks are not prenumbered because both the purchasing agent and the treasurer are authorized to issue checks. Each signer has access to unissued checks kept in an unlocked file cabinet. The purchasing agent pays all bills pertaining to goods purchased for resale. Prior to payment, the purchasing agent determines that the goods have been received and verifies the mathematical accuracy of the vendor’s invoice. After payment, the invoice is filed by vendor and the purchasing agent records the payment in the cash disbursements journal. The treasurer pays all other bills following approval by authorized employees. After payment, the treasurer stamps all bills “paid,” files them by payment date, and records the checks in the cash disbursements journal. Reyes Company maintains one checking account that is reconciled by the treasurer.
Instructions
(a) List the weaknesses in internal control over cash disbursements.
(b) Identify improvements for correcting these weaknesses.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This information relates to the Cash account in the ledger of Hawkins Company.
Balance September 1-$16,400; Cash deposited-$64,000
Balance September 30-$17,600; Checks written-$62,800
The September bank statement shows a balance of $16,500 at September 30 and the following memoranda.
Credits Debits
Collection of $1,800 note plus interest $30 $1,830 NSF check: H. Juno $560 Interest earned on checking account 45 Safety deposit box rent 60
At September 30, deposits in transit were $4,738 and outstanding checks totaled $2,383.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the bank reconciliation at September 30, 2012.
(b) Prepare the adjusting entries at September 30, assuming (1) the NSF check was from a customer on account, and (2) no interest had been accrued on the note.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are employed by Sunshine Airlines and your boss has asked you to do some price comparisons on competing airlines. Once you gather the data, you are required to prepare a business memo to your boss, Mr. Smith, with your findings.
Required:
1. Identify a minimum of two airlines that depart from a major airport located closest to you. This will be your departure city. Your destination will be Honolulu,HI.
2. Calculate round-trip fares for the following two dates. You may choose to go directly to the airline or use one of the Internet-based travel companies such as Expedia, Orbitz, Travelocity, etc.
1. Departing this Friday and returning the following Friday. Try to use any last-minute pricing sales if available.
2. Departing three weeks from this Friday and returning the following Friday.
3. Calculate the difference between the two fares for each airline.
4. Compare all of the fares and analyze the difference.
5. Decide whether these airlines are generating any positive contribution margin on either of these fares.
6. Identify examples of both fixed and variable costs that each airline would incur.
7. Analyze whether the costs are variable or fixed in relation to an individual passenger.
8. Prepare a business memo to your boss that includes the required information and conclude which of these two airlines is your closest competitor.
Remember to cite your sources in APA format.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AC Speed Company (Working Papers and Business Memo) – June Transactions Company Background & Scenario
The AC Speed Company is a well-established, publicly-held corporation, operating as a wholesaler in the auto parts industry. Specifically, AC Speed purchases auto parts from manufacturers and sells them to large business customers. Most purchases and sales are on account, with trade credit terms (specified below).
You’re a Davenport University student pursuing a bachelor’s degree in business and employed at the AC Speed Company this semester as an intern. You’ve worked in various departments and on several projects so far, learning a lot about the company’s business operations. Management seems impressed with your enthusiasm and the quality of your work.
The company’s accountant has just been called away for a family emergency and will likely be absent for a month or so. The General Manager asks you to take over the accountant’s regular duties on an interim basis. You’re nervous about doing so, but are confident that what you’ve learned in accounting class, plus your personal problem-solving skills, will make this a successful experience. What a great learning opportunity, not to mention an enhancement to your resume!
I. The excel tutorial file contains the following worksheet tabs:
Transactions, Products, Chart of Accounts GL, Chart of Accounts AR Ledger, Chart of Accounts AP Ledger
Sales Journal, Purchases Journal, Cash Receipts Journal, Cash Payments Journal General Ledger, AR Ledger, AP Ledger,
Worksheet
Income Statement
Statement of Retained Earnings
Balance Sheet
Post-Closing Trial Balance
Financial Ratios
Inventory Control
Adjusted Trial Balances Prior Years
II. The word tutorial file contains the business memo.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of stockholders’ equity
Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 19X6. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 19X6 and 19X5 follow.
| |
19X6
|
19X5
|
|
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10%
|
$580,000
|
$500,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par value
|
2,350,000
|
1,750,000
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
|
|
|
Preferred
|
24,000
|
—
|
|
Common
|
4,620,000
|
3,600,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
8,470,000
|
6,920,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
$16,044,000
|
$12,770,000
|
1. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 19X6.
2. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 19X6.
3. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 19X6?
4. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 19X6? By what amount?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Product costs and period costs
The costs that follow were extracted from the accounting records of several different manufacturers:
1. Weekly wages of an equipment maintenance worker
2. Marketing costs of a soft drink bottler
3. Cost of sheet metal in a Honda automobile
4. Cost of president’s subscription to Fortune magazine
5. Monthly operating costs of pollution control equipment used in a steel mill
6. Weekly wages of a seamstress employed by a jeans maker
7. Cost of compact discs (CDs) for newly recorded releases of Rush, Billy Joel, and Bryan Adams
1. Determine which of these costs are product costs and which are period costs.
2. For the product costs only, determine those that are easily traced to the finished product and those that are not.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Definitions of manufacturing concepts
Interstate Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:
|
Materials and supplies used
|
|
Brass
|
$75,000
|
|
Repair parts
|
16,000
|
|
Machine lubricants
|
9,000
|
|
Wages and salaries Machine operators
|
128,000
|
|
Production supervisors
|
64,000
|
|
Maintenance personnel
|
41,000
|
|
Other factory overhead Variable
|
35,000
|
|
Fixed
|
46,000
|
|
Sales commissions
|
20,000
|
1. Total direct materials consumed
2. Total direct labor
3. Total prime cost
4. Total conversion cost
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Manufacturing statements and cost behavior
Tampa Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $36 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.
|
Per Unit
|
Variable Cost
|
Fixed Cost
|
|
Direct materials
|
$4.50
|
$ —
|
|
Direct labor
|
6.5
|
—
|
|
Factory overhead
|
9
|
50,000
|
|
Selling
|
—
|
70,000
|
|
Administrative
|
—
|
135,000
|
Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 17,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Tampa carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.
Instructions:
1. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.
2. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
3. On the basis of the information presented:
1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
2. What is the likely effect on the $4.50 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pender has prepared the following list of statements about decision making and incremental analysis.
Identify each statement as true or false. For every false statement identified above indicate how to correct the statement.
1. The first step in management’s decision-making process is, “Determine and evaluate possible courses of action.”
2. The final step in management’s decision-making process is to actually make the decision.
3. Accounting’s contribution to management’s decision-making process occurs primarily in evaluating possible courses of action and in reviewing the results.
4. In making business decisions, management ordinarily considers only financial information because it is objectively determined.
5. Decisions involve a choice among alternative courses of action.
6. The process used to identify the financial data that change under alternative courses of action is called incremental analysis.
7. Costs that are the same under all alternative courses of action sometimes affect the decision.
8. When using incremental analysis, some costs will always change under alternative courses of action, but revenues will not.
9. Variable costs will change under alternative courses of action, but fixed costs will not.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Conservative versus aggressive financing
Collins Systems, Inc., is trying to develop an asset-financing plan. The firm has $300,000 in temporary current assets and $200,000 in permanent current assets. Collins also has $400,000 in fixed assets.
a. Construct two alternative financing plans for the firm. One of the plans should be conservative, with 80 percent of assets financed by long-term sources and the rest financed by short-term sources. The other plan should be aggressive, with only 30 percent of assets financed by long-term sources and the remaining assets financed by short-term sources. The current interest rate is 15 percent on long-term funds and 10 percent on short-term financing. Compute the annual interest payments under each plan.
b.Given that Collins’s earnings before interest and taxes are $180,000, calculate earnings after taxes for each of your alternatives. Assume a tax rate of 40 percent.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On July 23 of the current year, Dakota Mining Co. pays $4,836,000 for land estimated to contain 7,800,000 tons of recoverable ore. It installs machinery costing $390,000 that has a 10-year life and no salvage value and is capable of mining the ore deposit in eight years.
The machinery is paid for on July 25, seven days before mining operations begin.
The company removes and sells 400,000 tons of ore during its first five months of operations ending on December 31. Depreciation of the machinery is in proportion to the mine’s depletion as the machinery will be abandoned after the ore is mined.
Required:
Prepare entries to record (a) the purchase of the land, (b) the cost and installation of machinery, (c) the first five months’ depletion assuming the land has a net salvage value of zero after the ore is mined, and (d) the first five months’ depreciation on the machinery.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, 2011, Randall Construction decided to change from the completed contract method of accounting for long-term construction contracts to the percentage-of-completion method. The company will continue to use the completed contract method for tax purposes.
The tax rate is 30%. The following are all relevant data concerning the change.
|
Year
|
Income before income tax % of Completion
|
Completed Contract
|
|
Before 2010
|
500,000
|
300,000
|
|
2010
|
400,000
|
250,000
|
|
2011
|
450,000
|
400,000
|
Required:
(1.) Prepare the journal entry to record the accounting change.
(2.) Determine the net income to be reported in the 2011-2010 comparative income statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Bad-debt reporting – Aging).
Manilow Corporation operates in an industry that has a high rate of bad debts. Before any year-end adjustments, the balance in Manilow’s AR account was $555,000 and the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts had a credit balance of $40,000. The year-end balance reported in the balance sheet for the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts will be based on the aging schedule shown below.
|
Days Account Outstanding
|
Amount
|
Probability of Collection
|
|
Less than 16 days
|
300,000
|
98%
|
|
Between 16 and 30 days
|
100,000
|
90%
|
|
Between 31 and 45 days
|
80,000
|
85%
|
|
Between 46 and 60 days
|
40,000
|
80%
|
|
Between 61 and 75 days
|
20,000
|
55%
|
|
Over 75 days 15,000
|
|
0%
|
Instructions:
a) What is the appropriate balance for the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at year-end?
b) Show how AR would be presented on the balance sheet.
c) What is the dollar effect of the year-end bad debt adjustment on the before-tax income?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of Mixed Costs in a Pricing Decision
Maria Chavez owns a catering company that serves food and beverages at parties and business functions. Chavez’s business is seasonal, with a heavy schedule during the summer months and holidays and a lighter schedule at other times. One of the major events Chavez’s customers request is a cocktail party. She offers a standard cocktail party and has estimated the cost per guest as follows:
Food and beverages 15.00
Labor (0.5 hrs. @ $10.00/hr.) 5.00
Overhead (0.5 hrs. @ $13.98/hr.) 6.99
Total cost per guest $26.99
The standard cocktail party lasts three hours and Chavez hires one worker for every six guests, so that works out to one-half hour of labor per guest. These workers are hired only as needed and are paid only for the hours they actually work.
When bidding on cocktail parties, Chavez adds a 15% markup to yield a price of about $31per guest. She is confident about her estimates of the costs of food and beverages and labor but is not as comfortable with the estimate of overhead cost. The $13.98 overhead cost per labor-hour was determined by dividing total overhead expenses for the last 12 months by total labor-hours for the same period. Monthly data concerning overhead costs and labor-hours follow:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of Mixed Costs in a Pricing Decision
Maria Chavez owns a catering company that serves food and beverages at parties and business functions. Chavez’s business is seasonal, with a heavy schedule during the summer months and holidays and a lighter schedule at other times. One of the major events Chavez’s customers request is a cocktail party. She offers a standard cocktail party and has estimated the cost per guest as follows:
Food and beverages 15.00
Labor (0.5 hrs. @ $10.00/hr.) 5.00
Overhead (0.5 hrs. @ $13.98/hr.) 6.99
Total cost per guest $26.99
The standard cocktail party lasts three hours and Chavez hires one worker for every six guests, so that works out to one-half hour of labor per guest. These workers are hired only as needed and are paid only for the hours they actually work.
When bidding on cocktail parties, Chavez adds a 15% markup to yield a price of about $31per guest. She is confident about her estimates of the costs of food and beverages and labor but is not as comfortable with the estimate of overhead cost. The $13.98 overhead cost per labor-hour was determined by dividing total overhead expenses for the last 12 months by total labor-hours for the same period. Monthly data concerning overhead costs and labor-hours follow:
|
Month
|
Labor- Hours
|
Overhead Expenses
|
|
January
|
2,500
|
55,000
|
|
February
|
2,800
|
59,000
|
|
March
|
3,000
|
60,000
|
|
April
|
4,200
|
64,000
|
|
May
|
4,500
|
67,000
|
|
June
|
5,500
|
71,000
|
|
July
|
6,500
|
74,000
|
|
August
|
7,500
|
77,000
|
|
September
|
7,000
|
75,000
|
|
October
|
4,500
|
68,000
|
|
November
|
3,100
|
62,000
|
|
December
|
6,500
|
73,000
|
|
Total
|
57,600
|
$805,000
|
Chavez has received a request to bid on a 180-guest fund-raising cocktail party to be given next month by an important local charity. (The party would last the usual three hours.) She would like to win this contract because the guest list for this charity event includes many prominent individuals that she would like to land as future clients. Maria is confident that these potential customers would be favorably impressed by her company’s services at the charity event.
Required:
1. Estimate the contribution to profit of a standard 180-guest cocktail party if Chavez charges her usual price of $31 per guest. (In other words, by how much would her overall profit increase?)
2. How low could Chavez bid for the charity event in terms of a price per guest and still not lose money on the event itself?
3. The individual who is organizing the charity’s fund-raising event has indicated that he has already received a bid under $30 from another catering company. Do you think Chavez should bid below her normal $31 per guest price for the charity event? Why or why not?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Straightforward Computation of Overhead Variances
The following data are the actual results for Marvelous Marshmallow Company for October.
Actual output 9,000 cases
|
Actual variable overhead
|
405,000
|
|
Actual fixed overhead
|
122,000
|
|
Actual machine time
|
40,500 machine hours
|
Standard cost and budget information for Marvelous Marshmallow Company follows:
Standard variable-overhead rate $9.00 per machine hour Standard quantity of machine hours 4 hours per case of marshmallows Budgeted fixed overhead $120,000 per month Budgeted output 10,000 cases per month
Required:
1. Use any of the methods explained in the chapter to compute the following variances.
Indicate whether each variance is favorable or unfavorable, where appropriate.
a. Variable-overhead spending variance.
b. Variable-overhead efficiency variance.
c. Fixed-overhead budget variance.
d. Fixed-overhead volume variance.
2. Build a spreadsheet: Construct an Excel spreadsheet to solve the preceding requirement. Show how the solution will change if the following information changes: actual output was 9,100 cases, and actual variable overhead was $395,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gunflint Adventures operates an airplane service that takes fishing parties to a remote lake resort in North Manitoba, Canada. Individuals must purchase their tickets at least one month in advance during the busy summer season. The company adjusts its accounts only once each month.
Selected balances appearing in the company’s June 30 adjusted trail balance appear as follows:
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Prepaid airport rent
|
$7,200
|
|
|
Unexpired insurance
|
3,500
|
|
|
Airplane
|
240,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation – Airplane
|
|
$36,000
|
|
Unearned passenger revenue
|
|
90,000
|
Other Information
1. The airplane is being depreciated over a 20-year life with no residual value.
2. Unearned passenger revenue represents advance ticket sales for bookings in July and August at $300 per ticket.
3. Six months airport rent had been prepaid on May 1.
4. The unexpired insurance is what remains of a 12-month policy purchased on February 1.
5. Passenger revenue earned in June totaled $75,000.
Instructions:
A. Determine the following
1. The age of the airplane in months
2. The monthly airport expense
3. The amount paid for the 12 month insurance policy on February 1
B. Prepare the adjusting entries made on June 30 involving the following accounts:
1. Depreciation Expense: airplane
2. Airport rent expense
3. Insurance expense
4. Passenger revenue earned
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Optix International is considering a significant expansion to its product line. The sales force is excited about the opportunities that the new products will bring. The new products are a significant step up in quality above the company’s current offerings, but offer a complementary fit to its existing product line. Frank Renolds, senior production department manager, is very excited about the high-tech new equipment that will have to be acquired to produce the new products. Carol Fischer, the company’s CFO, has provided the following projections based on results with and without the new products.
|
|
Without New Products
|
With New Products
|
|
Sales
|
10,000,000
|
18,000,000
|
|
Net income
|
800,000
|
1,800,000
|
|
Average total assets
|
5,000,000
|
15,000,000
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the company’s return on assets ratio, profit margin ratio, and asset turnover ratio, both with and without the new product line.
(b) Discuss the implications that your findings in part (a) have for the company’s decision
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing Internal Control
For each of these five separate cases, identify the principles of internal control that is violated. recommend what the business should do to ensure adherence to principles of internal control.
1. Heather Flatt records all incoming customer cash receipts for her employer and posts the customer payments to their respective accounts.
2. At Netco Company, Jeff and Jose alternate lunch hours. Jeff is the petty cash custodian, but if someone needs petty cash when he is at lunch, jose fills in as custodian.
3. Nadine Cox posts all patient charges and payments at the Dole Medical Clinic. Each night Nadine backs up the computerized accounting system to a tape and stores the tape in a locked file at her desk.
4. Barto Sayles prides himself on hiring quality workers who require little supervision. As office manager, Barto gives his employees full discretion over their tasks and for years has seen no reason to perform independent reviews of their work.
5. Desi West’s manager has told her to reduce costs, Desi decides to raise the deductible on the plant’s property insurance from $5,000 to $10,000. This cuts the property insurance premium in half. In a related move, she decides that bonding the plant’s employees is a waste of money since the company has not experienced any losses due to employee theft.
Desi saves the entire amount of the bonding insurance premium by dropping the bonding insurance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Overview of direct and indirect methods
Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why.
a. Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities. n
b. Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used.
c. One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported.
d. The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed.
e. The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash flows only when the direct method of statement preparation is used.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Equipment transaction and cash flow reporting
|
Property, plant, & equipment
|
Dec. 31, 20X4
|
Dec. 31, 20X3
|
|
Land
|
94,000
|
94,000
|
|
Equipment
|
652,000
|
527,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
(316,000)
|
(341,000)
|
New equipment purchased during 20×4 totaled $280,000. The 20×4 income statement disclosed equipment depreciation expense of $41,000 and a $9,000 loss on the sale of equipment.
a. Determine the cost and accumulated depreciation of the equipment sold during 20X4.
b. Determine the selling price of the equipment sold.
c. Show how the sale of equipment would appear on a statement of cash flows prepared by using the indirect method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods
The comparative year-end balance sheets of Sign Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company’s current accounts:
| |
20X5
|
20X4
|
Increase / (Decrease)
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
55,400
|
35,200
|
20,200
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
83,800
|
88,000
|
(4,200)
|
|
Inventory
|
243,400
|
233,800
|
9,600
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
25,400
|
24,200
|
1,200
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
123,600
|
140,600
|
(17,000)
|
|
Taxes payable
|
43,600
|
49,200
|
(5,600)
|
|
Interest payable
|
9,000
|
6,400
|
2,600
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
38,800
|
60,400
|
(21,600)
|
|
Note payable
|
44,000
|
–
|
44,000
|
The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm’s selling and administrative expenses. The company’s condensed income statement follows.
SIGN GRAPHICS INC.
Income Statement
for the Year Ended December 31, 20×5
|
Sales
|
713,800
|
|
|
Less: Cost of goods sold
|
323,000
|
|
|
Gross profit
|
390,800
|
|
|
Less: Selling & administrative expenses
|
186,000
|
|
|
Depreciation expense
|
17,000
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
27,000
|
230,000
|
| |
160,800
|
|
|
Add: gain on sale of land
|
21,800
|
|
|
Income before taxes
|
182,600
|
|
|
Income taxes
|
36,800
|
|
|
Net income
|
145,800
|
|
Other data:
1. Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $74,600.
2. Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $76,200.
3. Store equipment of $44,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $150,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.
4. A long-term note of $49,400 was repaid.
5. Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.
6. The company paid cash dividends amounting to $128,600.
Instructions:
a. Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:
1. The direct method.
2. The indirect method.
b. Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Horizontal analysis.
Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.
| |
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Current Assets
|
76,000
|
80,000
|
|
Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)
|
99,000
|
90,000
|
|
Intangibles
|
25,000
|
50,000
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
40,800
|
48,000
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
143,000
|
160,000
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
16,200
|
12,000
|
|
Net Sales
|
500,000
|
500,000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
332,500
|
350,000
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
93,500
|
85,000
|
Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Current liabilities: entries and disclosure.
A review of selected financial activities of Visconti’s during 20XX disclosed the following:
1-Dec Borrowed $20,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3-month, 15% note payable.
Interest and principal are due at maturity.
10-Feb Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates that 2% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit.
22-Dec Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
26-Dec Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a note payable due in 60 days.
31-Dec Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162.
31-Dec Accrued 3 days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.
Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Visconti’s balance sheet as of December 31.
Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Investment by partners; financial statements.
Abram, Haas, and Tidwell formed a partnership to practice law by combining their respective sole proprietorships. The assets and liabilities contributed to the firm on January 2, 19X4, the date of formation, follow.
| |
Book Value
|
Fair Market Value
|
|
Abram
|
|
|
|
Land
|
40,000
|
115,000
|
|
Mortgage payable
|
38,000
|
38,000
|
|
Haas
|
|
|
|
Office supplies
|
42,000
|
30,000
|
|
Office equipment
|
64,000
|
48,000
|
|
Tidwell
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
50,000
|
50,000
|
|
Accounts
|
20,000
|
18,000
|
|
Short-term investments
|
4,000
|
4,000
|
Instructions:
a. Prepare journal entries to record the investments of Abram, Haas, Tidwell in the new partnership.
b. Prepare a classified balance sheet for the partnership immediately after the investments are recorded.
c. The partners share profits and losses equally, and the first year’s n income was $66,000.
Cash withdrawals of $5,000 were made by Abram,$22,000 by Haas, and $17,000 by Tidwell. Prepare the December 31 19X4, statement of partners’ equity for the firm.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analysis of transactions.
Set up the following headings across a piece of paper:
Assets = Liabilities + Owner’s Equity
By using “+” and “-,” indicate the effect of each of the following transactions on total assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity:
a. Processed a $5,000 cash withdrawal for the owner.
b. Recorded the receipt of May’s utility bill, to be paid in June.
c. Provided services to customers on account.
d. Paid the current month’s advertising charges.
e. Purchased a $27,000 delivery truck by paying $5,000 down and securing a loan for the remaining balance.
f. Received $11,000 cash from the owner as an investment in the business.
g. Returned a new computer and printer purchased earlier in the month on account. The bill had not as yet been paid.
h. Paid the utility bill recorded previously in (b).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Balance sheet preparation.
The following data relate to Preston Company as of December 31, 19XX:
|
Building
|
44,000
|
Accounts receivable
|
24,000
|
|
Cash
|
17,000
|
Loan payable
|
30,000
|
|
J.Preston,
|
65,000
|
Land
|
21,000
|
|
Accounts
|
?
|
|
|
Prepare a balance sheet in good form as of December 31, 19XX.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Statement preparation
The following information is taken from the accounting records of Grimball Cardiology at the close of business on December 31, 19X1:
|
Accounts payable
|
14,700
|
Surgery revenue
|
175,000
|
|
Surgical expenses
|
80,000
|
Cash
|
60,000
|
|
Surgical equipment
|
37,000
|
Office Equipment
|
118,000
|
|
Salaries expense
|
30,000
|
Rent expense
|
15,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
135,000
|
Loan payable
|
10,300
|
|
Utilities expense
|
5,000
|
|
|
All equipment was acquired just prior to year-end. Conversations with the practice’s bookkeeper revealed the data that follow.
|
Rose Grimball, capital (January 1, 19X1)
|
300,000
|
|
19X1 owner investments
|
2,000
|
|
19X1 owner withdrawals
|
22,000
|
Instructions
a. Prepare the income statement for Grimball Cardiology in good form.
b. Prepare a statement of owner’s equity in good form.
c. Prepare Grimball’s balance sheet in good form.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Recognition of normal balances
The following items appeared in the accounting records of Triguero’s, a retail music store that also sponsors concerts. Classify each of the items as an asset, liability; revenue; or expense from the company’s viewpoint. Also indicate the normal account balance of each item.
a. The albums, tapes, and CDs held for sale to customers.
b. A long-term loan owed to Citizens Bank.
c. Promotional costs to publicize a concert.
d. Daily receipts for merchandise sold,
e. Amounts due from customers,
f. Land held as an investment,
g. A new fax machine purchased for office use.
h. Amounts to be paid in 10 days to suppliers,
i. Amounts paid to a mall for rent.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Basic journal entries
The following transactions pertain to the Jennifer Royall Company:
Apr. 1 Received cash of $15,000 and land valued at $10,000 from Jennifer Royall as an investment in the business.
5 Provided $1,200 of services to Jason Ratchford, a client. Ratchford agreed to pay $800 in 15 days and the remaining amount in May.
9 Paid $250 of salaries to an employee.
14 Acquired a new computer for $3,200; Royall will pay the dealer in May.
20 Collected $800 from Jason Ratchford for services provided on April 5.
24 Borrowed $7,500 from BestBanc by securing a six-month loan.
Prepare journal entries (and explanations) to record the preceding transactions and events.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journal entry preparation
On January 1 of the current year, MuniServ began operations with $100,000 cash. The cash was obtained from an owner investment by Peter Houston of $70,000 and a $30,000 bank loan. Shortly thereafter, the company acquired selected assets of a bankrupt competitor. The acquisition included land ($15,000), a building ($40,000), and vehicles ($10,000). MuniServ paid $45,000 at the time of the transaction and agreed to remit the remaining balance due of $20,000 (an account payable) by February 15.
During January, the company had additional cash outlays for the following items: Purchases of store equipment 4,600
Loan payment, including $100 interest 500
Salaries expense 2,300
Advertising expense 700
The January utilities bill of $200 was received on January 31 and will be paid on February 10. MuniServ rendered services to clients on account amounting to $9,400. All customers have been billed; by month-end, $3,700 had been received in settlement of account balances.
Instructions
a. Present journal entries that reflect MuniServ’s January transactions, including the $100,000 raised from the owner investment and loan.
b. Compute the total debits, total credits, and ending balance that would be found in the company’s Cash account.
c. Determine the amount that would be shown on the January 31 trial balance for Accounts Payable. Is the balance a debit or a credit?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for prepaid expenses and unearned revenues.
Hawaii-Blue began business on January 1 of the current year and offers deep sea fishing trips to tourists. Tourists pay $125 in advance for an all-day outing off the coast of Maui.
The company collected monies during January for 210 outings, with 30 of the tourists not planning to take their trips until early February. Hawaii-Blue rents its fishing boat from Pacific Yacht Supply. An agreement was signed at the beginning of the year, and $72,000 was paid for the rights to use the boat for two full years.
a. Prepare journal entries to record (1) the collection of monies from tourists and (2) the revenue generated during January.
b. Calculate Hawaii-Blue’s total obligation to tourists at the end of January. On what financial statement and in which section would this amount appear?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bank Reconciliation
The following information is available to assist you in preparing a bank reconciliation for Calico Corners on May 31, 2012:
a. The balance on the May 31, 2012, bank statement is $8,432.11.
b. Not included on the bank statement is a $1,250 deposit made by Calico Corners late on May 31.
c. A comparison between the canceled checks returned with the bank statement and the company records indicated that the following checks are outstanding at May 31:
|
No. 123
|
23.40
|
|
No. 127
|
145.00
|
|
No. 128
|
210.80
|
|
No. 130
|
67.32
|
d. The cash account on the company’s books shows a balance of $ 9,965.34.
e. The bank acts as a collection agency for interest earned on some municipal bonds held by Calico Corners. The May bank statement indicates interest of $465.00 earned during the month.
f. Interest earned on the checking account and added to Calico Corners’ account during May was $54.60. Miscellaneous bank service charges amounted to $50.00.
g. A customer’s NSF check in the amount of $166.00 was returned with the May bank statement.
h. A comparison between the deposits listed on the bank statement and the company books revealed that a customer’s check in the amount of $123.45 was recorded on the books during May but was never added to the company’s account. The bank erroneously added the check to the account of Calico Closet, which has an account at the same bank.
i. The comparison of deposits per the bank statement with those per the books revealed that another customer’s check in the amount of $101.10 was correctly added to the company’s account. In recording the check on the company’s books, however, the accountant erroneously increased the Cash account by $1,011.00
Required:
1. Prepare a bank reconciliation in good form.
2. Record the necessary journal entries on the company’s books resulting from the bank reconciliation prepared in part (1) above.
3. A friend says to you: “I don’t know why companies bother to prepare bank reconciliations it seems a waste of time. Why don’t they just do like I do and adjust the Cash account for any difference between what the bank shows as a balance and what shows up in the books?” Explain to your friend why a bank reconciliation should be prepared as soon as a bank statement is received.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Liquidity ratios.
Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:
| |
Edison
|
Stagg
|
Thornton
|
|
Cash
|
4,000
|
2,500
|
1,000
|
|
Short-term investments
|
3,000
|
2,500
|
2,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
2,000
|
2,500
|
3,000
|
|
Inventory
|
1,000
|
2,500
|
4,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
800
|
800
|
800
|
|
Accounts payable
|
200
|
200
|
200
|
|
Notes payable: short-term
|
3,100
|
3,100
|
3,100
|
|
Accrued payables
|
300
|
300
|
300
|
|
Long-term liabilities
|
3,800
|
3,800
|
3,800
|
a. Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?
b. Suppose Thornton is using FIFO for inventory valuation and Edison is using LIFO.
Comment on the comparability of information between these two companies.
c. If all short-term notes payable are due on July 11 at 8 a.m., comment on each company’s ability to settle its obligation in a timely manner.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Profitability ratios, trading on the equity.
Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 19X7:
|
Net sales
|
1,500,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
120,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
80,000
|
|
Preferred dividends
|
25,000
|
|
Net income
|
130,000
|
|
Average assets
|
1,100,000
|
|
Average common stockholders’ equity
|
400,000
|
a. Compute the profit margin on sales and the rates of return on assets and common stockholders’ equity, rounding calculations to two decimal places.
b. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The inventory of Oheto Company on December 31, 2011, consists of the following items.
|
Part
|
No. Quantity
|
Cost Per Unit
|
Cost Per Unit
|
|
110
|
600
|
$95
|
$100
|
|
111
|
1,000
|
60
|
52
|
|
112
|
500
|
80
|
76
|
|
113
|
200
|
170
|
180
|
|
120
|
400
|
205
|
208
|
|
121
|
1,600
|
16
|
14
|
|
122
|
300
|
240
|
235
|
Part No. 121 is obsolete and has a realizable value of each as scrap: $0.50
Instructions:
Complete the table above by inserting the correct values or formulas into the yellow highlighted cells. From this data, answer the following two questions:
a. Determine the inventory as of December 31, 2011, by the lower-of-cost-ormarket method, applying this method directly to each item.
b. Determine the inventory by the lower-of-cost-or-market method, applying the method to the total of the inventory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allegro Supply Company, a newly formed corporation, incurred the following expenditures related to Land, to Buildings, and to Machinery and Equipment.
|
Abstract company’s fee for title search
|
608
|
|
Architect’s fees
|
3,709
|
|
Cash paid for land and dilapidated building thereon
|
107,640
|
|
Removal of old building
|
23,400
|
|
Less: Salvage
|
6,435
|
16,965
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interest on short-term loans during construction
|
8,658
|
|
|
Excavation before construction for basement
|
22,230
|
|
|
Machinery purchased (subject to 2% cash discount, which was not taken)
|
76,050
|
|
|
Freight on machinery purchased
|
1,568
|
|
|
Storage charges on machinery, necessitated by noncompletion of building when machinery was delivered
|
2,551
|
|
|
New building constructed (building construction took 6 months from date of purchase of land and old building)
|
567,450
|
|
|
Assessment by city for drainage project
|
1,872
|
|
|
Hauling charges for delivery of machinery from storage to new building
|
725
|
|
|
Installation of machinery
|
2,340
|
|
|
Trees, shrubs, and other landscaping after completion of building
(permanent in nature)
|
6,318
|
|
Determine the amounts that should be debited to Land, to Buildings, and to Machinery and Equipment. Assume the benefits of capitalizing interest during construction exceed the cost of implementation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sunflower Architects incorporated as licensed architects on April 1, 2010. During the first month of the operation of the business, these events and transactions occurred:
1-Apr Stockholders invested $15,000 cash in exchange for common stock of the corporation.
1 Hired a secretary-receptionist at a salary of $375 per week, payable monthly.
2 Paid office rent for the month $900.
3 Purchased architectural supplies on account from Spring Green Company $1,000.
10 Completed blueprints on a carport and billed client $1,500 for services.
11 Received $500 cash advance from J. Madison to design a new home.
20 Received $2,300 cash for services completed and delivered to M. Svetlana.
30 Paid secretary-receptionist for the month $1,500.
30 Paid $300 to Spring Green Company for accounts payable due.
Instructions:
(a) Journalize the transactions, including explanations. (If no entry is required type No entry for the account and 0 for the amount.)
(b) Post to the ledger T accounts.
(c) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost flows and overhead application
Cleveland Metals uses a job cost system and applies factory overhead to production at a predetermined rate of 180% of direct labor cost. Data pertaining to recent operations follow.
• Job no. 636 was the only job in process on January 1 of the current year. The Work in Process account contained a $24,600 balance on this date.
• Jobs no. 637, 638, and 639 were started during January.
• Total direct material requisitions and direct labor incurred during January amounted to $89,200 and $114,500, respectively.
• The only job that remained in process on January 31 was job no. 638, with costs of $15,000 for direct materials and $20,000 for direct labor.
a. Compute the total cost of the work in process inventory on January 31.
b. Compute the cost of jobs completed during January, and present the proper journal entry to reflect job completion.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Overhead application: Working backward
The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
| |
Division A
|
Division B
|
|
Actual machine hours
|
22,500
|
?
|
|
Estimated machine hours
|
20,000
|
?
|
|
Overhead application rate
|
$4.50
|
|
|
Actual overhead
|
$110,000
|
$4.50
|
|
Estimated overhead
|
?
|
?
|
|
Applied overhead
|
?
|
$86,000
|
|
Over- (under-) applied overhead
|
?
|
$6,500
|
FIND THE UNKNOWNS FOR EACH OF THE DIVISIONS.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The treasurer anticipates the following costs for the event, which will be held at the Regency Hotel:
|
Room rental
|
$300
|
|
Dinner cost (per person)
|
25
|
|
Chartered buses
|
500
|
|
Favors and souvenirs (per person)
|
5
|
|
Band
|
900
|
Each person would pay $40 to attend; 200 attendees are expected.
a. Will the event be profitable for the sorority? Show computations.
b. How many people must attend for the sorority to break even?
c. Suppose the sorority encouraged its members to drive to the hotel and did not charter the buses. Further, a planned menu change will reduce the cost per meal by $2. If each member will still be charged $40, compute the contribution margin per person.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using present value techniques to evaluate alternative investment opportunities
Fast Delivery is a small company that transports business packages between New York and Chicago. It operates a fleet of small vans that moves packages to and from a central depot within each city and uses a common carrier to deliver the packages between the depots in the two cities. Fast Delivery recently acquired approximately $6million of cash capital from it owners, and its president, Don is trying to identify the most profitable way to invest these funds.
1. One manager believes that the money should be used to expand the fleet of city van at a cost of $720.000. He argues that more vans would enable the company to expand its services into new markets, thereby increasing the revenue base. More specifically he expects cash inflow to increase by $280,000 per year. The additional vans are expected to have an average useful life of four years and a combined salvage value of $100,00 Operating the vans will require additional working capital of $40,000 which will be recovered at the end of the fourth year.
2. In contrast, the company chief accountant, believes that the funds should be used to purchased large trucks to deliver the package between the depots in the two cities. The conversion process would produce continuing improvement in operating saving with reductions in cash outflow as the following.
Year 1, $160,000, Year 2, $320,000, Year 3, $400,000, Year 4, $440,000.
The large trucks are expect to cost $800,000 and to have a 4 year useful life ans a $80,000 salvage value. the training cost are expect to amount to $16,000 Fast Delivery management has established a 16 percent desired rate of return.
Required:
a. Determine the net present value of the two investment alternatives
b. Calculate the present value index for each alternative.
c. Indicate which investment alternative you would recommend. Explain your choice.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the payback period and unadjusted rate of return to evaluate the alternative investment opportunities
Louis Gallo owns a small retail ice cream parlor. He is considering expanding the business and has identified two attractive alternatives. One involves purchasing a machine that would enable Mr. Gallo to offer frozen yogurt to customers. The machine would cost $8,100 and has an expected useful life of three years with no salvage value. Additional annual cash revenues and cash operating expenses associated with selling yogurt are expected to be $5,940 and $900, respectively. Alternatively, Mr. Gallo could purchase for $10,080 the equipment necessary to serve cappuccino. That equipment has an expected useful life of four years and no salvage value. Additional annual cash revenues and cash operating expenses associated with selling cappuccino are expected to be $8,280 and $2,430, respectively. Income before taxes earned by the ice cream parlor is taxed at an effective rate of 20 percent.
Required:
a. Determine the payback period and unadjusted rate of return ( use average investment) for each alternative.
b. Indicate which investment alternative you would recommend. Explain your choice.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using net present value and internal rate of return to evaluate investment opportunities
Veronica Tanner, the president of Tanner Enterprises, is considering two investment opportunities. Because of limited resources, she will be able to invest in only one of them.
Project A is to purchase a machine that will enable factory automation; the machine is expected to have a useful life of four years and no salvage value. Project B supports a training program that will improve the skills of employees operating the current equipment.
Initial cash expenditures for Project A are $ 100,000 and for Project B are $ 40,000. The annual expected cash inflows are $ 31,487 for Project A and $ 13,169 for Project B. Both investments are expected to provide cash flow benefits for the next four years. Tanner Enterprise’s cost of capital is 8 percent.
Required
a. Compute the net present value of each project. Which project should be adopted based on the net present value approach?
b. Compute the approximate internal rate of return of each project. Which one should be adopted based on the internal rate of return approach?
c. Compare the net present value approach with the internal rate of return approach. Which method is better in the given circumstances? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Manning Co. manufactures and sells trophies for winners of athletic and other events. Its manufacturing plant has the capacity to produce 18,000 trophies each month; current monthly production is 15,300 trophies. The company normally charges $141 per trophy. Cost data for the current level of production are shown below.
|
Variable Costs
|
|
|
Direct Materials
|
$948,600
|
|
Direct Labor
|
$290,700
|
|
Selling and Administrative
|
$41,300
|
|
Fixed Costs
|
|
|
Manufacturing
|
$579,870
|
|
Selling and Administrative
|
$134,640
|
The company has just received a special one-time order for 900 trophies at $73 each. For this particular order, no variable selling and administrative costs would be incurred. This order would also have no effect on fixed costs.
Required:
Should the company accept this special order? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You’re the accountant in charge of the collection of receivables for the Dunstone Company. An analysis of the year-end receivables shows the following:
|
Time Interval
|
Amount
|
Estimated Percentage Uncollectible
|
|
Not yet due
|
18,000
|
3%
|
|
1–30 days past due
|
21,000
|
5%
|
|
31–60 days past due
|
8,000
|
10%
|
|
61–90 days past due
|
3,000
|
20%
|
|
Over 90 days past due
|
2,500
|
40%
|
| |
52,500
|
|
You’re to prepare an entry to adjust the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts to the proper balance using the aging of accounts receivable method. The credit balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts account before adjustment is $500.
The correct journal entry is:
A. Uncollectible Accounts Expense 4,490
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 4,490
B. Uncollectible Accounts Expense 4,240
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 4,240
C. Uncollectible Accounts Expense 3,990
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 3,990
D. Uncollectible Accounts Expense 3,490
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 3,490
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below is information related to Rembrandt Inc.’s inventory.
|
(per unit)
|
Skis
|
Boots
|
Parkas
|
|
Historical cost
|
275.31
|
153.59
|
76.80
|
|
Selling price
|
314.43
|
210.11
|
106.86
|
|
Cost to distribute
|
27.53
|
11.59
|
3.62
|
|
Current replacement cost
|
294.15
|
152.15
|
73.90
|
|
Normal profit margin
|
46.37
|
42.02
|
30.79
|
Determine the following:
a. the two limits to market value (e.g., the ceiling and the floor) that should be used in the lower of cost or market computation for skis; (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 20.25.)
b. the cost amount that should be used in the lower of cost or market comparison of boots; (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 20.25.)
c. the market amount that should be used to value parkas on the basis of the lower of cost or market. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 20.25.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(FIFO, LIFO, Average Cost Inventory)
Esplanade Company was formed on December 1, 2010. The following information is available from Esplanade’s inventory records for Product BAP.
| |
Units
|
Unit Cost
|
|
January 1, 2010 (beginning inventory)
|
600
|
8.00
|
|
Purchases:
|
|
|
|
January 5, 2010
|
1,100
|
9.00
|
|
January 25, 2010
|
1,300
|
10.00
|
|
February 6, 2010
|
800
|
11.00
|
|
March 26, 2010
|
600
|
12.00
|
A physical inventory on March 31, 2010, shows 1,500 units on hand.
Required:
Prepare schedules to compute the ending inventory at March 31, 2010, under each of the following inventory methods. Assume Esplanade Company uses the periodic inventory method.
(a) FIFO
(b) LIFO
(c) Weighted average
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Prepare consolidated income statement with a wholly owned subsidiary, includes transfers)
Akron Inc., owns all outstanding stock of Toledo Corporation. Amortization expense of $15,000, per year for patented technology resulted from the original acquisition. For 2011, the companies had the following account balances:
| |
Akron
|
Toledo
|
|
Sales
|
1,100,000
|
600,000
|
|
Cost of goods
|
500,000
|
400,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
400,000
|
220,000
|
|
Investment income
|
not given
|
–
|
|
Dividends paid
|
80,000
|
30,000
|
Intra-entity sales of $320,000 occurred during 2010 and again in 2011. This merchandise cost $240,000 each year. Of the total transfers, $70,000 was still held on December 31, 2010, with $50,000 unsold on December 31, 2011.
a. In this business combination, the direction of the intercompany transfers (either upstream or downstream) is not important to the consolidated totals. Because Akron controls all of Toledo’s outstanding stock, no non controlling interest figures are computed.
If present, non-controlling interest balances are affected by upstream sales but not by downstream.
b. By including the impact of each of these four consolidation entries, the following income statement can be created from the individual account balances:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consolidation entries and noncontrolling interest balances affected by inventory transfers
On January 1, 2010, Doone Corporation acquired 60 percent of the outstanding voting stock of Rockne Company for $300,000 consideration. At the acquisition date, the fair value of the 40 percent non-controlling interest was $200,000 and Rockne’s assets and liabilities had a collective net fair value of $500,000. Doone uses the equity method in its internal records to account for its investments in Rockne. Rockne reports net income of $160,000 in 2011. Since being acquired Rockne has regularly supplied inventory to Doone at 25 percent more than cost. Sales to Doone amounted to $250,000 in 2010 and $300,000 in 2011. Approximately 30 percent of the inventory purchased during any one year is not used until the following year.
a. What is the non-controlling interest’s share of Rockne’s 2011 income?
b. Prepare Doone’s 2011 consolidation entries required by the intra-entity inventory transfers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Basic flexible budgeting
Centron, Inc., has the following budgeted production costs:
|
Direct materials
|
$0.40 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.80 per unit
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
2.20 per unit
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
24,000
|
|
Supervision
|
18,000
|
|
Maintenance
|
12,000
|
The company normally manufactures between 20,000 and 25,000 units each quarter.
Should output exceed 25,000 units, maintenance and other fixed costs are expected to increase by $6,000 and $4,500, respectively.
During the recent quarter ended March 31, Centron produced 25,500 units and incurred the following costs:
|
Direct Materials
|
10,710
|
|
Direct Labor
|
47,175
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
51,940
|
|
Fixed factory overhead
|
|
|
Supervision
|
24,500
|
|
Maintenance
|
23,700
|
|
Other
|
16,800
|
|
Total production costs
|
174,825
|
Instructions:
a. Prepare a flexible budget for 20,000, 22,500, and 25,000 units of activity.
b. Was Centron’s experience in the quarter cited better or worse than anticipated? Prepare
an appropriate performance report and explain your answer.
c. Explain the benefit of using flexible budgets (as opposed to static budgets) in the
measurement of performance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Straightforward variance analysis
Arrow Enterprises uses a standard costing system. The standard cost sheet for product no. 549 follows.
|
Direct materials: 4 units @ $6.50
|
26.00
|
|
Direct labor: 8 hours @ $8.50
|
68.00
|
|
Variable factory overhead: 8 hours @$7.00
|
56.00
|
|
Fixed factory overhead: 8 hours @2.5
|
20.00
|
|
Total standard cost per unit
|
170.00
|
The following information pertains to activity for December:
1. Direct materials acquired during the month amounted to 26,350 units at $6.40 per unit.
All materials were consumed in operations.
2. Arrow incurred an average wage rate of $8.75 for 51,400 hours of activity.
3. Total overhead incurred amounted to $508,400. Budgeted fixed overhead totals $1.8 million and is spread evenly throughout the year.
4. Actual production amounted to 6,500 completed units.
a. Compute Arrow’s direct material variances.
b. Compute Arrow’s direct labor variances.
c. Compute Arrow’s variances for factory overhead.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Production and cash-outlay computations
RPR, Inc., anticipates that 120,000 units of product K will be sold during May. Each unit of product K requires four units of raw material A. Actual inventories as of May 1 and budgeted inventories as of May 31 follow:
|
1-May 31-May
|
|
|
|
Product K (Units)
|
55,000
|
60,000
|
|
Rate Materials A (Units)
|
40,000
|
37,000
|
Each unit of raw material A costs $8; RPR pays for all purchases in the month of acquisition. Invoices that account for 80% of the cost of materials acquired will be paid within 10 days of receipt, entitling the company to a 2% cash discount.
a. Determine the number of units of product K to be manufactured in May.
b. Compute the May cash outlay for purchases of raw material A.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Straightforward net-present-value and payback computations
STL Entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight-seeing boat for summer tours along the Mississippi River. The following information is available:
|
Cost of boat
|
$500,000
|
|
Service life
|
10 summer seasons
|
|
Disposal value at the end of 10 seasons
|
$100,000
|
|
Capacity per trip
|
300 passengers
|
|
Fixed operating costs per season (including straight-line depreciation)
|
$160,000
|
|
Variable operating costs per trip
|
$1,000
|
|
Ticket price
|
$5 per passenger
|
All operating costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays. On the basis of similar operations in other parts of the country, management anticipates that each trip will be sold out and that 120,000 passengers will be carried each season. Ignore income taxes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Straightforward net present value and internal rate of return
The City of Bedford is studying a 600-acre site on Route 356 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows:
|
Purchase cost:
|
$450 per acre
|
|
Site preparation:
|
$175,000
|
The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Bedford, which shares a facility in Bath Township with other municipalities, estimates that the new location will save $40,000 in annual operating costs.
Should the landfill be acquired if Bedford desires an 8% return on its investment? Use the net-present-value method to determine your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash flow calculations and net present value
On January 2, 20X1, Bruce Greene invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.60 per share in 20X1 and 20X2; the dividend was raised to $3.10 per share in 20X3. On December 31, 20X3, Greene sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,000. Greene uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments.
a. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note: Greene is entitled to the 20X3 dividend.
b. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar.
c. Given the results of part (b), should Greene have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Alliance Company manufactures two products (brushes and combs). The overhead costs have been divided into four cost pools that use the following activity drivers.
# of Setups
Brushes 30
Combs 10
Cost per Pool 20,000
Required
a. Compute the overhead rates for each of the overhead pools and activity drivers listed.
b. Allocate (assign) the overhead costs to Products Brushes and Combs using activitybased costing.
c. Compute the overhead rate using machine hours under the functional-based costing system (also called plant-wide rate or normal costing).
d. Allocate the overhead costs to Products Brushes and Combs using the functional-based costing system overhead rate calculated in part (c).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company’s sales volume averages 4,000 units per year.
Recently, its main competitor reduced the price of its product to $48.
The company expects sales to drop dramatically unless it matches the competitor’s price.
In addition, the current profit per unit must be maintained.
Information about the product (for production of 4,000) is as follows.
| |
Standard Quantity
|
Actual Quantity
|
Actual Cost
|
|
Materials (pounds)
|
5,800
|
6,000
|
60,000
|
|
Labor (hours)
|
1,800
|
2,000
|
20,000
|
|
Setups (hours) –
|
–
|
225
|
8,000
|
|
Material handling
|
–
|
400
|
5,000
|
|
Warranties (number
|
–
|
300
|
15,000
|
|
The current selling
|
|
|
|
Required
a. Calculate the target cost for maintaining current market share and profitability.
b. Calculate the non-value-added cost per unit.
c. If non-value-added costs can be reduced to zero, can the target cost be achieved?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Peace Company has the following functional income statement for the prior month.
|
Sales ($50 * 100,000 units)
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
$5,000,000
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
$1,200,000
|
|
|
Direct labor
|
$950,000
|
|
|
Variable factory
|
$600,000
|
|
|
Fixed factory
|
$850,000
|
$3,600,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
$1,400,00
|
|
|
Selling and administrative expense
|
|
|
|
Variable
|
|
|
|
Fixed
|
|
|
Operating income
There were no beginning and ending inventories.
Required:
a. Calculate the contribution margin per unit.
b. Calculate the contribution margin ratio.
c. What is the break-even point in units?
d. What is the amount of sales in dollars needed to obtain a before-tax profit of $40,000?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mike’s Meats incurs costs of $4,000 while processing raw chicken meat into three products: breasts, wings, and thighs. The meat is then sold to local grocery stores based on the following.
| |
Sales Price per lb
|
Quantity produced (lbs)
|
|
Breast $2.00
|
$2.00
|
3,000
|
|
Wings $0.50
|
$0.50
|
1,000
|
|
Thighs
|
$1.00
|
2,000
|
Required: (Calculate relative quantity to three decimal points.)
a. Determine the cost and gross profit percentage for each type of chicken using the physical units method of joint cost allocation.
b. Repeat part (a) using the sales-value-at-split-off method of joint cost allocation.
c. The company has an opportunity to sell wings to local restaurants for $1.00 per pound but additional packaging is required, which will cost $300 per 1,000 lb. Assuming the physical unit method is used to allocate joint costs, should the offer be accepted?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Inventory valuation methods. Computations and concepts.
Wave Riders Surf Board Company began business on January 1 of the current year.
Purchases of surf boards were as follows:
|
Jan. 3
|
100 boards @ $125
|
|
Mar. 17
|
50 boards @ $130
|
|
May 9
|
246 boards @ $140
|
|
July 3
|
400 boards @ $150
|
|
Oct. 23
|
74 boards @ $160
|
Wave Riders sold 710 boards at an average price of $250 per board. The company uses a periodic inventory system.
Instructions:
a. Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and gross profit under each of the following inventory valuation methods:
First-in, first-out
Last-in, first-out
Weighted average
b. Which of the three methods would be chosen if management’s goal is to
(1) produce an up-to-date inventory valuation on the balance sheet?
(2) approximate the physical flow of a sand and gravel dealer?
(3) report low earnings (for tax purposes) for a separate electronics company that has been experiencing declining purchase prices?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Notes payable.
Sentry Security Systems purchased $72,000 of office equipment on April 1, 19X3, by signing a three-year, 12% note payable to Sharp, Inc. One-third of the principal, along with interest on the outstanding balance, is payable each April 1 until maturity. (The first payment is due in 19X4.)
a. Fill in the following table to reflect Sentry’s liabilities, assuming a March 31 year-end.
|
March 31
|
19X4
|
19X5
|
19X6
|
|
Current liabilities:
|
|
|
|
|
Current portion of long-term debt
|
|
|
|
|
Interest payable
|
|
|
|
|
Long-term liabilities:
|
|
|
|
|
Long-term debt
|
|
|
|
b. Assuming that interest is properly recorded at the end of each year, present the proper journal entry to record the last payment on April 1, 19X6.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Notes payable.
Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ended October 31:
Aug 2. Borrowed $75,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 120-day note for $79,000.
20. Issued a $40,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $40,000 delivery truck.
The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest rate.
Sept. 10 Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
11. Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and carries a 14% interest rate.
Oct. 10 The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.
11. The note to Datatex Equipment was due today, but insufficient funds were available for payment. Management authorized the issuance of a new 20-day, 18% note for $60,700, the maturity value of the original obligation.
31. The new note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
Instructions:
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the current liability section of Red Bank’s balance sheet as of October 31.
Assume the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Partner investments; journal entries.
The LP partnership was formed on January 1, 19X7, by investments from Bill Levy and Marv Parcells. Levy contributed $30,000 cash and $80,000 of land. Parcells contributed various assets from a business that he had operated over the past five years. A balance sheet from that business disclosed the following:
|
Accounts receivable
|
27,000
|
|
Allowance for uncollectibles
|
(3,200)
|
|
Equipment
|
68,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
(24,000)
|
The partners confirmed that the allowance for uncollectible accounts should be decreased by $600. In addition, an independent appraisal determined that fair market values of the land and equipment on January 1 were $125,000 and $35,000, respectively.
Prepare the journal entries needed to record the investments of Levy and Parcells.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hachey Company has accounts receivable of $95,100 at March 31, 2007. An analysis of the accounts shows these amounts.
Balance, March 31
|
Month of Sale
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
March
|
$65,000
|
$75,000
|
|
February
|
12,600
|
8,000
|
|
December and January
|
10,100
|
2,400
|
|
November and October
|
7,400
|
1,100
|
| |
$95,100
|
$86,500
|
Credit terms are 2/10, n/30. At March 31, 2007, there is a $2,200 credit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts prior to adjustments. The company uses the percentage of receivables basis for estimating uncollectible accounts.
Estimated Percentage
|
Age of Accounts
|
Uncollectible
|
|
Current
|
2%
|
|
1–30 days past due
|
7
|
|
31–90 days past due
|
30
|
|
Over 90 days
|
50
|
Instructions:
1. Determine the total estimated uncollectibles.
2. Prepare the adjusting entry at March 31, 2007, to record bad debts expense.
3. Discuss the implications of the changes in the aging schedule from 2006 to 2007.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For several years, a number of Food Lion, Inc., grocery stores were unprofitable. The company closed, and continues to close, some of these locations. It is apparent that the company will not be able to recover the cost of the assets associated with the closed stores.
Thus, the current value of these impaired assets must be written down (see the Case in Point on page 381).
A recent Food Lion income statement reports a $9.5 million charge against income pertaining to the write-down of impaired assets.
Instructions:
a. Explain why Food Lion must write down the current carrying value of its unprofitable stores.
b. Explain why the recent $9.5 million charge to write down these impaired assets is considered a noncash expense.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The board of trustees at a local church is concerned about the internal accounting controls pertaining to the offering collections made at weekly services. They ask you to serve on a three-person audit team with the internal auditor of the university and a CPA who has just joined the church. At a meeting of the audit team and the board of trustees you learn the following.
1. The church’s board of trustees has delegated responsibility for the financial management and audit of the financial records to the finance committee. This group prepares the annual budget and approves major disbursements but is not involved in collections or recordkeeping. No audit has been made in recent years because the same trusted employee has kept church records and served as financial secretary for 15 years. The church does not carry any fidelity insurance.
2. The collection at the weekly service is taken by a team of ushers who volunteer to serve for 1 month. The ushers take the collection plates to a basement office at the rear of the church. They hand their plates to the head usher and return to the church service. After all plates have been turned in, the head usher counts the cash received. The head usher then places the cash in the church safe along with a notation of the amount counted. The head usher volunteers to serve for 3 months.
3. The next morning the financial secretary opens the safe and recounts the collection.
The secretary withholds $150 – $200 in cash, depending on the cash expenditures expected for the week, and deposits the remainder of the collections in the bank. To facilitate the deposit, church members who contribute by check are asked to make their checks payable to “Cash.”
4. Each month the financial secretary reconciles the bank statement and submits a copy of the reconciliation to the board of trustees. The reconciliations have rarely contained any bank errors and have never shown any errors per books.
Instructions
1. Indicate the weaknesses in internal accounting control in the handling of collections.
2. List the improvements in internal control procedures that you plan to make at the next meeting of the audit team for:
a. the ushers
b. the head usher
c. the financial secretary
d. the finance committee.
3. What church policies should be changed to improve internal control
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hachey Company has accounts receivable of $95,100 at March 31, 2007. An analysis of the accounts shows these amounts.
|
Balance, March 31
|
|
|
|
Month of Sale
|
2007
|
2006
|
|
March
|
$65,000
|
$75,000
|
|
February
|
12,600
|
8,000
|
|
December and January
|
10,100
|
2,400
|
|
November and October
|
7,400
|
1,100
|
| |
$95,100
|
$86,500
|
Credit terms are 2/10, n/30. At March 31, 2007, there is a $2,200 credit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts prior to adjustments. The company uses the percentage of receivables basis for estimating uncollectible accounts.
Estimated Percentage
|
Age of Accounts
|
Uncollectible
|
|
Current
|
2%
|
|
1–30 days past due
|
7
|
|
31–90 days past due
|
30
|
|
Over 90 days
|
50
|
Instructions:
1. Determine the total estimated uncollectibles.
2. Prepare the adjusting entry at March 31, 2007, to record bad debts expense.
3. Discuss the implications of the changes in the aging schedule from 2006 to 2007.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance and direct write-off methods, and reporting receivables on the balance sheet
On August 31, 2012, Daisy Floral Supply had a $155,000 debit balance in Accounts receivable and a $6,200 credit balance in Allowance for uncollectible accounts. During September, Daisy made
sales on account, $590,000.
collections on account, $627,000.
write-offs of uncollectible receivables, $7,000.
Requirements
1. Journalize all September entries using the allowance method. Uncollectible account expense was estimated at 3% of credit sales. Show all September activity in Accounts receivable, Allowance for uncollectible accounts, and Uncollectible account expense (post to these T-accounts).
2. Using the same facts, assume instead that Daisy used the direct write-off method to account for uncollectible receivables. Journalize all September entries using the direct writeoff method. Post to Accounts receivable and Uncollectible account expense and show their balances at September 30, 2012.
3. What amount of uncollectible account expense would Daisy report on its September income statement under each of the two methods? Which amount better matches expense with revenue? Give your reason.
4. What amount of net accounts receivable would Daisy report on its September 30, 2012 balance sheet under each of the two methods? Which amount is more realistic? Give your reason.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts (aging of accounts method, card sales, notes receivable, and accrued interest revenue
Sleepy Recliner Chairs completed the following selected transactions:
2011
Jul 1 : Sold inventory to Go-Mart, receiving a $45,000, nine-month 12% note, Ignore cost of goods sold.
Oct 31: Recorded credit-and Debit-card sales for the period of 19,000.
Nov 3: Card processor drafted company’s checking account for processing fee of $420.
Dec 31: Made an adjusting entry to accrue interest on Go-Mart note 31: Made an Adjusting entry to record uncollectible account expense based on an aging of accounts receivable. The aging schedule shows that $14,100 of accounts receivable will not be collected. Prior to this adjustment, the credit balance in allowance for uncollectible accounts is $10,200.
2012
Apr 1: Collected the Maturity Value of the Go- mart note.
June 23: Sold Merchandise to Appeal, Corp., receiving a 60-day, 12% note for $7,000.
Ignore cost of goods sold.
Aug 22: Appeal, Corp., dishonored its note (failed to pay) at maturity; we converted the maturity value of the note to an account receivable.
Nov 16 : Loaned $23,000 cash to Creed, Inc, receiving a 90-day, 16% note.
Dec 5 : Collected in full on account from Appeal, Corp s31: Accrued the interest on the Creek, Inc, note.
Requirement:
1. Record the transactions in the journal of Sleepy recliner Chairs. Explanations are not required. ( for notes stated in days, used a 360- day year. Round to the nearest dollar).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Capitalized asset cost and partial year depreciation
Drive and Fly, near an airport, incurred the following cost to acquire land, make land improvements, and construct and furnish a small building:
|
a. Purchase price of 3 acres of land
|
80,000
|
|
b. Delinquent real estate taxes on the land to be paid by Drive and fly
|
5,600
|
|
c. Additional dirt and earth moving
|
9,000
|
|
d. Title insurance on the Land acquisition
|
3,200
|
|
e. Fence around the boundary of the property
|
9,100
|
|
f. Building permit for the building
|
500
|
|
g. Architect fee’s for the design of the building
|
20,700
|
|
h. Sign near the front of the property
|
9,000
|
|
i. Material used to construct the building
|
215,000
|
|
j. Labor to construct the building
|
173,000
|
|
k. Interest cost on construction loan for the building
|
9,500
|
|
l. Parking lot on the property
|
29,000
|
|
m. Lights for the parking lots
|
11,300
|
|
n. Salary for the construction supervisor (80% to the building 20% to the parking lot and concrete walks)
|
80,000
|
|
o. Furniture
|
11,600
|
|
p. Transportation of furniture from seller to the building
|
2,200
|
|
q. Landscaping ( shrubs)
|
6,300
|
Drive and fly depreciates land improvement over 20 years, buildings over 40 years, and furniture over 10 years, all on a straight-line basis with zero residual value.
Requirements:
1. Set up columns for land, land improvements, building, and furniture. Show how to account for each cost by listing the cost under the correct account; determine the total cost of asset.
2. All construction was complete and the assets were placed in service on July 1. Record partial-year-depreciation for the year ended December 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for intangibles
Midland Telecom provides communication service in Iowa,Nebraska, the Dakotas, and Montana. Midland purchases goodwill as part of the acquisition of Shipley Wireless Company, which had the following.
|
Book value of assets
|
750,000
|
|
Market Value of assets
|
1,000,000
|
|
Liabilities
|
530,000
|
Requirements:
1. Journalize the entry to record Midland’s purchase of Shipley Wireless for $ 320,000 cash plus a $480,000 note payable.
2. What special asset does Midland’s acquisition of Shipley Wireless identify? How should Midland Telecom account for this asset after acquiring Shipley Wireless? Explain in detail.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Direct Materials, Direct Labor, and Factory Overhead Cost Variance Analysis
Specialty Polymers, Inc., processes a base chemical into plastic. Standard costs and actual costs for direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead incurred for the manufacture of 19,000 units of product were as follows:
| |
Standard Costs
|
Actual Costs
|
|
Direct materials
|
2,500 lbs at $8.10
|
2,440 lbs at $8.30
|
|
Direct labor
|
3,800 hrs at $17.50
|
3,750 hrs at $17.68
|
|
Factory overhead
|
Rates per direct labor hr
|
|
Based on 100% of normal capacity of 3,900 direct labor hrs:
|
Variable cost $2.20
|
$8,100 variable cost
|
|
Fixed cost $3.50
|
$13,650 fixed cost
|
Each unit requires 0.2 hour of direct labor.
Required:
a. Determine the price variance, quantity variance, and total direct materials cost variance.
Use the minus sign to enter favorable variances as negative numbers.
b. Determine the rate variance, time variance, and total direct labor cost variance. Use the minus sign to enter favorable variances as negative numbers.
c. Determine variable factory overhead Controllable Variance, the fixed factory overhead volume variance, and total factory overhead cost variance. Use the minus sign to enter favorable variances as negative numbers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Copa Company, a manufacturer of stereo systems, started its production in October 2012.
For the preceding 3 years Copa had been a retailer of stereo systems. After a thorough survey of stereo system markets, Copa decided to turn its retail store into a stereo equipment factory.
Raw materials cost for a stereo system will total $74 per unit. Workers on the production lines are on average paid $12 per hour. A stereo system usually takes 5 hours to complete.
In addition, the rent on the equipment used to assemble stereo systems amounts to $4,900 per month. Indirect materials cost $5 per system. A supervisor was hired to oversee production; her monthly salary is $3,000. Janitorial costs are $1,300 monthly. Advertising costs for the stereo system will be $8,500 per month. The factory building depreciation expense is $7,200 per year. Property taxes on the factory building will be $9,000 per year.
Requirements:
A. Complete the answer sheet. Assuming that Copa manufactures, on average, 1,300 stereo systems per month, enter each cost item on your answer sheet, placing the dollar amount per month under the appropriate headings. Total the dollar amounts in each of the columns.
B. Compute the cost to produce one stereo system.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts (aging of accounts method, card sales, notes receivable, and accrued interest revenue
Relaxing Recliner Chairs completed the following selected transactions:
2011
Jul 1 : Sold inventory to Great-Mart, receiving a $45,000, nine-month 12% note, Ignore cost of goods sold.
Oct 31: Recorded credit-and debit-card sales for the period of 21,000.
Nov 3: Card processor drafted company’s checking account for processing fee of $410.
Dec 31: Made an adjusting entry to accrue interest on Great-Mart note
31: Made an Adjusting entry to record uncollectible account expense based on an aging of accounts receivable. The aging schedule shows that $15,200 of accounts receivable will not be collected. Prior to this adjustment, the credit balance in allowance for uncollectible accounts is $11,600.
2012
Apr 1: Collected the Maturity Value of the Great-Mart note.
June 23: Sold Merchandise to Ambiance, Corp., receiving a 60-day, 9% note for $13,000.
Ignore cost of goods sold.
Aug 22: Ambiance, Corp., dishonored its note (failed to pay) at maturity; we converted the maturity value of the note to an account receivable.
Nov 16 : Loaned $21,000 cash to Creed, Inc, receiving a 90-day, 8% note.
Dec 5 : Collected in full on account from Ambiance, Corp.
31: Accrued the interest on the Creek, Inc, note.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Night Watch Company recently began production of a new product, the halogen light, which required the investment of $500,000 in assets. The costs of producing and selling 12,000 halogen lights are estimated as follows:
|
Variable costs per unit:
|
22
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Direct materials
|
12
|
Factory overhead
|
120,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
6
|
Selling and administrative expense
|
60,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
4
|
|
|
|
Total
|
$44
|
|
|
Night Watch Company is currently considering establishing a selling price for the halogen light. The president of Night Watch Company has decided to use the cost-plus approach to product pricing and has indicated that the halogen light must earn a 12% rate of return on invested assets.
Instructions
1. Determine the amount of desired profit from the production and sale of the halogen light.
2. Assuming that the total cost concept is used, determine:
(a) The cost amount per unit,
(b) The markup percentage (rounded to two decimal places), and
(c) The selling price of the halogen light (rounded to nearest whole dollar).
3. Assuming that the product cost concept is used, determine
(a) The cost amount per unit,
(b) The markup percentage, and
(c) The selling price of the halogen light.
4. Assuming that the variable cost concept is used, determine
(a) The cost amount per unit,
(b) The markup percentage (rounded to two decimal places), and
(c) The selling price of the halogen light (rounded to nearest whole dollar).
5. Comment on any additional considerations that could influence establishing the selling price for the halogen light.
6. Assume that as of September 1, 2010, 7,000 units of halogen light have been produced and sold during the current year. Analysis of the domestic market indicates that 3,000
additional units of the halogen light are expected to be sold during the remainder of the year at the normal product price determined under the total cost concept.
On September 5, Night Watch Company received an offer from Forever Glow Inc. for 2,000 units of the halogen light at $45 each. Forever Glow Inc. will market the units inJapanunder its own brand name, and no selling and administrative expenses associated with the sale will be incurred by Night Watch Company. The additional business is not expected to affect the domestic sales of the halogen light, and the additional units could be produced using existing capacity.
(a) Prepare a differential analysis report of the proposed sale to Forever Glow Inc.
(b) Based on the differential analysis report in part (a), should the proposal be accepted?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Seattle Roast Coffee Company produces Colombian coffee in batches of 8,000 pounds.
The standard quantity of materials required in the process is 8,000 pounds,which cost $5.00 per pound. Colombian coffee can be sold without further processing for $10.80 per pound. Colombian coffee can also be processed further to yield Decaf Colombian, which can be sold for $12.50 per pound.The processing into Decaf Colombian requires additional processing costs of $10,500 per batch. The additional processing will also cause a 5% loss of product due to evaporation.
a. Prepare a differential analysis report for the decision to sell or process further.
b. Should Seattle Roast sell Colombian coffee or process further and sell Decaf Colombian?
c. Determine the price of Decaf Colombian that would cause neither an advantage or disadvantage for processing further and selling Decaf Colombian.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budget Performance Report for a Cost Center
Amoruso Parts Company sells vehicle parts to automotive companies. The Truck Division is organized as a cost center. The budget for the Truck Division for the month ended October 31, 2010, is as follows (in thousands):
|
Customer service salaries
|
260,450
|
|
Insurance and property taxes
|
54,600
|
|
Distribution salaries
|
415,400
|
|
Marketing salaries
|
489,700
|
|
Engineer salaries
|
398,500
|
|
Warehouse wages
|
279,100
|
|
Equipment depreciation
|
87,500
|
|
Total
|
1,985,250
|
During October, the costs incurred in the Truck Division were as follows:
|
Customer service salaries
|
333,370
|
|
Insurance and property taxes
|
52,960
|
|
Distribution salaries
|
411,250
|
|
Marketing salaries
|
548,460
|
|
Engineer salaries
|
390,530
|
|
Warehouse wages
|
267,930
|
|
Equipment depreciation
|
87,500
|
|
Total
|
2,092,000
|
Instructions
1. Prepare a budget performance report for the director of the Truck Division for the month of October.
2. For which costs might the director be expected to request supplemental reports?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Equity Transactions and Statement Preparation)
On January 5, 2010, Phelps Corporation received a charter granting the right to issue 5,000 shares of $100 par value, 8% cumulative and nonparticipating preferred stock, and 50,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. It then completed these transactions.
Jan. 11 Issued 20,000 shares of common stock at $16 per share.
Feb. 1 Issued to Sanchez Corp. 4,000 shares of preferred stock for the following assets: machinery with a fair market value of $50,000; a factory building with a fair market value of $160,000; and land with an appraised value of $270,000.
July 29 Purchased 1,800 shares of common stock at $17 per share. (Use cost method.)
Aug. 10 Sold the 1,800 treasury shares at $14 per share.
Dec. 31 Declared a $0.25 per share cash dividend on the common stock and declared the preferred dividend.
Dec. 31 Closed the Income Summary account. There was a $175,700 net income.
Instructions:
a. Record the journal entries for the transactions listed above. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)
b. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of Phelps Corporation’s balance sheet as of December 31, 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyze a Performance Report
The Exterminator Inc. provides on-site residential pest extermination services. The company has several mobile teams who are dispatched from a central location in company-owned trucks. The company uses the number of jobs to measure activity. At the beginning of May, the company budgeted for 200 jobs, but the actual number of jobs turned out to be 208. A report comparing the budgeted revenues and costs to the actual revenues and costs appear below:
The Exterminator inc
Variance Report for the month ended May 31
|
Planning budget
|
Actual Results
|
Variances
|
|
|
Jobs
|
200
|
208
|
|
|
Revenue
|
$3,700
|
$36,400
|
$600 U
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
|
|
Mobile team operating costs
|
16,900
|
17,060
|
160 U
|
|
Exterminating supplies
|
4,000
|
4,350
|
350 U
|
|
Advertising
|
900
|
1,040
|
140 U
|
|
Dispatching costs
|
2,700
|
2,340
|
360 U
|
|
Office Rent
|
2,300
|
2,300
|
0
|
|
Insurance
|
3,600
|
3,600
|
0
|
|
Total Expense
|
30,400
|
30,690
|
290 U
|
|
Net Operating Income
|
$6,600
|
$5,710
|
$890 U
|
Required:
Is the above variance report useful for evaluating how well revenues and costs were controlled during May? Why or why not?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tjelmeland Corporation is considering dropping product S85U. Data from the company’s accounting system appear below.
|
Sales
|
$360,000
|
|
Variable Expenses
|
$158,000
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Expenses
|
$119,000
|
|
Fixed Selling and Administrative Expenses
|
$94,000
|
All fixed expenses of the company are fully allocated to products in the company’s accounting system. Further investigation has revealed that $55,000 of the fixed manufacturing expenses and $71,000 of the fixed selling and administrative expenses are avoidable if product S85U is discontinued.
Required:
i. According to the company’s accounting system, what is the net operating income earned by product S85U? Show your work!
ii. What would be the effect on the company’s overall net operating income of dropping product S85U? Should the product be dropped? Show your work!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial data for Beaker Company for last year appear below:
Beaker Company
Statements of Financial Position
|
Assets
|
|
|
| |
Beginning Balance
|
Ending Balance
|
|
Cash
|
50,000
|
70,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
20,000
|
25,000
|
|
Inventory
|
30,000
|
35,000
|
|
Plant and equipment (net)
|
120,000
|
110,000
|
|
Investment in Cedar Company
|
80,000
|
100,000
|
|
Land (undeveloped)
|
170,000
|
170,000
|
|
Total Assets
|
470,000
|
510,000
|
|
Liabilities and Owners’ equity:
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
70,000
|
90,000
|
|
Long-term debt
|
250,000
|
250,000
|
|
Owners’ equity
|
150,000
|
170,000
|
|
Total liabilities and owners equity
|
470,000
|
510,000
|
|
Beaker Company
|
|
|
|
Income Statement
|
|
|
|
Sales
|
414,000
|
|
|
Less Operating expenses
|
351,900
|
|
|
New Operating Income
|
62,100
|
|
|
Less Interest and taxes:
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
30,000
|
|
|
Tax Expense
|
10,000
|
40,000
|
|
Net Income
|
|
$22,100
|
The company paid dividends of $2,100 last year. The “Investment in Cedar Company” on the statement of financial position represents an investment in the stock of another company.
Required:
i. Compute the company’s margin, turnover, and return on investment for last year.
ii. The Board of Directors of Beaker Company has set a minimum required return of 20%.
What was the company’s residual income last year?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ferro Wares is a division of a major corporation. The following data are for the latest year of operations.
|
Sales
|
$33,040,000
|
|
Net Operating Income
|
$1,453,760
|
|
Average Operating Assets
|
$8,000,000
|
|
The company’s minimum required rate of return
|
18%
|
Required:
i. What is the division’s ROI?
ii. What is the division’s residual income?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rosiek Corporation uses part A55 in one of its products. The company’s accounting department reports the following costs of producing the 4,000 units of the part that are needed every year.
|
Per Unit
|
|
|
Direct Materials
|
$2.80
|
|
Direct Labor
|
$6.30
|
|
Variable Overhead
|
$8.50
|
|
Supervisor’s Salary
|
$2.60
|
|
Depreciation of Special Equipment
|
$6.80
|
|
Allocated General Overhead
|
$6.10
|
An outside supplier has offered to make the part and sell it to the company for $32.30 each.
If this offer is accepted, the supervisor’s salary and all of the variable costs, including direct labor, can be avoided. The special equipment used to make the part was purchased many years ago and has no salvage value or other use. The allocated general overhead represents fixed costs of the entire company. If the outside supplier’s offer were accepted, only $4,000 of these allocated general overhead costs would be avoided. In addition, the space used to produce part A55 could be used to make more of one of the company’s other products, generating an additional segment margin of $26,000 per year for that product.
Required:
i. Prepare a report that shows the effect on the company’s total net operating income of buying part A55 from the supplier rather than continuing to make it inside the company.
ii. Which alternative should the company choose?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Malone Company estimates that 360,000 direct labor hours will be worked during the coming year, 2008, in the Packaging Department. On this basis, the following budgeted manufacturing overhead cost data are computed for the year.
|
Fixed Overhead
|
Costs
|
Variable Overhead
|
Costs
|
|
Supervision
|
90,000
|
Indirect labor
|
126,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
60,000
|
Indirect materials
|
90,000
|
|
Insurance
|
30,000
|
Repairs
|
54,000
|
|
Rent
|
24,000
|
Utilities
|
72,000
|
|
Property taxes
|
18,000
|
Lubricants
|
18,000
|
| |
222,000
|
|
360,000
|
It is estimated that direct labor hours worked each month will range from 27,000 to 36,000 hours.
During October, 27,000 direct labor hours were worked and the following overhead costs were incurred.
Fixed overhead costs: Supervision $7,500, Depreciation $5,000, Insurance $2,470, Rent $2,000, and Property taxes $1,500.
Variable overhead costs: Indirect labor $10,360, Indirect materials, $6,400, Repairs $4,000, Utilities $5,700, and Lubricants $1,640.
Instructions
a) Prepare a monthly manufacturing overhead flexible budget for each increment of 3,000 direct labor hours over the relevant range for the year ending December 31, 2008.
(b) Prepare a flexible budget report for October.
(c) Comment on management’s efficiency in controlling manufacturing overhead costs in October.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethics Case
National Products Corporation participates in a highly competitive industry. In order to meet this competition and achieve profit goals, the company has chosen the decentralized form of organization. Each manager of a decentralized investment center is measured on the basis of profit contribution, market penetration, and return on investment.
Failure to meet the objectives established by corporate management for these measures has not been acceptable and usually has resulted in demotion or dismissal of an investment center manager.
An anonymous survey of managers in the company revealed that the mangers feel the pressure to compromise their personal ethical standards to achieve the corporate objectives. For example, at certain plant locations there was pressure to reduce quality control to a level which could not assure that all unsafe products would be rejected. Also, sales personnel were encouraged to use questionable sales tactics to obtain orders, including gifts and other incentives to purchasing agents.
The chief executive officer is disturbed by the survey findings. In his opinion such behavior cannot be condoned by the company. He concludes that the company should do something about this problem.
Instructions:
(a) Who are the stakeholders (the affected parties) in this situation?
(b) Identify the ethical implications, conflicts, or dilemmas in the above described situation.
(c) What might the company do to reduce the pressure on managers and decrease the ethical conflicts?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reporting category Item
T. Trading securities ___ 1. 35% of the nonvoting preferred stock of American Aircraft Company.
M. Securities held-to-maturity ___ 2. Treasury bills to be held to maturity.
A. Securities available-for-sale ___ 3. Two-year note receivable from affiliate.
E. Equity method ___ 4. Accounts receivable.
C. Consolidation ___ 5. Treasury bond maturing in one week.
N. None of these ___ 6. Common stock held in trading account for immediate resale.
___ 7. Bonds acquired to profit from short-term differences in price.
___ 8. 35% of the voting common stock of Computer Storage Devices Company.
___ 9. 90% of the voting common stock of Affiliated Peripherals, Inc.
___ 10. Corporate bonds of Primary Smelting Company to be sold if interest rates fall 1/2%.
___ 11. 25% of the voting common stock of Smith Foundries Corporation: 51% family-owned by Smith family; fair value determinable.
___ 12. 17% of the voting common stock of Shipping Barrels Corporation; Investor’s CEO on the board of directors of Shipping Barrels Corporation.
Required:
Indicate (by letter) the way each of the investments listed below most likely should be accounted for based on the information provided.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Trade in asset-two situations
Community Bank recently traded in office fixtures. Here are the facts:
|
Old
|
Fixtures:
|
New Fixtures:
|
|
Cost
|
96,000
|
Cash paid $103,000 plus the old fixtures
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation
|
65,000
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Miracle Printers (MP) manufactures printers. Assume that MP recently paid $600,000 for a patent on a new laser printer. Although it gives legal protection for 20 years, the patent is expected to provide a competitive advantage for only eight years.
Requirements
1. Assuming the straight-line method of amortization, make journal entries to record (a) the purchase of the patent and (b) amortization for year 1.
2. After using the patent for four years, MP learns at an industry trade show that another company is designing a more efficient printer. On the basis of this new information, MP decides, starting with year 5, to amortize the remaining cost of the patent over two remaining years, giving the patent a total useful life of six years. Record amortization for year 5.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing liability transactions
The following transactions of Denver Pharmacies occurred during 2011 and 2012:
2011 Jan 9 Purchased computer equipment at a cost of $9,000, signing a six-month, 6% note payable for that amount.
Jan 29 Recorded the week’s sales of $64,000, three-fourths on credit, and one-fourth for cash. Sales amounts are subject to a 6% state sales tax.
Feb 5 Sent the last week’s sales tax to the state.
Feb 28 Borrowed $204,000 on a four-year, 10% note payable that calls for $51,000 annual installment payments plus interest. Record the current and long-term portions of the note payable in two separate accounts.
Jul 9 Paid the six-month, 6% note, plus interest, at maturity.
Aug 31 Purchased inventory for $12,000, signing a six-month, 9% note payable.
Dec 31 Accrued warranty expense, which is estimated at 2% of sales of $603,000.
Dec 31 Accrued interest on all outstanding notes payable. Make a separate interest accrual for each note payable.
2012 Feb 28 Paid the first installment and interest for one year on the four-year note payable.
Feb 29 Paid off the 9% note plus interest at maturity.
Requirement
1. Journalize the transactions inDenver’s general journal. Explanations are not required.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computing and journalizing payroll amounts
Louis Welch is general manager of United Tanning Salons. During 2012, Welch worked for the company all year at a $6,200 monthly salary. He also earned a year-end bonus equal to 10% of his salary.
Welch’s federal income tax withheld during 2012 was $850 per month, plus $924 on his bonus check. State income tax withheld came to $70 per month, plus $40 on the bonus.
The FICA tax withheld was 7.65% of the first $106,800 in annual earnings. Welch authorized the following payroll deductions: Charity Fund contribution of 1% of total earnings and life insurance of $5 per month.
United incurred payroll tax expense on Welch for FICA tax of 7.65% of the first $106,800 in4 annual earnings. The company also paid state unemployment tax of 5.4% and federal unemployment tax of 0.8% on the first $7,000 in annual earnings. In addition, United provides Welch with health insurance at a cost of $150 per month. During 2012, United paid $4,000 into Welch’s retirement plan.
Requirements
1. Compute Welch’s gross pay, payroll deductions, and net pay for the full year 2012.
Round all amounts to the nearest dollar.
2. Compute United’s total 2012 payroll expense for Welch.
3. Make the journal entry to record United’s expense for Welch’s total earnings for the year, his payroll deductions, and net pay. Debit Salary expense and Bonus expense as appropriate. Credit liability accounts for the payroll deductions and Cash for net pay. An explanation is not required.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method and reporting receivables on the balance sheet.
At December 31, 2012, the Accounts receivable balance of GPS Technology is $190,000.
The Allowance for doubtful accounts has an $8,600 credit balance. GPS Technology prepares the following aging schedule for its accounts receivable:
|
Age of Accounts
|
|
|
|
|
| |
1-30 Days
|
31-60 Days
|
61-90 Days
|
Over 90 Days
|
|
Accounts Receivable 190,000
|
80,000
|
60,000
|
40,000
|
10,000
|
|
Estimated percent uncollectible
|
0.4%
|
5.0%
|
6.0%
|
50.0%
|
Requirements
1. Journalize the year-end adjusting entry for doubtful accounts on the basis of the aging schedule, Show the T-account for the Allowance for uncollectible accounts at December 31, 2012.
2. Show how GPS Technology will report its net Accounts receivable on its December 31, 2012 balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method and reporting receivables on the balance sheet
At September 30, 2011, Windy Mountain Flagpoles had Accounts receivable of $34,000 and Allowance for uncollectible accounts had a credit balance of $3,000. During October 2012, Windy Mountain Flagpoles recorded the following:
- Sales of $189,000 ($165,000 on account; $24,000 for cash).
- Collections on account, $133,000.
- Uncollectible account expense, estimated as 1% of credit sales.
- Write-offs of uncollectible receivables, $2,800.
Requirements
1. Journalize sales, collections, uncollectible account expense using the allowance method (percent-of-sales method), and write-offs of uncollectibles during October 2012.
2. Prepare T-accounts to show the ending balances in Accounts receivable and Allowance for uncollectible accounts. Compute net accounts receivable at October 31. How much does Windy Mountain expect to collect?
3. Show how Windy Mountain Flagpoles will report net Accounts receivable on its October 31, 2012 balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lump-sum purchase of assets
Deadwood Properties bought 3 lots in a subdivision for a lump-sum price. An independent appraiser valued the lots as follows:
|
Lot
|
Appraisal Value
|
|
1
|
70,500
|
|
2
|
235,000
|
|
3
|
164,500
|
Requirement:
Record the purchase in the journal, identifying each lot’s cost in separate Land account.
Round decimals to two places, and use your computed percentages throughout.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Adjusting and Reversing Entries)
When the accounts of Constantine Inc. are examined, the adjusting data listed below are uncovered on December 31, the end of an annual fiscal period.
1. The prepaid insurance account shows a debit of $6,480, representing the cost of a 2-year fire insurance policy dated August 1 of the current year.
2. On November 1, Rental Revenue was credited for $3,240, representing revenue from a subrental for a 3-month period beginning on that date.
3. Purchase of advertising materials for $880 during the year was recorded in the Advertising Expense account. On December 31, advertising materials of $337 are on hand.
4. Interest of $837 has accrued on notes payable.
Instructions:
Prepare in general journal form: (a) the adjusting entry for each item and (b) the reversing entry for each item where appropriate. (If no journal entry is required, please choose No entry as the description and put 0 as the amount.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Woolford Company has the following portfolio of available for sale securities at Dec 31,2006.
|
Security
|
QTY
|
Present
|
Per Share Interest
|
Cost
|
Market
|
|
Favre, Inc.
|
2000
|
shares
|
8%
|
$11
|
$16
|
|
Brady Corp.
|
5000
|
shares
|
14%
|
23
|
17
|
|
McNabb Co.
|
4000
|
shares
|
2%
|
31
|
24
|
Instructions
a. What should be reported on Woolford’s Dec 31,2006, balance sheet relative to these long-term available for sale securities?
On December 31,2007, Woolfords portfolio of available for sale securites consisted of the following common stocks.
|
Security
|
QTY
|
Present
|
Per share Interest
|
Cost
|
Market
|
|
Brady Corp.
|
5,000
|
shares
|
14%
|
$23
|
$30
|
|
McNabb Company
|
4,000
|
shares
|
2%
|
31
|
23
|
|
Mc Nabb CO
|
2,000
|
shares
|
1%
|
25
|
23
|
At the end of the year 2007, Woolford Company changed its intent relative to its investment in Favre, Inc. and reclassified the shares to trading securities status when the shares were selling for $9 per share.
b. What should be reported on the face of Woolford’s Dec 31,2007, balance sheet relative to available for sale securities investments?
c. What should be reported to reflect the transactions above in Woolford’s 2007 income statement
d. Assuming the comparative financial statements for 2006 and 2007 are presented, draft the footnote necessary for full disclosure if Woolford’s transactions and position in equity securities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At December 31, 2006, the available-for-sale equity portfolio for Steffi Graf, Inc. is as follows.
|
Security
|
Cost
|
Fair Value
|
Unrealized Gain (Loss)
|
|
A
|
17,500
|
15,000
|
(2,500)
|
|
B
|
12,500
|
14,000
|
1,500
|
|
C
|
23,000
|
25,500
|
2,500
|
|
Total
|
53,000
|
54,500
|
1,500
|
Previous securities fair value adjustment balance—Dr. 400
Securities fair value adjustment—Dr. 1,100
On January 20, 2007, Steffi Graf, Inc. sold security A for $15,100. The sale proceeds are net of brokerage fees.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2006 to report the portfolio at FMV.
(b) Show the balance sheet presentation of the investment related accounts at December 31, 2006. (Ignore notes presentation.)
(c) Prepare the journal entry for the 2007 sale of security A.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consolidated Workpaper: Two Cases
The two following separate cases show the financial position of a parent company and its subsidiary company on November 30, 2011, just after the parent had purchased 90% of the subsidiary’s stock:
| |
Case I
|
Case II
|
| |
P Company
|
S Company
|
P Company
|
S Company
|
|
Current assets
|
880,000
|
260,000
|
780,000
|
280,000
|
|
Investment in S Company
|
190,000
|
|
|
190,000
|
|
Long-term assets
|
1,400,000
|
400,000
|
1,200,000
|
400,000
|
|
Other assets
|
90,000
|
40,000
|
70,000
|
70,000
|
|
Total
|
2,560,000
|
700,000
|
2,240,000
|
750,000
|
|
Current liabilities
|
640,000
|
270,000
|
700,000
|
260,000
|
|
Long-term liabilities
|
850,000
|
290,000
|
920,000
|
270,000
|
|
Common stock
|
600,000
|
180,000
|
600,000
|
180,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
470,000
|
(40,000)
|
20,000
|
40,000
|
|
Total
|
2,560,000
|
700,000
|
2,240,000
|
750,000
|
Prepare a November 30, 2011, consolidated balance sheet workpaper for each of the foregoing cases.
In Case I, any difference between book value of equity and the value implied by the purchase price relates to subsidiary long-term assets.
In Case II, assume that any excess of book value over the value implied by purchase price is due to overvalued long-term assets.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selk Steel Co., which began operations on Jan. 4, 2009, had the following subsequent transactions and events in its long – term investments.
2009
Jan. 5 Selk purchased 50,000 shares (20% of total) of Wulf’s common stock for $1,567,000.
Oct. 23 Wulf declared and paid a cash dividend of $3.20 per share.
Dec. 31 Wulf’s net income for 2009 is $1,164,000, and the market value of its stock at Dec.
31 is $34.00 per share.
2010
Oct 15 Wulf declared and paid a cash dividend of $2.50 per share.
Dec. 31 Wulf’s net income for 2010 is $1,476,000, and the market value of its stock at Dec.
31 is $36.00 per share.
2011
Jan. 2 Selk sold all of its investment in Kildaire for $1,895,500 cash.
Part 1
Assume that Selk has a significant influence over Wulf with its 20% share of stock
Required
1. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events for Selk.
2. Compute the carrying (book) value per share of Selk’s investment in Wulf common stock as reflected in the investment account on Jan 1, 2011.
3. Compute the net increase or decrease in Selk’s equity from Jan. 5, 2009 trhough Jan. 2, 2011, resulting from its investment in Wulf.
Part 2
Assume that although Selk owns 20% of Wulf’s outstanding stock, circumstances indicate that it does not have a significant influence over the investee and that it is classified as an available-for-sale security investment
Required
1. Prepare journal entries to record the preceeding transaction and events for Selk. Also prepare an entry dated Jan. 2, 2011, to remove any balance related to the market adjustment.
2. Compute the cost per share of Selks’s investment in Wulf common stock as reflected in the investment account on Jan. 1, 2011.
3. Compute the net increase or decrease in Selk’s equity from Jan. 5, 2009, through Jan. 2, 2011, resulting from its investment in Wulf.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Condensed balance sheets for Phillips Company and Solina Company on January 1, 2010, are as follows:
| |
Phillips
|
Solina
|
|
Current assets
|
180,000
|
85,000
|
|
Plant and equipment
|
450,000
|
140,000
|
|
Total assets
|
630,000
|
225,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
95,000
|
35,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par value
|
350,000
|
160,000
|
|
Other contributed capital
|
125,000
|
53,000
|
|
Retained earnings (deficit)
|
60,000
|
(23,000)
|
|
Total liabilities and equities
|
630,000
|
225,000
|
On January 1, 2007, the stockholders of Phillips and Solina agreed to a consolidation.
Because FASB requires that one party be recognized as the acquirer and the other as the acquiree, it was agreed that Phillips was acquiring Solina. Phillips agreed to issue 20,000 shares of its $10 par stock to acquire all the net assets of Solina at a time when the fair value of Phillips’ common stock was $15 per share. On the date of consolidation, the fair values of Solina’s current assets and liabilities were equal to their book values. The fair value of plant and equipment was, however, $150,000. Phillips will incur $20,000 of direct acquisition costs and $6,000 in stock issue costs.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fundamental Accounting Principles
Santo Birch opens a Web consulting business called Show-Me-the-Money Consultants and completes the following transactions in March:
March 1 Birch invested $150,000 cash along with $22,000 of office equipment in the business.
2 Prepaid $6,000 cash for six months’ rent for an office. (Hint: Debit Prepaid Rent for $6,000.)
3 Made credit purchases of office equipment for $3,000 and office supplies for $1,200.
Payment is due within 10 days.
6 Completed services for a client and immediately received $4,000 cash.
9 Completed a $7,500 project for a client, who must pay within 30 days.
10 Paid $4,200 cash to settle the account payable created on March 3.
19 Paid $5,000 cash for the premium on a 12-month insurance policy.
22 Received $3,500 cash as partial payment for the work completed on March 9.
25 Completed work for another client for $3,820 on credit.
29 Birch withdrew $5,100 cash for personal use.
30 Purchased $600 of additional office supplies on credit.
31 Paid $200 cash for this month’s utility bill.
Required
1. Prepare general journal entries to record these transactions (use the account titles listed in part 2).
2. Open the following accounts-their account numbers are in parentheses (use the balance column format): Cash (101); Accounts Receivable (106); Office Supplies (124); Prepaid Insurance (128); Prepaid Rent (131); Office Equipment (163); Accounts Payable (201); S. Birch, Capital (301); S. Birch, Withdrawals (302); Services Revenue (403); and Utilities Expense (690). Post the journal entries from part 1 to the accounts and enter the balance after each posting.
3. Prepare a trial balance as of the end of this month’s operations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Entries for Asset Acquisition, Including Self-Construction)
Below are transactions related to Fred Couples Company.
(a) The City of Pebble Beach gives the company 5 acres of land as a plant site. The market value of this land is determined to be $81,000.
(b) 13,000 shares of common stock with a par value of $50 per share are issued in exchange for land and buildings. The property has been appraised at a fair market value of $810,000, of which $180,000 has been allocated to land and $630,000 to buildings. The stock of Fred Couples Company is not listed on any exchange, but a block of 100 shares was sold by a stockholder 12 months ago at $65 per share, and a block of 200 shares was sold by another stockholder 18 months ago at $58 per share.
(c) No entry has been made to remove from the accounts for Materials, Direct Labor, and Overhead the amounts properly chargeable to plant asset accounts for machinery constructed during the year. The following information is given relative to costs of the machinery constructed.
Materials used 12,500
Factory supplies used 900
Direct labor incurred 15,000
Additional overhead (over regular) caused by construction of machinery, excluding factory supplies used 2,700
Fixed overhead rate applied to regular manufacturing operations 60% of direct labor cost Cost of similar machinery if it had been purchased from outside suppliers 44,000 Instructions
Prepare journal entries on the books of Fred Couples Company to record these
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Scott Equipment Organization is investigating various combinations of short- and long-term debt in financing assets. Assume the organization has decided to employ $30 million in current assets and $35 million in fixed assets in its operations next year, provided the level of current assets, anticipated sales, and EBIT for next year are $60 million and $6 million, respectively. The organization’s income tax rate is 40%. Stockholders’ equity will be used to finance $40 million of assets, with the remainder financed by short- and long-term debt.
The organization is considering implementing one of the policies in the diagram.
Amount of Short-Term Debt
|
Financial Policy
|
Millions of dollars
|
LTD (%)
|
STD (%)
|
|
Aggressive
|
$24
|
8.5%
|
5.5%
|
|
(large amount of short-term debt)
|
|
|
|
|
Moderate
|
$18
|
8.0%
|
5.0%
|
|
(moderate amount of short-term debt)
|
|
|
|
|
Conservative
|
$12
|
7.5%
|
4.5%
|
(small amount of short-term debt)
Determine the following for each policy:
· Expected rate of return on stockholders’ equity
· Net working capital position
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are two independent situations.
a. On March 3, Cornwell Appliances sells $680,000 of its receivables to Marsh Factors Inc. Marsh Factors assesses a finance charge of 3% of the amount of receivables sold. Prepare the entry on Cornwell Appliances’ books to record the sale of the receivables. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)
b. On May 10, Dale Company sold merchandise for $3,500 and accepted the customer’s America Bank MasterCard. America Bank charges a 4% service charge for credit card sales. Prepare the entry on Dale Company’s books to record the sale of merchandise. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rob Judson Company had the following transactions involving notes payable.
|
1-Jul-11
|
Borrows $50,000 from Third National Bank by signing a 9-month, 12% note.
|
|
1-Nov-11
|
Borrows $60,000 from DeKalb State Bank by signing a 3-month, 10% note.
|
|
31-Dec-11
|
Prepares adjusting entries.
|
|
1-Feb-12
|
Pays principal and interest to DeKalb State Bank.
|
|
1-Apr-12
|
Pays principal and interest to Third National Bank.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Firm A has $10,000 in assets entirely financed with equity.
Firm B also has $10,000 in assets, but these assets are financed by $5,000 in debt (with a 10 percent rate of interest) and $5,000 in equity.
Both firms sell 10,000 units of output at $2.50 per unit. The variable costs of production are $1, and fixed production costs are $12,000. (To ease the calculation, assume no income tax.)
a. What is the operating income (EBIT) for both firms?
b. What are the earnings after interest?
c. If sales increase by 10 percent to 11,000 units, by what percentage will each firm’s earnings after interest increase? To answer the question determine the earnings after taxes and compute the percentage increase in these earnings from the answers you derived in part b.
d. Why are the percentage changes different?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Securities held-to-maturity; bond investment; effective interest Fuzzy Monkey Technologies, Inc., purchased as a long-term investment $80 million of 8% bonds, dated January 1, on January 1, 2011. Management has the positive intent and ability to hold the bonds until maturity. For bonds of similar risk and maturity the market yield was 10%.
The price paid for the bonds was $66 million. Interest is received semiannually on June 30 and December 31. Due to changing market conditions, the fair value of the bonds at December 31, 2011, was $70 million.
Required:
1. Prepare the journal entry to record Fuzzy Monkey’s investment on January 1, 2011.
2. Prepare the journal entry by Fuzzy Monkey to record interest on June 30, 2011 (at the effective rate).
3. Prepare the journal entries by Fuzzy Monkey to record interest on December 31, 2011 (at the effective rate).
4. At what amount will Fuzzy Monkey report its investment in the December 31, 2011, balance sheet? Why?
5. How would Fuzzy Monkey’s 2011 statement of cash flows be affected by this
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Securities held-to-maturity, securities available for sale, and trading securities
Amalgamated General Corporation is a consulting firm that also offers financial services through its credit division. From time to time the company buys and sells securities intending to earn profits on short-term differences in price. The following selected transactions relate to Amalgamated’s investment activities during the last quarter of 2011 and the first month of 2012. The only securities held by Amalgamated at October 1 were $30 million of 10% bonds of Kansas Abstractors, Inc., purchased on May 1 at face value.
The company’s fiscal year ends on December 31.
2011
Oct 18 Purchased 2 million preferred shares of Millwork Ventures Company for $58 million as a speculative investment to be sold under suitable circumstances.
Oct 31 Received semiannual interest of $1.5 million from the Kansas Abstractors bonds.
Nov 1 Purchased 10% bonds of Holistic Entertainment Enterprises at their $18 million face value, to be held until they mature in 2018. Semiannual interest is payable April 30 and October 31.
Nov 1 Sold the Kansas Abstractors bond for $28 million because rising interest rates are expected to cause their fair value to continue to fall.
Dec 1 Purchased 12% bonds of Household Plastics Corporation at their $60 million face value, to be held until they mature in 2028. Semiannual interest is payable May 31 and November 30.
Dec 20 Purchased U.S. Treasury bonds for $5.6 million as trading securities, hoping to earn profits on short-term differences in prices.
Dec 21 Purchased 4 million common shares of NXS Corporation for $44 million as trading securities, hoping to earn profits on short-term differences in prices.
Dec 22 Sold the Treasury bonds for $5.7 million.
Dec 29 Received cash dividends of $3 million from the Millwork Ventures Company preferred shares.
Dec 30 Recorded any necessary adjusting entry(s) and closing entries relating to the investments. The market price of the Millwork Ventures Company preferred stock was $27.50 per share and $11.50 per share for the NXS Corporation common. The fair values of the bond investments were $58.7 million for Household Plastics Corporation and $16.7 million for Holistic Entertainment Enterprises.
2012
Jan. 7 Sold the NXS Corporation common shares for $43 million.
Required:
Prepare the appropriate journal entry for each transaction or event.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fair value option; equity method investments
On January 4, 2011, Runyan Bakery paid $324 million for 10 million shares of Lavery Labeling Company common stock. The investment represents a 30% interest in the net assets of Lavery and gave Runyan the ability to exercise significant influence over Lavery’s operations. Runyan chose the fair value option to account for this investment. Runyan received dividends of $2.00 per share on December 15, 2011, and Lavery reported net income of $160 million for the year ended December 31, 2011. The market value of Lavery’s common stock at December 31, 2011, was $31 per share. On the purchase date, the book value of Lavery’s net assets was $800 million and:
a. The fair value of Lavery’s depreciable assets, with an average remaining useful life of six years, exceeded their book value by $80 million.
b. The remainder of the excess of the cost of the investment over the book value of net assets purchased was attributable to goodwill.
Required:
1. Prepare all appropriate journal entries related to the investment during 2011, assuming Runyan accounts for this investment under the fair value option and accounts for the Lavery investment in a manner similar to what they would use for trading securities.
2. What would be the effect of this investment on Runyan’s 2011 net income?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Disclosures of liabilities
Required:
Indicate (by letter) the way each of the items listed below should be reported in a balance sheet at December 31, 2011.
|
Item
|
Reporting Category
|
|
1. Commercial paper.
|
N. Not reported
|
|
2. Noncommitted line of credit.
|
C. Current liability
|
|
3. Customer advances.
|
L. Long-term liability
|
|
4. Estimated warranty cost.
|
D. Disclosure note only
|
|
5. Accounts payable.
|
A. Asset
|
6. Long-term bonds that will be callable by the creditor in ther upcoming year unless an existing violation is not corrected (there is a reasonable possibility the violation will be corrected within the grace period).
7. Note due March 3, 2012.
8. Interest accrued on note, Dec. 31, 2011.
9. Short-term bank loan to be paid with proceeds of sale of common stock.
10. A determinable gain that is contingent on a future event that appears extremely likely to occur in three months.
11. Unasserted assessment of back taxes that probably will be asserted, in which case there would probably be a loss in six months.
12. Unasserted assessment of back taxes with a reasonable possibility of being asserted, in which case there would probably be a loss in 13 months.
13. A determinable loss from a past event that is contingent on a future event that appears extremely likely to occur in three months.
14. Bond sinking fund.
15. Long-term bonds callable by the creditor in the upcoming year that are not expected to be called.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Warranty expense; change in estimate
Woodmier Lawn Products introduced a new line of commercial sprinklers in 2010 that carry a one-year warranty against manufacturer’s defects. Because this was the first product for which the company offered a warranty, trade publications were consulted to determine the experience of others in the industry. Based on that experience, warranty costs were expected to approximate 2% of sales. Sales of the sprinklers in 2010 were $2.5 million.
Accordingly, the following entries relating to the contingency for warranty costs were recorded during the first year of selling the product:
|
Accrued liability and expense
|
|
Warranty expense (2% x $ 2,500,000)
|
50,000
|
|
Estimated warranty liability
|
50,000
|
|
Actual expenditures (summary entry)
|
|
|
Estimated warranty liability
|
23,000
|
|
Cash, wages payable, parts and supplies, etc.
|
23,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Various contingencies
Eastern Manufacturing is involved with several situations that possibly involve contingencies. Each is described below. Eastern’s fiscal year ends December 31, and the 2011 financial statements are issued on March 15, 2012.
a. Eastern is involved in a lawsuit resulting from a dispute with a supplier. On February 3, 2012, judgment was rendered against Eastern in the amount of $107 million plus interest, a total of $122 million. Eastern plans to appeal the judgment and is unable to predict its outcome though it is not expected to have a material adverse effect on the company.
b. In November 2010, the State ofNevadafiled suit against Eastern, seeking civil penalties and injunctive relief for violations of environmental laws regulating hazardous waste. On January 12, 2012, Eastern reached a settlement with state authorities. Based upon discussions with legal counsel, the Company feels it is probable that $140 million will be required to cover the cost of violations. Eastern believes that the ultimate settlement of this claim will not have a material adverse effect on the company.
c. Eastern is the plaintiff in a $200 million lawsuit filed against United Steel for damages due to lost profits from rejected contracts and for unpaid receivables. The case is in final appeal and legal counsel advises that it is probable that Eastern will prevail and be awarded $100 million.
d. At March 15, 2012, the Environmental Protection Agency is in the process of investigating possible soil contamination at various locations of several companies including Eastern. The EPA has not yet proposed a penalty assessment. Management feels an assessment is reasonably possible, and if an assessment is made an unfavorable settlement of up to $33 million is reasonably possible.
Required:
1. Determine the appropriate means of reporting each situation. Explain your reasoning.
2. Prepare any necessary journal entries and disclosure notes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mucky Duck makes swimsuits and sells these suits directly to retailers. Although Mucky Duck has a variety of suits, it does not make the All-Body suit used by highly skilled swimmers. The market research department believes that a strong market exists for this type of suit. The department indicates that the All-Body suit would sell for approximately $110. Given its experience, Mucky Duck believes the All-Body suit would have the following manufacturing costs.
|
Direct materials
|
25
|
|
Direct labor
|
30
|
|
Manufacturing
|
45
|
|
Total costs
|
100
|
Instructions
(a) Assume that Mucky Duck uses cost-plus pricing, setting the selling price 25% above its costs. (1) What would be the price charged for the All-Body swimsuit? (2) Under what circumstances might Mucky Duck consider manufacturing the All-Body swimsuit given this approach?
(b) Assume that Mucky Duck uses target costing. What is the price that Mucky Duck would charge the retailer for the All-Body swimsuit?
(c) What is the highest acceptable manufacturing cost Mucky Duck would be willing to incur to produce the All-Body swimsuit, if it desired a profit of $25 per unit? (Assume target costing.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allied Company’s Small Motor Division manufactures a number of small motors used in household and office appliances. The Household Division of Allied then assembles and packages such items as blenders and juicers. Both divisions are free to buy and sell any of their components internally or externally. The following costs relate to small motor LN233 on a per unit basis.
Fixed cost per unit 5
Variable cost per unit 8
Selling price per unit 30
Instructions
(a) Assuming that the Small Motor Division has excess capacity, compute the minimum acceptable price for the transfer of small motor LN233 to the Household Division.
(b) Assuming that the Small Motor Division does not have excess capacity, compute the minimum acceptable price for the transfer of the small motor to the Household Division.
(c) Explain why the level of capacity in the Small Motor Division has an effect on the transfer price.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Real World Focus
Merck & Co., Inc. is a global, research-driven pharmaceutical company that discovers, develops, manufacturers, and markets a broad range of human and animal health products. The following are excerpts from the financial review section of the company’s annual report.
MERCK & CO INC
Financial Review Section (partial)
In theUnited Statesthe Company has been working with private and governmental employers to slow the increase of health care costs.
Outside of theUnited Statesin difficult environments encumbered by government cost containment actions, the Company has worked with payers to help them allocate scarce resources to optimize healthcare outcomes, limiting potentially detrimental effects of government actions on sales growth.
Several products face expiration of product patents in the near term.
The Company along with other pharmaceutical manufacturers, received a notice from the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) that it was conducting an investigation into pricing practices.
Instructions
Answer each of the following questions.
a) In light of the above excerpts from Merck’s annual report, discuss some unique pricing issues faced by companies that operate in the pharmaceutical industry.
b) What are some reasons why the same company often sells identical drugs for dramatically different prices in different countries? How can the same drug used for both humans and animals cost significantly different prices?
c) Suppose that Merck has just developed a revolutionary new drug for the treatment of arthritis. Discuss the steps it would go through in setting a price. Include a discussion of the information it would need to gather, and the issues it would need to consider.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethics Case
Giant Airlines operates out of three main “hub” airports in the United States. Recently Mosquito Airlines began operating a flight from Reno,Nevada, into Giant’s Metropolis hub for $190. Giant Airlines offers a price of $425 for the same route. The management of Giant is not happy about Mosquito invading its turf. In fact, Giant has driven off nearly every other competing airline from its hub, so that today 90% of flights into and out of Metropolis are Giant Airline flights. Mosquito is able to offer a lower fare because its pilots are paid less, it uses older planes, and it has lower overhead costs. Mosquito has been in business for only 6 months, and it services only two other cities. It expects the Metropolis route to be its most profitable.
Giant estimates that it would have to charge $210 just to break even on this flight. It estimates that Mosquito can break even at a price of $160. Within one day of Mosquito’s entry into the market, Giant dropped its price to $140, whereupon Mosquito matched its price. They both maintained this are for a period of 9 months, until Mosquito went out of business. As soon as Mosquito went out of business, Giant raised its fare back to $425.
Instructions
Answer each of the following questions.
(a) Who are the stakeholders in this case?
(b) What are some of the reasons why Mosquito’s breakeven-point is lower than that of Giant?
(c) What are the likely reasons why Giant was able to offer this price for this period of time, while Mosquito couldn’t?
(d) What are some of the possible courses of action available to Mosquito in this situation?
(e) Do you think that this kind of pricing activity is ethical? What are the implications for the stakeholders in this situation?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karmana Corporation for the just completed year.
|
Sales
|
$950
|
|
Raw materials inventory, beginning
|
$10
|
|
Raw materials inventory, ending
|
$30
|
|
Purchases of raw materials
|
$120
|
|
Direct labor
|
$200
|
|
Manufacturing overhead
|
$230
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
$100
|
|
Selling expenses
|
$140
|
|
Work in process inventory, beginning
|
$70
|
|
Work in process inventory, ending
|
$40
|
|
Finished goods inventory, beginning
|
$100
|
|
Finished goods inventory, ending
|
$80
|
Use these data to prepare (in thousands of dollars) a schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured and a Schedule of Cost of Goods Sold for the year. In addition, elaborate on the relationship between these schedules as they relate to the flow of product costs in a manufacturing company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Escatel Corporation bases its predetermined overhead rate on the estimated labor hours for the upcoming year. Data for the most recently completed year appear below.
|
Estimates made at the beginning of the year :
|
|
Estimated labor hours
|
24,000
|
|
Estimated variable manufacturing overhead
|
$6.86 per labor hour
|
|
Estimated total fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$394,560
|
|
Actual labor hours for the year
|
24,500
|
Required:
Compute the company’s predetermined overhead rate for the recently completed year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Summer Company is considering three capital expenditure projects. Relevant data for the projects are as follows.
|
Project
|
Investment
|
Annual Income
|
Life of Project
|
|
22A
|
240,000
|
15,000
|
6 years
|
|
23A
|
270,000
|
24,400
|
9 years
|
|
24A
|
280,000
|
21,000
|
7 years
|
Annual income is constant over the life of the project. Each project is expected to have zero salvage value at the end of the project. Summer Company uses the straight-line method of depreciation.
Instructions
(a) Determine the internal rate of return for each project. Round the internal rate of return factor to three decimals.
(b) If Summer Company’s required rate of return is 11%, which projects are acceptable?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Three Stooges partnership is considering three long-term capital investment proposals. Each investment has a useful life of 5 years. Relevant data on each project are as follows.
| |
Project Moe
|
Project Larry
|
Project Curly
|
|
Capital investment
|
150,000
|
160,000
|
200,000
|
|
Annual net income:
|
|
|
|
|
Year 1
|
13,000
|
18,000
|
27,000
|
|
Year 2
|
13,000
|
17,000
|
22,000
|
|
Year 3
|
13,000
|
16,000
|
21,000
|
|
Year 4
|
13,000
|
12,000
|
13,000
|
|
Year 5
|
13,000
|
9,000
|
12,000
|
|
Total
|
$65,000
|
$72,000
|
$95,000
|
Depreciation is computed by the straight-line method with no salvage value. The company’s cost of capital is 15%. (Assume that cash flows occur evenly throughout the year.)
Instructions
(a) Compute the cash payback period for each project. (Round to two decimals.)
(b) Compute the net present value for each project. (Round to nearest dollar.)
(c) Compute the annual rate of return for each project. (Round to two decimals.) (Hint: Use average annual net income in your computation.)
(d) Rank the projects on each of the foregoing bases. Which project do you recommend?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carolina Clinic is considering investing in new heart monitoring equipment. It has two options: Option A would have an initial lower cost but would require a significant expenditure for rebuilding after 4 years. Option B would require no rebuilding expenditure, but its maintenance costs would be higher. Since the option B machine is of initial higher quality, it is expected to have a salvage value at the end of its useful life. The following estimates were made of the cash flows. The company’s cost of capital is 11%.
| |
Option A
|
Option B
|
|
Initial cost
|
160,000
|
227,000
|
|
Annual cash inflows
|
75,000
|
80,000
|
|
Annual cash outflows
|
35,000
|
30,000
|
|
Cost to rebuild (end of year 4)
|
|
60,000
|
|
Salvage value
|
12,000
|
|
|
Estimated useful
|
8 years
|
8 years
|
Instructions
(a) Compute the (1) net present value, (2) profitability index, and (3) internal rate of return for each option. (Hint: To solve for internal rate of return, experiment with alternative discount rates to arrive at a net present value of zero.)
(b) Which option should be accepted?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Danner Farm Supply Company manufactures and sells a pesticide called Snare. The following data are available for preparing budgets for Snare for the first 2 quarters of 2009.
1. Sales: Quarter 1, 28,000 bags; quarter 2, 42,000 bags. Selling price is $60 per bag.
2. Direct materials: Each bag of Snare requires 4 pounds of Gumm at a cost of $4 per pound and 6 pounds of Tarr at $1.50 per pound.
3. Desired inventory levels:
|
Type of Inventory
|
January 1
|
April 1
|
July 1
|
|
Snare (bags)
|
8,000
|
12,000
|
18,000
|
|
Gumm (pounds)
|
9,000
|
10,000
|
13,000
|
|
Tarr (pounds)
|
14,000
|
20,000
|
25,000
|
4. Direct labor: Direct labor time is 15 minutes per bag at an hourly rate of $14 per hour.
5. Selling and administrative expenses are expected to be 15% of sales plus $175,000 per quarter.
6. Income taxes are expected to be 30% of income from operations.
Your assistant has prepared two budgets: (1) The manufacturing overhead budget shows expected costs to be 150% of direct labor cost. (2) The direct materials budget for Tarr shows the cost of Tarr purchases to be $297,000 in quarter 1 and $439,500 in quarter 2.
Instructions
Prepare the budgeted income statement for the first 6 months and all required operating budgets by quarters. (Note: Use variable and fixed in the selling and administrative expense budget). Do not prepare the manufacturing overhead budget or the direct materials budget for Tarr.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bedner & Flott manufactures ergonomic devices for computer users. Some of their more popular products include glare screens (for computer monitors), keyboard stands with wrist rests, and carousels that allow easy access to discs. Over the past 5 years, they experienced rapid growth, with sales of all products increasing 20% to 50% each year.
Last year, some of the primary manufacturers of computers began introducing new products with some of the ergonomic designs, such as glare screens and wrist rests, already built in. As a result, sales of the Bedner & Flott’s accessory devices have declined somewhat. The company believes that the disc carousels will probably continue to show growth, but that the other products will probably continue to decline. When the next year’s budget was prepared, increases were built in to research and development so that the replacement products could be developed or the company could expand into some other product line. Some product lines being considered are general-purpose ergonomic devices including back supports, foot rests, and sloped writing pads.
The most recent results have shown that sales decreased more than was expected for the glare screens. As a result, the company may have a shortage of funds. Top management has therefore asked that all expenses be reduced to 10% to compensate for these reduced sales. Summary budget information is as follows.
|
Direct materials
|
240,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
110,000
|
|
Insurance
|
50,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
90,000
|
|
Machine repairs
|
30,000
|
|
Sales salaries
|
50,000
|
|
Office salaries
|
80,000
|
|
Factory salaries
|
50,000
|
|
Total
|
700,000
|
Instructions
Using the information above, answer the following questions.
a) What are the implications of reducing each cost? For example, if the company reduces direct materials costs, it may have to do so by purchasing lower-quality materials. This may affect sales in the long run.
b) Based on your analysis in (a), what do you think is the best way to obtain the $70,000 in cost savings requested? Be specific. Are there any costs that cannot or should not be reduced? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Raney Company uses a flexible budget for manufacturing overhead based on direct labor hours. Variable manufacturing overhead costs per direct labor hour are as follows:
|
Indirect labor
|
1.00
|
|
Indirect materials
|
0.50
|
|
Utilities
|
0.40
|
|
Fixed overhead costs per month are:
|
|
Supervision
|
4,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
1,500
|
|
Property Taxes
|
800
|
The company believes it will normally operate in a range of 7,000 to 10,000 direct labor hours per month.
Instructions:
Prepare a monthly flexible manufacturing overhead budget for 2010 for the expected range of activity, using increments of 1,000 direct labor hours.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hickory Company manufactures two products – 14,000 units of Product Y and 6,000 units of Product Z. The company uses a plantwide overhead rate based on direct labor-hours. It is considering implementing an activity-based costing (ABC) system that allocates all of its manufacturing overhead to four cost pools. The following additional information is available for the company as a whole and for Products Y and Z.
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Activity Measure
|
Activity Measure
|
Expected
|
|
Activity
|
|
|
|
|
Machining
|
Machine Hours
|
$200,000.00
|
10,000
|
|
MHs
|
|
|
|
|
Machine Setups
|
Number of Setups
|
$100,000.00
|
200
|
|
setups
|
|
|
|
|
Production design
|
Number of products
|
$84,000.00
|
2
|
|
products
|
|
|
|
|
General Factory
|
Direct Labor Hours
|
$300,000.00
|
12,000
|
|
DLHs
|
|
|
|
|
Activity Measure
|
Product Y
|
Product Z
|
|
Machining
|
7,000
|
3,000
|
|
Machine Setups
|
50
|
150
|
|
Production design
|
1
|
1
|
|
General Factory
|
8,000
|
4,000
|
Required:
1. What is the company’s plantwide overhead rate?
2. Using the plantwide overhead rate, how much manufacturing overhead cost is allocated to Product Y? How much is allocated to Product Z?
3. What is the activity rate for the Machining activity cost pool?
4. What is the activity rate for the Machine Setups activity cost pool?
5. What is the activity rate for the Product Design activity cost pool?
6. What is the activity rate for the General Factory activity cost pool?
7. Which of the four activities is a batch-level activity? Why?
8. Which of the four activities is a product-level activity? Why?
9. Using the ABC system, how much total manufacturing overhead cost would be assigned to Product Y?
10. Using the ABC system, how much total manufacturing overhead cost would be assigned to Product Z?
11. Using the plantwide overhead rate, what percentage of the total overhead cost is allocated to Product Y? What percentage is allocated to Product Z?
12. Using the ABC system, what percentage of the Machining cost is assigned to Product Y? What percentage is assigned to Product Z? Are these percentages similar to those obtained in question 11? Why?
13. Using the ABC system, what percentage of Machine Setups cost is assigned to Product Y? What percentage is assigned to Product Z? Are these percentages similar to those obtained in question 11? Why?
14. Using the ABC system, what percentage of Product Design cost is assigned to Product Y? What percentage is assigned to Product Z? Are these percentages similar to those obtained in question 11? Why?
15. Using the ABC system, what percentage of General Factory cost is assigned to Product Y? What percentage is assigned to Product Z? Are these percentages similar to those obtained in question 11? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Martinez Company’s relevant range of production is 7,500 units to 12,500 units. When it produces and sells 10,000 units, its unit costs are as follows:
| |
Amt per unit
|
|
Direct Material
|
$6.00
|
|
Direct Labor
|
$3.50
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
$1.50
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
$4.00
|
|
Fixed selling expense
|
$3.00
|
|
Fixed administrative expense
|
$2.00
|
|
Sales commissions
|
$1.00
|
|
Variable administrative expense
|
$0.50
|
Required
1. For financial accounting purposes, what is the total amount of product costs incurred to make 10,000 units?
2. For financial accounting purposes, what is the total amount of period costs incurred to sell 10,000 units?
3. If 8,000 units are sold, what is the variable cost per unit sold?
4. If 12,500 units are sold, what is the total amount of variable costs related to the units sold?
5. If 8,000 units are sold, what is the total amount of variable costs related to the units sold?
6. If 12,500 units are sold, what is the total amount of variable costs related to the units sold?
7. If 8,000 units are produced, what is the average fixed manufacturing cost per unit produced?
8. If 12,500 units are produced, what is the average fixed manufacturing cost per unit produced?
9. If 8,000 units are produced, what is the total amount of fixed manufacturing cost incurred to support this level of production?
10. If 12,500 units are produced, what is the total amount of fixed manufacturing cost incurred to support this level of production?
11. If 8,000 units are produced, what is the total amount of manufacturing overhead cost incurred to support this level of production? What is this total amount expressed on a per unit basis?
12. If 12,500 units are produced, what is the total amount of manufacturing overhead cost incurred to support this level of production? What is the total amount expressed on a per unit basis?
13. If the selling price is $22 per unit, what is the contribution margin per unit sold?
14. If 11,000 units are produced, what are the total amounts of direct and indirect manufacturing costs incurred to support this level of production?
15. What total incremental costs will Martinez incur if it increases production from 10,000 to 10,001 units?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Morganton Company makes one product and it provided the following information to help prepare the master budget for its first four months of operation
a. The budget selling price per unit is $70. Budgeted unit sales for June, July, August and September are 8,400, 10,000, 12,000 and 13,000 units respectively. All sales are on credit
b. Forty percent of credit sales are collected in the month of sale and 60% in the following month
c. The ending finish goods inventory equals 20% of the following months unit sales
d. The ending raw materials inventory equals 10% if the following months raw production needs each unit of finished goods require 5 pounds of raw materials.
The raw materials cost $2 per pound
e. 30% of raw materials purchases are paid for the month of purchase and 70% in the following month
f. The direct labor wage is $15 per hour. Each unit of finished goods require 2 labor direct labor hours
g. The variable selling and administrative expense per unit sold is $1.80. The fixed selling and administrative expense per month is $60,000.
Required:
1. What are the budgeted sales for July?
2. What are the expected cash collections for July?
3. What is the accounts receivable balance at the end of July?
4. According to the production budget, how many units should be produced in July?
5. If 61,000 pounds of raw materials are needed to meet production in August, how many pounds of raw materials should be purchased in July?
6. What is the estimated cost of raw materials purchases for July?
7. If the cost of raw materials purchases in June is $88,000, what are the estimated cash disbursements for raw materials purchases in July?
8. What is the estimated accounts payable balance at the end of July?
9. What is the estimated raw materials inventory balance at the end of July?
10. What is the total estimated direct labor cost for July assuming the direct labor workforce is adjusted to match the hours required to produce the forecasted number of units produced?
11. If the company always uses an estimated predetermined plant wide overhead rate of $10 per direct labor-hour, what is the estimated unit product cost?
12. What is the estimated finished goods inventory balance at the end of July?
13. What is the estimated cost of goods sold and gross margin for July?
14. What is the estimated total selling and administrative expense for July?
15. What is the estimated net operating income for July?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Frederick Clinic deposits all cash receipts on the day when they are received and it makes all cash payments by check. At the close of business on June 30, 2011, its Cash account shows a $13,865 debit balance. Frederick Clinic’s June 30 bank statement shows $13,635 on deposit in the bank.
a. Outstanding checks as of June 30 total $2,557.
b. The June 30 bank statement included a $85 debit memorandum for bank services.
c. Check No. 919, listed with the canceled checks, was correctly drawn for $589 in payment of a utility bill on June 15. Frederick Clinic mistakenly recorded it with a debit to Utilities Expense and a credit to Cash in the amount of $598.
d. The June 30 cash receipts of $2,711 were placed in the bank’s night depository after banking hours and were not recorded on the June 30 bank statement.
Prepare a bank reconciliation for Frederick Clinic using the above information (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response):
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-9 (Statement and Note Disclosure, LCM, and Purchase Commitment)
Garth Brooks Specialty Company, a division of Fresh Horses Inc., manufactures three models of gear shift components for bicycles that are sold to bicycle manufacturers, retailers, and catalog outlets. Since beginning operations in 1975, Brooks has used normal absorption costing and has assumed a first-in, first-out cost flow in its perpetual inventory system. The balances of the inventory accounts at the end of Brooks’s fiscal ear, November 30, 2007, are shown below. The inventories are stated at cost before any year-end adjustments.
|
Finished goods
|
647,000
|
|
Work-in-process
|
112,500
|
|
Raw materials
|
240,000
|
|
Factory supplies
|
69,000
|
The following information relates to Brooks’s inventory and operations.
1.The finished goods inventory consists of the items analyzed below.
| |
Cost
|
Market
|
|
Down tube shifter
|
|
|
|
Standard model
|
67,500
|
67,000
|
|
Click adjustment model
|
94,500
|
87,000
|
|
Deluxe model
|
108,000
|
110,000
|
|
Total down tube shifters
|
270,000
|
264,000
|
|
Bar end shifter
|
|
|
|
Standard model
|
83,000
|
90,050
|
|
Click adjustment model
|
99,000
|
97,550
|
|
Total bar end shifters
|
182,000
|
187,600
|
|
Head tube shifter
|
|
|
|
Standard model
|
78,000
|
77,650
|
|
Click adjustment model
|
117,000
|
119,300
|
|
Total head tube shifters
|
195,000
|
196,950
|
|
Total finished goods
|
647,000
|
648,550
|
2. One-half of the head tube shifter finished goods inventory is held by catalog outlets on consignment.
3. Three-quarters of the bar end shifter finished goods inventory has been pledged as collateral for a bank loan.
4. One-half of the raw materials balance represents derailleurs acquired at a contracted price 20 percent above the current market price. The market value of the rest of the raw materials is $127,400.
5. The total market value of the work-in-process inventory is $108,700.
6. Included in the cost of factory supplies are obsolete items with an historical cost of $4,200. The market value of the remaining factory supplies is $65,900.
7. Brooks applies the lower-of-cost-or-market method to each of the three types of shifters in finished goods inventory. For each of the other three inventory accounts, Brooks applies the lower-of-cost-or-market method to the total of each inventory account.
8. Consider all amounts presented above to be material in relation to Brooks’ financial statements taken as a whole.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the inventory section of Brooks’s balance sheet as of November 30, 2007, including any required note(s).
(b) Without prejudice to your answer to (a), assume that the market value of Brooks’s inventories is less than cost. Explain how this decline would be presented in Brooks’s income statement for the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012.
(c) Assume the Brooks has a firm purchase commitment for the same type of derailleur included in the raw materials inventory as of November 30, 2012, and that the purchase commitment is at a contract priced 15% greater than the current market price. These derailleurs are to be delivered to Brooks after November 30, 2012. Discuss the impact, if any, that this purchase commitment would have on Brooks’s financial statements prepared for the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adriana Lopez expected sales of her line of computer workstation furniture to equal 300 workstations (at a sales price of $3,000) for 2010. The workstations’ manufacturing costs include the following.
|
Direct materials
|
$800 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
$400 per unit
|
|
Variable overhead
|
$100 per unit
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
$24,000 per year
|
|
The selling expenses related to these workstations follow.
|
|
Variable selling expenses
|
$50 per unit
|
|
Fixed selling expenses
|
$4,000 per year
|
Adriana is considering how many workstations to produce in 2010. She is confident that she will be able to sell any workstations in her 2010 ending inventory during 2011. However, Adriana does not want to overproduce as she does not have sufficient storage space for many more workstations.
Required
1. Compute Success Systems’ absorption costing income assuming
a. 300 workstations are produced.
b. 320 workstations are produced.
2. Compute Success Systems’ variable costing income assuming
a. 300 workstations are produced.
b. 320 workstations are produced.
3. Explain to Adriana any differences in the income figures determined in parts 1 and 2. How should Adriana use the information from parts 1 and 2 to help make production decisions?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Brannon Company manufactures ceiling fans and uses an activity-based costing system.
Each ceiling fan consists of 20 separate parts totaling $95 in direct materials, and requires 2.5 hours of machine time to produce. There are no direct labor costs. Additional information follows:
|
Activity
|
Allocation Base
|
Cost Allocation Rate
|
|
Materials handling
|
Number of parts
|
$ .08
|
|
Machining
|
Machine hours
|
$7.20
|
|
Assembling
|
Number of parts
|
$.35
|
|
Packaging
|
Number of finished units
|
$2.70
|
What is the total manufacturing cost per ceiling fan?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ace Plastics produces many different kinds of products all in one manufacturing facility.
They have identified four activities for their costing system:
Materials management – allocated by number of purchase orders
Chemical processing – allocated on metric tons
Molding – allocated on direct labor hours
Packaging – allocated by number of units produced
The activity rates are as follows:
|
Materials management
|
$12.00
|
Per purchase order
|
|
Chemical processing
|
$ 7.50
|
Per metric ton
|
|
Molding
|
$24.00
|
Per direct labor hour
|
|
Packaging
|
$ 0.10
|
Per unit
|
Ace received an order for 3,000 plastic toys. The engineering design shows that the order will require $540 of direct material cost in total, $90 of direct labor cost, will require 4 purchase orders, will use 2 metric tons of chemical base, will need 8 direct labor hours, and will produce 3.000 units of product.
What will the full production cost of the order be?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Freedo Company’s fiscal year ends on June 30. The following accounts are found in its job order cost accounting system for the first month of the new fiscal year.
Other data:
1. On July 1, two jobs were in process: Job No. 4085 and Job No. 4086, with costs of $19,000 and $8,200, respectively.
2. During July, Job Nos. 4087, 4088, and 4089 were started. On July 31, only Job No. 4089 was unfinished. This job had charges for direct materials $2,000 and direct labor $1,000, plus manufacturing overhead. Manufacturing overhead was applied at the rate of 130% of direct labor cost.
3. On July 1, Job No. 4084, costing $135,000, was in the finished goods warehouse. On July 31, Job No. 4088, costing $143,000, was in finished goods.
4. Overhead was $3,000 underapplied in July.
Instructions
List the letters (a) through (n) and indicate the amount pertaining to each letter. Show computations
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Determining Financial Statement Effects of Various
Transactions
Lester’s Home Healthcare Services (LHHS) was organized on January 1, 2005, by four friends. Each organizer invested $10,000 in the company and, in turn, was issued 8,000 shares of stock.
To date, they are the only stockholders. During the first month (January 2005), the company had the following six events:
a. Collected a total of $40,000 from the organizers and, in turn, issued the shares of stock.
b. Purchased a building for $65,000, equipment for $16,000, and three acres of land for $12,000; paid $13,000 in cash and signed a note for the balance, which is due to be paid in 15 years.
c. One stockholder reported to the company that 500 shares of his Lester’s stock had been sold and transferred to another stockholder for $5,000 cash.
d. Purchased supplies for $3,000 cash.
e. Sold one acre of land for $4,000 cash to another company.
f. Lent one of the shareholders $5,000 for moving costs, receiving a signed six-month note from the shareholder.
Required:
1. Was Lester’s Home Healthcare Services organized as a partnership or corporation?
Explain the basis for your answer.
2. During the first month, the records of the company were inadequate. You were asked to prepare the summary of the preceding transactions. To develop a quick assessment of their economic effects on Lester’s Home Healthcare Services, you have decided to complete the spreadsheet that follows and to use plus (+) for increases and minus (-) for decreases for each account. The first transaction is used as an example.
3. Did you include the transaction between the two stockholders-event c-in the spreadsheet? Why?
4. Based only on the completed spreadsheet, provide the following amounts (show computations):
a. Total assets at the end of the month.
b. Total liabilities at the end of the month.
c. Total stockholders’ equity at the end of the month.
d. Cash balance at the end of the month.
e. Total current assets at the end of the month.
5. As of January 31, 2005, has the financing for LHHS’S investment in assets primarily come from liabilities or stockholders’ equity?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Santana Rey, owner of Business Solutions, decides to diversify her business by also manufacturing computer workstation furniture.
Required:
1. Classify the following manufacturing costs of Business Solutions by behavior and traceability.
|
Product Costs
|
Costs by Behavior
|
Costs by Traceability
|
|
Variable
|
Fixed Direct
|
Indirect
|
1. Monthly flat fee to clean workshop
2. Laminate coverings for desktops
3. Taxes on assembly workshop
4. Glue to assemble workstation component parts
5. Wages of desk assembler
6. Electricity for workshops
7. Depreciation on tools
2. Prepare a manufacturing statement for Business Solutions for the month ended January 31, 2012. Assume the following manufacturing costs:
|
Direct materials
|
2,200
|
|
Factory overhead
|
490
|
|
Direct labor
|
900
|
Beginning goods in process: none (December 31, 2011)
Ending goods in process: $540 (January 31, 2012)
Beginning finished goods inventory: none (December 31, 2011)
Ending finished goods inventory: $350 (January 31, 2012)
3. Preparing the cost of goods sold section of a partial income statement for Business Solutions for the month ended January 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use the following selected data from Business Solutions’ income statement for the three months ended March 31, 2012, and from its March 31, 2012, balance sheet to complete the requirements below: computer services revenue, $25,307; net sales (of goods), $18,693; total sales and revenue, $44,000; cost of goods sold, $14,052; net income, $18,833; quick assets, $90,924; current assets, $95,568; total assets, $120,268; current liabilities, $875; total liabilities, $875; and total equity, $119,393.
Required
1. Compute the gross margin ratio (both with and without services revenue) and net profit margin ratio.
2. Compute the current ratio and acid-test ratio.
3. Compute the debt ratio and equity ratio.
4. What percent of its assets are current? What percent are long term?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Santana Rey, owner of Business Solutions, decides to prepare a statement of cash flows for her business. (Although the serial problem allowed for various ownership changes in earlier chapters, we will prepare the statement of cash flows using the following financial data.)
Business Solutions
Income Statement
For Three Months Ended March 31, 2012
|
Computer service revenue
|
25,307
|
|
Net sales
|
18,693
|
|
Total revenue
|
44,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
14,052
|
|
Depreciation expense – Office equipment
|
400
|
|
Depreciation expense – Computer equipment
|
1,250
|
|
Wages expense
|
3,250
|
|
Insurance expense
|
555
|
|
Rent expense
|
2,475
|
|
Computer supplies expense
|
1,305
|
|
Advertising expense
|
600
|
|
Mileage expense
|
320
|
|
Repairs expense
|
960
|
|
Total expenses
|
25,167
|
|
Net income
|
$18,833
|
Business Solutions
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31, 2011 and March 31, 2012
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
68,057
|
48,372
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
22,867
|
5,668
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
704
|
–
|
|
Computer supplies
|
2,005
|
580
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
1,110
|
1,665
|
|
Prepaid rent
|
825
|
825
|
|
Office equipment
|
8,000
|
8,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation – Office equipment
|
(800)
|
(400)
|
|
Computer equipment
|
20,000
|
20,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation – Computer equipment
|
(2,500)
|
(1,250)
|
|
Total Assets
|
$120,268
|
$83,460
|
|
Liabilities and Equity
|
|
Accounts payable
|
–
|
1,100
|
|
Wages payable
|
875
|
500
|
|
Unearned computer service revenue
|
–
|
1,500
|
|
Common stock
|
98,000
|
73,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
21,393
|
7,360
|
|
Total Liabilities and Equity
|
$120,268
|
$83,460
|
Required:
Prepare a statement of cash flows for Business Solutions using the indirect method for the three months ended March 31, 2012. Recall that the owner Santana Rey contributed $25,000 to the business in exchange for additional stock in the first quarter of 2012 and has received $4,800 in cash dividends.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Santana Rey has consulted with her local banker and is considering financing an expansion of her business by obtaining a long-term bank loan. Selected account balances at March 31, 2012 for Business Solutions follow.
Total Assets 120,268
Total liabilities 875
Total equity 119,393
Required:
1. The bank has offered a long-term secured note to Business Solutions. The bank’s loan procedures require that a client’s debt-to-equity ratio not exceed 0.8. As of March 31, 2012, what is the maximum amount that Business Solutions could borrow from this bank (rounded to nearest dollar)?
2. If Business Solutions borrows the maximum amount allowed from the bank, what percentage of assets would be financed (a) by debt and (b) by equity?
3. What are some factors Santana Rey should consider before borrowing the funds?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adriana Lopez had consulted with her local banker and is considering financing an expansion of her business by obtaining a long-term bank loan. Selected account balances at March 31, 2008, for Success Systems follows.
|
Total assets
|
$147,529
|
|
Total Liabilities
|
$1,050
|
|
Total Equity
|
$146,479
|
Required:
1. The boxing has offered a long-term secured note to Success Systems. The bank’s loan procedures require that a client’s debt-to-equity ration not exceed 0.8. As of March 31, 2008, what is the maximum amount that Success Systems could borrow from this bank?
2. If Success Systems borrows the maximum amount allowed from the bank, what percentage of assets would be financed (a) by debt, and (b) by equity?
3. What are some factors Lopez should consider before borrowing the funds?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adriana Lopez created Success Systems on October 1, 2007. The company had been successful, and Adriana plans to expand her business. She believes that an additional $100,000 is needed and is investigating three funding sources.
a. Adriana sister Cicely is willing to invest $100,000 in the business as a common shareholder. Since Adriana currently has $120,000 invested in the business. Cicely’s invest will mean that Adriana will maintain about 55% ownership, and Cicely will have 45% ownership of Success Systems.
b. Adriana’s uncle Marcello is willing to invest $100,000 in the business as a preferred shareholder. Marcello would purchase 1,000 shares of $100 par value, 7% preferred stock.
c. Adriana’s banker is willing to lend her $100,000 on a 7%, 10-year note payable. Adriana would make monthly payments of $1,160.00 per month for 10 years.
Required:
1. Prepare the journal entry to reflect the initial $100,000 investment under each of the options (a), (b), (c).
2. Evaluate the three proposals for expansion, providing the pros and cons of each option.
3. Which option do you recommend Adrian adopt? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Accounting
The Classic Theater opened on April 1. All facilities were completed on March 31. At this time, the ledger showed: No. 101 Cash $7,009, No. 140 Land $8,991, No. 145 Buildings (concession stand, projection room, ticket booth, and screen) $6,991, No. 157 Equipment $7,009, No. 201 Accounts Payable $3,009, No. 275 Mortgage Payable $6,991, and No. 311 Common Stock $20,000. During April, the following events and transactions occurred.
Apr. 2 Paid film rental of $1,023 on first movie.
3 Ordered two additional films at $1,709 each.
9 Received $2,798 cash from admissions.
10 Made $2,452 payment on mortgage and $1,430 for accounts payable due.
11 Classic Theater contracted with D. Zarle Company to operate the concession stand.
Zarle is to pay 16% of gross concession receipts (payable monthly) for the rental of the concession stand.
12 Paid advertising expenses $346.
20 Received one of the films ordered on April 3 and was billed $1,709. The film will be shown in April.
25 Received $5,289 cash from admissions.
29 Paid salaries $1,144.
30 Received statement from D. Zarle showing gross concession receipts of $1,900 and the balance due to The Classic Theater of $304 ($1,900 X 16%) for April. Zarle paid one-half of the balance due and will remit the remainder on May 5.
30 Prepaid $875 rental on special film to be run in May.
In addition to the accounts identified above, the chart of accounts shows No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 136 Prepaid Rent, No. 400 Service Revenue, No. 429 Rent Revenue, No.610 Advertising Expense, No. 726 Salaries and Wages Expense, and No. 729 Rent Expense.
Instructions:
a. Enter the beginning balances in the ledger as of April 1. Insert a check mark (v) in the reference columns of the ledger for the beginning balance.
b. Journalize the April transactions.
c. Post the April journal entries to the ledger. Assume that all entries are posted from page 1 of the journal.
d. Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2008.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budgeted profit, what-if analysis
The Monteiro Manufacturing Corporation manufactures and sells folding umbrellas. The corporation’s condensed income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011, follows:
|
Sales (200,000 units)
|
1,000,000
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
600,000
|
|
|
Gross margin
|
400,000
|
|
|
Selling expenses
|
150,000
|
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
100,000
|
250,000
|
| |
|
150,000
|
Monteiro’s budget committee has estimated the following changes for 2012:
30% increase in number of units sold
20% increase in material cost per unit
15% increase in direct labor cost per unit
10% increase in variable indirect cost per unit
5% increase in indirect fixed costs
8% increase in selling expenses, arising solely from increased volume 6% increase in administrative expenses, reflecting anticipated higher wage and supply price levels
Any changes in administrative expenses caused solely by increased sales volume are considered immaterial.
Because inventory quantities remain fairly constant, the budget committee considered that for budget purposes any change in inventory valuation can be ignored. The composition of the cost of a unit of finished product during 2011 for materials, direct labor, and manufacturing support, respectively, was in the ratio of 3:2:1. In 2011, $40,000 of manufacturing support was for fixed costs. No changes in production methods or credit policies were contemplated for 2012.
Required:
(a) Compute the unit sales price at which the Monteiro Manufacturing Corporation must sell its umbrellas in 2012 in order to earn a budgeted profit of $200,000.
(b) Unhappy about the prospect of an increase in selling price, Monteiro’s sales manager wants to know how many units must be sold at the old price to earn the $200,000 budgeted profit. Compute the number of units that must be sold at the old price to earn $200,000.
(c) Believing that the estimated increase in sales is overly optimistic, one of the company’s directors wants to know what annual profit is likely if the selling price determined in part a is adopted but the increase in sales volume is only 10%. Compute the budgeted profit in the case.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Axillar Beauty Products Corporation is considering the production of a new conditioning shampoo that will require the purchase of new mixing machinery. The machinery will cost $375,000, is expected to have a useful life of 10 years, and is expected to have a salvage value of $50,000 at the end of 10 years. The machinery will also need a $35,000 overhaul at the end of Year 6. A $40,000 increase in working capital will be needed for this investment project. The working capital will be released at the end of the 10 years. The new shampoo is expected to generate net cash inflows of $85,000 per year for each of the 10 years. Axillar’s discount rate is 16%.
Required:
a. What is the net present value of this investment opportunity?
b. Based on your answer to (a) above, should Axillar go ahead with the new conditioning shampoo?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Industrial Supply Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below.
|
Work in process, beginning:
|
|
Units in beginning work in process inventory
|
400
|
|
Materials costs
|
6,900
|
|
Conversion costs
|
2,500
|
|
Percentage complete for materials
|
80%
|
|
Percentage complete for conversion
|
15%
|
|
Units started into production during the month
|
6,000
|
|
Units transferred to the next department
|
5,200
|
|
Materials costs added during the month
|
112,500
|
|
Conversion costs added during the
|
210,300
|
|
Ending work in process:
|
|
Units in ending work-in-process inventory
|
1,200
|
|
Percentage complete for materials
|
75%
|
|
Percentage complete for conversion
|
30%
|
Required: Calculate the equivalent units for materials for the month in the first processing department.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Post-Balance-Sheet Events)
For each of the following subsequent (post-balance-sheet) events, indicate whether a company should (a) adjust the financial statements, (b) disclose in notes to the financial statements, or (c) neither adjust nor disclose.
Sr. No. Subsequent (post balance sheet) Events 1 Settlement of federal tax case at a cost considerably in excess of the amount expected at year-end
2 Introduction of a new product line.
3 Loss of assembly plant due to fire.
4 Sale of a significant portion of the company’s assets.
5 Retirement of the company president.
6 Issuance of a significant number of shares of common stock.
7 Loss of a significant customer.
8 Prolonged employee strike.
9 Material loss on a year-end receivable because of a customer’s bankruptcy.
10 Hiring of a new president.
11 Settlement of prior year’s litigation against the company.
12 Merger with another company of comparable size.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Long-term Contract with an Overall Loss)
On July 1, 2012, Torvill Construction Company Inc. contracted to build an office building for Gumbel Corp. for a total contract price of $1,900,000. On July 1, Torvill estimated that it would take between 2 and 3 years to complete the building. On December 31, 2014, the building was deemed substantially completed. Following are accumulated contract costs incurred, estimated costs to complete the contract, and accumulated billings to Gumbel for 2012, 2013, and 2014.
| |
At 12/31/12
|
At 12/31/13
|
At 12/31/14
|
|
Contract costs incurred
|
300,000
|
1,200,000
|
2,100,000
|
|
Estimated costs to complete the contract
|
1,200,000
|
800,000
|
–
|
|
Billings to Gumbel
|
300,000
|
1,100,000
|
1,850,000
|
Instructions:
a. Using the percentage-of-completion method, prepare schedules to compute the profit or loss to be recognized as a result of this contract for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2013, 2014. (Ignore income taxes).
b. Using the completed-contract method, prepare schedules to compute the profit or loss to be recognized as a result of this contract for the years ended December 31, 2012, 2013, and 2014 (Ignore income taxes).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that in year 1, the ending merchandise inventory is overstates by $30,000. If this is the only error in Years 1 and 2, fill in the items below, indicating which items will be understated, overstated, or correctly stated for Years 1 and 2.
|
Item
|
Year 1
|
Year 2
|
|
Ending Inventory
|
|
|
|
Beginning Inventory
|
|
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information was made available from the income statement and balance sheet of Lauren Company:
|
Item
|
40543
|
40178
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
53400
|
58600
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
35600
|
32700
|
|
Merchandise Inventory
|
85,000
|
79,000
|
|
Sales
|
(2010)
|
243000
|
|
Interest Revenue
|
(2010)
|
5,600
|
|
Dividend Revenue
|
(2010)
|
1,200
|
|
Tax Expense
|
(2010)
|
12,300
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
(2010)
|
28,000
|
|
COGS
|
(2010)
|
65,000
|
|
Interest Expense
|
(2010)
|
3,600
|
|
Operating Expenses
|
|
28,500
|
Complete the cash flow from operating activities section for Lauren Company using the direct method for the year ended December 31, 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Product pricing and profit analysis with bottleneck operations
Delaware Bay Chemical Company produces three products: ethylene, butane, and ester.
Each of these products has high demand in the market, and Delaware Bay Chemical is able to sell as much as it can produce of all three. The reaction operation is a bottleneck in the process and is running at 100% of capacity.Delaware Baywants to improve chemical operation profitability. The variable conversion cost is $7 per process hour. The fixed cost is $550,000. In addition, the cost analyst was able to determine the following information about the three products:
| |
Ethylene
|
Butane
|
Ester
|
|
Budgeted units produced
|
9000
|
9,000
|
9,000
|
|
Total process hours per unit
|
3
|
3
|
2
|
|
Reactor hours per unit
|
1
|
0.8
|
0.5
|
|
Unit selling price
|
$165
|
$128
|
$115
|
|
Direct materials cost per unit
|
$110
|
$75
|
$85
|
The reaction operation is part of the total process for each of these three products. Thus, for example, 1.0 of the 3 hours required to process ethylene are associated with the reactor.
Instructions:
1. Determine the unit contribution margin for each product.
2. Provide an analysis to determine the relative product profitability, assuming that the reactor is a bottleneck.
3. Assume that management wishes to improve profitability by increasing prices on selected products. At what price would ethylene and ester need to be offered in order to produce the same relative profitability as butane?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Standard factory overhead variance report
Bio-Care, Inc., a manufacturer of disposable medical supplies, prepared the following factory overhead cost budget for the Assembly Department for March 2010. The company expected to operate the department at 100% of normal capacity of 18,000 hours.
| |
Variable Cost
|
|
Indirect factory wages
|
135,000
|
|
Power and lights
|
93,600
|
|
Indirect materials
|
25,200
|
|
Total variable cost
|
253,800
|
|
Fixed cost
|
|
|
Supervisory salaries
|
72,000
|
|
Depreciation of plant & equip
|
51,500
|
|
Insurance & property tax
|
24,100
|
|
Total fixed cost
|
147,600
|
|
Total factory overhead cost
|
401,400
|
During March, the department operated at 16,900 hours, and the factory overhead costs incurred were indirect factory wages, $126,320; power and light, $88,110; indirect materials, $23,220; supervisory salaries, $72,000; depreciation of plant and equipment, $51,500; and insurance and property taxes, $24,100.
Instructions:
Prepare a factory overhead cost variance report for March. To be useful for cost control, the budgeted amounts should be based on 16,900 hours.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Differential analysis report involving opportunity costs
On March 1, Midway Distribution Company is considering leasing a building and buying the necessary equipment to operate a public warehouse. Alternatively, the company could use the funds to invest in $750,000of 7% U.S. Treasury bonds that mature in 14 years. The bonds could be purchased at face value. The following data have been assembled: Cost of equipment $750,000
Life of equipment 14 years
Estimated residual value of equipment $76,000 Yearly costs to operate the warehouse, excluding depreciation of equipment $195,000 Yearly expected revenues—years 1–7 $330,000
Yearly expected revenues—years 8–14 $280,000
Instructions:
1. Prepare a report as of March 1, 2010, presenting a differential analysis of the proposed operation of the warehouse for the 14 years as compared with present conditions.
2. Based on the results disclosed by the differential analysis, should the proposal be accepted?
3. If the proposal is accepted, what is the total estimated income from operations of the warehouse for the 14 years?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented here is information for Willingham Inc. for 2010.
|
Retained earnings, January 1
|
130,000
|
|
Revenue from legal services
|
400,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
170,000
|
|
Dividends
|
82,000
|
Instructions:
Prepare the 2010 retained earnings statement for Willingham Inc.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mellilo Corporation issued $5 million of 20-year, 9.5 percent bonds on July 1, 2007, at 98.
Interest is due on June 30 and December 31 of each year, and all of the bonds in the issue mature on June 30, 2027. Mellilo’s fiscal year ends on December 31.
Prepare the following journal entries:
a. July 1, 2007, to record the issuance of bonds.
b. December 31, 2007, to pay interest, amortize the bond discount.
c. June 30, 2027, to pay interest, amortize the bond discount, and retire the bonds at maturity (make two separate entries).
d. Briefly explain the effect of amortizing the bond discount upon (1) annual net income and (2) annual net cash flow from operating activities. (Ignore possible income tax effects)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Mill Run Golf & Country Club details the following accounts in its financial statements.
(a) (b)
Accounts payable and accrued liabilities
Accounts receivable
Property, plant, and equipment
Food and beverage operations revenue
Golf course operations revenue
Inventory
Long-term debt
Office and general expense
Professional fees expense
Wages and benefits expense
Instructions
a) Classify each of the above accounts as an asset (A), liability (L), stockholders’ equity (SE), revenue (R), or expense (E) item.
b) Classify each of the above accounts as a financing activity (F), investing activity (I), or operating activity (O). If you believe a particular account doesn’t fit in any of these activities, explain why.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Basic Decision Analysis Using CVP
Assume that the projected number of units sold for the year is 7,000. Consider requirements (b), (c), and (d) independently of each other.
Required
a. What will the operating profit be?
b. What is the impact on operating profit if the sales price decreases by 10 percent? Increase by 20 percent?
c. What is the impact on operating profit if variable costs per unit decrease by 10 percent? Increase by 20 percent?
d. Suppose that fixed costs for the year are 10 percent lower than projected, and variable costs per unit are 10 percent higher than projected. What impact will these cost changes have on operating profit for the year? Will profit go up? Down? By how much?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cambridge, Inc., is considering the introduction of a new calculator with the following price and cost characteristics:
|
Sales price (each)
|
18
|
|
Variable costs (each)
|
10
|
|
Fixed costs per month
|
20,000
|
Required
a. What number must Cambridge sell per month to break even?
b. What number must Cambridge sell to make an operating profit of $16,000 for the month?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
During the month of January 20-2, TJ’s Specialty Shop engaged in the following transactions:
Jan. 1 Sold merchandise on account to Anne Clark, $3,000, plus tax of $150.SaleNo. 643.
2 Issued Check No. 818 to Nathen Co. in payment of January 1 balance of $800,
less 2% discount.
3 Purchased merchandise on account from West Wholesalers, $1,500. Invoice No. 678, dated January 3, terms 2/15, n/30.
4 Purchased merchandise on account from Owen Enterprises, $2,000. Invoice No. 767, dated January 4, terms 2/10, n/30.
4 Issued Check No. 819 in payment of telephone expense for the month of January, $180.
8 Sold merchandise for cash, $3,600, plus tax of $180.
9 Received payment from Lucy Greene in full settlement of account, $1,491.
10 Issued Check No. 820 to West Wholesalers in payment of January 1 balance of $1,200.
12 Sold merchandise on account to Martha Boyle, $1,000, plus tax of $50.SaleNo.644.
12 Received payment from Anne Clark on account, $2,100.
12 Issued Check No. 821 in payment of wages (Wages Expense) for the two-week period ending January 11, $1,100.
13 Issued Check No. 822 to Owen Enterprises in payment of January 4 purchase. Invoice No. 767, less 2% discount.
13 Martha Boyle returned merchandise for a credit, $800, plus sales tax of $40.
17 Returned merchandise to Evans Essentials for credit, $300.
22 Received payment from John Dempsey on account, $2,121.
Jan. 26 Issued Check No. 823 in payment of wages (Wages Expense) for the twoweek period ending January 25, $1,100.
27 Issued Check No. 824 in payment of utilities expense for the month of January, $630.
27 Sold merchandise on account to John Dempsey, $2,000, plus tax of $100. Sale No. 645.
Late in January, TJ’s agreed to sell the business to a competitor. To agree on a selling price, financial statements are needed as of January 31 and for the month of January 20-2. To prepare these financial statements, TJ’s must perform the same procedures it normally does at year-end.
At the end of January, the following adjustments (a)–(g) need to be made:
(a, b) Merchandise inventory as of January 31, $19,000.
(c) Unused supplies on hand, $115.
(d) Unexpired insurance on January 31, $968.
(e) Depreciation expense on the building for the month, $67.
(f) Depreciation expense on the store equipment for the month, $38.
(g) Wages earned but not paid as of January 31, $330.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For those not using working papers:
1. If you are not using the working papers, open a general ledger, an accounts receivable ledger, and an accounts payable ledger as of January 1. Enter the January 1 balance of each of the accounts, with a check mark in the Posting Reference column. The beginning balances for Part 2 are the same as the balances from your solution to Part 1 of Comprehensive Problem 2.
For working paper users and nonusers:
2. Enter transactions for the month of January in the general journal. Post immediately to the accounts receivable and accounts payable ledgers.
3. Post from the journal to the general ledger.
4. Prepare schedules of accounts receivable and accounts payable.
5. Prepare a month-end work sheet, income statement, statement of owner’s equity, and balance sheet. The mortgage payable includes $600 that is due within one year.
6. Journalize and post adjusting entries.
7. Journalize and post closing entries.
8. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Glass Company manufactures a product through a continuous single-step process. All materials are added at the beginning of processing. Production and cost data for the company for the current month are as follows.
|
Production
|
Units
|
|
In process, beginning of month (20% converted)
|
2,000
|
|
Started during current month
|
8,000
|
|
Completed and transferred to finished goods
|
5,500
|
|
In process, end of month (60% converted)
|
4,500
|
|
Manufacturing Costs
|
|
Work in process, beginning
|
|
-Materials
|
15,000
|
|
-Conversion
|
6,450
|
|
Production Costs Added
|
|
Materials
|
54,000
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
105,000
|
|
Factory overhead
|
36,150
|
Required:
Prepare a cost of production report for current month. Use Weighted-Average process costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Glass Company manufactures a product through a continuous single-step process.
All materials are added at the beginning of processing. Production and cost data for the company for the current month are as follows.
|
Production Data
|
Units
|
|
In process, beginning of month (20% converted)
|
2,000
|
|
Started during current month
|
8,000
|
|
Completed and transferred to finished goods
|
5,500
|
|
In process, end of month (60% converted)
|
2,500
|
|
Manufacturing Costs
|
|
|
Work in process, beginning
|
|
|
Materials
|
15,000
|
|
|
Conversion
|
6,450
|
21,450
|
|
Production Costs Added
|
|
|
Materials
|
54,000
|
|
|
Direct labor cost
|
105,000
|
|
|
Factory overhead cost
|
42,840
|
|
Required
Prepare a cost of production report for current month. Use FIFO process costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The inventory of Oheto Company on December 31, 2013, consists of the following items.
|
Part No.
|
Quantity
|
Cost per unit
|
Cost to Replace per Unit
|
|
110
|
690
|
131
|
138
|
|
111
|
1,050
|
83
|
72
|
|
112
|
550
|
110
|
105
|
|
113
|
260
|
235
|
248
|
|
120
|
420
|
283
|
287
|
|
121a
|
$1,670
|
22-Jan-00
|
19
|
|
122
|
360
|
331
|
324
|
a Part No. 121 is obsolete and has a realizable value of $0.7 each as scrap.
Instructions:
(a) Determine the inventory as of December 31, 2013, by the lower-of-cost-ormarket method, applying this method directly to each item.
(b) Determine the inventory by the lower-of-cost-or-market method, applying the method to the total of the inventory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E9-12
Astaire Company uses the gross profit method to estimate inventory for monthly reporting purposes. Presented below is information for the month of May.
|
Inventory, May 1
|
172,000
|
|
Purchases (gross)
|
643,800
|
|
Freight-in
|
30,500
|
|
Sales
|
1,091,300
|
|
Sales returns
|
76,800
|
|
Purchase discounts
|
12,320
|
Instructions:
(a) Compute the estimated inventory at May 31, assuming that the gross profit is 25% of sales.
(b) Compute the estimated inventory at May 31, assuming that the gross profit is 25% of cost.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E10-12
Below are transactions related to Impala Company.
a. The City of Pebble Beach gives the company 5 acres of land as a plant site. The market value of this land is determined to be $90,000.
b. 14,000 shares of common stock with a par value of $55 per share are issued in exchange for land and buildings. The property has been appraised at a fair market value of $900,000, of which $186,500 has been allocated to land and $713,500 to buildings. The stock of Impala Company is not listed on any exchange, but a block of 100 shares was sold by a stockholder 12 months ago at $71 per share, and a block of 200 shares was sold by another stockholder 18 months ago at $63 per share.
c. No entry has been made to remove from the accounts for Materials, Direct Labor, and Overhead the amounts properly chargeable to plant asset accounts for machinery constructed during the year. The following information is given relative to costs of the machinery constructed.
|
Materials used
|
13,320
|
|
Factory supplies used
|
920
|
|
Direct labor incurred
|
16,820
|
Additional overhead (over regular) caused by construction of machinery, excluding factory supplies used 2,610
Fixed overhead rate applied to regular manufacturing operations 60% of direct labor cost
Cost of similar machinery if it had been purchased from outside suppliers 44,270
Instructions:
Prepare journal entries on the books of Impala Company to record these transactions. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Diego Company manufactures one product that is sold for $80 per unit in two geographic regions – The East and West Regions. The following information pertains to the company’s first year of operations in which it produced 40,000 units and sold 35,000.
|
Variable Cost Per Unit:
|
|
Manufacturing:
|
|
|
Direct Materials
|
$24.00
|
|
Direct Labor
|
$14.00
|
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead
|
$2.00
|
|
Variable Selling/Admin
|
$4.00
|
|
Fixed Cost Per Year:
|
|
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead
|
$800,000.00
|
|
Fixed Selling and administrative
|
$496,000.00
|
The company sold 25,000 units in the East region and 10,000 units in the West region. It determined that $250,000 of its fixed selling and administrative expenses is traceable to the West region, $150,000 is traceable to the East region, and the remaining $96,000 is a common fixed cost. The company will continue to incur the total amount of its fixed manufacturing overhead costs as long as it continues to produce any amount of its only product.
Required: Answer each question independently based on the original data unless instructed otherwise. You do not need to prepare a segmented income statement until question 13.
1. What is the unit product cost under variable costing?
2. What is the unit product cost under absorption costing?
3. What is the company’s total contribution margin under variable costing?
4. What is the company’s net operating income under variable costing?
5. What is the company’s total gross margin under absorption costing?
6. What is the company’s net operating income under absorption costing?
7. What is the amount of the difference between the variable costing and absorption costing net operating incomes? What is the cause of this difference?
8. What is the company’s break even point in unit sales? Is it above or below the actual sales volume? Compare the break even sales volume to your answer for question 6 and comment.
9. If sales volumes in the East and West regions had been reversed, what would be the company’s overall break even point in unit sales?
10. What would have been the company’s variable costing net operating income if it had produced and sold 35,000 units? You do not need to perform any calculations to answer this question.
11. What would have been the company’s absorption costing net operating income if it had produced and sold 35,000 units? You do not need to perform any calculations to answer this question.
12. If the company produces 5,000 fewer units than it sells in its second year of operations, will absorption costing net operating income be higher or lower than variable costing net operating income in Year 2? Why? No calculations are necessary.
13. Prepare a contribution format segmented income statement that includes a Total column and columns for the East and West regions.
14. Diego is considering eliminating the West region because an internally generated report suggests the region’s total gross margin in the first year of operations was $50,000 less than its traceable fixed selling and administrative expenses. Diego believes that if it drops the West region, the East region’s sales will grow by 5% in Year 2. Using the contribution approach for analyzing segment profitability and assuming all else remains constant in Year 2, what would be the profit impact of dropping the West region in Year 2?
15. Assume the West region invests $30,000 in a new advertising campaign in Year 2 that increases its unit sales by 20%. If all else remains constant, what would be the profit impact of pursuing the advertising campaign?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Adjusting Entries, Posting, and Preparing an Adjusted Trial Balance)
Powerhouse Consulting
Chart of Accounts:
|
No. 101
|
Cash
|
|
No. 112
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
No. 126
|
Supplies
|
|
No. 130
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
|
No. 149
|
Office Furniture
|
|
No. 150
|
Accumulated Depreciation – Office Furniture
|
|
No. 201
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
No. 209
|
Salaries Payable
|
|
No. 212
|
Travel Payable
|
|
No. 229
|
Unearned Revenue
|
|
No. 311
|
Common Stock
|
|
No. 400
|
Service Revenue
|
|
No. 717
|
Depreciation Expense
|
|
No. 722
|
Insurance Expense
|
|
No. 726
|
Rent Expense
|
|
No. 729
|
Salaries Expense
|
|
No. 731
|
Supplies Expense
|
|
No. 736
|
Travel Expense
|
Leo Drayton started his own consulting firm, Powerhouse Consulting, on August 1, 2010.
The trial balance at August 31, 2010 is as follows:
Powerhouse Consulting Trial Balance
August 31, 2010
Other Data:
1) $900 of supplies is on hand at the end of the month
2) Travel Expense incurred but not paid as of August 31, 2010 is $400
3) The insurance policy is for 2 years
4) $1,300 of the balance in the unearned revenue account has been earned at the end of the month.
5) Accrued salaries at the end of the month are $1,600
6) The office furniture is depreciated at a rate of $170 per month for 60 months
7) $1,200 of services earned has not been recorded or paid as of August 31, 2010.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the adjusting entries for August on the tab labeled General Journal
(b) Enter the totals from the trial balance above as beginning balances on the tab labeled Ledger Accounts
(c) Post the adjusting entries to the ledger accounts on the tab labeled Ledger Accounts.
(Be sure to calculate the balance in the account after each posted transaction)
(d) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at August 31, 2010 on the tab labeled Adjusted Trial Balance
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Closing Entries and Preparing a Post-Closing Trial Balance)
The adjusted trial balance at March 31, 2010 is as follows:
Jazzy Manufacturing
Adjusted Trial Balance
March 31, 2010
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
11,400
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
7,000
|
|
|
Prepaid Rent
|
2,000
|
|
|
Equipment
|
20,000
|
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation – Equipment
|
|
4,200
|
|
Notes Payable
|
|
5,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
4,950
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
20,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
|
5,800
|
|
Dividends
|
3,500
|
|
|
Service Revenue
|
|
14,500
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
600
|
|
|
Rent Expense
|
500
|
|
|
Salaries Expense
|
9,450
|
|
|
Interest Expense
|
50
|
|
|
Interest Payable
|
50
|
|
|
Totals
|
54,500
|
54,500
|
Instructions
(a) Journalize the closing entries for Revenue and Expenses at March 31, 2010 on the tab labeled General Journal
(b) Post the closing entries for Revenue and Expenses to the ledger accounts on the tab labeled Ledger Accounts. (Be sure to calculate the balance in the account after each posted transaction)
(c) Journalize the closing entries for Income Summary and Dividends at March 31, 2010 on the tab labeled General Journal
(d) Post the closing entries for Income Summary and Dividends to the ledger accounts on the tab labeled Ledger Accounts (Be sure to calculate the balance in the account after each posted transaction)
(e) Prepare a post-closing trial balance at March 31, 2010 on the tab labeled Post-Closing Trial Balance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing adjusting entries
Laughter Landscaping has the following independent cases at the end of the year on December 31, 2014.
a. Each Friday, Laughter pays employees for the current week’s work. The amount of the weekly payroll is $7,000 for a five-day workweek. This year December 31 falls on a Wednesday.
b. Details of Prepaid insurance are shown in the account:
Prepaid Insurance
Jan 1. 4,500
Laughter prepays a full year’s insurance each year on January 1. Record insurance expense for the year ended December 31.
c. The beginning balance of Supplies was $4,000. During the year, Laughter purchased supplies for $5,200, and at December 31 the supplies on hand total $2,400.
d. Laughter designed a landscape plan, and the client paid Laughter $7,000 at the start of the project. Laughter recorded this amount as Unearned service revenue. The job will take several months to complete, and Laughter estimates that the company has earned 60% of the total revenue during the current year.
e. Depreciation for the current year includes Equipment, $3,700; and Trucks, $1,300.
Make a compound entry.
Requirement
1. Journalize the adjusting entry needed on December 31, 2014, for each of the previous items affecting Laughter Landscaping
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Issuing stock and preparing the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet
Lincoln-Priest, Inc., was organized in 2011. At December 31, 2011, the Lincoln- Priest balance sheet reported the following stockholders’ equity:
Lincoln-Priest, Inc.
Stockholders’ Equity
December 31, 2011
Paid-in Capital:
Preferred Stock, 7%, $40 par, 110,000 shares authorized, none issued
Common stock, $1 par, 520,000 shares authorized, 61,000 shares issued and outstanding 61,000
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par – common
|
41,000
|
|
Total paid-in capital
|
102,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
29,000
|
|
Total Stockholders’ Equity
|
$131,000
|
Requirements
1. During 2012, the company completed the following selected transactions.
Journalize each transaction. Explanations are not required.
a. Issued for cash 1,300 shares of preferred stock at par value.
b. Issued for cash 2,400 shares of common stock at a price of $5 per share.
c. Net income for the year was $74,000, and the company declared no dividends.
Make the closing entry for net income.
2. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the Lincoln-Priest balance sheet at December 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Monthly production costs in Ogden Company for two levels of production are as follows.
|
Cost
|
2,000 units
|
4,000 units
|
|
Indirect labor
|
10,000
|
20,000
|
|
Supervisory salaries
|
5,000
|
5,000
|
|
Maintenance
|
2,500
|
4,000
|
Indicate which costs are variable, fixed, and mixed, and give the reason for each answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Flexible Budget
Connor Company’s budgeted prices for direct materials, direct manufacturing labor, and direct marketing (distribution) labor per attache case are $40, $8, $12, respectively. The president is pleased with the following performance report.
| |
Actual Costs
|
Static Budget
|
Variance
|
|
Direct materials
|
364,000
|
400,000
|
36,000 F
|
|
Direct manufacturing labor
|
78,000
|
80,000
|
2,000 F
|
|
Direct marketing (distribution)labor
|
110,000
|
120,000
|
10,000 F
|
48,000 F
Actual output was 8,800 attache cases. Assume all three direct-cost items above are variable costs.
Is the president’s pleasure justified? Prepare revised performance report that uses flexible budget and a static budget.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Target Costing
Utah Utensil has developed a new kitchen utensil. The firm has conducted significant market research and estimated the following pattern for sales of the new product:
|
Year
|
Expected Volume (units)
|
Expected Price per unit
|
|
1
|
48,000
|
19
|
|
2
|
48,000
|
20
|
|
3
|
90,000
|
16
|
|
4
|
40,000
|
12
|
If the firm desires to net $3.50 per unit in profit over the life of the product, and selling and administrative expenses are expected to average $50,000 per year, what is the target cost to produce the new utensil?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
WA EUP & Cost Assignment.
Ro-day-o Inc. manufactures belt buckles in a single -step production process. The following information is available for June 2013:
| |
Whole Units
|
Cost of Material
|
|
Beginning work in process
|
200,000
|
1,200,000
|
|
Units started during period
|
1,000,000
|
7,800,000
|
|
Units in ending inventory
|
300,000
|
|
Beginning inventory units were 100 percent complete as to material and 80% complete as to labor.
The ending inventory units were 100% complete as to material and 50% complete as to labor overhead is applied to production at the rate of 60% of direct labor cost.
a. Prepare a schedule to compute equivalent units of production by cost component assuming the weighted average method.
b. Determine the unit production costs for material and conversion.
Calculate the costs assigned to completed units and ending inventory for august 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
WA and FIFO EUP
Funtime Inc. makes small toys in a one-department production process. Plastic is added at the beginning of the process, all other materials are considered indirect.
The following information is available relative to September 2010 production activities: Beginning WIP Inventory: 15,000 toys (60% complete as to labor, 75% complete as to overhead).
Started into production: plastic for 620,000 toys. Ending WIP Inventory: 25,400 toys (35% complete as to labor, 60% complete as to overhead).
a. Compute the EUP for direct material, direct labor, and overhead using weighted average process costing.
b. Compute the EUP for direct material, direct labor, and overhead using FIFO process costing.
c. Reconcile the calculations in parts (a) and (b).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Spruce Enterprises operates a chain of lumber stores. In 2008, corporate management examined industry-level data and determined the following performance targets for lumber retail stores:
|
Asset turnover
|
1.7
|
|
Profit margin
|
8.00%
|
The actual 2008 results for the company’s lumber retail stores area as follows:
|
Total assets at beginning of year
|
10,200,000
|
|
Total assets at end of year
|
12,300,000
|
|
Sales
|
28,250,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
25,885,000
|
a. For 2008, how did the lumber retail stores perform relative to their industry norms?
b. Where, as indicated by the performance measures, are the most likely areas to improve performance in the retail lumber stores?
c. What are the advantages and disadvantages of setting a performance target at the start of the year compared with one that is determined at the end of the year based on actual industry performance?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Entries related to uncollectible accounts
The following transactions were completed by Clark Management Company during the current fiscal year ended December 31:
July 5. Received 70% of the $21,000 balance owed by Dockins Co., a bankrupt business, and wrote off the remainder as uncollectible.
Sept. 21. Reinstated the account of Bart Tiffany, which had been written off in the preceding year as uncollectible. Journalized the receipt of $4,875 cash in full payment of Tiffany’s account.
Oct. 19. Wrote off the $6,275 balance owed by Ski Time Co., which has no assets.
Nov. 6. Reinstated the account of Kirby Co., which had been written off in the preceding year as uncollectible. Journalized the receipt of $4,750 cash in full payment of the account.
Dec. 31. Wrote off the following accounts as uncollectible (compound entry): Maxie Co., $2,150; Kommers Co., $3,600; Helena Distributors, $5,500; Ed Ballantyne, $1,750.
Dec. 31. Based on an analysis of the $815,240 of accounts receivable, it was estimated that $16,750 will be uncollectible. Journalized the adjusting entry.
Instructions
1. Record the January 1 credit balance of $12,550 in a T account for Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.
2. Journalize the transactions. Post each entry that affects the following selected T accounts and determine the new balances: Allowance for Doubtful Accounts Bad Debt Expense.
3. Determine the expected net realizable value of the accounts receivable as of
December 31.
4. Assuming that instead of basing the provision for uncollectible accounts on an analysis of receivables, the adjusting entry on December 31 had been based on an estimated expense of 1/4 of 1% of the net sales of $7,126,000 for the year, determine the following:
a. Bad debt expense for the year.
b. Balance in the allowance account after the adjustment of December 31.
c. Expected net realizable value of the accounts receivable as of December 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allowance method for doubtful accounts
Steelhead Company supplies flies and fishing gear to sporting goods stores and outfitters throughout the western United States. The accounts receivable clerk for Steelhead prepared the following partially completed aging-of-receivables schedule as of the end of business on December 31, 2008.
Days Past Due Not Past Over
Customer Balance Due 1 – 30 31 – 60 61 – 90 91 – 120 120
|
Alexandria Fishery
|
15,000
|
15,000
|
|
Cutthroat Sports
|
5,500
|
5,500
|
|
Yellowstone Sports
|
2,900
|
2,900
|
Totals 895,900 454,800 249,500 101,700 33,900 32,100 23,900
|
Customer
|
Due Date
|
Balance
|
|
Baitfish Sports & Flies
|
21-Jun-07
|
$1,750
|
|
Kiwi Flies
|
9-Sep-07
|
$650
|
|
Adams Co.
|
30-Sep-07
|
$1,500
|
|
Bailey Sports
|
17-Oct-07
|
$600
|
|
Prince Sports
|
18-Nov-07
|
$950
|
|
Cahill Co.
|
28-Nov-07
|
$2,000
|
|
Wintson Company
|
1-Dec-07
|
$2,250
|
|
Goofus Bug Sports
|
6-Jan-08
|
$6,200
|
Steelhead Company has a past history of uncollectible accounts by age category.
Age Class Percent Uncollectible Not past due 2%
1-30 days past due 5
31-60 days past due 10
61-90 days past due 25
91-120 days past due 45
Over 120 days past due 90
Instructions:
1. Determine the number of days past due for each of the preceding accounts.
2. Complete the aging-of-receivables schedule.
3. Estimated the allowance for doubtful accounts, based on the aging-of-receivables schedule.
4. Assume that the allowance for doubtful accounts for Steelhead Company has a debit balance of $3,199 before adjustment on December 31, 2007. Journalize the adjusting entry for uncollectible accounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Princeton Fabrication, Inc., produced and sold 1,200 units of the company’s only product in March. You have collected the following information from the accounting records:
|
Sales price (per unit)
|
$896
|
|
Manufacturing costs:
|
|
Fixed overhead (for the month)
|
100,800
|
|
Direct labor (per unit)
|
70
|
|
Direct materials (per unit)
|
224
|
|
Variable overhead (per unit).
|
140
|
|
Marketing and administrative costs:
|
|
Fixed costs (for the month)
|
134,400
|
|
Variable costs (per unit)
|
28
|
Required
a. Compute:
1. Variable manufacturing cost per unit.
2. Full cost per unit.
3. Variable cost per unit.
4. Full absorption cost per unit.
5. Prime cost per unit.
6. Conversion cost per unit.
7. Profit margin per unit.
8. Contribution margin per unit.
9. Gross margin per unit.
b. If the number of units decreases from 1,200 to 800, which is within the relevant range, will the fixed manufacturing cost per unit increase, decrease, or remain the same? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive Income
The following information relates to Loveland Company:
|
Sales
|
600,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
300,000
|
|
Other operating expenses
|
100,000
|
|
Interest expense
|
10,000
|
|
Income tax expense
|
70,000
|
In addition, the following events occurred during the year:
1. Loveland has an investment portfolio for long-term investment purposes. That portfolio decreased in value by $70,000 during the year.
2. Loveland owns a substantial amount of land. During the year, the land increased in value by $160,000.
3. Loveland has several foreign subsidiaries. The currencies in the countries where those subsidiaries are located declined in value (relative to the U.S. dollar) during the year. Accordingly, the computed value of the equity of those subsidiaries, in U.S. dollars, decreased by $60,000.
Required:
1. Compute Loveland’s comprehensive income for the year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sunshine Baking Company is a diversified food products company with three operating divisions organized as investment centers. Condensed data taken from the records of the three divisions for the year ended June 30, 2010, are as follows:
|
Bread Division
|
Snack Cake
|
Division
|
Retail Bakeries
|
|
Division Sales
|
8100000
|
8700000
|
7800000
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
4980000
|
5400000
|
4600000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
1,662,000
|
1,995,000
|
1,484,000
|
|
Invested assets
|
10,800,000
|
10,875,000
|
6,000,000
|
The management of Sunshine Baking Company is evaluating each division as a basis for planning a future expansion of operations.
Instructions
1. Prepare condensed divisional income statements for the three divisions, assuming that there were no service department charges.
2. Using the DuPont formula for rate of return on investment, compute the profit margin, investment turnover, and rate of return on investment for each division.
3. If available funds permit the expansion of operations of only one division, which of the divisions would you recommend for expansion, based on parts (1) and (2)?Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P2-23A Analyzing operating leverage (Req A to C only)
Justin Zinder is a venture capitalist facing two alternative investment opportunities.
He intends to invest $1 million in a start-up firm. He is nervous, however, about future economic volatility. He asks you to analyze the following financial data for the past year’s operations of the two firms he is considering and give him some business advice.
Company Name
Ensley Kelley
Variable cost per unit (a) $21.00 $10.50
Sales revenue (8,000 units × $28.00) $224,000 $224,000
Variable cost (8,000 units × a) (168,000) (84,000)
Contribution margin $56,000 $140,000
Fixed cost (25,000) (109,000)
Net income $31,000 $31,000
Required:
a. Use the contribution margin approach to compute the operating leverage for each firm. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places.)
b. If the economy expands in coming years, Ensley and Kelley will both enjoy a 10 percent per year increase in sales, assuming that the selling price remains unchanged. Compute the new net income for each firm and percentage change in net income. (Use unrounded values of operating leverage for calculation purpose.
Round your net income answers to the nearest dollar amount and percentage change answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” and “%” signs in your response.)
c. If the economy contracts in coming years, Ensley and Kelley will both suffer a 10 percent decrease in sales volume, assuming that the selling price remains unchanged. Compute the new net income for each firm and percentage change in net income. (Use unrounded values of operating leverage for calculation purpose.
Negative values should be indicated by a minus sign. Round your net income answers to the nearest dollar amount and percentage change answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” and “%” signs in your response.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 2-20A Context-sensitive nature of cost behaviour classifications
Susan Hicks operates a sales booth in computer software trade shows, selling an accounting software package, Dollar System. She purchases the package from a software manufacturer for $175 each. Booth space at the convention hall costs $10,000 per show.
Required:
a. Sales at past trade shows have ranged between 200 and 400 software packages per show. Determine the average cost of sales per unit if Ms. Hicks sells 200,250, 300, 350 or 400 units of Dollar Systems at a trade show. Use the following chart to organize your answer. Is the cost of booth space fixed or variable?
b. If Ms. Hicks wants to earn a $50 profit on each package of software she sells at a trade show, what price must she charge at sales volumes of 200, 250, 300, 350 or 400 units?
c. Record the total cost of booth space if Ms. Hicks attends one, two, three, four or five trade shows. Record your answers in the following chart. Is the cost of booth space fixed or variable relative to the number of shows attended?
d. Ms. Hicks provides decorative shopping bags to customers who purchase software packages. Some customers take the bags; others do not. Some customers stuff more than one software package into a single bag. The number of bags varies in relation to the number of units sold, but the relationship is not proportional. Assume that Ms. Hicks uses $30 of bags for every 50 software packages sold. What is the additional cost per unit sold? Is the cost fixed or variable?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Below is information from Job Card 506 for the Bearing Manufacturing Company.
Date started: June 15, 2015 Date Completed: July 24, 2015
|
Date
|
Direct Materials
|
Direct Labor
|
Applied Factory Overhead
|
Job Total
|
|
6/15/2015
|
5,000
|
|
|
|
|
6/25/2015
|
|
1,200
|
600
|
|
|
6/27/2015
|
2,300
|
|
|
|
|
7/6/2015
|
|
1,540
|
770
|
|
|
7/15/2015
|
2,600
|
|
|
|
|
7/24/2015
|
|
760
|
380
|
|
Job 506 was sold on credit on July 24, 2015, for 180% of its cost. Factory OH was applied on the basis of DL.
Required:
a. Prepare the journal entries to record the costs incurred for Job 506 in 2015 for direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead.
b. Prepare the journal entry to record the completion of Job 506.
c. What is the predetermined factory overhead rate for Bearing Manufacturing?
d. Prepare the journal entries to record the sale of Job 506.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
There are two problems to complete, each worth 10 points. The full assignment is worth 20 points. You may want to work several of the exercises from our chapter readings this week to start. In addition, work several problems from this week’s chapters in the graded Workout Room thread before attempting the Homework assignments. We will review several problems throughout the week in the workout room.
|
Able Corporation incurred the following costs.
|
|
Beginning direct materials inventory
|
16,000
|
|
Beginning work-in-process inventory
|
7,000
|
|
Beginning finished goods inventory
|
19,000
|
|
Ending direct materials inventory
|
16,000
|
|
Ending work in process
|
14,000
|
|
Ending finished goods
|
26,000
|
|
Factory supervisor’s salary
|
28,000
|
|
Depreciation on plant
|
12,000
|
|
Sales
|
800,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
125,000
|
|
Plant maintenance
|
6,000
|
|
Plant utilities
|
11,000
|
|
Direct material
|
215,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
240,000
|
Calculate the following.
a. Direct materials used
b. Cost of goods manufactured
c. Cost of goods sold
d. Operating income
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
As loan analyst for Madison Bank, you have been presented the following information
| |
Plunkett Co.
|
Herring Co.
|
|
Assets:
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
118,300
|
321,200
|
|
Receivables
|
225,800
|
302,700
|
|
Inventories
|
578,700
|
513,800
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
922,800
|
1,137,700
|
|
Other assets
|
504,100
|
610,900
|
|
Total Assets
|
$1,426,900
|
1,748,600
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity:
|
|
Current liabilities
|
297,100
|
349,500
|
|
Long-term liabilities
|
404,500
|
504,100
|
|
Capital stock and retained earnings
|
725,300
|
895,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$1,426,900
|
1,748,600
|
|
Annual sales
|
943,900
|
1,504,700
|
Rate of gross profit on sales 30% 35%
Each of these companies has requested a loan of $49,020 for 6 months with no collateral offered. In as much as your bank has reached its quota for loans of this type, only one of these requests is to be granted.
Compute the various ratios for each company. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.25).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing purchase and sale transactions-perpetual inventory
Thelma’s Amusements completed the following transactions during November 2012 Nov 1 Purchased supplies for cash, $700.
4 Purchased inventory on credit terms of 3/10, n/eom, $9,600.
8 Returned half the inventory purchased on November 4. It was not the inventory ordered.
10 Sold goods for cash, $1,200 (cost, $700).
13 Sold inventory on credit terms of 2/15, n/45, $9,900 (cost, $5,300).
14 Paid the amount owed on account from November 4, less the return (November 8) and the discount.
17 Received defective inventory as a sales return from the November 13 sale, $600. Thelma’s cost of the inventory received was $450.
18 Purchased inventory of $4,100 on account. Payment terms were 2/10, net 30.
26 Paid the net amount owed for the November 18 purchase.
28 Received cash in full settlement of the account from the customer who purchased inventory on November 13, less the return and the discount.
29 Purchased inventory for cash, $12,000, plus freight charges of $200.
Requirement
1. Journalize the transactions on the books of Thelma’s Amusements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for petty cash transactions
Suppose that on June 1, Rockin’ Gyrations, a disc jockey service, creates a petty cash fund with an imprest balance of $500. During June, Michael Martell, fund custodian, signs the following petty cash tickets:
Petty Cash Ticket Number Item Amount
1 Postage for package received 20
2 Decoration and refreshments for office party 25
3 Two boxes of stationary 35
4 Printer cartridges 15
5 Dinner money for sales manager entertaining a customer 75
On June 30, prior to replenishment, the fund contains these tickets plus cash of $325. The accounts affected by petty cash payments are Office supplies expense, Entertainment expense, and Postage expense.
Requirements
1. On June 30, how much cash should this petty cash fund hold before it is replenished?
2. Journalize all required entries to (a) create the fund and (b) replenish it. Include explanations.
3. Make the entry on July 1 to increase the fund balance to $550. Include an explanation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Weighted-Average, Normal vs Abnormal Spoilage
Hebert Industries uses a weighted average process costing system. Management has specified that the normal loss from shrinkage cannot exceed 3 percent of the units started in a period.
All raw material is added at the start of the production process. Spoilage is determined upon inspection at the end of the production process. March processing information follows.
Beginning WIP inventory (30% complete as to conversion) 20,000 units
Started during March 120,000 units
Completed during March 116,400 units
Ending WIP inventory (20% complete as to conversion) 16,000 units
a. How many total units are there to account for?
b. How many units were spoiled during processing? Of the spoiled units, how many should be treated as a normal loss? As an abnormal loss?
c. What are the equivalent units of production for direct material? For conversion?
d. How are costs associated with the company’s normal spoilage handled?
e. How are costs associated with the company’s abnormal spoilage handled?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing and journalizing transactions
Showtime Amusements owns movie theaters. Showtime engaged in the following business transactions:
1-Jul Darrell Palusky invested $350,000 personal cash in the business by depositing that amount in a bank account titled Showtime Amusements. The business gave Palusky owner’s equity in the company.
2 Paid $300,000 cash to purchase a theater building.
5 Borrowed $220,000 from the bank. Palusky signed a note payable to the bank in the name of Showtime Amusements.
10 Purchased theater supplies on account, $1,700.
15 Paid $800 on account.
15 Paid property tax expense on theater building, $1,200.
16 Paid employee salaries, $2,800, and rent on equipment, $1,800. Make a single compound entry.
28 Withdrew $6,000 from the business for personal use.
31 Received $20,000 cash from service revenue and deposited that amount in the bank.
Showtime Amusements uses the following accounts: Cash; Supplies; Building; Accounts Payable; Notes Payable; Darrel Palusky, Capital; Darrel Palusky, Withdrawals; Service Revenue; Salary Expense; Rent Expense; Property Tax Expense.
Requirement
Journalize each transaction of Showtime Amusements as shown for July 1. Explanations are not required.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Upton Computers makes bulk purchases of small computers, stocks them in conveniently located warehouses, ships thme to its chain of retail stores and has a staff to advise customers and help them set up their new computers. Upton’s balance sheet as of December 31, 2010 is shown here (millions of dollars):
|
Cash
|
$3.50
|
Accounts payable
|
$9.00
|
|
Receivables
|
$26.00
|
Notes Payable
|
$18.00
|
|
Inventories
|
$58
|
Accruals
|
$8.50
|
|
Total current assets
|
$87.50
|
Total current liabilities
|
$35.50
|
|
Net fixed assets
|
$35.00
|
Mortgage loan
|
$6.00
|
| |
|
Common stock
|
$15.00
|
|
Total
|
$122.50
|
Retained earnings
|
$66.00
|
| |
|
Total liabilities and equity
|
$122.50
|
Sales for 2010 were $350 million and net income for the year was $10.5 million, so the firm’s profit margin was 3.0%. Upton paid dividends of $4.2 million to common stock holders, so its payout ratio was 40%. Its tax rate is 40% and it operated at full capacity.
Assume that all assets/sales ratios, spontaneous liabilities/sales ratios, the profit margin and the payout ratio remain constant in 2011.
1. If sales are projected to increase by $70 million, or 20% during 2011, use the AFN equation to determine Upton’s projected external capital requirements.
2. Using AFN equation, determine Upton’s self supporting growth rate. That is, what is the maximum growth ate the firm can achieve without having to employ nonspontaneous external funds?
3. Use the forecasted financial statement method to forecast Upton’s balance sheet for December 31, 2011. Assume that all additional external capital is raised as a bank loan at the end of the year and is reflected in notes payable (because the debt is added at the end of the year, there will be no additional interest expense due to the new debt). Assume Upton’s profit margin and dividend payout ratio will be the same in 2011 as they were in 2010. What is the amount of notes payable reported on 2011 forecasted balance sheet? (Hint: You don’t need to forecast the income statement because you were given the projected sales, profit margin, and dividends payout ratio; these figures allow you to calculate the 2011 addition to retained earnings for the balance sheet.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Depreciation-Conceptual Understanding)
Hasselback Company acquired a plant asset at the beginning of Year 1. The asset has an estimated service life of 5 years. An employee has prepared depreciation schedules for this asset using three different methods to compare the results of using one method with the results of using other methods. You are to assume that the following schedules have been correctly prepared for this asset using (1) the straight-line method, (2) the sum-of-theyears’- digits method, and (3) the double-declining balance method.
|
Year
|
Straight-Line
|
Sum-if-the-Years’- Digits
|
Double Declining Balance
|
|
1
|
9,000
|
15,000
|
20,000
|
|
2
|
9,000
|
12,000
|
12,000
|
|
3
|
9,000
|
9,000
|
7,200
|
|
4
|
9,000
|
6,000
|
4,320
|
|
5
|
9,000
|
3,000
|
1,480
|
|
Total
|
45,000
|
45,000
|
45,000
|
Answer the following questions.
a. What is the cost of the asset being depreciated?
b. What amount, if any, was used in the depreciation calculations for the salvage value for this asset?
c. Which method will produce the highest charge to income in Year 1?
d. Which method will produce the highest charge to income in Year 4?
e. Which method will produce the highest book value for the asset at the end of Year 3?
f. If the asset is sold at the end of Year 3, which method would yield the highest gain (or lowest loss) on disposal of the asset?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below is information related to Morrow Manufacturing Corporation.
|
Asset
|
Cost
|
Estimated Salvage
|
Estimated Life (in years)
|
|
A
|
40,500
|
5,500
|
10
|
|
B
|
33,600
|
4,800
|
9
|
|
C
|
36,000
|
3,600
|
8
|
|
D
|
19,000
|
1,500
|
7
|
|
E
|
23,500
|
2,500
|
6
|
a. Compute the rate of depreciation per year to be applied to the plant assets under the composite method. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, i.e. 12.25.)
b. Prepare the adjusting entry necessary at the end of the year to record depreciation for the year.
c. Prepare the entry to record the sale of fixed asset D for cash of $5,000. It was used for 6 years, and depreciation was entered under the composite method. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Fair Value and Equity Methods)
Brooks Corp. is a medium-sized corporation specializing in quarrying stone for building construction. The company has long dominated the market, at one time achieving a 70%market penetration. During prosperous years, the company’s profits, coupled with a conservative dividend policy, resulted in funds available for outside investment. Over the years, Brooks has had a policy of investing idle cash in equity securities. In particular, Brooks has made periodic investments in the company’s principal supplier, Norton Industries. Although the firm currently owns 12% of the outstanding common stock of Norton Industries, Brooks does not have significant influence over the operations of Norton Industries.
Cheryl Thomas has recently joined Brooks as assistant controller, and her first assignment is to prepare the 2010 year-end adjusting entries for the accounts that are valued by the “fair value” rule for financial reporting purposes. Thomas has gathered the following information about Brooks’ pertinent accounts.
1. Brooks has trading securities related to Delaney Motors and Patrick Electric. During this fiscal year, Brooks purchased 100,000 shares of Delaney Motors for $1,400,000; these shares currently have a market value of $1,600,000. Brooks’ investment in Patrick Electric has not been profitable; the company acquired 50,000 shares of Patrick in April 2010 at $20 per share, a purchase that currently has a value of $720,000.
2. Prior to 2010, Brooks invested $22,500,000 in Norton Industries and has not changed its holdings this year. This investment in Norton Industries was valued at $21,500,000 on December 31, 2009. Brooks’ 12% ownership of Norton Industries has a current market value of $22,225,000.
Instructions:
a. Prepare the appropriate adjusting entries for Brooks as of December 31, 2010, to reflect the application of the “fair value” rule for both classes of securities described above.
b. For both classes of investments presented above, describe how the results of the valuation adjustments made in (a) would be reflected in Brooks’ 2010 financial statements.
c. Prepare the entries for the Norton investment, assuming that Brooks owns 25% of Norton’s shares. Norton reported income of $500,000 in 2010 and paid cash dividends of $100,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the year-end 2010, Bertin Inc’s total assets were $1.2 million and its account payable was $375,000. Sales, which in 2010 were $2.5 million, are expected to increase by 25% in 2011. Total assets and accounts payable are proportional to sales and that relationship will be maintained. Bertin typically uses no current liabilities other than the accounts payable. Common stock amounted to $425,000 in 2010, and retained earnings were $295,000. Bertin has arranged to sell $75,000 of new common stocks in 2011 to meet some of its financing needs. The remainder of its financing needs will be met by issuing new long term debt at the end of 2011. (Because the debt is added at the end of the year, there will be no additional interest expense due to the new debt.) Its profit margin on sales is 6% and 40% of earnings will be paid out as dividends.
a. What were Bertin’s total long term debt and total liabilities in 2010?
b. How much new longer debt financing will be needed in 2011? (Hint: AFN-New stock=New long term debt.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify the following expenditures as capital expenditures or revenue expenditures:
a. Immediately after acquiring a new delivery truck, paid $195 to have the name of the store and other advertising material painted on the vehicle.
b. Painted delivery truck at a cost of $450 after two years of use.
c. Purchased new battery at a cost of $40 for two year old delivery truck.
d. Installed an escalator at a cost of $17,500 in a three story building that had been used for some years without escalators or elevators.
e. Purchased a pencil sharpener at a cost of $15.00
f. Original life of the delivery truck has been estimated at four years, and straight line depreciation of 25 percent yearly had been recognized. After three years of use, however, it was decided to recondition the truck thoroughly, including adding a new engine.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Classifying costs: product or G, S, & A/asset or expense.
Required Use the following format to classify each cost as a product cost or a general, selling, and administrative (G, S, & A) cost. Also indicate whether the cost would be recorded as an asset or an expense. The first item is shown as an example.
Cost Category
Research and development costs
Cost to set up manufacturing facility
Utilities used in factory
Cars for sales staff
Distributions to stockholders
General office supplies
Raw materials used in the manufacturing process
Cost to rent office equipment
Wages of production workers
Advertising costs
Promotion costs Production supplies
Depreciation on administrative building
Depreciation on manufacturing equipment
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected transactions for H. Burns, Inc., an interior decorating firm, in its first month of business, are as follows.
Jan. 2 Invested $15,000 cash in business in exchange for common stock.
3 Purchased used car for $4,000 cash for use in business.
9 Purchased supplies on account for $500.
11 Billed customers $1,800 for services performed.
16 Paid $200 cash for advertising.
20 Received $700 cash from customers billed on January 11.
23 Paid creditor $300 cash on balance owed.
28 Declared and paid a $1,000 cash dividend. Instructions
For each transaction indicate the following.
(a) The basic type of account debited and credited (asset, liability, stockholders’ equity).
(b) The specific account debited and credited (cash, rent expense, service revenue, etc.).
(c) Whether the specific account is increased or decreased.
(d) The normal balance of the specific account.
Use the following format, in which the January 2 transaction is given as an example.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information was taken from the 2006 financial statements of pharmaceutical giant Merck and Co. All dollar amounts are in millions.
|
Retained earnings, January 1, 2006
|
37,980
|
|
Materials and production expense
|
6,001
|
|
Marketing and administrative expense
|
8,165
|
|
Dividends 3,318.70 Sales revenue
|
22,636
|
|
Research and development expense
|
4,783
|
|
Tax expense 1,787.60 Other revenue
|
2,677
|
Instructions:
a. After analyzing the data, complete the following Income Statement and Retained Earnings Statement for the year ending December 31, 2006. (List revenues and expenses from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2. Round answers to 1 decimal place, e.g. 2,550.0.)
b. Suppose that Merck decided to reduce its research and development expense by 50%.
What would be the short-term implications? What would be the long-term implications? How do you think the stock market would react?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Letter Co. produces and sells two products, T and O. It manufactures these products in separate factories and markets them through different channels. They have no shared costs. This year, the company sold 50,000 units of each product. Sales and costs for each product follow.
| |
Product T
|
Product o
|
|
Sales
|
800000
|
800000
|
|
Variable Costs
|
560000
|
560000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
240,000
|
700,000
|
|
Fixed Costs
|
100,000
|
560,000
|
|
Income before taxes
|
140,000
|
140,000
|
|
Income taxes (32% rate)
|
44,800
|
44,800
|
|
Net Income
|
95,200
|
95,200
|
Instructions:
1. Compute the break-even point in dollar sales for each product
2. Assume that the company expects sales of each product to decline to 33,000 units next year with no change in unit sales price. Prepare forecasted financial results for next year following the format of the contribution margin income statement as just shown with columns for each of the two products (assume a 32% tax rate). Also, assume that any loss before taxes yields a 32% tax savings.
3. Assume that the company expects sales of each product to increase to 64,000 units next year with no change in unit sales price. Prepare forecasted financial results for next year following the format of the contribution margin income statement shown with columns for each of the two products (assume a 32%income tax rate).
4. If sales greatly decrease, which product would experience a greater loss? Explain
5. Describe some factors that might have created the different cost structures for these two products
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jetson Company sold 20,000 units of its only product and incurred a $50,000 loss (ignoring taxes) for the current year as shown here. During a planning session for year 2012’s activities, the production manager notes that the variable costs can be reduced by 50% by installing a machine that automates several operations. To obtain these savings, the company must increase its annual fixed costs by $150,000. The maximum output capacity of the company is 40,000 units per year.
Jetson Company
Contribution Margin
Income Statement For Year Ended December 31, 2011
|
Sales
|
750,000
|
|
Variable
|
600,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
150,000
|
|
Fixed Costs
|
200,000
|
|
Net loss
|
(50,000)
|
Required
1. Compute the break-even point dollar sales for year 2011
2. Compute the predicted break-even point in dollar sales for year 2012 assuming the machine is installed and there is no change in the unit sales price.
3. Prepare a forecasted contribution margin income statement for 2012 that shows the expected results with the machine installed. Assume that the unit sales price and the number of units sold will not change, and no income tax will be due.
4. Compute the sales level required in both dollars and units to earn $140,000 of after tax income in 2012 with the machine installed and no change in the unit sales price. Assume that the income tax rate is 30% (Hint: Use the procedures in exhibits 18.21 and 18.23)
5. Prepare a forecasted contribution margin income statement that shows the results at the sales level computed in part 4. Assume an income tax rate of 30%
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Overtime Allocation
Prince Machine Tool Company produces tools on a job order basis. During May two jobs were completed, and the following costs were incurred:
| |
Job 401
|
Job 402
|
|
Direct materials
|
28,000
|
37,000
|
|
Direct labor, regular
|
18,000
|
23,000
|
|
Overtime premium
|
–
|
6,000
|
Other factory costs for the month totaled $16,800. Factory overhead costs are allocated one-third to Job 401 and two-thirds to Job 402.
Required:
a. Describe two alternative methods for assigning the overtime premium cost to Jobs 401 and 402 and explain how the appropriate method would be determined.
b. Compute the cost of Job 401 and Job 402 under each of the two methods described in part a.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Employees’ earnings and taxes
A weekly payroll summary made from labor time records shows the following data for Victory
Parkway Inc.:
|
Employee
|
Hours Classification
|
Hourly Rate
|
Regular
|
Overtime
|
|
Holloway, T.
|
Direct
|
12
|
40
|
2
|
|
Jackson, D.
|
Direct
|
12
|
40
|
3
|
|
McLean, J.
|
Direct
|
15
|
40
|
4
|
|
Lyons, M.
|
Indirect
|
9
|
40
|
|
|
Taylor, A.
|
Indirect
|
18
|
40
|
|
Overtime is payable at one-and-a-half times the regular rate of pay and is distributed to all jobs worked on during the period.
a. Determine the net pay of each employee. The income taxes withheld for each employee amount to 15% of the gross wages.
b. Prepare journal entries for the following:
1. Recording the payroll.
2. Paying the payroll.
3. Distributing the payroll. (Assume that the overtime premium will be charged to all jobs worked during the period).
4. The employer’s payroll taxes. (Assume that none of the employees has achieved the maximum wage bases for FICA and unemployment taxes).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data were taken from the general ledgers and other sources of Charlie Manufacturing Inc. and Delta Merchandising Co. on April 30 of the current year:
|
Merchandise Inventory, April 1
|
38,000
|
|
Finished goods, April 1
|
67,000
|
|
Purchases
|
121,000
|
|
Cost of goods manufactured
|
287,000
|
|
Merchandise Inventory, April 30
|
33,000
|
|
Finished goods, April 30
|
61000
|
Required:
1. Compute the cost of goods sold for Delta Merchandising Co., selecting the appropriate items from the previous list.
2. Compute the cost of goods sold for Charlie Manufacturing Co., selecting the appropriate items from the previous list.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Preparation of a Statement of Cash Flows)
Presented below is a condensed version of the comparative balance sheets for Sondergaard Corporation for the last two years at December 31.
| |
2010
|
2019
|
|
Cash
|
157,000
|
78,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
180,000
|
185,000
|
|
Investments
|
52,000
|
74,000
|
|
Equipment
|
298,000
|
240,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation
|
(106,000)
|
(89,000)
|
|
Current liabilities
|
134,000
|
151,000
|
|
Capital stock
|
160,000
|
160,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
287,000
|
177,000
|
|
Additional information:
|
|
|
Investments were sold at a loss (not extraordinary) of $7,000; no equipment was sold; cash dividends paid were $50,000; and net income was $160,000.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2010 for Sondergaard Corporation.
(b) Determine Sondergaard Corporation’s free cash flow.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Daisy Florist
Chart of Accounts:
|
No. 101
|
Cash
|
|
No. 112
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
No. 126
|
Supplies
|
|
No. 201
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
No. 205
|
Unearned Revenue
|
|
No. 311
|
Common Stock
|
|
No. 400
|
Service Revenue
|
|
No. 726
|
Rent Expense
|
|
No. 729
|
Supplies Expense
|
Daisy Florist has a beginning balance in Supplies of $5,400. On May 31 Daisy Florist took a physical count of supplies on hand. Daisy Florist made an adjusting entry for $2,300 for supplies used during the month.
Instructions:
(a) Journalize the adjusting entry on May 31 on the tab labeled General Journal
(b) Post the adjusting entry to the ledger accounts on the tab labeled Ledger Accounts. (Be sure to calculate the balance in the account after each posted transaction).
(c) Journalize the closing entry for Supplies Expense on May 31 on the tab labeled General Journal
(d) Post the closing entry to the ledger accounts on the tab labeled Ledger Accounts. (Be sure to calculate the balance in the account after each posted transaction)
(e) Journalize the reversing entry on June 1 on the tab labeled General Journal
(f) Post the reversing entry to the ledger accounts on the tab labeled Ledger Accounts (Be sure to calculate the balance in the account after each posted transaction)
(g) Indicate if the balance of Supplies and Supplies Expense is a debit or a credit balance
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting Entries and Financial Statements.
The following information pertains to Fixation Enterprises:
· The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one third of this amount had been earned.
· Fixation provided $2,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31.
- Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,650.
· The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period.
· The company paid $18,000 on October 1 of the current year to Vantage Property
Management. The payment was for 6 months’ rent of Fixation’s headquarters, beginning on November 1.
Fixation’s accounting year ends on December 31.
Instructions
Analyze the five preceding cases individually and determine the following:
a. The type of adjusting entry needed at year-end (Use the following codes: A, adjustment of a prepaid expense; B, adjustment of an unearned revenue; C, adjustment to record an accrued expense; or D, adjustment to record an accrued revenue.)
b. The year-end journal entry to adjust the accounts
c. The income statement impact of each adjustment (e.g., increases total revenues by $500)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Match each of the following terms with the phrase that it best matches.
|
a. Quality of earnings
|
d. Pro forma income
|
|
b. Current ratio
|
e. Discontinued operations
|
|
c. Horizontal analysis
|
f. Comprehensive income
|
1. A measure used to evaluate a company’s liquidity
2. Usually excludes items that a company thinks are unusual or nonrecurring.
3. Indicates the level of full and transparent information provided to users of the financial statements.
4. The disposal of a significant segment of a business.
5. Determines increases or decreases in a series of financial statement data.
6. Includes all changes in stockholders’ equity during a period except those resulting from investments by stockholders and distributions to stockholders.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparing a budgeted income statement
Fiorella and Sanchez, physicians, budgeted for the following revenues and expenses for September:
|
Depreciation – equipment
|
$1,850
|
|
Fringe benefits
|
3,300
|
|
Lease expense
|
2,500
|
|
Nursing wages
|
4,500
|
|
Physicians’ salaries
|
28,000
|
|
Patient revenue
|
58,500
|
|
Secretarial support
|
2,200
|
|
Utilities
|
650
|
Prepare a budgeted income statement for the month ending September 30, 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparing cost of goods sold in a perpetual system—FIFO, LIFO, and average-cost methods
Assume that a JR Tire Store completed the following perpetual inventory transactions for a line of tires:
|
Beginning inventory
|
16 tires @ $65
|
|
Purchase
|
10 tires @ $78
|
|
Sale
|
12 tires @ $90
|
Requirements
1. Compute cost of goods sold and gross profit using FIFO.
2. Compute cost of goods sold and gross profit using LIFO.
3. Compute cost of goods sold and gross profit using average-cost. (Round average cost per unit to the nearest cent and all other amounts to the nearest dollar.)
4. Which method results in the largest gross profit and why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kelly Realty loaned money and received the following notes during 2012.
| |
Principal Amount
|
Interest Rate
|
Term
|
|
1) Aug 1
|
24,000
|
17%
|
1 year
|
|
2) Nov 30
|
18,000
|
6%
|
6 months
|
|
3) Dec 19
|
12,000
|
12%
|
30 days
|
Requirements
For each note, compute interest using a 360-day year. Explanations are not required.
1. Determine the due date and maturity value of each note.
2. Journalize the entry to record the inception of each of the three notes and also journalize a single adjusting entry at December 31, 2012, the fiscal year end, to record accrued interest revenue on all three notes.
3. Journalize the collection of principal and interest at maturity of all three notes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On July 1, 2008, Tardis Company issued $4,000,000 face value, 8%, 10-year bonds at $3,501,514.This price resulted in an effective-interest rate of 10% on the bonds.
Tardis uses the effective-interest method to amortize bond premium or discount.
The bonds pay semiannual interest July 1 and January 1.
Instructions
(Round all computations to the nearest dollar.)
(a) Prepare the journal entries to record the following transactions.
(1) The issuance of the bonds on July 1, 2008.
(2) The accrual of interest and the amortization of the discount on December 31, 2008.
(3) The payment of interest and the amortization of the discount on July 1, 2009, assuming no accrual of interest on June 30.
(4) The accrual of interest and the amortization of the discount on December 31, 2009.
(b) Show the proper balance sheet presentation for the liability for bonds payable on the December 31, 2009, balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-5 Inventoriable Costs—Error Adjustments
Werth Company asks you to review its December 31, 2012, inventory values and prepare the necessary adjustments to the books. The following information is given to you.
1. Werth uses the periodic method of recording inventory. A physical count reveals $333,779 of inventory on hand at December 31, 2012.
2. Not included in the physical count of inventory is $14,807 of merchandise purchased on December 15 from Browser. This merchandise was shipped f.o.b. shipping point on December 29 and arrived in January. The invoice arrived and was recorded on December 31.
3. Included in inventory is merchandise sold to Bubbey on December 30, f.o.b. destination. This merchandise was shipped after it was counted. The invoice was prepared and recorded as a sale on account for $18,189 on December 31. The merchandise cost $10,444, and Bubbey received it on January 3.
4. Included in inventory was merchandise received from Dudley on December 31 with an invoice price of $22,210. The merchandise was shipped f.o.b. destination.
The invoice, which has not yet arrived, has not been recorded.
5. Not included in inventory is $12,135 of merchandise purchased from Minsky Industries. This merchandise was received on December 31 after the inventory had been counted. The invoice was received and recorded on December 30.
6. Included in inventory was $14,832 of inventory held by Werth on consignment from Jackel Industries.
7. Included in inventory is merchandise sold to Sims f.o.b. shipping point. This merchandise was shipped after it was counted. The invoice was prepared and recorded as a sale for $26,857 on December 31. The cost of this merchandise was $16,370, and Sims received the merchandise on January 5.
8. Excluded from inventory was a carton labeled. “Please accept for credit.” This carton contains merchandise costing $2,132 which had been sold to a customer for $3,695. No entry had been made to the books to reflect the return, but none of the returned merchandise seemed damaged.
Instructions:
(a) Determine the proper inventory balance for Werth Company at December 31, 2012.
(b) Prepare any correcting entries to adjust inventory to its proper amount at December 31, 2012. Assume the books have not been closed. (If no entry is required, select “No entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing transactions and preparing financial statements
Draper Consulting, Inc., began operations and completed the following transactions during the first half of December:
2-Dec Received $18,000 cash and issued 100 shares of no-par common stock.
2 Paid monthly office rent, $550.
3 Paid cash for a Dell computer, $1,800. This equipment is expected to remain in service for five years.
4 Purchased office furniture on account, $4,200. The furniture should last for five years.
5 Purchased supplies on account, $900.
9 Performed consulting service for a client on account, $1,500.
12 Paid utility expenses, $250.
18 Performed service for a client and received cash of $1,100.
Requirements
1. Analyze the effects of Draper Consulting’s transactions on the accounting equation. Use the format of Exhibit 1-6, and include these headings: Cash, Accounts receivable, Supplies, Equipment, Furniture, Accounts payable, Common stock, and Retained earnings.
2. Prepare the income statement of Draper Consulting for the month ended December 31, 2012.
3. Prepare the statement of retained earnings for the month ended December 31, 2012
4. Prepare the balance sheet at December 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
a. The bakery department of an Albertson’s supermarket reports income for the current year.
b. Pace Foods is a subsidiary of Campbell Soup Company.
c. The personnel department of USAA Life Insurance Company prepares its budget and subsequent performance report on the basis of its expected expenses for the year.
d. The shopping section of Burpee.com reports both revenues and expenses.
e. Burpee.com’s investor relations Web site provides operating and financial information to investors and other interested parties.
f. The manager of a car service station is evaluated based on the station’s revenues and expenses.
g. A charter airline records revenues and expenses for each airplane each month.
The airplane’s performance report shows its ratio of operating income to average book value.
h. The manager of the Southwest sales territory is evaluated based on a comparison of current period sales against budgeted sales.
Requirement:
1. Identify each responsibility center as a cost center (C), a revenue center (R), a profit center (P), or an investment center (I). (pp. 1121–1122) Identifying different types of responsibility centers
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Managerial Analysis
Ideal Manufacturing Company of Sycamore,Illinois has supported a research and development (R&D) department that has for many years been the sole contributor to the company’s new farm machinery products.
The R&D activity is an overhead cost center that provides services only to in-house manufacturing departments (four different product lines), all of which produce agricultural/farm/ranch related machinery products.
The department has never sold its services outside, but because of its long history of success, larger manufacturers of agricultural products have approached Ideal to hire its R&D department for special projects. Because the costs of operating the R&D department have been spiraling uncontrollably, Ideal’s management is considering entertaining these outside approaches to absorb the increasing costs.
But, (1) management doesn’t have any cost basis for charging R&D services to outsiders, and (2) it needs to gain control of its R&D costs. Management decides to implement an activity-based costing system in order to determine the charges for both outsiders and the in-house users of the department’s services.
R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs.
|
Market analysis
|
1,050,000
|
|
Product design
|
2,280,000
|
|
Product development
|
3,600,000
|
|
Prototype testing
|
1,400,000
|
Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities are:
|
Activities
|
Cost Drivers
|
Total Estimated
|
Drivers
|
|
Market analysis
|
Hours of analysis
|
15,000
|
hours
|
|
Product design
|
Number of designs
|
2,500
|
designs
|
|
Product development
|
Number of products
|
90
|
products
|
|
Prototype testing
|
Number of tests
|
700
|
tests
|
Instructions
A.) Compute the activity-based overhead rate for each activity cost pool.
B.) How much cost would be charged to an in-house manufacturing department that consumed 1,800 hours of market analysis time, was provided 280 designs relating to 10 products, and requested 92 engineering tests?
C.) How much cost would serve as the basis for pricing an R&D bid with an outside company on a contract that would consume 800 hours of analysis time, require 178 designs relating to 3 products, and result in 70 engineering tests?
D.) What is the benefit to Ideal Manufacturing of applying activity-based costing to its R&D activity for both in-house and outside charging purposes?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are two independent situations:
1. Potomac Inc. acquired 10% of the 500,000 shares of common stock of Maryland Corporation at a total cost of $11 per share on June 17, 2011. On September 3, Maryland declared and paid a $160,000 dividend. On December 31, Maryland reported net income of $550,000 for the year.
2. Andy Fisher Corporation obtained significant influence over Bandit Company by buying 30% of Bandit’s 100,000 outstanding shares of common stock at a cost of $18 per share on January 1, 2011. On May 15, Bandit declared and paid a cash dividend of $150,000. On December 31, Bandit reported net income of $270,000 for the year.
Prepare all necessary journal entries for 2011 for (1) Potomac and (2) Andy Fisher.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
O’Connor Video Center accumulates the following cost and market data at December 31.
|
Inventory
|
Categories
|
Cost Data
|
Market Data
|
|
Cameras
|
12,500
|
13,400
|
|
|
Camcorders
|
9,000
|
9,500
|
|
|
DVDs
|
3,000
|
12,800
|
|
Compute the lower-of-cost-or-market valuation for O’Connor’s inventory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computations using a job order system
General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
|
Work in process
|
35,200
|
|
Finished goods
|
86,900
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
128,700
|
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
|
Document*
|
Date
|
Department
|
Hours
|
Amount
|
|
MR 1165
|
19-Mar
|
Machining
|
–
|
5,600
|
|
MR 1169
|
21-Mar
|
Machining
|
–
|
3,500
|
|
TT 1450-52
|
23-Mar
|
Machining
|
45
|
400
|
|
MUR46
|
23-Mar
|
Machining
|
105
|
–
|
|
MR 4330
|
27-Mar
|
Finishing
|
–
|
700
|
|
TT 1475-76
|
31-Mar
|
Machining
|
30
|
300
|
|
MUR47
|
31-Mar
|
Machining
|
50
|
–
|
|
TT 6608-13
|
31-Mar
|
Finishing
|
200
|
2,000
|
Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Payroll accounting.
Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:
- Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned
- Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned
- Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
- State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings
- Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
- State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned
- Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned
The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end.
a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven’s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
- Social Security taxes
- Medicare taxes
- Federal income taxes withheld
- State income taxes
- Insurance withholdings
b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven’s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:
- Matching Social Security taxes
- Matching Medicare taxes
- State unemployment taxes
- Federal unemployment taxes
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepayments by customers.
Greenland Enterprises began a new magazine in the fourth quarter of 19X2. Annual subscriptions, which cost $18 each, were sold as follows:
Month Number of Subscriptions Sold
|
October
|
400
|
|
November
|
700
|
|
December
|
1,000
|
If subscriptions begin (and magazines are sent) in the month of sale:
a. Present the necessary journal entry to record the magazine subscriptions sold during the fourth quarter.
b. Determine how much subscription revenue Greenland earned by the end of 19X2.
c. Compute Greenland’s liability to subscribers at the end of 19X2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Inventory Errors.
The income statements of Diamond Company for the years ended December 31, 19X1, and 19X2 follow.
| |
19X1
|
19X2
|
|
Net sales
|
440,000
|
483,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
95,000
|
109,000
|
|
Add: Net purchases
|
380,000
|
404,000
|
|
Goods available for sale
|
475,000
|
513,000
|
|
Less: Ending inventory
|
109,000
|
127,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
366,000
|
386,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
74,000
|
97,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
58,000
|
67,000
|
|
Net income
|
16,000
|
30,000
|
Diamond uses a periodic inventory system. A detailed review of the accounting records disclosed the following:
a. A review of 19X1 purchase invoices revealed that a clerk had incorrectly recorded a $12,600 purchase as $1,260.
b. A $4,800 purchase was made on December 30, 19X2, terms F.O.B. shipping point. The invoice was not recorded in 19X2 nor were the goods included in the 19X2 ending physical inventory count. Both the goods and invoice were received in early 19X3, with the invoice being recorded at that time.
c. Goods costing $3,000 were accidentally excluded from the 19X1 ending physical inventory count. These goods were sold during 19X2, and all aspects of the sale were properly recorded.
Instructions:
a. Prepare corrected income statements for 19X1 and 19X2.
b. Determine the impact of the preceding errors on the December 31, 19X2, owner’s equity balance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Specific identification method.
Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation.
Inventory information for several oil paintings follows.
| |
Painting
|
Cost
|
|
1/2 Beginning inventory
|
Woods
|
11,000
|
|
4/19 Purchase Sunset
|
|
21,800
|
|
6/7 Purchase Earth
|
|
31,200
|
|
12/16 Purchase
|
Moon
|
4,000
|
Woods and Moon were sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm’s:
a. Cost of goods sold.
b. Gross profit.
c. Ending inventory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allowance Method: Estimation and Balance Sheet Disclosure.
The following pre-adjusted information for the Maverick Company is available on December 31:
- Accounts receivable $107,000
- Allowance for uncollectible accounts 5,400 (credit balance)
- Credit sales 250,000
a. Prepare the journal entries necessary to record Maverick’s uncollectible accounts expense under each of the following assumptions:
(1) Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 5% of Credit Sales.
(2) Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 14% of Accounts Receivable.
b. How would Maverick’s Accounts Receivable appear on the December 31 balance sheet under assumption (1) of part (a)?
c. How would Maverick’s Accounts Receivable appear on the December 31 balance sheet under assumption (2) of part (a)?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allowance Method: Analysis of Receivables.
At a January 20X2 meeting, the president of Sonic Sound directed the sales staff “to move some product this year.” The president noted that the credit evaluation department was being disbanded because it had restricted the company’s growth.
Credit decisions would now be made by the sales staff.
By the end of the year, Sonic had generated significant gains in sales, and the president was very pleased. The following data were provided by the accounting department:
|
Sales
|
20X2
|
20X1
|
|
Accounts Receivable, 12/31
|
23,987,000
|
8,423,000
|
|
Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31 ?
|
12,444,000
|
1,056,000
|
|
Allowance for Uncollectible Accounts, 12/31
|
?
|
23,000 cr.
|
The $12,444,000 receivables balance was aged as follows:
|
Age of Receivable
|
Amount
|
Percentage of Accounts Expected to Be Collected
|
|
Under 31 days
|
5,321,000
|
99%
|
|
31 to 60 days
|
3,890,000
|
90%
|
|
61 to 90 days
|
1,067,000
|
80%
|
|
Over 90 days
|
2,166,000
|
60%
|
Assume that no accounts were written off during 20X2.
Instructions
a. Estimate the amount of Uncollectible Accounts as of December 31, 20X2.
b. What is the company’s Uncollectible Accounts expense for 20X2?
c. Compute the net realizable value of Accounts Receivable at the end of 20X1 and 20X2.
d. Compute the net realizable value at the end of 20X1 and 20X2 as a percentage of respective year-end receivables balances. Analyze your findings and comment on the president’s decision to close the credit evaluation department.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adjusting Entries.
You have been retained to examine the records of Kathy’s Day Care Center as of December 31, 20X3, the close of the current reporting period. In the course of your examination, you discover the following:
· On January 1, 20X3, the Supplies account had a balance of $2,350. During the year, $5,520 worth of supplies was purchased, and a balance of $1,620 remained unused on December 31.
· Unrecorded interest owed to the center totaled $275 as of December 31.
· All clients pay tuition in advance, and their payments are credited to the Unearned Tuition Revenue account. The account was credited for $75,500 on August 31. With the exception of $15,500 all amounts were for the current semester ending on December 31.
· Depreciation on the school’s van was $3,000 for the year.
· On August 1, the center began to pay rent in 6-month installments of $21,000.
Kathy wrote a check to the owner of the building and recorded the check in Prepaid Rent, a new account.
· Two salaried employees earn $400 each for a 5-day week. The employees are paid every Friday, and December 31 falls on a Thursday.
· Kathy’s Day Care paid insurance premiums as follows, each time debiting Prepaid Insurance:
|
Date Paid
|
Policy No.
|
Length of Policy
|
Amount
|
|
Feb. 1, 20X2
|
1033MCM19
|
1 year
|
540
|
|
Jan. 1, 20X3
|
7952789HP
|
1 year
|
912
|
|
Aug. 1, 20X3
|
XQ943675ST
|
2 years
|
840
|
Instructions
The center’s accounts were last adjusted on December 31, 20X2. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary under the accrual basis of accounting.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The comparative condensed income statements of Hendi Corporation are shown below:
|
HENDI CORPORATION Comparative Condensed Income Statements For the Years Ended December 31
|
|
|
2014
|
2013
|
|
Net sales
|
600,000
|
500,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
468,000
|
400,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
132,000
|
100,000
|
|
Operating expenses
|
60,000
|
54,000
|
|
Net income
|
72,000
|
46,000
|
Instructions:
(a) Prepare a horizontal analysis of the income statement data for Hendi Corporation using 2013 as a base. (Show the amounts of increase or decrease.) (If amount and percentage are a decrease show the numbers as negative, e.g. -55,000, -20% or (55,000). (20%). Round percentages to 1 decimal place, e.g. 12.3%.)
(b) Prepare a vertical analysis of the income statement data for Hendi Corporation in columnar form for both years. (Round percentages to 1 decimal place, e.g. 12.3%.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The comparative condensed balance sheets of Garcia Corporation are presented below:
GARCIA CORPORATION
Comparative Condensed Balance Sheets
December 31
| |
2014
|
2013
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
Current assets
|
76,000
|
80,000
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment (net)
|
100,000
|
90,000
|
|
Intangibles
|
24,000
|
40,000
|
|
Total assets
|
200,000
|
210,000
|
|
Liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
40,000
|
48,000
|
|
Long-term liabilities
|
140,000
|
150,000
|
|
Stockholders’ equity
|
20,000
|
12,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
200,000
|
210,000
|
Instructions:
(a) Prepare a horizontal analysis of the balance sheet data for Garcia Corporation using 2013 as a base. (If amount and percentage are a decrease show the numbers as negative, e.g. -55,000, -20% or (55,000). (20%). Round percentages to 1 decimal place, e.g. 12.3%.)
(b) Prepare a vertical analysis of the balance sheet data for Garcia Corporation in columnar form for 2014. (Round percentages to 0 decimal places, e.g. 12%.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following situations involve accounting principles and assumptions.
1. Julia Company owns buildings that are worth substantially more than they originally cost.
In an effort to provide more relevant information, Julia reports the buildings at fair value in its accounting reports.
2. Dekalb Company includes in its accounting records only transaction data that can be expressed in terms of money.
3. Omar Shariff, president of Omar’s Oasis, records his personal living costs as expenses of the Oasis.
Instructions:
For each of the three situations, state if the accounting method used is correct or incorrect.
If correct, identify which principle or assumption supports the method used. If incorrect, identify which principle or assumption has been violated.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, 2014, the ledger of Shumway Company contains the following liability accounts.
|
Accounts Payable
|
52,000
|
|
Sales Taxes Payable
|
5,800
|
|
Unearned Service Revenue
|
14,000
|
During January, the following selected transactions occurred.
Jan. 5 Sold merchandise for cash totaling $22,470, which includes 7% sales taxes.
12 Provided services for customers who had made advance payments of $10,000. (Credit Service Revenue.)
14 Paid state revenue department for sales taxes collected in December 2013 ($5,800).
20 Sold 600 units of a new product on credit at $50 per unit, plus 7% sales tax.
21 Borrowed $14,000 from DeKalb Bank on a 3-month, 8%, $14,000 note.
25 Sold merchandise for cash totaling $12,947, which includes 7% sales taxes.
Instructions:
a. Journalize the January transactions. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
b. Journalize the adjusting entries at January 31 for the outstanding notes payable. (Hint: Use one-third of a month for the DeKalb Bank note.) (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
c. Prepare the current liabilities section of the balance sheet at January 31, 2014. Assume no change in accounts payable. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Listed below are five procedures followed by Parson Company.
1. Several individuals operate the cash register using the same register drawer.
2. A monthly bank reconciliation is prepared by someone who has no other cash responsibilities.
3. Fran Vorbeck writes checks and also records cash payment journal entries.
4. One individual orders inventory, while a different individual authorizes payments.
5. Unnumbered sales invoices from credit sales are forwarded to the accounting department every four weeks for recording.
Indicate whether each procedure is an example of good internal control or of weak internal control. If it is an example of good internal control, indicate which internal control principle is being followed. If it is an example of weak internal control, indicate which internal control principle is violated.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On December 31, 2008, Ramey Associates owned the following securities, held as a longterm investment. The securities are not held for influence or control of the investee.
|
Common Stock
|
Shares
|
Cost
|
|
Hurst Co.
|
2,000
|
60,000
|
|
Pine Co.
|
5,000
|
45,000
|
|
Scott Co.
|
1,500
|
30,000
|
On December 31, 2008, the total fair value of the securities was equal to its cost. In 2009, the following transactions occurred.
1-Jul Received $1 per share semiannual cash dividend on Pine Co. common stock.
1-Aug Received $0.50 per share cash dividend on Hurst Co. common stock.
1-Sep Sold 1,500 shares of Pine Co. common stock for cash at $8 per share, less brokerage fees of $300.
1-Oct Sold 800 shares of Hurst Co. common stock for cash at $33 per share, less brokerage fees of $500.
1-Nov Received $1 per share cash dividend on Scott Co. common stock.
15-Dec Received $0.50 per share cash dividend on Hurst Co. common stock.
31-Dec Received $1 per share semiannual cash dividend on Pine Co. common stock.
At December 31, the fair values per share of the common stocks were: Hurst Co. $32, Pine Co. $8, and Scott Co. $18.
Required:
a. Journalize the 2009 transactions and post to the account Stock Investments. (Use the Taccount form.) (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)
b. Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2009, to show the securities at fair value.
The stock should be classified as available-for-sale securities.
c. Show the balance sheet presentation of the investments at December 31, 2009. At this date, Ramey Associates has common stock $1,500,000 and retained earnings $1,000,000. (If there is a loss, use either a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -45 or parentheses e.g. (45).)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, 2014, Thao Company purchased the following two machines for use in its production process.
Machine A: The cash price of this machine was $35,000. Related expenditures included: sales tax $1,700, shipping costs $150, insurance during shipping $80, installation and testing costs $70, and $100 of oil and lubricants to be used with the machinery during its first year of operations. Thao estimates that the useful life of the machine is 5 years with a $5,000 salvage value remaining at the end of that time period. Assume that the straight-line method of depreciation is used.
Machine B: The recorded cost of this machine was $80,000. Thao estimates that the useful life of the machine is 4 years with a $5,000 salvage value remaining at the end of that time period.
Instructions
(a) Prepare the following for Machine A.
(1) The journal entry to record its purchase on January 1, 2014.
(2) The journal entry to record annual depreciation at December 31, 2014.
(b) Calculate the amount of depreciation expense that Thao should record for Machine B each year of its useful life under the following assumptions. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,125. Round cost per unit to 2 decimal place, e.g. 1.25.)
(1) Thao uses the straight-line method of depreciation.
(2) Thao uses the declining-balance method. The rate used is twice the straight-line rate.
(3) Thao uses the units-of-activity method and estimates that the useful life of the machine is 125,000 units. Actual usage is as follows: 2014, 42,000 units; 2015, 35,000 units; 2016, 28,000 units; 2017, 20,000 units.
(c) Which method used to calculate depreciation on Machine B reports the highest amount of depreciation expense in year 1 (2014)? The highest amount in year 4 (2017)? The highest total amount over the 4-year period?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Given the following balance sheet, complete a horizontal analysis. Compute the percentage to the nearest tenth of a percent.
|
Jill’s Bikes Comparative Balance Sheet For Years Ended December 31, 2011 and 2010
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
(in thousands
|
2011
|
2010
|
Difference
|
Percentage
|
|
Assets
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current Assets
|
|
|
|
|
|
Cash and Equivalents
|
$72
|
$94
|
|
|
|
Accounts Receivable, net
|
122
|
104
|
|
|
|
Inventory
|
288
|
232
|
|
|
|
Total Current Assets
|
482
|
430
|
|
|
|
Property, plant and Equipment
|
638
|
358
|
|
|
|
Total Assets
|
$1,120
|
$788
|
|
|
|
Liabilities
|
|
|
|
|
|
Current Liabilities
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
242
|
148
|
|
|
|
Accrued Liabilities
|
48
|
66
|
|
|
|
Total Current Liabilities
|
290
|
214
|
|
|
|
Long-Term Liabilities
|
346
|
208
|
|
|
|
Total Liabilities
|
636
|
422
|
|
|
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
|
|
|
|
Common Stock
|
70
|
60
|
|
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
414
|
306
|
|
|
|
Total Stockholders’ Equity
|
484
|
366
|
|
|
|
Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
$1,120
|
$788
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare a trial balance from the following information for Learn a New Language, Inc. for December 31, 2012:
|
Accounts payable
|
$5,012
|
|
Common stock
|
$9.69
|
|
Cash
|
$3,928
|
|
Notes payable
|
$1,439
|
|
Wages expense
|
$777
|
|
Marketing expense
|
$493
|
|
Equipment
|
$8,345
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
$1,142
|
|
Inventory
|
$8,074
|
|
Sales
|
$6,616
|
.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethical Issue 1-1
The board of directors of Xiaping Trading Company is meeting to discuss the past year’s results before releasing financial statements to the bank. The discussion includes this exchange:
Wai Lee, company owner: “This has not been a good year! Revenue is down and expenses are way up. If we are not careful, we will report a loss for the third year in a row. I can temporarily transfer some land that I own into the company’s name, and that will beef up our balance sheet. Brent, can you shave $500,000 from expenses?
Then we can probably get the bank loan that we need.”
Brent Ray, company chief accountant: “Wai Lee, you are asking too much.
Generally accepted accounting principles are designed to keep this sort of thing from happening.”
Requirements
1. What is the fundamental ethical issue in this situation?
2. How do the two suggestions of the company owner differ?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethical Issue 3-1
The net income of Steinbach & Sons, a department store, decreased sharply during 2014. Mort Steinbach, manager of the store, anticipates the need for a bank loan in 2015. Late in 2014, Steinbach instructs the store’s accountant to record a $2,000 sale of furniture to the Steinbach family, even though the goods will not be shipped from the manufacturer until January 2015. Steinbach also tells the accountant not to make the following December 31, 2014, adjusting entries:
Salaries owed to employees 900
Prepaid insurance that has expired 400
Requirements
1. Compute the overall effects of these transactions on the store’s reported income for 2014.
2. Why is Steinbach taking this action? Is his action ethical? Give your reason, identifying the parties helped and the parties harmed by Steinbach’s action. (Challenge)
3. As a personal friend, what advice would you give the accountant? (Challenge)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fraud Case 7-1
Levon Helm was a kind of one-man mortgage broker. He would drive around Tennessee looking for homes that had second mortgages, and if the criteria were favorable, he would offer to buy the second mortgage for “cash on the barrelhead.” Helm bought low and sold high, making sizable profits. Being a small operation, he employed one person, Cindy Patterson, who did all his bookkeeping. Patterson was an old family friend, and he trusted her so implicitly that he never checked up on the ledgers or the bank reconciliations. At some point, Patterson started “borrowing” from the business and concealing her transactions by booking phony expenses. She intended to pay it back someday, but she got used to the extra cash and couldn’t stop. By the time the scam was discovered, she had drained the company of funds that it owed to many of its investors. The company went bankrupt, Patterson did some jail time, and Helm lost everything.
Requirements
1. What was the key control weakness in this case?
2. Many small businesses cannot afford to hire enough people for adequate separation of duties. What can they do to compensate for this?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fraud Case 5-1
Rae Philippe was a warehouse manager for Atkins Oilfield Supply, a business that operated across eight Western states. She was an old pro and had known most of the other warehouse managers for many years. Around December each year, auditors would come to do a physical count of the inventory at each warehouse.
Recently, Rae’s brother started his own drilling company, and persuaded Rae to “loan” him 80 joints of 5-inch drill pipe to use for his first well. He promised to have it back to Rae by December, but the well encountered problems and the pipe was still in the ground. Rae knew the auditors were on the way, so she called her friend Andy, who ran another Atkins warehouse. “Send me over 80 joints of 5-inch pipe tomorrow and I’ll get them back to you ASAP” said Rae. When the auditors came, all the pipe on the books was accounted for, and they filed a “no-exception” report.
Requirements
1. Is there anything the company or the auditors could do in future to detect this kind of fraudulent practice?
2. How would this kind of action impact the financial performance of the company?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ethical Issue 5-1
Dobbs Wholesale Antiques makes all sales under terms of FOB shipping point. The company usually ships inventory to customers approximately one week after receiving the order. For orders received late in December, Kathy Dobbs, the owner, decides when to ship the goods. If profits are already at an acceptable level, Dobbs delays shipment until January. If profits for the current year are lagging behind expectations, Dobbs ships the goods during December.
Requirements
1. Under Dobbs’ FOB policy, when should the company record a sale?
2. Do you approve or disapprove of Dobbs’ manner of deciding when to ship goods to customers and record the sales revenue? If you approve, give your reason. If you disapprove, identify a better way to decide when to ship goods. (There is no accounting rule against Dobbs’ practice.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-28A Capitalized asset cost and first year depreciation, and identifying depreciation results that meet management objectives
On January 3, 2012, Trusty Delivery Service purchased a truck at a cost of $90,000. Before placing the truck in service, Trusty spent $3,000 painting it, $1,500 replacing tires, and $4,500 overhauling the engine. The truck should remain in service for five years and have a residual value of $9,000. The truck’s annual mileage is expected to be 22,500 miles in each of the first four years and 10,000 miles in the fifth year—100,000 miles in total. In deciding which depreciation method to use, Mikail Johnson, the general manager, requests a depreciation schedule for each of the depreciation methods (straight-line, units-of-production, and doubledeclining- balance).
Requirements
1. Prepare a depreciation schedule for each depreciation method, showing asset cost, depreciation expense, accumulated depreciation, and asset book value.
2. Trusty prepares financial statements using the depreciation method that reports the highest net income in the early years of asset use. For income tax purposes, the company uses the depreciation method that minimizes income taxes in the early years. Consider the first year that Trusty uses the truck. Identify the depreciation methods that meet the general manager’s objectives, assuming the income tax authorities permit the use of any of the methods.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-31A Accounting for intangibles
Midland Telecom provides communication services in Iowa, Nebraska, the Dakotas, and Montana. Midland purchased goodwill as part of the acquisition of Shipley Wireless Company, which had the following figures:
|
Book value of assets
|
$750,000
|
|
Market value of assets
|
1,000,000
|
|
less Liabilities
|
530,000
|
Requirements
1. Journalize the entry to record Midland’s purchase of Shipley Wireless for $320,000 cash plus a $480,000 note payable.
2. What special asset does Midland’s acquisition of Shipley Wireless identify? How should Midland Telecom account for this asset after acquiring Shipley Wireless? Explain in detail.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On May 31, 2012, Express Delivery, the overnight shipper, had total assets of $21,000,000,000 and total liabilities of $13,000,000,000. Included among assets were property, plant, and equipment with a cost of $17,000,000,000 and accumulated depreciation of $10,000,000,000. During the year ended May 31, 212, Express Delivery earned total revenues of $28,000,000,000 and had total expenses of $25,000,000,000, of which $8,000,000,000 was depreciation expenses. The CFO and the controller are concerned that the results of 2012 will make investors unhappy. Additionally, both hold stock options to purchase shares at a reduced price, so they would like to see the market price continue to grow. They decide to “extend” the life of assets so that depreciation will be reduced to $5,000,000,000 for 2012.
1. What is the change to net income due to their decision?
2. What appears to be their motivation for the change in asset lives? Is this ethical? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-32A Ethics
On May 31, 2010 Deliver it, the overnight shipper, had total assets of $24 billion and total liabilities of $17 billion included among the assets were property, plant, and equipment with a cost of $19 billion and accumulated depreciation of $11 Billion. during the year ended May 31, 2010, Deliver it earned total revenues of $32 billion and had total expenses of $27 billion, of which $5 billion was depreciation expenses. The CFO and controller are concerned that the result of 2010 will make investors unhappy. Additionally, both hold stock options to purchase shares at a reduced price, so they would like to see the market price continue to grow. They decided to “extend” the life of assets so that depreciation will be reduced to three billion for 2010.
Requirements
1. What is the change to net income due to their decision?
2. What appears to be their motivation for the change in asset lives? Is this ethical?
Explain
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-31A Accounting for intangibles [20-25min]
Midland Telecom provides communication service in Iowa, Nebraska, the Dakotas, and Montana. Midland purchases goodwill as part of the acquisition of Shipley Wireless Company, which had the following.
|
Book value of assets
|
750,000
|
|
Market Value of assets
|
1,000,000
|
|
Liabilities
|
530,000
|
Requirements:
1. Journalize the entry to record Midland’s purchase of Shipley Wireless for $ 320,000 cash plus a $480,000 note payable.
2. What special asset does Midland’s acquisition of Shipley Wireless identify? How should Midland Telecom account for this asset after acquiring Shipley Wireless? Explain in detail.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E7-2 Determine cash balance
Presented below are a number of independent situations.
For each individual situation, determine the amount that should be reported as cash.
1. Checking account balance $943,570; certificate of deposit $1,408,800; cash advance to subsidiary of $982,960; utility deposit paid to gas company $195.
2. Checking account balance $502,890; an overdraft in special checking account at same bank as normal checking account of $18,000; cash held in a bond sinking fund $216,550; petty cash fund $353; coins and currency on hand $1,490.
3. Checking account balance $621,060; postdated check from customer $12,190; cash restricted due to maintaining compensating balance requirement of $104,100; certified check from customer $9,560; postage stamps on hand $654.
4. Checking account balance at bank $42,490; money market balance at mutual fund (has checking privileges) $49,400; NSF check received from customer $810.
5. Checking account balance $706,750; cash restricted for future plant expansion $504,890; short-term Treasury bills $183,800; cash advance received from customer $984 (not included in checking account balance); cash advance of $8,050 to company executive, payable on demand; refundable deposit of $30,900 paid to federal government to guarantee performance on construction contract.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Premier Bank and Trust is considering giving Alou Company a loan. Before doing so, management decides that further discussions with Alou’s accountant may be desirable. One area of particular concern is the inventory account, which has a year-end balance of $297,000. Discussions with the accountant reveal the following.
1. Alou sold goods costing $38,000 to Comerico Company, FOB shipping point, on December 28. The goods are not expected to arrive at Comerico until January 12. The goods were not included in the physical inventory because they were not in the warehouse.
2. The physical count of the inventory did not include goods costing $95,000 that were shipped to Alou FOB destination on December 27 and were still in transit at year-end.
3. Alou received goods costing $19,000 on January 2. The goods were shipped FOB shipping point on December 26 by Grant Co. The goods were not included in the physical count.
4. Alou sold goods costing $35,000 to Emerick Co., FOB destination, on December 30. The goods were received at Emerick on January 8. They were not included in Alou’s physical inventory.
5. Alou received goods costing $44,000 on January 2 that were shipped FOB shipping point on December 29. The shipment was a rush order that was supposed to arrive December 31. This purchase was included in the ending inventory of $297,000.
Determine the correct inventory amount on December 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The cost of goods sold computations for Silver Company and Gold Company are shown below.
| |
Silver Company
|
Gold Company
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
47,000
|
71,000
|
|
Cost of goods purchased
|
200,000
|
290,000
|
|
Cost of goods available for sale
|
247,000
|
361,000
|
|
Ending inventory
|
55,000
|
69,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
192,000
|
292,000
|
Instructions:
(a) Compute inventory turnover for each company. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25.)
(b) Compute days in inventory for each company. (Round inventory turnover values to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25 and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Milo Company had a beginning inventory of 400 units of Product Kimbo at a cost of $8 per unit. During the year, purchases were:
|
20-Feb 300
|
@
|
$9
|
|
12-Aug
|
600
|
@ $11
|
|
5-May 500
|
@
|
$10
|
|
8-Dec 200
|
@
|
$12
|
Milo Company uses a periodic inventory system. Sales totaled 1,500 units.
Instructions:
(a) Determine the cost of goods available for sale.
(b) Calculate the weighted-average unit cost. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. $2.25.)
(c) Determine (1) the ending inventory, and (2) the cost of goods sold under each of the assumed cost flow methods (FIFO, LIFO, and average-cost). (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,120.)
(d) Which cost flow method results in (1) the lowest inventory amount for the balance sheet, and (2) the lowest cost of goods sold for the income statement?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On June 10, Rebecca Company purchased $7,600 of merchandise from Clinton Company, FOB shipping point, terms 2/10, n/30. Rebecca pays the freight costs of $400 on June 11. Damaged goods totaling $300 are returned toClintonfor credit on June 12. The fair value of these goods is $70. On June 19, Rebecca pays Clinton Company in full, less the purchase discount. Both companies use a perpetual inventory system.
Instructions:
(a) Prepare separate entries for each transaction on the books of Rebecca Company. (Record journal entries in the order in which they must have occurred. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
(b) Prepare separate entries for each transaction for Clinton Company. The merchandise purchased by Rebecca on June 10 had costClinton$4,300. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below is information related to Taylor Co. for the month of January 2014.
|
Ending inventory per perpetual records
|
21,600
|
Insurance expense
|
12,000
|
|
Ending inventory actually on hand
|
21,000
|
Rent expense
|
20,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
208,000
|
Salaries and wages expense
|
59,000
|
|
Freight-out
|
7,000
|
Sales discounts
|
8,000
|
|
Sales returns and allowances
|
13,000
|
Sales revenue
|
378,000
|
Instructions:
(a) Prepare the necessary adjusting entry for inventory. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
(b) Prepare the necessary closing entries.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below is financial information for two different companies.
| |
Lee Company
|
Lee Company
|
|
Sales
|
90,000
|
(d)
|
|
Sales return
|
(a)
|
5,000
|
|
Net sales
|
81,000
|
95,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
56,000
|
(e)
|
|
Gross profit
|
(b)
|
41,500
|
|
Operating
|
15,000
|
(f)
|
|
Net income
|
(c )
|
15,000
|
*(a) Determine the missing amounts.
*(b) Determine the gross profit rates. (Round answer to 1 decimal place, e.g. 25.2%.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Two items are omitted from each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income statement data for two corporations for the year 2014, Steven Craig and Georgia Enterprises.
| |
Steven Craig
|
Georgia Enterprises
|
|
Beginning of year:
|
|
|
Total assets
|
108,359
|
144,106
|
|
Total liabilities
|
94,954
|
(c)
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
(a)
|
83,783
|
|
End of year:
|
|
|
Total assets
|
178,736
|
201,078
|
|
Total liabilities
|
134,052
|
55,855
|
|
Total stockholders’
|
44,684
|
145,223
|
|
Changes during year in stockholders’ equity:
|
|
Additional investment
|
(b)
|
27,928
|
|
Dividends
|
26,810
|
(d)
|
|
Total revenues
|
240,177
|
111,710
|
|
Total expenses
|
195,493
|
61,441
|
Determine the missing amounts.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kara Shin is a licensed CPA. During the first month of operations of her business, Kara Shin, Inc., the following events and transactions occurred.
1-May Stockholders invested $20,000 cash in exchange for common stock.
2 Hired a secretary-receptionist at a salary of $2,000 per month.
3 Purchased $1,500 of supplies on account from Hartig Supply Company.
7 Paid office rent of $900 cash for the month.
11 Completed a tax assignment and billed client $2,800 for services provided.
12 Received $3,500 advance on a management consulting engagement.
17 Received cash of $1,200 for services completed for Lucille Co.
31 Paid secretary-receptionist $2,000 salary for the month.
31 Paid 40% of balance due Hartig Supply Company.
Kara uses the following chart of accounts: No. 101 Cash, No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 126 Supplies, No. 201 Accounts Payable, No. 209 Unearned Service Revenue, No. 311 Common Stock, No. 400 Service Revenue, No. 726 Salaries and Wages Expense, and No. 729 Rent Expense.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the transactions. (If there is no transaction, enter No entry as the description and 0 for the amount.)
(b) Post to the ledger accounts. (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)
(c) Prepare a trial balance on May 31, 2008. (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nayak Company has recorded the following items in its financial records
|
Cash in bank
|
41,000
|
|
Cash in plant expansion fund
|
100,000
|
|
Cash on hand
|
8,000
|
|
Highly liquid investments
|
34,000
|
|
Petty cash
|
500
|
|
Receivables from customers
|
89,000
|
|
Stock investments
|
61,000
|
The cash in bank is subject to a compensating balance of $5,000. The highly liquid investments had maturities of 3 months or less when they were purchased. The stock investments will be sold in the next 6 to 12 months. The plant expansion project will begin in 3 years.
Instructions:
(a) What amount should Nayak report as “Cash and cash equivalents” on its balance sheet?
(b) Where should the items not included in part (a) be reported on the balance sheet?
(c) What disclosures should Nayak make in its financial statements concerning “cash and cash equivalents”?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The ledger of Elburn Company at the end of the current year shows Accounts Receivable $110,000, Sales Revenue $840,000, and Sales Returns and Allowances $28,000. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.) (a) If Elburn uses the direct write-off method to account for uncollectible accounts, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming Elburn determines that T. Thum’s $1,400 balance is uncollectible.
(b) If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $2,100 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 1% of net sales, and (2) 10% of accounts receivable.
(c) If Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a debit balance of $200 in the trial balance, journalize the adjusting entry at December 31, assuming bad debts are expected to be (1) 0.75% of net sales and (2) 6% of accounts receivable.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Collins Computer Timeshare Company entered into the following transactions during May 2014.
1. Purchased computer terminals for $20,000 from Digital Equipment on account.
2. Paid $3,000 cash for May rent on storage space.
3. Received $15,000 cash from customers for contracts billed in April.
4. Provided computer services to Schmidt Construction Company for $2,400 cash.
5. Paid Central States Power Co. $11,000 cash for energy usage in May.
6. Stockholders invested an additional $32,000 in the business.
7. Paid Digital Equipment for the terminals purchased in (1) above.
8. Incurred advertising expense for May of $900 on account.
Instructions
Indicate with the appropriate letter whether each of the transactions above results in:
(a) An increase in assets and a decrease in assets.
(b) An increase in assets and an increase in stockholders’ equity.
(c) An increase in assets and an increase in liabilities.
(d) A decrease in assets and a decrease in stockholders’ equity.
(e) A decrease in assets and a decrease in liabilities.
(f) An increase in liabilities and a decrease in stockholders’ equity.
(g) An increase in stockholders’ equity and a decrease in liabilities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On August 31, the balance sheet of Donahue Veterinary Clinic showed Cash $9,000, Accounts Receivable $1,700, Supplies $600, Equipment $6,000, Accounts Payable $3,600, Common Stock $13,000, and Retained Earnings $700. During September, the following transactions occurred.
1. Paid $2,900 cash for accounts payable due.
2. Collected $1,300 of accounts receivable.
3. Purchased additional office equipment for $2,100, paying $800 in cash and the balance on account.
4. Earned revenue of $7,300, of which $2,500 is paid in cash and the balance is due in October.
5. Declared and paid a $400 cash dividend
6. Paid salaries $1,700, rent for September $900, and advertising expense $200.
7. Incurred utilities expense for month on account $170.
8. Received $10,000 from Capital Bank on a 6-month note payable.
Instructions:
(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the September transactions beginning with August 31 balances. The column headings should be as follows: Cash 1 Accounts Receivable 1 Supplies 1 Equipment 5 Notes Payable 1 Accounts Payable 1 Common Stock 1 Retained Earnings 1 Revenues 2 Expenses 2 Dividends.
(b) Prepare an income statement for September, a retained earnings statement for September, and a balance sheet at September 30.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Orwell Company accumulates the following adjustment data at December 31.
1. Services provided but not recorded total $1,420.
2. Supplies of $300 have been used.
3. Utility expenses of $225 are unpaid.
4. Unearned service revenue of $260 is recognized for services performed.
5. Salaries of $800 are unpaid.
6. Prepaid insurance totaling $380 has expired.
For each of the above items indicate the following. (Answer for account balances before adjustment should be entered in alphabetical order.)
(a) The type of adjustment (prepaid expense, unearned revenue, accrued revenue, or accrued expense).
(b) The status of accounts before adjustment (overstatement or understatement).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On May 31, 2014, Terrell Company had a cash balance per books of $6,781.50. The bank statement from Home Town State Bank on that date showed a balance of $6,804.60. A comparison of the statement with the cash account revealed the following facts.
1. The statement included a debit memo of $40 for the printing of additional company checks.
2. Cash sales of $836.15 on May 12 were deposited in the bank. The cash receipts journal entry and the deposit slip were incorrectly made for $886.15. The bank credited Terrell Company for the correct amount.
3. Outstanding checks at May 31 totaled $276.25. Deposits in transit were $1,916.15.
4. On May 18, the company issued check No. 1181 for $685 to Barry Dietz on account. The check, which cleared the bank in May, was incorrectly journalized and posted by Terrell Company for $658.
5. A $3,000 note receivable was collected by the bank for Terrell Company on May 31 plus $80 interest. The bank charged a collection fee of $20. No interest has been accrued on the note.
6. Included with the cancelled checks was a check issued by Bridges Company to Jon Newton for $600 that was incorrectly charged to Terrell Company by the bank.
7.On May 31, the bank statement showed an NSF charge of $680 for a check issued by Sandy Grifton, a customer, to Terrell Company on account.
Instructions:
(a) Prepare the bank reconciliation at May 31, 2014. (Reconcile the bank balance first and then the book balance.)
(b) Prepare the necessary adjusting entries for Terrell Company at May 31, 2014. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, 2014, Derek Company had Accounts Receivable $139,000, Notes Receivable $30,000, and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $13,200. The note receivable is from Kaye Noonan Company. It is a 4-month, 12% note dated December 31, 2013. Derek Company prepares financial statements annually. During the year, the following selected transactions occurred.
Jan. 5 Sold $24,000 of merchandise to Zwingle Company, terms n/15.
20 Accepted Zwingle Company’s $24,000, 3-month, 9% note for balance due.
Feb. 18 Sold $8,000 of merchandise to Gerard Company and accepted Gerard’s $8,000, 6- month, 8% note for the amount due.
Apr. 20 Collected Zwingle Company note in full.
30 Received payment in full from Kaye Noonan Company on the amount due.
May 25 Accepted Isabella Inc.’s $4,000, 3-month, 7% note in settlement of a past-due balance on account.
Aug. 18 Received payment in full from Gerard Company on note due.
25 The Isabella Inc. note was dishonored. Isabella Inc. is not bankrupt; future payment is anticipated.
Sept. 1 Sold $12,000 of merchandise to Fernando Company and accepted a $12,000, 6- month, 10% note for the amount due.
Instructions
Journalize the transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are selected transactions at Tomas Company for 2014.
Jan. 1 Retired a piece of machinery that was purchased on January 1, 2004. The machine cost $58,000 on that date. It had a useful life of 10 years with no salvage value.
30-Jun Sold a computer that was purchased on January 1, 2011. The computer cost $40,000. It had a useful life of 5 years with no salvage value. The computer was sold for $14,000.
Dec. 31 Discarded a delivery truck that was purchased on January 1, 2010. The truck cost $33,000. It was depreciated based on a 6-year useful life with a $3,000 salvage value.
Journalize all entries required on the above dates, including entries to update depreciation, where applicable, on assets disposed of. Tomas Company uses straight-line depreciation. (Assume depreciation is up to date as of December 31, 2013.) (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, Chevon Corporation had 98,000 shares of no-par common stock issued and outstanding. The stock has a stated value of $4 per share. During the year, the following occurred.
Apr. 1 Issued 25,000 additional shares of common stock for $17 per share.
Jun 15 Declared a cash dividend of $1 per share to stockholders of record on June 30.
Jul 10 Paid the $1 cash dividend.
Dec. 1 Issued 2,000 additional shares of common stock for $19 per share.
Dec 15 Declared a cash dividend on outstanding shares of $1.20 per share to stockholders of record on December 31.
Instructions:
a. Prepare the entries, if any, on each of the three dividend dates. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below are two independent situations.
1. Chicory Cosmetics acquired 15% of the 200,000 shares of common stock of Racine Fashion at a total cost of $13 per share on March 18, 2014. On June 30,Racine declared and paid a $60,000 dividend. On December 31,Racine reported net income of $122,000 for the year. At December 31, the market price of Racine Fashion was $15 per share. The stock is classified as non-trading.
2. Frank, Inc., obtained significant influence over Nowak Corporation by buying 30% of Nowak’s 30,000 outstanding shares of common stock at a total cost of $9 per share on January 1, 2014. On June 15, Nowak declared and paid a cash dividend of $30,000. On December 31, Nowak reported a net income of $80,000 for the year.
Instructions:
Prepare all the necessary journal entries for 2014 for (a) Chicory Cosmetics and (b) Frank, Inc. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Zippydah Company has the following data at December 31, 2014.
|
Securities
|
Cost
|
Fair Value
|
|
Trading
|
120,000
|
124,000
|
|
Non-trading
|
100,000
|
94,000
|
The non-trading securities are held as a long-term investment.
Instructions:
(a) Prepare the adjusting entries to report 1. Trading securities at fair value and 2. Non-trading securities at fair value. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
(b) Indicate the statement presentation of each class of securities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In January 2014, the management of Stefan Company concludes that it has sufficient cash to permit some short-term investments in debt and stock securities. During the year, the following transactions occurred.
Feb. 1 Purchased 600 shares of Superior common stock for $31,800, plus brokerage fees of $600.
Mar. 1 Purchased 800 shares of Pawlik common stock for $20,000, plus brokerage fees of $400.
Apr. 1 Purchased 50 $1,000, 7% Venice bonds for $50,000, plus $1,000 brokerage fees.
Interest is payable semiannually on April 1 and October 1.
July 1. Received a cash dividend of $0.60 per share on the Superior common stock.
Aug. 1 Sold 200 shares of Superior common stock at $58 per share less brokerage fees of $200.
Sept. 1 Received a $1 per share cash dividend on the Pawlik common stock.
Oct. 1 Received the semiannual interest on the Venice bonds.
Oct. 1 Sold the Venice bonds for $50,000 less $1,000 brokerage fees.
At December 31, the fair value of the Superior common stock was $55 per share. The fair value of the Pawlik common stock was $24 per share.
Instructions:
a. Journalize the transactions and post to the accounts Debt Investments and Stock Investments. (Use the T-account form.) (Record entries in the order displayed in the problem statement. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
b. Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2014, to report the investment securities at fair value. All securities are considered to be trading securities. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
c. Show the balance sheet presentation of investment securities at December 31, 2014.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
2-65 CVP and Break-Even
Complete the following problem sets from the Introduction to Management Accounting text: CVP and Break-Even, on p. 89 EXCEL Application Exercise Goal: Create an Excel spreadsheet to perform CVP analysis and show the relationship between price, costs, and break-even points in terms of units and dollars. Use the results to answer questions about your
findings.
Scenario: Phonetronix is a small manufacturer of telephone and communications devices. Recently, company management decided to investigate the profitability of cellular phone production. They have three different proposals to evaluate. Under all the proposals, the fixed costs for the new phone would be $110,000. Under proposal A, the selling price of the new phone would be $99 and the variable cost per unit would be $55. Under proposal B, the selling price of the phone would be $129 and the variable cost would remain the same. Under proposal C, the selling price would be $99 and the variable cost would be $49.
When you have completed your spreadsheet, answer the following questions:
1. What are the break-even points in units and dollars under proposal A?
2. How did the increased selling price under proposal B impact the break-even points in units and dollars compared to the break-even points calculated under proposal A?
3. Why did the change in variable cost under proposal C not impact the break-even points in units and dollars as significantly as proposal B did?
Step-by-Step:
1. Open a new Excel spreadsheet.
2. In column A, create a bold-faced heading that contains the following:
Row 1: Chapter 2 Decision Guideline
Row 2: Phonetronix
Row 3: Cost-Volume-Profit (CVP) Analysis
Row 4: Today’s Date
3. Merge and center the four heading rows across columns A through D.
4. In Row 7, create the following bold-faced, right-justified column headings: Column
B: Proposal A Column C: Proposal B Column D: Proposal C Note: Adjust cell widths when necessary as you work.
5. In Column A, create the following row headings: Row 8: Selling price Row 9: Variable cost Row 10: Contribution margin Row 11: Contribution margin ratio Skip a row Row 13: Fixed cost Skip a row Row 15: Break-even in units Skip a row Row 17: Break-even in dollars
6. Use the scenario data to fill in the selling price, variable cost, and fixed cost amounts for the three proposals.
7. Use the appropriate formulas from this chapter to calculate contribution margin, contribution margin ratio, break-even in units, and break-even in dollars.
8. Format all amounts as: Number tab: Category: Currency Decimal places: 0 Symbol: None Negative numbers: Red with parenthesis
9. Change the format of the selling price, contribution margin, fixed cost, and breakeven in dollars amounts to display a dollar symbol.
10. Change the format of both contribution margin headings to display as indented: Alignment tab: Horizontal: Left (Indent) Indent: 1
11. Change the format of the contribution margin amount cells to display a top border, using the default line style. Border tab: Icon: Top Border
12. Change the format of the contribution margin ratio amounts to display as a percentage with two decimal places. Number tab: Category: Percentage Decimal places: 2
13. Change the format of all break-even headings and amounts to display as boldfaced.
14. Activate the ability to use heading names in formulas under Tools ? Options: Calculation tab: Check the box: Accept labels in formulas
15. Replace the cell-based formulas with “word-based” equivalents for each formula used in Proposal A. Example: Contribution margin for proposal B would be: = (‘Selling price’ ‘Proposal B’) – (‘Variable cost’ ‘Proposal B’) Read more: CVP and Break-Even Goal: Create an Excel spread…
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
5-5A Effect of inventory cost flow on ending inventory balance and gross margin.
Bristol Sales had the following transactions for DVDs in 2012, its first year of operations.
Jan. 20 Purchased 75 units @ $17 = $1,275
Apr. 21 Purchased 450 units @ $19 = $8,550
July 25 Purchased 200 units @ $23 = $4,600
Sept. 19 Purchased 100 units @ $29 = $2,900
During this year, Bristol Sales sold 775 DVDs for $60 each.
Required:
A. Compute the amount of ending inventory Bristol would report on the balance sheet, assuming the following cost flow assumptions: (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) weighted average.
B. Record the above transactions in general journal form and post to T-accounts using (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) weighted average. Use a separate set of journal entries and T-accounts for each method. Assume all transactions are cash transactions.
C. Compute the difference in gross margin between the FIFO and LIFO cost flow assumptions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
5-4A Effect of inventory cost flow ( FIFO, LIFO and weighted average) on gross margin
The following information pertains to Porter Company for 2011.
Beginning Inventory 70 units @ $13
Units Purchased 280 units @ $18
Ending inventory consisted of 30 units. Porter sold 320 units at $30 each. All purchases and sales were made with cash.
Required:
A. Compute the gross margin for Porter Company using the following cost flow assumptions:
B. What is the dollar amount of difference in net income between using FIFO versus LIFO? (Ignore income tax considerations.)
C. Determine the cash flow from operating activities, using each of the three cost flow assumptions listed in Requirement A. Ignore the effect of income taxes. Explain why these cash flows have no differences.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P2-5A
The Russo Theater will begin operations in March. The Russo will be unique in that it and prepare a trial balance. will show only triple features of sequential theme movies. As of March 1, the ledger of Russo showed: No. 101 Cash $16,000; No. 140 Land $42,000; No. 145 Buildings (concession stand, projection room, ticket booth, and screen) $18,000; No. 157 Equipment $16,000; No. 201 Accounts Payable $12,000; and No. 311 Common Stock $80,000. During the month of March the following events and transactions occurred.
Mar. 2 Rented the three Star Wars movies (Star Wars, The Empire Strikes Back, and The Return of the Jedi) to be shown for the first 3 weeks of March. The film rental was $9,000; $3,000 was paid in cash and $6,000 will be paid on March 10.
3 Ordered the first three Star Trek movies to be shown the last 10 days of March. It will cost $300 per night.
9 Received $6,500 cash from admissions.
10 Paid balance due on Star Wars movies rental and $3,000 on March 1 accounts payable.
11 Russo Theater contracted with M. Brewer Company to operate the concession stand. Brewer is to pay 10% of gross concession receipts (payable monthly) for the right to operate the concession stand.
12 Paid advertising expenses $800.
20 Received $7,200 cash from customers for admissions.
20 Received the Star Trek movies and paid the rental fee of $3,000.
31 Paid salaries of $4,800.
31 Received statement from M. Brewer showing gross receipts from concessions of $8,000 and the balance due to Russo Theater of $800 ($8,000 x 10%) for March.
Brewer paid one-half the balance due and will remit the remainder on April 5.
31 Received $12,000 cash from customers for admissions.
In addition to the accounts identified above, the chart of accounts includes: No. 112
Accounts Receivable, No. 405 Admission Revenue, No. 406 Concession Revenue,
No. 610 Advertising Expense, No. 632 Film Rental Expense, and No. 726 Salaries Expense.
Instructions
(a) Enter the beginning balances in the ledger. Insert a check mark (.) in the reference column of the ledger for the beginning balance.
(b) Journalize the March transactions.
(c) Post the March journal entries to the ledger. Assume that all entries are posted from page 1 of the journal.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P4-8A
Mike Greenberg opened Clean Window Washing Inc. on July 1, 2014. During July, the following transactions were completed.
July 1 Issued 12,000 shares of common stock for $12,000 cash.
1 Purchased used truck for $8,000, paying $2,000 cash and the balance on account.
3 Purchased cleaning supplies for $900 on account.
5 Paid $1,800 cash on a 1-year insurance policy effective July 1.
12 Billed customers $3,700 for cleaning services.
18 Paid $1,000 cash on amount owed on truck and $500 on amount owed on cleaning supplies.
20 Paid $2,000 cash for employee salaries.
21 Collected $1,600 cash from customers billed on July 12.
25 Billed customers $2,500 for cleaning services.
31 Paid $290 for maintenance of the truck during month.
31 Declared and paid $600 cash dividend.
The chart of accounts for Clean Window Washing contains the following accounts:
Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Prepaid Insurance, Equipment, Accumulated
Depreciation— Equipment, Accounts Payable, Salaries and Wages Payable,
Common Stock, Retained Earnings, Dividends, Income Summary, Service Revenue,
Maintenance and Repairs Expense, Supplies Expense, Depreciation Expense, Insurance Expense, Salaries and Wages Expense.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the July transactions.
(b) Post to the ledger accounts. (Use T-accounts.)
(c) Prepare a trial balance at July 31.
(d) Journalize the following adjustments.
(1) Services performed but unbilled and uncollected at July 31 were $1,700.
(2) Depreciation on equipment for the month was $180.
(3) One-twelfth of the insurance expired.
(4) An inventory count shows $320 of cleaning supplies on hand at July 31.
(5) Accrued but unpaid employee salaries were $400.
(e) Post adjusting entries to the Taccounts.
(f) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.
(g) Prepare the income statement and a retained earnings statement for July and a classified balance sheet at July 31.
(h) Journalize and post closing entries and complete the closing process.
(i) Prepare a post-closing trial balance at July 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mike Paul is the bookkeeper for Benelli Company. Mike has been trying to get the balance sheet of Benelli Company to balance. It finally balanced, but now he’s not sure it is correct.
BENELLI COMPANY
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2010
|
Assets
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Cash
|
20,500
|
Accounts payable
|
16,000
|
|
Supplies
|
9,500
|
Accounts receivable
|
(12,000)
|
|
Equipment
|
40,000
|
Common stock
|
40,000
|
|
Dividends
|
8,000
|
Retained earnings
|
34,000
|
|
Total assets
|
78,000
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
Complete the corrected balance sheet below. (List assets in order of liquidity.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Some of Grand Junction Corporation’s investment securities are classified as trading securities and some are classified as available-for-sale. The cost and market value of each category at December 31, 2011, was as follows.
| |
Cost
|
Fair Value
|
Unrealized Gain (Loss)
|
|
Trading securities
|
96,300
|
84,900
|
(11,400)
|
|
Available-for-sale securities
|
59,000
|
63,200
|
4,200
|
At December 31, 2010, the Market Adjustment-Trading account had a debit balance of $2,200, and the Market Adjustment-Available-for-Sale account had a credit balance of $7,750.
Prepare the required journal entries for each group of securities for December 31, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
If Soule Company had net income of $585,000 in 2011 and it experienced a 30% increase in net income over 2010, what was its 2010 net income?
|
PERKINS INC.
|
|
Balance Sheet (partial)
|
|
Cash
|
8,041,000
|
|
Short-term investments
|
4,947,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
12,545,000
|
|
Inventories
|
14,814,000
|
|
Other current assets
|
5,571,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
45,918,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
40,644,000
|
What are the (a) working capital, (b) current ratio, and (c) acid-test ratio? (Round ratios to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data are from the income statements of Huntsinger Company.
| |
2011
|
2010
|
|
Sales
|
6,420,000
|
6,240,000
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
980,000
|
860,000
|
|
Purchases
|
4,340,000
|
4,661,000
|
|
Ending inventory
|
1,020,000
|
980,000
|
Compute for each year (1) the inventory turnover and (2) the average days to sell the inventory. (Round answers to 1 decimal place, e.g. 10.5. Use rounded answers for future calculations.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
In alphabetical order below are balance sheet items for Lopez Company at December 31, 2008. Kim Lopez is the owner of Lopez Company.
|
Accounts payable
|
90,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
72,000
|
|
Cash
|
49,000
|
|
Kim Lopez, Company
|
31,500
|
Prepare a balance sheet, following the format of Illustration 1-9
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tomlin Company begins operations on April 1. Information from job cost sheets shows the following.
|
Manufacturing Costs Assigned
|
|
Job
|
Number
|
April
|
May
|
June
|
Month Completed
|
|
10
|
5,200
|
4,400
|
|
May
|
|
|
11
|
6,100
|
3,900
|
3,000
|
June
|
|
|
12
|
1,200
|
|
|
April
|
|
|
13
|
|
4,700
|
4,500
|
June
|
|
|
14
|
|
3,900
|
3,600
|
Not complete
|
Job 12 was completed in April. Job 10 was completed in May. Jobs 11 and 13 were completed in June. Each job was sold for 50% above its cost in the month following completion.
Instructions
1. What is the balance in Work in Process Inventory at the end of each month?
2. What is the balance in Finished Goods Inventory at the end of each month?
3. What is the gross profit for May, June, and July?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jim Thome has prepared the following list of statements about bonds.
1. Bonds are a form of interest-bearing notes payable.
2. When seeking long-term financing, an advantage of issuing bonds over issuing common stock is that stockholder control is not affected.
3. When seeking long-term financing, an advantage of issuing common stock over issuing bonds is that tax savings result.
4. Secured bonds have specific assets of the issuer pledged as collateral for the bonds.
5. Secured bonds are also known as debenture bonds.
6. Bonds that mature in installments are called term bonds.
7. A conversion feature may be added to bonds to make them more attractive to bond buyers.
8. The rate used to determine the amount of cash interest the borrower pays is called the stated rate.
9. Bond prices are usually quoted as a percentage of the face value of the bond.
10. The present value of a bond is the value at which it should sell in the marketplace.
Instructions
Identify each statement above as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Connor Video Center accumulates the following cost and market data at December 31.
|
Inventory
|
Categories
|
Cost Data
|
Market Data
|
|
Cameras
|
12,500
|
13,400
|
|
|
Camcorders
|
9,000
|
9,500
|
|
|
DVDs
|
3,000
|
12,800
|
|
Compute the lower-of-cost-or-market valuation for O’Connor’s inventory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An analysis of comparative balance sheets, the current year’s income statement, and the general ledger accounts of Conard Corp. uncovered the following items.
Assume all items involve cash unless there is information to the contrary. Indicate how each item should be classified in the statement of cash flows using the four major classifications listed to the right.
ITEMS
a. Payment of interest on notes payable
b. Exchange of land for patent
c. Sale of building at book value
d. Payment of dividends
e. Depreciation
f. Receipt of dividends on investment in stock
g. Receipt of interest on notes receivable
h. Issuance of capital stock
i. Amortization of patent
j. Issuance of bonds for land
k. Purchase of land
l. Conversion of bonds into common stock
m. Loss on sale of land
n. Retirement of bonds
NOTE: You will associate each item to the appropriate number (representing classification) using the center column.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Summary financial information for Holland Company is as follows.
| |
December 31, 2012
|
December 31, 2011
|
|
Current assets
|
199,000
|
220,000
|
|
Plant assets
|
821,000
|
780,000
|
|
Total assets
|
1,020,000
|
1,000,000
|
Compute the amount and percentage changes in 2012 using horizontal analysis, assuming 2011 is the base year. (For negative numbers use either a negative sign preceding the number, e.g. -45 or parenthesis, e.g. (45). Round percent to 1 decimal place, e.g. 7.5.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ronald Distributors is a growing company whose ability to raise capital has not been growing as quickly as its expanding assets and sales. Ronald’s local banker has indicated that the company cannot increase its borrowing for the foreseeable future.
Ronald’s suppliers are demanding payment for goods acquired within 30 days of the invoice date, but Ronald’s customers are slow in paying for their purchases (60-90 days). As a result, Ronald has a cash flow problem.
Ronald needs $960,000 to cover next Friday’s payroll. Its balance of outstanding accounts receivable totals $1,000,000. What might Ronald do to alleviate this cash crunch?
Record the entry that Ronald would make when it raises the needed cash. (Assume a 2% service charge.) (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The condensed financial statements of Eau Fraîche Company for the years 2010 and 2011 are presented below.
EAU FRAÎCHE COMPANY
Balance Sheets
December 31
| |
2011
|
2010
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Cash and cash equivalents
|
330
|
360
|
|
Accounts receivable (net)
|
470
|
400
|
|
Inventories
|
460
|
390
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
120
|
160
|
|
Total current assets
|
1,380
|
1,310
|
|
Property, plant, and equipment
|
420
|
380
|
|
Investments
|
10
|
10
|
|
Intangibles and other assets
|
530
|
510
|
|
Total assets
|
2,340
|
2,340
|
|
Current liabilities
|
900
|
790
|
|
Long-term liabilities
|
410
|
380
|
|
Stockholders’equity – common
|
1,030
|
1,040
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’equity
|
2,340
|
2,210
|
EAU FRAÎCHE COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31
| |
2011
|
2010
|
|
Revenues
|
3,800
|
3,480
|
|
Costs and expenses
|
|
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
970
|
890
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
2,400
|
2,330
|
|
Interest expense
|
10
|
20
|
|
Total costs and expenses
|
3,380
|
3,240
|
|
Income before income taxes
|
420
|
220
|
|
Income tax expense
|
168
|
132
|
|
Net income
|
252
|
88
|
Compute the following ratios for 2010 and 2011. (Round current ratio and inventory turnover to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.50. Round all other answers to 1 decimal place, e.g. 5.2.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
After the accounts are closed on July 3, 2008, prior to liquidating the partnership, the capital accounts of Ann Daniels, Harold Burton, and Carla Ramariz are $27,000, $4,500, and $32,000, respectively. Cash and noncash assets total $9,500 and $84,000, respectively. Amounts owed to creditors total $30,000. The partners share income and losses in the ratio of 2:1:1. Between July 3 and July 29, the noncash assets are sold for $54,000, the partner with the capital deficiency pays his deficiency to the partnership, and the liabilities are paid.
Instructions
1. Prepare a statement of partnership liquidation, indicating (a) the sale of assets and division of loss, (b) the payment of liabilities, (c) the receipt of the deficiency (from the appropriate partner), and (d) the distribution of cash.
2. If the partner with the capital deficiency declares bankruptcy and is unable to pay the deficiency, explain how the deficiency would be divided between the partners.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lebo Hardware reported the cost of goods sold as follows:
| |
2008
|
2009
|
|
Beginning Inventory
|
20,000
|
30,000
|
|
Cost of goods purchased
|
150,000
|
175,000
|
|
Cost of goods available for sale
|
170,000
|
205,000
|
|
Ending inventory
|
30,000
|
35,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
140,000
|
170,000
|
Lebo made two errors: (1) 2008 ending inventory was overstated by $3,000 and (2) 2009 ending inventory was understated $6,000.
Instructions
Compute the correct cost of goods sold for each year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The adjusted trial balance of Quad Cities Tours Inc. as of October 31, 2008 (its year end) contains the following information.
|
Accounts Payable
|
170,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
15,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation-Buildings
|
144,000
|
|
Accumulated Depreciation Equipment
|
715,000
|
|
Bonds Payable
|
600,000
|
|
Buildings—Offices and Cabins
|
660,000
|
|
Cash
|
36,000
|
|
Common Stock
|
300,000
|
|
Equipment
|
840,000
|
|
Income Taxes Payable
|
56,250
|
|
Interest Payable
|
30,000
|
|
Inventories
|
485,000
|
|
Investment in Iowa Trading Post(Trading-shrt term
|
140,000
|
|
Land
|
653,000
|
|
Mortgage payable(on fishing cabins-lng term)
|
247,750
|
|
Notes payable (short term)
|
164,000
|
|
Prepaid advertising
|
17,000
|
|
Prepaid insurance
|
9,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
440,000
|
|
Supplies
|
12,000
|
Instructions:
(a) Prepare in good form a classified balance sheet for quad cities tours in.
(b) Calculate the following balance sheet relationships: current ratio, debt to total assets ratio, and working capital.
(c) Assume the Quad cities has come to you, as the senior loan officer of Big Woods Credit Union, seeking a $500,000 loan to help defray the costs of replacing much of its rental camping gear and canoes. Would you be willing to approve the loan? Is there any additional information you would like to have before making your decision?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
7-B1 Prepare a Master Budget
* $ refers to New Zealand dollars.
Mike Kite Company, a small Melbourne firm that sells kites on the Web, wants a master budget for the three months beginning January 1, 2008. It desires an ending minimum cash balance of $5,000 each month. Sales are forecasted at an average wholesale selling price of $8 per kite. Merchandise costs average $4 per kite. All sales are on credit, payable within 30 days, but experience has shown that 60% of current sales are collected in the current month, 30% in the next month, and 10% in the month thereafter. Bad debts are negligible.
In January, Mike Kite is beginning just in time (JIT) delivery from suppliers, which means that purchases will equal expected sales. On January 1, purchases will cease until inventory decreases to $6,000, after which time purchases will equal sales. Purchases during any given month are paid in full during the following month.
|
Monthly operating expenses are as follows:
|
|
Wages and Salaries
|
15,000
|
|
|
Insurance Expired
|
125
|
|
|
Depreciation
|
250
|
|
|
Miscellaneous
|
2,500
|
|
|
Rent
|
$250
|
per month plus 10% of quarterly sales over $10,000
|
Cash dividends of $1,500 are to be paid quarterly, beginning January 15, and are declared on the 15th of the previous month. All operating expenses are paid as incurred, except insurance, depreciation, and rent. Rent of $250 is paid at the beginning of each month, and the additional 10% of sales is paid quarterly on the 10th of the month following the end of the quarter. The next rent settlement date is January 10.
The company plans to buy some new fixtures for $3,000 cash in March. Money can be borrowed and repaid in multiples of $500 at an interest rate of 10% per annum.
Management wants to minimize borrowing and repay rapidly. Interest is compounded monthly but paid when the principal is repaid. Assume that borrowing occurs at the beginning, and repayments at the end, of the months in question.
Compute interest to the nearest dollar.
|
Assets as of December 31, 2007:
|
|
Cash
|
5,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
12,500
|
|
Inventory*
|
39,050
|
|
Unexpired Insurance
|
1,500
|
|
Fixed Assets, Net
|
12,500
|
|
Total
|
70,550
|
*November 30 Inventory Balance equals $16,000.
|
Liabilities as of December 31, 2007:
|
|
Accounts Payable (Merchandise)
|
35,550
|
|
Dividends Payable
|
1,500
|
|
Rent Payable
|
7,800
|
| |
44,850
|
|
Recent and Forecasted Sales:
|
|
October
|
38,000
|
|
November
|
25,000
|
|
December
|
25,000
|
|
January
|
62,000
|
|
February
|
70,000
|
|
March
|
38,000
|
|
April
|
45,000
|
1. Prepare a master budget using the template below, including a budgeted income statement, balance sheet, cash budget, and supporting schedules for the months January through March 2008.
2. Explain why there is a need for a bank loan and what operating sources provide the cash for the repayment of the bank loan?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acc225 Fundamental Accounting Principles
Decision Case 1-1 (pg.58)
Let’s examine a case using Greg’s Tunes and another company, Sal’s Silly Songs. It is now the end of the first year of operations, and both owners— Sally Siegman and Greg Moore— want to know how well they came out at the end of the year. Neither business kept complete accounting records and neither owner made any drawings.
Moore and Siegman throw together the following data at year end:
|
Sal’s Silly Songs:
|
|
Total assets
|
23,000
|
|
Siegman, capital
|
8,000
|
|
Total revenues
|
35,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
22,000
|
|
Greg’s Tunes:
|
|
Total liabilities
|
10,000
|
|
Moore, capital
|
6,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
44,000
|
|
Net income
|
9,000
|
Working in the music business, Moore has forgotten all the accounting he learned in college. Siegman majored in English literature, so she never learned any accounting. To gain information for evaluating their businesses, they ask you several questions.
For each answer, you must show your work to convince Moore and Siegman that you know what you are talking about.
1. Which business has more assets?
2. Which business owes more to creditors?
3. Which business has more owner’s equity at the end of the year?
4. Which business brought in more revenue?
5. Which business is more profitable?
6. Which of the foregoing questions do you think is most important for evaluating these two businesses? Why?
7. Which business looks better from a financial standpoint?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following costs result from the production and sale of 4,000 drum sets manufactured by Vince Drum Company for the year ended December 31, 2011. The drum sets sell for $250 each. The company has a 25% income tax rate.
|
Variable production costs
|
|
Plastic for casing
|
68,000
|
|
Wages of assembly workers
|
328,000
|
|
Drum stands
|
104,000
|
|
Variable selling costs
|
|
Sales commissions
|
60,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing costs
|
|
Taxes on factory
|
10,000
|
|
Factory maintenance
|
20,000
|
|
Factory machinery depreciation
|
80,000
|
|
Fixed selling administrative costs
|
|
Lease of equipment for sales staff
|
20,000
|
|
Accounting staff salaries
|
70,000
|
|
Administrative management salaries
|
150,000
|
Required
1. Prepare a contribution margin income statement for the company
2. Compute its contribution margin per unit and contribution margin ratio.
3. Interpret the contribution margin ratio from part 2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Establish, Reimburse, and Increase petty cash
RPM Music Center had the following petty cash transactions in March of the current year:
March 5 Wrote a $200 check, cashed it, and gave the proceeds and the petty cash box to Liz Buck, the petty cashier.
6 Paid $14.50 COD shipping charges on merchandise purchased for resale, terms FOB shipping point. RPM uses the perpetual system to account for merchandise inventory.
11 Paid $8.75 delivery charges on merchandise sold to a customer, terms FOB destination.
12 Purchased file folders for $12.13 that are immediately used.
14 Reimbursed Will Nelson, the manager, $9.65 for office supplies purchased and used.
18 Purchased printer paper for $22.54 that is immediately used.
27 Paid $47.10 COD shipping charges on merchandise purchased for resale, terms FOB shipping point.
28 Paid postage expenses of $16.
30 Reimbursed Nelson $58.80 for business car mileage.
31 Cash of $11.53 remained in the fund. Sorted the petty cash receipts by accounts affected and exchanged them for a check to reimburse the fund for expenditures. The fund amounts also increased to $250.
Required
1. Prepare the journal entry to establish the petty cash fund.
2. Prepare a petty cash payments report for March with these categories: delivery expense, mileage expense, postage expense, merchandise inventory (for transportation-in), and office supplies expense. Sort the payments into the appropriate categories and total the expenses in each category.
3. Prepare the journal entries for part 2 to both (a) reimburse and (b) increase the fund amount.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 4-22(a)
Parker, Inc, acquires 70 percent of Sawyer Company for $420,000. The remaining 30 percent of Sawyer’s outstanding shares continue to trade at a collective value of $174,000. On the acquisition date, Sawyer has the following accounts:
|
|
Book Value
|
Fair Value
|
|
Current assets
|
210,000
|
$210,000
|
|
Land
|
170,000
|
180,000
|
|
Buildings
|
300,000
|
330,000
|
|
Liabilities
|
(280,000)
|
(280,000)
|
The buildings have a 10-year life. In addition, Sawyer holds a patent worth $140,000 that has a five-year life but is not recorded on its financial records. At the end of the year, the two companies report the following balances:
|
|
Parker
|
Sawyer
|
|
Revenues
|
(900,000)
|
(600,000)
|
|
Expenses
|
600,000
|
400,000
|
a. Assume that the acquisition took place on January 1. What figures would appear in a consolidated income statement for this year?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P2-14 The following book and fair values were available for Westmont Company as of March 1.
|
|
Book Value
|
Fair Value
|
|
Inventory
|
630,000
|
600,000
|
|
Land
|
750,000
|
990,000
|
|
Buildings
|
1,700,000
|
2,000,000
|
|
Customer relationships –
|
|
800,000
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
(80,000)
|
(80,000)
|
|
Common stock
|
(2,000,000)
|
|
|
Additional paid-in capital
|
|
(500,000)
|
|
Retained earnings 1/1
|
|
(360,000)
|
|
Revenues
|
(420,000)
|
|
|
Expenses
|
280,000
|
|
Arturo Company pays $4,000,000 cash and issues 20,000 shares of its $2 par value common stock (fair value of $50 per share) for all of Westmont’s common stock in a merger, after which Westmont will cease to exist as a separate entity. Stock issue costs amount to $25,000 and Arturo pays $42,000 for legal fees to compete the transaction.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January1, Beckman, Inc., acquires 60 percent of the outstanding stock of Calvin for $36,000. Calvin Co. has one recorded asset, a specialized production machine with a book value of $10,000 and no liabilities. The fair value of the machine is $50,000, and the remaining useful life is estimated to be 10 years. Any remaining excess fair value is attributable to an unrecorded process trade secret with an estimated future life of 4 years. Calvin’s total acquisition-date fair value is $60,000.
At the end of the year, Calvin reports the following in its financial statements:
|
Revenues
|
50,000
|
Machine
|
9,000
|
Common stock
|
10,000
|
|
Expenses
|
20,000
|
Other assets
|
26,000
|
Retained earnings
|
25,000
|
|
Net income
|
30,000
|
Total assets
|
35,000
|
Total equity
|
35,000
|
Determine the amounts that Beckman should report in its year-end consolidated financial statements for noncontrolling interest in subsidiary income, total noncontrolling interest, Calvin’s machine (net of accumulated depreciation), and the process trade secret.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Purkerson, Smith, and Traynor have operated a bookstore for a number of years as a partnership. At the beginning of 2011, capital balances were as follows:
|
Purkerson
|
|
60,000
|
|
Smith
|
40,000
|
|
|
Traynor
|
|
20,000
|
Due to cash shortage, Purkerson invests and additional $8,000 in the business on April 1, 2011.
Each partner is allowed to withdraw $1,000 cash each month. The partners have used the same method of allocating profits and losses since the business’s inception. Each partner is given the following compensation allowance for work done in the busiiness. Purkerson, $18,000; Smith, $25,000 and Traynor, $8,000. Each partner is credited with interest equal to 10 percent of the average monthly capital balance for the year without regard for normal drawings. Any remaining profit or loss is allocated 4:2:4 to Purkerson, Smith, and Traynor, respectively. The net income for 2011 is $23,600. Each partner withdraws the allotted amount each month.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Distance Plus partnership has the following capital balances at the beginning of the current year:
|
Tiger (50% of profits and losses)
|
85,000
|
|
Phil (30%)
|
60,000
|
|
Ernie (20%)
|
55,000
|
| |
200,000
|
Each of the following questions ashould be viewed independently.
a. If Sergio invest $100,000 in cash in the business for a 25 percent interest, what journal entry is recorded? Assume that the bonus method is used.
b. If Sergio invests $60,000 in cash in the business for a 25 percent interest, what journal entry is recorded? Assume that the bonus method is used.
c. If Sergio invests $72,000 in cash in the business for a 25 percent interest, what journal entry is recorded? Assume that the goodwill method is used.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acc304 Intermediate Accounting
BE4-5 Separately reported items
The following are partial income statement account balances taken from the December 31, 2009, year-end trial balance of White and Sons, Inc.:
|
Restructuring costs
|
300,000
|
|
Interest revenue
|
40,000
|
|
Loss from earthquake (unusual and infrequent)
|
400,000
|
|
Loss on sale of investments
|
50,000
|
Income tax expense has not yet been accrued. The income tax rate is 40%.
Prepare the lower portion of the 2009 income statement beginning with $850,000 income before income taxes and extraordinary item. Include appropriate basic EPS disclosures. The company had 100,000 shares of common stock outstanding throughout the year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BE4-3 Multi-step Income Statement
Refer to the situation described in BE4-1.
The adjusted trial balance of Pacific Scientific Corporation on December 31, 2009, the end of the company’s fiscal year, contained the following income statement items ($ in millions):
|
Sales revenue
|
2,106
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,240
|
|
Selling expenses
|
126
|
|
General and administrative expenses
|
105
|
|
Interest expense
|
35
|
|
Gain on sale of investments
|
45
|
Income tax expense has not yet been accrued. The income tax rate is 40%.
Prepare a multi-step income statement for 2009. Ignore EPS disclosures.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BE4-2 Multi-step Income Statement
The adjusted trial balance of Pacific Scientific Corporation on December 31, 2009, the end of the company’s fiscal year, contained the following income statement items ($ in millions):
|
Sales revenue
|
2,106
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
1,240
|
|
Selling expenses
|
126
|
|
General and administrative expenses
|
105
|
|
Interest expense
|
35
|
|
Gain on sale of investments
|
45
|
Income tax expense has not yet been accrued. The income tax rate is 40%.
If the company’s accountant prepared a multi-step income statement, what amount would appear in the statement for:
(a) operating income
(b) nonoperating income
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Acc561 Introduction to Management Accounting
13-49 Variances
Study Appendix 13. Consider the following data regarding factory overhead:
| |
Variable
|
Fixed
|
|
Budget for actual hours of input
|
45,000
|
70,000
|
|
Applied
|
41,000
|
64,800
|
|
Budget for standard hours allowed for actual output achieved
|
41,000
|
70,000
|
|
Actual incurred
|
48,500
|
68,500
|
Using the above data, fill in the following blanks with the variance amounts. Use F for favorable or U for unfavorable for each variance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
7-29 Purchases and Sales Budgets
All sales of Carol’s Jeans and Uniforms (CJU) are made on credit. Sales are billed twice monthly, on the fifth of the month for the last half of the prior month’s sales and on the twentieth of the month for the first half of the current month’s sales. For accounts paid within the first 10 days after the billing date, CJU gives customers a 2% discount; otherwise the full amount is due within 30 days of billing date, and customers that do not pay within the 10-day period generally wait the full 30 days before making payment. Based on past experience, the collection experience of accounts receivable is:
|
Within the 10-day discount period
|
80%
|
|
At 30 days after billing
|
18%
|
|
Uncollectible
|
2%
|
Sales for May 20X8 were $750,000. The forecast sales for the next four months are
|
June
|
800,000
|
|
July
|
900,000
|
|
August
|
900,000
|
|
September
|
600,000
|
CJU’s average markup on its products is 40% of the sales price. CJU purchase merchandise for resale to meet the current month’s sales demand and to maintain a desired monthly ending inventory of 25% of the next month’s cost of goods sold. All purchases are on credit. CJU pays for one-half of a month’s purchases in the month of purchases and the other half in the month following the purchase. All sales and purchases occur uniformly throughout the month.
1. How much cash can CJU plan to collect from accounts receivable collections during July 20X8?
2. Compute the budgeted dollar value of CJU inventory on May 31, 20X8.
3. How much merchandise should CJU plan to purchase during June 20X8?
4. How much should CJU budget in August 20X8 for cash payments for merchandise purchased?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
13-58 Absorption and Variable Costing
The Trapani Company had the following actual data for 20X4 and 20X5:
| |
20X4
|
20X5
|
|
Units of finished goods
|
|
Opening inventory
|
2,000
|
|
Production
|
15,000
|
13,000
|
|
Sales
|
13,000
|
14,000
|
|
Ending Inventory
|
2,000
|
1,000
|
The basic production data at standard unit costs for the two years were
|
Direct materials
|
$22
|
|
Direct labor
|
18
|
|
Variable factory overhead
|
4
|
|
Standard variable costs per unit
|
44
|
Fixed factory overhead was budgeted at $98,000 per year. The expected volume of production was 14,000 units so the fixed overhead rate was $98,000 ÷ 14,000 = $7 per unit.
Budgeted sales price was $75 per unit. Selling and administrative expenses were budgeted at variable, $9 per unit sold, and fixed, $80,000 per year.
Assume that there were absolutely no variances from any standard variable costs or budgeted selling prices or budgeted fixed costs in 20X4.
There were no beginning or ending inventories of work in process.
1. For 20X4, prepare income statements based on standard variable (direct) costing and standard absorption costing. (The next problem deals with 20X5.)
2. Explain why operating income differs between variable costing and absorption costing. Be specific
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
13-54 Overhead Accounting for Control and for Product Costing
The pickle department of a major food manufacturer has an overhead rate of $5 per direct-labor hour, based on expected variable overhead of $150,000 per year, expected fixed overhead of $350,000 per year, and expected direct-labor hours of 100,000 per year.
Data for the year’s operations follow:
| |
Direct Labor Hours Used
|
Overhead Costs Incurred*
|
|
First six months
|
55,000
|
262,000
|
|
Last six months
|
41,000
|
236,500
|
*Fixed costs incurred were exactly equal to budgeted amounts throughout the year.
1. What is the under applied or over applied overhead for each six-month period?
Label your answer as under applied or over applied.
2. Explain briefly (not more than 50 words for each part) the probable causes for the under applied or over applied overhead. Focus on variable and fixed costs separately. Give the exact figures attributable to the causes you cite.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hernandez Chemical Company’s production process for two of its solvents can be diagrammed using a process map as shown in Exhibit 12-25.
The cost of the joint input, including processing costs before the split-off point, is $400,000. Solvent A can be sold at the split-off point for $20 per gallon and solvent B for $60 per gallon.
|
Indirect materials (Pounds)
|
55,000
|
|
Base materials (gallons)
|
220,000
|
|
Processing machine (machine hours)
|
80,000
|
|
Labor (labor hours)
|
45,000
|
|
Total Costs
|
$400,000
|
at split-off point:
| |
Yield
|
Selling Price
|
|
Solvent A
|
20,000
|
$20
|
|
Solvent B
|
10,000
|
$60
|
|
Total
|
30,000
|
|
1. Allocate the $400,000 joint cost to solvents A and B by the physical-units method.
2. Allocate the $400,000 joint cost to solvents A and B by the relative-sales-value method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
13-45 Variable and Absorption Costing
Chan Manufacturing Company data for 20X7 follow:
Sales: 12,000 units at $17 each
|
Actual production (units)
|
15,000
|
|
Expected volume of production (units)
|
18,000
|
|
Manufacturing costs incurred
|
|
Variable
|
120,000
|
|
Fixed
|
63,000
|
|
Nonmanufacturing costs incurred
|
|
Variable
|
24,000
|
|
Fixed
|
18,000
|
1. Determine operating income for 20X7, assuming the firm uses the variablecosting approach to product costing. (Do not prepare a statement.)
2. Assume that there is no January 1, 20X7, inventory; no variances are allocated to inventory; and the firm uses a “full absorption” approach to product costing.
Compute: (a) the cost assigned to December 31, 20X7, inventory, (b) operating income for the year ended December 31, 20X7.(Do not prepare a statement.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
13-B3 Comparison of Variable Costing and Absorption Costing
Consider the following information pertaining to a year’s operations of Youngstown Manufacturing:
|
Units sold
|
= 1,400
|
|
Units produced
|
= 1,600
|
|
Direct labor
|
= $4,200
|
|
Direct materials used
|
= 3,500
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
= 2,200
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
= 300
|
|
selling and administrative expenses (all fixed)
|
= 700
|
|
Beginning inventorie
|
= 0
|
|
Contribution margin
|
= 5,600
|
|
Direct-material inventory, end
|
= 800
|
There are no work-in-process inventories.
1. What is the ending finished-goods inventory cost under absorption costing?
2. What is the ending finished-goods inventory cost under variable costing?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
2-48 CVP and Financial Statements for a Mega-Brand
Company
Procter & Gamble Company is a Cincinnati-based company that produces household products under brand names such as Gillette, Bounty, Crest, Folgers, and Tide. The company’s 2006 income statement showed the following (in millions):
Net sales = $68,222
Costs of products sold = 33,125
Selling, general, and administrative expense = 21,848
Operating income = $13,249
Suppose that the cost of products sold is the only variable cost; selling, general, and administrative expenses are fixed with respect to sales.
Assume that Procter & Gamble had a 10% increase in sales in 2007 and that there was no change in costs except for increases associated with the higher volume of
a. Compute the predicted 2007 operating income for Procter & Gamble and its percentage increase.
b. Explain why the percentage increase in income differs from the percentage increase in sales.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume Draper has created a standard cost card for each job. Standard direct materials include 124 software packages at a cost of $900 per package. Standard direct labor costs per job include 90 hours at $120 per hour. Draper plans on completing 12 jobs during October.
Actual direct materials costs for October included 90 software packages at a total cost of $81,450. Actual direct labor costs included 100 hours per job at an average rate of $125 per hour. Draper completed all 12 jobs in October.
Requirements:
1. Calculate the direct materials price and efficiency variances.
2. Calculate the direct labor price and efficiency variances.
3. Prepare journal entries to record the use of both materials and labor for October for the company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Alternative E10–2 Direct Labor Variances
AirMeals, Inc., prepares in-flight meals for a number of major airlines. One of the company’s products is stuffed cannelloni with roasted pepper sauce, fresh baby corn, and spring salad. During the most recent week, the company prepared 11,000 f these meals using 2,930 direct labor-hours. The company paid these direct labor workers a total of $28,275 for this work, or $9.65 per hour.
According to the standard cost card for this meal, it should require 0.27 direct laborhours at a cost of $9.40 per hour.
Required:
1a. According to the standards, what direct labor cost should have been incurred to prepare 11,000 meals?
1b. How much does this differ from the actual direct labor cost? (Input the amount as a positive value. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required.
Indicate the effect of variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance.). Round your answer to the nearest whole number.)
2. Break down the difference computed in (1) above into a labor efficiency variance and a labor rate variance. (Input all amounts as positive values. Do not round intermediate calculations. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AirMeals, Inc., prepares in-flight meals for a number of major airlines. One of the company’s products is stuffed cannelloni with roasted pepper sauce, fresh baby corn, and spring salad. During the most recent week, the company prepared 6,000 of these meals using 1,150 direct labor-hours. The company paid these direct labor workers a total of $11,500 for this work, or $10 per hour.
According to the standard cost card for this meal, it should require 0.20 direct laborhours at a cost of $9.50 per hour.
Required:
1a. According to the standards, what direct labor cost should have been incurred to prepare 6,000 meals?
1b. How much does this differ from the actual direct labor cost? (Input the amount as a positive value. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required.
Indicate the effect of variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance.). Round your answer to the nearest whole number.)
2. Break down the difference computed in (1) above into a labor efficiency variance and a labor rate variance. (Input all amounts as positive values. Do not round intermediate calculations. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jake Palermo has prepared the following list of statements about budgetary control.
Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.
1. Budget reports compare actual results with planned objectives.
2. All budget reports are prepared on a weekly basis.
3. Management uses budget reports to analyze differences between actual and planned results and determine their causes.
4. As a result of analyzing budget reports, management may either take corrective action or modify future plans.
5. Budgetary control works best when a company has an informal reporting system.
6. The primary recipients of the sales report are the sales manager and the vice president of production.
7. The primary recipient of the scrap report is the production manager.
8. A static budget is a projection of budget data at one level of activity.
9. Top management’s reaction to unfavorable differences is not influenced by the materiality of the difference.
10. A static budget is not appropriate in evaluating a manager’s effectiveness in controlling costs unless the actual activity level approximates the static budget activity level or the behavior of the costs is fixed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An analysis of comparative balance sheets, the current year’s income statement, and the general ledger accounts of Conard Corp. uncovered the following items. Assume all items involve cash unless there is information to the contrary. Indicate how each item should be classified in the statement of cash flows using the four major classifications listed to the right.
ITEMS
a. Payment of interest on notes payable
b. Exchange of land for patent
c. Sale of building at book value
d. Payment of dividends
e. Depreciation
f. Receipt of dividends on investment in stock
g. Receipt of interest on notes receivable
h. Issuance of capital stock
i. Amortization of patent
j. Issuance of bonds for land
k. Purchase of land
l. Conversion of bonds into common stock
m. Loss on sale of land
n. Retirement of bonds
NOTE: You will associate each item to the appropriate number (representing classification) using the center column.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Elder Company is a manufacturer of personal computers. Various costs and expenses associated with its operations are below. The company intends to classify these costs and expenses into categories.
Match the Cost and Expenses with the appropriate Category.
Cost and Expenses
1. Property taxes on the factory building
2. Production superintendents’ salaries
3. Memory boards and chips used in assembling computers.
4. Depreciation on the factory equipment.
5. Salaries for assembly line quality control inspectors
6. Sales commissions paid to sell personal computers.
7. Electrical components used in assembling computers.
8. Wages of workers assembling personal computers
9. Soldering materials used on factory assembly line.
10. Salaries for the night security guards for the factory building.
NOTE: You will associate each cost and expense to the appropriate letter (representing categories) using the center column.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Scully Corporation’s comparative balance sheets are presented below.
SCULLY CORPORATION
Balance Sheets
| |
2011
|
2010
|
|
Cash
|
4,300
|
3,700
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
21,200
|
23,400
|
|
Inventory
|
10,000
|
7,000
|
|
Land
|
20,000
|
26,000
|
|
Building
|
70,000
|
70,000
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
(15,000)
|
(10,000)
|
|
Total
|
110,500
|
120,100
|
|
Accounts payable
|
12,370
|
31,100
|
|
Common stock
|
75,000
|
69,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
23,130
|
20,000
|
|
Total
|
110,500
|
120,100
|
| |
|
|
|
Scully’s 2011 income statement included net sales of $100,000, cost of goods sold $60,000, and net income of $15,000.
Show computation (equation) for the following:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allen Labinski has prepared the following list of statements about process cost accounting. Identify each statement as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.
1. Process cost systems are used to apply costs to similar products that are mass-produced in a continuous fashion.
2. A process cost system is used when each finished unit is indistinguishable from another.
3. Companies that produce soft drinks, motion pictures, and computers chips would all use process cost accounting.
4. In a process cost system, costs are tracked by individual jobs.
5. Job order costing and process costing track different manufacturing costs elements.
6. Both job order costing and process costing account for direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.
7. Costs flow through the accounts in the same basic way for both job order costing and process costing.
8. In a process cost system, only one work in process account is used.
9. In a process cost system, costs are summarized in a job cost sheet.
10. In a process cost system, the unit cost is total manufacturing costs for the period divided by the units produced during the period.
NOTE: Fill in the table below with your responses; write correction for false statements below the table:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tharp and Kostrivas is a law firm that is initiating an activity-based costing system.
Ben Tharp, the senior partner and strong supporter of ABC, has prepared the following list of activities performed by a typical attorney in a day at the firm. Classify each of the activities listed by Ben Tharp as value-added or non-value-added and defend your classification. How much was value-added and how much was nonvalue- added?
|
Activities
|
Hours
|
|
Writing contracts and letters
|
1.00
|
|
Attending staff meetings
|
0.50
|
|
Taking depositions
|
1.00
|
|
Doing research
|
1.00
|
|
Traveling to/from court
|
1.00
|
|
Contemplating legal strategy
|
1.00
|
|
Eating lunch
|
1.00
|
|
Litigating a case in course
|
2.50
|
|
Entertaining a prospective client
|
2.00
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Elder Company is a manufacturer of personal computers. Various costs and expenses associated with its operations are below. The company intends to classify these costs and expenses into categories.
Match the Cost and Expenses with the appropriate Category.
Cost and Expenses
1. Property taxes on the factory building
2. Production superintendents’ salaries
3. Memory boards and chips used in assembling computers.
4. Depreciation on the factory equipment.
5. Salaries for assembly line quality control inspectors
6. Sales commissions paid to sell personal computers.
7. Electrical components used in assembling computers.
8. Wages of workers assembling personal computers
9. Soldering materials used on factory assembly line.
10. Salaries for the night security guards for the factory building.
NOTE: You will associate each cost and expense to the appropriate letter (representing categories) using the center column.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bjerg Corporation incurred several costs. Prepare entries for manufacturing costs.
Journalize the following transactions.
1. Purchased raw materials on account $46,300
2. Raw Materials of $36,000 were requisitioned to the factory. An analysis of the materials requisition slips indicates that $6,800 was classified as indirect materials.
3. Factory labor costs incurred were $53,900, of which $49,000 pertained to factory wages payable and $4,900 pertained to employer payroll taxes payable.
4. Time tickets indicated that $48,000 was direct labor and $5,900 was indirect labor.
5. Overhead costs incurred on account were $80,500.
6. Manufacturing overhead was applied at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost.
7. Goods costing $88,000 were completed and transferred to finished goods.
8. Finished goods costing $75,000 to manufacture were sold on account for $103,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Allocating Manufacturing Overhead to Jobs
Webber Fabricating estimated the following annual costs.
|
Expected annual direct labor hours
|
40,000
|
|
Expected annual direct labor cost
|
625,000
|
|
Expected machine hours
|
20,000
|
|
Expected material cost for the year
|
800,000
|
|
Expected manufacturing overhead
|
1,000,000
|
Required
a. Calculate overhead allocation rates using each of the four possible allocation bases provided.
b. Determine the cost of the following job (number 253) using each of the four overhead allocation rates. Job 253 Direct materials $3,000 Direct labor (150 hrs @ $12/hr)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
FireOut, Inc. manufactures steel cylinders and nozzles for two models of fire extinguishers:
(1) a home fire extinguisher and (2) a commercial fire extinguisher. The home 1 model is a high-volume (54,000 units), half-gallon cylinder that holds 2 1/2 pounds of multipurpose dry chemical at 480 PSI. The commercial model is a low-volume (10,200 units), two-gallon cylinder that holds 10 pounds of multi-purpose dry chemical at 390 PSI. Both products require 1.5 hours of direct labor for completion. Therefore, total annual direct labor hours are 96,300 or [1.5 hrs × (54,000 + 10,200)]. Expected annual manufacturing overhead is $1,496,600. Thus, the predetermined overhead rate is $15.54 or ($1,496,600 ÷ 96,300) per direct labor hour. The direct materials cost per unit is $18.50 for the home model and $26.50 for the commercial model. The direct labor cost is $19 per unit for both the home and the commercial models.
The company’s managers identified six activity cost pools and related cost drivers and accumulated overhead by cost pool as follows.
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Cost Driver
|
Estimated Overhead
|
Expected Use of Cost Drivers
|
Expected Use of Drivers by Product
|
Home Commercial
|
|
Receiving
|
Pounds
|
70,350
|
335,000
|
215,000
|
120,000
|
|
Forming
|
Machine hours
|
150,500
|
35,000
|
27,000
|
8,000
|
|
Assembling
|
Number of parts
|
390,600
|
217,000
|
165,000
|
52,000
|
|
Testing
|
Number of tests
|
$51,000
|
$25,500
|
15,500
|
10,000
|
|
Painting
|
Gallons
|
52,580
|
5,258
|
3,680
|
1,578
|
|
Packing and shipping
|
Pounds
|
787,250
|
335,000
|
215,000
|
120,000
|
Instructions:
(a) Under traditional product costing, compute the total unit cost of both products. Prepare a single comparative schedule of the individual costs by products, in the format provided below.
(b) Under ABC, prepare a schedule showing the computations of the activity-based overhead rates (per cost driver).
(c) Prepare a schedule assigning each activity’s overhead cost pool to each product based on the use of cost drivers. (Include a computation of overhead cost per unit, rounding to the nearest cent.)
(d) Compute the total cost per unit for each product under ABC.
(e) Classify each of the activities as a value-added activity or a non-value-added activity.
(f1) Comment on the comparative overhead cost per unit for the two products under ABC.
(f2) Comment on the comparative total costs per unit under traditional costing and ABC.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Garcia Manufacturing uses a job order cost system and applies overhead to production on the basis of direct labor costs. On January 1, 2012, Job No. 50 was the only job in process.
The costs incurred prior to January 1 on this job were as follows: direct materials $20,000, direct labor $12,000, and manufacturing overhead $16,000. As of January 1, Job No. 49 had been completed at a cost of $90,000 and was part of finished goods inventory. There was a $15,000 balance in the Raw Materials Inventory account. During the month of
January, Garcia Manufacturing began production on Jobs 51 and 52, and completed Jobs 50 and 51. Jobs 49 and 50 were also sold on account during the month for $122,000 and $158,000, respectively. The following additional events occurred during the month.
Purchased additional raw materials of $90,000 on account.
Incurred factory labor costs of $65,000. Of this amount $16,000 related to employer payroll taxes.
Incurred manufacturing overhead costs as follows: indirect materials $17,000; indirect labor $15,000; depreciation expense $19,000, and various other manufacturing overhead costs on account $20,000.
Assigned direct materials and direct labor to jobs as follows.
|
Job No.
|
Direct Materials
|
Direct Labor
|
|
50
|
10,000
|
5,000
|
|
51
|
39,000
|
25,000
|
|
52
|
30,000
|
20,000
|
Instructions:
a. Calculate the predetermined overhead rate for 2012, assuming Garcia Manufacturing estimates total manufacturing overhead costs of $1,050,000, direct labor costs of $700,000, and direct labor hours of 20,000 for the year.
b. Prepare the journal entries to record the purchase of raw materials, the factory labor costs incurred, and the manufacturing overhead costs incurred during the month of January.
c. Prepare the journal entries to record the assignment of direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead costs to production. In assigning manufacturing overhead costs, use the overhead rate calculated in the first part of the question.
d. Open job cost sheets for Jobs 50, 51, and 52. Enter the January 1 balances on the job cost sheet for Job No. 50. Post all costs to the job cost sheets as necessary. Total the job cost sheets for any job(s) completed during the month. Prepare the journal entry (or entries) to record the completion of any job(s) during the month.
e. Prepare the journal entry (or entries) to record the sale of any job(s) during the month.
f. What is the balance in the Finished Goods Inventory account at the end of the month?
g. What does this balance consist of?
h. What is the amount of over- or underapplied overhead?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Farm Labs, Inc. provides mad cow disease testing for both state and federal governmental agricultural agencies. Because the company’s customers are governmental agencies, prices are strictly regulated. Therefore, Farm Labs must constantly monitor and control its testing costs. Shown below are the standard costs for a typical test.
Direct materials (2 test tubes @ 1.50 per tube) 3.00
Direct labor (1 hour @ 25.00 per hour) 25.00
Variable overhead (1 hour @ 5.00 per hour) 5.00
Fixed overhead (1 hour @ 10.00 per hour) 10.00
Total standard cost per test 43.00
The lab does not maintain an inventory of test tubes. Therefore, the tubes purchased each
month are used that month. Actual activity for the month of November 2010, when 1,500
tests were conducted, resulted in the following:
Direct materials (3,050 test tubes) 4,270
Direct labor (1,600 hours) 36,800
Variable overhead 7,400
Fixed overhead 14,000
Monthly budgeted fixed overhead is $14,000. Revenues for the month were $75,000, and
selling and administrative expenses were $4,000.
Compute the overhead controllable variance and the overhead volume variance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cash payback period, net present value method and analysis
At Home Publications Inc. is considering two new magazine products. The estimated net cash flows from each product are as follows:
|
Year
|
Home &Garden
|
Music Beat
|
|
1
|
150,000
|
125,000
|
|
2
|
120,000
|
145,000
|
|
3
|
105,000
|
100,000
|
|
4
|
84,000
|
70,000
|
|
5
|
41,000
|
60,000
|
|
Total
|
$500,000
|
$500,000
|
Each product requires an investment of $270,000.A rate of 10% has been selected for the net present value analysis.
Instructions:
1. Compute the following for each product:
a. Cash payback period.
b. The net present value. Use the present value of $1 table appearing in this chapter.
2. Prepare a brief report advising management on the relative merits of each of the two products.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The management of Quest Media Inc. is considering two capital investment projects. The estimated net cash flows from each project are as follows:
|
Year
|
Radio Station
|
TV Station
|
|
1
|
350,000
|
700,000
|
|
2
|
350,000
|
700,000
|
|
3
|
350,000
|
700,000
|
|
4
|
350,000
|
700,000
|
The radio station requires an investment of $999,250,while the TV station requires an investment of $2,125,900.No residual value is expected from either project.
Instructions
1. Compute the following for each project:
a. The net present value. Use a rate of 10% and the present value of an annuity of $1 table appearing in this chapter.
b. A present value index. Round to two decimal places.
2. Determine the internal rate of return for each project by (a) computing a present value factor for an annuity of $1 and (b) using the present value of an annuity of $1 table appearing in this chapter.
3. What advantage does the internal rate of return method have over the net present value method in comparing projects?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ABC, Inc. purchased new machinery in order to improve its production process.
Classify each of the following expenditures incurred last year as a capital expenditure (CE) or an immediate expense (IE) :
a. $42,000 purchase price
b. $2,520 sales tax paid on the purchase price
c. $4,000 transportation costs
d. $1,850 installation
e. $385 training of personnel for initial operation of the machinery
f. $6,855 wages paid to employees that operate the machinery during production
g. $280 periodic lubrication after the machinery is placed in service.
h. $150 ordinary repairs to maintain the machinery in working order Give the value of the new machine, and list the financial statement in which it will be shown at fiscal year
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The comparative balance sheet of Stuart Company appears below:
a. Using horizontal analysis, show the percentage change for each balance sheet item using 2006 as a base year. (please show this in columnar form by item.)
b. Using vertical analysis, prepare a common size comparative balance sheet. (please show this in columnar form by item. You may add two more appropriately labeled columns for this information. In other words, column 1 should list each item; column two – show the horizontal analysis (change percentage); columns three and four – show the vertical analysis for each year.) (note that is it not necessary to list the dollar values for each item in your answer.)
c. Comments on any significant changes observed from your analysis.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
7-B1 Prepare A Master Budget
Wallaby Kite Company, a small Melbourne firm that sells kites on the web, wants a master budget for the 3 months beginning January 1, 2013. It desires an ending minimum cash balance of $20,000 each month. Sales are forecasted at an average wholesale selling price of $8 per kite. Merchandise costs average $4 per kite. All sales are on credit, payable within 30 days, but experience has shown that 60% of current sales are collected in the current month, 30% in the next month , and 10% in the month thereafter. Bad debts are negligible.
In January, Wallaby kite is beginning just-in-time (JIT) deliveries from suppliers, which means that purchases will equal expected sales. On January 1, purchases will cease until inventory decreases to $24,000, after which time purchases will equal sales. Purchases during any given month are paid in full during the following month.
|
Monthly operating expenses are as follows:
|
|
Wages and salaries
|
60,000
|
|
Insurance expired
|
500
|
|
Depreciation
|
1,000
|
|
Miscellaneous
|
10,000
|
|
Rent
|
$1,000/month + 10% of quarterly sales over $40,000
|
Cash dividends of $6,000 are to be paid quarterly, beginning January 15, and are declared on the fifteenth of the previous month. All operating expenses are paid incurred, except insurance, depreciation, and rent. Rent of $1,000 is paid at the beginning of each month, and the additional 10% of sales is settled quarterly on the tenth of the month following the end of the quarter. The next rent settlement date is January 10.
The company plans to buy some new fixtures for $12,000 cash in March.
Money can be borrowed and repaid in multiples of $2,000. Management wants to minimize borrowed and repay rapidly. Simple interest of 10% per annum is computed monthly but paid when the principal is repaid. Assume that borrowing occurs at the beginning, and repayments at the end of the months in question.
Compute interest to the nearest dollar.
|
Assets as of December 31, 2012
|
|
Cash
|
20,000
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
50,000
|
|
Inventory*
|
156,200
|
|
Unexpired Insurance
|
6,000
|
|
Fixed assets, net
|
50,000
|
|
Total
|
282,200
|
|
Liabilities and Equities as of December 31,2012
|
|
Accounts payable (Merchandise)
|
142,200
|
|
Dividends payable
|
6,000
|
|
Rent payable
|
31,200
|
|
Owners equity
|
102,800
|
|
Total
|
282,200
|
|
Recent and forecasted sales:
|
|
October
|
152,000
|
|
November
|
100,000
|
|
December
|
100,000
|
|
January
|
248,000
|
|
February
|
280,000
|
|
March
|
152,000
|
|
April
|
180,000
|
Requirement:
a. Prepare a master budget including a budgeted income statement, balance sheet, cash budget and schedules for the months of January to March 2013.
b. Explain why there is a need for a bank loan and what operating sources provide the cash for the repayment of the bank loan.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On June 10, Meredith Company purchased $8,000 of merchandise from Leinert Company FOB shipping point, terms 2/10, n/30. Meredith pays the freight costs of $400 on June 11. Damaged goods totaling $300 are returned to Leinert for credit on June 12. The scrap value of these goods is $150. On June 19, Meredith pays Leinert Company in full, less the purchase discount. Both companies use a perpetual inventory system. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)
Instructions
(a)Prepare separate entries for each transaction on the books of Meredith Company.
(b)Prepare separate entries for each transaction for Leinert Company. The merchandise purchased by Meredith on June 10 had cost Leinert $5,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sheryl Crow Equipment Company sold 500 Rollomatics during 2007 at $6,000 each. During 2007, Crow spent $20,000 servicing the 2-year warranties that accompany the Rollomatic. All applicable transactions are on a cash basis.
Instructions
(a) Prepare 2007 entries for Crow using the expense warranty approach. Assume that Crow estimates the total cost of servicing the warranties will be $120,000 for 2 years.
(b) Prepare 2007 entries for Crow assuming that the warranties are not an integral part of the sale. Assume that of the sales total, $150,000 relates to sales of warranty contracts.
Crow estimates the total cost of servicing the warranties will be $120,000 for 2 years.
Estimate revenues earned on the basis of costs incurred and estimated costs.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computation of Basic and Diluted EPS
The information below pertains to Barkley Company for 2010.
Net income for the year 1,200,000 8% convertible bonds issued at par ($1,000 per bond). Each bond is convertible into 30 shares of common stock. 2,000,000 6% convertible, cumulative preferred stock, $100 par value, each share is convertible into 3 shares of common stock. 4,000,000
Common stock, $10 par value 6,000,000
Tax rate for 2010 40%
Average market price of common stock $25 per share
There were no changes during 2010 in the number of common shares, preferred shares, or convertible bonds outstanding. There is no treasury stock. The company also has common stock options (granted in a prior year) to purchase 75,000 shares of common stock at $20 per share.
Instructions:
a. Compute basic earnings per share for 2010.
b. Compute diluted earnings per share for 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Santana Rey is considering the purchase of equipment for Business Solutions that would allow the company to add a new product to its computer furniture line. The equipment is expected to cost $300,000 and to have a six-year life and no salvage value. It will be depreciated on a straight-line basis. Business Solutions expects to sell 100 units of the equipment’s product each year. The expected annual income related to this equipment follows.
|
Sales
|
375,000
|
|
Costs
|
|
|
Materials, labor and overhead (except depreciation)
|
200,000
|
|
Depreciation on new equipment
|
50,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
37,500
|
|
Total costs and expenses
|
287,500
|
|
Pretax income
|
87,500
|
|
Income taxes (30%)
|
26,250
|
|
Net income
|
61,250
|
Required:
Compute the (1) payback period and (2) accounting rate of return for this equipment (Record answers as percents, rounded to one decimal).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Business Solutions’ second quarter 2012 fixed budget performance report for its computer furniture operations follows. The $156,000 budgeted expenses include $108,000 in variable expenses for desks and $18,000 in variable expenses for chairs, as well as $30,000 fixed expenses. The actual expenses include $31,000 fixed expenses.
| |
Fixed Budget
|
Actual Results
|
|
Desk sales (in units)
|
144
|
150
|
|
Chair sales (in units)
|
72
|
80
|
|
Desk sales (in dollars)
|
180,000
|
186,000
|
|
Chair sales (in dollars)
|
36,000
|
41,200
|
|
Total expenses
|
156,000
|
163,880
|
|
Income from operations
|
60,000
|
63,320
|
Prepare flexible budget performance report that shows any variances between budgeted results and actual results. List fixed and variable expenses separately.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Adriana Lopez expects second quarter 2010 sales of her new line of computer furniture to be the same as the first quarter’s sales (reported below) without any changes in strategy.
Monthly sales averaged 40 desk units (sales price of $1,250) and 20 chairs (sales price of $500).
SUCCESS SYSTEMS
Segment Income Statement*
|
For Quarter Ended March 31, 2010
|
|
Sales†
|
180,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold‡
|
115,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
65,000
|
|
Expenses
|
|
|
Sales commissions (10%)
|
18,000
|
|
Advertising expenses
|
9,000
|
|
Other fixed expenses
|
18,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
45,000
|
|
Net income
|
$20,000
|
* Reflects revenue and expense activity only related to the computer furniture segment.
† Revenue (120 desks x $1,250) + (60 chairs x $500) = $150,000 + $30,000 = $180,000 ‡ Cost of goods sold: (120 desks x $750) + (60 chairs x $250) + $10,000 = $115,000 Lopez believes that sales will increase each month for the next three months (April, 48 desks, 32 chairs; May, 52 desks, 35 chairs; June, 56 desks, 38 chairs) if selling prices are reduced to $1,150 for desks and $450 for chairs, and advertising expenses are increased by 10% and remain at that level for all three months. The products’ variable cost will remain at $750 for desks and $250 for chairs. The sales staff will continue to earn a 10% commission, the fixed manufacturing costs per month will remain at $10,000 and other fixed expenses will remain at $6,000 per month.
Required
1. Prepare budgeted income statements for each of the months of April, May, and June that show the expected results from implementing the proposed changes. Use a three-column format, with one column for each month.
2. Use the budgeted income statements from part 1 to recommend whether Lopez should implement the proposed changes. Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
After reading an article about activity-based costing in a trade journal for the furniture industry, Santana Rey wondered if it was time to critically analyze the overhead costs at Business Solutions. In a recent month, Rey found that setup costs, inspection costs, and utility costs made up most of its overhead. Additional information about overhead follows.
|
Activity
|
Cost
|
Driver
|
|
Setting up machines
|
2,000
|
25 batches
|
|
Inspecting components
|
7,500
|
5,000 parts
|
|
Providing utilities
|
10,000
|
5,000 machine hours
|
Overhead has been applied to output at a rate of 50% of direct labor costs. The following data pertain to Job 6.15.
Direct materials 2,500 Number of parts
Direct labor 3,500 Machine hours
Batches 2 batches
Required:
1. What is the total cost of Job 6.15 if Business Solutions applies overhead at 50% of direct labor cost? 2. What is the total cost of Job 6.15 if Business Solutions uses activity-based costing?
3. Which approach to assigning overhead gives a better representation of the costs incurred to produce Job 6.15? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Santana Rey expected sales of her line of computer workstation furniture to equal 300 workstations (at a sales price of $3,000) for 2012. The workstations’ manufacturing costs include the following.
|
Direct materials
|
$800 per unit
|
|
Direct labor
|
$400 per unit
|
|
Variable overhead
|
$100 per unit
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
$24,000 per year
|
The selling expenses related to these workstations follow.
Variable selling expenses $50 per unit
Fixed selling expenses $4,000 per year
Santana is considering how many workstations to produce in 2012. She is confident that she will be able to sell any workstations in her 2012 ending inventory during 2013. However, Santana does not want to overproduce as she does not have sufficient storage space for many more workstations.
Required:
1. Compute Business Solutions’ absorption costing income assuming.
a. 300 workstations are produced.
b. 320 workstations are produced.
2. Compute Business Solutions’ variable costing income assuming.
a. 300 workstations are produced.
b. 320 workstations are produced.
3. Explain to Santana any differences in the income figures determined in parts 1 and 2.
How should Adriana use the information from parts 1 and 2 to help make production decisions?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
uncovertible preferred stock; treasury shares; shares sold; stock dividend; options; convertible bonds; contingently issuable shares On December 31, 2010, Dow Steel Corporation had 800,000 shares of common stock and 300,000 shares of 8%, noncumulative, nonconvertible preferred stock issued and outstanding. Dow issued a 5% common stock dividend on May 15 and paid cash dividends of $400,000 and $75,000 to common and preferred shareholders, respectively, on
December 15, 2011.
On February 28, 2011, Dow sold 80,000 common shares. Also, as a part of a 2010 agreement for the acquisition of Merrill Cable Company, another 23,000 shares (already adjusted for the stock dividend) are to be issued to former Merrill shareholders on December 31, 2012, if Merrill’s 2012 net income is at least $500,000. In 2011, Merrill’s net income was $630,000.
In keeping with its long-term share repurchase plan, 2,000 shares were retired on July 1. Dow’s net income for the year ended December 31, 2011, was $1,500,000. The income tax rate is 40%.
As part of an incentive compensation plan, Dow granted incentive stock options to division managers at December 31 of the current and each of the previous two years. Each option permits its holder to buy one share of common stock at an exercise price equal to market value at the date of grant and can be exercised one year from that date. Information concerning the number of options granted and common share prices follows:
Date Granted Options Granted Share Price
(adjusted for the stock dividend)
December 31, 2009 5,000 $ 33
December 31, 2010 10,000 $ 24
December 31, 2011 8,500 $ 31
The market price of the common stock averaged $32 per share during 2011.
On July 12, 2009, Dow issued $600,000 of convertible 10% bonds at face value. Each $1,000 bond is convertible into 30 common shares (adjusted for the stock dividend).
Required:
Compute Dow’s basic and diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2011. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions that affect earnings do not necessarily affect cash.
Identify the effect, if any, that each of the following transactions would have upon cash and net income. The first transaction has been completed as an example. (If an amount has a decreasing effect use either a negative sign preceding the number, e.g. -45 or parenthesis, e.g. (45). Do not use a dollar sign $ for negative answers.)
Purchased $100 of supplies for cash.
Recorded an adjusting entry to record use of $40 of the above supplies.
Made sales of $1,300 all on account.
Received $800 from customers in payment of their accounts.
Purchased capital asset for cash, $2,500.
Recorded depreciation of building for period used, $600.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Second Year of Depreciation Difference, Two Differences, Single Rate, Extraordinary Item)
The following information has been obtained for the Gocker Corporation.
1. Prior to 2010, taxable income and pretax financial income were identical.
2. Pretax financial income is $1,700,000 in 2010 and $1,400,000 in 2011.
3. On January 1, 2010, equipment costing $1,200,000 is purchased. It is to be depreciated on a straight-line basis over 5 years for tax purposes and over 8 years for financial reporting purposes. (Hint: Use the half-year convention for tax purposes, as discussed in Appendix 11A.)
4. Interest of $60,000 was earned on tax-exempt municipal obligations in 2011.
5. Included in 2011 pretax financial income is an extraordinary gain of $200,000, which is fully taxable.
6. The tax rate is 35% for all periods.
7. Taxable income is expected in all future years.
Instructions:
a. Compute taxable income and income tax payable for 2011.
b. Prepare the journal entry to record 2011 income tax expense, income tax payable, and deferred taxes.
c. Prepare the bottom portion of Gocker’s 2011 income statement, beginning with “Income before income taxes”.
d. Indicate how deferred income taxes should be presented on the December 31, 2011, statement of financial position.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Basic EPS: Two-Year Presentation)
Melton Corporation is preparing the comparative financial statements for the annual report to its shareholders for fiscal years ended May 31, 2010, and May 31, 2011.
The income from operations for each year was $1,800,000 and $2,500,000, respectively. In both years, the company incurred a 10% interest expense on $2,400,000 of debt, an obligation that requires interest-only payments for 5 years.
The company experienced a loss of $600,000 from a fire in its Scotsland facility in February 2011, which was determined to be an extraordinary loss. The company uses a 40% effective tax rate for income taxes.
The capital structure of Melton Corporation on June 1, 2009, consisted of 1 million shares of common stock outstanding and 20,000 shares of $50 par value, 6%, cumulative preferred stock. There were no preferred dividends in arrears, and the company had not issued any convertible securities, options, or warrants.
On October 1, 2009, Melton sold an additional 500,000 shares of the common stock at $20 per share. Melton distributed a 20% stock dividend on the common shares outstanding on January 1, 2010. On December 1, 2010, Melton was able to sell an additional 800,000 shares of the common stock at $22 per share. These were the only common stock transactions that occurred during the two fiscal years.
Instructions
a. Identify whether the capital structure at Melton Corporation is a simple or complex capital structure, and explain why.
b. Determine the weighted-average number of shares that Melton Corporation would use in calculating earnings per share for the fiscal year ended
a. May 31, 2010.
b. May 31, 2011.
c. Prepare, in good form, a comparative income statement, beginning with income from operations, for Melton Corporation for the fiscal years ended May 31, 2010, and May 31, 2011. This statement will be included in Melton’s annual report and should display the appropriate earnings per share presentations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Future and Present Value Problems)
Presented below are three unrelated situations.
a. Ron Stein Company recently signed a lease for a new office building, for a lease period of 12 years. Under the lease agreement, a security deposit of $12,820 is made, with the deposit to be returned at the expiration of the lease, with interest compounded at 10% per year. What amount will the company receive at the time the lease expires? (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $458,581.)
b. Kate Greenway Corporation, having recently issued a $20,137,000, 15-year bond issue, is committed to make annual sinking fund deposits of $615,400. The deposits are made on the last day of each year and yield a return of 10%. Will the fund at the end of 15 years be sufficient to retire the bonds?
If not, what will the deficiency be? (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $458,581.)
c. Under the terms of his salary agreement, president Juan Rivera has an option of receiving either an immediate bonus of $52,000, or a deferred bonus of $97,500 payable in 10 years. Ignoring tax considerations, and assuming a relevant interest rate of 8%, which form of settlement should Rivera accept?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hardy Fiber, Company is the creator of Y-Go, a technology that weaves silver into its fabrics to kill bacteria and odor on clothing while managing heat. Y-Go has become very popular as an undergarment for sports activities. Operating at capacity, the company can produce 1,000,000 undergarments of Y-Go a year. The per unit and the total costs for an individual garment when the company operates at full capacity are as follows.
| |
Per Garment
|
Total
|
|
Direct materials
|
2.0
|
2000000
|
|
Direct labor
|
0.50
|
500,000
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
1.00
|
1,000,000
|
|
Fixed manufacturing overhead
|
1.50
|
1,500,000
|
|
Variable selling expenses
|
0.25
|
250,000
|
|
Total
|
$5.25
|
$5,250,000
|
The U.S. Army has approached Hardy Fiber and expressed an interest in purchasing 200,000 Y-Go undergarments for soldiers in extremely warm climates. The Army would pay the unit cost for direct materials, direct labor, and variable manufacturing overhead costs. In addition, the Army has agreed to pay an additional $1 per undergarment to cover all other costs and provide a profit.
Presently, Hardy Fiber is operating at 70 percent capacity and does not have any other potential buyers for Y-Go. If Hardy Fiber accepts the Army’s offer, it will not incur any variable selling expenses related to this order.
Using incremental analysis, determine whether Hardy Fiber should accept the Army’s offer.
(If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank. If amount decreases the income, use either a negative sign preceding the number eg -45 or parentheses eg (45).)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P 9-7 Net Present Value, Internal Rate of Return, Payback, Accounting Rate of Return, and Taxes
Adrian Sonnetson, the owner of Adrian Motors, is considering the addition of a paint and body shop to his automobile dealership. Construction of a building and the purchase of necessary equipment is estimated to cost $800,000, and both the building and equipment will be depreciated over 10 years using the straight-line method. The building and equipment have zero estimated residual value at the end of 10 years. Sonnetson’s required rate of return for this project is 12 percent.
Net income related to each year of the investment is as follows:
|
Revenue
|
500,000
|
|
Less:
|
|
|
Material cost
|
70,000
|
|
Labor
|
150,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
80,000
|
|
Other
|
10,000
|
|
Income before taxes
|
190,000
|
|
Taxes at 40%
|
76,000
|
|
Net income
|
114,000
|
Required:
a. Determine the net present value of the investment in the paint and body shop. Should Sonnetson invest in the paint and body shop?
b. Calculate the internal rate of return of the investment (approximate).
c. Calculate the payback period of the investment.
d. Calculate the accounting rate of return.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-12. Comprehensive Capital Budgeting Problem
Van Doren Corporation is considering producing a new product, Autodial.Marketing data indicate that the company will be able to sell 45,000 units per year at $30. The product will be produced in a section of an existing factory that is currently not in use. To produce Autodial, Van Doren must buy a machine that costs $500,000. The machine has an expected life of five years and will have an ending residual value of $15,000. Van Doren will depreciate the machine over five years using the straight-line method for both tax and financial reporting purposes. In addition to the cost of the machine, the company will incur incremental manufacturing costs of $370,000 for component parts, $425,000 for direct labor, and $200,000 of miscellaneous costs. Also, the company plans to spend $150,000 annually to advertise Autodial. Van Doren has a tax rate of 40 percent, and the company’s required rate of return is 12 percent.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BYP2-2 Managerial Analysis
In the course of routine checking of all journal entries prior to preparing year-end reports, Diane Riser discovered several strange entries. She recalled that the president’s son Ron had come in to help out during an especially busy time and that he had recorded some journal entries. She was relieved that there were only a few of his entries, and even more relieved that he had included rather lengthy explanations. The entries Ron made were:
|
1. Work in Process Inventory
|
25,000
|
|
Cash
|
25,000
|
(This is for materials put into process. I don’t find the record that we paid for these, so I’m crediting Cash, because I know we’ll have to pay for them sooner or later.)
.
|
2. Manufacturing Overhead
|
12,000
|
|
Cash
|
12,000
|
(This is for bonuses paid to salespeople. I know they’re part of overhead, and I can’t find an account called “Non-factory Overhead” or “Other Overhead” so I’m putting it in Manufacturing Overhead. I have the check stubs, so I know we paid
|
3. Wages Expense
|
120,000
|
|
Cash
|
120,000
|
(This is for the factory workers’ wages. I have a note that payroll taxes are $15,000. I still think that’s part of wages expense, and that we’ll have to pay it all in cash sooner or later, so I credited Cash for the wages and the taxes.)
|
4. Work in Process Inventory
|
3,000
|
|
Raw Materials Inventory
|
3,000
|
Instructions
a. How should Ron have recorded each of the four events?
b. If the entry was not corrected, which financial statements (income statement or balance sheet) would be affected? What balances would be overstated or understated?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E22-2 (a)
The controller of Dugan Industries has collected the following monthly expense data for use in analyzing the cost behavior of maintenance costs.
|
Month
|
Total
|
Maintenance
|
Costs
|
Total Machine Hours
|
|
January
|
|
2,400
|
300
|
|
|
February
|
|
3,000
|
400
|
|
|
March
|
3,600
|
600
|
|
|
|
April
|
4,500
|
790
|
|
|
|
May
|
3,200
|
500
|
|
|
|
June
|
4,900
|
800
|
|
|
Instructions
a. Determine the fixed and variable cost components using the high-low method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Sparkly Corporation has the following budget and actual results.
|
Budgeted data:
|
|
Unit sales
|
$30,000.00
|
|
Unit production
|
$30,000.00
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
|
Supervision
|
54,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
60,000
|
|
Rent
|
30,000
|
|
Variable costs per unit
|
|
Direct materials
|
18
|
|
Direct labor
|
25
|
|
Supplies
|
0.25
|
|
Indirect labor
|
1.2
|
|
Electricity
|
0.15
|
|
Actual results:
|
|
Unit sales
|
33,000
|
|
Unit production
|
36,000
|
|
Fixed overhead
|
53,550
|
|
Supervision
|
60,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
30,000
|
|
Variable costs
|
|
Direct materials
|
642,000
|
|
Direct labor
|
960,000
|
|
Supplies
|
7,500
|
|
Indirect labor
|
30,000
|
|
Electricity
|
4,500
|
Required:
a. Prepare a performance report for all costs, showing static budget variances (indicate F or U).
b. Prepare a performance report for all costs, showing flexible budget variances (indicate F or U).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Phillips Company Purchased a 90% interest in Standards Corporation for $2,340,000 on January 1, 2010. Standards Corporation had $1,650,000 of common stock and $1,050,000 of retained earnings on that date. The following values were determined for Standards Corporation on the date of purchase:
| |
Book Value
|
Fair Value
|
Difference
|
|
Inventory
|
240,000
|
300,000
|
60,000
|
|
Land
|
2,400,000
|
2,700,000
|
300,000
|
|
Equipment
|
1,620,000
|
1,800,000
|
180,000
|
Required
A. Prepare a computation and allocation schedule for the difference between the implied and
book value in the consolidated statements work paper.
B. Prepare the January 1, 2010 work paper entries to eliminate the investment account and allocate the difference between implied and book value.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-25 Dollar-Value LIFO
Presented below is information related to Martin Company.
|
Date
|
Ending Inventory (End-of-Year Prices)
|
Price Index
|
|
31-Dec-09
|
80,000
|
100
|
|
31-Dec-10
|
111,300
|
105
|
|
31-Dec-11
|
108,000
|
120
|
|
31-Dec-12
|
122,200
|
130
|
|
31-Dec-13
|
147,000
|
140
|
|
31-Dec-14
|
176,900
|
$145
|
Instructions
Compute the ending inventory for Martin Company for 2009 through 2014 using the dollar-value LIFO method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E11-4 (Depreciation Computations-Five Methods)
Wenner Furnace Corp. purchased machinery for $633,330 on May 1, 2012. It is estimated that it will have a useful life of 10 years, salvage value of $34,050, production of 544,800 units, and working hours of 25,000. During 2013, Wenner Corp. uses the machinery for 2,650 hours, and the machinery produces 57,885 units.
From the information given, compute the depreciation charge for 2013 under each of the following methods. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $45,892)
a. Straight-line.
b. Units-of-output. (Round depreciation cost per unit to 2 decimal places, i.e. 12.25 and and final answer to 0 decimal places, i.e. 25,240.)
c. Working hours.
d. Sum-of-the-years’-digits.
e. Declining-balance (use 20% as the annual rate).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P11-6 (Depletion, Timber, and Extraordinary Loss)
Conan O’Brien Logging and Lumber Company owns 3,200 acres of timberland on the north side of Mount Leno, which was purchased in 2000 at a cost of $600 per acre. In 2012, O’Brien began selectively logging this timber tract. In May of 2012, Mount Leno erupted, burying the timberland of O’Brien under a foot of ash. All of the timber on the O’Brien tract was downed. In addition, the logging roads, built at a cost of $160,000, were destroyed, as well as the logging equipment, with a net book value of $349,200.
At the time of the eruption, O’Brien had logged 20% of the estimated 530,000 board feet of timber. Prior to the eruption, O’Brien estimated the land to have a value of $310 per acre after the timber was harvested. O’Brien includes the logging roads in the depletion base.
O’Brien estimates it will take 3 years to salvage the downed timber at a cost of $712,000. The timber can be sold for pulp wood at an estimated price of $2 per board foot. The value of the land is unknown, but must be considered nominal due to future uncertainties.
a. Determine the depletion cost per board foot for the timber harvested prior to the eruption of Mount Leno. (Round answer to 2 decimal places.)
b. Prepare the journal entry to record the depletion prior to the eruption. (Round
per unit answer to 2 decimal places,e.g. 0.45 for computation purposes and final answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. $45,892. If no entry is required, select “No entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually)
c. If this tract represents approximately half of the timber holdings of O’Brien, determine the amount of the extraordinary loss due to the eruption of Mount Leno for the year ended December 31, 2012. (Do not round intermediate computations and round your answer to 0 decimal places, i.e. 25,250.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E12-16 (Accounting for R & D Costs)
Margaret Avery Company from time to time embarks on a research program when a special project seems to offer possibilities. In 2011, the company expends $341,880 on a research project, but by the end of 2011 it is impossible to determine whether any benefit will be derived from it.
a. The project is completed in 2010, and a successful patent is obtained. The R & D costs to complete the project are $131,580. The administrative and legal expenses incurred in obtaining patent number 472-1001-84 in 2012 total $22,900.
The patent has an expected useful life of 5 years. Record these costs in journal entry form. Also, record patent amortization (full year) in 2012.
b. In 2013, the company successfully defends the patent in extended litigation at a cost of $55,120, thereby extending the patent life to December 31, 2020. What is the proper way to account for this cost? Also, record patent amortization (full year) in 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P12-1 (Correct Intangible Asset Account)
Reichenbach Co., organized in 2011, has set up a single account for all intangible assets. The following summary discloses the debit entries that have been recorded during 2012 and 2013.
|
|
Intangible Assets
|
|
|
01-Jul-12
|
8-year franchise; expiration date 6/30/19
|
51,840
|
|
01-Oct-12
|
Advance payment on laboratory space (2-year lease)
|
$26,080
|
|
31-Dec-12
|
Net loss for 2011 including state incorporation fee,
|
1,960,
|
|
|
and related legal fees of organizing, $4,620 (all fees
incurred in 2011)
|
16,030
|
|
02-Jan-13
|
Patent purchased (10-year life)
|
84,280
|
|
01-Mar-13
|
Cost of developing a secret formula (indefinite life)
|
79,370
|
|
01-Apr-13
|
Goodwill purchased (indefinite life)
|
275,060
|
|
01-Jun-13
|
Legal fee for successful defense of patent
|
22,885
|
|
01-Sep-13
|
Research and development costs
|
153,900
|
Prepare the necessary entries to clear the Intangible Assets account and to set up separate accounts for distinct types of intangibles. Make the entries as of December 31, 2013, recording any necessary amortization and reflecting all balances accurately as of that date. (Ignore income tax effects.) (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Evergreen Company sells lawn and garden products to wholesalers. The company’s fiscal year-end is Dec. 31. During 2006, the following transactions related to receivables occurred:
Feb.28 Sold merchandise to Lennox, Inc. for $10,000 and accepted a 10%, 7-month note. 10% is an appropriate rate for this type of note.
Mar. 31 Sold merchandise to Maddox Co. and accepted a noninterest-bearing note with a discount rate of 10%. The $8,000 payment is due on March 31, 2007.
Apr. 3 Sold merchandise to Carr Co. for $7,000 with terms 2/10, n/30. Evergreen uses the gross method to account for cash discounts.
Apr 11 Collected the entire amount due from Carr Co.
Apr 17 A customer returned merchandise costing $3,200. Evergreen reduced the customer’s receivable balance by $5,000, the sales price of the merchandise. Sales returns are recorded by the company as thet occur.
Apr 30 Transferred receivables of $50,000 to a factor without recourse. The factor changed Evergreen a 1% finance charge on the receivables transferred. The sale criteria are met.
Jun 30 Discounted the Lennox, Inc. note at the bank. The bank’s discount rate is 12%. The note was discounted without recourse.
Aug 31 Lennox, Inc. paid the note amount plus interest to the bank.
Required:
1. Prepare the necessary journal entries for Evergreen for the cash of the above dates. For all transactions involving the sale of merchandise, ignore the entry for the cost of goods sold (round all calculations to the nearest dollar).
2. Prepare any necessary adjusting entries at Dec. 31, 2006. Adjusting entries are only recorded at year-end (round all calculations to the nearest dollar).
3. Prepare a schedule showing the effect of the journal entries in requirements 1 and 2 on 2006 income before taxes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Disclosure Required in Various Situations)
Ace Inc. produces electronic components for sale to manufacture of radios, television sets, and digital sound systems. In connection with her examination of Ace’s financial statement fo the year ended December 31, 2013, Gloria Rodd, CPA, completed field work 2 weeks ago. Ms Rodd now is evaluating the significance of the following items prior to preparing her auditor’s report. Except as noted, none of these items have been disclosed in the financial statements or notes.
Item 1
A 10-year loan agreement, which the company entered into 3 years ago, provides that dividend payments may not exceed net income earned after taxes subsequent to the date of the agreement. The balance of retained earnings at the date of the loan agreement was $420,000. From that date through December 31, 2013, net income after taxes has totaled $570,000 and cash dividends have totaled $320,000.
On the basis of these data, the staff auditor assigned to this review concluded that there was no retained earnings restriction at December 31, 2013.
Item 2
Recently Ace interrupted its policy of paying cash dividends quarterly to its stockholders. Dividends were paid regularly through 2012, discontinued for all of 2013 to finance purchase of equipment for the company’s new plant, and resumed in the first quarter of 2014. In the annual report, dividend policy is to be discussed in the president’s letter to stockholders.
Item 3
A major electronics firm has introduced a line of products that will compete directly with Ace’s primary line, now being produced in the specially designed new plant.
Because of manufacturing innovations, the competitor’s line will be of comparable quality but priced 50% below Ace’s line. The competitor announced its new line during the week following completion of field work. Ms. Rodd read the announcement in the newspaper and discussed the situation by telephone with Ace executives. Ace will meet the lower prices that are high enough to cover variable manufacturing and selling expenses but will permit recovery of only a portion of fixed costs.
Item 4
The company’s new manufacturing plant building, which cost $2,400,000 and has an estimated life of 25 years, is leased from Wichita National Bank at an annual rental of $600,000. The company is obligated to pay property taxes, insurance, and maintenance. At the conclusion of its 10-year noncancellable lease, the company has the option of purchasing the property for $1. In Ace’s income statement the rental payment is reported on a separate line.
Instructions
For each of the items above discuss any additional disclosures in the financial statements and notes that the auditor should recommend to her client. (The cumulative effect of the four items should not be considered.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(SCF – Direct and Indirect Methods from Comparative Financial Statements)
Chapman Company, a major retailer of bicycles and accessories, operates several stores and is a publicly traded company. The comparative balance sheet and income statements for Chapman as of May 31, 2012, are shown on the next page.
The company is preparing its statement of cash flows.
Chapman Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
As of May 31
| |
2012
|
2011
|
|
Current assets
|
|
|
|
Cash
|
28,250
|
20,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
75,000
|
58,000
|
|
Inventory
|
220,000
|
250,000
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
9,000
|
7,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
332,250
|
335,000
|
|
Plant assets
|
|
|
|
Plant assets
|
600,000
|
502,000
|
|
Less: Accumulated depreciation – plant assets
|
150,000
|
125,000
|
|
Net plant assets
|
450,000
|
377,000
|
|
Total Assets
|
$782,250
|
$712,000
|
| |
|
|
|
Current liabilities
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
123,000
|
115,000
|
|
Salaries and wages payable
|
47,250
|
72,000
|
|
Interest payable
|
27,000
|
25,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
197,250
|
212,000
|
|
Long-term debt
|
|
|
|
Bonds payable
|
70,000
|
100,000
|
|
Total Liabilities
|
$267,250
|
$312,000
|
|
Stockholders’Equity
|
|
|
Common Stock, $10 par
|
370,000
|
280,000
|
|
Retained Earnings
|
145,000
|
120,000
|
|
Total Stockholders’Equity
|
515,000
|
400,000
|
|
Total Liabilities & Stockholders’Equity
|
$782,250
|
$712,000
|
Chapman Company
Income Statement
For the Year Ended May 31, 2012
|
Sales
|
1,255,250
|
|
Cost of Goods Sold
|
722,000
|
|
Gross Profit
|
533,250
|
|
Expenses:
|
|
|
Salaries and Wages Expense
|
252,100
|
|
Interest Expense
|
75,000
|
|
Depreciation Expense
|
25,000
|
|
Other Expenses
|
8,150
|
|
Total Expenses
|
360,250
|
|
Operating Income
|
173,000
|
|
Income Tax Expense
|
43,000
|
|
Net Income
|
$130,000
|
The following is additional information concerning Chapman’s transaction during the year ended May 31, 2012.
1. All sales during the year were made on account.
2. All merchandise was purchased on account, comprising the total accounts payable account.
3. Plant assets costing $98,000 were purchased by paying $28,000 in cash and issuing 7,000 shares of stock.
4. The “other expenses” are related to prepaid items.
5. All income taxes incurred during the year were paid during the year.
6. In order to supplement its cash, Chapman issued 2,000 shares of common stock at par value.
7. Cash dividends of $105,000 were declared and paid at the end of the fiscal year.
Instruction:
a. Compare and contrast the direct method and the indirect method for reporting cash flows from operating activities.
b. Prepare a statement of cash flows for Chapman Company for the year ended May 31, 2012, using the direct method. Be sure to support the statement with appropriate calculations. (A reconciliation of net income to net cash provided is not required.)
c. Using the indirect method, calculate only the net cash flow from operating activities from Chapman Company for the year ended May 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Present below are two independent situations.
Situation A:
Chenowith Co. reports revenue of $194,340 and operating expenses of $112,340 in its first year of operations, 2012. Accounts receivable and accounts payable at year-end were $78,680 and $40,480, respectively. Assume that the accounts payable related to operating expenses. Ignore income taxes.
Instructions:
Using the direct method, compute net cash provided (used) by operating activities. (If an amount reduces the account balance then enter with negative sign.)
Situation B:
The income statement for Edgebrook Company shows cost of goods sold $305,400 and operating expenses (exclusive of depreciation) $227,830. The comparative balance sheet for the year shows that inventory increased $21,810, prepaid expenses decreased $7,650, accounts payable (related to merchandise) decreased $15,190, and accrued expenses payable increased $13,590.
Instructions
Compute (a) cash payments to suppliers and (b) cash payments for operating expenses.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Springsteen Co. had the following activity in its most recent years of operations.
Items
a. Pension expense exceeds amount funded.
b. Redemption of bonds payable.
c. Sale of building at book value.
d. Depreciation.
e. Exchange of equipment for furniture.
f. Issuance of capital stock.
g. Amortization of intangible assets.
h. Purchase of treasuryt stock.
i. Issuance of bonds for land.
k. Increase in interest receivable on notes receivable.
l. Purchase of equipment.
Classify the items as (1) operating – add to net income; (2) operating – deduct from net income; (3) investing; (4) financing; or (5) significant noncash investing and financing activities. Use the indirect method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Condensed financial data of Fairchild Company for 2012 and 2011 are presented below.
FAIRCHILD COMPANY
COMPARATIVE BALANCE SHEET
AS OF DECEMBER 31, 2012 AND 2011
| |
2012
|
2011
|
|
Cash
|
1,795
|
1,104
|
|
Receivables
|
1,753
|
1,290
|
|
Inventory
|
1,595
|
1,908
|
|
Plant assets
|
1,906
|
1,695
|
|
Accumulated depreciation
|
(1,203)
|
(1,167)
|
|
Long-term investments (held-to-maturity)
|
1,305
|
1,480
|
| |
$7,151
|
$6,310
|
|
Accounts payable
|
1,215
|
789
|
|
Accrued liabilities
|
213
|
234
|
|
Bonds payable
|
1,414
|
1,636
|
|
Common stock
|
1,905
|
1,693
|
|
Retained earnings
|
2,404
|
1,958
|
| |
$7,151
|
$7,151
|
FAIRCHILD COMPANY
INCOME STATEMENT
FOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2012
|
Sales
|
6,795
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
4,694
|
|
Gross margin
|
2,101
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
939
|
|
Income from operations
|
1,162
|
|
Other revenues and gains
|
|
Gain on sale of investments
|
85
|
|
Income before tax
|
1,247
|
|
Income tax expense
|
531
|
|
Net income
|
$716
|
Additional information:
During the year, $74 of common stock was issued in exchange for plant assets. No plant assets were sold in 2012. Cash dividends were $270.
Instructions:
Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method. (If an amount reduces the account balance then enter negative sign)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accountant of Weatherspoon Shoe Co. has compiled the following information from the company’s records as a basis for an income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012.
|
Rental revenue
|
$30,370
|
|
Interest expense
|
$19,370
|
|
Market appreciation on land above cost
|
$32,370
|
|
Wages and salaries-sales
|
116,170
|
|
Materials and supplies-sales
|
18,970
|
|
Income tax
|
31,970
|
|
Wages and salaries-administrative
|
137,270
|
|
Other administrative expenses
|
53,070
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
517,370
|
|
Net sales
|
981,370
|
|
Depreciation on plant assets (70% selling, 30% administrative)
|
66,370
|
|
Dividends declared
|
17,370
|
|
There were 19,500 shares of common stock outstanding during the year.
|
Instructions:
1. Prepare a single-step income statement. (Round earnings per share to 2 decimal places, e.g. 5.25. For multiple entries list from largest to smallest amounts, e.g. 10, 5, 1. Enter all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.) estimates that it can change its production process, adding $4 million to investment and $500,000 to fixed operating costs. This change will (1) reduce variable costs per unit by $10,000 and (2) increase output by 20 units, but (3) the sales price on all units will have to be lowered to $95,000 to permit sales of the additional output. The firm has tax loss carryforwards that cause its tax rate to be zero, its cost of equity is 16%, and it uses no debt.
a. What is the incremental profit? To get a rough idea of the project’s profitability, what is the project’s expected rate of return for the next year (defined as the incremental profit divided by the investment)? Should the firm make the investment?
b. Would the firm’s break-even point increase or decrease if it made the change?
c. Would the new situation expose the firm to more or less business risk than the old one?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The accounts of Consolidated Can contain the following amounts at December 31, 2008:
|
Cost of products sold
|
410000
|
|
Dividends
|
3000
|
|
Extraordinary gain (net of tax)
|
1,000
|
|
Income taxes
|
9,300
|
|
Interest expense
|
8,700
|
|
Other income
|
1,600
|
|
Retained earnings,
|
270,000
|
|
Sales
|
480,000
|
|
Selling and administrative expense
|
42,000
|
Required:
Prepare a multiple-step income statement combined with a reconciliation of retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 2008.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tiller Company’s beginning inventory and purchases during the fiscal year ended December 31, 20-2, were as follows:
Units Unit Price Total Cost
January 1, 20-2 Beginning inventory 1,500 $10.00 $15,000
January 12 1st purchase 500 11.50 5,750
February 28 2nd purchase 600 14.50 8,700
June 29 3rd purchase 1,200 15.00 18,000
August 31 4th purchase 800 16.50 13,200
October 29 5th purchase 300 18.00 5,400
November 30 6th purchase 700 18.50 12,950
December 21 7th purchase 400 20.00 8,000
6,000 $87,000
There are 1,200 units of inventory on hand on December 31, 20-2.
REQUIRED
1. Calculate the total amount to be assigned to the cost of goods sold for 20-2 and ending
inventory on December 31 under each of the following periodic inventory methods:
(a) FIFO
(b) LIFO
(c) Weighted-average (round calculations to two decimal places)
2. Assume that the market price per unit (cost to replace) of Tiller’s inventory on December 31 was $18. Calculate the total amount to be assigned to the ending inventory on December 31 under each of the following methods:
(a) FIFO lower-of-cost-or-market
(b) Weighted-average lower-of-cost-or-market
3. In addition to taking a physical inventory on December 31, Tiller decides to estimate the ending inventory and cost of goods sold. During the fiscal year ended December 31, 20-2, net sales of $100,000 were made at a normal gross profit rate of 35%. Use the gross profit method to estimate the cost of goods sold for the fiscal year ended December 31 and the inventory on December 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
College Accounting
Dominique Fouque owns and operates Dominique’s Doll House. She has a small shop in which she sells new and antique dolls. She is particularly well known for her collection of antique Ken and Barbie dolls. A completed work sheet for 20-3 is shown on the next page. Fouque made no additional investments during the year and the long-term note payable is due in 20-9. No portion of the long-term note is due within the next year. Net credit sales for 20-3 were $35,300, and receivables on January 1 were $2,500.
Required:
1. Prepare a multiple-step income statement.
2. Prepare a statement of owner’s equity.
3. Prepare a balance sheet.
4. Compute the following measures of performance and financial condition for 20-3:
(a) Current ratio
(b) Quick ratio
(c) Working capital
(d) Return on owner’s equity
(e) Accounts receivable turnover and average number of days required to collect receivables
(f) Inventory turnover and the average number of days required to sell inventory
5. Prepare adjusting entries and indicate which should be reversed and why.
6. Prepare closing entries.
7. Prepare reversing entries for the adjustments where appropriate.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information was taken from the records of Gibson Inc. for the year 2012: income tax applicable to income from continuing operations $127,600; income tax applicable to loss on discontinued operations $31,500; income tax applicable to extraordinary gain $33,592; income tax applicable to extraordinary loss $21,726; and unrealized holding gain on available-for-sale securities $23,900.
|
Extraordinary gain
|
$98,800
|
|
Loss on discontinued operations
|
75,700
|
|
Administrative expenses
|
245,900
|
|
Rent revenue
|
46,300
|
|
Extraordinary loss
|
63,900
|
|
Cash dividends declared
|
158,100
|
|
Retained earnings January 1, 2012
|
600,800
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
852,600
|
|
Selling expenses
|
304,500
|
|
Sales
|
1,719,600
|
|
Shares outstanding during 2012 were
|
100,800.
|
a. Prepare a single-step income statement for 2012. (Round earnings per share to 2 decimal places, e.g. $1.48.)
b. Prepare a retained earnings statement for 2012.
c. Show how comprehensive income is reported using the income statement format
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Schweser Satellites Inc. produces satellite earth stations that sell for $100,000 each. The firm’s fixed costs, F, are $2 million; 50 earth stations are produced and sold each year; profits total $500,000; and the firm’s assets (all equity financed) are $5 million. The firm estimates that it can change its production process, adding $4 million to investment and $500,000 to fixed operating costs. This change will (1) reduce variable costs per unit by $10,000 and (2) increase output by 20 units, but (3) the sales price on all units will have to be lowered to $95,000 to permit sales of the additional output. The firm has tax loss carryforwards that cause its tax rate to be zero, its cost of equity is 16%, and it uses no debt.
a. What is the incremental profit? To get a rough idea of the project’s profitability, what is the project’s expected rate of return for the next year (defined as the incremental profit divided by the investment)? Should the firm make the investment?
b. Would the firm’s break-even point increase or decrease if it made the change?
c. Would the new situation expose the firm to more or less business risk than the old one?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The trial balance of the Sterling Company shown below does not balance.
STERLING COMPANY
Trial Balance
May 31, 2008
| |
Debit
|
Credit
|
|
Cash
|
$5,850
|
|
|
Accounts Rcvbl
|
|
$2,750
|
|
Prepaid Insurance
|
700
|
|
|
Equipment
|
8,000
|
|
|
Accounts Payable
|
|
4,500
|
|
Property Taxes Payable
|
560
|
|
|
Common Stock
|
|
11,700
|
|
Service Revenue
|
6,690
|
|
|
Salaries Revenue
|
4,200
|
|
|
Advertising Expense
|
|
1,100
|
|
Property Tax Expense
|
800
|
|
| |
$26,800
|
$20,050
|
Your review of the ledger reveals that each account has a normal balance. You also discover the following errors.
(a) The totals of the debit sides of Prepaid Insurance, Accounts Payable, and Property Tax Expense were each understated $100.
(b) Transposition errors were made in Accounts Receivable and Service Revenue. Based on postings made, the correct balances were $2,570 and $6,960, respectively.
(c) A debit posting to Salaries Expense of $200 was omitted.
(d) A $1,000 cash dividend was debited to Common Stock for $1,000 and credited to Cash for $1,000.
(e) A $520 purchase of supplies on account was debited to Equipment for $520 and credited to Cash for $520.
(f) A cash payment of $450 for advertising was debited to Advertising Expense for $45 and credited to Cash for $45.
(g) A collection from a customer for $210 was debited to Cash for $210 and credited to Accounts Payable for $210.
Instructions:
Prepare a correct trial balance. Note that the chart of accounts includes the following: Dividends, and Supplies. (Hint: It helps to prepare the correct journal entry for the transaction described and compare it to the mistake made.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below is information related to Dickinson Company for 2010.
|
Retained earnings balance, January 1, 2010
|
995,700
|
|
Sales for the year
|
26,425,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
16,195,000
|
|
Interest revenue
|
77,600
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
4,734,200
|
|
Write-off of goodwill (not tax deductible)
|
837,600
|
|
Income taxes for 2010
|
966,140
|
|
Gain on the sale of investments (normal
|
112,500
|
|
Loss due to flood damage-extraordinary
|
397,500
|
|
Loss on the disposition of the wholesale
|
445,900
|
|
Loss on operations of the wholesale
|
93,000
|
|
Dividends declared on common stock
|
253,200
|
|
Dividends declared on preferred stock
|
81,200
|
Required:
Prepare a multiple-step income statement and a retained earnings statement. Dickinson Company decided to discontinue its entire wholesale operations and to retain its manufacturing operations. On September 15, Dickinson sold the wholesale operations to Rogers Company. During 2010, there were 500,000 shares of common stock outstanding all year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Completed-Contract Method
Mauer Construction Company, Inc., entered into a firm fixed-price contract with Trillini Clinic on July 1, 2005, to construct a four-story office building. At that time, Mauer estimated that it would take between 2 and 3 years to complete the project. The total contract price for construction of the building is $4,500,000. Mauer appropriately accounts for this contract under the completed-contract method in its financial statements and for income tax reporting. The building was deemed substantially completed on December 31, 2007.
Estimated percentage of completion, accumulated contract costs incurred, estimated costs to complete the contract, and accumulated billings to the Trillini Clinic under the contract are shown below.
| |
At December 31, 2005
|
At December 31, 2006
|
At December 31, 2007
|
|
Percentage of completion
|
30%
|
65%
|
100%
|
|
Contract costs incurred
|
1140000
|
3,055,000
|
4,800,000
|
|
Estimated costs to complete contract
|
2660000
|
1,645,000
|
|
|
– Billings to Trillini Clinic
|
1500000
|
2,500,000
|
4,300,000
|
Required:
a. Prepare schedules to compute the amount to be shown as “Cost of uncompleted contract in excess of related billings” or “Billings on uncompleted contract in excess of related costs” at December 31, 2005, 2006, and 2007. Ignore income taxes. Show supporting computations in good form.
b. Prepare schedules to compute the profit or loss to be recognized as a result of this contract for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2006, and 2007. Ignore income taxes. Show supporting computations in good form.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P17-8(b) Fair Value and Equity Methods (Essay)
Brooks Corp. is a medium-sized corporation specializing in quarrying stone for building construction. The company has long dominated the market, at one time achieving a 70% market penetration. During prosperous years, the company’s profits, coupled with a conservative dividend policy, resulted in funds available for outside investment. Over the years, Brooks has had a policy of investing idle cash in equity securities. In particular, Brooks has made periodic investments in the company’s principal supplier, Norton Industries. Although the firm currently owns 12% of the outstanding common stock of Norton Industries, Brooks does not have significant influence over the operations of Norton Industries.
Cheryl Thomas has recently joined Brooks as assistant controller, and her first assignment is to prepare the 2012 year-end adjusting entries for the accounts that are valued by the “fair value” rule for financial reporting purposes. Thomas has gathered the following information about Brooks’ pertinent accounts.
1. Brooks has trading securities related to Delaney Motors and Patrick Electric. During this fiscal year, Brooks purchased 100,000 shares of Delaney Motors for $1,400,000; these shares currently have a market value of $1,600,000. Brooks’ investment in Patrick Electric has not been profitable; the company acquired 50,000 shares of Patrick in April 2012 at $20 per share, a purchase that currently has a value of $720,000.
2. Prior to 2012, Brooks invested $22,500,000 in Norton Industries and has not changed its holdings this year. This investment in Norton Industries was valued at $21,500,000 on December 31, 2011. Brooks’ 12% ownership of Norton Industries has a current market value of $22,225,000.
Instructions:
b. For both classes of investments presented above, describe how the results of the valuation adjustments made in (a) would be reflected in Brooks’ 2012 financial statements
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
CA16-4 Stock Compensation Plans
The following two items appeared on the Internet concerning the GAAP requirement to expense stock options.
WASHINGTON, D.C.-February 17, 2005 Congressman David Dreier (R-CA), Chairman of the House Rules Committee, and Congresswoman Anna Eshoo (D-CA) reintroduced legislation today that will preserve broad-based employee stock option plans and give investors critical information they need to understand how employee stock options impact the value of their shares.
Last year, the U.S. House of Representatives overwhelmingly voted for legislation that would have ensured the continued ability of innovative companies to offer stock options to rank-and-file employees, Dreier stated. “Both the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) and the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) continue to ignore our calls to address legitimate concerns about the impact of FASB’s new standard on workers’ ability to have an ownership stake in the New Economy, and its failure to address the real need of shareholders: accurate and meaningful information about a company’s use of stock options.”
In December 2004, FASB issued a stock option expensing standard that will render a huge blow to the 21st century economy, Dreier said. “Their action and the SEC’s apparent lack of concern for protecting shareholders, requires us to once again take a firm stand on the side of investors and economic growth. Giving investors the ability to understand how stock options impact the value of their shares is critical. And equally important is preserving the ability of companies to use this innovative tool to attract talented employees.”
On February 17, Congressman David Dreier (R-CA), and Congresswoman Anna Eshoo (D-CA), officially entered Silicon Valley’s bid to gum up the launch of honest reporting of stock option compensation: They co-sponsored a bill to “preserve broad-based employee stock option plans and give investors critical information they need to understand how employee stock options impact the value of their shares.” You know what “critical information” they mean: stuff like the stock compensation for the top five officers in a company, with a rigged value set as close to zero as possible. Investors crave this kind of information. Other ways the good Congresspersons want to “help” investors: The bill “also requires the SEC to study the effectiveness of those disclosures over three years, during which time, no new accounting standard related to the treatment of stock options could be recognized. Finally, the bill requires the Secretary of Commerce to conduct a study and report to Congress on the impact of broad-based employee stock option plans on expanding employee corporate ownership, skilled worker recruitment and retention, research and innovation, economic growth, and international competitiveness.”
It’s the old “four corners” basketball strategy: stall, stall, stall. In the meantime, hope for regime change at your opponent, the FASB.
Instructions
a. What are the major recommendations of the stock-based compensation pronouncement?
b. How do the provisions of GAAP in this area differ from the bill introduced by members of Congress (Dreier and Eshoo), which would require expensing for options issued to only the top five officers in a company? Which approach do you think would result in more useful information? (Focus on comparability.)
c. The bill in Congress urges the FASB to develop a rule that preserves “the ability of companies to use this innovative tool to attract talented employees.” Write a response to these Congress-people explaining the importance of neutrality in financial accounting and reporting.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P15-1 Equity Transactions and Statement Preparation
On January 5, 2012, Phelps Corporation received a charter granting the right to issue 5,300 shares of $101 par value, 7% cumulative and nonparticipating preferred stock, and 50,700 shares of $11 par value common stock. It then completed these transactions.
Jan. 11 Issued 20,260 shares of common stock at $18 per share.
Feb. 1 Issued to Sanchez Corp. 4,400 shares of preferred stock for the following assets: machinery with a fair market value of $59,350; a factory building with a fair market value of $170,600; and land with an appraised value of $332,400.
Jul 29 Purchased 1,890 shares of common stock at $17 per share. (Use cost method.)
Aug. 10 Sold the 1,890 treasury shares at $14 per share.
Dec. 31 Declared a $0.30 per share cash dividend on the common stock and declared the preferred dividend.
Dec. 31 Closed the Income Summary account. There was a $180,640 net income.
Instructions:
a. Record the journal entries for the transactions listed above. (Round the answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125. If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually. Record entries in the order displayed in the problem statement.
b. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of Phelps Corporation’s balance sheet as of December 31, 2012. (For preferred stock, common stock and treasury stock enter the account name only and do not provide the descriptive information provided in the question.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E16-20 EPS: Simple Capital Structure
On January 1, 2012, Bailey Industries had stock outstanding as follows.
6% Cumulative preferred stock $108 par value issued and outstanding 10,100 shares 1,090,800 Common stock, $11 par value, issued and outstanding 236,400 shares 2,600,400
To acquire the net assets of three smaller companies, Bailey authorized the issuance of an additional 261,600 common shares. The acquisitions took place as shown below.
|
Date of Acquisition
|
Shares Issued
|
|
Company A April 1, 2012
|
103,200
|
|
Company B July 1, 2012
|
126,000
|
|
Company C October 1, 2012
|
32,400
|
On May 14, 2012, Bailey realized a $142,800 (before taxes) insurance gain on the expropriation of investments originally purchased in 2000.
On December 31, 2012, Bailey recorded net income of $336,000 before tax and exclusive of the gain.
Assuming a 47% tax rate, compute the earnings per share data that should appear on the financial statements of Bailey Industries as of December 31, 2012. Assume that the expropriation is extraordinary. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.55.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P16-7 Computation of Basic and Diluted EPS
Charles Austin of the controller’s office of Thompson Corporation was given the assignment of determining the basic and diluted earnings per share values for the year ending December 31, 2013. Austin has compiled the information listed below.
1. The company is authorized to issue 7,992,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. As of December 31, 2012, 1,998,000 shares had been issued and were outstanding.
2. The per share market prices of the common stock on selected dates were as follows.
|
|
Price per Share
|
|
1-Jul-12
|
20.00
|
|
1-Jan-13
|
21.00
|
|
1-Apr-13
|
25.00
|
|
1-Jul-13
|
11.00
|
|
1-Aug-13
|
10.50
|
|
1-Nov-13
|
9.00
|
|
31-Dec-13
|
10.00
|
3. A total of 776,400 shares of an authorized 1,359,600 shares of convertible preferred stock had been issued on July 1, 2012. The stock was issued at its par value of $25, and it has a cumulative dividend of $3 per share. The stock is convertible into common stock at the rate of one share of convertible preferred for one share of common. The rate of conversion is to be automatically adjusted for stock splits and stock dividends. Dividends are paid quarterly on September 30, December 31, March 31, and June 30.
4. Thompson Corporation is subject to a 40% income tax rate.
5. The after-tax net income for the year ended December 31, 2013 was $11,840,000.
The following specific activities took place during 2013.
1. January 1-A 5% common stock dividend was issued. The dividend had been declared on December 1, 2012, to all stockholders of record on December 29, 2012.
2. April 1-A total of 460,800 shares of the $3 convertible preferred stock was converted into common stock. The company issued new common stock and retired the preferred stock. This was the only conversion of the preferred stock during 2013.
3. July 1-A 2-for-1 split of the common stock became effective on this date. The board of directors had authorized the split on June 1.
4. August 1-A total of 301,200 shares of common stock were issued to acquire a factory building.
5. November 1-A total of 32,100 shares of common stock were purchased on the open market at $9 per share. These shares were to be held as treasury stock and were still in the treasury as of December 31, 2013.
6. Common stock cash dividends-Cash dividends to common stockholders were declared and paid as follows.
April 15 – $0.30 per share
October 15 – $0.20 per share
7. Preferred stock cash dividends-Cash dividends to preferred stockholders were declared and paid as scheduled.
Instructions:
a. Determine the number of shares used to compute basic earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013. (Round answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. 1,500)
b. Determine the number of shares used to compute diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2011. (Round answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. 1,500)
c. Compute the adjusted net income to be used as the numerator in the basic earnings per share calculation for the year ended December 31, 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P15-1 (Equity Transactions and Statement Preparation)
On January 5, 2010, Phelps Corporation received a charter granting the right to issue 5,000 shares of $100 par value, 8% cumulative and nonparticipating preferred stock, and 50,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. It then completed these transactions.
Jan. 11 Issued 20,000 shares of common stock at $16 per share.
Feb. 1 Issued to Sanchez Corp. 4,000 shares of preferred stock for the following assets: machinery with a fair market value of $50,000; a factory building with a fair market value of $160,000; and land with an appraised value of $270,000.
Jul 29 Purchased 1,800 shares of common stock at $17 per share. (Use cost method.)
Aug. 10 Sold the 1,800 treasury shares at $14 per share.
Dec. 31 Declared a $0.25 per share cash dividend on the common stock and declared the preferred dividend.
Dec. 31 Closed the Income Summary account. There was a $175,700 net income.
Instructions:
a. Record the journal entries for the transactions listed above. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)
b. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of Phelps Corporation’s balance sheet as of December 31, 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E16-20 (EPS: Simple Capital Structure)
On January 1, 2010, Bailey Industries had stock outstanding as follows.
|
6% Cumulative preferred stock $100 par value issued and outstanding 10,000 shares
|
1,000,000
|
|
Common stock, $10 par value, issued and outstanding 200,000 shares
|
2,000,000
|
To acquire the net assets of three smaller companies, Bailey authorized the issuance of an additional 170,000 common shares. The acquisitions took place as follows.
|
Date of Acquisition
|
Shares
|
Issued
|
|
Company
|
A April 1, 2010
|
60,000
|
|
Company B
|
July 1, 2010
|
80,000
|
|
Company C
|
October 1, 2010
|
30,000
|
On May 14, 2010, Bailey realized a $90,000 (before taxes) insurance gain on the expropriation of investments originally purchased in 2000.
On December 31, 2010, Bailey recorded net income of $300,000 before tax and exclusive of the gain.
Assuming a 40% tax rate, compute the earnings per share data that should appear on the financial statements of Bailey Industries as of December 31, 2010. Assume that the expropriation is extraordinary.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P10-6 Interest during Construction
Greig Landscaping began construction of a new plant on December 1,2012. On this date, the company purchased a parcel of land for $139,000 in cash. In addition it paid $2,000 in survey cost and $4,000 for title insurance policy. An old dwelling on the premises was demolished at a cost of $3,000 with $1,000 being received from the sale of materials.
Architectural plans were also on December 1, 2012 when the architect was paid $30,000. The necessary building permits costing $3,000 were obtained from the city and paid for on December 1 as well. The excavation work began during the first week in December with payments made to the contractor as follows:
Date of payment Amount of payment
March 1 240,000
May 1 330,000
July 1 60,000
The building was completed on July 1, 2013. To finance consturction of this plant, Greig borrowed $600,000 from the bank on December 1, 2012. Greig had no other borrowings. The $600,000 was a 10-year loan bearing interest at 8%.
Instructions:
Compute the balance in each of the following accounts at December 31, 2012, and December 31, 2013. (Round amounts to the nearest dollar).
a. Land
b. Buildings
c. Interest Expense
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-13 Inventory cost flow methods; periodic system
Altira Corporation uses a periodic inventory system. The following information related to its merchandise inventory during the month of August 2011 is available:
Aug.1 Inventory on hand -2,000 units; cost $6.10 each.
8 Purchased 10,000 units for $5.50 each
14 Sold 8,000 units for $12.00 each.
18 Purchased 6,000 units for $5.00 each.
25 Sold 7,000 units for $11.00 each.
31 Inventory on hand – 3,000 units.
Required:
Determine the inventory balance Altira would report in its August 31, 2011, balance sheet and the cost of goods sold it would report in its August 2011 income statement using each of the following cost flow methods: 1. First-in, first-out (FIFO) 2. Last-in, first-out (LIFO) 3. Average cost
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-14 Inventory cost flow methods; perpetual system ?
[This is a variation of Exercise 8-13 modified to focus on the perpetual inventory system and alternative cost flow methods.]
Altira Corporation uses a perpetual inventory system. The following transactions affected its merchandise inventory during the month of August 2011:
Aug.1 Inventory on hand -2,000 units; cost $6.10 each.
8 Purchased 10,000 units for $5.50 each
14 Sold 8,000 units for $12.00 each.
18 Purchased 6,000 units for $5.00 each.
25 Sold 7,000 units for $11.00 each.
31 Inventory on hand – 3,000 units.
Required:
Determine the inventory balance Altira would report in its August 31, 2011, balance sheet and the cost of goods sold it would report in its August 2011 income statement using each of the following cost flow methods:
1. First-in, first-out (FIFO)
2. Last-in, first-out (LIFO)
3. Average cost
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
San Jose Flights, S.A., of Panama, has a small truck that it uses for intracity deliveries. The truck is worn out and must be either overhauled or replaced with a new truck. The company has assembled the following information. (Panama uses the U.S. dollar as its currency):
|
|
Present Truck
|
New Truck
|
|
Purchase cost new
|
28,000
|
42,000
|
|
Remaining book value
|
18,000
|
|
|
Overhaul needed now
|
9,500
|
|
|
Annual cash operating costs
|
14,000
|
11,000
|
|
Salvage value-now
|
10,000
|
|
|
Salvage value-10 years from now
|
2,000
|
4,000
|
If the company keeps and overhauls its present delivery truck, then the truck will be usable for 10 more years. If a new truck is purchased, it will be used for 10 years, after which it will be traded in on another truck. The new truck would be dieseloperated, resulting in a substantial reduction in annual operating costs, as shown above.
The company computes depreciation on a straight-line basis. All investment projects are evaluated using a 16% discount rate.
Required:
1. Should San Jose Flights, S.A. keep the old truck or purchase the new one? Use the total-cost approach to net present value in making your decision. Round to the nearest whole dollar.
2. Redo (1) above, this time using the incremental-cost approach.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(TCO G) (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Five years ago, the City of Paranoya spent $30,000 to purchase a computerized radar system called W.A.S.T.E. (Watching Aliens Sent To Earth). Recently, a sales rep from W.A.S.T.E. Radar Company told the city manager about a new and improved radar system that can be purchased for $50,000. The rep also told the manager that the company would give the city $10,000 in trade on the old system. The new system will last 10 years. The old system will also last that long but only if a $4,000 upgrade is done in 5 years. The manager assembled the following information to use in the decision regarding which system is more desirable:
|
|
Old System
|
New System
|
|
Cost of radar system
|
30,000
|
50,000
|
|
Current salvage value
|
10,000
|
|
|
Salvage value in 10 years
|
5,000
|
8,000
|
|
Annual operating costs
|
34,000
|
29,000
|
|
Upgrade required in 5 years
|
4,000
|
|
|
Discount rate
|
14%
|
14%
|
Required:
(a) What is the City of Paranoya’s net present value for the decision described above? Use the total cost approach.
(b) Should the City of Paranoya purchase the new system or keep the old system? (Points : 35)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(TCO C) The following overhead data are for a department of a large company.
| |
Actual Costs Incurred
|
Static Budget
|
|
Activity level (in units)
|
360
|
340
|
|
Variable costs:
|
|
|
Indirect materials
|
4,182
|
4,148
|
|
Electricity
|
2,536
|
2,414
|
|
Fixed costs:
|
|
|
Administration
|
6,540
|
6,500
|
|
Rent
|
6,310
|
6,400
|
Required:
Construct a flexible budget performance report that would be useful in assessing how well costs were controlled in this department.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E13-13 Contingencies
Presented below are three independent situations. Answer the question at the end of each situation.
1. During 2012, Maverick Inc. became involved in a tax dispute with the IRS.
Maverick’s attorneys have indicated that they believe it is probable that Maverick will lose this dispute. They also believe that Maverick will have to pay the IRS between $800,000 and $1,400,000. After the 2012 financial statements were issued, the case was settled with the IRS for $1,200,000. What amount, if any, should be reported as a liability for this contingency as of December 31, 2012?
2. On October 1, 2012, Holmgren Chemical was identified as a potentially responsible party by the Environmental Protection Agency. Holmgren’s management along with its counsel have concluded that it is probable that Holmgren will be responsible for damages, and a reasonable estimate of these damages is $6,000,000. Holmgren’s insurance policy of $9,000,000 has a deductible clause of $500,000. How should Holmgren Chemical report this information in its financial statements at December 31, 2012?
3. Shinobi Inc. had a manufacturing plant in Darfur, which was destroyed in the civil war. It is not certain who will compensate Shinobi for this destruction, but Shinobi has been assured by governmental officials that it will receive a definite amount for this plant. The amount of the compensation will be less than the fair value of the plant, but more than its book value. How should the contingency be reported in the financial statements of Shinobi Inc.?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P13-9 Premium Entries and Financial Statement Presentation
Sycamore Candy Company offers a CD single as a premium for every five candy bar wrappers presented by customers together with $3.20. The candy bars are sold by the company to distributors for 30 cents each. The purchase price of each CD to the company is $2.95; in addition it costs 50 cents to mail each CD. The results of the premium plan for the years 2012 and 2013 are as follows. (All purchases and
| |
2012
|
2013
|
|
CDs purchased
|
392,500
|
518,100
|
|
Candy bars sold
|
2,940,100
|
2,817,700
|
|
Wrappers redeemed
|
1,884,000
|
2,355,000
|
|
2012 wrappers expected to be redeemed in 2013
|
455,300
|
|
|
2013 wrappers expected to be redeemed in 2014
|
549,500
|
|
Instructions
(a) Prepare the journal entries that should be made in 2012 and 2013 to record the transactions related to the premium plan of the Sycamore Candy Company. (If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
(b) Indicate the account names, amounts, and classifications of the items related to the premium plan that would appear on the balance sheet and the income statement at the end of 2012 and 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E14-22 Term Modification without Gain-Debtor’s Entries
On December 31, 2012, the American Bank enters into a debt restructuring agreement with Barkley Company, which is now experiencing financial trouble. The bank agrees to restructure a 14%, issued at par, $3,186,000 note receivable by the following modifications:
1. Reducing the principal obligation from $3,186,000 to $2,548,000.
2. Extending the maturity date from December 31, 2012, to January 1, 2016.
3. Reducing the interest rate from 14% to 10%.
Barkley pays interest at the end of each year. On January 1, 2016, Barkley Company pays $2,548,800 in cash to Firstar Bank.
Instructions
(a) Will the gain recorded by Barkley be equal to the loss recorded by American Bank under the debt restructuring?
(b) Can Barkley Company record a gain under the term modification mentioned above? Explain.
(c) Assuming that the interest rate Barkley should use to compute interest expense in future periods is 1.4276%, prepare the interest payment schedule of the note for Barkley Company after the debt restructuring. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $38,548).
(d) Prepare the interest payment entry for Barkley Company on December 31, 2014. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $38,548. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
(e) What entry should Barkley make on January 1, 2016? (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $38,548. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E21-7(b) Lessee-Lessor Entries, Sales-Type Lease
On January 1, 2012, Palmer Company leased equipment to Woods Corporation. The following information pertains to this lease.
1. The term of the noncancelable lease is 6 years, with no renewal option. The equipment reverts to the lessor at the termination of the lease.
2. Equal rental payments are due on January 1 of each year, beginning in 2012.
3. The fair value of the equipment on January 1, 2012, is $197,600, and its cost is $164,008.
4. The equipment has an economic life of 8 years, with an unguaranteed residual value of $11,070. Woods depreciates all of its equipment on a straight-line basis.
5. Palmer sets the annual rental to ensure an 10% rate of return. Woods’s incremental borrowing rate is 11%, and the implicit rate of the lessor is unknown.
6. Collectibility of lease payments is reasonably predictable, and no important uncertainties surround the amount of costs yet to be incurred by the lessor.
Instructions
(Both the lessor and the lessee’s accounting period ends on December 31.)
(b) Calculate the amount of the annual rental payment. (Round present value factor calculations to 5 decimal places, e.g. 1.25124 and the final answer to 0 decimal places e.g. 58,971.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-9 Statement and Note Disclosure, LCM and Purchase Commitment
Maddox Specialty Company, a division of Lost World Inc., manufactures three models of gear shift components for bicycles that are sold to bicycle manufacturers, retailers, and catalog outlets. Since beginning operations in 1988 Maddox has used normal absorption costing and has assumed a first-in, first-out cost flow in its perpetual inventory system. The balances of the inventory accounts at the end of Maddox’s fiscal year, November 30, 2012, are shown below. The inventories are stated at cost before any year-end adjustments.
|
Finished goods
|
647,000
|
|
Work in process
|
112,500
|
|
Raw materials
|
264,000
|
|
Factory supplies
|
69,000
|
The following information, shown on page 536, relates to Maddox’s inventory and operations.
1. The finished goods inventory consists of the items analyzed below.
| |
Cost
|
Market
|
|
Down tube shifter
|
|
|
Standard model
|
67,500
|
67,000
|
|
Click adjustment model
|
94,500
|
89,000
|
|
Deluxe model
|
110,000
|
|
|
Total down tube shifters
|
270,000
|
266,000
|
|
Bar end shifter
|
|
|
Standard model
|
83,000
|
90,050
|
|
Click adjustment model
|
99,000
|
97,550
|
|
Total bar end shifters
|
182,000
|
187,600
|
|
Head tube shifter
|
|
|
Standard model
|
78,000
|
77,650
|
|
Click adjustment model
|
117,000
|
119,300
|
|
Total head tube shifters
|
195,000
|
196,950
|
|
Total finished goods
|
$647,000
|
$650,550
|
2. One-half of the head tube shifter finished goods inventory is held by catalog outlets on consignment.
3. Three-quarters of the bar end shifter finished goods inventory has been pledged as collateral for a bank loan.
4. One-half of the raw materials balance represents derailleurs acquired at a contracted price 20 percent above the current market price. The market value of the rest of the raw materials is $127,400.
5. The total market value of the work in process inventory is $108,700.
6. Included in the cost of factory supplies are obsolete items with an historical cost of $4,200. The market value of the remaining factory supplies is $65,900.
7. Maddox applies the lower-of-cost-or-market method to each of the three types of shifters in finished goods inventory. For each of the other three inventory accounts, Maddox applies the lower-of-cost-or-market method to the total of each inventory account.
8. Consider all amounts presented above to be material in relation to Maddox’s financial statements taken as a whole.
Instructions:
a. Prepare the inventory section of Maddox’s balance sheet as of November 30, 2012, including any required note(s).
b. Without prejudice to your answer to (a), assume that the market value of Maddox’s inventories is less than cost. Explain how this decline would be presented in Maddox’s income statement for the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012.
c. Assume the Maddox has a firm purchase commitment for the same type of derailleur included in the raw materials inventory as of November 30, 2012, and that the purchase commitment is at a contract priced 15% greater than the current market price. These derailleurs are to be delivered to Maddox after November 30, 2012. Discuss the impact, if any, that this purchase commitment would have on Maddox’s financial statements prepared for the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P10-5 Classification of Costs and Interest Capitalization
On January 1, 2012, Blair Corporation purchased for $500,000 a tract of land (site number 101) with a building. Blair paid a real estate broker’s commission of $36,000, legal fees of $6,000, and title guarantee insurance of $18,000. The closing statement indicated that the land value was $500,000 and the building value was $100,000. Shortly after acquisition, the building was razed at a cost of $54,000.
Blair entered into a $3,000,000 fixed-price contract with Slatkin Builders, Inc. on March 1, 2012, for the construction of an office building on land site number 101. The building was completed and occupied on September 31, 2013. Additional construction costs were incurred as follows.
Plans, specifications, and blueprints 21,000
Architect’s fees for design and supervision 82,000
The building is estimated to have a 40-year life from date of completion and will be depreciated using the 150% declining-balance method.
To finance construction costs, Blair borrowed $3,000,000 on March 1, 2012. The loan is payable in 10 annual installments of $300,000 plus interest at the rate of 10%. Blair’s weighted-average amounts of accumulated building construction expenditures were as follows.
For the period March 1 to December 31, 2012 1,300,000
For the period January 1 to September 30, 2013 1,900,000
Instructions:
1. Prepare a schedule that discloses that individual costs making up the balance in the land account in respect of land site number 101 as of September 30, 2013.
2. Prepare a schedule that discloses the individual costs that should be capitalized in the office building account as of September 30, 2013. Show supporting computations in good form.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E8-25 Dollar-Value LIFO
Presented below is information related to Choctaw Company.
|
Date
|
Ending Inventory (End-of-Year Prices)
|
Price Index
|
|
31-Dec-07
|
70,000
|
100
|
|
31-Dec-08
|
88,200
|
105
|
|
31-Dec-09
|
95,120
|
116
|
|
31-Dec-10
|
108,000
|
120
|
|
31-Dec-11
|
100,000
|
125
|
Instructions
Compute the ending inventory for Choctaw Company for 2007 through 2011 using the dollar-value LIFO method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Echeverria SA is an Argentinian manufacturing company whose total factory overhead costs fluctuate somewhat from year to year according to the number of machine-hours worked in its production facility. These costs (in Argentinian pesos) at high and low levels of activity over recent years are given below:
Level of Activity
Low High
Machine-hours 60,000 80,000
Total factory overhead costs 274,000 pesos 312,000 pesos
The factory overhead costs above consist of indirect materials, rent, and maintenance. The company has analyzed these costs at the 60,000 machine-hours level of activity as follows:
Indirect materials (variable) 90,000 pesos
Rent (fixed) 130,000
Maintenance (mixed) 54,000
Total factory overhead costs 274,000 pesos
For planning purposes, the company wants to break down the maintenance cost into its variable and fixed cost elements.
Requirement1:
Estimate how much of the factory overhead cost of 312,000 pesos at the high level of activity consists of maintenance cost. (Hint: To do this, it may be helpful to first determine how much of the 312,000 pesos cost consists of indirect materials and rent. Think about the behavior of variable and fixed costs.)
Maintenance cost ____________ pesos
Requirement2:
Using the high-low method, estimate a cost formula for maintenance where X represents the per machine-hour. Round the variable portion of the formula to 2 decimal places.)
Y = ____________ pesos + ____________ peso X
Requirement3:
What total overhead costs would you expect the company to incur at an operating level of 65,000 machine-hours?
Total overhead cost ____________ pesos
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Grady and Associates performs a variety of activities related to information systems and e-commerce consulting in Toronto, Canada. The firm, which bills $125 per hour for services performed, is in a very tight local labor market and is having difficulty finding quality help for its overworked professional staff. The cost per hour for professional staff time is $45. Selected information follows.
Billable hours to clients for the year totaled 5,000, consisting of information systems services, 3,100; e-commerce consulting, 1,900.
Administrative cost of $342,000 was (and continues to be) allocated to both services based on billable hours. These costs consist of staff support, $180,000; in-house computing, $136,400; and miscellaneous office charges, $25,600.
A recent analysis of staff support costs found a correlation with the number of clients served. In-house computing and miscellaneous office charges varied directly with the number of computer hours logged and number of client transactions, respectively. A tabulation revealed the following data:
|
|
Information Systems Services
|
E-Commerce Consulting
|
Total
|
|
Number of clients
|
200
|
50
|
250
|
|
Number of computer hours
|
2,600
|
1,800
|
4,400
|
|
Number of client transactions
|
400
|
600
|
1,000
|
Required:
1. Activity-based costing (ABC) is said to result in improved costing accuracy when compared with traditional costing procedures. Briefly explain how this improved accuracy is attained.
2. Assume that the firm uses traditional costing procedures, allocating total costs on the basis of billable hours. Determine the profitability of the firm’s information systems and e-commerce activities, expressing your answer both in dollars and as a percentage of activity revenue. Repeat requirement (2), using activity-based costing.
3. Jeffrey Grady, one of the firm’s partners, doesn’t care where his professionals spend their time because, as he notes, “many clients have come to expect both services and we need both to stay in business. Also, information systems and e-commerce professionals are paid the same hourly rate.” Should Grady’s attitude change? Explain.
4. Is an aggressive expansion of either service currently desirable? Briefly discuss.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
High Tech Inc Old time Co: Understanding operating leverage
See attached Excel file.
Understanding the effects of operating leverage
High Tech Inc and Old time Co. compete within the same industry and had the following operating results in 2010:
High Tech Inc Old Time Inc
|
Sales
|
$2,100,000
|
$2,100,000
|
|
Variable expenses
|
$ 420,000
|
1,260,000
|
|
Contribution margin
|
$1,680,000
|
$840,000
|
|
Fixed Expenses
|
1,470,000
|
630,000
|
|
Operating Income
|
$ 210,000
|
$210,000
|
Required:
A) Calculate the break- even point for each firm in terms of revenue.
B) What observation can you draw by examining the break- even point of each firm given that they earned an equal amount of operating income on identical sales volume in 2010?
C) Calculate the amount of operating income (or loss) that you would expect each firm to report in 2011 if sales were to 1. INCREASE BY 20% 2. DECREASE BY 20%.
D) Using the amounts computed in requirement C, calculate the increase or decrease in the amount of operating income expected in 2011 from the amount reported in 2010.
E) Explain why an equal percentage increase (or decrease) in sales for each firm would have such differing effects on operating income.
F) Calculate the ratio of contribution margin to operating income for each firm in 2010. (hint: divide contribution margin by operating income).
G) Multiply the expected increase in sales of 20% for 2011 by the ratio of contribution margin to operating income for 2010 computed in requirement (F) for each firm. (hint : multiply your answer in requirement (F) by 0.2).
H) Multiply your answer in requirement (G) by the operating income of $210,000 reported in 2010 for each firm.
I) Compare your answer in requirement (H) with your answer in requirement (D). What conclusion can you draw about the effects of operating leverage from the steps you perform in requirements (f) (g) and (h)?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to Bright Toy Company’s operating activities for 2012. The company sells light box toys and sold 10,000 units in 2012.
|
Purchases
|
$126,000
|
|
Selling and Administrative Expenses
|
90,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory, 1/1/2012
|
14,000
|
|
Merchandise inventory, 12/31/2012
|
10,000
|
|
Sales Revenue
|
250,000
|
What is the cost of goods sold for 2012?
A) $104,000
B) $124,000
C) $130,000
D) $140,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A US-based corporation has decided to make an investment in Sweden, for which it will require a sum of 100 million Swedish kronor (SEK) in three-months time. The company wishes to hedge changes in the US dollar (USD)-SEK exchange rate using forward contracts on either the euro (EUR) or the Swiss franc (CHF) and has made the following estimates: If EUR forwards are used: The standard deviation of quarterly changes in the USD/SEK spot exchange rate is 0.007, the standard deviation of quarterly changes in the USD/EUR forward rate is 0.018, and the correlation between the changes is 0.90. If CHF forwards are used: The standard deviation of quarterly changes in the USD/SEK spot exchange rate is 0.007, the standard deviation of quarterly changes in the USD/CHF forward rate is 0.023, and the correlation between the changes is 0.85.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Time lost because of employee absenteeism is an important problem for various companies. The human resources department of Western Electronics has studied the allocation of time lost due to absenteeism by individual employees. Through a one-year period, the department found a mean of 21 days and a standard deviation of 10 days based on data for all the employees.
a) If you pick an employee at random, what is the possibility that the number of absences for this one employee would exceed 25 days?
b) If various samples of 36 employees each are taken and sample means computed, a distribution of sample means could result. What could be the mean, standard shape and deviation of the distribution of sample means for samples of size 36?
c) A group of 36 employees is chosen at random to participate in a program that allows a flexible work schedule, which the human resources department hopes may decrease, the employee absenteeism in the future. What is the possibility that the mean for the sample of 36 employees arbitrarily selected for the study would exceed 25 days?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Quantitative Methods Mat540Test.Quiz 1 In general, an increase in price increases the break even point if all costs are held constant. If variable costs increase, but price and fixed costs are held constant, the break even point will decrease. Parameters are known, constant values that are usually coefficients of variables in equations Probabilistic techniques assume that no uncertainty exists in model parameters. P(A| B) is the probability of event A, if we already know that event B has occurred. A binomial probability distribution indicates the probability of r successes in n trials. A continuous random variable may assume only integer values within a given interval. The purpose of break-even analysis is to determine the number of units of a product to sell that will The indicator that results in total revenues being equal to total cost is called the If fixed costs increase, but variable cost and price remain the same, the break even point If the price increases but fixed and variable costs do not change, the break even point The area under the normal curve represents probability, and the total area under the curve sums to In a binomial distribution, for each of n trials, the event The expected value of the standard normal distribution is equal to A production process requires a fixed cost of $50,000. The variable cost per unit is $25 and the revenue per unit is projected to be $45. Find the break-even point. Administrators at a university will charge students $158 to attend a seminar. It costs $2160 to reserve a room, hire an instructor, and bring in the equipment. Assume it costs $50 per student for the administrators to provide the course materials. How many students would have to register for the seminar for the university to break even? Note please report the result as a whole number, omitting the decimal point. Administrators at a university are planning to offer a summer seminar. The costs of reserving a room, hiring an instructor, and bringing in the equipment amount to $3000. Suppose that it costs $25 per student for the administrators to provide the course materials. If we know that 20 people will attend, what price should be charged per person to break even?
Note please report the result as a whole number, rounding if necessary and omitting the decimal point. Wei is considering pursuing an MS in Information Systems degree. She has applied to two different universities. The acceptance rate for applicants with similar qualifications is 20% for University X and 45% for University Y. What is the probability that Wei will be accepted by at least one of the two universities? {Express your answer as a percent. Round (if necessary) to the nearest whole percent and omit the decimal. For instance, 20.1% would be written as 20} Employees of a local company are classified according to gender and job type. The following table summarizes the number of people in each job category. Male (M) Female (F) Job Administrative (AD) 110 10 Salaried staff (SS) 30 50 Hourly staff (HS) 60 40 If an employee is selected at random, what is the probability that the employee is female or works as a member of the administration? An inspector correctly identifies defective products 90% of the time. For the next 10 products, what is the probability that he makes fewer than 2 incorrect inspections? Note Please report your answer with two places to the right of the decimal, rounding if appropriate.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Document the trend in Mexico’s key economic indicators, such as the balance of payments, the exchange rate, and foreign reserve holdings, during the period 1994.1 through 1995.12.
a. The Mexican peso was pegged to the US dollar
i. Made Mexico attractive destination for foreign Capital and lead to surge in portfolio investment
ii. Flows initially helped to support Mexico’s economic reforms, but later undermined them
b. The peso’s appreciation combined with unilateral trade liberalization fed a surge in imports, which outpaced exports
i. Trade deficit coincided with foreign investment boom of the US during the early 1990s
ii. Allowed Mexico to cover growing trade imbalance and run
unprecedented current account deficits
c. Primary component of Mexico’s anti-inflationary policy
was its exchange rate regime
i. Exchange rate regime was effective in curbing inflationary pressures
ii. But resulted in the appreciation of the peso
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job 827 was recently completed. The following data have been recorded on its job cost sheet:
|
Direct materials
|
61,050
|
|
Direct labor hours
|
1,332 labor hours
|
|
Direct laborwage rate
|
14 per labor-hour
|
|
Machine Hours
|
1,480 machine hours
|
|
Number of units completed
|
3,700 units
|
The company applies manufacturing overhead on the basis of machine-hours. The predetermined overhead rate is $13 per machine-hour.
Compute the unit product cost that would appear on the job cost sheet for this job.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You plan to analyze the value of a potential investment by calculating the sum of the present values of its expected cash flows. Which of the following would lower the calculated value of
the investment?
Answer
a The total amount of cash flows remains the same, but more of the cash flows are
. received in the earlier years and less are received in the later years.
b The discount rate increases.
.
c. The discount rate decreases.
d The riskiness of the investment’s cash flows decreases.
.
e The cash flows are in the form of a deferred annuity, and they total to $100,000.
. You learn that the annuity lasts for only 5 rather than 10 years, hence that each
payment is for $20,000 rather than for $10,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E19-9 (Carryback and Carryforward of NOL, No Temporary Differences)
The pretax financial income (or loss) figures of Synergetics Company are as follows.
|
2008
|
160,000
|
|
2009
|
250,000
|
|
2010
|
90,000
|
|
2011
|
(160,000)
|
|
2012
|
(350,000)
|
|
2013
|
120,000
|
|
2014
|
100,000
|
Pretax financial income (or loss) and taxable income (loss) were the same for all years involved. Assume a 45% tax rate for 2008 and 2009 and a 40% tax rate for the remaining years.
Prepare the journal entries for the years 2010 to 2014 to record income tax expense and the effects of the net operating loss carrybacks and carryforwards, assuming Synergetics Company uses the carryback provision. All income and losses relate to normal operations. (In recording the benefits of a loss carryforward, assume that no valuation account is deemed necessary.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E19-3 (One Temporary Difference, Future Taxable Amounts, One Rate, Beginning Deferred Taxes)
Brennan Corporation began 2010 with a $90,000 balance in the Deferred Tax Liability account. At the end of 2010, the related cumulative temporary difference amounts to $350,000, and it will reverse evenly over the next 2 years. Pretax accounting income for 2010 is $525,000, the tax rate for all years is 40%, and taxable income for 2010 is $400,000.
Instructions
(a) Compute income taxes payable for 2010.
(b) Prepare the journal entry to record income tax expense, deferred income taxes, and income taxes payable for 2010.
(c) Prepare the income tax expense section of the income statement for 2010 beginning with the line “Income before income taxes.”
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P19-1 (Three Differences, No Beginning Deferred Taxes, Multiple Rates)
The following information is available for Remmers Corporation for 2010.
1. Depreciation reported on the tax return exceeded depreciation reported on the income statement by $120,000. This difference will reverse in equal amounts of $30,000 over the years 2011-2014.
2. Interest received on municipal bonds was $10,000.
3. Rent collected in advance on January 1, 2010, totaled $60,000 for a 3-year period. Of this amount, $40,000 was reported as unearned at December 31, for book purposes.
4. The tax rates are 40% for 2010 and 35% for 2011 and subsequent years.
5. Income taxes of $320,000 are due per the tax return for 2010.
6. No deferred taxes existed at the beginning of 2010.
Instructions:
a. Compute taxable income for 2010.
b. Compute pretax financial income for 2010.
c. Prepare the journal entries to record income tax expense, deferred income taxes, and income taxes payable for 2010 and 2011. Assume the taxable income was $980,000 in 2011.
d. Prepare the income tax expense section of the income statement for 2010, beginning with “Income before income taxes”.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P19-1(a) Three Differences, No Beginning Deferred Taxes, Multiple Rates
The following information is available for Remmers Corporation for 2012.
1. Depreciation reported on the tax return exceeded depreciation reported on the income statement by $131,200. This difference will reverse in equal amounts of $32,800 over the years 2013-2016.
2. Interest received on municipal bonds was $11,600.
3. Rent collected in advance on January 1, 2012, totaled $62,700 for a 3-year period. Of this amount, $41,800 was reported as unearned at December 31, 2012 for book purposes.
4. The tax rates are 40% for 2012 and 35% for 2013 and subsequent years.
5. Income taxes of $322,200 are due per the tax return for 2012.
6. No deferred taxes existed at the beginning of 2012.
Instructions:
a. Compute the taxable income for 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P19-3(a) Second Year of Depreciation Difference, Two Differences, Single Rate, Extraordinary Item
The following information has been obtained for the Gocker Corporation.
1. Prior to 2010, taxable income and pretax financial income were identical.
2. Pretax financial income is $1,718,300 in 2012 and $1,405,100 in 2013.
3. On January 1, 2010, equipment costing $1,264,000 is purchased. It is to be depreciated on a straight-line basis over 5 years for tax purposes and over 8 years for financial reporting purposes. (Hint: Use the half-year convention for tax purposes, as discussed in Appendix 11A.)
4. Interest of $69,800 was earned on tax-exempt municipal obligations in 2013.
5. Included in 2013 pretax financial income is an extraordinary gain of $206,200, which is fully taxable.
6. The tax rate is 39% for all periods.
7. Taxable income is expected in all future years.
Instructions:
1. Compute taxable income and income taxes payable for 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E19-6 Identify Temporary or Permanent Differences
Listed below are items that are commonly accounted for differently for financial reporting purposes than they are for tax purposes.
For each item below, indicate whether it involves:
1. A temporary difference that will result in future deductible amounts and, therefore will usually give rise to a deferred income tax asset.
2. A temporary difference that will result in future taxable amounts and therefore, will usually give rise to a deferred income tax liability.
3. A permanent difference.
Use the appropriate number to indicate your answer for each.
a. The MACRS depreciation system is used for tax purposes, and the straight-line depreciation method is used for financial reporting purposes for some plant assets.
b. A landlord collects some rents in advance. Rents received are taxable in the period when they are received.
c. Expenses are incurred in obtaining tax-exempt income.
d. Costs of guarantees and warranties are estimated and accrued for financial reporting purposes.
e. Installment sales of investments are accounted for by the accrual method for financial reporting purposes and the installment method for tax purposes.
f. Interest is received on an investment in tax-exempt municipal obligations.
g. For some assets, straight-line depreciation is used for both financiaal reporting purposes and tax purposes, but the assets’ lives are shorter for tax purposes.
h. Proceeds are received from a life insurance company because of the death of a key officer. (The company carries a policy on key officers).
i. The tax return reports a deduction for 80% of the dividends received from U.S. Corporations. The cost method is used in accounting for the related investments for financial reporting purposes.
j. Estimated losses on pending lawsuits and claims are accrued for books. These losses are tax deductible in the period(s) when the related liabilities are settled.
k. Expenses on stock options are accrued for financial reporting purposes.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E19-9 (Carryback and Carryforward of NOL, No Temporary Differences)
The pretax financial income (or loss) figures of Synergetics Company are as follows.
|
2008
|
177,400
|
|
2009
|
259,300
|
|
2010
|
85,600
|
|
2011
|
(177,400)
|
|
2012
|
(388,500)
|
|
2013
|
125,000
|
|
2014
|
105,800
|
Pretax financial income (or loss) and taxable income (loss) were the same for all years involved. Assume a 40% tax rate for 2008 and 2009 and a 35% tax rate for the remaining years.
Prepare the journal entries for the years 2010 to 2014 to record income tax expense and the effects of the net operating loss carrybacks and carry forwards, assuming Synergetic Company uses the carryback provision. All income and losses relate to normal operations. (In recording the benefits of a loss carry forward, assume that no valuation account is deemed necessary.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E17-7 Trading Securities Entries
On December 21, 2012, Zurich Company provided you with the following information regarding its trading securities.
December 31, 2012
|
Investments (Trading)
|
Cost
|
Fair Value
|
Unrealized Gain (Loss)
|
|
Stargate Corp. stock
|
20,380
|
19,380
|
(1,000)
|
|
Carolina Co. stock
|
12,980
|
11,980
|
(1,000)
|
|
Vectorman Co. stock
|
20,380
|
20,910
|
530
|
|
Total Portfolio
|
53,740
|
52,270
|
(1,470)
|
|
Previous securities fair value adjustment balance – Securities fair value adjustment—Cr.
|
$(1,470)
|
During 2013, Carolina Company stock was sold for $12,550. The fair value of the stock on December 31, 2013, was: Stargate Corp. stock – $19,780; Vectorman Co. stock – $20,770.
Instructions:
(a) Prepare the adjusting journal entry needed on December 31, 2012.
(b) Prepare the journal entry to record the sale of the Carolina Company stock during 2013.
(c) Prepare the adjusting journal entry needed on December 31, 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E17-12 Journal Entries for Fair Value and Equity Methods
Presented below are two independent situations.
Situation 1
Hatcher Cosmetics acquired 10% of the 221,000 shares of common stock of Ramirez Fashion at a total cost of $15 per share on March 18, 2012. On June 30, Ramirez declared and paid a $77,800 cash dividend. On December 31, Ramirez reported net income of $127,900 for the year. At December 31, the market price of Ramirez Fashion was $16 per share. The securities are classified as available-for-sale.
Situation 2
Holmes, Inc. obtained significant influence over Nadal Corporation by buying 25% of Nadal’s 34,000 outstanding shares of common stock at a total cost of $11 per share on January 1, 2012. On June 15, Nadal declared and paid a cash dividend of $37,000. On December 31, Nadal reported a net income of $93,500 for the year
Instruction:
Prepare all necessary journal entries in 2012 for each situation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P17-3 Available-for-Sale Investments
Cardinal Paz Corp. carries an account in its general ledger called Investments, which contained debits for investment purchases, and no credits, with the following descriptions.
Feb. 1, 2012 Sharapova Company common stock, $105 par, 210 shares 36,700
1-Apr U.S. government bonds, 12%, due April 1, 2022, interest payable April 1 and October 1, 111 bonds of $1,000 par each 111,000
1-Jul McGrath Company 12% bonds, par $50,600, dated March 1, 2012 purchased at 104 plus accrued interest, interest payable annually on March 1, due March 1, 2032 54,648
Instructions:
a. Prepare entries necessary to classify the amounts into proper accounts, assuming that all the securities are classified as available-for-sale.
b. Prepare the entry to record the accrued interest and the amortization of premium on December 31, 2010, using the straight-line method. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,500. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually).
c. The fair values of the securities on December 31, 2010, were: Sharapova Company common stock 32,130
|
U.S. government bonds
|
147,820
|
|
McGrath Company bonds
|
59,750
|
What entry or entries, if any, would you recommend be made? (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 25,000.)
d. The U.S. government bonds were sold on July 1,2013, for $120,100 plus accrued interest. Give the proper entry.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(1) On December 31, 2013, Nanotech Company invests $20,000 in SoftPlus, a variable interest entity. In contractual agreements completed on that date, PanTech established itself as the primary beneficiary of SoftPlus. Previously, PanTech had no equity interest in SoftPlus. Immediately after PanTech’s investment, SoftPlus presents the following balance sheet: Cash $ 20,000 Long-term debt $120,000 Marketing software 140,000 Non-controlling interest 60,000 Computer equipment 40,000 PanTech equity interest 20,000 Total assets $200,000 Total liabilities and equity 200,000 Each of the above amounts represents an assessed fair value at December 31, 2013, except for the marketing software. a. If the marketing software was undervalued by $20,000, what amounts for SoftPlus would appear in PanTech’s December 31, 2013, consolidated financial statements? b. If the marketing software was overvalued by $20,000, what amounts for SoftPlus would appear in PanTech’s December 31, 2013, consolidated financial statements? (2) On January 1, 2012, Travers Company acquired 90 percent of Yarrow Company’s outstanding stock for $720,000. The 10 percent non-controlling interest had an assessed fair value of $80,000 on that date. Any acquisition-date excess fair value over book value was attributed to an unrecorded customer list developed by Yarrow with a remaining life of 15 years. On the same date, Yarrow acquired an 80 percent interest in Stookey Company for $344,000. At the acquisition date, the 20 percent non-controlling interest fair value was $86,000. Any excess fair value was attributed to a fully amortized copyright that had a remaining life of 10 years. Although both investments are accounted for using the initial value method, neither Yarrow nor Stookey have distributed dividends since the acquisition date. Travers has a policy to pay cash dividends each year equal to 40 percent of operating earnings. Reported income totals for 2012 follow: Travers Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $300,000 Yarrow Company. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,000 Stookey Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120,000 Following are the 2013 financial statements for these three companies. Stookey has transferred numerous amounts of inventory to Yarrow since the takeover amounting to $80,000 (2012) and $100,000 (2013). These transactions include the same markup applicable to Stookey’s outside sales. In each year, Yarrow carried 20 percent of this inventory into the succeeding year before disposing of it. An effective tax rate of 45 percent is applicable to all companies. Travers Yarrow Stookey Company Company Company Sales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (900,000) $ (600,000) (500,000) Cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480,000 320,000 260,000 Operating expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,000 80,000 40,000 Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (320,000) $ (200,000) $(100,000) Retained earnings, 1/1/13 . . . . . . . . . .$ (700,000) $ (600,000) $(300,000) Net income (above). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (320,000) (200,000) (100,000) Dividends paid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,000 –0– –0– Retained earnings, 12/31/13 . . . . . . $ (892,000) $ (800,000) $(400,000) Current assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 444,000 $ 380,000 $ 280,000 Investment in Yarrow Company . . . . . 720,000 –0– –0– Investment in Stookey Company . . . . . –0– 344,000 -0– Land, buildings, and equipment (net). 949,000 836,000 520,000 Total assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 2,113,000 $ 1,560,000 $ 800,000 Liabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (721,000) $ (460,000) $(200,000) Common stock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (500,000) (300,000) 200,000) Retained earnings, 12/31/13. . . . . . . . (892,000) (800,000) (400,000) Total liabilities and equities . . . . . . . $(2,113,000) $(1,560,000) $(800,000) a. Prepare the business combination’s 2013 consolidation worksheet; ignore income tax effects. b. Determine the amount of income tax for Travers and Yarrow on a consolidated tax return for 2013. c. Determine the amount of Stookey’s income tax on a separate tax return for 2013. d. Based on the answers to requirements (b) and (c), what journal entry does this combination make to record 2013 income tax? (3) Following is financial information describing the six operating segments that make up Fairfield, Inc. (in thousands): Segments Red Blue Green Pink Black White Sales to outside parties . . . . $1,811 $812 $514 $309 $121 $ 99 Intersegment revenues . . . . . . 16 91 109 –0– 16 302 Salary expense . . . . . . . . . . . . 614 379 402 312 317 62 Rent expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 166 81 92 42 31 Interest expense . . . . . . . . . . . 65 59 82 49 14 5 Income tax expense (savings) 141 87 61 (86) (64) –0– Consider the following questions independently. None of the six segments has a primarily financial nature. a. What minimum revenue amount must any one segment generate to be of significant size to require disaggregated disclosure? b. If only Red, Blue, and Green necessitate separate disclosure, is Fairfield disclosing disaggregated data for enough segments? c. What volume of revenues must a single client generate to necessitate disclosing the existence of a major customer? d. If each of these six segments has a profit or loss (in thousands) as follows, which warrants separate disclosure? Red. . . . . . . . . . $1,074 Pink . . . . . . . . $ (94) Blue . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Black . . . . . . . . . (222) Green . . . . . . . . . . 140 White. . . . . . . . . 308
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please, provide detailed as possible explanation
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Xenon, Inc.’s August 31 Banl Statement had an ending cash balance of $2,657. On August 31, Xenon’s general ledger showed a balance of $860. After comparing the general ledger to the bank statement, the following items were noted:
– Outstanding checks, $2,250
– Interest paid by the bank, $12
– An NSF check from one of Xenon’s customers, $32
– Deposits in transit, $1,900
– Service fee charged by the bank, $8
– A direct deposit from a customer, $1,400
– Check #345 was written to Acme Insurance; the amount of the check was $615. It was recorded in the general ledger for $600.
Prepare a bank reconciliation for Xenon, Inc.
Make the required journal entries associated with the bank reconciliation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected transactions from the journal of Roberta Mendez, investment broker, are presented below.
|
Date
|
|
Account Titles and Explanation
|
|
Ref.
|
|
Debit
|
|
Credit
|
|
Aug.1
|
|
Cash
|
|
|
|
5,000
|
|
|
| |
|
Common Stock
|
|
|
|
|
|
5,000
|
| |
|
(Investment of cash for stock)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
10
|
|
Cash
|
|
|
|
2,700
|
|
|
| |
|
Service Revenue
|
|
|
|
|
|
2,700
|
| |
|
(Received cash for services provided)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
12
|
|
Equipment
|
|
|
|
5,000
|
|
|
| |
|
Cash
|
|
|
|
|
|
1,000
|
| |
|
Notes Payable
|
|
|
|
|
|
4,000
|
| |
|
(Purchased office equipment for cash and notes payable)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
25
|
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
|
|
1,600
|
|
|
| |
|
Service Revenue
|
|
|
|
|
|
1,600
|
| |
|
(Billed clients for services provided)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
31
|
|
Cash
|
|
|
|
850
|
|
|
| |
|
Accounts Receivable
|
|
|
|
|
|
850
|
| |
|
(Receipt of cash on account)
|
Instructions
(a) Post the transactions to T-accounts.
(b) Prepare a trial balance at August 31,2014.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1 SLBC100 Accounting 1 Teaching Period 3, 2013 SLBC100 Accounting 1 Assessment 2: Ratio analysis report Word limit: 1000 (+/-10%) Weighting: 25% Due date: 9am AEDT Monday 27 January (Week 10) Assessment overview You are a bank manager, assessing whether or not you will approve a $50,000 finance facility for Simon Sergio, the owner of Safety Styles Pty Ltd. The bank’s procedures require you to assess the profitability, efficiency, liquidity and capital structure of the business using financial ratios.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For my final thesis, I was provided with the following topic: IAS2: Inventories
The instructions as follow:
You are required to research the current critique that exists with respect to the following International Accounting Standard.
DO NOT provide a long overview of the Standard itself. A brief description may be provided, but the purpose is to summarise international critique with respect to the particular Standard. Your dissertation should clearly indicate proper research on the following:
> A brief overview of the Standard
> Positive international critique with respect to the Standard (perceived strengths)
> Negative international critique with respect to the Standard (perceived weaknesses)
> Practical evidence supporting your findings (may be cited)
> A summary of international recommendations as to how the standard can be improved.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Requires a group to undertake some research, the assignment aims to develop understanding of
financial statements and their use in decision-making.
The task is to analyse and compare 2 publicly listed companies specifically in the same industry,
(use ASX’s website to select a company) and be able to understand the structure of financial
statements.
1) The group needs to give a general overview of the company regarding its Mission Statement,
Vision Statement and business structure. (9 marks)
2) Review (Compare) the Last 2 years balance sheet (pref: 2011 and 2010) of the 2 companies
and indicate the following: (3 marks)
? The amount of total current assets
? The amount of total non-current assets
? The amount of total current liabilities
? The amount of total non-current liabilities
? The amount of total stockholder’s equity
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
how to get the journal entries
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Prepare journal entries to record the following merchandising transactions of Sheng Company.
|
Aug.1
|
Purchased merchandise from Arotek Company for $7,000 under credit terms of 1/10, n/30, invoice dated august1.
|
|
8
|
Purchased merchandise from waters corporation for $5,400 under credit terms of 1/10, n/45, FOB shipping point, invoice dated August 8. The invoice showed that sheng’s request, waters paid the $140 shipping charges and added that amount to the bill.
|
|
12
|
After negotiations with waters corporation concerning problems with the merchandise purchased on august 8, Sheng received a credit memorandum from Waters granting a price reduction of $700.
|
|
30
|
Paid Arotek Company the amount due from the August 1 purchase.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Click the link above to submit your assignment.
Students, please view the “Submit a Clickable Rubric Assignment” in the Student Center.
Instructors, training on how to grade is within the Instructor Center.
Assignment 1: Review of Accounting Ethics
Due Week 3 and worth 200 points
Many organizations have been in the news over the past few years due to accounting ethical breaches that have affected their customers, employees, or the general public. Search the Internet or the Strayer Library to locate a story in the news that depicts an accounting ethical breach. You may select from any type of organization about which you have information or a curiosity.
Write a four to five (4-5) page paper in which you:
- Given the corporate ethical breaches in recent times, assess whether or not you believe that the current business and regulatory environment is more conducive to ethical behavior. Provide support for your answer.
- Based on your research, describe the organization, the accounting ethical breach and the impact to the organization related to ethical breach.
- Determine how the organizational ethical issue was detected and how management failed to create an ethical environment.
- Analyze the accounts impacted and / or accounting guidelines violated and the resulting impact to the business operation.
- As a CFO, recommend which measures could have been taken to prevent this ethical breach and how each measure should be implemented in the future.
- Use at least four (4) quality academic resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.
Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:
- Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
- Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student’s name, the professor’s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.
The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:
- Examine accounting principles and concepts used in businesses.
- Prepare and record financial transactions in the accounting cycle according to GAAP and IFRS accounting methodology.
- Use technology and information resources to research issues in financial accounting.
- Write clearly and concisely about financial accounting using proper writing mechanics.
Clickhereto view the grading rubric for this assignment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Stratford Company distributes a lightweight lawn chair that sells for $120 per unit. Variable expenses are $60.00 per unit, and fixed expenses total $200,000 annually.
| Required: |
| 1. |
What is the product’s CM ratio?(Do not round intermediate calculations. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)
|
| 2. |
Use the CM ratio to determine the break-even point in sales dollars.(Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
| Break-even point in sales dollars |
$ |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Journalizing Transactions in a Perpetual Inventory System
One Price is Nice sells various types of jeans and uses a perpetual inventory system. All jeans, regardless of style, are sold for $35 per pair. Following are selected transactions of the One Price is Nice for April 2009.
April 6 – Purchased 30 pairs of style #256 jeans with terms of 2/10, n/30; the per unit cost was $22.
April 9 – Returned ten pairs of the #256 jeans purchased on April 6 due to fabric laws
April 13 – Sold two pairs of style #321 jeans for cash; the per-unit cost of these jeans was $21
April 16 – Paid amount due to the supplier for jeans purchased on April 6.
April 17 – Purchased 12 pairs of style #157 jeans with terms of 2/10, n/30; the per-unit cost was $18.
April 20 – Sold one pair of #155 jeans on credit; the cost of this pair was $24.
April 21 – A customer returned a pair of style #808 jeans because it was the wrong size; the jeans, which cost $20, were returned to inventory.
April 27 – Sold two pairs of style &101 jeans on credit; the per-unit cost of these jeans was $17.
April 27 – Paid amount due to the supplier for jeans purchased on April 17.
Prepare the journal entries necessary to record these transactions for One Price is Nice.
Inventory Costing Methods
The following schedule summarizes the inventory purchases and sales of Brooks Street Enterprises during January 2009.
Per unit Per Unit
# of Unitscost Selling Price
BI 400 $40
Jan 2 purchase 200 44
Jan 5 sale 300 $80
Jan 9 purchase 200 48
Jan 14 sale350 90
Jan 18 purchase 200 50
Jan 21 sale 15090
Jan 25 purchase 50052
Jan 31 sale450 100
Determine Brook Street’s ending inventory, cost of goods sold, and gross profit for January 2009, assuming the company uses a perpetual inventory system and the following inventory costing methods: (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) moving-average.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shareholders and lenders, whilst not being the only stakeholders, provide capital to companies because they seek a return commensurate with the level of risk that they are willing to take.
It is within this context that Volkswagen AG, registered in Germany, manufactures and sells vehicles.
The price of Volkswagen AG’s ordinary shares have experienced a mixed performance over recent years and after the global recession the company has not returned to its share price high of late 2009.
Recent share price performance can be seen on the graph below:
However, as can be seen from the brief article overleaf, there may be some good news for Volkswagen:
VW cracks 6m in eight months Roberts, Graeme.
just – auto global news [Bromsgrove] 13 Sep 2013.
Volkswagen Group has sold over 6m vehicles in the first eight months of a year for the first time.
Sales from January to August 2013 rose 4.5% to 6.17m though August volume inched up just 0.1% to 720,400 units.
“The Volkswagen Group is in robust shape despite the economic uncertainty, and our development in the period to August remained satisfactory,” sales chief Christian Klingler said. “Notwithstanding the difficult conditions, we still expect deliveries for the full year to exceed the prior year level.”
For full details, click on ‘press release’.
Press release follows:
Volkswagen Group delivers over 6 million vehicles in period to August
* 4.5 percent increase in January – August deliveries to 6.17 million units*
* Situation in August on difficult world markets remained stable with deliveries running at 720,400 units (+0.1 percent)*
* Group Board Member for Sales Christian Klingler: “Satisfactory development despite economic uncertainties. Still expect to grow worldwide deliveries for full year.”
Wolfsburg, September 13, 2013 – For the first time the Volkswagen Group delivered over 6 million vehicles in the first eight months of a year. The company grew deliveries from January to August 2013 to 6.17 (January-August 2012: 5.91; +4.5 percent)* million vehicles. Deliveries in the month of August remained stable at 720,400 units (August 2012: 719,500; +0.1 percent)*. “The Volkswagen Group is in robust shape despite the economic uncertainty, and our development in the period to August remained satisfactory. For the first time, we delivered over six million vehicles to customers in the first eight months of a year,” Group Board Member for Sales Christian Klingler said in Wolfsburg on Friday, and added: “Notwithstanding the difficult conditions, we still expect deliveries for the full year to exceed the prior-year level.”
The Group brands delivered a total of 2.39 (2.47; -3.3 percent) million vehicles to customers on the overall European market from January to August. In Western Europe (excluding Germany), 1.22 (1.25; -2.7 percent) million customers took possession of a new vehicle. 757,300 (792,300; -4.4 percent) vehicles were delivered on the home market of Germany. The Group handed over 415,000 (426,700; -2.7 percent) vehicles to customers in the Central and Eastern Europe region in the period to August, of which 199,800 (206,800; -3.4 percent) units were delivered in Russia.
Trends varied in the Americas. Deliveries in the North America region in the period to August grew by 10.9 percent to 593,700 (535,300) vehicles, of which 414,800 (379,900; +9.2 percent) units were handed over to customers in the United States. The Volkswagen Group delivered 605,600 (678,500; -10.8 percent) vehicles in the South America region during the same period, of which 447,600 (518,700; -13.7 percent) units were handed over to customers in Brazil.
Group delivery figures for the Asia-Pacific region remained encouraging. 2.30 (1.98; +16.2 percent) million vehicles were handed over to customers there in the first eight months. In China (excluding Hong Kong), the region’s largest single market, deliveries topped the two million mark for the first time in an eight-month period, with 2.05 (1.74; +17.9 percent) million customers taking possession of a new vehicle. In India 63,600 (77,400; -17.9 percent) customers took delivery of a new Group model.
Outline of developments at Group brands
The Volkswagen Passenger Cars brand delivered 3.84 (3.72; +3.1 percent) million vehicles worldwide from January to August. The brand developed particularly well in China, where 1.56 (1.31; +18.4 percent) million units were handed over to customers, and in Mexico, where 92,100 (77,800; +18.3 percent) customers took possession of a new Volkswagen.
Audi delivered 1.03 (0.96) vehicles worldwide in the period to August; this not only represented an increase of 7.2 percent, but was also a new record for this period. The premium brand from Ingolstadt benefited inter alia from significant growth in China, where 310,300 (259,700; +19.5 percent) vehicles were handed over to customers. The brand also grew deliveries in the United States by 14.7 percent compared with the same prior-year period, handing over 101,300 (88,400) automobiles.
The sports car manufacturer Porsche, which became a Volkswagen Group brand on August 1, 2012, delivered a total of 106,800 vehicles in the first eight months. At 32,500 units, the Asia-Pacific region accounted for the largest share, with a further 31,400 units handed over to customers in the North America region.
The SKODA brand delivered 598,400 (633,300; -5.5 percent) vehicles worldwide from January to August. The company handed over 393,200 (415,000; -5.2 percent) models on the overall European market. 156,300 (159,400; -1.9 percent) vehicles were delivered in China during the same period.
SEAT delivered 234,200 (210,100; +11.4 percent) vehicles worldwide in the period to August. The company handed over 191,700 (176,700; +8.5 percent) vehicles to customers on the overall European market. Developments on the German market were particularly encouraging, with deliveries there increasing by 26.4 percent to 50,600 (40,000) units.
Volkswagen Commercial Vehicles continued to record stable development in the period to August, delivering 358,400 (362,200; -1.1 percent) vehicles. 104,200 (106,100; -1.8 percent) vehicles were delivered to customers in Western Europe (excluding Germany) under difficult market conditions. In contrast, deliveries in the South America region developed well, with customers taking delivery of 104,100 (96,100; +8.2 percent) units.
*) including deliveries by the Porsche brand from August 1, 2012; excluding MAN and Scania
Original source: VW
Credit: Graeme Roberts
You have requested “on-the-fly” machine translation of selected content from our databases. This functionality is provided solely for your convenience and is in no way intended to replace human translation. Show full disclaimer
Neither ProQuest nor its licensors make any representations or warranties with respect to the translations. The translations are automatically generated “AS IS” and “AS AVAILABLE” and are not retained in our systems. PROQUEST AND ITS LICENSORS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES FOR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, TIMELINESS, COMPLETENESS, NON-INFRINGMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Your use of the translations is subject to all use restrictions contained in your Electronic Products License Agreement and by using the translation functionality you agree to forgo any and all claims against ProQuest or its licensors for your use of the translation functionality and any output derived there from. Hide full disclaimer Translations powered by LEC.
Translations powered by LEC.
Copyright Aroq Limited Sep 13, 2013
It is possible to see a great deal of background information on Volkswagen AG at the corporate website:
http://www.volkswagenag.com/content/vwcorp/content/en/homepage.html
In addition, there are almost limitless articles concerning Volkswagen AG within the DMU library databases.
You are required to do as follows:
Task One
Using the Annual Report and Accounts of VOLKSWAGEN AG:
(available at: http://www.volkswagen.co.uk/about-us/company/annual-reports)
You should:
- Evaluate the performance of VOLKSWAGEN in the following areas, using ratio analysis:
- Profitability
- Liquidity/Solvency
- Working capital efficiency
- Long term financial structure
- Investors’ perspective
You should summarise your findings and make
particular reference to the interests of the different stakeholders of the company.
- You may use earlier years’ financial accounts to supplement your analysis if you wish to be specific with certain trends that you have identified.
- In addition you could also consider the performance of VOLKSWAGEN in comparison with its peer group of competitors.
Note: Any accounting ratios for VOLKSWAGEN
must be calculated (and workings shown) and
not extracted from external databases, although, further analysis may be supported by downloading ratios from external databases for competitor companies.
(60% weighting)
Task Two
Considering your response to Task One and any other, well-researched, ‘fundamental’ information that may impact on VOLKSWAGEN, you are required to provide advice, accompanied by rationale, as to whether you would recommend a buy, sell or hold (if they are already owned) policy for investors/potential investors in VOLKSWAGEN shares.
Note that the ‘fundamental’ information may relate to the car manufacturing industry, in general, as well as to VOLKSWAGEN, specifically.
(40% weighting)
(Total 100%)
Additional Information
You are required to present well structured answers of no more than 2,000 words (excluding calculations) in total. The words should be allotted according to the percentage marks awarded for each task.
Learning Outcomes specifically assessed:
Subject Specific Knowledge and Skills
- Identify and critically appraise the different components of a financial report, and assess the adequacy of current international financial reporting requirements for a greater understanding of company performance
- Analyse and interpret financial data and information, evaluate their relevance and validity, and synthesise a range of information in the context of business situations
- Demonstrate the ability to use conventional management accounting and financial management techniques to produce appropriate information for management to aid planning, control and decision making
- Evaluate the usefulness of contemporary management accounting techniques in measuring business performance
- Critically appraise management accounting techniques with respect to their effectiveness and identify any weaknesses inherent in their use
Non Subject Specific and Cognitive Skills
- Manage own learning, using the available range of resources, and ability to conduct research into business and management issues
- Ability to collect relevant information relating to a given situation, analyse that information and synthesise it into an appropriate form in order to evaluate decision alternatives
- Demonstrate a practical and integrative approach to a problem area or issue
- Demonstrate rigour of academic arguments as well as the application of theory
Assignments will be graded according to the general postgraduate assessment criteria and you should also bear the following in mind:
- Evidence of critical judgement in selecting, ordering and analysing content in order to present a sound argument
- The demonstration and understanding of relevant concepts and models
- The demonstration of insight and originality in responding to the assignment
- The provision of well-referenced evidence
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
There is an instruction page on sheet 1 of the excel document. Please provide solutions on all tabs. Grading rubric is also on this document.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Enter the missing valuesin the following financial statements. Assume the company started operations January 1, 2013, and all transactions involve cash. (Amounts in parentheses do not require a minus sign in front of them.)
|
For the Years
|
|
2013 |
2014 |
2015 |
| Income Statements |
| Revenue |
$ |
430 |
|
$ |
530 |
|
$ |
830 |
|
| Expense |
|
(265 |
) |
|
( |
) |
|
(440 |
) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Net income |
$ |
|
|
$ |
115 |
|
$ |
390 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Statement of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity |
| Beginning common stock |
$ |
0 |
|
$ |
|
|
$ |
9,700 |
|
| Plus: Common stock issued |
|
|
|
|
1,400 |
|
|
340 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Ending common stock |
$ |
8,300 |
|
$ |
9,700 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Beginning retained earnings |
|
0 |
|
|
31 |
|
|
81 |
|
| Plus: Net income |
|
|
|
|
115 |
|
|
390 |
|
| Less: Dividends |
|
( |
) |
|
(65 |
) |
|
(159 |
) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Ending retained earnings |
|
31 |
|
|
|
|
|
312 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Total stockholders’ equity |
$ |
|
|
$ |
9,781 |
|
$ |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Balance Sheets |
| Assets |
| Cash |
$ |
|
|
$ |
|
|
$ |
|
|
| Land |
|
0 |
|
|
|
|
|
2,650 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Total assets |
$ |
12,000 |
|
$ |
12,650 |
|
$ |
11,500 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Liabilities |
$ |
|
|
$ |
|
|
$ |
1,148 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Stockholders’ equity |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Common stock |
$ |
|
|
$ |
|
|
$ |
10,040 |
|
| Retained earnings |
|
|
|
|
81 |
|
|
312 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Total stockholders’ equity |
|
8,331 |
|
|
9,781 |
|
|
10,352 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity |
$ |
12,000 |
|
$ |
12,650 |
|
$ |
11,500 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Statements of Cash Flows |
| Cash flows from operating activities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Cash receipts from customers |
$ |
|
|
$ |
530 |
|
$ |
|
|
| Cash payments for expenses |
|
( |
) |
|
(415 |
) |
|
( |
) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Net cash flows from operating activities |
|
165 |
|
|
115 |
|
|
390 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Cash flows from investing activities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Cash payments for land |
|
0 |
|
|
(5,300 |
) |
|
0 |
|
| Cash receipt from sale of land |
|
0 |
|
|
0 |
|
|
2,650 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Net cash flows from investing activities |
|
0 |
|
|
(5,300 |
) |
|
2,650 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Cash flows from financing activities |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Cash receipts from borrowed funds |
|
3,669 |
|
|
0 |
|
|
0 |
|
| Cash payments to reduce debt |
|
0 |
|
|
(800 |
) |
|
( |
) |
| Cash receipts from stock issue |
|
8,300 |
|
|
1,400 |
|
|
|
|
| Cash payments for dividends |
|
(134 |
) |
|
(65 |
) |
|
( |
) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Net cash flows from financing activities |
|
11,835 |
|
|
535 |
|
|
(1,540 |
) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Net change in cash |
|
12,000 |
|
|
(4,650 |
) |
|
1,500 |
|
| Plus: Beginning cash balance |
|
0 |
|
|
12,000 |
|
|
7,350 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Ending cash balance |
$ |
12,000 |
|
$ |
7,350 |
|
$ |
8,850 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$ |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Alternative Depreciation Methods
Brad Jolie recently decided to open a restaraunt specializing in New Orleans cuisine. He purchased a restaraunt building on January 2, 2009, at a cost of $650,000, paying 10 percent of the purchase price in cash and signing a note for the balance. The building has an estimated useful life of 25 years and an estimated salvage value of $150,000. Also on January 2, 2009, Jolie paid cash of $80,000 for used kitchen equipment with an estimated four-year useful life and $8,000 salvage value.
a. Prepare the journal entries to record the purchase of the building and the kitchen equipment.
b. Compute depreciation expense for 2009 and 2010 on the restaraunt using the following methods:
(1) Straight line
(2) Double-declining balance
c. Prepare the year-end adjusting journal entries to record the depreciation expense amounts computed in part (a)
Comprehensive Problem
A partial balance sheet is presented for Withers Industries
Partial Balance Sheet
December 31, 2008
Property, Plant & Equipment
Delivery Truck $35,000
Less Accumulated Depreciation (18,750) 16,250
Office Equipment $45,000
Less Accumulated Depreciation (35,280)9,720
Factory Machinery$100,000
Less Accumulated Depreciation (36,800) 63,200
Total Property, Plant, & Equipment$89,170
Intangible Assets
Patents $7,000
Notes
The delivery truck was purchased on June 30, 2006, and is being depreciated over four years usingthe straight-line method. Salvage value wasestimated at $5,000.
The office equipment was purchased on January 2, 2006, and isbeing depreciated over five years using the double-declining balance method. Salvage was estimated at $4,000.
The factory machinery was purchased onJanuary 2, 2005, and is being depreciated over ten years using the straight-line method. Salvage value was estimated at $8,000.
The remaining useful life on the patent is seven years.
(a) On July 31, 2009, Withers sold the delivery truck for $9,000 cash. Prepare any necessary journal entries to record this sale.
(b) OnDecember 1, 2009, Withers purchased land and a building for a combined cost of $400,000 by paying $100,000 cash and signing a note for the balance. An appraiser estimates the values of the building and land are, respectively, $302,500 and $247,500. Withers plans to use the building for ten years, atwhich time the building will probably be worth $50,000. Withers plans to use straight-line depreciation on the building. Journalize this purchase.
(c)Record all necessary depreciation and amortization entries on December 31, 2009.
(d) Prepare a partial balance sheet for Withers on December 31, 2009.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E10-9Northeast Airlines is considering two alternatives for the financing of a purchase of a
fleet of airplanes.These two alternatives are:
1. Issue 60,000 shares of common stock at $45 per share. (Cash dividends have not been paid nor
is the payment of any contemplated.)
2. Issue 10%, 10-year bonds at par for $2,700,000.
It is estimated that the company will earn $800,000 before interest and taxes as a result of this
purchase.The company has an estimated tax rate of 30% and has 90,000 shares of common stock
outstanding prior to the new financing.
Instructions
Determine the effect on net income and earnings per share for these two methods of financing.
E10-10On January 1, Neuer Company issued $500,000, 10%, 10-year bonds at par. Interest is
payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1.
Instructions
Present journal entries to record the following.
(a) The issuance of the bonds.
(b) The payment of interest on July 1, assuming that interest was not accrued on June 30.
(c)The accrual of interest on December 31
E10-11On January 1, Flory Company issued $300,000, 8%, 5-year bonds at face value.
Interest is payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1.
Instructions
Prepare journal entries to record the following events.
(a) The issuance of the bonds.
(b) The payment of interest on July 1, assuming no previous accrual of interest.
(c)The accrual of interest on December 31.
E10-15Leoni Co. receives $240,000 when it issues a $240,000, 10%, mortgage note payable to
finance the construction of a building at December 31, 2011. The terms provide for semiannual
installment payments of $20,000 on June 30 and December 31.
Instructions
Prepare the journal entries to record the mortgage loan and the first two installment payments.
*E10-18Hrabik Corporation issued $600,000, 9%, 10-year bonds on January 1, 2011, for
$562,613.This price resulted in an effective-interest rate of 10% on the bonds. Interest is payable
semiannually on July 1 and January 1. Hrabik uses the effective-interest method to amortize
bond premium or discount.
Instructions
Prepare the journal entries to record the following. (Round to the nearest dollar.)
(a) The issuance of the bonds.
(b) The payment of interest and the discount amortization on July 1, 2011, assuming that interest
was not accrued on June 30.
(c)The accrual of interest and the discount amortization on December 31, 2011.
*P10-8ASoprano Electric sold $3,000,000, 10%, 10-year bonds on January 1, 2011. The bonds
were dated January 1 and pay interest July 1 and January 1. Soprano Electric uses the straightline
method to amortize bond premium or discount. The bonds were sold at 104. Assume no
interest is accrued on June 30.
Instructions
(a)Prepare the journal entry to record the issuance of the bonds on January 1, 2011.
(b)Prepare a bond premium amortization schedule for the first 4 interest periods.
(c)Prepare the journal entries for interest and the amortization of the premium in 2011 and
2012.
(d)Show the balance sheet presentation of the bond liability at December 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For written assignment Ch7 P3 page 279 in the textbook there is a printing error forVariable Overheadin the Master Budget Column, it should be(40,000)instead of (90,000) that is printed
The Contribution Margin is correct 90,000
Also, there are quite a few issues/errors with the Author provided templates.
So please use the attached templates provided forCh7 Problem 3( with hints and steps to follow) andCh13 P5(provided with check figure) both worksheets are attached within one file.
Let me know if you have any question or concerns
Link to book:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I need an excell forma answers for this problem
Journalizing and posting adjustments to the T-accounts and preparing an adjusted trial balance The unadjusted trial balance of Arlington Air Purification System at December 31, 2014, and the data needed for the adjustment% follow.
ARLINGTON AIR PURIFICATION SYSTEM Unadjusted Trial Balance December 31. 2014
Balance Account Title Debit Credit Cash S 7,700 Accounts Receivable 19.200 Piebald Rent 2.400 Office Supplies 1,300 Equesment 19,900 Accumulated DePrecabon—Eciuroment S 4,300 Accounts Payable 3.600 Salarres Payable Unearned Revenue 2.600 Arington, CapItal 39.500
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chippewas Company sells one product. Presented below is information for January for the Chippewas Company.
Jan. 1 Inventory 100 units at $6 each
4 Sale 80 units at $8 each
11 Purchase 150 units at $6.50 each
13 Sale 120 units at $8.75 each
20 Purchase 160 units at $7 each
27 Sale 100 units at $9 each
Chippewas uses the FIFO cost flow assumption. All purchases and sales are on account.
(a) Assume Chippewas uses a periodic system. Prepare all necessary journal entries, including the end-of-month closing entry to record cost of goods sold. A physical count indicates that the ending inventory for January is 110 units. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)
Date Description/Account Debit Credit
Jan. 4
Jan. 11
Jan. 13
Jan. 20
Jan. 27
Jan. 31
(b) Compute gross profit using the periodic system.
$
(c) Assume Chippewas uses a perpetual system. Prepare all necessary journal entries.
Date Description/Account Debit Credit
Jan. 4
Inventory
Jan. 11
Jan. 13 Accounts receivable
Jan. 20
Jan. 27 Accounts receivable
(d) Compute gross profit using the perpetual system.
$
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I have attached the Case Study below.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
How to do Verona springs mineral water income statement?
| Journal Entries |
|
Dr. |
Cr. |
|
|
|
|
| Cash |
|
$500,000 |
|
|
Common Stock |
|
$ 500,000 |
|
|
|
|
| Principle Payments |
|
$ 60,000 |
|
|
Principle Payments Payable |
|
$ 60,000 |
|
|
|
|
| Interest |
|
$ 18,000 |
|
|
Interest Payable |
|
$ 18,000 |
|
|
|
|
| Land |
|
$ 525,000 |
|
|
Cash |
|
$ 525,000 |
|
|
|
|
| Drilling |
|
$ 1,000 |
|
|
Cash |
|
$ 1,000 |
|
|
|
|
| Bldg and equipment |
|
$ 240,000 |
|
|
Cash |
|
$ 240,000 |
|
|
|
|
| Inventory |
|
$ 6,300 |
|
|
Accounts Payable |
|
$ 6,300 |
|
|
|
|
| Inventory |
|
$500 |
|
|
Accounts Payable |
|
$500 |
|
|
|
|
| Accounts Receivable |
|
$5,000 |
|
|
Cash |
|
$5,000 |
|
|
|
|
| Accounts Receivable |
|
$10,000 |
|
|
Sales Revenue |
|
$10,000 |
|
|
|
|
| Wages |
|
$1,500 |
|
|
Wages Payable |
|
$1,500 |
|
|
|
|
| Delivery Service |
|
$900 |
|
|
Services Payable |
|
$900 |
|
|
|
|
| Principle Loan |
|
$300,000 |
|
|
Loan payable |
|
$300,000 |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
variable cost per unit/direct material=25dollar; direct labor=6 dollar; variable manufacture overhead=5 dollar; varaiable selling adm=2 dollar fix cost per yr-fix manufacturing overhead=300;000; fix selling/adm exp=180;000 -During the ist-iyr of operation; this company produce 60;000 unit and sold 60;000 unit/ during the 2nd yr it produce 70,000 unit and sold 50;00 unit. in the third yr;this company produce 40,000 unit and sold 65;00 unit. the selling price of the company product is 56 dollar per unit/ question i need to answer- i need to find the breakeven point that it sold. assume the company use variable costing 1. comute the unit product cost for ist yr; 2nd yr; and 3rd yr i need to prepare a income statement for the ist yr; 2nd yr and 3 rd yr/ question-Assume this company use absorption cost i need to compute the unit cost for 1st yr; 2nd yr and 3rd yr/ question i need to compare the net operation income figure that require 2nd yr; 3rd yr to get the breaing point/ question which net operating income figure seem counteeintutes and why/ can u assit me with facts and solution please jacdumb
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Variable cost per unit-direct material=6 dollar; direct labor=12 dollar; variable factory overhead=4 dollar; variable selling=3 dollar/ total variable cost per unit=25 dollar– fix cost per month-fix manufacturing overhead=240,000; fix selling=180.000 total fix cost per month=420,000– the product sell for 40 dollar per unit; production and sale data for month of may and june-unit produce-may=30,000- june=30,000/unit sold may=26,00 in june 34,000/ LIncome statement prepare by the account dept using absorbition cost- Sale may=1040.000 june=1,360.00/ cost of good sold in may=780.00 in june=1020.000/ gross margin in may =260.000 in june=540;000/ selling exp in may=258.000 in june =282,000/ question- i need to determine the unit product cost under a. absorption cost ansd variable costing/ question i need to prepare contrbustion format variable costing income statement for may and june/ question i need to reconcile the variable costing and absortion costing net operation income/ question-the company account dept has determined the break even point to be 28,000 unit- per month- fix cost per month = 420, 000-unit cost margin=15 per unit= 28,000. upon reviewing the data the company president say something is fisht with theses data. the company account dept says the breakeven point is 28,000 unit per month. yet we only saw 26;000 unit in may. yet the income recieve show only 2;000 profit/ which figure do we believe/ question i needto prepare a brief expain what happen on the income statement 4 the month of may
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
During the ist month of operation the device was selling on the market very well.. ms scott was looking forward to a healty profit. yet she was angry to see a loss 4 the month on the income statement. the statement was prepare by her account service– Scott product inc- sale 40,000 unit=200.000 — vaiable exp- variable cost of good sold=80,000; variable selling exp=30,000=80k plus 30k=110k – contribition margin= 90,000– fix man- overhead=75,000- fix seeling exp=20,000 total=95,000 net operating took a loss of 5000/ ms scott is angry because of the loss 4 the month . She was plan to use her statement to show investor to purchase stock in hercompany/ a cpa friend of ms scott said she should use the absorption cost rather then the variable cost, the cpa inform ms scott if she use the absorption cost rather then variable then she would have made a profit for the month. base on the data of the company operation/ scott product inc- unit produce=60,000; unit sold =40,000- variable cost per unit– direct material=1.00; direct labor= 80 cents; variable overhead = 20 cents; variable selling exp= 75 cents/ question i need to complete the following-1. compare the unit product cost under absorpotion costing/2. redo the company income statement 4 the month using absorotion costing. 3. Was ms scott cpa friend was telling her the truth that she would make a profit; i need to explain/ question during the 2nd month of operation the company again produce 50,000 unit but sold 60,000 unit assume no change in total fix cost/ i need o prepare a contribtion format income statement 4 the month using variable costing/ i needto prepare a income statement 4 the month using absorption costing/ i need to reconcile the variable costing and cost operation income
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
3 major activities are carry out 4 the company animal concept; production and contract admin / the animal concept was carry out early stage when the company bid on the project. this is a tense activity that nvolve eveyone in the company so they can show their futureclient- the activity cost and the date / 1. Active cost pool-ainnal concept- animal production contract adm-/ activity- number of proosal; number of animation and number of contract/ Activity rate- 6,000 per prosal; 7,770 per min at animation 6,6000 per contract. there activity rate include all of the cost of the company expect 4 the cost of the company; there are no direct labor or direct material cost/ the analysis using the activity rate show the local market is not profitable/ the producer ask the company to bid which result in low rate. because of the work it is bill at a standard rate/ data activity- numbers of proprose-20- min=12 number of contract =8 – the total sale 4 local commerial amount is 240;000/ question i need to determined the cost of serving the local market/ question i need to prepare a report showing the margin serving the local market; the company has no direct material or direct labor cost/ question what would you recommend to management corcern the local market
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
this company makes 2 type of parts 1. ex300 2. tx500 absortion costing income is show below – precious manfacturing inc – income statement- Sale= 1,700.000; cost of good-sold =1.200.000/ gross margin- 5000.00 selling exp=550.000 net opertion =5000 a loss. this company produce and sold 60,000 unit of ex 300 at a price of 20 dollar per unit and 12.500 unit of tx 500at a price of 40 dollar per unit this company cost system manaufacturing over head product using overhead rate and direct labor as te base,/ ex300- direct material=366.325; direct labor= 120;000/ tx 500 direct material 162,550; direct labor = 42; 500 total directmaterial = 528;875 direct labor= 162500; total manu overhead = 508.625 total= 1.200.000. this company has create a active base cost system to evulate the profit of its product. a team survey show that the company that 50,000 and 100;000 of the company advertising couldbe divert to ex 300 and tx 500 by didtribute the company manufacture overhead to itsactivity/ Activity cost pool- manufacture overhead Activity ex 300 tx 500 total — 1 machines hrs – 198.250 – ex300= 90,000 tx 500= 62.500 total 152.500 setup hr=150.000 ex 300= 75 tx 500 300 tota 375 product numbers of production 100;000 ex 300= 1 tx 500= 1 total= 2 operation cost= 60;375 total overhead cost= 508,625 question i need to computer the product margin for ex 300 and tx 500 under the company traditon cost system/ question i need to compute the product margin for ex 300 and tx 500 under the activity base cost sytems/ question i need to prepare a comprasion of the traditional and active base cost assigment i need to explain why the tradtion and active base cost are different
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
this company make 2 type of boots 1. xactive 2 pathbreaker 1. AXactive boot- selling price per unit = 127.00; direct material per unit= 64.80 direct labor per unit= 18.20 direct labor per hr= 1.4 d4t estimat annual product = 25.000 unit/ path breaker boot- selling price per unit= 89.90; directmaterial per unit = 51.00 direct labor per unit = 13.000 direct labor hr per unit = 1.0 estimate annual product – 75.000/ this company has a traditional cost in which manufacture overhead is applied to unit base on direct labor hrs. daa concerning overhead anddirect labor hrs 4 the upcoming yr/ estimated total overhead=2,200.000 estimated total direct labor hours is 110.000// question compute the product margin 4 the xactive and the patbreaker product under the traditional cost sytem// question / this company is considering replacing it traditional costing system with a active base cost system that would assign it s manufactor overhead to the following 4 active cost and capacity cost- Active— estimated over head cost; expect activity total/ direct labor hrs est overhead cost = 797.500 expect activity xactive boot=35;00 pathbreak = 75,00 total =110.000/ both set up= 680.000 xactive=250 patbreak=150 total=400 / numbers of products= 650;000 estimate activity 1-xactiv/ path breaker=1 total=2 /others = 72.500 total manufacture over head is 2.200.000/ question i need to complete the project margin 4 Xactive boot and pathbreaker product under the actvity base cost system// question i need to prepare comparision of the direct and activity basecost assigment / explain why the traditional and activity base cost assigment are different
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Principles of Accounting BAP 11 Assignment 1 2013 Semester 3 Class Day/Time: ________________ Due Date: Week 6 Friday 17th January 2014 Time: 5 PM Total marks for all questions 75 Weight: 25% This is an individual assignment. The assignment consists of 6 questions all of which are to be attempted. Please submit into Moodle directly, by the due date. Late submissions will attract a penalty of 5% for each day it is late. This assignment must be your own work and submitted with an assignment cover sheet. Question 1. 25 marks The following questions are required to be answered relate to the course text Questions a) Statement of Cash flows direct method Chapter 18 ; Required i. Prepare a cash flow statement using the direct method for operating cash flows ii. Prepare a reconciliation of the [profit and cash provided by the operations b) Bank reconciliation 5 marks Required prepare a bank reconciliation for the Month ended the 31 March 2001 c) Accounting for Shares 10 marks Demons Ltd issued a prospectus for the issue of 100,000 $5.00 shares on 1 January2012.The prospectus required payment of $3.00 per share on application and $2.00 to be paid when called. The company received applications for 120,000 shares by the closing date of 28February 2012.100,000 shares were issued on 1 March 2012 with excess application money being refunded. On 30 April 2012 the company called the balance of $2.00 on the shares. All call money was received by 15 May 2012.On 30 June 2012 Demons Ltd declared and paid a dividend of 5 cents per share. Required: Prepare the journal entries for the year ended 30 June 2012 to account for the above transactions. d) Accounting for Liabilities 5 Marks Easy Company Ltd issues a debenture at a premium for a period of 10 years the company pays interest on 31 December and 1 July. The debenture has a par value of $1,000,000.00 and is issued at premium of 105 at an interest rate of 9% Prepare journal entries to reflect the following; i. issue of debentures on 1-July ii. payment of interest on 1 January iii. accrual on 31 March e) Accounting for Inventory 10 marks f) Analysis of Accounting Information 10 Marks g) Preparation of production and cash budget 10 marks Budget data unit sales January 25,000.00 February 30,000.00 March 32,000.00 selling price $ 10.00 per unit cash sales 20% during month of sale Collections on account 50% in month of sale Collections on account 25% after month of sale Amount uncollectable 5% balance on accounts receivable at 1 January $ 420,000.00 Of which $350,000 relates to December sales and the remainder related to November sales 5% of the total balance is uncollectable 1 prepare sales budget for the quarter 2 prepare cash collections budget for the quarter 3 Calculate the balance in accounts receivable at the end of March
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Herbert, Inc., acquired all of Rambis Company’s outstanding stock on January 1, 2012, for $574,000 in cash. Annual excess amortization of $12,000 results from this transaction. On the date of the takeover, Herbert reported retained earnings of $400,000, and Rambis reported a $200,000 balance. Herbert reported internal income of $40,000 in 2012 and $50,000 in 2013 and paid $10,000 in dividends each year. Rambis reported net income of $20,000 in 2012 and $30,000 in 2013 and paid $5,000 in dividends each year.
a. Assume that Herbert’s internal income figures above do not include any income from the subsidiary.
• If the parent uses the equity method, what is the amount reported as consolidated retained earnings on December 31, 2013?
• Would the amount of consolidated retained earnings change if the parent had applied either the initial value or partial equity method for internal accounting purposes?
b. Under each of the following situations, what is the Investment in Rambis account balance on Herbert’s books on January 1, 2013?
• The parent uses the equity method.
• The parent uses the partial equity method.
• The parent uses the initial value method.
c. Under each of the following situations, what is Entry
*C on a 2013 consolidation worksheet?
• The parent uses the equity method.
• The parent uses the partial equity method.
• The parent uses the initial value method.
(2) The Krause Corporation acquired 80 percent of the 100,000 outstanding voting shares of Leahy, Inc., for $6.30 per share on January 1, 2012. The remaining 20 percent of Leahy’s shares also traded actively at $6.30 per share before and after Krause’s acquisition. An appraisal made on that date determined that all book values appropriately reflected the fair values of Leahy’s underlying accounts except that a building with a 5-year life was undervalued by $45,000 and a fully amortized trademark with an estimated 10-year remaining life had a $60,000 fair value
At the acquisition date, Leahy reported common stock of $100,000 and retained earnings balance of $280,000.
Following are the separate financial statements for the year ending December 31, 2013:
Krause
Corporation Leahy, Inc.
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. $ (584,000) $(250,000)
Cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,000 95,000
Operating expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246,000 65,000
Dividend income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (16,000) –0–
Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . $ (160,000) $ (90,000)
Retained earnings, 1/1/13 . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . $ (700,000) $(350,000)
Net income (above) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . (160,000) (90,000)
Dividends paid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,000 20,000
Retained earnings, 12/31/13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (790,000) $(420,000)
Current assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 296,000 $ 191,000
Investment in Leahy, Inc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504,000 –0–
Buildings and equipment (net) . . . . . . . . . . .. . 680,000 390,000
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,000 144,000
Total assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1,580,000 $ 725,000
Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (470,000) $(205,000)
Common stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (320,000) (100,000)
Retained earnings, 12/31/13 (above) . . . . .. . (790,000) (420,000)
Total liabilities and equities . . . . . . . . . . . $(1,580,000) $(725,000)
a. Prepare a worksheet to consolidate these two companies as of December 31, 2013.
b. Prepare a 2013 consolidated income statement for Krause and Leahy.
c. If instead the non-controlling interest shares of Leahy had traded for $4.85 surrounding
Krause’s acquisition date, how would the consolidated statements change?
(3) Parker, Inc., acquires 70 percent of Sawyer Company for $420,000. The remaining 30 percent of Sawyer’s outstanding shares continue to trade at a collective value of $174,000. On the acquisition date, Sawyer has the following accounts:
Book Value Fair Value
Current assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 210,000 $ 210,000
Land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170,000 180,000
Buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300,000 330,000
Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (280,000) (280,000)
The buildings have a 10-year life. In addition, Sawyer holds a patent worth $140,000 that has a five-year life but is not recorded on its financial records. At the end of the year, the two companies report the following balances:
Parker Sawyer
Revenues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. $(900,000) $(600,000)
Expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600,000 400,000
a. Assume that the acquisition took place on January 1. What figures would appear in a consolidated income statement for this year?
b. Assume that the acquisition took place on April 1. Sawyer’s revenues and expenses occurred uniformly throughout the year. What amounts would appear in a consolidated income statement for this year?
(4) Placid Lake Corporation acquired 80 percent of the outstanding voting stock of Scenic, Inc., on January 1, 2012, when Scenic had a net book value of $400,000. Any excess fair value was assigned to intangible assets and amortized at a rate of $5,000 per year.
Placid Lake’s 2013 net income before consideration of its relationship with Scenic (and before adjustments for intra-entity sales) was $300,000. Scenic reported net income of $110,000.
Placid Lake distributed $100,000 in dividends during this period; Scenic paid $40,000. At the end of 2013, selected figures from the two companies’ balance sheets were as follows:
Placid Lake Scenic
Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . $140,000 $ 90,000
Land. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600,000 200,000
Equipment (net) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400,000 300,000
During 2012, intra-entity sales of $90,000 (original cost of $54,000) were made. Only
20 percent of this inventory was still held within the consolidated entity at the end of 2012. In
2013, $120,000 in intra-entity sales were made with an original cost of $66,000. Of this merchandise, 30 percent had not been resold to outside parties by the end of the year.
Each of the following questions should be considered as an independent situation for the year 2013.
a. What is consolidated net income for Placid Lake and its subsidiary?
b. If the intra-entity sales were upstream, how would consolidated net income be allocated to the controlling and non-controlling interest?
c. If the intra-entity sales were downstream, how would consolidated net income be allocated to the controlling and non-controlling interest?
d. What is the consolidated balance in the ending Inventory account?
e. Assume that no intra-entity inventory sales occurred between Placid Lake and Scenic. Instead, in 2012, Scenic sold land costing $30,000 to Placid Lake for $50,000. On the 2013 consolidated balance sheet, what value should be reported for land?
f. Assume that no intra-entity inventory or land sales occurred between Placid Lake and Scenic.
Instead, on January 1, 2012, Scenic sold equipment (that originally cost $100,000 but had a $60,000 book value on that date) to Placid Lake for $80,000. At the time of sale, the equipment had a remaining useful life of five years. What worksheet entries are made for a December 31, 2013, consolidation of these two companies to eliminate the impact of the intra-entity transfer? For 2013, what is the non-controlling interest’s share of Scenic’s net income?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Required:
Critically analyse and evaluate the arguments for, and against, for the case study.
Which arguments do you consider to be more compelling? (In other words, what is your
opinion?) (1000 words).
Note: Please use appropriate referencing style. For this assignment, you may need to use Proquest.
Use recent academic journal articles in referencing( in-text referencing is mandatory).
7.17. Read Accounting Headline 7.7 below, and, adopting a Positive Accounting theory perspective, consider the following issues:
a) If a new accounting standard impacts on profits, should this impact on the value of the firm, and if so, why?
b) Will the imposition of a particular accounting method have implications for the efficiency of the organisation?
Accounting Headline 7.7 Implications of the release of new Accounting Standards
Foster’s: les goodwill, higher earnings
Anthony Hughes
The challenges facing investors seeking a true picture of a company’s earnings during the impending profit reporting season were underlined again on Friday when Foster’s flagged it would report a $1.2 billion reduction in the net assets under new accounting standards.
The transition to international financial reporting standards (IFRS) means Foster’s net assets will fall from $4.6 billion to $3.37 billion based on its last reported balance sheet, mainly as a result of the internally generated goodwill on brand names not being recognised.
The other major contributor to the reduction is the requirement to allow for deferred tax liabilities based on the difference between the carrying value of assets and their cost base.
Despite scepticism about the likely success of Foster’s recent $3 billion acquisition of winemaker Southcorp and Foster’s ability to extract sufficient merger synergies, the changes to the reported accounts do not relate to any issues with that acquisition. The brewing and winemaking group told analysts the balance sheet adjustments wouldn’t affect in cash flows or ability to pay dividends.
But reported profits will be higher than they otherwise would be because of the removal of goodwill amortisation charges.
Under the standards, goodwill is instead subject to an annual ‘impairment test’, with the elimination of amortisation expenses boosting reported profits. If the new standards were applied to Foster’s half-year accounts to December 31, 2004, the company would have made a net profit of $783.2 million versus the $757 million reported.
The reduced asset base reported by companies such as Foster’s will also mean they will report more favourable returns on these written-down asset values.
The transition to new standards has raised concerns that companies will announce potentially misleading profit numbers and will be reluctant to predict future profits because of the uncertainty around some aspects of the standards. There is also concern about how credit ratings agencies will react to such wild swings in balance sheet values.
But the adoption of the standards will make it easier for investment analysts to compare companies to their global peers. In Foster’s case, this means investment analysts will be able to better discern whether it is outperforming global wine and brewing peers such as Diageo and Pernod Richard.
ABN Amro Asset Management’s Mark Nathan said: ‘It differs by company and industry. There will be some concern over whether the new standards result in a less realistic portrayal of what’s happening than the current Australian standards, but by and large it’s an improvement.’
However, Goldman Sachs JBWere said in a note to clients that given the shortened period in which companies must now report their results, the new standards ‘would only add to the data overload during the last two or three weeks of August.’ Foster’s closed 2? higher at $5.46.
your detailed question here…
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
THE CRIMSON PRESS CURRICULUM CENTER THE CRIMSON GROUP, INC.Jefferson Multi Media, Inc. I’m sorry, but I’m having a very difficult time using the information on this cost report. I mean, salary totals and the average developmental cost per product may be useful to you and the people in the central office, but I need to know more detail. We have so many different types of activities in the Audio Division that I need to know the unit cost for each if I’m going to do anything about cost control. The speaker was Adam King, General Manager of the Audio Division of Jefferson Multi Media, Inc. (JMMI). Mr. King was discussing JMMI’s cost accounting system with Michael Abbot, the company’s assistant controller. Mr. King had requested the meeting because he felt he needed more information than that contained on his division’s cost report, contained in Exhibit 1. Interested in improving cost control methods in the division, Mr. King was arguing that the average perproduct cost calculation was not an accurate measure of the division’s costs because the type and content of products varied depending on recording studio hours, special effects used, concept and design activities, and the amount of time and effort spent with the recording artist. According to Mr. King, JMMI’s cost accounting system needed to be revised to identify the specific unit costs of these various activities. During the discussion, Mr. Abbott became interested in Mr. King’s approach, and agreed to help him design a cost accounting system that made these distinctions. BACKGROUND About two years ago, in conjunction with JMMI’s move toward decentralizing its media activities, a divisional cost accounting system had been developed. As one of the company’s largest divisions, the Audio Division was among the first to implement the new system, which required division general managers (DGMs) to monitor their division’s expenditures. By involving DGMs in the budgeting and expenditure review process, Nell Chamberlain, JMMI’s president, hoped to gain more control over divisional costs and to improve the company’s overall financial performance. The Division-Based Cost Accounting System (DBCAS) [pronounced Debcas] was based on a standard costing unit that each division could use to measure its overall costs. For the Audio Division, the DBCAS used a completed product as the basic cost calculation unit. At that point, the product was transferred to the manufacturing stage where it was produced in large quantity and shipped to distributors. To calculate an average cost per product for the division, the DBCAS first collected the direct costs on the Divisional Cost Report (DCR), as shown in Exhibit 1. The Controller’s Office then allocated the company’s central office costs, such as depreciation, health and life insurance and administration to each division according to a predetermined method. These allocation methods had been determined by Mr. Abbott, and included space, number of employees, and salary dollars. The basis of allocation for any given cost was designed to provide the fairest means possible for distributing it to the various divisions in the company. After all costs had been allocated to divisions, the controller’s staff would calculate the average cost per unit in each division by dividing the division’s total costs by the appropriate unit of activity. These calculations also are shown on Exhibit 1. The unit of activity for the Audio Division was a completed product, which included audio cassettes, computerized disks (CDs), and digital sound tracks (DSTs) prepared for the company’s Video Division. According to Mr. Abbott, the main advantage of this system was that it allowed him to quickly compare the cost of producing a unit of activity in different divisions. For the Audio Division, he also thought the system could be used to calculate the cost of developing a product of a particular type. For example, to determine the cost of producing a CD, Mr. Abbott could multiply the number of CDs produced by the division’s average cost per product. HBSP Product Number TCG 015 TFor Ms. Chamberlain, the DBCAS was to be the basis for greater fiscal accountability, and she had notified the DGMs that she expected them to work with the DBCAS data in attempting to control costs. This was the main source of concern for Mr. King, since he thought the average cost per product was not an accurate measure for most of the division’s products. According to him, the actual cost of a product varied because different types of products required different types and levels of resources. Mr. King argued that the average cost per product misrepresented the resource needs of most products, and, because of this, the DBCAS did not provide him with the data he needed for accurate budgeting and planning. Product Type-Based System In an effort to address this problem, Mr. Abbott suggested that the DBCAS for the Audio Division be based on product distinctions. He divided the division’s products into three categories: audio cassettes, CDs, and DSTs. With Mr. King’s help, he calculated personnel and supply estimates for each product. For example, he estimated that although there were fewer DSTs produced, most required greater time and effort with artist relations personnel. This was because they were still relatively new as a medium and the recording artists had not yet learned some of the new approaches being used. In most instances, cassettes and CDs did not require this level of effort. From these estimates, Mr. Abbott assigned the division’s direct costs to each product type. Next, Mr. Abbott set about devising a method for allocating overhead costs to product categories. After much discussion with Mr. King and his staff, they decided to allocate all these costs so that they were roughly proportional to direct production costs. The resulting calculations are contained in Exhibit 2. Although the new system maintained a product as the standard costing unit, Mr. Abbott argued that it was a more accurate approach than the system currently in use. Instead of an average cost per product, he now had three average cost figures: one for each product category. In evaluating these revisions to the system, Mr. King and Mr. Abbott explored the differences in cost calculations resulting from the two methods. Some quick computations by the two pointed out the differences in the cost per product under different accounting procedures. From these findings, Mr. Abbott concluded that his “product-type” system could greatly increase Mr. King’s ability to budget and control costs. As Mr. King reflected on the new system, he was bothered by a few continuing problems. While he agreed that product-type costs were more accurate than division-wide calculations, he felt there were further distinctions in resource use that the system did not sufficiently address. He was particularly disturbed by the varying amounts of recording studio hours, special effect hours, concept and design activities, and artist relation activities needed for each product type. Mr. King explained to Mr. Abbott that, according to the new accounting system, it appeared as though all DSTs received the same amount of resources, but from his perspective this clearly was not the case. He pointed out by way of example that a DST recording of a new artist received far more concept and design resources than one for an established artist. Similarly, an artist who needed more time and assistance on the part of Mr. King’s Artist Relations staff used more of the staff’s resources than an artist who needed little assistance. These sorts of distinctions could be made, he argued, for special effects as well. As such, the product-type breakdown was not a sufficiently accurate measure. Service-Based System Unable to convince Mr. Abbott of the importance of this additional refinement, Mr. King himself began experimenting with a third cost accounting method—based on levels of services received—that he thought might be more accurate. As the first step in his calculations, he divided the division’s costs according to the type of service provided: recording studio, special effects, concept/design, and artists relations. He decided that a product’s use of the recording studio could be measured most easily in terms of the number of hours spent in the studio. Examining the division’s records, he decided that it was more complicated to measure special effects. He consulted with some of the special effects personnel and, with them, developed a system based on levels of special effects needed. They decided to define special effects in terms of units on three levels: one unit represented minimal special effects; two units were for moderate special effects; three units represented extensive special effects. Concept/design and artists relations were measured in a similar fashion. Products that required only minor modifications to the concept and design used in a prior recording received one unit. Two units were given for extensive modifications to the prior concept/design, and three units were _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Jefferson Multi=Media , Inc. • June 2012 2 of 6 Purchased by: Chung wen Huang crazywinnie_zzz@yahoo.com.tw on January 06, 2014 assigned for a new concept/design. Products that required minimal artists relations received one unit; those that required artists relations more regularly received two units; those who used them continually received three units. Having developed these classifications, Mr. King solicited Mr. Abbott’s assistance in allocating indirect costs to these four types of service. Their cost summary is contained in Exhibit 3. In this analysis, Mr. King expected to use more than the number of products as the costing unit. For each product, he would need to calculate the number of hours in the recording studio, and estimate the number of units required for special effects, concept and design, and artists relations. To compare this system with the others, Mr. King chose three products at random in order to determine their costs. According to his calculations, each required the following: Recording Special Concept/ Artist Studio Effects Design Relations Product Type (Hours) (Units) (Units) (Units) C101 Cassette 170 2 0 1 D3420 CD 111 0 2 1 S466 DST 321 3 3 3 Mr. King was satisfied with the results of this cost accounting system. He thought that it accurately distinguished among the various types of resources provided, and that the differences in costs reflected actual differences in resources used. Moreover, because he could now isolate costs by both the nature and intensity of the resources used, he would be able to locate and manage cost problems in the division more easily, thereby complying more effectively with Ms. Chamberlain’s expectations. Mr. Abbott, however, remained skeptical. Although he thought Mr. King might be able to make effective use of the system in the Audio Division, he doubted that it could be transferred to other divisions since, in his view, other divisions would not be able to develop utilization units for their various resources. Furthermore, he was afraid that the system was too complicated to be implemented in all divisions. Finally, he seriously questioned the ability of DGMs to use this more complex system effectively. Assignment: 1. What is the cost for each of the three products Mr. King chose at random? What explains the differences? 2. Which of the three systems is the best? Why? 3. How might you improve upon the system you identified in Question 2? 4. What should Mr. King do? _____________________________________________________________________________________________ Jefferson Multi=Media , Inc. • June 2012 3 of 6 Purchased by: Chung wen Huang crazywinnie_zzz@yahoo.com.tw on January 06, 2014 JEFFERSON MULTI-MEDIA Exhibit 1. Division-Based Cost Report (for most recent year) Number of products produced 22 Direct costs—Production Professional salaries $1,755,000 Clerical salaries 158,000 Contract services 68,000 Supplies and materials 85,200 Other services 97,700 Total $2,163,900 Direct costs—Administration Administrative salaries $215,000 Administrative supplies 58,000 Operations and maintenance 120,000 Other 25,000 Total $418,000 Total direct costs $2,581,900 Indirect costs allocated from central office Administration $43,300 Health/life insurance 135,200 Operation and maintenance 7,400 Rent and depreciation 3,500 Contract services 2,200 Travel 4,350 Total $195,950 Total direct and indirect costs $2,777,850 Average cost per product (rounded) $126,266 Purchased by: Chung wen Huang crazywinnie_zzz@yahoo.com.tw on January 06, 2014 JEFFERSON MULTI-MEDIA Exhibit 2. Product-Type Cost Report Cassettes CDs DSTs Total Direct costs—Production Professional salaries $710,000 $555,250 $489,750 $1,755,000 Clerical salaries 51,000 55,600 51,400 158,000 Contract services 20,300 19,800 27,900 68,000 Supplies and materials 34,080 29,820 21,300 85,200 Other services 37,000 28,550 32,150 97,700 Total $852,380 $689,020 $622,500 $2,163,900 Direct costs—Administration Administrative salaries $75,300 $68,900 $70,800 $215,000 Administrative supplies 22,650 15,800 19,550 58,000 Operations and maintenance 45,000 32,300 42,700 120,000 Other 8,640 7,320 9,040 25,000 Total $151,590 $124,320 $142,090 $418,000 Indirect costs allocated from central office Administration $17,320 $15,126 $10,854 $43,300 Health/life insurance 53,700 43,500 38,000 135,200 Operation and maintenance 2,960 2,585 1,855 7,400 Rent and depreciation 1,400 1,223 877 3,500 Contract services 880 769 551 2,200 Travel 1,740 1,520 1,090 4,350 Total $78,000 $64,723 $53,227 $195,950 Total direct and indirect costs $1,081,970 $878,063 $817,817 $2,777,850 Number of products 5 15 2 Average cost per product (rounded) $216,394 $58,538 $408,909 Purchased by: Chung wen Huang crazywinnie_zzz@yahoo.com.tw on January 06, 2014 JEFFERSON MULTI-MEDIA Exhibit 3. Resource-Based Cost Report Recording Special Concept/ Artist Studio Effects Design Relations Total Direct costs—Production Professional salaries $895,000 $380,000 $235,000 $245,000 $1,755,000 Clerical salaries 35,200 35,000 42,000 45,800 158,000 Contract services 6,500 25,600 22,600 13,300 68,000 Supplies and materials 25,200 25,000 20,000 15,000 85,200 Other services 28,200 17,500 26,000 26,000 97,700 Total $990,100 $483,100 $345,600 $345,100 $2,163,900 Direct costs—Administration Administrative salaries $55,300 $52,000 $55,000 $52,700 $215,000 Administrative supplies 9,500 19,500 25,150 3,850 58,000 Operations and maintenance 33,200 28,500 33,277 25,023 120,000 Other 8,562 7,755 3,680 5,003 25,000 Total $106,562 $107,755 $117,107 $86,576 $418,000 Indirect costs allocated from central office Administration $24,648 $12,216 $5,336 $1,100 $43,300 Health/life insurance 76,956 38,144 16,663 3,437 135,200 Operation and maintenance 4,212 2,088 912 188 7,400 Rent and depreciation 1,992 987 431 90 3,500 Contract services 1,252 621 271 56 2,200 Travel 2,476 1,227 536 111 4,350 Total $111,536 $55,283 $24,149 $4,982 $195,950 Total direct and indirect costs $1,208,198 $646,138 $486,856 $436,658 $2,777,850 Total number of hours or units 3,500 280 180 220 Cost per hour or unit (rounded) $345 $2,308 $2,705 $1,985
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1) Stocks and Bonds Intel Inc. is the pioneer in the manufacture of microprocessor for computers. The company’s fiscal year runs from April 1 to March 31. On 4/1/2013, Intel Issued $5,000,000 of 11% Bonds due in 10 years. The interest is payable annually on April 1. The market rate of interest on that date for bonds of similar risk is 10% 1. Prepare the journal entry for the issuance of the bonds and on the first interest payment date. 2. Use spreadsheet to prepare an amortization schedule for the bonds. Exercise 2 Presented below is the stockholders equity section of Delta Inc. All amounts are in million except for number of shares and par value Stockholders’ Equity (Deficit) Current Year Prior Year Preferred stock-20,000,000 shares authorized; none issued $ -0- $ -0- Common stock-$1 par value; 750,000,000 shares authorized; 182,350,259 shares issued 182 182 Additional paid-in capital 2,521 2,605 Treasury shares at cost: current year-21,194,312; prior year-22,768,027 (1,308) (1,405) Accumulated other comprehensive loss (664) (785) Accumulated deficit (1,312) (551) $ (581) $ 46 1. Explain why the common stock is classified as part of the stockholder’s equity. 2. Explain why treasury stock is not classified as an asset. 3. Explain what is meant by “Accumulated other comprehensive loss.” 4. Why is the accumulated deficit larger in the current year than in the prior year? 5. Compute book value per share for Delta for the current year. Provide reference in APA format if available. Financial Investments • As auditor for Banquo & Associates, you have been assigned to check Duncan Corporation’s computation of earnings per share for the current year. The controller, Mac Beth, has supplied you with the following computations. Net income $3,374,960 Common shares issued and outstanding: Beginning of year 1,285,000 End of year 1,200,000 Average 1,242,500 Earnings per share: $3,374,960 = $2.72 per share 1,242,500 • You have developed the following additional information. 1. There are no other equity securities in addition to the common shares. 2. There are no options or warrants outstanding to purchase common shares. 3. There are no convertible debt securities. 4. Activity in common shares during the year was as follows. Outstanding, Jan. 1 1,285,000 Treasury shares acquired, Oct. 1 1,035,000 Shares reissued, Dec. 1 1,165,000 Outstanding, Dec. 31 1,200,000 • Required: 1. On the basis of the information above, do you agree with the controller’s computation of earnings per share for the year? If you disagree, prepare a revised computation of earnings per share 2. Assume the same facts as those presented above, except that options had been issued to purchase 140,000 shares of common stock at $10 per share. These options were outstanding at the beginning of the year, and none had been exercised or canceled during the year. The average market price of the common shares during the year was $25, and the ending market price was $35. What earnings per share amounts will be reported? • 1) Income Tax Calculations Johnny Bravo Company began operations in 2012 and has provided the following information. 1. Pretax financial income for 2012 is $100,000. 2. The tax rate enacted for 2012 and future years is 40%. 3. Differences between the 2012 income statement and tax return are listed below. (a) Warranty expense accrued for financial reporting purposes amounts to $5,000. Warranty deductions per the tax return amount to $2,000. (b) Gross profit on construction contracts using the percentage-of-completion method for book purposes amounts to $92,000. Gross profit on construction contracts for tax purposes amounts to $62,000. (c) Depreciation of property, plant, and equipment for financial reporting purposes amounts to $60,000. Depreciation of these assets amounts to $80,000 for the tax return. (d) A $3,500 fine paid for violation of pollution laws was deducted in computing pretax financial income. (e) Interest revenue earned on an investment in tax-exempt municipal bonds amounts to $1,400. 4. Taxable income is expected for the next few years. a. Prepare the journal entry to record income tax expense, deferred taxes, and income taxes payable for 2012. b. Draft the income tax expense section of the income statement, beginning with “Income before income taxes”
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
FINAL EXAM: ACC/400
K. Smith
The condensed financial statements of Westward Corporation for 2009 and 2008 are presented below.
Westward Corporation Westward Corporation
Balance Sheet Income Statement
December 31, 2009 For the Year Ended December 31, 2009
Assets Revenues $2,000,000
Current assets Expenses
Cash and temporary Cost of goods sold 1,080,000
investments $ 30,000 Selling and administrative
Accounts receivable 70,000 expenses 495,000
Inventories 120,000 Interest expense 30,000
Total current assets 220,000 Total expenses 1,605,000
Property, plant, and Income before income taxes 395,000
equipment (net) 780,000 Income tax expense 140,000
Total assets $1,000,000 Net income $ 255,000
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Current liabilities $ 80,000
Long-term liabilities 300,000
Common stockholders’ equity 620,000
Total liabilities and
stockholders’ equity $1,000,000
Westward Corporation Westward Corporation
Balance Sheet Income Statement
December 31, 2008 For the Year Ended December 31, 2008
Assets Revenues $2,500,000
Current assets Expenses
Cash and temporary Cost of goods sold 1,750,000
investments $ 40,000 Selling and administrative
Accounts receivable 90,000 expenses 500,000
Inventories 150,000 Interest expense 30,000
Total current assets 280,000 Total expenses 2,280,000
Property, plant, and Income before income taxes 220,000
equipment (net) 800,000 Income tax expense 77,000
Total assets $1,080,000 Net income $ 143,000
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Current liabilities $ 140,000
Long-term liabilities 320,000
Common stockholders’ equity 620,000
Total liabilities and
stockholders’ equity $1,080,000
Select data from fiscal year 2007:
Inventory: $100,000
Total assets: $900,000
Stockholders’ Equity: $540,000
Instructions
- Compute the following listed ratios for 2009 and 2008 showing supporting calculations. (5.2 points)
- Current ratio
- Debt to total Assets
- Times interest earned
- Inventory turnover
- Profit margin ratio
- Return on common stockholders’ equity
- Return on assets
- Perform horizontal and vertical analysis on Westward’s financial statements, show your results. (3.0 points)
- Assess the financial performance of Westward, given the analysis tools used in questions 1 and 2 above. (5.3 points)
- If the company wanted to perform industry comparison analysis, what references would you recommend it use? (1.5 points)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment Instructions
Prepare answers for the case study 3.30 (Page 95) from the textbook: Financial Accounting Theory Edition 3 (Craig Deegan)
Required:
Critically analyze and evaluate the arguments for, and against, for the case study. Which arguments do you consider to be more compelling? (In other words, what is your opinion?)(1000 words).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
RESEARCH ESSAY INFORMATION Your research essay must be submitted at the beginning of your seminar in week 10. Week 10 commences Monday 27 January at partner locations. Penalties will apply for late submission. The following matters should be given particular attention: 1. Writing assignments must not exceed the word counts indicated. Double space your pages, use a 12-pt Times New Roman font, use 2 cm margins on all four sides of your page. 2. Your essay must include an abstract/synopsis, introduction, essay body that clearly addresses the problem areas, a conclusion and a properly referenced bibliography. (refer to the research essay marking rubric for further guidance) 3. Evidence of extensive research beyond the prescribed text is required. Ensure these are referenced appropriately in your bibliography. Refer to the statement regarding plagiarism. 4. NO extensions will be granted unless supported by appropriate documentation prior to the due date. 5. This assignment must be handed in for successful completion of the course and will count 20 marks towards the final mark. 6. The word count for the research essay is 3000 words. Please refer to the Research Essay Marking Rubric for the specific allocation of word count for each specific section of your research essay (refer point 2 above). 7. Points (fractional marks) have also been allocated to each specific section of your research essay. 8. The research essay is to be conducted in groups of two. Students do not have the option to extend or reduce the size of the group. If the class has an odd number of students then one student must undertake the assignment on their own. RESEARCH ESSAY TOPIC “The degree to which accounting ‘messages’ contained in financial reports are understood and convey the exact meanings which were intended by their senders seems a natural issue of interest. … A fundamental issue in such research is whether expressions of agreement or disagreement with an intended message by sender and receiver do, in fact, lead to distortions in the intended decisions the messages were designed to induce.” Adelberg, A. H., 1979, ‘Methodology for Measuring the Understandability of Financial Report Messages’, Journal of Accounting Research, Vol. 7, No. 2, Autumn 1979, pp. 565-592. 1. With reference to the research describe what you understand by understandability. 2. Discuss understandability in the context of the present IASB framework. 3. Select a company from the Australian Securities Exchange website and download the 2013 annual report. Evaluate how the selected standard affects the understandability of the annual report. 4. Select a standard from the IASB and analyse how it contributes and/or detracts from the decision usefulness of the selected annual report. TUTOR ENGAGEMENT 1. Week 5 – Tutor to advise students just before the test that the research essay is available and over the coming week they should think about forming groups of 2. 2. Week 6 – EMPHASISE TO STUDENTS TO BEGIN THE WORK EARLY. All students to form groups of two. A discussion of the ASX sectors to take place. Students should discuss the selection of a sector and company that interests them. Tutor to record the groups. No groups are to have the same company. Banks are not allowed as they have particular problems. Over the week groups should select a company. 3. Week 7 – Groups are to advise the tutor of the company selected. Tutor to record the company selected by each group ensuring no group has the same company. A discussion of appropriate standards for each sector to take place. Over the week groups should select a standard relevant to the company and sector. Within each sector groups must choose different standards. 4. Week 8 – Tutor to record standards chosen by groups and ensure compliance with the requirement of (2) above. Tutor should stress the importance to groups of beginning the work early and following the marking rubric. ESSAY DUE WEEK 10
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
prepare answers to these two case studies from the set text:
3.30
7.17
Required:
Critically analyse and evaluate the arguments for, and against, for each of the case studies.
Which arguments do you consider to be more compelling? (In other words, what is your
opinion?) (1000 words each).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
prepare answers to these two case studies from the set text:
3.30
7.17
Required:
Critically analyse and evaluate the arguments for, and against, for each of the case studies.
Which arguments do you consider to be more compelling? (In other words, what is your
opinion?)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
)Steelcase Inc. is one of the largest manufacturers of office furniture in the United States.In Grand Rapids, Michigan, it produces filing cabinets in two departments: Fabrication and Trim Assembly.Assume the following information for the Fabrication Department:
|
Steel per filing cabinet
|
50 pounds
|
|
Direct labor per filing cabinet
|
18 minutes
|
|
Supervisor salaries
|
$130,000 per month
|
|
Depreciation
|
$20,000 per month
|
|
Direct labor rate
|
$16 per hour
|
|
Steel Cost
|
$1.25 per pound
|
Prepare a flexible budget for 12,000, 15,000, and 18,000 filing cabinets for the month of October 2008, similar to Exhibit 5, assuming that inventories are not significant.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
3F PLC manufactures an executive office chair, which has proved to be very popular in the ADDIS market. The management team is considering the company’s operating plan for the forthcoming year and has asked for your assistance in evaluating a number of scenarios. The budgeted selling price for each chair is Birr 200, the variable cost per unit is Birr 120 and the total expected fixed costs are Birr 8,000,000.
Requirement
(i) Determine the breakeven point in units and sales revenue.
(ii) Determine the operating profit earned, if 200,000 chairs are sold in the forthcoming year.
(iii) If 200,000 chairs are sold in the forthcoming year, by what percentage could the variable costs per unit increase before the company would generate an operating loss.
(iv) The company has the option to produce a second product throughout the forthcoming year. This second product, a supreme office chair, would have a selling price of Birr 300 and variable costs per unit of Birr 140. It is expected that producing a second product would increase the total fixed costs of the business to Birr 12,000,000. It is planned that sales of the supreme chair will make up 35% of the mix of total sales.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Avis’s taxable income for the year is $300,000 and Best’s taxable income for the year is $425,000. For each of the scenarios provided, (a) state if a control group has been created and, if so, define the controlled and (b) compute the combined tax liability of the two corporations. Be sure to show your work in order to get full credit.
Scenarios:
- Matthew, Kelly, and Tammy each own one-third of the stock of Avis and Best.
- Matthew, Kelly, and Tammy each own one-third of the stock of Avis and Matthew and Joshua each own 50 percent
of the stock of Best.
3. Avis owns 85 percent of Best’s stock on the last day of the year. Avis and Best file separate (as opposed to
consolidated) tax returns.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Form 1065
Department of the Treasury
Internal Revenue Service
U.S. Return of Partnership Income
For calendar year 2011, or tax year beginning , 2011, ending , 20 .
? See separate instructions.
OMB No. 1545-0099
2011
Print
or
type.
Name of partnership
Number, street, and room or suite no. If a P.O. box, see the instructions.
City or town, state, and ZIP code
A Principal business activity
B Principal product or service
C Business code number
D Employer identification number
E Date business started
F Total assets (see the
instructions)
$
G Check applicable boxes: (1) Initial return (2) Final return (3) Name change (4) Address change (5) Amended return
(6) Technical termination – also check (1) or (2)
H Check accounting method: (1) Cash (2) Accrual (3) Other (specify) ?
I Number of Schedules K-1. Attach one for each person who was a partner at any time during the tax year ?
J Check if Schedules C and M-3 are attached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caution. Include only trade or business income and expenses on lines 1a through 22 below. See the instructions for more information.
Income
1a Merchant card and third-party payments (including amounts
reported on Form(s) 1099-K). For 2011, enter -0- . . . . 1a
b Gross receipts or sales not reported on line 1a (see instructions) 1b
c Total. Add lines 1a and 1b . . . . . . . . . . . 1c
d Returns and allowances plus any other adjustments to line 1a
(see instructions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1d
e Subtract line 1d from line 1c . . . . . . . . . . . 1e
2 Cost of goods sold (attach Form 1125-A) . . . . . . 2
3 Gross profit. Subtract line 2 from line 1e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4 Ordinary income (loss) from other partnerships, estates, and trusts (attach statement) . . 4
5 Net farm profit (loss) (attach Schedule F (Form 1040)) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
6 Net gain (loss) from Form 4797, Part II, line 17 (attach Form 4797) . . . . . . . . 6
7 Other income (loss) (attach statement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
8 Total income (loss). Combine lines 3 through 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Deductions (see the instructions for limitations)
9 Salaries and wages (other than to partners) (less employment credits) . . . . . . . 9
10 Guaranteed payments to partners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
11 Repairs and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
12 Bad debts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
13 Rent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
14 Taxes and licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
15 Interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
16a Depreciation (if required, attach Form 4562) . . . . . . 16a
b Less depreciation reported on Form 1125-A and elsewhere on return 16b 16c
17 Depletion (Do not deduct oil and gas depletion.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
18 Retirement plans, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
19 Employee benefit programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
20 Other deductions (attach statement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
21 Total deductions. Add the amounts shown in the far right column for lines 9 through 20 . 21
22 Ordinary business income (loss). Subtract line 21 from line 8 . . . . . . . . . 22
Sign
Here
Under penalties of perjury, I declare that I have examined this return, including accompanying schedules and statements, and to the best of my
knowledge and belief, it is true, correct, and complete. Declaration of preparer (other than general partner or limited liability company member manager)
is based on all information of which preparer has any knowledge.
May the IRS discuss this return with the
preparer shown below (see
instructions)? Yes No
?
Signature of general partner or limited liability company member manager
?
Date
Paid
Preparer
Use Only
Print/Type preparer’s name Preparer’s signature Date
Check if
self- employed
PTIN
Firm’s name ?
Firm’s address ?
Firm’s EIN ?
Phone no.
For Paperwork Reduction Act Notice, see separate instructions. Cat. No. 11390Z Form 1065 (2011)
Form 1065 (2011) Page 2
Schedule B Other Information
1 What type of entity is filing this return? Check the applicable box: Yes No
a Domestic general partnership b Domestic limited partnership
c Domestic limited liability company d Domestic limited liability partnership
e Foreign partnership f Other ?
2 At any time during the tax year, was any partner in the partnership a disregarded entity, a partnership (including
an entity treated as a partnership), a trust, an S corporation, an estate (other than an estate of a deceased partner),
or a nominee or similar person? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 At the end of the tax year:
a Did any foreign or domestic corporation, partnership (including any entity treated as a partnership), trust, or
tax-exempt organization, or any foreign government own, directly or indirectly, an interest of 50% or more in the
profit, loss, or capital of the partnership? For rules of constructive ownership, see instructions. If “Yes,” attach
Schedule B-1, Information on Partners Owning 50% or More of the Partnership . . . . . . . . . . .
b Did any individual or estate own, directly or indirectly, an interest of 50% or more in the profit, loss, or capital of
the partnership? For rules of constructive ownership, see instructions. If “Yes,” attach Schedule B-1, Information
on Partners Owning 50% or More of the Partnership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 At the end of the tax year, did the partnership:
a Own directly 20% or more, or own, directly or indirectly, 50% or more of the total voting power of all classes of
stock entitled to vote of any foreign or domestic corporation? For rules of constructive ownership, see
instructions. If “Yes,” complete (i) through (iv) below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(i) Name of Corporation (ii) Employer Identification
Number (if any)
(iii) Country of
Incorporation
(iv) Percentage
Owned in Voting Stock
b Own directly an interest of 20% or more, or own, directly or indirectly, an interest of 50% or more in the profit, loss,
or capital in any foreign or domestic partnership (including an entity treated as a partnership) or in the beneficial
interest of a trust? For rules of constructive ownership, see instructions. If “Yes,” complete (i) through (v) below . .
(i) Name of Entity
(ii) Employer
Identification
Number (if any)
(iii) Type of
Entity
(iv) Country of
Organization
(v) Maximum
Percentage Owned in
Profit, Loss, or Capital
Form 1065 (2011)
Form 1065 (2011) Page 3
Yes No
5 Did the partnership file Form 8893, Election of Partnership Level Tax Treatment, or an election statement under
section 6231(a)(1)(B)(ii) for partnership-level tax treatment, that is in effect for this tax year? See Form 8893 for
more details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Does the partnership satisfy all four of the following conditions?
a The partnership’s total receipts for the tax year were less than $250,000.
b The partnership’s total assets at the end of the tax year were less than $1 million.
c Schedules K-1 are filed with the return and furnished to the partners on or before the due date (including
extensions) for the partnership return.
d The partnership is not filing and is not required to file Schedule M-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If “Yes,” the partnership is not required to complete Schedules L, M-1, and M-2; Item F on page 1 of Form 1065;
or Item L on Schedule K-1.
7 Is this partnership a publicly traded partnership as defined in section 469(k)(2)? . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 During the tax year, did the partnership have any debt that was cancelled, was forgiven, or had the terms
modified so as to reduce the principal amount of the debt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 Has this partnership filed, or is it required to file, Form 8918, Material Advisor Disclosure Statement, to provide
information on any reportable transaction? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 At any time during calendar year 2011, did the partnership have an interest in or a signature or other authority over
a financial account in a foreign country (such as a bank account, securities account, or other financial account)?
See the instructions for exceptions and filing requirements for Form TD F 90-22.1, Report of Foreign Bank and
Financial Accounts. If “Yes,” enter the name of the foreign country. ?
11 At any time during the tax year, did the partnership receive a distribution from, or was it the grantor of, or
transferor to, a foreign trust? If “Yes,” the partnership may have to file Form 3520, Annual Return To Report
Transactions With Foreign Trusts and Receipt of Certain Foreign Gifts. See instructions . . . . . . . . .
12a Is the partnership making, or had it previously made (and not revoked), a section 754 election? . . . . . .
See instructions for details regarding a section 754 election.
b Did the partnership make for this tax year an optional basis adjustment under section 743(b) or 734(b)? If “Yes,”
attach a statement showing the computation and allocation of the basis adjustment. See instructions . . . .
c Is the partnership required to adjust the basis of partnership assets under section 743(b) or 734(b) because of a
substantial built-in loss (as defined under section 743(d)) or substantial basis reduction (as defined under section
734(d))? If “Yes,” attach a statement showing the computation and allocation of the basis adjustment. See instructions.
13 Check this box if, during the current or prior tax year, the partnership distributed any property received in a
like-kind exchange or contributed such property to another entity (other than disregarded entities
wholly-owned by the partnership throughout the tax year) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ?
14 At any time during the tax year, did the partnership distribute to any partner a tenancy-in-common or other
undivided interest in partnership property? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15 If the partnership is required to file Form 8858, Information Return of U.S. Persons With Respect To Foreign
Disregarded Entities, enter the number of Forms 8858 attached. See instructions ?
16 Does the partnership have any foreign partners? If “Yes,” enter the number of Forms 8805, Foreign Partner’s
Information Statement of Section 1446 Withholding Tax, filed for this partnership. ?
17 Enter the number of Forms 8865, Return of U.S. Persons With Respect to Certain Foreign Partnerships, attached
to this return. ?
18 a Did you make any payments in 2011 that would require you to file Form(s) 1099? See instructions . . . . .
b If “Yes,” did you or will you file all required Form(s) 1099? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19 Enter the number of Form(s) 5471, Information Return of U.S. Persons With Respect To Certain Foreign
Corporations, attached to this return. ?
Designation of Tax Matters Partner (see instructions)
Enter below the general partner designated as the tax matters partner (TMP) for the tax year of this return:
Name of
designated
TMP
?
Identifying
number of TMP
?
If the TMP is an
entity, name
of TMP representative
?Phone number
of TMP
?
Address of
designated
TMP ?
Form 1065 (2011)
Form 1065 (2011) Page 4
Schedule K Partners’ Distributive Share Items Total amount
Income (Loss)
1 Ordinary business income (loss) (page 1, line 22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 Net rental real estate income (loss) (attach Form 8825) . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3a Other gross rental income (loss) . . . . . . . . 3a
b Expenses from other rental activities (attach statement) 3b
c Other net rental income (loss). Subtract line 3b from line 3a . . . . . . . . . 3c
4 Guaranteed payments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5 Interest income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
6 Dividends: a Ordinary dividends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6a
b Qualified dividends . . . . . . 6b
7 Royalties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
8 Net short-term capital gain (loss) (attach Schedule D (Form 1065)) . . . . . . . 8
9 a Net long-term capital gain (loss) (attach Schedule D (Form 1065)) . . . . . . . 9a
b Collectibles (28%) gain (loss) . . . . . . . . . 9b
c Unrecaptured section 1250 gain (attach statement) . . 9c
10 Net section 1231 gain (loss) (attach Form 4797) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
11 Other income (loss) (see instructions) Type ? 11
Deductions
12 Section 179 deduction (attach Form 4562) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
13a Contributions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13a
b Investment interest expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13b
c Section 59(e)(2) expenditures: (1) Type ? (2) Amount ? 13c(2)
d Other deductions (see instructions) Type ? 13d
Self-
Employment
14a Net earnings (loss) from self-employment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14a
b Gross farming or fishing income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14b
c Gross nonfarm income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14c
Credits
15a Low-income housing credit (section 42(j)(5)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15a
b Low-income housing credit (other) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15b
c Qualified rehabilitation expenditures (rental real estate) (attach Form 3468) . . . . 15c
d Other rental real estate credits (see instructions) Type ? 15d
e Other rental credits (see instructions) Type ? 15e
f Other credits (see instructions) Type ? 15f
Foreign Transactions
16a Name of country or U.S. possession ?
b Gross income from all sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16b
c Gross income sourced at partner level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16c
Foreign gross income sourced at partnership level
d Passive category ? e General category ? f Other ? 16f
Deductions allocated and apportioned at partner level
g Interest expense ? h Other . . . . . . . . . . ? 16h
Deductions allocated and apportioned at partnership level to foreign source income
i Passive category ? j General category ? k Other ? 16k
l Total foreign taxes (check one): ? Paid Accrued . . . . . . . . 16l
m Reduction in taxes available for credit (attach statement) . . . . . . . . . . 16m
n Other foreign tax information (attach statement) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternative
Minimum Tax
(AMT) Items
17a Post-1986 depreciation adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17a
b Adjusted gain or loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17b
c Depletion (other than oil and gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17c
d Oil, gas, and geothermal properties—gross income . . . . . . . . . . . . 17d
e Oil, gas, and geothermal properties—deductions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17e
f Other AMT items (attach statement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17f
Other Information
18a Tax-exempt interest income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18a
b Other tax-exempt income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18b
c Nondeductible expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18c
19a Distributions of cash and marketable securities . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19a
b Distributions of other property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19b
20a Investment income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20a
b Investment expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20b
c Other items and amounts (attach statement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Form 1065 (2011)
Form 1065 (2011) Page 5
Analysis of Net Income (Loss)
1 Net income (loss). Combine Schedule K, lines 1 through 11. From the result, subtract the sum of
Schedule K, lines 12 through 13d, and 16l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 Analysis by
partner type:
(i) Corporate
(ii) Individual
(active)
(iii) Individual
(passive)
(iv) Partnership
(v) Exempt
organization
(vi)
Nominee/Other
a General partners
b Limited partners
Schedule L Balance Sheets per Books Beginning of tax year End of tax year
Assets (a) (b) (c) (d)
1 Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2a Trade notes and accounts receivable . . .
b Less allowance for bad debts . . . . .
3 Inventories . . . . . . . . . . .
4 U.S. government obligations . . . . .
5 Tax-exempt securities . . . . . . .
6 Other current assets (attach statement) . .
7a Loans to partners (or persons related to partners)
b Mortgage and real estate loans . . . .
8 Other investments (attach statement) . . .
9a Buildings and other depreciable assets . .
b Less accumulated depreciation . . . .
10a Depletable assets . . . . . . . . .
b Less accumulated depletion . . . . .
11 Land (net of any amortization) . . . . .
12a Intangible assets (amortizable only) . . .
b Less accumulated amortization . . . .
13 Other assets (attach statement) . . . .
14 Total assets . . . . . . . . . . .
Liabilities and Capital
15 Accounts payable . . . . . . . . .
16 Mortgages, notes, bonds payable in less than 1 year
17 Other current liabilities (attach statement) .
18 All nonrecourse loans . . . . . . . .
19a Loans from partners (or persons related to partners)
b Mortgages, notes, bonds payable in 1 year or more
20 Other liabilities (attach statement) . . . .
21 Partners’ capital accounts . . . . . .
22 Total liabilities and capital . . . . . .
Schedule M-1 Reconciliation of Income (Loss) per Books With Income (Loss) per Return
Note. Schedule M-3 may be required instead of Schedule M-1 (see instructions).
1 Net income (loss) per books . . . .
2
Income included on Schedule K, lines 1, 2, 3c,
5, 6a, 7, 8, 9a, 10, and 11, not recorded on
books this year (itemize):
3 Guaranteed payments (other than
health insurance) . . . . . . .
4
Expenses recorded on books this year
not included on Schedule K, lines 1
through 13d, and 16l (itemize):
a Depreciation $
b Travel and entertainment $
5 Add lines 1 through 4 . . . . . .
6
Income recorded on books this year not included
on Schedule K, lines 1 through 11 (itemize):
a Tax-exempt interest $
7
Deductions included on Schedule K, lines
1 through 13d, and 16l, not charged
against book income this year (itemize):
a Depreciation $
8 Add lines 6 and 7 . . . . . . . .
9 Income (loss) (Analysis of Net Income
(Loss), line 1). Subtract line 8 from line 5 .
Schedule M-2 Analysis of Partners’ Capital Accounts
1 Balance at beginning of year . . .
2 Capital contributed: a Cash . . .
b Property . .
3 Net income (loss) per books . . . .
4 Other increases (itemize):
5 Add lines 1 through 4 . . . . . .
6 Distributions: a Cash . . . . . .
b Property . . . . .
7 Other decreases (itemize):
8 Add lines 6 and 7 . . . . . . . .
9 Balance at end of year. Subtract line 8 from line 5
Form 1065 (2011)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
merlin ic/ a whole sale inc has been operation few months. this companyproduct is sink; mirror and vanity. budget sale by product and total for the month/ sale-240,00, variable exp 72,000/ contribite magin is 168,000./ mirror sale=100,000; varable exp=80,000/ contribute margin is 20,000/ vanity sale is 160;00; variable expe=88,000, contribite margin is 72,000/ total sale=500,000/ total variable exp=240,00/ total contibute margin = 260;000 fix exp=223,00/ net operation =36,000/ question 1. if variable expenes increase as percent of sale then the contrubition margin will decrease as perent of sale/ is this true or fales and why.. From this data net operation income is at 36,000 4 the month and breakeven sale at 430,00. Say the actual sale 4 the month total 500,000 as plan. Actual sale by product are sink=160,000; mirror is 200,000 and vanity is 140,000. i need to prepare a income statement 4 the month on actual sale. also need to show the income statement. question 2. i need to know the breakeven point in sale 4 the month on this data./ question 3.the company net sale 4 the month is 500,000, the owner of the company is shock of the result./ the breakeven point in sale are different and why / can u please answer these question and give me the solution to the answer please dumb jac 2022567021
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Terri hall inc/ this company a fashion store that sells sheer elegences. this owner ms terri/ wants to adapt the cost volumme profit -cvp terri hall inc prepare anaysis/ Sale-price per stocking 2.00/ Varabl expenes per sale of stocking 80 cents/ contribut margin= 1.20 cents/ Expeneses per yr=12,000/ equpiment deperication=3,000/sale=30,000/ Admin=15,000 total= 60,000/ qiestion1-how many pair of stocking must be sold to breakeven/question 2.I need to prepare a cvp from pair up to 70,000 pair of stocking sold each yr/ and what is the breakeven point/ question 3 how many pair of stocking must be sold to earn 9,000 target profit 4 the year/ question 4. terri hall wants to hire i full time staff and 1 partime staff. by hiring fulltime and partime staff at salary pf 8,000 ys; she think it will bring 20;000 in sale each yr should ms terri hall hire staff or not and why teri hall inc data Sale=125.000/ Varable expe =50.000/ contribute margin = 75,000/ fix expenes = 60;000/ noi net operation income = 15.000question 4 what is the store degree of operation levarage; this owner think with this plan; sale will increase 20 percent/ question 5. what will be the percent of operation income/ can u answer these question 4 me and give me the solution please jacdumb 2022567021
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Durham inc this company use job costing system; the following took place last year/ a. raw material require 4 use in production; 40,000 80 percent direct and 20 percent indirect/ b. factory cost incurred= 14,600/ c. deprecication on plant and equpiment=28,00 3/4 of deperication relate to factory equipment/ d. Cost 4 salary and wages direct labor=40,00 indirect 18,000 sale commision = 25,00/ e. insurance cost =3,000/ f. mis expe= 18.000/g overhead was apply to production on the business of 15 percent of direct labor cost/ h. goods that cost =130;00 were transefer to warehose/i goods that cost 120,00 to manfacture were sold 4 200,000/ question 1. i need to determine the overhead for the year/ question 2 i need to prepare a income statement 4 the year/ can u assit me with these question please jac dumb 2022567021
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Law firm inc/ this small law firm has 10 partners and 10 support partner. this firm use a job orde costing system to accumlate change to each department they have 2 dept/ 1. reserach dept and 2. document dept/ this firm prorate to charge department / spo dept can charge clients/ 1. Dept/ reserch/ document- resrech hours 20,000/ 2. direct attorney hrs =9,000/ 3. material and suplly= 10;0004. direct attorney cost=430,00/ 4. direct overhead cost=700,000/ Litagtion/ 1. reserch hr=0 2. direct attorney hrs= 16,000/ 3. material and supply- 5000/ 4. direct attorney cost= 800.000/ 45 direct overheadcost=320,00/ the cost charge to each client are made up of material and supply needs; direct attorney cost; cost income and amount of overhead for each deptDept-record hrs 18rs/ ligation =0/ 2. direct attorney hrs=94hr/ ligation= 42hrs/ material and supply =30hrs for ligation =30hrs/ Direct attorney cost is 410/ ligation direct cost is 2,100/ question 1. compare the overhead rate using the ist year/ question 2. would would be the total cost charge/ question 3.At the end of the yr the law firm record reveal actual operation data during the year/ Dept-research hrs-23,00, directattorney hrs-8,000, material and supply =19,000, direct attorney hrs =400,00. dept overhead cost=770.00/ ligation-research hrs=0; direct attorney hrs=15,00; material and supply=6,00; direct attorney cost=275;00; direct overhead cost-300,000 i need to determine the amount in each dept for the yrs / can u assit me jacdumb
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hertige inc/ this company provide garden design; lanscape service. the company use job order company system to track cost of its landscape progect/. the data below provide 3 landscape project that were in process in the month of may/ William-design hrs 200/ direct material 4,800/ direct labor 2,400/ Chandler- design hrs=80; direct matariel=1,800; direct labor=1,000/ Smith- design hrs=120; direct material=3,600 direct labor=1,500/ overhead unit was 16;00 in may. base on the hrs of design hrs relate to the cost of garden design. The overhead rate is 45 dollar per design hrs. the william and chandler project was completed in may/ yet smith was not completed in may/ question 1.compare the amount of overhead cost that would have been apply to each project durning the month of may./ question 2. Determine the cost of goods 4 the month of may/ question 3 what is the accumalate cost of the work in process at the end of month/ question 4/ i need to determined the overhead in may/ can u assit me jacdumb 2022567021
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Albert Henri is the fixed-income manager of a large Canadian pension fund. The present value of the pension fund’s portfolio of assets is CAD 4 billion while the expected present value of the fund’s liabilities is CAD 5 billion. The respective modified durations are 8.254 and 6.825 years. The fund currently has an actuarial deficit (assets
The most liquid interest rate futures contract has a present value of CAD 68,336 and a duration of 2.1468 years. Analyzing both scenarios separately, what should Albert Henry do to avoid widening the pension fund gap? Choose the best option.
First Scenario Second Scenario
A. Do nothing. Buy 7,559 contracts.
B. Do nothing. Sell 7,559 contracts.
C. Buy 7,559 contracts. Do nothing.
D. Do nothing. Do nothing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
the jinwa corporation sells two brands of wine glasses: Plain and Chic. jinwa provides the following information for sales in the month of June 2009:
Static -budget total contribution margin $5,600
Budgeted units to be sold of all glasses 2,000 units
Budgeted contribution margin per unit of Plain $2 per unit
Budgeted contribution margin per unit of Chic $6 per unit
Total Sales-quantity variance $1400 U
Actual sales-mix % of Plain 60%
All variances are to be computed in contribution -margin terms
Required:
1. Calculate the sales-quantity variance for each product for june 2009
2. Calculate the individual-product and total sales mix variances for june 2009. Calculate the individual product and total sales volume variances for June 2009
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
there are 5 scenarios in the assignment and each scenario has 2 or 3 issues that should be responded in respect to that issues.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Page 1 of 5 ACC222 EXTERNAL REPORTING Session 201390 ASSIGNMENT 2– STUDENT COPY IT IS IMPORTANT TO SHOW NECESSARY WORKINGS IN ALL QUESTIONS BELOW WHEN APPLICABLE. Question 1 [25 marks] Preparation of a statement of profit or loss and comprehensive income and a statement of financial position The summarised trial balance of Matthew Ltd, a manufacturing company, for the year ended 30 June 2013 is provided below: DR ($) CR ($) Sales revenue 5,000,000 Interest income 22,000 Sundry income 25,000 Change in inventory of work in progress 125,000 Change in inventory of finished goods 60,000 Raw materials used 2,200,000 Employee benefit expense 950,000 Depreciation expense 226,000 Amortisation – patent 25,000 Rental expense 70,000 Advertising expense 142,000 Insurance expense 45,000 Freight out expense 133,000 Doubtful debt expense 10,000 Interest expense 30,000 Other expenses 8,000 Income tax expense 320,000 Cash 4,000 Cash on deposit, on call 80,000 Trade debtors 495,000 Allowance for doubtful debts 18,000 Other debtors 27,000 Raw materials inventory, 30 June 2013 320,000 Finished goods inventory, 30 June 2013 385,000 Land 94,000 Buildings 220,000 Accumulated depreciation – land and buildings 52,000 Plant and equipment 1,380,000 Accumulated depreciation – plant and equipment 320,000 Patents 140,000 Accumulated amortisation – patent 50,000 Goodwill 620,000 Bank loans 92,000 Other loans 450,000 Trade creditors 452,000 Provision for employee benefits 120,000 Page 2 of 5 DR ($) CR ($) Income tax payable 35,000 Deferred tax liability 140,000 Retained earnings, 30 June 2012 245,000 Dividends paid 210,000 Share capital 1,178,000 8,259,000 8,259,000 Additional information: (a) $20,000 of bank loans is repayable within 1 year. (b) $90,000 of other loans is repayable within 1 year. (c) Matthew Ltd uses the single statement format for the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income and presents an analysis of expenses by nature in the statement. Required: Prepare the statement of financial position, statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income and statement of changes in equity of Matthew Ltd for the year ended 30 June 2013 in accordance with the requirements of AASB101. In preparing the above statements, use captions that a listed company is likely to use and provide any relevant workings and/or explanations where appropriate. Notes to the accounts are not required. MARKING GUIDE: Question 1 Max. marks allocated SPLOCI Line items provided on face of statement and title 8.5 Explanation 0.5 SFP Line items provided on face of statement and title 7.5 Explanation/workings 5 SCE Items provided on statement and title 2.5 Overall presentation 1 Total 25 Page 3 of 5 Question 2 [15 marks] Company formation – Issue by instalments, oversubscription, forfeiture and reissue Prime Ltd was incorporated on 28 December 2012 and the following events took place during the financial year ended 30 June 2013. 1 January Issued a prospectus inviting the public to subscribe for 1,000,000 ordinary shares of $5 each, with $3.00 is to be paid on application, $1.00 within one month of allotment and the balance is to be paid by 1 May. 1 February Applications closed with the share issue being oversubscribed by 200,000 shares. 15 February The directors allotted the 1,000,000 shares on a first come first served basis and returned the excess money to the unsuccessful applicants on the same date. 1 March All outstanding allotment monies were received. 1 May All monies were received for the final call except for the holders of 200,000 shares. 10 May The directors decided to forfeit the 200,000 shares of the defaulting shareholders. 20 May The forfeited shares were resold for $4.50 per share as fully paid. Share reissue costs amounted to $5,000. The defaulting shareholders are to bear all costs of the reissue and any surplus is to be refunded to them. Required: Provide the journal entries necessary to account for the above transactions and events for the year ended 30 June 2013. Show all relevant dates and narrations. MARKING GUIDE: Question 2 Max. marks allocated Journal entries 11.5 Dates 1.5 Narrations 1 Workings 1 Total 15 Page 4 of 5 Question 3 [20 marks] Recognition and measurement for intangible assets Optical Ltd, a diversified company, has been expanding its operations over the past decade. The company has been involved in the following activities over the past year: (a) Acquisition of a licence to import the ePhone brand of mobile phone. The licence had an acquisition cost of $250,000, and the company spent a further $20,000 for promotion of the new phone. Legal fees for acquisition of the licence amounted to $15,000. While the licence is for ten year period, the company estimates the mobile phone will produce net cash flows for a five-year period, with net cash flows decreasing steadily over that period. (b) Research and development activities for a new electronic switching gear that the company believes will be suitable for use in a wide variety of applications and products. Costs incurred during the year comprised of the following: $ Staff salaries for obtaining knowledge of possible electronic configurations for the switching gear 30,000 Design and construction of a pre-production prototype 40,000 Outside consultant’s fees: – relating to obtaining knowledge of possible configurations – relating to the pre-production prototype 14,000 16,000 General administrative overhead expenses 10,000 Legal and professional fees to register a patent over the switching gear design 25,000 The company believes the switching gear will have a potential life of ten years. (c) Development of a customer list database of the company’s customers. Due to its diversified operations, and to approaches by a number of direct marketing companies, Optical Ltd compiled a database of its own customers during the year. The database contains details such as customer banes, addresses, telephone and email contact details, and annual dollar amount and product type of sales to each customer. The company believes it could derive income from the sale of this customer list to the direct marketing companies that have already approached it and also to other marketing companies. The salary costs of the sales department staff involved in developing the database amounted to $27,500, and Optical Ltd conservatively estimates the value of the customer list at $100,000. Required: (1) Discuss which of the above costs can be recognised as intangible assets in Optical Ltd’s statement of financial position in accordance with AASB138. Provide relevant paragraph numbers from the standard to support your answer. (2) For any of the costs above that may be recognised as an intangible asset, discuss any issues of relevance to their measurement after initial recognition. MARKING GUIDE: Question 3 Max. marks allocated (a) 7 (b) 10 (c) 3 Total 20 Page 5 of 5 Question 4 [20 marks] Revaluation of depreciable assets Yoko Ltd acquired a machine on 1 July 2011 at a cost of $240,000. At the date of acquisition, Yoko Ltd’s directors determine to depreciate the machine on a straight-line basis over a period of six years. The company elects to adopt the revaluation model subsequent to acquisition. The directors estimated the fair values for the machine would be $190,000 and $165,000 for the years ended 30 June 2012 and 2013 respectively. There is no change in the originally estimated useful life for the machine. Assume a tax rate of 30%. Required: Prepare journal entries to account for the above transactions for the years ending 2012 and 2013. MARKING GUIDE: Question 4 Max. marks allocated Appropriate workings shown 4 Journal entries 15 Narrations 1 Total 20
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment should be 1800-2000 words.
Oxford referencing.
according to the Australian law
Just over two years ago, Jane bought a rundown coffee shop business and the premises at which the business was carried on. Soon after buying the business and premises, she had the shop refitted. This was done by her husband, Edward, who runs a redecorating business. The cost of refitting the shop was $40,000. Jane did not pay this amount to Edward despite the fact that the original term orally agreed between them was that Jane would pay the full amount to Edward within a year. It was also orally agreed at the time that no interest would be payable on the debt. The coffee shop business has proved very successful. Six months ago, the shop next door to Jane’s was put on the market for sale. Jane saw this as a great opportunity to expand her business. She spoke to her bank manager about obtaining a loan to finance the purchase and redecoration of the adjoining shop. The bank manager was concerned that Jane had not yet paid her outstanding debt to Edward. Furthermore, if Jane did pay this debt, it seemed that she would not have quite enough capital to meet the bank’s lending rules. Jane explained this situation to Edward. She said she was very keen to buy the shop but she could only do so if he would accept $10,000 in full and final settlement of the outstanding debt. Edward agreed to this and they wrote their agreement on a sheet of paper and both signed it. Edward’s reason for agreeing to this arrangement was partly because he wanted to help his wife and partly because he assumed that she would hire him to redecorate the new shop. Jane produced the signed written agreement to her bank and, because of it, was able to get a bank loan and go ahead with the purchase of the shop next door. Jane then arranged for the shop to be redecorated but she did not engage Edward to do this. Instead, she hired Max who operates a decorating business across the road from Jane’s coffee shop business. Jane has paid Max $25,000 for redecorating the shop. Jane has since spent a lot of time socially with Max and has now declared her wish to end her marriage to Edward and start a new relationship with Max. Edward is outraged at Jane’s declaration and his first response has been to sue her for the $30,000 that he claims is outstanding from his refitting the coffee shop.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Semester 3 2013-14
ASSIGNMENT
This assignment is to be completed in groups of three and comprises twenty per-cent of the
marks for this course. There are 4 parts to discuss.
Assessment Criteria:
Student work will generally be assessed in terms of the following criteria:
1. Effectiveness of communication – ie readability, legibility, grammar, spelling, neatness,
completeness and presentation will be a minimum threshold requirement for all written
work submitted for assessment.Work that is illegible or incomprehensible and does not
meet the minimum requirement will be awarded a fail grade.
2. Demonstrated understanding – This will be evidenced by the student’s ability to be
dialectical in the discussion of contentious issues.
3. Evidence of research – This will be evidenced by the references made to the statutes,
auditing standards, books, journal articles and inclusion of a bibliography.
Note:
1. All written work must conform with the University of Ballarat General Guide for the
Presentation of Academic Work.
2. For all written work students must ensure that they submit their own original work. Any
act of plagiarism will be severely penalised.
Plagiarism is presenting someone else work as your own and is a serious offence with serious
consequences. As set out in the University Regulation 6.1.1, students who are caught
plagiarising will, for a first offence, be given a zero mark for that task. A second offence will
result in a failing grade for the course(s) involved and any subsequent offence will be referred
to the Student Discipline Committee. Student must be aware of the University Regulation 6.1.1
Student Plagiarism, available at http://www.ballarat.edu.au/legislation/6.1.1-plagiarism. The
link to the library website for more information is:
http://www.ballarat.edu.au/library/assignment-and-research-help/referencing
Students must:
? fully reference the source(s) of all material, even if you have re-expressed the ideas,
facts or descriptions;
? acknowledge all direct quotations; and
? not submit work that has been researched and written by another person.
The Business School
BUACC3701: Auditing
Note – You will need to resource beyond the identified documents
PART A. (5 marks)
Auditor conservatism following audit failures
Stephan A. Fafatas
Williams School of Commerce, Economics and Politics,
Washington and Lee University, Lexington, Virginia, USA
Extract:
Findings – Empirical results indicate that auditor response to audit failure has
changed over time. Auditors implicated in audit failure events occurring in the post-
Enron and Sarbanes-Oxley period enforce more conservative accounting choices in
the year following the event. Specifically, clients of the implicated firm’s office
report a significant decline in discretionary accounting accruals relative to clients of
other auditors in the same city location. However, a significant change in client
discretionary accounting accruals is not found following audit failures that occurred
prior to 2001, the year of the Enron bankruptcy.
Under GAAP a company’s reported net income includes both an operating cash
flow component and a component related to accounting accrual adjustments. The
amount and timing of these accrual adjustments are subject to management’s
discretion over accounting policies
Auditor Conservatism after Enron
Dorothy A. Feldmann , William J. Read
Extract:
Corporate scandals and the resulting passage of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act
(SOX) in 2002 significantly affected the auditing profession. The quality of
financial statement audits was called into questioned and the media and
regulators held audit firms responsible. Several studies found evidence of an
increase in the issuance of going-concern opinions after the passage of SOX
relative to earlier time periods (Geiger et al. 2005; Nogler 2008; Myers et al.
2008). Auditors, it appears, behave more conservatively when the profession
is in the headlines.
Discuss how the auditing profession behaved after the Enron collapse and the
introduction of the Sarbanes-Oxley legislation.
PART B. . (5 marks)
Financial crisis and the silence of the auditors
Prem Sikka
Accounting, Organisations and Society (2009)
Abstract:
Against the backdrop of the current financial crisis, this paper seeks to stimulate debates about
contemporary auditing practices. It notes that many financial enterprises have sought state
support within a short period of receiving unqualified audit opinion. Auditors collected large
amounts in audit and non-audit fees. The events raise questions about the value of company
audits, auditor independence and quality of audit work, economic incentives for good audits
and the knowledge base of auditors.
Extract
Accountants, as auditors, have cemented their status and privileges on the
basis of claims that their expertise enables them to mediate uncertainty and
construct independent, objective, true, and fair accounts of corporate affairs.
This expertise, it is claimed, enables markets, investors, employees, citizens,
and the state to limit and manage risks. Such claims, however, are precarious
as measures of revenues, costs, assets, liabilities, and profits are contested
technically as well as politically and also because capitalist economies are
inherently prone to crises (O’Connor, 1987). The claims of expertise are
frequently punctured by unexpected corporate collapses, frauds, and failures.
Such events fuel the suspicions that auditors lack the requisite independence,
expertise and incentives to construct the promised ‘true’ and ‘fair’ account of
corporate affairs.
Accounting firms have been accused of delivering ‘dodgy auditing’ Discuss
PART C. (3.5 marks)
None of the Big Four accounting firms is a single firm; rather, they are accounting networks.
What is an accounting network and what benefits are there for the big accounting firms?
Discuss and explain
PART D. (6.5 marks)
Extracted from Australian Government – The Treasury
Auditors are currently exposed to unlimited liability for professional default.
Auditors, and other professional groups have traditionally dealt with their unlimited liability
exposure for professional default through professional indemnity insurance. Professional
indemnity insurance insures against loss arising from professional services offered by the
insured professional.
Australia is currently experiencing a ‘hard insurance market’, that is, a market characterised
by tougher risk selection by insurers. The recent submissions by the two professional
accounting bodies to the ACCC indicate that the position in relation to the availability and
cost of professional indemnity insurance has deteriorated in the current ‘hard insurance
market’:
The backdrop to the CLERP 9 consideration of the issues relating to the professional liability
of auditors is the important role that the independent audit function performs in relation to
Australia’s corporate governance framework and the efficiency of the capital market.
The following policy options have been raised by the accounting profession for the purpose
of establishing an appropriate framework to address the profession’s concerns in relation to
the present system of auditor liability:
? The incorporation of auditors.
? The law of joint and several liability in relation to actions for negligence causing property
damage or purely economic loss and its replacement by proportionate liability.
? The capping of professional liability within the framework of State and Territory
Professional Standards legislation.
Discuss each of the aforementioned three points (i.e. could or should these changes be
made)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Business School BUACC3701: Financial Management 2 Infinite period model with supernormal growth The Brown Company has a current dividend of $2 per share. The following are the expected annual growth rates for dividends. The required rate of return for the stock is 14%. Year 1-3: 25% Year 4-6: 20% Year 7-9: 15% Year 10 on: 9% ? Estimate the value of this stock. Part B (5 marks) In contrast to various discounted cash-flow techniques that attempt to estimate a specific value for a stock based on its estimated growth rates and its discount rate, the relative valuation techniques implicitly contend that it is possible to determine the value of an economic entity (i.e., the market, an industry, or a company) by comparing it to similar entities on the basis of several relative ratios that compare its stock price to relevant variables that effect a stock’s value, such as earnings, cash flow, book value and sales. Consider the following four approaches. 1. Earnings Multiplier Model Assume a stock has an expected dividend payout of 50%, a required rate of return of 12% and an expected growth rate for dividends of 9%. Current earnings are $2.00 per share and the expected growth rate for earnings is 9%. ? Calculate the earnings multiplier and stock price Briefly explain the following methods (for and against) 2. Price/Cash Flow Ratio 3. Price/Book Value Ratio 4. Price/Sales Ratio Part C (5 marks) Bent ltd has a bond issue that will mature to its $1000 par value in 12 years. It pays interest annually and has a coupon rate of 11%. a) Find the value of the bond if the required rate of return is ? 11% ? 15% ? 8% 3 b) Plot your finding on a set of required return (x-axis) and market value of bond (y-axis) c) Use your findings in parts a and b to discuss the relationship between the coupon interest rate on a bond and the required return and the market value of the bond relative to its par value. d) What possible reasons could cause the required rate to differ from the coupon interest rate Part D (13 marks) You are required to evaluate the risk and return of the following two assets – A and B individually and see how they might fit into a diversifiable portfolio. Equal halves would be shared between both assets if included in a portfolio Each asset’s risk can be assessed in two ways: in isolation and as part the firm’s diversified portfolio of assets. The risk-free rate is currently 5%. Return data for assets A and B, 2001-2010 are as follows Asset A Asset B Year Cash Value Cash Value flow Beginning Ending flow Beginning Ending 2001 1000 20000 22000 1500 20000 19000 2002 1500 22000 21000 1600 20000 19500 2003 1400 21000 24000 1700 20000 21000 2004 1700 24000 22000 1800 21000 21000 2005 1900 22000 23000 1900 21000 22000 2006 1600 23000 26000 2000 22000 23000 2007 1700 26000 25000 2100 23000 23000 2008 2000 25000 24000 2200 23000 24000 2009 2100 24000 27000 2300 24000 25000 2010 2200 27000 30000 2400 25000 25000 The market index is as follows: Market Index 2000 200.00 2001 227.00 2002 250.00 2003 283.00 2004 312.00 2005 352.00 2006 387.00 2007 412.00 2008 447.00 2009 503.00 2010 541.00 Year 4 Required a) Calculate the annual rate of return for each asset in each of the 10 preceding years, and those values to find the average annual return for each asset over the 10-year period. b) Use the returns to find the standard deviation and the coefficient of variation of the returns for each asset over the 10-year period 2001-2010. c) Use your findings in questions a and b to evaluate and discuss the return and risk associated with each asset. Which asset appears to be preferable? Explain. d) Use the CAPM to find the required return for each asset. Compare this value with average annual returns calculated in question a. e) Calculate the portfolio return and standard deviation of a portfolio consisting of both stock A and Stock B f) Calculate the weights of the minimum variance portfolio. g) Calculate the weights of the optimal risky portfolio h) What recommendations would you make with regard to investing in either of the two assets or in a portfolio together?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
1. The property, plant, and equipment accounts of Robertson Inc. had the following balances at December 31, 2014.
Account NameAmount
Land $ 300,000
Land improvements 140,000
Buildings 1,100,000
Equipment 960,000
Transactions that occurred during 2014 include the following:
i. A tract of land was acquired for $150,000 as a potential future building site.
ii. A plant facility consisting of land and building was acquired from Pellum Company in exchange for 20,000 shares of Robertson’s common stock. On the acquisition date, Robertson’s stock had a closing market price of $37 per share on a national stock exchange. The plant facility was carried on Pellum’s books at $110,000 for land and $320,000 for the building at the exchange date. Current appraised value for the land is $230,000 and building is $690,000.
iii. Expenditures totaling $95,000 were made for new parking lots, streets, and sidewalks at the corporation’s various plant locations. These expenditures had an estimated useful life of 15 years.
iv. Items of machinery and equipment were purchased at a total cost of $400,000. Additional costs were incurred as follows.
a. Freight and unloading $13,000
Sales taxes 20,000
b. Installation 26,000
v. A machine costing $80,000 on January 1, 2007, was scrapped on June 30, 2015. Double-declining- balance depreciation has been recorded on the basis of a 10-year life.
vi. A machine was sold for $20,000 on July 1, 2015. Original cost of the machine was $44,000 on January 1, 2012, and it was depreciated on the straight-line basis over an estimated useful life of 7 years and a salvage value of $2,000.
Required:
1. Prepare a schedule analyzing the changes in each of the property, plant, and equipment accounts for 2014.
2. Prepare a schedule showing the gain or loss from each property, plant, and equipment’s disposal that would be recognized in the company’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 2014.
2. On December 1, 2014, PhiferLandcaping Corp. began construction of a new plant on. On that date, the company purchased a parcel of land for $139,000 in cash. In addition, it paid
$2,000 in surveying costs and $4,000 for a title insurance policy. An old dwelling on the premises was demolished at a cost of $3,000, with $1,000 being received from the sale of materials.
Architectural plans were also formalized on December 1, 2014, when the architect was paid $30,000.
In addition, the necessary building permits that cost $3,000 were obtained from the city and paid for on December 1. The excavation work began during the first week in December with payments made to the contractor as follows.
Date Payment Amount
March 1, 2015$240,000
May 1, 2015330,000
July 1, 2015 60,000
The building was completed on July 1, 2015.
To finance construction of this plant, Phifer borrowed $600,000 from the bank on December 1, 2014. The $600,000 was a 10-year loan bearing interest at 8%.Phifer had no other borrowings.
Required:
1. What is the balance of land in 2013 and 2014?
2. What is the balance of building in 2013 and 2014?
3. What is the interest expense amount in 2013 and 2014?
4. Calculate the amount of interest Phifer should capitalize in 2013 and 2014. (Hint use the specific interest method).
3. This is a continuation of problem 1 (Robertson Inc.)
Required:
For each property, plant, and equipment account prepare a schedule showing depreciation expense for the year ended December 31, 2014. Use the following depreciation methods and useful lives:
Land improvements-Straight line; 15 years
Buildings-150% declining balance; 20 years
Equipment-Straight line; 10years
Depreciation is computed to the nearest month and no residual values are used.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
One item is omitted in each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income statement data for the following four differentcorporations.
Enter the missing amounts. (Hint: First determine the amount of increase or decrease instockholders’ equityduring the year.)
|
Aquarius |
Libra |
Scorpio |
Taurus |
|
Beginning of the year: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assets |
$505,500 |
|
$576,300 |
|
$212,300 |
|
|
|
|
Liabilities |
303,300 |
|
299,700 |
|
161,300 |
|
$275,300 |
|
|
End of the year: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assets |
626,800 |
|
806,800 |
|
191,100 |
|
568,900 |
|
|
|
Liabilities |
273,000 |
|
253,600 |
|
169,800 |
|
312,000 |
|
|
During the year: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Additional issuance of capital stock |
|
115,300 |
|
21,200 |
|
91,800 |
|
|
|
Dividends |
35,400 |
|
34,600 |
|
|
134,600 |
|
|
|
Revenue |
166,800 |
|
|
244,200 |
|
256,900 |
|
|
|
Expenses |
91,000 |
|
149,800 |
|
261,100 |
|
293,600 |
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Santos Company currently manufactures one of its crucial parts at a cost of $3.40 per
unit. This cost is based on a normal production rate of 50,000 units per year. Variable
costs are $1.50 per unit, fixed costs related to making this part are $50,000 per year,
and allocated fixed costs are $45,000 per year. Allocated fixed costs are unavoidable
whether the company makes or buys the part. Santos is considering buying the part from
a supplier for a quoted price of $2.70 per unit guaranteed for a three-year period. Should
the company continue to manufacture the part, or should it buy the part from the outside
supplier? Support your answer with analyses.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compute operating income for RIM and TIP, separately, and the total operating income for both.
- If the results in part 1 for TIP are typical, why do you believe RIM decided to sell off its interest in TIP?
I have attached the assignemnt below.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Students will calculate the cost that should be assigned to land, buildings, and equipment and provide the journal entry to record the acquisition of these assets.
Sam’s Corporation paid $550,000 to acquire land, building, and equipment. At the time of the acquisition, Sam paid $50,000 to have the property appraised. The following values were determined from the appraisal:
|
Land
|
180,000
|
|
Building
|
285,000
|
|
Equipment
|
175,000
|
Respond to the following questions:
- What cost should Sam assign to the land, buildings, and equipment, respectively?
- How should the journal entry be recorded on the corporation’s books to describe this acquisition?
- Why is it necessary to allocate a lump sum purchase amount among the individual assets acquired?
- What are the characteristics that an asset must have for it to be classified as property, plant, and equipment?
- Generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) requires that property, plant, and equipment should be recorded at historical cost. What are the advantages of recording property, plant, and equipment at historical cost?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Module 9 Review Questions I. Payback period and computation; even cash flows Compute the payback period for each of the following two separate investments (round the payback period to two decimals): 1. A new operating system for an existing machine is expected to cost $260,000 and have a useful life of five years. The system yields an incremental after-tax income of $75,000 each year after deducting its straight-line depreciation. The predicted salvage value of the system is $10,000. 2. A machine costs $190,000, has a $10,000 salvage value, is expected to last nine years II. Payback period computation; uneven cash flows Wenro Company is considering the purchase of an asset for $90,000. It is expected to produce the following net cash flows. The cash flows occur evenly throughout each year. Compute the payback period for this investment. III. Accounting Rate of Return A machine costs $500,000 and is expected to yield an after-tax net income of $15,000 each year. Management predicts this machine has a 10-year service life and a $100,000 salvage value, and it uses straight-line depreciation. Compute this machine’s accounting rate of return. IV. Computing Net Present Value K2B Company is considering the purchase of equipment that would allow the company to add a new product to its line. The equipment is expected to cost $240,000 with a 12- year life and no salvage value. It will be depreciated on a straight-line basis. The company expects to sell 96,000 units of the equipment’s product each year. The expected annual income related to this equipment follows: K2B concludes that the investment must earn at least an 8% return. Compute the net present value of this investment. (Round the net present value to the nearest dollar.) V. Net Present Value Interstate Manufacturing is considering either replacing one of its old machines with a new machine or having the old machine overhauled. Information about the two alternatives follows. Management requires a 10% rate of return on its investments. Alternative 1: Keep the old machine and have it overhauled. If the old machine is overhauled, it will be kept for another five years and then sold for its salvage value. (Continued next page) Alternative 2: Sell the old machine and buy a new one. The new machine will be more efficient and will yield substantial operating cost savings with more products produced and sold. 1. Determine the net present value of alternative 1. 2. Determine the net present value of alternative 2. 3. Which alternative do you recommend management select? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, 2012, Palmer Company leased equipment to Woods Corporation. The following information pertains to this lease.
| 1. |
|
The term of the noncancelable lease is6years, with no renewal option. The equipment reverts to the lessor at the termination of the lease. |
| 2. |
|
Equal rental payments are due on January 1 of each year, beginning in 2012. |
| 3. |
|
The fair value of the equipment on January 1, 2012, is $233,000, and its cost is $195,720. |
| 4. |
|
The equipment has an economic life of 8 years, with an unguaranteed residual value of $10,560. Woods depreciates all of its equipment on a straight-line basis. |
| 5. |
|
Palmer sets the annual rental to ensure an8% rate of return. Woods’s incremental borrowing rate is9%, and the implicit rate of the lessor is unknown. |
| 6. |
|
Collectibility of lease payments is reasonably predictable, and no important uncertainties surround the amount of costs yet to be incurred by the lessor. |
(Both the lessor and the lessee’s accounting period ends on December 31.) I need the annual rent payment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comparing amounts for ending inventory—perpetual inventory—FIFO and LIFO (5-10 min] Models store bought and sold a line of dolls during December as follows: Beginning inventory 13 units •g.) $11 Sale 9 units Purchase 17 units of S13 Sale 13 units
Models uses the perpetual inventory system. Requirements 1 Calculate the cost of ending inventory using FIFO. 2 Calculate the cost of ending inventory using LIFO. 3 Which method results in a higher cost of ending inventory? E6-8 Comparing cost of sales in a perpetual system—FIFO and LIFO (15-20 min( Review the data in Exercise 6-7. Requirements I Calculate the cost of sales under FIFO. 2 Calculate the cost of sales under LIFO. 3 Which method results in the higher cost of sales?
ocur aws•i: ••101‘11 01111UUI1l ID IIIVIV !CUMULI Vlve rJUI 11Cd1U11.
P9-4 U ing the allowance method for bad debts (20-35 min] t 30 ptember, the accounts of South Terrace Medical Centre (STMC) include the following:
Accounts receivable 5145000 Allowance for doubtful debts (credit balance) 3 500
During October to December, STMC completed the following selected transactions:
01″/ V•%•/*/•••• ¦•¦¦•¦¦¦•
Dec 28 Wrote off accounts receivable as uncollectable: Regan Ltd. $1300; Owen White. $900; and Rain Ltd, $700. Dec 31 Recorded bad debt expense bawd on the ageing of accounts receivable, as follows:
.¦•••••¦¦•¦•• Age of accounts Accounts receivable 1-30 days 31-60 days 61-90 days Over 90 days $165000 597000 $37000 514000 $17000 Estimated 16 uncollectable 0.3% 3% 30% 35% Requirements
1 Journalise the transaction. 2 Open the Allowance for doubtful debts T-accounts, and post entries affecting that account. Keep a running balance. 3 Show how South Terrace Medical Centre should report net accounts receivable on its 31 December balance sheet. Use the three line reporting format.
P11-5 ournalising, posting and reporting liabilities [30 min) The hside Inn general ledger at 30 September 2014, the end of its financial year, includes the following account balances before adjusting entries.
Accounts payable Current portion of non-current debt Interest payable Salary payable Employee income taxes payable
$36 210 Employer payroll tax payable – Unearned rent revenue – Non-current debt
3 900
10′ 000
The additional data needed to prepare the adjusting entries at 30 September are as follows: a The non-current debt is payable in annual instalments of $50000, with the next instalment due on 31 January 2015. On that date, Northsidc will also pay one year’s interest at 6%. Interest was last paid on 31 January. Make the adjusting entry to shift the current instalment of the non-current debt to a current liability. Also accrue interest expense at year-end. b Gross salaries for the last payroll of the financial year were S4 300. Of this amount, employee income taxes payable were 5900. c Employer payroll tax payable was 5850. d On 1 August, the business collected six months’ rent of S3 900 in advance.
1 What value would eagle report on the balance sheet at 3(l June 1014 for Inventory! E6-11 Applying the lower-of-cost-and-net-realisable-value rule to inventories (5 min] y Good Foods reports inventory at the lower of average cost or NRV. Prior to releasing its March 2012 financial statements, Naturally’s preliminary income statement, before the year-end adjustments, appears as follows:
NATURALLY GOOD FOODS Income statement—partial for the year ended 31 March 2012
Sales revenue 5117 000 Cost of sales 45 000 Gross profit S 72 000
,
Naturally has determined that the NRV of ending inventory is S17000. Cost is $18000. Requirements 1 Journalise the adjusting entry for inventory, if any is required. 2 Prepare a revised income statement to show how Naturally Good Foods should report sales, cost of sales and gross profit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Troy Ridgell incorporated Ridgell Consulting, an accounting practice, on May 1, 2012. During the first month of operations, these events and transactions occurred. May 1 Stockholders invested $40,000 cash in exchange for common stock of the corporation.
2 Hired a secretary-receptionist at a salary of $2,000 per month.
3 Purchased $800 of supplies on account from Fleming Supply Company.
7 Paid office rent of $1,400 for the month.
11 Completed a tax assignment and billed client $1,500 for services provided.
12 Received $4,200 advance on a management consulting engagement.
17 Received cash of $3,300 for services completed for Goodman Co.
31 Paid secretary-receptionist $2,000 salary for the month.
31 Paid 50% of balance due Fleming Supply Company.
The company uses the following chart of accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Accounts Payable, Unearned Service Revenue, Common Stock, Service Revenue, Salaries and Wages Expense, and Rent Expense.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the transactions, including explanations.
(b) Post to the ledger T accounts.
(c) Prepare a trial balance on May 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Special Delivery was started on May 1 with an investment of $45,000 cash. Following are the assets and liabilities of the company on May 31, 2012, and the revenues and expenses for the month of May, its first month of operations.
Accounts receivable $ 6,200 Notes payable $28,000
Service revenue 10,400 Salaries and wages expense 2,000
Advertising expense 800 Equipment 56,000
Accounts payable 2,400 Maintenance and repairs expense 2,900
Cash 15,800 Insurance expense 400
No additional common stock was issued in May, but a dividend of $1,700 in cash was paid.
Instructions
a. Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the month of May and a balance sheet at May 31, 2012.
b. Briefly discuss whether the company’s first month of operations was a success.
c. Discuss the company’s decision to distribute a dividend.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On August 31, the balance sheet of Donahue Veterinary Clinic showed Cash $9,000, Accounts Receivable $1,700, Supplies $600, Equipment $6,000, Accounts Payable $3,600, Common Stock $13,000, and Retained Earnings $700. During September, the following transactions occurred.
1. Paid $2,900 cash for accounts payable due.
2. Collected $1,300 of accounts receivable.
3. Purchased additional office equipment for $2,100, paying $800 in cash and the balance on account.
4. Earned revenue of $7,300, of which $2,500 is paid in cash and the balance is due in October.
5. Declared and paid a $400 cash dividend
6. Paid salaries $1,700, rent for September $900, and advertising expense $200.
7. Incurred utilities expense for month on account $170.
8. Received $10,000 from Capital Bank on a 6-month note payable.
(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the September transactions beginning with August 31 balances. (If a transaction causes a decrease in Assets, Liabilities or Stockholders’ Equity, place a negative sign (or parentheses) in front of the amount entered for the particular Asset, Liability or Equity item that was reduced. See Illustration 1-8 for example.)
(b) Prepare an income statement for September, a retained earnings statement for September, and a balance sheet at September 30.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Selected year-end financial statements of McCord Corporation follow. (Note: All sales are on credit; selected balance sheet amounts at December 31, 2004, were inventory, $32,400; total assets, $182,400; common stock, $90,000; and retained earnings, $31,300.)
McCORD CORPORATION
Income Statement
For Year Ended December 31, 2005
|
Sales
|
$348,600
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
229,150
|
|
Gross profit
|
119,450
|
|
Operating expenses
|
52,500
|
|
Interest expense
|
3,100
|
|
Income before taxes
|
63,850
|
|
Income taxes
|
15,800
|
|
Net income
|
$48,050
|
McCORD CORPORATION
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2005
Assets Liabilities and Equity
|
Cash
|
$ 9,000
|
Accounts payable
|
$16,500
|
|
Short-term investments
|
7,400
|
Accrued wages payable
|
2,200
|
|
Accounts receivable, net
|
28,200
|
Income taxes payable
|
2,300
|
|
Notes receivable (trade)*
|
3,500
|
|
|
|
Merchandise inventory
|
31,150
|
Long-term note payable, sec by mortgage on plant asset
|
62,400
|
|
Prepaid expenses
|
1,650
|
Common stock, $1 par value
|
90,000
|
|
Plant assets, net
|
152,300
|
00 Retained earnings
|
59,800
|
|
Total assets
|
$233,200
|
00 Total liabilities and equity
|
$233,200
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Watson Technical Institute (WTI), a school owned by Tom Watson, provides training to individuals who pay tuition directly to the school. WTI also offers training to groups in off-site locations. Its unadjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2005, follows. WTI initially records prepaid expenses and unearned revenues in balance sheet accounts. Descriptions of items a through h that require adjusting entries on December 31, 2005, follow.
Additional Information Items
a. An analysis of the school’s insurance policies shows that $3,000 of coverage has expired.
b. An inventory count shows that teaching supplies costing $2,600 are available at year-end 2005.
c. Annual depreciation on the equipment is $12,000.
d. Annual depreciation on the professional library is $6,000.
e. On November 1, the school agreed to do a special six-month course (starting immediately) for a client. The contract calls for a monthly fee of $2,200, and the client paid the first five months’ fees in advance. When the cash was received, the Unearned Training Fees account was credited. The fee for the sixth month will be recorded when it is collected in 2006.
f. On October 15, the school agreed to teach a four-month class (beginning immediately) for an individual for $3,000 tuition per month payable at the end of the class. The services are being provided as agreed, and no payment has yet been received. g. The school’s two employees are paid weekly. As of the end of the year, two days’ wages have accrued at the rate of $100 per day for each employee.
h. The balance in the Prepaid Rent account represents rent for December.
Required
1. Prepare T-accounts (representing the ledger) with balances from the unadjusted trial balance.
2. Prepare the necessary adjusting journal entries for items a through h and post them to the T-accounts. Assume that adjusting entries are made only at year-end.
3. Update balances in the T-accounts for the adjusting entries and prepare an adjusted trial balance.
4. Prepare Watson Technical Institute’s income statement and statement of owner’s equity for the year 2005 and prepare its balance sheet as of December 31, 2005.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Matthews Delivery Service, Inc., completed the following transactions during its first month of operations for January 2012:
a. Matthews Delivery Service, Inc., began operations by receiving $6,000 cash and a truck valued at $11,000. The business issued common stock to acquire these assets.
b. Paid $300 cash for supplies.
c. Prepaid insurance, $700.
d. Performed delivery services for a customer and received $800 cash.
e. Completed a large delivery job, billed the customer $1,500, and received a promise to collect the $1,500 within one week.
f. Paid employee salary, $700.
g. Received $12,000 cash for performing delivery services.
h. Collected $600 in advance for delivery service to be performed later.
i. Collected $1,500 cash from a customer on account.
j. Purchased fuel for the truck, paying $200 with a company credit card. (Credit Accounts payable)
k. Performed delivery services on account, $900.
l. Paid office rent, $600. This rent is not paid in advance.
m. Paid $200 on account.
n. Paid cash dividends of $2,100.
Requirements
1. Record each transaction in the journal. Key each transaction by its letter. Explanations are not required.
2. Post the transactions that you recorded in Requirement 1 in the T-accounts.
Cash
Accounts receivable
Supplies
Prepaid insurance
Delivery truck
Accumulated depreciation
Accounts payable
Salary payable
Unearned service revenue
Common stock
Retained earnings
Dividends
Income summary
Service revenue
Salary expense
Depreciation expense
Insurance expense
Fuel expense
Rent expense
Supplies expense
3. Enter the trial balance in the worksheet for the month ended January 31, 2012.
Complete the worksheet using the adjustment data given at January 31.
a. Accrued salary expense, $700.
b. Depreciation expense, $60.
c. Prepaid insurance expired, $250.
d. Supplies on hand, $200.
e. Unearned service revenue earned during January, $500.
4. Prepare Matthews Delivery Service?s income statement and statement of retained earnings for the month ended January 31, 2012, and the classified balance sheet on that date. On the income statement, list expenses in decreasing order by amount?that is, the largest expense first, the smallest expense last.
5. Journalize and post the adjusting entries beginning with a.
6. Journalize and post the closing entries.
7. Prepare a post-closing trial balance at January 31, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Accounting for uncollectible accounts using the allowance method, and reporting receivables on the balance sheet
At September 30, 2012, the accounts of Mountain Terrace Medical Center (MTMC) include the following:
Accounts receivable $145,000
Allowance for uncollectible accounts (credit balance) 3,500
Dec 28 During the last quarter of 2012, MTMC completed the following selected transactions:
Dec 31 Wrote off accounts receivable as uncollectible: Regan, Co., $1,300; Owen Mac, $900; and Rain, Inc., $700.
Recorded uncollectible account expense based on the aging of accounts receivable, as follows:
Age of Accounts
Accounts receivable 1–30 Days 31–60 Days 61–90 Days Over 90 Days
$165,000 $97,000 $ 37,000 $14,000 $ 17,000
Estimated percent uncollectible 35% 0.3% 3% 30%
Requirements
1. Journalize the transactions.
2. Open the Allowance for uncollectible accounts T-account, and post entries affecting that account. Keep a running balance.
3. Show how Mountain Terrace Medical Center should report net accounts receivable on its December 31, 2012 balance sheet. Use the three line reporting format.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On June 24th of year 1, Alec, Bryce, and Connor form Triplets Corporation. They transfer the following assets: Property Transferred Transferor Asset Basis to Transferor FMV Number of Common Shares Issued Alec Land $200,000.00 $50,000.00 500 Bryce Production Equipment – 25,000.00 250 Connor Accounting Services – 25,000.00 250 Alec purchased the land 5 years ago for $200,000. Bryce purchase the production equipment 3 years ago for $48,000 and it is fully depreciated.
(a) Does the transaction meet the requirements of section 351?
(b) What are the amounts of the gains or losses recognized by Alec, Bryce, Connor, and Triplets?
(c) What is each shareholders basis in their stock? When does the holding period for the stock begin?
(d) What is Triplets’ basis in each asset? When does the holding period begin for each asset?
(e) How might they restructure this transaction to make it more beneficial from a tax perspective?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On February 1 of year 1, Richard, Mike, Patrick, and Sean form Brothers Corp and transfer the following items: Property Transferred Transferor Asset Basis to Transferor FMV Number of Common Shares Issued Richard Land 12000 30000 400 Building 38000 70000 Mortgage on Land and Building 60000 60000 Mike Machines 25000 40000 300 Patrick Truck 15000 10000 50 Sean Legal Services 0 10000 100 Richard purchased the building and land several years ago, $50,000 for the building, and $12,000 for the land. Depreciation has been claimed using the straight line method. In addition to the machines, Mike received a note from Brothers corp. due in 3 years for $10,000 at the market interest rate. Mike originally purchase the machines 3 years ago for $50,000. In addition to the truck, Patrick received a cash payment of $5,000. Patrick’s truck is 2 years old with an original price of $20,000.
(a) Does the transaction meet the requirements of section 351?
(b) What are the amounts of the gains or losses recognized by Richard, Mike, Patrick, Sean, and Brothers?
(c) What is each shareholder’s basis in their Brothers stock? When does the holding period for the stock begin?
(d) What is Brothers’ basis in its property and services? When does the holding period for each property begin?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Riviera Theater Inc. was recently formed. All facilities were completed on March 31. On April 1, the ledger showed: Cash $6,300; Land $10,000; Buildings (concession stand, projection room, ticket booth, and screen) $8,000; Equipment $6,000; Accounts Payable $2,300; Mortgage Payable $8,000; and Common Stock $20,000. During April, the following events and transactions occurred.
Apr. 2 Paid film rental fee of $800 on first movie.
3 Ordered two additional films at $750 each.
9 Received $4,700 cash from admissions.
10 Paid $2,000 of mortgage payable and $1,200 of accounts payable.
11 Hired M. Gavin to operate the concession stand. Gavin agrees to pay Riviera Theater 17% of gross receipts, payable monthly.
12 Paid advertising expenses $410.
20 Received one of the films ordered on April 3 and was billed $750. The film will be shown in April.
25 Received $3,000 cash from customers for admissions.
29 Paid salaries $1,900.
30 Received statement from M. Gavin showing gross receipts of $2,000 and the balance due to Riviera Theater of $340 for April. Gavin paid half of the balance due and will remit the remainder on May 5.
30 Prepaid $1,200 rental fee on special film to be run in May.
In addition to the accounts identified above, the chart of accounts shows: Accounts Receivable, Prepaid Rent, Service Revenue, Sales Revenue, Advertising Expense, Rent Expense, Salaries and Wages Expense.
Instructions
(a) Enter the beginning balances in the ledger T accounts as of April 1.
(b) Journalize the April transactions, including explanations. (Note: Riviera records admission revenue as service revenue, concession revenue as sales revenue, and film rental expense as rent expense.)
(c) Post the April journal entries to the ledger T accounts.
(d) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Danner Farm Supply Company manufactures and sells a pesticide called Snare. The following data are available for preparing budgets for Snare for the first 2 quarters of 2009.
1. Sales: Quarter 1, 28,000 bags; quarter 2, 42,000 bags. Selling price is $60 per bag.
2. Direct materials: Each bag of Snare requires 4 pounds of Gumm at a cost of $4 per pound and 6 pounds of Tarr at $1.50 per pound.
3. Desired inventory levels:
Type of Inventory January 1 April 1 July 1
Snare (bags) 8,000 12,000 18,000
Gumm (pounds) 9,000 10,000 13,000
Tarr (pounds) 14,000 20,000 25,000
4. Direct labor: Direct labor time is 15 minutes per bag at an hourly rate of $14 per hour.
5. Selling and administrative expenses are expected to be 15% of sales plus $175,000 per quarter.
6. Income taxes are expected to be 30% of income from operations.
Your assistant has prepared two budgets: (1) The manufacturing overhead budget shows expected costs to be 150% of direct labor cost. (2) The direct materials budget for Tarr shows the cost of Tarr purchases to be $297,000 in quarter 1 and $439,500 in quarter 2.
Instructions
Prepare the budgeted income statement for the first 6 months and all required operating budgets by quarters. (Note: Use variable and fixed in the selling and administrative expense budget). Do not prepare the manufacturing overhead budget or the direct materials budget for Tarr.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On May 31, six brothers decided to form the Grimm Brothers Partnership to publish and print children’s stories. The contributions of the brothers and their partnership interests are listed below. They share the economic risk of loss from liabilities according to their partnership interests.
Individual Asset Basis FMV Partnership to Partner Interest
Al Cash $15,000 $15,000 15%
Bob accounts Receiv. 0 20,000 20%
Clay Office equip. 13,000 15,000 15%
Dave Land 50,000 15,000 15%
Ed Building 15,000 150,000 20%
Fred Services ? 15,000 15%
The following other information about the contributions may be of interest:
1. Bob contributes accounts receivable from this proprietorship, which uses the cash method of accounting.
2. Clay uses the office equipment in a small business he owns. When he joins the partnership, he sells the remaining business assets to an outsider. He has claimed $8,000 of MACRS depreciation on the office equipment.
3. The partnership assumes a $130,000 mortgage on the building Ed contributes. Ed claimed $100,000 of straight-line MACRS depreciation on the commercial property.
4. Fred, an attorney, drew up all the partnership agreements and filed the neccessary paperwork. He receives a full 15% capital and profits interest for his services.
a. How much gain, loss or income must each partner recognize as a result of the formation?
b. How much gain, loss, or income must the partnership recognize as a result of the formation?
c. What is each partner’s basis in the partnership interest?
d. What is the partnership’s basis in its assets?
e. What is the partnership’s initial book value of each asset?
f. What effects do the depreciation recapture provisions have on the property contributions?
g. How would your answer to Part a change if Fred received only a profits interest?
h. What are the tax consequences to the partners and the partnership when the partnership sells for $9,000 the land contributed by Dave? Prior to the sale, the partnership held the land as an investment for two years.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Woodland Industries manufactures and sells custom-made windows. Its job costing system was designed using an activity-based costing approach. Direct materials and direct labor costs are accumulated separately, along with information concerning three manufacturing overhead cost drivers (activities). Assume that the direct labor rate is $15 per hour and that there were no beginning inventories. The following information was available for 2013, based on an expected production level of 50,000 units for the year, which will require 200,000 direct labor hours:
|
Activity cost Driver
|
Budgeted Costs for 2013
|
Cost Driver Used as Allocation Base
|
Cost Allocation Rate
|
|
|
Materials handling
|
$250,000
|
Number of parts used
|
$0.20
|
per part
|
|
Cutting and lathe work
|
1,750,000
|
Number of parts used
|
1.40
|
per part
|
|
Assembly and inspection
|
4,000,000
|
Direct labor hours
|
20.00
|
|
the following production, costs, and activities occurred during the month of July:
|
Units Produced
|
Direct Materials Costs
|
Number of Parts Used
|
Direct Labor Hours
|
|
3,200
|
$107,200
|
70,400
|
13,120
|
1, Calculate the total manufacturing costs and the cost per unit of the windows produced during the month of July (using the activity-based costing approach). (Round “”cost per unit produced”” to 2 decimal places.)
Total Manufacturing Cost:
Cost Per Unit Produced:
2. Assume instead that Woodland Industries applies manufacturing overhead on a direct labor hours basis (rather than using the activity-based costing system previously described). Calculate the total manufacturing cost and the cost per unit of the windows produced during the month of July. (Hint: You will need to calculate the predetermined overhead application rate using the total budgeted overhead costs for 2013.) (Round “”cost per unit produced”” to 2 decimal places.)
Total Manufacturing cost:
Cost Per Unit Produced:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Joint cost allocation, ending work in process inventories. Tastee Freez, Inc., produces two specialty ice cream mix flavors for soft serve ice cream machines. The two flavors, Extreme Chocolate and Very Strawberry, both start with a vanilla base. The vanilla base can be sold for $2 per gallon. The company did not have any beginning inventories but produced 8,000 gallons of the vanilla base during the most recent month at a cost of $5,200. The 8,000 gallons of base was used to begin production of 5,000 gallons of Extreme Chocolate and 3,000 gallons of Very Strawberry.
At the end of the month, the company had some of its ice cream mix still in process. There were
1,200 gallons of Extreme Chocolate 30% complete and 200 gallons of Very Strawberry 80% complete. Processing costs during the month for Extreme Chocolate and Very Strawberry were $9,152 and $8,880, respectively. The selling prices for Extreme Chocolate and Very Strawberry are $4 and $5, respectively.
Required
1. Allocate the joint costs to Extreme Chocolate and Very Strawberry under the following methods:
a. Sales value at splitoff
b. Net realizable value
c. Constant gross margin percentage NRV
2. Compute the gross margin percentages for Extreme Chocolate and Very Strawberry under each of the methods in requirement 1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparation of merchandise purchases budgets (for three periods) Formworks Company prepares monthly budgets. The current budget plans for a September ending inventory of 15,000 units. Company policy is to end each month with merchandise inventory equal to a specified percent of budgeted sales for the following month. Budgeted sales and merchandise purchases for the three most recent months follow. 1. Prepare the merchandise purchases budget for the months of July, August, and September. 2. Compute the ratio of ending inventory to the next month’s sales for each budget prepared in part 1. 3. How many units are budgeted for sale in October? II. Preparation of cash budgets (for three periods) Kasik Company budgeted the following cash receipts and cash disbursements for the first three months of next year. According to a credit agreement with the company’s bank, Kasik promises to have a minimum cash balance of $30,000 at each month-end. In return, the bank has agreed that the company can borrow up to $150,000 at an annual interest rate of 12%, paid the last day of each month. The interest is computed based on the beginning balance of the loan for the month. The company has a cash balance of $30,000 and a loan balance of $60,000 at January 1. Prepare monthly cash budgets for each of the first three months of next year. III. Computing budgeted cash payments for purchases Powerdyne Company’s cost of goods sold is consistently 60% of sales. The company plans to carry ending merchandise inventory for each month equal to 40% of the next month’s budgeted cost of goods sold. All merchandise is purchased on credit, and 50% of the purchases made during a month is paid for in that month. Another 35% is paid for during the first month after purchase, and the remaining 15% is paid for during the second month after purchase. Expected dollar sales are: August (actual), $150,000 September (actual), $350,000 October (estimated), $200,000 November (estimated) $300,000. Use this information to determine October’s expected cash payments for purchases. IV. Budgeted Cash Receipts Emily Company has sales on account and sales for cash. Specifically, 60% of its sales are on account and 40% are for cash. Credit sales are collected in full in the month following the sale. The company forecasts sales of $525,000 for April, $535,000 for May, and $560,000 for June. The beginning balance of Accounts Receivable on April 1 is $300,000. Prepare a schedule of budgeted cash receipts for April, May, and June.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
To prepare a master budget for January, February, and March of 2014, management has gathered the following information: • Simid Sports’ single product is purchased for $30 per unit and resold for $55 per unit. The expected inventory level of 2,500 units on December 31, 2013, is more than management’s desired level for 2014 which is 20% of the next month’s expected sales (in units). Expected sales are: o January, 3,500 units; o February, 4,500 units; o March, 5,500 units; and o April, 5,000 units. • Cash sales and credit sales represent 25% and 75%, respectively, of total sales. Of the credit sales, 60% is collected in the first month after the month of sale and 40% in the second month after the month of sale. For the December 31, 2013, accounts receivable balance, $62,500 is collected in January and the remaining $200,000 is collected in February. • Merchandise purchases are paid for as follows: 20% in the first month after the month of purchase and 80% in the second month after purchase. For the December 31, 2013, accounts payable balance, $40,000 is paid in January and the remaining $140,000 is paid in February. • Sales commissions equal to 20% of sales are paid each month. Sales salaries (excluding commissions) are $30,000 per year. • General and administrative salaries are $72,000 per year. Maintenance expense equals $1,000 per month and is paid in cash. • Equipment reported in the December 31, 2013, balance sheet was purchased in January 2013. It is being depreciated over eight years using the straight-line method with no salvage value. The following amounts for new equipment purchases are planned in the coming quarter: January, $18,000; February, $48,000; and March, $14,400. This equipment will be depreciated using the straight-line method over eight years with no salvage value. A full month’s depreciation is taken for the month in which equipment is purchased. • The company plans to acquire land at the end of March at a cost of $75,000, which will be paid for with cash on the last day of the month. • Simid Sports has a working arrangement with its bank to obtain additional loans as needed. The interest rate is 12% per year, and interest is paid at each month-end based on the beginning balance. Partial or full payments on these loans can be made on the last day of the month. The company has agreed to maintain a minimum ending cash balance of $12,500 each month. • The income tax rate for the company is 40%. Income taxes on the first quarter’s income will not be paid until April 15.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparation of flexible budgets Mesa Company’s fixed budget for the first quarter of calendar year 2014 reveals the following. Prepare flexible budgets, following the format of Exhibit 8.3, that show variable costs per unit, fixed costs, and three different flexible budgets for sales volumes of 7,500, 10,000, and 12,500 units. II. Computation and interpretation of labor variances After evaluating Zero Company’s manufacturing process, management decided to establish standards of 1.5 hours of direct labor per unit of product and $11 per hour for the labor rate. During October, the company used 3,780 hours of direct labor at $45,360 total cost to produce 2,700 unit of product. In November, the company used 4,480 hours of direct labor at a $47,040 total cost to produce 2,800 units of product. 1. Compute the labor rate variance, the labor efficiency variance, and the total direct labor cost variance for October and for November. 2. Interpret the October direct labor variances. III. Computation and interpretation of materials variances BTS Company made 6,000 bookshelves using 88,000 board feet of wood costing $607,200. The company’s direct materials standards for one bookshelf are 16 board feet of wood at $7 per board foot. 1. Compute the direct material variances incurred in manufacturing these bookshelves. 2. Interpret the direct materials variances IV. Computation of total overhead rate and total overhead variance Tuna Company set the following standard unit costs for its single product. The predetermined overhead rate is based on a planned operating volume of 80% of the productive capacity of 60,000 units per quarter. The following flexible budget information is available. During the current quarter, the company operated at 70% of capacity and produced 42,000 units of product; actual direct labor totaled 250,000 hours. Units produced were assigned the following standard costs: Actual costs incurred during the current quarter follow: 1. Compute the direct materials cost variances, including its price and quantity variances. 2. Compute the direct labor variances, including its rate and efficiency variances. 3. Compute the overhead controllable and volume variances. 4. Compute the variable overhead spending and efficiency variance 5. Compute the fixed overhead spending and volume variance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACT350 Portfolio Project
Page 1 of 2
Using these 2007 annual reports for The Coca-Cola Company and PepsiCo, Inc., answer the following
questions. Write these up in a Word document, clearly identifying your response to each lettered item.
Show supporting calculations for the items lettered c, f, h, l, m, o, p, r, s and u.
a. What are the primary lines of business of these two companies as shown in their notes to the
financial statements?
b. Which company has the dominant position in beverage sales?
c. Which company has the greater percentage increase in total assets from 2006 to 2007?
d. Which company had more depreciation and amortization expense for 2007? Provide a rationale
as to why there is a difference in these amounts between the two companies.
e. What type of income format(s) is used by these two companies? Identify any differences in
income statement format between these two companies.
f. What are the gross profits, operating profits, and net incomes for these two companies over the
three-year period 2005-2007? Which company has had better financial results over this period
of time?
g. What format(s) did these companies use to present their balance sheets?
h. How much working capital did each of these companies have at the end of 2007? Speculate as
to their rationale for the amount of working capital they maintain.
i. What is the most significant difference in the asset structure of the two companies? What
causes this difference?
j. What were the two companies’ trends in net cash provided by operating activities over the
period 2005 to 2007?
k. What were the cash and cash equivalents reported by Coca-Cola and PepsiCo at the end of
2007? What does each company classify as cash equivalents?
l. What were the accounts receivable (net) for Coca-Cola and PepsiCo at the end of 2007? Which
company reports the greater allowance for doubtful accounts receivable (amount and
percentage of gross receivable) at the end of 2007?
m. What is the amount of inventory reported by Coca-Cola at December 31, 2007, and by PepsiCo
at December 29, 2007? What percent of total assets is invested in inventory by each company?
n. What inventory costing methods are used by Coca-Cola and PepsiCo? How does each company
value its inventories?
o. Compute and compare the inventory turnover ratios and days to sell inventory for Coca-Cola
and PepsiCo for 2007. Indicate why there might be a significant difference between the two
companies.
ACT350 Portfolio Project
Page 2 of 2
p. What amount is reported in the balance sheets as property, plant, and equipment (net) of CocaCola at December 31, 2007, and of PepsiCo at December 29, 2007? What percentage of total
assets is invested in property, plant, and equipment by each company?
q. What depreciation methods are used by Coca-Cola and PepsiCo for property, plant, and
equipment? How much depreciation was reported by Coca-Cola and PepsiCo in 2007, 2006, and
2005?
r. Compute and compare the following ratios for Coca-Cola and PepsiCo for 2007: Asset turnover,
Profit margin on sales, and Rate of return on assets.
s. What amounts for intangible assets were reported in their respective balance sheets by CocaCola and PepsiCo? What percentage of total assets is each of these reported amounts?
t. On what basis and over what periods of time did Coca-Cola and PepsiCo amortize their
intangible assets?
u. What were Coca-Cola’s and PepsiCo’s net revenues (sales) for the year 2007? Which company
increased its revenues more (dollars and percentage) from 2006 to 2007?
v. Are the revenue recognition policies of Coca-Cola and PepsiCo similar? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Controller of Santa Fe Housewares Inc. instructs you to prepare a monthly cash budget for the next three months. You are presented with the following budget information:
|
|
March
|
April
|
May
|
|
Sales
|
70,000
|
84,000
|
84,000
|
|
Manufacturing cost
|
32,000
|
39,000
|
42,500
|
|
Selling and Administrative expenses
|
12,000
|
18,000
|
21,000
|
The company expects to sell about 10% of its merchandise for cash. Of sales on account, 70% are expected to be collected in full in the month following the sale and the remainder the following month. Depreciation, insurance, and property tax expense represent $3,000 of the estimated monthly manufacturing costs. The annual insurance premium is paid in July, and the annual property taxes are paid in November. Of the remainder of the manufacturing costs, 80% are expected to be paid in the month in which they are incurred and the balance in the following month. Current assets as of August 1 include cash of $10,000, marketable securities of $40,000, and accounts receivable of $75,600 ($60,000 from February sales and $15,600 from January sales).Sales on account for January and February were $52,000 and $60,000, respectively.
Current liabilities as of August 1 include s $12,000, 15%, 90-day note payable due May 20 and $4,000 of accounts payable incurred in July for manufacturing costs. All selling and administrative expenses are paid in cash in the period they are incurred. It is expected that $1,800 in dividends will be received in March. An estimated income tax payment of $16,000 will be made in April. Santa Fe’s regular quarterly dividend of $3,000 is expected to be declared in April and paid in May. Management desires to maintain a minimum cash balance of $30,000.
Instructions:
1. Prepare a monthly cash budget and supporting schedules for August, September, and October. Input all amounts as positive values except overall cash decrease and deficiency which should be indicated with a minus sign. Assume 360 days per year for interest calculation.
2. On the basis of the cash budget prepared in part (1), what recommendation should be made to the controller?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On July 1, 20×1, Littleton Inc. loaned a key supplier of raw material $2,000,000 to construct a new processing facility. The loan is due on July 1, 20×3 and pays interest each December 31 and June 30. The supplier insisted on a variable rate loan. The controller of Littleton wants to avoid the risk of variable rate fluctuation and entered into an interest rate swap in which it will pay the variable rate on $2,000,000 in exchange for a fixed rate of 8.3%. The swap is settled on the interest payment dates. Variable interest rates and the value of the swap on selected dates are as follow:
Variable rate Value of the swap
July1, 20×1 7.9%
December 31, 20×1 7.75% 10,400
Prepare all journal entries to record this hedge through December 20×1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
James Hardy recently rejected a $20,000,000, five-year contract with the Vancouver Seals. The contract offer called for an immediate signing bonus of $5,000,000 and annual payments of $3,000,000. To sweeten the deal, the president of player personnel for the Seals has now offered a $22,000,000, five-year contract. This contract calls for annual increases and a balloon payment at the end of five years.
Year 1 $ 3,000,000
Year 2 3,100,000
Year 3 3,200,000
Year 4 3,300,000
Year 5 3,400,000
Year 5 balloon payment 6,000,000
Total $22,000,000
Required
Suppose you are Hardy’s agent and you wish to evaluate the two contracts using a required rate of return of 12 percent. In present value terms, how much better is the second contract?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Marsha Andersen, a product manager at Spencer, is charged with recommending a price for the item. Based on her experience with similar items, focus group responses, and survey information, she has estimated the number of units that can be sold at various prices:
|
Price:
|
Quantity:
|
|
$79.99
|
15,000
|
|
$69.99
|
20,000
|
|
$59.99
|
30,000
|
|
$49.99
|
45,000
|
|
$39.99
|
65,000
|
Required:
a) Calculate expected profit for each price.
b) Which price maximizes company profit.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Durkee Corporation keeps careful track of the time required to fill orders. The times required for a particular order appear below:
|
Wait time
|
Hours: 10.7
|
|
Process time
|
Hours: 0.9
|
|
Inspection time
|
Hours: 0.4
|
|
Move time
|
Hours: 2.3
|
|
Queue time
|
Hours: 4.5
|
Required:
A.) Determine the throughput time. Show your work!
B.) Determine the manufacture cycle efficiency (MCE), show your work!
C.) Determine the delivery cycle time. Show your work!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You are the vice-president of finance for Exploratory Resources, headquartered in Houston, Texas. In January 2007, your firm’s Canadian subsidiary obtained a six-month loan of 100,000 Canadian dollars from a bank in Houston to finance the acquisition of a titanium mine in Quebec province. The loan will also be repaid in Canadian dollars. At the time of the loan, the spot exchange rate was U.S. $0.8180/Canadian dollar and the Canadian currency was selling at a discount in the forward market. The June 2007 contract(Face value = $100,000 per contract) was quoted at U.S. $0.8120/Canadian dollar.
a. Explain how the Houston bank could lose on this transaction assuming no hedging.
b. If the bank does hedge with the forward contract, what is the maximum amount it can lose
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Wall Street Journal reported the following spot and forward rates for the Swiss franc:
|
Spot
|
$0.7876
|
|
30-day forward
|
$0.7918
|
|
90-day forward
|
$0.7968
|
|
180-day forward
|
$0.8039
|
a. Was the Swiss franc selling at a discount or a premium in the forward market?
b. What was the 30-day forward premium (or discount)?
c. What was the 90-day forward premium (or discount)?
d. Suppose you executed a 90-day forward contract to exchange 100,000 Swiss francs into U.S. dollars. How many dollars would you get 90 days hence?
e. Assume a Swiss bank entered into a 180-day forward contract with Citicorp to buy $100,000. How many francs will the Swiss bank deliver in six months to get the U.S. dollars?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fabricator Inc., a specialized equipment manufacturer, uses a job order costing system. The overhead is allocated to jobs on the basis of direct labor hours. The overhead rate is now $ 3,000 per direct labor hour. The design engineer thinks that this is illogical. The design engineer has stated the following: Our accounting system doesn’t make any sense to me. It tells me that every labor hour carries an additional burden of $3,000. This means that while direct labor makes up only 5% of our total product cost, it drives all our costs. In addition, these rates give my design engineers incentives to “design out” direct labor by using machine technology. Yet, over the past years as we have had less and less direct labor, the overhead rate keeps going up and up. I won’t be surprised if next year the rate is $4,000 per direct labor hour. I’m also concerned because small errors in our estimates of the direct labor content can have a large impact on our estimated costs. Just a 30-minute error in our estimate of assembly time is worth $1,500. Small mistakes in our direct labor time estimates really swing our bids around. I think this puts us at a disadvantage when we are going after business.
1. What is the engineer’s concern about the overhead rate going “up and up”?
2. What did the engineer mean about the large overhead rate being a disadvantage when placing bids and seeking new business?
3. What do you think is a possible solution?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hoover Inc. uses a job-order coding system. The company’s inventory balances on February 1, the start of its fiscal year, were as follows:
Raw Materials Inventory $69,325
Work in Process Inventory $55,100
Finished Goods Inventory $81,256
During the year, the following transactions were completed:
a. Raw materials were purchased on account, $215,221.
b. Raw materials were issued from the storeroom for use in production, $198,000 (70% direct and 30% indirect).
c. Employee salaries and wages were accrued as follows: direct labor, $243,300; indirect labor, $98,750; and selling and administrative salaries, $72,340.
d. Utility costs were incurred in the factory, $79,233.
e. Advertising costs were incurred. $110,600.
f. Prepaid insurance expired during the year, $35,000 (80% related to factory operations, and 20% related to selling and administrative activities).
g. Depreciation was recorded, $192,100 (75% related to factory assets, and 25% related to selling and administrative assets).
h. Manufacturing overhead was applied to jobs at the rate of 160% of direct labor cost.
i. Goods that cost $720,200 to manufacture according to their job cost sheets were transferred to the finished goods warehouse.
j. Sales for the year totaled $1,293,300 and were all on account. The total cost to manufacture these goods according to their job cost sheets was $725,825.
Submit your assignment as an Excel spreadsheet with each tab labeled by item number. Demonstrate the following:
1. Prepare the journal entries to record the transactions for the year.
2. Prepare the T-accounts for raw materials inventory, work in process inventory, finished goods inventory, manufacturing overhead, and cost of goods sold. Don’t forget to enter the beginning balances in the inventory accounts.
3. Is manufacturing overhead underapplied or overapplied for the year? Prepare a journal entry to close this balance to cost of goods sold.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Underapplied or overapplied overhead) At the end of 2013, Dub’s Wind Generator Co. had a $40,000 debit balance in its manufacturing overhead control account. Overhead is applied to products based on direct labor cost. Relevant account balance information at year end follows:
Work in process inventory finished inventory cost of goods sold
Direct material $20,000 $80,000 $120,000
Direct labor $10,000 $40,000 50,000
Factory overhead 20,000 80,000 100,000
Total 50,000 200,000 270,000
a. What predetermined OH rate was used during the year?
b. Provide arguments to be used for deciding whether to prorate the balance in the overhead account at the year end
c. Prorate the overhead account balance based on the relative balances of the appropriate accounts
d. Identify some possible reasons that the company had a debit balance in the overhead account at the end of the year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The management of Drummer Corporation is considering dropping product D84L. Data from the company’s accounting system appear below.
Sales $800,000
Variable Expenses $440,000
Fixed Manufacturing Expenses $248,000
Fixed Selling and Administrative Expenses $184,000
All fixed expenses of the company are fully allocated to products in the company’s accounting system. Further investigation has revealed that $201,000 of the fixed manufacturing expenses and $156,000 of the fixed selling and administrative expenses are avoidable if product D84L is discontinued.
Required:
What would be the effect on the company’s overall net operating income if product D84L were dropped? Should the product be dropped?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The information that follows pertains to Consumer Products for the year ended December 31, 19X6.
Inventory, 1/1/X6 24,000 units
Units manufactured 80,000
Units sold 82,000
Inventory, 12/31/X6 ? units
Manufacturing costs:
Direct materials $3 per unit
Direct labor $5 per unit
Variable factory overhead $9 per unit
Fixed factory overhead $280,000
Selling & administrative expenses:
Variable $2 per unit
Fixed $136,000
The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.
Instructions:
a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.
b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:
1. Direct costing.
2. Absorption costing.
c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 19X6, by using direct costing.
d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 19X6, by using absorption costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following cost data pertain to 19X6 operations of Heritage Products:
|
Quarter 1
|
Quarter 2
|
Quarter 3
|
Quarter 4
|
Quarter 5
|
|
Shipping costs
|
$58,200
|
$58,620
|
$60,125
|
$59,400
|
|
Orders shipped
|
120
|
140
|
175
|
150
|
The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.
b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.
c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 19X7 if activity amounts to 570 orders.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computations using a job order system General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;
|
Work in process
|
$35,200
|
|
Finished goods
|
86,900
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
128,700
|
Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:
|
Direct Materials
|
Direct Labor
|
|
Job No.
|
Amount
|
Job No.
|
Amount
|
|
101
|
$5,000
|
101
|
$7,800
|
|
115
|
19,500
|
103
|
20,800
|
|
116
|
36,200
|
115
|
42,000
|
|
Other
|
35,800
|
116
|
18,000
|
$96,500 Other 25,900 $114,500
Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “”other”” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “”other”” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.
General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.
Instructions:
a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cost flows and overhead application
Cleveland Metals uses a job cost system and applies factory overhead to production at a predetermined rate of 180% of direct labor cost. Data pertaining to recent operations follow.
• Job no. 636 was the only job in process on January 1 of the current year. The Work in Process account contained a $24,600 balance on this date.
• Jobs no. 637, 638, and 639 were started during January.
• Total direct material requisitions and direct labor incurred during January amounted to $89,200 and $114,500, respectively.
• The only job that remained in process on January 31 was job no. 638, with costs of $15,000 for direct materials and $20,000 for direct labor.
a. Compute the total cost of the work in process inventory on January 31.
b. Compute the cost of jobs completed during January, and present the proper journal entry to reflect job completion.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shelton Engineering completed the following transactions in the month of June.
a. Shania Shelton, the owner, invested $105,000 cash, office equipment with a value of $6,000, and $45,000 of drafting equipment to launch the business.
b. Purchased land worth $54,000 for an office by paying $5,400 cash and signing a long-term note payable for $48,600.
c. Purchased a portable building with $75,000 cash and moved it onto the land acquired in b.
d. Paid $6,000 cash for the premium on an 18-month insurance policy.
e. Completed and delivered a set of plans for a client and collected $5,700 cash.
f. Purchased $22,500 of additional drafting equipment by paying $10,500 cash and signing a longterm note payable for $12,000.
g. Completed $12,000 of engineering services for a client. This amount is to be received in 30 days.
h. Purchased $2,250 of additional office equipment on credit.
i. Completed engineering services for $18,000 on credit.
j. Received a bill for rent of equipment that was used on a recently completed job. The $1,200 rent must be paid within 30 days.
k. Collected $7,200 cash in partial payment from the client described in transaction g.
l. Paid $1,500 cash for wages to a drafting assistant.
m. Paid $2,250 cash to settle the account payable created in transaction h.
n. Paid $675 cash for minor repairs to the drafting equipment.
o. Shelton withdrew $9,360 cash for personal use.
p. Paid $1,500 cash for wages to a drafting assistant.
q. Paid $3,000 cash for advertisements in the local newspaper during June.
Required
1. Prepare general journal entries to record these transactions (use the account titles listed in part 2).
2. Open the following accounts—their account numbers are in parentheses (use the balance column format): Cash (101); Accounts Receivable (106); Prepaid Insurance (108); Office Equipment (163); Drafting Equipment (164); Building (170); Land (172); Accounts Payable (201); Notes Payable (250); S. Shelton, Capital (301); S. Shelton, Withdrawals (302); Engineering Fees Earned (402); Wages Expense (601); Equipment Rental Expense (602); Advertising Expense (603); and Repairs Expense (604). Post the journal entries from part 1 to the accounts and enter the balance after each posting.
3. Prepare a trial balance as of the end of this month’s operations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Anderson Corporation was organized early in 2000. The articles of incorporation authorize 30,000 shares of $100 par value, 10% cumulative preferred stock and 600,000 shares of $5 par value common stock. The following transactions affecting stockholders’ equity were completed during the first year:
1. Issued 50 shares of preferred stock at par value as payment for legal services.
2. Issued 4,000 shares of common stock at $20 per share and 800 shares of preferred stock at par.
3. Exchanged 10,000 shares of common stock for land with an appraised value of $120,000 and a building with an appraised value of $90,000
4. Declared the required cash dividend on preferred stock and a $2 per share dividend on common stock.
5. Closed the $200,000 credit balance in the Income Summary Account.
Required
a. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions.
b. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Portia Carter is the president of a company that owns six multiplex movie theaters. Carter has delegated decision-making authority to the theater managers for all decisions except those relating to capital expenditures and film selection. The theater managers’ compensation depends on the profitability of their theaters. Max Burgman, the manager of the Park Theater, had the following master budget and actual results for the month.
Master Actual
Budget Results
Tickets sold 120,000 110,000
Revenue–tickets $ 840,000 $ 880,000
Revenue–concessions 480,000 330,000
Total revenue $1,320,000 $1,210,000
Controllable variable costs
Concessions 120,000 99,000
Direct labor 420,000 330,000
Variable overhead 540,000 550,000
Contribution margin $ 240,000 $ 231,000
Controllable fixed costs
Rent 55,000 55,000
Other administrative expenses 45,000 50,000
Theater operating income $ 140,000 $ 126,000
1. Assuming that the theaters are profit centers, prepare a performance report for the Park Theater using the chart below. Include a flexible budget. Determine the variances between actual results, the flexible budget, and the master budget.
2. Evaluate Burgman’s performance as a manager.
3. Assume that the managers are assigned responsibility for capital expenditures and that the theaters are thus investment centers. Park Theater is expected to generate a desired ROI of at least 6 percent on average invested assets of $2,000,000.
a. Compute the theater’s return on investment and residual income using the chart below.
b. Using the ROI and residual income, evaluate Burgman’s performance as a manager.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PE-2 In January 2012, the management of Sarah Company concludes that it has sufficient cash to purchase some short-term investments in debt and stock securities. During the year, the following transactions occurred.
Feb. 1 Purchased 1,200 shares of NJF common stock for $50,600 plus brokerage fees of $1,000.
Mar. 1 Purchased 500 shares of SEK common stock for $18,000 plus brokerage fees of $500.
Apr. 1 Purchased 70 $1,000, 8% CRT bonds for $70,000 plus $1,200 brokerage fees. Interest is payable semiannually on April 1 and October 1.
July 1 Received a cash dividend of $0.80 per share on the NJF common stock.
Aug. 1 Sold 200 shares of NJF common stock at $42 per share less brokerage fees of $350.
Sept. 1 Received $2 per share cash dividend on the SEK common stock.
Oct. 1 Received the semiannual interest on the CRT bonds.
Oct. 1 Sold the CRT bonds for $77,000 less $1,300 brokerage fees.
At December 31, the fair values of the NJF and SEK common stocks were $39 and $30 per share, respectively.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the transactions and post to the accounts Debt Investments and Stock Investments. (Use the T account form.)
(b) Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2012, to report the investments at fair value. All securities are considered to be trading securities.
(c) Show the balance sheet presentation of investment securities at December 31, 2012.
(d) Identify the income statement accounts and give the statement classification of each account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The comparative statements of Jetson Company are shown below.
JETSON COMPANY
Income Statements
For the Years Ended December 31
| |
2012
|
2011
|
|
Net sales
|
$780,000
|
$624,000
|
|
Cost of goods sold
|
440,000
|
405,600
|
|
Gross profit
|
340,000
|
218,400
|
|
Selling and administrative expense
|
176,880
|
149,760
|
|
Income from operations
|
163,120
|
68,640
|
|
Other expenses and losses
|
|
|
|
Interest expense
|
9,920
|
7,200
|
|
Income before income taxes
|
153,200
|
61,440
|
|
Income tax expense
|
38,000
|
14,000
|
|
Net income
|
$115,200
|
$ 47,440
|
JETSON COMPANY
Balance Sheets
December 31
|
Assets
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
Current assets Cash
|
$23,100
|
$ 21,600
|
|
Short-term investments
|
44,800
|
33,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
106,200
|
83,800
|
|
Inventory
|
116,400
|
74,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
290,500
|
212,400
|
|
Plant assets (net)
|
485,300
|
439,600
|
|
Total assets
|
775,800
|
$652,000
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Current liabilities
|
Accounts payable
|
$138,200
|
$132,000
|
|
Income taxes payable
|
$25,300
|
24,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
163,500
|
156,000
|
|
Bonds payable
|
132,000
|
120,000
|
|
Total liabilities
|
295,500
|
276,000
|
|
Stockholders’ equity
|
|
|
|
Common stock ($10 par)
|
150,000
|
130,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
330,300
|
246,000
|
|
Total stockholders’ equity
|
480,300
|
376,000
|
|
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
|
$775,800
|
$652,000
|
All sales were on account. Net cash provided by operating activities was $108,000. Capital expenditures were $47,000, and cash dividends were $30,900.
Instructions
Compute the following ratios for 2012.
(a) Earnings per share.
(b) Return on common stockholders’ equity.
(c) Return on assets.
(d) Current.
(e) Receivables turnover.
(f) Average collection period.
(g) Inventory turnover.
(h) Days in inventory.
(i) Times interest earned.
(j) Asset turnover.
(k) Debt to total assets.
(l) Current cash debt coverage.
(m) Cash debt coverage.
(n) Free cash flow.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gagliano is introducing a new product using either a capital-intensive method or a labor-intensive method, which will not affect the quality of the product. Estimated manufacturing costs as follows:
Capital-Intensive
Direct Materials $5/unit
Direct Labor $6/unit
Variable Overhead $3/unit
Fixed Manufacturing Costs $2,508,000.
Labor-Intensive
Direct Materials $5.50/unit
Direct Labor $8.00/unit
Variable Overhead $4.50/unit
Manufacturing Costs $1,538,000
Introductory unit sales price of $30. Incremental selling expenses are estimated to be $502,000 annually plus $2/unit sold, regardless of manufacturing method.
Instructions:
(a) Calculate the estimated break-even point in annual unit sales of the new product if Gagliano Company uses the: (1) capital-intensive method (2) labor-intensive method.
(b) Determine annual unit sales volume at which they would be indifferent between the two methods.
(c) Explain when both should be employed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P3-6A This is the trial balance of Slocombe Company on September 30.
SLOCOMBE COMPANY
Trial Balance
September 30, 2010
Debit Credit
Cash $8,300
Accounts Receivable 2,600
Supplies 2,100
Equipment 8,000
Accounts Payable $ 5,100
Unearned Revenue 900
Common Stock 15,000
$21,000 $21,000
The October transactions were as follows.
Oct. 5 Received $1,300 in cash from customers for accounts receivable due.
10 Billed customers for services performed $5,100.
15 Paid employee salaries $1,400.
17 Performed $600 of services for customers who paid in advance in August.
20 Paid $1,500 to creditors for accounts payable due.
29 Paid a $300 cash dividend.
31 Paid utilities $500.
Hint: Journalize transactions, post, and prepare a trial balance.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a general ledger using T accounts. Enter the opening balances in the ledger accounts as of October 1. Provision should be made for these additional accounts: Dividends, Service Revenue, Salaries Expense, and Utilities Expense.
(b) Journalize the transactions, including explanations.
(c) Post to the ledger accounts.
(d) Prepare a trial balance on October 31, 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A tabular analysis of the transactions made during August 2010 by Witten Company during its first month of operation.
Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity
Office Accounts Common Retained Earnings
Cash + A/R + Supp. + Equip. = Payable + Stock + Rev. – Exp. – Div.
1. +$20,000 +$20,000 Com. Stock
2. -1,000 +$5,000 +$4,000
3. -750 +$750
4. +4,400 +$5,400 +$9,800 Serv. Rev.
5. -1,500 -1,500
6. -2,000 -$2,000 Div.
7. -800 -$ 800 Rent Exp.
8. +450 -450
9. -3,000 -3,000 Sal. Exp.
10. +500 -500 Util. Exp.
Hint: Analyze transaction and compare net income (SO 1)
Instructions
(a) describe each transaction
(b) Determine how much stockholder’s equity increased for the month
(c) Compute the net income for the month
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The management of Pacific Utilities Inc. is considering two capital investment projects. The estimated net cash flows from each project are as follows:
|
Year
|
Generating Unit
|
Distribution
Network Expansion
|
|
1
|
$370,000
|
$280,000
|
|
2
|
370,000
|
280,000
|
|
3
|
370,000
|
280,000
|
|
4
|
370,000
|
280,000
|
The generating unit requires an investment of $1,172,900, while the distribution network expansion requires an investment of $850,360. No residual value is expected from either project.
Required:
1a. Compute the net present value for each project. Use a rate of 6% and the present value of an annuity of $1 in above table. If required, round to the nearest dollar.
1b. Compute a present value index for each project. If required, round your answers to two decimal places.
2. Determine the internal rate of return for each project by (a) computing a present value factor for an annuity of $1 and (b) using the present value of an annuity of $1 in above table. If required, round your present value factor answers to three decimal places and internal rate of return to the nearest percent.
3. What advantage does the internal rate of return method have over the net present value method in comparing projects?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
World-Tec Company sells electronics over the Internet. The International Division is organized as a cost center. The budget for the International Division for the month ended March 31, 2012, is as follows (in thousands):
|
Customer service salaries
|
$ 325,000
|
|
Insurance and property taxes
|
68,250
|
|
Distribution salaries
|
519,250
|
|
Marketing salaries
|
612,125
|
|
Engineer salaries
|
498,125
|
|
Warehouse wages
|
348,800
|
|
Equipment depreciation
|
109,400
|
|
Total
|
$2,481,450
|
During March, the costs incurred in the International Division were as follows:
|
Customer service salaries
|
$ 416,700
|
|
Insurance and property taxes
|
66,200
|
|
Distribution salaries
|
514,000
|
|
Marketing salaries
|
685,500
|
|
Engineer salaries
|
488,100
|
|
Warehouse wages
|
334,900
|
|
Equipment depreciation
|
109,375
|
|
Total
|
$2,614,775
|
Required:
1. Prepare a budget performance report for the director of the International Division for the month of March. Enter all amounts as positive numbers.
2. For which costs might the director be expected to request supplemental reports?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Tiger Equipment Inc., a manufacturer of construction equipment, prepared the following factory overhead cost budget for the Welding Department for May 2012. The company expected to operate the department at 100% of normal capacity of 7,000 hours.
|
Variable Costs:
|
|
|
Indirect factory wages
|
$22,050
|
|
Power and light
|
12,600
|
|
Indirect Materials
|
10,500
|
|
Total Variable Cost
|
$45,150
|
|
Fixed Costs:
|
|
|
Supervisory salaries
|
$12,000
|
|
Depreciation of plant and equipment
|
31,450
|
|
Insurance and property taxes
|
9,750
|
|
Total fixed costs
|
$53,200
|
|
Total factory overhead
|
$98,350
|
During May, the department operated at 7,400 standard hours, and the factory overhead costs incurred were indirect factory wages, $23,580; power and light, $13,120; indirect materials, $11,310; supervisory salaries, $12,000; depreciation of plant and equipment, $31,450; and insurance and property taxes, $9,750.
Required:
Prepare a factory overhead cost variance report for May. To be useful for cost control, the budgeted amounts should be based on 7,400 hours.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Extreme Camping Company manufactures three sizes of extreme weather tents—small (S), medium (M), and large (L). The income statement has consistently indicated a net loss for the M size, and management is considering three proposals: (1) continue Size M, (2) discontinue Size M and reduce total output accordingly, or (3) discontinue Size M and conduct an advertising campaign to expand the sales of Size S so that the entire plant capacity can continue to be used.
If Proposal 2 is selected and Size M is discontinued and production curtailed, the annual fixed production costs and fixed operating expenses could be reduced by $57,600 and $40,300, respectively. If Proposal 3 is selected, it is anticipated that an additional annual expenditure of $43,200 for the rental of additional warehouse space would yield an increase of 130% in Size S sales volume. It is also assumed that the increased production of Size S would utilize the plant facilities released by the discontinuance of Size M.
AND SO ON
1. Prepare an income statement for the past year in the variable costing format.
2. Based on the income statement prepared in (1) and the other data presented, determine the amount by which total annual income from operations would be reduced below its present level if Proposal 2 is accepted.
3. Prepare an income statement in the variable costing format, indicating the projected annual income from operations if Proposal 3 is accepted. The expenditure of $43,200 for the rental of additional warehouse space can be added to the fixed operating expenses.
4. By how much would total annual income increase above its present level if Proposal 3 is accepted?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The demand for solvent, one of numerous products manufactured by Hipp Industries Inc., has dropped sharply because of recent competition from a similar product. The company’s chemists are currently completing tests of various new formulas, and it is anticipated that the manufacture of a superior product can be started on June 1, one month in the future. No changes will be needed in the present production facilities to manufacture the new product because only the mixture of the various materials will be changed.
The controller has been asked by the president of the company for advice on whether to continue production during May or to suspend the manufacture of solvent until June 1. The controller has assembled the following pertinent data:
Hipp Industries Inc.
Income Statement-Solvent
For the Month Ended April 31,2013
|
Sales (2,800 units)
|
$215,600
|
|
Cost of good sold
|
187,320
|
|
Gross profit
|
$28,280
|
|
Selling and administrative expenses
|
41,780
|
|
Loss from operations
|
$(13,500)
|
The production costs and selling and administrative expenses, based on production of 2,800 units in April, are as follows:
Direct Materials $30.00 Per unit
Direct labor 10.50 per unit
Variable manufacturing cost 9.90 per unit
Variable selling and administrative expenses 5.60 Per unit
Fixed manufacturing cost $46,200 for April
Fixed selling and administrative expense 26,100 For April
Sales for May are expected to drop about 25% below those of the preceding month. No significant changes are anticipated in the fixed costs or variable costs per unit. No extra costs will be incurred in discontinuing operations in the portion of the plant associated with solvent. The inventory of solvent at the beginning and end of May is expected to be inconsequential.
1. Prepare an estimated income statement in absorption costing form for May for solvent, assuming that production continues during the month. Round amounts to two decimals. Enter all amounts as positive numbers.
2. Prepare an estimated income statement in variable costing form for May for solvent, assuming that production continues during the month. Round amounts to two decimals. Enter all amounts as positive numbers
3. What would be the estimated loss in income from operations if the solvent production were temporarily suspended for May?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The budget director of Outdoor Chef Grill Company requests estimates of sales, production, and other operating data from the various administrative units every month. Selected information concerning sales and production for May 2012 is summarized as follows:
a. Estimated sales for May by sales territory:
b. Estimated inventories at May 1:
c. Desired inventories at May 31:
d. Direct materials used in production:
e. Anticipated purchase price for direct materials:
f. Direct labor requirements:
Required;
1. Prepare a sales budget for May.
2. Prepare a production budget for May.
3. Prepare a direct materials purchases budget for May.
4. Prepare a direct labor cost budget for May
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Leekee Shipyards has a new barnacle removing product for ocean going vessels. The company invests $1,200,000 in operating assets and plans to produce and sell 400,000 units per year. Leekee wants to make a return on investment of 20% each year. Leekee needs to know what price to charge for this product.
Use the absorption costing approach to determine the markup necessary to make the desired return on investment based on the following information:
Per Unit Total
Direct Materials $ 2.00
Direct Labor $ 1.50
Variable Manufacturing Overhead $ 1.00
Fixed Manufacturing Overhead $ 100,000
Variable Selling and Administrative Expense $ 0.10
Fixed Selling and Administrative Expense $ 100,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Following are selected financial data in thousands of dollars for the Hunter Corporation.
|
|
2012
|
2011
|
|
Current assets
|
$500
|
$400
|
|
Fixed assets, net
|
700
|
600
|
|
Total assets
|
1,200
|
1,000
|
|
Current liabilities
|
300
|
200
|
|
Long-term debt
|
200
|
200
|
|
Common equity
|
700
|
600
|
|
Total liabilities and equity
|
$1,200
|
$1,000
|
|
Net sales
|
$1,500
|
$1,200
|
|
Total expenses
|
1,390
|
1,100
|
|
Net income
|
110
|
100
|
a. Calculate Hunter’s rate of return on total assets in 2012 and in 2011. Did the ratio improve or worsen?
b. Diagram the expanded Du Pont system for Hunter for 2012. Insert the appropriate dollar amounts wherever possible.
c. Use the Du Port system to calculate the return on assets for the two years, and determine why they changed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use the following information to construct an income statement:
|
Interest
|
$25,000
|
|
Sales
|
$950,000
|
|
Income tax rate
|
25%
|
|
Selling and marketing expenses
|
$16,000
|
|
General & administrative expenses
|
$200,000
|
|
Gross profit
|
$550,000
|
|
Depreciation
|
$30,000
|
|
Cost of Goods sold
|
$400,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You expect to receive a payment of 1,000,000 in British pounds after six months the pound is currently worth $1.60 (i.e. 1 pound = $1.60), but the six-month futures price is $1.56 (i.e. 1 pound = $1.56). You expect the price of the pound to decline (i.e. the value of the dollar to rise.) If this expectation is fulfilled, you will suffer a loss when the pounds are converted into dollars when you receive them six months in the future.
a. Given the current price, what is the expected payment in dollars?
b. Given the futures price, how much would you receive in dollars?
c. If, after six months the pound is worth $1.35, what is your loss from the decline in the value of the pound?
d. To avoid this potential loss, you decide to hedge and sell a contract for the future delivery of pounds at the going futures price of $1.56. What is the cost to you of this protection from the possible decline in the value of the pound?
e. If, after hedging, the price of the pound falls to $1.35, what is the maximum amount that you lose? Why is your answer different from (c)?
f. If, after hedging the price of the pound rises to $1.80, how much do you gain from your position?
g. How would your answer to part (f) be different if you had not hedged and the price of the pound had risen to $1.80?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Esplanade Company’s credit sales have the following historical pattern:
70% Collected in the month of sale
15% Collected in the first month after sale
10% Collected in the second month after sale
4% Collected in the third month after sale
1% Uncollectible
These sales on open account (credit sales) have been budgeted for the last six months in 2010:
|
July
|
$60,000
|
|
August
|
$70,000
|
|
September
|
$80,000
|
|
October
|
$90,000
|
|
November
|
$100,000
|
|
December
|
$85,000
|
1) Determine the estimated total cash collections from accounts receivable during
October 2010.
2) Compute the estimated total cash collections during the fourth quarter from credit sales of the fourth quarter.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, 20X1, Prange Company acquired 80% of the common stock of Seaman Company for $500,000. On this date Seaman had total owners’ equity of $400,000. Any excess of cost over book value is attributable to patent, which is to be amortized over 20 years.
During 20X1 and 20X2, Prange has appropriately accounted for its investment in Seaman using the simple equity method.
On January 1, 20X2, Prange held merchandise acquired from Seaman for $30,000. During 20X2, Seaman sold merchandise to Prange for $100,000, of which $20,000 is held by Prange on December 31, 20X2. Seaman’s gross profit on all sales is 40%.
On December 31, 20X2, Prange still owes Seaman $20,000 for merchandise acquired in December.
Required:
Complete the Figure 4-2 worksheet for consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, 20X2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Jensen Company forecasts a need for 200,000 pounds of cotton in May. On April 11, the company acquires a call option to buy 200,000 pounds of cotton in May at a strike price of $0.3765 per pound for a premium of $814. Spot prices and options values at selected dates follow:
April 11 April 30 May 3
Spot price per pound $0.3718 $0.3801 $0.3842
Fair value of option 814 1,137 1,689
Jensen Company settled the option on May 3 and purchased 200,000 pounds of cotton on May 17 at a spot price of $0.3840 per pound. During the last half of May and the beginning of June the cotton was used to produce cloth. One third of the cloth was sold in June. The change in the option’s time value is excluded from the assessment of hedge effectiveness.
Required:
a. Prepare all journal entries necessary through June to record the above transactions and events.
b. What would the effect on earnings have been if the forecasted purchase were not hedged?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
North Shore Railroad operates between Chicago and upper Michigan and Wisconsin. Dallas Ingold, purchasing manager of North Shore Railroad, anticipates the price of diesel fuel will increase over the next few months. On September 4th, Ingold purchased an out-of-the-money November call option for $1,100. The option has a notional amount of 80,000 barrels and a strike price of $2.16 per barrel. Diesel fuel spot rates and option values at selected dates follow:
Spot Rate Option
Date per Barrel Value
September 30 $2.17 $1,130
October 31 2.13 1,026
November 27 2.19 2,400
a. For each of the above dates, calculate the intrinsic value and the time value of the option.
b. How much is the Intrinsic Value on September 4th.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Oneida Furniture Company deposits all cash receipts each Wednesday and Friday in a night depository, after banking hours. The data required to reconcile the bank statement as of June 30 have been taken from various documents and records and are reproduced as follows. The sources of the data are printed in capital letters. All checks were written for payments on account.
Instructions
1. Prepare a bank reconciliation as of June 30. If errors in recording deposits or checks are discovered, assume that the errors were made by the company. Assume that all deposits are from cash sales. All checks are written to satisfy accounts payable.
2. Journalize the necessary entries. The accounts have not been closed.
3. What is the amount of Cash that should appear on the balance sheet as of June 30?
4. Assume that a canceled check for $270 has been incorrectly recorded by the bank as $720. Briefly explain how the error would be included in a bank reconciliation and how it should be corrected.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The cash account for Online Medical Co. at June 30, 2012, indicated a balance of $9,375. The bank statement indicated a balance of $10,760 on June 30, 2012. Comparing the bank statement and the accompanying canceled checks and memos with the records revealed the following reconciling items:
a. Checks outstanding totaled $3,900.
b. A deposit of $4,000, representing receipts of June 30, had been made too late to appear on the bank statement.
c. The bank had collected $2,100 on a note left for collection. The face of the note was $2,000.
d. A check for $550 returned with the statement had been incorrectly recorded by Online Medical Co. as $500. The check was for the payment of an obligation to Hirsch Co. for the purchase on account.
e. A check drawn for $60 had been erroneously charged by the bank as $600.
f. Bank service charges for June amounted to $25.
Instructions
1. Prepare a bank reconciliation
2. Journalize the necessary entries. The accounts have not been closed.
3. If a balance sheet were prepared for Online Medical Co. on June 30, 2012, what amount should be reported as cash?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transactions for petty cash, cash short and over
Picasso Restoration Company completed the following selected transactions during
August 2012:
Aug. 1. Established a petty cash fund of $750.
10. The cash sales for the day, according to the cash register records, totaled $9,780. The actual cash received from cash sales was $9,800.
31. Petty cash on hand was $240. Replenished the petty cash fund for the following disbursements, each evidenced by a petty cash receipt:
Aug. 3. Store supplies, $251.
7. Express charges on merchandise sold, $60 (Delivery Expense).
9. Office supplies, $20.
13. Office supplies, $30.
19. Postage stamps, $11 (Office Supplies).
21. Repair to office file cabinet lock, $40 (Miscellaneous Administrative Expense).
Aug. 22. Postage due on special delivery letter, $18 (Miscellaneous Administrative Expense).
24. Express charges on merchandise sold, $50 (Delivery Expense).
30. Office supplies, $15.
31. The cash sales for the day, according to the cash register records, totaled
$11,200. The actual cash received from cash sales was $11,130.
31. Decreased the petty cash fund by $100.
Instructions
Journalize the transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A good bit of relatively simple arithmetic is involved in some of these problems, and although the calculations are simple, it will take students some time to set up the problem and do the arithmetic. We allow for this when assigning problems for a timed test.
Also, students must use a number of definitions to answer some of the questions. To avoid excessive memorization, we provide students with a list of formulas and definitions for use on exams. Problems with * in the topic line are nonalgorithmic.
Bauer Software’s current balance sheet shows total common equity of $5,125,000. The company has 530,000 shares of stock outstanding, and they sell at a price of $27.50 per share. By how much do the firm’s market and book values per share differ?
a. $17.83
b. $18.72
c. $19.66
d. $20.64
e. $21.67
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For managerial purposes, i.e., making decisions regarding the firm’s operations, the standard financial statements as prepared by accountants under generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) are often modified and used to create alternative data and metrics that provide a somewhat different picture of a firm’s operations. Related to these modifications, which of the following statements is CORRECT?
a. The standard statements make adjustments to reflect the effects of inflation on asset values, and these adjustments are normally carried into any adjustment that managers make to the standard statements.
b. The standard statements focus on accounting income for the entire corporation, not cash flows, and the two can be quite different during any given accounting period. However, the firm’s value is based on its future cash flows. After all, future cash flows tells us how much the firm can distribute to its investors.
c. The standard statements provide useful information on the firm’s individual operating units, but management needs more information on the firm’s overall operations than the standard statements provide.
d. The standard statements focus on cash flows, but managers should be less concerned with cash flows than with accounting income as defined by GAAP.
e. The best feature of standard statements is that, if they are prepared under GAAP, the data are always consistent from firm to firm. Thus, under GAAP, there is no room for accountants to “adjust” the results to make earnings look better.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that Besley Golf Equipment commenced operations on January 1, 2008, and it was granted permission to use the same depreciation calculations for shareholder reporting and income tax purposes. The company planned to depreciate its fixed assets over 15 years, but in December 2008 management realized that the assets would last for only 10 years. The firm’s accountants plan to report the 2008 financial statements based on this new information. How would the new depreciation assumption affect the company’s financial statements?
a. The firm’s reported net fixed assets would increase.
b. The firm’s EBIT would increase.
c. The firm’s reported 2008 earnings per share would increase.
d. The firm’s cash position in 2008 and 2009 would increase.
e. The provision will increase the company’s tax payments.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Nantell Corporation just purchased an expensive piece of equipment. Assume that the firm planned to depreciate the equipment over 5 years on a straight-line basis, but Congress then passed a provision that requires the company to depreciate the equipment on a straight-line basis over 7 years. Other things held constant, which of the following will occur as a result of this Congressional action? Assume that the company uses the same depreciation method for tax and stockholder reporting purposes
a. Nantell’s taxable income will be lower.
b. Nantell’s operating income (EBIT) will increase.
c. Nantell’s cash position will improve (increase).
d. Nantell’s reported net income for the year will be lower.
e. Nantell’s tax liability for the year will be lower.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that Besley Golf Equipment commenced operations on January 1, 2008, and it was granted permission to use the same depreciation calculations for shareholder reporting and income tax purposes. The company planned to depreciate its fixed assets over 15 years, but in December 2008 management realized that the assets would last for only 10 years. The firm’s accountants plan to report the 2008 financial statements based on this new information. How would the new depreciation assumption affect the company’s financial statements?
a. The firm’s reported net fixed assets would increase.
b. The firm’s EBIT would increase.
c. The firm’s reported 2008 earnings per share would increase.
d. The firm’s cash position in 2008 and 2009 would increase.
e. The provision will increase the company’s tax payments.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Nantell Corporation just purchased an expensive piece of equipment. Assume that the firm planned to depreciate the equipment over 5 years on a straight-line basis, but Congress then passed a provision that requires the company to depreciate the equipment on a straight-line basis over 7 years. Other things held constant, which of the following will occur as a result of this Congressional action? Assume that the company uses the same depreciation method for tax and stockholder reporting purposes
a. Nantell’s taxable income will be lower.
b. Nantell’s operating income (EBIT) will increase.
c. Nantell’s cash position will improve (increase).
d. Nantell’s reported net income for the year will be lower.
e. Nantell’s tax liability for the year will be lower.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that Congress recently passed a provision that will enable Bev’s Beverages Inc. (BBI) to double its depreciation expense for the upcoming year but will have no effect on its sales revenue or the tax rate. Prior to the new provision, BBI’s net income was forecasted to be $4 million. Which of the following best describes the impact of the new provision on BBI’s financial statements versus the statements without the provision? Assume that the company uses the same depreciation method for tax and stockholder reporting purposes.
a. The provision will reduce the company’s cash flow.
b. The provision will increase the company’s tax payments.
c. The provision will increase the firm’s operating income (EBIT).
d. The provision will increase the company’s net income.
e. Net fixed assets on the balance sheet will decrease.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Below are the 2007 and 2008 year-end balance sheets for Tran Enterprises:
|
Assets :
|
2008
|
2007
|
|
Cash
|
$ 200,000
|
$ 170,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
864,000
|
700,000
|
|
Inventories
|
2,000,000
|
1,400,000
|
|
Total current assets
|
$3,064,000
|
$2,270,000
|
|
Net fixed assets
|
6,000,000
|
5,600,000
|
|
Total assets
|
$9,064,000
|
$7,870,000
|
|
Liabilities and equity:
|
|
|
|
Accounts payable
|
$1,400,000
|
$1,090,000
|
|
Notes payable
|
1,600,000
|
1,800,000
|
|
Total current liabilities
|
$3,000,000
|
$2,890,000
|
|
Long-term debt
|
2,400,000
|
2,400,000
|
|
Common stock
|
3,000,000
|
2,000,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
664,000
|
580,000
|
|
Total common equity
|
$3,664,000
|
$2,580,000
|
|
Total liabilities and equity
|
$9,064,000
|
$7,870,000
|
The firm has never paid a dividend on its common stock, and it issued $2,400,000 of 10-year, non-callable, long-term debt in 2007. As of the end of 2008, none of the principal on this debt had been repaid. Assume that the company’s sales in 2007 and 2008 were the same. Which of the following statements must be CORRECT?
a. The firm increased its short-term bank debt in 2008.
b. The firm issued long-term debt in 2008.
c. The firm issued new common stock in 2008.
d. The firm repurchased some common stock in 2008.
e. The firm had negative net income in 2008.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The budget committee of Clipboard Office Supply has assembled the following data. As the business manager, you must prepare the budgeted income statements for May and June 2011.
a. Sales in April were $50,000. You forecast that monthly sales will increase 2.0% in May and 2.4% in June.
b. Clipboard maintains inventory of $9,000 plus 25% of sales revenue budgeted for the following month. Monthly purchases average 50% of sales revenue in that same month. Actual inventory on April 30 is $13,000, sales budgeted for July are $65,000.
c. Monthly salaries amount to $3,000. Sales commissions equal 4% of sales for that month. Combine salaries and commissions into a single figure.
d. Other monthly expenses are as follows:
Rent expense $2,600, paid as incurred
Depreciation expense $ 300
Insurance expense $ 200, expiration of prepaid amount
Income tax 20% of operating income
Requirement:
1. Prepare Clipboard Office Supply’s budgeted income statements for May and June. Show cost of goods sold computations. (Round all amounts to the nearest $100. (Round amounts ending in $50 or more upward, and amounts ending in less than downward). For example, budgeted May sales are $51,000 ($50,000 x 1.02), and June sales are $52,200 ($51,000 x 1.024)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Consider the following balance sheet, for Games Inc. Because Games has $800,000 of retained earnings, we know that the company would be able to pay cash to buy an asset with a cost of $200,000.
|
Cash
|
$50,000
|
Accounts payable
|
$100,000
|
|
Inventory
|
200,000
|
Accruals
|
100,000
|
|
Account receivable
|
250,000
|
Total CL
|
$200,000
|
|
Total CA
|
$500,000
|
Debt
|
200,000
|
|
Net fixed assets
|
$900,000
|
Common stock
|
200,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
800,000
|
|
|
|
Total assets
|
$1,400,000
|
Total L & E
|
$1,400,000
|
a. True
b. False
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have the following data on three stocks shown below. You decide to use the data on these stocks to form an index, and you want to find the average earned rate of return for 2008 on your index. If you follow the averaging procedure used to calculate the S&P 500 Index return, what would your index’s rate of return be? Hints: Rates of return are based on beginning-of-year prices, and the S&P Index is weighted by market values of the companies in the index.
Shares
Beginning Ending Outstanding
Stock Dividend Price Price (millions)
A $1.50 $30.00 $32.00 5.00
B $2.00 $28.50 $27.00 4.50
C $0.75 $20.00 $24.00 20.00
a. 16.07%
b. 16.92%
c. 17.76%
d. 18.65%
e. 19.59%
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You recently sold 100 shares of Microsoft stock to your brother at a family reunion. At the reunion your brother gave you a check for the stock and you gave your brother the stock certificates. Which of the following best describes this transaction?
a. This is an example of a direct transfer of capital.
b. This is an example of a primary market transaction.
c. This is an example of an exchange of physical assets.
d. This is an example of a money market transaction.
e. This is an example of a derivative market transaction.
You recently sold 100 shares of Microsoft stock to your brother at a family reunion. At the reunion your brother gave you a check for the stock and you gave your brother the stock certificates. Which of the following best describes this transaction?
a. This is an example of a direct transfer of capital.
b. This is an example of a primary market transaction.
c. This is an example of an exchange of physical assets.
d. This is an example of a money market transaction.
e. This is an example of a derivative market transaction.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following actions would be likely to encourage a firm’s managers to make decisions that are in the best interests of shareholders
a. The percentage of executive compensation that comes in the form of cash is increased and the percentage coming from long-term stock options is reduced.
b. The state legislature passes a law that makes it more difficult to successfully complete a hostile takeover.
c. The percentage of the firm’s stock that is held by institutional investors such as mutual funds, pension funds, and hedge funds rather than by small individual investors rises from 10% to 80%.
d. The firm’s founder, who is also president and chairman of the board, sells 90% of her shares.
e. The firm’s board of directors gives the firm’s managers greater freedom to take whatever actions they think best without obtaining board approval.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following actions would be likely to reduce conflicts of interest between stockholders and managers
a. Congress passes a law that severely restricts hostile takeovers.
b. A firm’s compensation system is changed so that managers receive larger cash salaries but fewer long-term options to buy stock.
c. The company changes the way executive stock options are handled, with all options vesting after 2 years rather than having 20% of the options awarded vest every 2 years over a 10-year period.
d. The company’s outside auditing firm is given a lucrative year-by-year consulting contract with the company.
e. The composition of the board of directors is changed from all inside directors to all outside directors, and the directors are compensated with stock rather than cash.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following actions would be most likely to reduce potential conflicts of interest between stockholders and managers
a. Pay managers large cash salaries and give them no stock options.
b. Change the corporation’s formal documents to make it easier for outside investors to acquire a controlling interest in the firm through a hostile takeover.
c. Beef up the restrictive covenants in the firm’s debt agreements.
d. Eliminate a requirement that members of the board of directors must hold a high percentage of their personal wealth in the firm’s stock.
e. For a firm that compensates managers with stock options, reduce the time before options are vested, i.e., the time before options can be exercised and the shares that are received can be sold.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following statements would most people in business agree with?
a. A corporation’s short-run profits will almost always increase if the firm takes actions that the government has determined are in the best interests of the nation.
b. Firms and government agencies almost always agree with one another regarding the restrictions that should be placed on hiring and firing employees.
c. “Whistle blowers,” because of the courage it takes to blow the whistle, are generally promoted more rapidly than other employees.
d. It is not useful for large corporations to develop a formal set of rules defining ethical and unethical behavior.
e. Although people’s moral characters are probably developed before they are admitted to a business school, it is still useful for business schools to cover ethics, if only to give students an idea about the adverse consequences of unethical behavior to themselves, their firms, and the nation
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which of the following actions would be most likely to reduce conflicts of interest between stockholders and bondholders?
a.If a lower level person in a firm does something illegal, like “”cooking the books”” to understate costs and thereby artificially increase profits because he or she was ordered to do so by a superior, the lower level person cannot be prosecuted but the superior can be prosecuted.
b.There are many types of unethical business behavior. One example is where executives provide information that they know is incorrect to outsiders. It is illegal to provide such information to federally regulated banks, but it is not illegal to provide it to stockholders because they are the owners of the firm.
c. The bankruptcy of Enron Corporation, and the fraud committed by some of its officers, was much discussed, but it did not lead to any important changes in business practices.
d. If someone deliberately understates costs and thereby causes reported profits to increase, then this can cause the price of the stock to rise above its intrinsic value. The stock will probably fall in the future. Both those who participated in the fraud and the firm itself can be prosecuted.
e. Ethical behavior is not influenced by training and auditing procedures. People are either ethical or they are not, and this is what determines ethical behavior in business
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The primary operating goal of a publicly-owned firm trying to best serve its stockholders should be to
a. Maximize managers’ own interests, which are by definition consistent with maximizing shareholders’ wealth.
b. Maximize the firm’s expected EPS, which must also maximize the firm’s price per share.
c. Minimize the firm’s risks because most stockholders dislike risk. In turn, this will maximize the firm’s stock price.
d. Use a well-structured managerial compensation package to reduce conflicts that may exist between stockholders and managers.
e. Since it is impossible to measure a stock’s intrinsic value, the text states that it is better for managers to attempt to maximize the current stock price than its intrinsic value.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Zygon Corporation was recently formed to produce a semiconductor chip that forms an essential part of the personal computer manufactured by a major corporation. The direct materials are added at the start of the production process while conversion costs are added uniformly throughout the production process. June is Zygon’s first month of operations, and therefore, there was no beginning inventory. Direct materials cost for the month totaled $895,000, while conversion costs equaled $4,225,000. Accounting records indicate that 475,000 chips were started in June, and that 425,000 chips were completed.
Ending inventory was 50% complete as to conversion costs.
Required:
a. What is the total manufacturing cost per chip for June?
b. Allocate the total costs between the completed chips and the chips in ending inventory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Maverick Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below.
Work in process, beginning:
Units in beginning work-in-process inventory 400
Materials costs $6,900
Conversion costs $2,500
Percent complete for materials 80%
Percent complete for conversion 15%
Units started into production during the month 6,000
Units transferred to the next department during the month 5,600
Materials costs added during the month $112,500
Conversion costs added during the month $210,300
Ending work in process:
Units in ending work-in-process inventory 800
Percentage complete for materials 70%
Percentage complete for conversion 30%
Required: Calculate the equivalent units for materials for the month in the first processing department.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment File 1
Assignment 2
Due date: 31 December 2013
Important note
You must use word processing software (such as Microsoft Word) to prepare the
TMAs, and submit the TMAs via the Online Learning Environment (OLE). All
assignments must be uploaded to the OLE by the due date.
Failure to upload a TMA in the required format to the OLE may result in the score
of the TMA being adjusted to zero.
According to the University’s policy, no extension of the due date will be allowed
for the final TMA. This policy will be strictly enforced. Any late submission of the
final TMA will result in the score of the TMA being adjusted to zero.
Question 1 (35 marks)
You are an independent tax advisor and one of your clients, Triceratops
Toys Manufacturing Limited, has provided you with the following
information.
Triceratops Toys Manufacturing Limited was incorporated in Hong Kong
in 2002. The company was formed to take over the partnership business
owned by the Cheung brothers, Albert Cheung and Bernard Cheung.
Albert and Bernard each own 40% of the shares of the company and the
remaining 20% of the shares are owned by their sister, Crystal. The
original board of directors consists of the Cheung brothers and their
sister, Crystal. In addition to being directors of the company, Albert and
Bernard are responsible for the running of the company. Albert is the
managing director and is responsible for the sales operations. Bernard
holds the title of finance manager and is in charge of the company’s
finances. Their brother-in-law, Dickson Tang, is employed as the
production manager to oversee the manufacturing operations.
The company has been profitable with an annual turnover of over HK$20
million. The profits of the company have mainly been derived from
exporting toys to overseas countries. The manufacturing operations had
been carried out in Hong Kong until 31 July 2012, when the company
moved its manufacturing operations to mainland China.
The manufacturing operations in China began in August 2012. Although
the manufacturing operations are now in China, the company maintains
its purchase, sales and other administrative functions in Hong Kong.
Materials for production are either purchased in Hong Kong or imported
from overseas. They are stored in Hong Kong until they are required for
production. Then the required materials will be delivered to the factory in
China. Workers for the manufacturing operations are employed in China
except for two supervisors who have been employed by the company in
Hong Kong since 2009. Dickson Tang, as the production manager,
2 ACT B415 Taxation II
supervises the China operations. The production machines were
transferred from Hong Kong. Finished products are shipped to Hong
Kong where they are put into bags and boxes. Usually they are stored in
Hong Kong for one to two weeks before they are loaded into containers
for shipment. The shipping arrangements are made in Hong Kong. Credit
arrangement is made with a Hong Kong bank to finance the working
capital.
Being in charge of the manufacturing operations, Dickson and his wife,
Crystal, have lived in China since January 2012. Dickson was given the
responsibility of looking for an appropriate location for the new factory
in China and of arranging the necessary registrations for the company to
operate in China. A Chinese resident, Liu Chang, was appointed as a
director of the company in January 2012, assisting the company to
establish its China operations. A fee of $100,000 was paid to Liu Chang
as remuneration for the year ended 31 March 2012. Because two of the
directors, Crystal Cheung and Liu Chang, lived in China, meetings of the
board of directors have been held in China for ease of administration.
Dickson Tang has been in charge of the China production operations
since July 2012 and seldom returns to Hong Kong. He communicates
with the Hong Kong office via telephone or email. Occasionally he
returns to Hong Kong to report to Albert and was in Hong Kong for 45
days for business purposes and another 20 days for holidays during the
year ended 31 March 2013. His salaries and bonus for the year ended 31
March 2013 amount to $800,000. The company rented a flat in China for
his family to stay in and purchased medical insurance for his family. The
costs to the company of providing him with a flat and medical insurance
were $50,000 and $10,000 respectively.
Required:
a Discuss whether Triceratops Toys Manufacturing Limited’s profits
are subject to Hong Kong profits tax for the year of assessment
2012/13. The financial year of Triceratops Toys Manufacturing
Limited ends on 31 March each year. (12 marks)
b Is Dickson Tang liable to salaries tax for the year of assessment
2012/13? Discuss with reference to the relevant tax exemptions and
tax cases where appropriate. (8 marks)
c Assume that Dickson Tang’s income from Triceratops Toys
Manufacturing Limited is fully taxable under Hong Kong salaries tax
for the year of assessment 2012/13, determine his assessable income.
Explain your calculation and treatment of significant items.
(7 marks)
d Is Liu Chang liable to Hong Kong salaries tax for the year of
assessment 2011/12? Discuss with reference to the relevant tax
provision and/or tax case where appropriate. (8 marks)
Assignment File 3
Question 2 (25 marks)
a Tax avoidance and tax evasion are two very different concepts.
Compare and contrast the differences between tax avoidance and tax
evasion. Give two examples of each to support your discussion.
(16 marks)
b Under the Inland Revenue Ordinance, there are many provisions
targeting anti-avoidance activities. While specific anti-avoidance
provisions tackle specific situations or industries, there are the
general anti-avoidance provisions that have wide application in
different situations. Briefly explain the general anti-avoidance
provisions and cite examples or cases where the general antiavoidance
provisions are applicable. (9 marks)
Question 3 (20 marks)
A Korean Company is considering selling certain electronic gadgets to
Hong Kong in an effort to develop its overseas market. His business
consultant has advised him of the following options from a commercial
perspective:
• Option 1: Sell the products to a wholesaler in Hong Kong who would
then market the product and sell to the consumers in Hong Kong
• Option 2: Set up a wholly owned subsidiary in Hong Kong, who
would then sell products to consumers in Hong Kong
• Option 3: Set up a branch in Hong Kong for the purpose of selling to
Hong Kong consumers
• Option 4: Engage a consignment agent in Hong Kong to sell the
products through this consignment agent.
In evaluating the options, the directors of this company would like to take
into account the taxation implications of the various options as well and
come to you, a tax consultant, for advice.
Required:
Advise the directors as to the Hong Kong profits tax implications in
relation to the taxability of profits of the Korean Company, as well as the
profits accruing to the Hong Kong entity involved. You are not required
to conclude which option is the best option, as the information provided
at this stage is not detailed enough to do a thorough comparison and
determination.
Question 4 (20 marks)
For many years Mr Leung has been employed as a sales representative of
a real estate company, Hit and Run Limited (‘HAR’). At all relevant
times, he has paid salaries tax on his earnings at the standard rate. His
earnings consist of a basic salary (which must be repaid if his sales
4 ACT B415 Taxation II
results do not reach a prescribed minimum level) plus commission. His
commission earned over the past two years has been very high. He has a
wife who operates a trading business. The couple has two young children
attending schools in Hong Kong.
Mr Leung has been told that the test of deductibility for outgoings and
expenses for salaries tax purposes is ‘notoriously rigid, narrow and
restrictive.’ Mr Leung thinks that if he were subject to profits tax instead
of salaries tax he would be able to claim many deductions for outgoings
and expenses that are presently not allowable to him for salaries tax
purposes.
Mr Leung therefore approached the accountant of HAR for advice. The
accountant advised him to resign from his job with the company,
incorporate a new company, Leung Fun Limited (‘LFL’), and arrange for
LFL to enter into a new contract with HAR to provide Mr Leung’s
services as a sales representative. Under this arrangement, LFL would
receive income from HAR and claim against this all allowable expenses.
LFL would employ Mr Leung at a reasonable salary to provide the
agreed sales services on its behalf to HAR.
A few days ago, HAR’s accountant informed Mr Leung that the company
will agree to enter into the proposed arrangement on basically the same
terms as it now employs Mr Leung, but without any obligation to pay any
minimum monthly sum to LFL.
Required:
a Evaluate the comment by the accountant of HAR in respect of the
deductibility of expenses and outgoings under Hong Kong salaries
tax and profits tax. (6 marks)
b Explain in detail to Mr Leung whether there is any danger of the
Commissioner challenging the suggested arrangement and the
possible consequences, quoting the relevant sections of the Inland
Revenue Ordinance where appropriate. Further, advise Mr Leung on
what he can do to lessen the chance of the application of the relevant
Inland Revenue Ordinance provisions in a situation like this.
(14 marks)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Amdahl Corporation manufactures large-scale, high performance computer systems. In a recent annual report, the balance sheet included the following information (dollars in thousands):

|
|
Real World Financials

|
In addition, the income statement reported sales revenue of $2,158,755 ($ in thousands) for the current year. All sales are made on a credit basis. The statement of cash flows indicates that cash collected from customers during the current year was $2,230,065 ($ in thousands). There were no recoveries of accounts receivable previously written off.
Required:
|
1.
|
|
Compute the following (dollar amounts in thousands):
|
a.
|
|
The amount of uncollectibles written off by Amdahl during the current year.
|
|
b.
|
|
The amount of bad debt expense that Amdahl would include in its income statement for the current year.
|
|
c.
|
|
The approximate percentage that Amdahl used to estimate uncollectibles for the current year, assuming that it uses the income statement approach.
|
|
|
2.
|
|
Suppose that Amdahl had used the direct write-off method to account for uncollectibles. Compute the following (dollars in thousands):
|
a.
|
|
The accounts receivable information that would be included in the year-end balance sheet.
|
|
b.
|
|
The amount of bad debt expense that Amdahl would include in its income statement for the current year.
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Case Study Question 1 (20 marks) (500 words)
Read headline
“Health rates as top social issue”. Would you expect management to worry about attitudinal surveys, such as the one described in Headline below. Explain you answer, as well explaining how such surveys might impact on the disclosure policies of an organisation.
CANBERRA: Health has taken over from crime as the most important social issue seen to be facing Australia, figures showed yesterday.
The survey of people’s views of environmental issues found the environment rated fifth in importance—–even though three in four Australians had at least one environment concern.
The Australian Bureau of Statistics (ABS) figures showed 29% of respondents believed health was the most important social issue.
This was followed by crime (24%) education and unemployment (both 16%) and environmental problems (16 %).
In 1996, crime was seen as the most important social issue, followed by health, education, unemployment, the environment.
In the latest survey, dated March 1998, health was the most important issue to older people and least important to people aged 35-44.
In general, younger people were more concerned about long-term environmental problems although 19-24 year olds, as well as 45-54 year olds were most concerned about unemployment.
But the survey said 71% of Australians were concerned with at least one specific environmental problem.
The figure was up from 68% in 1996 but down from 75% in 1992.
People living in ACT were most concerned while Tasmanians were the least concerned about environmental problems.
Air pollution continued to be the problem of greatest worry for Australians, with 32% reporting it as their major concern.
The Chronicle,
Case Study Question 2 (20 marks) 500 words
Read headline
“Think before you spend” and then, drawing on material covered in this subject, Accounting Theory, identify some ways in which you think corporations would respond to such allegations.
Here are some of the products “The Rough Guide to Ethical Shopping” believes we should think about before buying:
Beverages: Maxwell House. One of the thousands of familiar brands —-Bird’s, Jacobs, Ritz and Toblerone are others— owned by tobacco giant Philip Morris of Marlboro cigarette fame, which recently changed its name to Altria.
It denies to this day that smoking is addictive, was fined for failing to disclose political donations and was one of George Bush’s largest corporate campaign contributors.
Clothing: Nike trainers. Nike is said to have petitioned the Indonesia government for exemption from the minimum wage and has been accused of lying about labour conditions at its contractor factories.
According to Sweatshop Watch, an average Nike worker would need to put in 72,000 years of work to receive what Tiger Woods gets for one five-year contract to publicise the brand.
Food: Tiger prawns. Hugely popular nowadays in restaurants and supermarkets, tiger prawns are mostly raised in man-made pools in Bangladesh and the Philippines.
It takes 50,000 litres of water to produce a kilogram of prawn meat and the chemical additives to promote rapid growth ends up polluting the surrounding farming land.
People are routinely displaced to make way for these farms. Rape and murder have been reported in some cases.
Sport: Snooker cues. Thousands of snooker cues are made every year using wood from the Indonesian ramin tree. The ramin, which is also used for furniture and window blinds, is a rare and endangered tree listed under the Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species, but continues to be logged illegally at an alarming rate.
(Irish Independent, 1 December 2004, Independent Newspapers Ireland Ltd)
CASE STUDY QUESTION 3 (20 MARKS) 500 words
Read headline “
Lay off Big Macs, radio boss tells staff” and using Legitimacy Theory as the basis of your argument, explain why a company such as McDonald’s would not want a radio station to make adverse comments about it. If the station does make adverse statements, how might McDonald’s react from a corporate disclosure perspective?
Top management at radio 2UE ordered the station’s broadcaster not to make derogatory comments about McDonald’s on air or the station would lose its $170,000 advertising account with the fast-food chain, according to a leaked in internal memo.
The memo from program director John Brennan in February reveals for the first time that the practice of tailoring editorial comment to suit 2UE’s advertisers in an internal part of the top-rating radio station’s culture.
‘It’s going to be a tough year for revenue and we need all the help we can get from everyone concerned’ the management memo says.
‘It is obviously imperative that no derogatory comments about McDonald’s are made be any broadcaster on the station. Any such comment would see an immediate cancellation of the contract’
The memo will be investigated by the Australian Authority’s inquiry into the radio station next month.
Mr Brennan’s directive appears to contravene the Commercial Radio Code of Practice, under which a radio must promote accuracy and fairness in news and current affairs programs. The code may be reviewed by the ABA in separate public hearings and may result in moves away from self-regulation.
The memo contradicts statements by 2UE chief John Conde this week about the role of station management in the scandal involving John Laws and the now defunct $1.2 million deal with Australian Bankers’ Association.
The banks’ deal with Laws also involved refraining from negative comments about the client on air.
McDonald’s spokesman John Blyth said the company was unaware the 2UE directive had issued and would never make its advertising contracts conditional on editorial comment.
The memo was addressed to Alan Jones, John Laws, John Stanley, Mike Carlton, Peter Bosly, Ray Hadly, Stan Zemanek and eight other on-air presenters.
Senior management was also party to the directive.
In a letter to the Australian yesterday, Mr Conde confirmed Mr Brennan wrote the memo, which had ‘reflected (his) exuberance’. He said Mr Brennan had promptly clarified the memo, telling staff he only intended to avoid any announcer ‘sending up’ the McDonald’s ads. ‘It was made plain 2UE was not seeking to curtail editorial comment’
In a separate statement, Mr Conde said 2UE and its affiliates were to receive $707,000 from the
Bank deal. Laws says his share was $303,000.
Amanda Meade (Australian, 22 July 1999 p.1)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Castle Company produces throw blankets that are popular holiday gifts. Standard variable costs relating to a single blanket are given below
|
|
Standard Quantity or Hours
|
Standard Price or Rate
|
Standard Cost
|
|
Direct materials
|
2.62 yards
|
$5 per yard
|
$?
|
|
Direct labor
|
1.35 DLH
|
$6.80 per DLH
|
$?
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
1.35 DLH
|
$2 per direct labor-hour
|
$?
|
|
Total standard cost
|
|
|
$?
|
Overhead is applied to production on the basis of direct labor hours. During March, 924 blankets were manufactured and sold.
Selected information related to the month’s production is given below:
|
|
Materials Used
|
Direct Labor
|
Variable Manufacturing Overhead
|
|
Actual costs incurred
|
$11,500
|
$8,408
|
$3,100
|
|
Direct materials price variance
|
?
|
|
|
|
Actual
|
2,620 yards
|
1400 hours
|
|
|
Direct materials quantity variance
|
$1,000 U
|
|
|
|
Direct labor rate variance
|
|
?
|
|
|
Direct labor efficiency variance
|
|
?
|
|
|
Variable overhead rate variance
|
|
|
?
|
|
Variable overhead efficiency variance
|
|
|
?
|
|
*For this month’s production of 924 blankets
|
Submit an Excel document with each tab labeled by item number in good form that demonstrates the following through your calculations:
1.What is the standard cost of a single blanket?
2.What was the actual cost per blanket produced during March?
3.What was the direct materials price variance for March?
4.What was the direct labor rate variance for March? The direct labor efficiency variance?
5.What was the variable overhead rate variance for March? The variable overhead efficiency variance?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ACT300 Portfolio Project: Kelly Consulting Practice Set
You are given the following information:
1. Post closing trial balance for April 30, 2008
2. Transactions for the month of May 2008
3. Adjustments for May 31,2008
The following can be download from the Module 8 Assignment page or the Course Information page
4. Journal page to copy and use
5. Ledger page to copy and use
6. Portfolio Project Excel Spreadsheet template with accounts pre-entered
Kelly Consulting Transactions for May 2008
May 3 Received cash from clients as an advance payment for services to be provided and recorded it as unearned fees, $1,550.
May 5 Received cash from clients on account, $1,750.
May 9 Paid cash for a newspaper advertisement, $100
May 13 Paid Office Station Co. for part of the debt incurred on April 5, $400
May 15 Recorded services provided on account for the period May 1-15, $5,100.
May 16 Paid part-time receptionist for two weeks’ salary including the amount owed on April 13, $750.
May 17 Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned during the period May 1-16, $7,380
May 20 Purchased supplies on account, $500.
May 21 Recorded services provided on account for the period May 16-20, $2,900.
May 25 Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period May 17-23, $4,200.
May 27 Received cash from clients on account, $6,600.
May 28 Paid part-time receptionist for two weeks’ salary, $750.
May 30 Paid telephone bill for May, $150.
May 31 Paid electricity bill for May, $225.
May 31 Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period May 25-31, $2,875.
May 31 Recorded services provided on account for the remainder of May, $2,200.
May 31 Kelly withdrew $7,500 for personal use.
Instructions are as follows:
1. Record the ending balances from the April 30 post closing trial balance into the ledger sheets or alternatively, you may create T-accounts on an excel spreadsheet.
2. Record journal entries for the May transactions on the journal sheets given or create a spreadsheet configured as a journal sheet.
3. Post the journal entries to the ledger sheets or if you created T-accounts post the entries to your T-accounts.
4. Enter the ending balances from the ledger or T-accounts on to the worksheet trial balance columns.
5. Enter the adjustments directly on to the worksheet.
6. Extend to the adjusted trial balance columns.
7. Extend to the financial statement columns.
8. Prepare the financial statements.
9. Enter the closing entries on to the worksheet.
10. Prepare the post closing trial balance for May.
Submit your work in a Portfolio Project Excel worksheet that you can download from the Course Information page or the Module 8 Assignments page.
Make sure you include the following in your final Excel Workbook:
1. The completed Worksheet on the given downloadable spreadsheet.
2. Formal income statement, statement of owner’s equity, and balance sheet. These may be prepared on separate tabs on the Excel Workbook where the “Worksheet” is the first tab.
3. Post Closing Trial Balance for May 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AIS in Assessing and addressing the Perfect Storm in the higher education sector
The university system is under severe stress on four fronts. Student-staff ratios are blowing out, export income is evaporating, access to research grants is at demoralisation levels and universities are struggling to replace an ageing academic workforce.
“The higher education sector is facing a perfect storm,” director of the University of Melbourne’s Centre for the Study of Higher Education Richard James says.
Source: Healy, G. 2010, Universities facing crisis of confidence, The Australian, October 23. Available at: http://www.theaustralian.com.au/opinion/universities-facing-crisis-of-confidence/story-e6frg6zo-1225942072796
Required:
Read the above article, identify three more media or academic journal articles that explained similar phenomena, and then write a report addressing the following requirements:
- Prepare a list of the factors that are assumed to have contributed to the perfect storm in the higher education sector in Australia.
- As a student studying accounting information systems (AIS), identify and explain the salient factors affecting the business processes (transaction cycles) of a university during the perfect storm.
- Explain how a well-designed Accounting Information System can help university management in taking strategic decisions reducing the impact of the perfect storm.
Presentation:
Use the report format to address the above requirements. Marks will also be provided for an executive summary, a conclusion, grammar and references.
Word limit: 2,000 words (approximately).
Marking guideline and assignment submission criteria
| Requirements |
Description and analysis |
Allocated marks |
| 1 |
List of the factors that are assumed to have contributed to the perfect storm. |
3 |
| 2 |
Explanation of the salient factors affecting the business processes (transaction cycles) of a university. |
6 |
| 3 |
Role of the AIS in helping University management in taking strategic decisions. |
5 |
| Presentation |
Executive summary. Conclusion. Grammar and punctuation. References in appropriate style (both in-text and in the list of references). |
2 1 1 2 |
| Total marks |
20% of the course. |
20 |
| Word limit |
2,000 words (approximately) |
|
| Submission |
Please see the deadline and other submission information available in the course profile and moodle. |
|
* Please note that further guideline may be provided about contribution of the participants in the group.
Guidelines for writing assignment report:
- Read carefully the context of the assessment item 2.
- Try to understand the requirements.
- Be familiar with the relevant concepts. See week 1 study materials.
- Download relevant articles.
- Although not obligatory, download annual reports of two or three Australian universities other than Group 8 universities in Australia.Choose regional and metropolitan universities to download annual reports. See CEO/Presidents Report, Income Statement and Cash flow Statement. These will help you understand business processes, some clues for Perfect Storm, and strategic decisions/plans of the universities to overcome the situation.
- Use a Report Format (not an Essay Format). See a template below:
Template of the Report
Name and Student Id
Name of lecturer/tutor (flex students should mention CC’s name)
- Executive summary (purpose, methods/how you proceeded and gist of findings)
- Requirement 1: give a title and discuss underneath
- Requirement 2: give a title and discuss underneath
- Requirement 3: give a title and discuss underneath
- Conclusions (key findings and suggestions)
- References in appropriate style (Harvard referencing). References are required in-text (in the body) and in-list (at the end of the report). Do not include any reference that has not been used in the text of the report.
Some notes:
*Marking criteria will help you plan how much you need to write for each requirement.
**Word limit: 2,000 words.
****Remember the deadline.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P9-2A Information related
Total credit sales 2,500,000
Accounts receivable at December 31 970,000
Bad debts written off 66,000
Instructions
(a)a) Assume that Hamilton Company estimates its bad debt expense based on 3% of credit sales. What amounts of bad debt expense will Hamilton record of it has Allowance for Doubtful Accounts credit balance of $4000.00?
Assume that Hamilton Company estimates its bad debt expense based on 7%of accounts receivable. What amount of bad debt expense will Hamilton record if it has an Allowance for Doubtful Accounts credit balance of $3000.00?
a) Assume the same facts as in ©, except that there is a $3000.00 debit balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. What amount of bad debt expense will Hamilton record?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
TheKGV Blood Bank, a private charity partly supported by government grants, is located on the Caribbean island of St. Lucia. The blood bank has just finished its operations for September, which was a particularly busy month due to a powerful hurricane that hit neighboring islands causing many injuries. The hurricane largely bypassed St. Lucia, but residents of St. Lucia willingly donated their blood to help people on other islands. As a consequence, the blood bank collected and processed about 20% more blood than had been originally planned for the month.
A report prepared by a government official comparing actual costs to budgeted costs for the blood bank appears below. (The currency on St. Lucia is the East Caribbean dollar.) Continued support from the government depends on the blood bank’s ability to demonstrate control over its costs.
|
|
KGV Blood Bank
|
|
|
|
Cost Control Report
|
|
|
|
For the Month Ended September 30
|
|
|
|
Planning Budget
|
Actual Results
|
Variances
|
|
Liters of blood collected . .
|
600
|
|
780
|
|
|
|
|
Medical supplies . . . . . . . .
|
$7,110
|
|
$9,252
|
|
$2,142
|
U
|
|
Lab tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
8,610
|
|
10,782
|
|
2,172
|
U
|
|
Equipment depreciation . .
|
1,900
|
|
2,100
|
|
200
|
U
|
|
Rent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
1,500
|
|
1,500
|
|
0
|
|
|
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
300
|
|
324
|
|
24
|
U
|
|
Administration . . . . . . . . .
|
14,310
|
|
14,575
|
|
265
|
U
|
|
Total expense . . . . . . . . . .
|
$33,730
|
|
$38,533
|
|
$4,803
|
U
|
The managing director of the blood bank was very unhappy with this report, claiming that his costs were higher than expected due to the emergency on the neighboring islands. He also pointed out that the additional costs had been fully covered by payments from grateful recipients on the other islands. The government official who prepared the report countered that all of the figures had been submitted by the blood bank to the government; he was just pointing out that actual costs were a lot higher than promised in the budget.
The following cost formulas were used to construct the planning budget:
|
|
Cost Formulas
|
|
Medical supplies . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$11.85q
|
|
Lab tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$14.35q
|
|
Equipment depreciation . . . . . . .
|
$1,900
|
|
Rent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$1,500
|
|
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$300
|
|
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
|
$13,200 + $1.85q
|
Required:
1. Prepare a new performance report for September using the flexible budget approach.
2. Do you think any of the variances in the report you prepared should be investigated? Why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Material cost accounting The Malbim Company uses a process costing system. Materials are added at the beginning of the process. On July 1 there are 400 units in the beginning inventory that are 100% complete as to materials. With regard to labor and overhead, however, the units in beginning inventory (July 1) are only 75% complete. During July, 10,000 units were placed in production; of these, 7,400 were completed and transferred to the next department. On July 31, the remaining 3,000 units were 20% complete with regard to labor and overhead.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Tuna Company set the following standard unit costs for its single product. |
|
|
|
| Direct materials (27 Ibs. @ $4 per Ib.) |
$ |
108.00 |
| Direct labor (8 hrs. @ $8 per hr.) |
|
64.00 |
| Factory overhead—variable (8 hrs. @ $5 per hr.) |
|
40.00 |
| Factory overhead—fixed (8 hrs. @ $7 per hr.) |
|
56.00 |
|
|
|
| Total standard cost |
$ |
268.00 |
|
|
|
|
| The predetermined overhead rate is based on a planned operating volume of 60% of the productive capacity of 40,000 units per quarter. The following flexible budget information is available. |
|
Operating Levels |
|
|
|
|
50% |
|
60% |
|
70% |
| Production in units |
|
20,000 |
|
24,000 |
|
28,000 |
| Standard direct labor hours |
|
160,000 |
|
192,000 |
|
224,000 |
| Budgeted overhead |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Fixed factory overhead |
$ |
1,344,000 |
$ |
1,344,000 |
$ |
1,344,000 |
| Variable factory overhead |
$ |
800,000 |
$ |
960,000 |
$ |
1,120,000 |
|
| During the current quarter, the company operated at 70% of capacity and produced 28,000 units of product; actual direct labor totaled 222,000 hours. Units produced were assigned the following standard costs: |
|
|
|
| Direct materials (756,000 Ibs. @ $4 per Ib.) |
$ |
3,024,000 |
| Direct labor (224,000 hrs. @ $8 per hr.) |
|
1,792,000 |
| Factory overhead (224,000 hrs. @ $12 per hr.) |
|
2,688,000 |
|
|
|
| Total standard cost |
$ |
7,504,000 |
|
|
|
|
| Actual costs incurred during the current quarter follow: |
|
|
|
| Direct materials (751,000 Ibs. @ $4.10) |
$ |
3,079,100 |
| Direct labor (222,000 hrs. @ $7.75) |
|
1,720,500 |
| Fixed factory overhead costs |
|
1,968,679 |
| Variable factory overhead costs |
|
1,843,019 |
|
|
|
| Total actual costs |
$ |
8,611,298 |
|
|
|
|
references
| 1. |
Compute the direct materials cost variance, including its price and quantity variances.(Do not round your intermediate calculations. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) |
|
|
|
| Direct materials cost variance |
$ |
|
| Price variance |
$ |
|
| Quantity variance |
$ |
|
|
| Compute the direct labor variance, including its rate and efficiency variances.(Do not round your intermediate calculations. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) |
|
|
|
| Direct labor cost variance |
$ |
|
| Rate variance |
$ |
|
| Efficiency variance |
$ |
|
|
| Compute the overhead controllable and volume variances.(Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) |
|
|
|
| Controllable variance |
$ |
|
| Fixed overhead volume variance |
$ |
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
MOD000897 Introduction to Accounting and Finance
Assignment Brief 2013/14 Semester 1
NEW HAIR CARE PRODUCT
SCENARIO:
You have developed a new hair care product, which you believe could revolutionise the hair care market.
Following on from the Dragon’s Den success of Levi Root’s Reggae Reggae Sauce – (search the internet if you are unfamiliar with this story), you have decided to make a pitch to a small group of potential investors.
You know that any potential investor will expect you to have a good knowledge of how much your product will cost to produce and also of the expected level of sales and profit your product is predicted to make.
REQUIRED:
- Prepare a marginal costing cost statement for your product on a ‘per unit’ and 12 months sales/production basis. 5 marks
- Produce the following financial documents for the first 12 months of trading:
- Cash Budget(month by month)15 marks
- Forecast Income Statement(for the year)10 marks
- Forecast Balance Sheet(for the year)10 marks
- Write a 1,000 word ‘pitch’ explaining the costing and financial data from tasks 1 and 2 above, to your potential investors.35 marks
Total 75 ma
MOD000897 Introduction to Accounting and Finance
Assignment Brief 2013/14 Semester 1
NEW HAIR CARE PRODUCT
SCENARIO:
You have developed a new hair care product, which you believe could revolutionise the hair care market.
Following on from the Dragon’s Den success of Levi Root’s Reggae Reggae Sauce – (search the internet if you are unfamiliar with this story), you have decided to make a pitch to a small group of potential investors.
You know that any potential investor will expect you to have a good knowledge of how much your product will cost to produce and also of the expected level of sales and profit your product is predicted to make.
REQUIRED:
- Prepare a marginal costing cost statement for your product on a ‘per unit’ and 12 months sales/production basis. 5 marks
- Produce the following financial documents for the first 12 months of trading:
- Cash Budget(month by month)15 marks
- Forecast Income Statement(for the year)10 marks
- Forecast Balance Sheet(for the year)10 marks
- Write a 1,000 word ‘pitch’ explaining the costing and financial data from tasks 1 and 2 above, to your potential investors.35 marks
Total 75 marks
rk
MOD000897 Introduction to Accounting and Finance
Assignment Brief 2013/14 Semester 1
NEW HAIR CARE PRODUCT
SCENARIO:
You have developed a new hair care product, which you believe could revolutionise the hair care market.
Following on from the Dragon’s Den success of Levi Root’s Reggae Reggae Sauce – (search the internet if you are unfamiliar with this story), you have decided to make a pitch to a small group of potential investors.
You know that any potential investor will expect you to have a good knowledge of how much your product will cost to produce and also of the expected level of sales and profit your product is predicted to make.
REQUIRED:
- Prepare a marginal costing cost statement for your product on a ‘per unit’ and 12 months sales/production basis. 5 marks
- Produce the following financial documents for the first 12 months of trading:
- Cash Budget(month by month)15 marks
- Forecast Income Statement(for the year)10 marks
- Forecast Balance Sheet(for the year)10 marks
- Write a 1,000 word ‘pitch’ explaining the costing and financial data from tasks 1 and 2 above, to your potential investors.35 marks
Total 75 marks
s
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
“In concluding the chapter on accounting for intangibles, to many observers it does appear that for the sake of enhancing international comparability Australia has embraced a less than ideal accounting standard” (Deegan 2012, p.383).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Appalachian Airlines began operating in 2004. The company lost money the first year but has been profitable ever since. The company’s taxable income (EBT) for its first five years is listed below. Each year the company’s corporate tax rate has been 40%.
|
Year
|
Taxable Income
|
|
2004
|
-$4,000,000
|
|
2005
|
$1,000,000
|
|
2006
|
$2,000,000
|
|
2007
|
$3,000,000
|
|
2008
|
$5,000,000
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assessing Roche Publishing Company’s Cash Management Efficiency
Lisa Pinto, vice president of finance at Roche Publishing Company, a rapidly growing publisher of college texts, is concerned about the firm’s high level of short-term resource investment. She believes that the firm can improve the management of its cash and, as a result, reduce this investment. In this regard, she charged Arlene Bessenoff, the treasurer, with assessing the firm’s cash management efficiency. Arlene decided to begin her investigation by studying the firm’s operating and cash conversion cycles.
Roche Publishing Company is currently spending $12,000,000 per year on its operating-cycle investment, but it expects that initiating a cash discount will increase its operating-cycle investment to $13,100,000 per year. (Note: The operating-cycle investment per dollar of inventory, receivables, and payables is assumed to be the same.) Arlene’s concern was whether the firm’s cash management was as efficient as it could be. Arlene knew that the company paid 12% annual interest for its resource investment and therefore viewed this value as the firm’s required return. For this reason, she was concerned about the resource investment cost resulting from any inefficiencies in the management of Roche’s cash conversion cycle. (Note: Assume a 365-
day year.)
To Do
a. Assuming a constant rate for purchases, production, and sales throughout the year, what are Roche’s existing operating cycle (OC), cash conversion cycle (CCC), and resource investment need?
b. If Roche can optimize operations according to industry standards, what would its operating cycle (OC), cash conversion cycle (CCC), and resource investment need be under these more efficient conditions?
c. In terms of resource investment requirements, what is the annual cost of Roche’s operational inefficiency?
d. Evaluate whether Roche’s strategy for speeding its collection of accounts receivable would be acceptable. What annual net profit or loss would result from implementation of the cash discount?
e. Use your finding in part d, along with the payables and inventory costs given, to determine the total annual cost the firm would incur to achieve the industry level of operational efficiency.
f. Judging on the basis of your findings in parts c and e, should the firm incur the annual cost to achieve the industry level of operational efficiency? Explain why or why not.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, 20X1, Pep Company acquired 80% of the common stock of Sky Company for $195,000. On this date Sky had total owners’ equity of $200,000 (common stock, other paid-in capital, and retained earnings of $10,000, $90,000, and $100,000 respectively).
Any excess of cost over book value is attributable to inventory (worth $6,250 more than cost), to equipment (worth $12,500 more than book value), and to patents. FIFO is used for inventories. The equipment has a remaining life of five years and straight-line depreciation is used. The excess attributable to the patents is to be amortized over 20 years.
During 20X1 and 20X2, Pep has appropriately accounted for its investment in Sky using the simple equity method.
On January 1, 20X2, Pep held merchandise acquired from Sky for $10,000. During 20X2, Sky sold merchandise to Pep for $50,000, $20,000 of which is still held by Pep on December 31, 20X2. Sky’s usual gross profit on affiliated sales is 50%.
On December 31, 20X1, Pep sold equipment to Sky at a gain of $10,000. During 20X2, the equipment was used by Sky. Depreciation is being computed using the straight-line method, a five-year life, and no salvage value.
Required:
a. Using the information above or on the Figure 4-6 worksheet, prepare a determination and distribution of excess schedule.
b. Complete the Figure 4-6 worksheet for consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, 20X2.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kwok Enterprises has the following income statement. How much after-tax operating income does the firm have?
|
Sales
|
$2,250
|
|
Costs
|
1,400
|
|
Depreciation
|
250
|
|
EBIT
|
$600
|
|
Interest expense
|
70
|
|
EBT
|
$530
|
|
Taxes
|
(40%) 212
|
|
Net Income
|
$318
|
a. $325
b. $342
c. $360
d. $378
e. $397
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
C. F. Lee Inc. has the following income statement. How much after-tax operating income does the firm have?
|
Sales
|
$2,850.00
|
|
Costs
|
1,850.00
|
|
Depreciation
|
192.00
|
|
EBIT
|
$808.00
|
|
Interest expense
|
285.00
|
|
EBT
|
$523.00
|
|
Taxes
|
(35%183.00)
|
|
Net income
|
$339.95
|
a. $427.78
b. $450.29
c. $473.99
d. $498.94
e. $525.20
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Wu Systems has the following balance sheet. How much net working capital does the firm have?
|
Cash
|
$ 100
|
Accounts payable
|
$ 200
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
650
|
Accruals
|
350
|
|
Inventory
|
550
|
Notes payable
|
350
|
|
Current assets
|
$1,300
|
Current liabilities
|
$900
|
|
Net Fixed assets
|
1,000
|
Long-term debt
|
600
|
|
Common equity
|
300
|
|
|
|
Retained earnings
|
500
|
|
|
|
Total assets
|
$2,300
|
Total liab. & equity
|
$2,300
|
a. $675
b. $750
c. $825
d. $908
e. $998
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Your corporation has the following cash flows:
|
Operating income
|
$250,000
|
|
Interest received
|
$10,000
|
|
Interest paid
|
$45,000
|
|
Dividends received
|
$20,000
|
|
Dividends paid
|
$50,000
|
If the applicable income tax rate is 40% (federal and state combined), and if 70% of dividends received are exempt from taxes, what is the corporation’s tax liability?
a. $83,980
b. $88,400
c. $92,820
d. $97,461
e. $102,334
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
BYP 18-1 Martinez Company has decided to introduce a new product. The new product can be manufactured by either a capital-intensive method or a labor-intensive method. The manufacturing method will not affect the quality of the product. The estimated manufacturing costs by the two methods are as follows.
|
Capital-Intensive
|
Labor-Intensive
|
|
Direct materials $5 per unit
|
$5.50 per unit
|
|
Direct labor $6 per unit
|
$8.00 per unit
|
|
Variable overhead $3 per unit
|
$4.50 per unit
|
|
Fixed manufacturing costs $2,508,000
|
|
Martinez’s market research department has recommended an introductory unit sales price of $30. The incremental selling expenses are estimated to be $502,000 annually plus $2 for each unit sold, regardless of manufacturing method.
(a) Calculate the estimated break-even point in annual unit sales of the new product if Martinez Company uses the:
(1) Capital-intensive manufacturing method.
(2) Labor-intensive manufacturing method.
(b) Determine the annual unit sales volume at which Martinez Company would be indifferent between the two manufacturing methods.
(c) Explain the circumstance under which Martinez should employ each of the two manufacturing methods.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
WCP16 Because most of the parts for its irrigation systems are standard, Waterways handles the majority of its manufacturing as a process cost system. There are multiple process departments.Three of these departments are the Molding, Cutting, and Welding departments. All items eventually end up in the Package department which prepares items for sale in kits or individually.
The following information is available for the Molding department for January.
Work in process beginning:
Units in process 24,000
Stage of completion for materials 80%
Stage of completion for labor and overhead 30%
Costs in work in process inventory:
Materials $168,360
Labor 67,564
Overhead 16,892
Total costs in beginning work in process $252,816
Units started into production in January 60,000
Units completed and transferred in January 58,000
Costs added to production:
Materials $265,450
Labor 289,468
Overhead 60,578
Total costs added into production in January $615,496
Work in process ending:
Units in process 26,000
Stage of completion for materials 50%
Stage of completion for labor and overhead 10%
Instructions
(a) Prepare a production cost report for Waterways using the weighted-average method.
*(b) Show the equivalent units for materials and conversion costs if Waterways used FIFO instead of weighted- average.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Weisberg Corporation has 10,900 shares of $100 par value, 8%, preferred stock and 52,100 shares of $10 par value common stock outstanding at December 31, 2010.
Answer the questions in each of the following independent situations.
(a) If the preferred stock is cumulative and dividends were last paid on the preferred stock on December 31, 2007, what are the dividends in arrears that should be reported on the December 31, 2010, balance sheet as a note in the stockholders’ equity section?
(b) If the preferred stock is convertible into 8 shares of $10 par value common stock and 4,300 shares are converted, what entry is required for the conversion assuming the preferred stock was issued at par value?
(c) If the preferred stock was issued at $107 per share, how should the preferred stock be reported in the stockholders’ equity section?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
William Severs has been the manager for two years of the production department of a company manufacturing toys made of plastic-coated cardboard. One of the toys is paper dolls, whose “clothes” are made of acetate, and stay on the doll with static electricity. The company’s sales were mainly to large educational institutions until last year, when the dolls were sold for the first time to a large discount retailer. The dolls were sold out immediately, and enough orders received to keep the department at full capacity for the immediate future.
The fixed costs for the department are $50,000, with $1 per unit variable costs. The dolls and one set of clothes sells for $3. The maximum volume is 80,000 units. With the increased volume, Mr. Severs is considering two options to improve profitability. One would reduce variable costs to $0.75, and the other would reduce fixed costs to $35,000.
Given the fact that sales are increasing, make a recommendation to Mr. Severs about which option he should choose? Support your recommendation with a clear explanation and calculations showing him how profitability will change with each option..
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Show work please:
Pert Corporation manufactures state-of-the-art DVD players. It is a division of Vany TV, which manufactures televisions. Pert sells the DVD players to Vany, as well as to retail stores. The following information is available for Pert’s DVD player: variable cost per unit $200; fixed costs per unit $150; a selling price of $500 to outside customers. Vany currently purchases DVD players from an outside supplier for $460 each. Top management of Vany would like Pert to provide 50,000 DVD players per year at a transfer price of $200. Instructions: Compute the minimum transfer price that Pert should accept under each of the following assumptions: 1. Pert is operating at full capacity. 2. Pert has sufficient excess capacity to provide the 50,000 players to Vany. Also indicate whether the proposed internal transfer should occur.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Worksheet data for Pisa Company are presented below.
PISA COMPANY
Worksheet (Partial)
For the Month Ended April 30, 2012
Adjusted Trial Balance
Account Titles
Dr.
Cr.
Cash 13,826
Accounts Receivable 8,175
Prepaid Rent 2,326
Equipment 23,296
Accumulated Depreciation 5,178
Notes Payable 5,725
Accounts Payable 5,532
Pisa, Capital 30,960
Pisa, Drawing 3,749
Service Revenue 15,804
Salaries Expense 10,522
Rent Expense 738
Depreciation Expense 567
Interest Expense 82
Interest Payable
82
Totals 63,281
63,281
Instructions
(a) Journalize the closing entries at April 30. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest e.g. 10, 5, 3, 2.)
(b) Post the beginning balances and closing entries to Income Summary and Pisa, Capital. (Post entries in the order presented above. If there is no transaction, enter NA as the account and 0 for the amount.)
c) Prepare a post-closing trial balance at April 30. (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Worksheet for E20-13)
Erikson Company sponsors a defined benefit pension plan. The corporation’s actuary provides the following information about the plan.
January 1 December 31
2012
2012
Vested benefit obligation $1,500 $1,900
Accumulated benefit obligation 1,900 2,730
Projected benefit obligation 2,500 3,300
Plan assets (fair value) 1,700 2,620
Settlement rate and expected rate of return 10%
Pension asset/liability 800 ?
Service cost for the year 2012 400
Contributions (funding in 2012) 700
Benefits paid in 2012 200
Prepare a 2012 pension worksheet with supplementary schedules of computations. Prepare the journal entries at December 31, 2012, to record pension expense and related pension transactions. Also, indicate the pension amounts reported in the balance sheet. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2. If answer is zero, please enter 0 do not leave any fields blank.))
Erikson Company
Pension Worksheet-2012
Items
General Journal Entries
Memo Record Entries
Annual
Pension Expense
Cash
OCI – Gain/Loss
Pension Asset/Liability
Projected
Benefit Obligation
Plan
Assets
Balance, Jan. 1, 2012
Cr.
Cr.
Dr.
Service cost
Dr.
Cr.
Interest cost
Dr.
Cr.
Actual return
Cr.
Dr.
Unexpected gain
Dr.
Cr.
Contributions
Cr.
Dr.
Benefits
Dr.
Cr.
Liability increase
Dr.
Cr.
Journal entry for 2012 Dr. Cr. Dr. Dr.
Acc. OCI, Dec. 31, 2011 Dr.
Balance, Dec. 31, 2012
Dr.
Cr.
Cr.
Dr.
Journal entries 12/31/12
Description/Account Debit Credit
Balance Sheet at December 31, 2012
Liabilities
Pension Liability
$
Stockholder’s Equity
Accumulated other comprehensive loss – G/L
$
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
XYZ Company’s budgeted and actual results for last year are as follows:
Master Budget Actual Results
Price $450 $600
Sales Volume (units) 6,000 4,000
Unit VC $150 $150
Fixed Costs $250,000 $250,000
Required:
(a) Compute budgeted and actual revenue, costs and profits:
Master Budget Actual
Sales Volume (units) _____________ ____________
Revenue $____________ $___________
Variable costs $____________ $___________
Contribution margin $_____________ $___________
Fixed costs $_____________ $____________
Profit $_____________ $____________
In (b)-(d) below, enter favorable and unfavorable variances as positive and negative numbers, without F or U.
(b) How much is the total profit variance?
(enter negative numbers with a minus, i.e. enter negative $100 as -100 not ($100) ) $
(c) How much is the sales volume variance?
(enter negative numbers with a minus) $
(d) How much is the sales price variance?
(enter negative numbers with a minus) $
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Yancey Company has limited funds available for investment and must ration the funds among four competing projects. Selected information on the four projects follows:
Project Investment
Required Net
Present
Value Life of
the
Project
(years) Internal
Rate
of Return
A $950,000 $330,400 8 19%
B $720,000 $203,390 13 15%
C $650,000 $363,650 8 24%
D $850,000 $259,500 4 23%
The net present values above have been computed using a 10% discount rate. The company wants your assistance in determining which project to accept first, which to accept second, and so forth. The company’s investment funds are limited.
Required:
1. Compute the project profitability index for each project. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places.)
Project Profitability
Index
A ?
B ?
C ?
D ?
2.
In order of preference, rank the four projects in terms of net present value, project profitability index and internal rate of return.
1.Net PresentValue
2.Project Profitability Index
3.Internal Rate of Return
First preference 1. a, b, c, or d? 2. a, b, c, or d? 3. a, b, c, or d?
Second preference 1. a, b, c, or d? 2. a, b, c, or d? 3. a, b, c, or d?
Third preference 1. a, b, c, or d? 2. a, b, c, or d? 3. a, b, c, or d?
Fourth preference 1. a, b, c, or d? 2. a, b, c, or d? 3. a, b, c, or d?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Silicon Optics has supplied the following data for use in its activity-based costing system:
|
|
Overhead Costs
|
|
Wages and Salaries
|
$350,000
|
|
Other overhead costs
|
$200,000
|
|
Total overhead costs
|
$550,000
|
Activity Cost Pool Activity Measure Total Activity
Direct labour support Number of direct labour hours 10,000 DLHs
Order processing Number of orders 500 orders
Customer support Number of customers 100 customers
Other These costs are not allocated to products or customers Not applicable
Distribution of Resource Consumption Across Activity Cost Pools
Direct Labour Support Order Processing Customer Support Other Total
Wages and salaries 30% 35% 25% 10% 100%`
Other overhead costs 25% 15% 20% 40% 100%
During the year, Silicon Optics completed an order for a special optical switch for a new customer, Indus Telecom. This customer did not order any other products during the year. Data concerning that order follow:
Data Concerning the Indus Telecom Order
Selling Price $295 per unit
Units ordered 100 units
Direct materials $264 per unit
Direct labour hours 0.5 DLH per unit
Direct labour rate $25 per DLH
Required 3 :
Prepare a report showing the overhead costs for the order from Indus Telecom, including customer support costs.
Required 4:
Prepare a report showing the customer margin for Indus Telecom.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Margaret Avery Company from time to time embarks on a research program when a special project seems to offer possibilities. In 2011, the company expends $325,000 on a research project, but by the end of 2011 it is impossible to determine whether any benefit will be derived from it.
Instructions
(a) What account should be charged for the $325,000, and how should it be shown in the financial statements?
(b) The project is completed in 2012, and a successful patent is obtained. The R&D costs to complete the project are $130,000. The administrative and legal expenses incurred in obtaining patent number(NNN) NNN-NNNN84 in 2012 total $24,000. The patent has an expected useful life of 5 years. Record these costs in journal entry form. Also, record patent amortization (full year) in 2012.
(c) In 2013, the company successfully defends the patent in extended litigation at a cost of $47,200, thereby extending the patent life to December 31, 2020. What is the proper way to account for this cost? Also, record patent amortization (full year) in 2013.
(d) Additional engineering and consulting costs incurred in 2013 required to advance the design of a product to the manufacturing stage total $60,000. These costs enhance the design of the product considerably. Discuss the proper accounting treatment for this cost.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The balance sheet and income statement shown below are for Pettijohn Inc. Note that the firm has no amortization charges, it does not lease any assets, none of its debt must be retired during the next 5 years, and the notes payable will be rolled over.
Balance Sheet (Millions of $)
Assets 2010
Cash and securities $ 1,554.0
Accounts receivable 9,660.0
Inventories 13,440.0
Total current assets $24,654.0
Net plant and equipment 17,346.0
Total assets $42,000.0
Liabilities and Equity
Accounts payable $ 7,980.0
Notes payable 5,880.0
Accruals 4,620.0
Total current liabilities $18,480.0
Long-term bonds 10,920.0
Total debt $29,400.0
Common stock 3,360.0
Retained earnings 9,240.0
Total common equity $12,600.0
Total liabilities and equity $42,000.0
Income Statement (Millions of $) 2010
Net sales $58,800.0
Operating costs except depr’n $54,978.0
Depreciation $ 1,029.0
Earnings bef int and taxes (EBIT) $ 2,793.0
Less interest 1,050.0
Earnings before taxes (EBT) $ 1,743.0
Taxes $ 610.1
Net income $ 1,133.0
Other data:
Shares outstanding (millions) 175.00
Common dividends $ 509.83
Int rate on notes payable & L-T bonds 6.25%
Federal plus state income tax rate 35%
Year-end stock price $ 77.69
Refer to Multi-Part 3-1. What is the firm’s days sales outstanding? Assume a 360-day year for this calculation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LO.1 Classify each of the following expenditures as a deduction for AGI, a deduction from AGI, or not deductible:
a. Amos contributes to his H.R. 10 plan (i.e., a retirement plan for a self-employed individual).
b. Keith pays child support to his former wife, Renee, for the support of their son, Chris.
c. Judy pays for professional dues that are reimbursed by her employer.
d. Ted pays $500 as the monthly mortgage payment on his personal residence. Of this amount, $100 represents a payment on principal, and $400 represents an interest payment.
e. Lynn pays a moving company for moving her household goods to Detroit, where she is starting a new job. She is not reimbursed by her employer.
f. Ralph pays property taxes on his personal residence.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LO.1 Kirby and his wife Melinda own all of the stock of Thrush. Melinda is the president, and Kirby is the vice president. Melinda and Kirby are paid salaries of $500,000 and $350,000, respectively, each year. They consider the salaries to be reasonable based on a comparison of salaries paid for comparable positions in comparable companies. They project Thrush’s taxable income for next year, before their salaries, to be $975,000. They decide to place their three teenage children on the payroll and to pay them total salaries of $125,000. The children will each work about five hours per week for Thrush.
a. What are Kirby and Melinda trying to achieve by hiring the children? b. Calculate the tax consequences on Thrush and on Kirby and Melinda’s family of hiring the children.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LO.3 Trevor, a friend of yours from high school, works as a server at the ST Café. He asks you to help him prepare his Federal income tax return. When you inquire about why his bank deposits substantially exceed his tip income, he confides to you that he is a bookie on the side. Trevor then provides you with the following documented income and expenses for the year: Tip income $16,000 Gambling income 52,000 Gambling expenses Payouts to winners 29,000 Employee compensation 8,000 Bribe to police officer who is aware of Trevor’s bookie activity 7,500
a. How will these items affect Trevor’s AGI? b. His taxable income? c. If Trevor’s business was an illegal drug operation and the cost of the illegal drugs sold was $6,200, how would your answers to parts (a) and (b) differ?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LO.3, 4 Amber, a publicly held corporation (not a TARP recipient), currently pays its president an annual salary of $900,000. In addition, it contributes $20,000 annually to a defined contribution pension plan for him. As a means of increasing company profitability, the board of directors decides to increase the president’s compensation. Two proposals are being considered. Under the first proposal, the salary and pension contribution for the president would be increased by 30%. Under the second proposal, Amber would implement a performance-based compensation program that is projected to provide about the same amount of additional compensation and pension contribution for the president.
a. Evaluate the alternatives from the perspective of Amber, Inc. b. Prepare a letter to Amber’s board of directors that contains your recommendations. Address the letter to the board chairperson, Agnes Riddle, whose address is 100 James Tower, Cleveland, OH 44106.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LO.3 Terry traveled to a neighboring state to investigate the purchase of two hardware stores. His expenses included travel, legal, accounting, and miscellaneous expenses. The total was $52,000. He incurred the expenses in June and July 2012. Under the following circumstances, what can Terry deduct in 2012?
a. Terry was in the hardware store business and did not acquire the two hardware stores. b. Terry was in the hardware store business and acquired the two hardware stores and began operating them on October 1, 2012. c. Terry did not acquire the two hardware stores and was not in the hardware store business. d. Terry acquired the two hardware stores but was not in the hardware store business when he acquired them. Operations began on October 1, 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LO.3 Sandra, an orthodontist, is single and has net earnings of $90,000 from her practice. In addition, she collects antique books that she buys and sells at antique shows. She participates in six to eight weekend shows per year. Her income and expenses for the current year are as follows: Revenue from sale of antique books $22,000 Expenses Cost of goods sold 12,000 Show registration costs 3,000 Advertising 1,000 Dealer’s license—annual fee 500 Insurance 900 Depreciation of display cases 1,200 Sandra has no other items that would affect her AGI. Itemized deductions consisting of taxes, interest, and charitable contributions are $19,000. Calculate Sandra’s taxable income if the antique book activity is classified as:
a. A hobby. b. A business.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LO.1, 3, 4 Elisa and Clyde operate a retail sports memorabilia shop. For the current year, sales revenue is $55,000 and expenses are as follows: Cost of goods sold $21,000 Advertising 1,000 Utilities 2,000 Rent 4,500 Insurance 1,500 Wages to Boyd 8,000 Elisa and Clyde pay $8,000 in wages to Boyd, a part-time employee. Because this amount is $1,000 below the minimum wage, Boyd threatens to file a complaint with the appropriate Federal agency. Although Elisa and Clyde pay no attention to Boyd’s threat, Chelsie (Elisa’s mother) gives Boyd a check for $1,000 for the disputed wages. Both Elisa and Clyde ridicule Chelsie for wasting money when they learn what she has done. The retail shop is the only source of income for Elisa and Clyde.
a. Calculate Elisa and Clyde’s AGI. b. Can Chelsie deduct the $1,000 payment on her tax return? c. How could the tax position of the parties be improved?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LO.3, 4 Jay’s sole proprietorship has the following assets: Basis Fair Market Value Cash $ 10,000 $ 10,000 Accounts receivable 18,000 18,000 Inventory 25,000 30,000 Patent 22,000 40,000 Land 50,000 75,000 $125,000 $173,000
The building in which Jay’s business is located is leased. The lease expires at the end of the year. Jay is 70 years old and would like to retire. He expects to be in the 35% tax bracket. Jay is negotiating the sale of the business with Lois, a key employee. They have agreed on the fair market value of the assets, as indicated previously, and agree that the total purchase price should be about $200,000.
a. Advise Jay regarding how the sale should be structured. b. Advise Lois regarding how the purchase should be structured. c. What might they do to achieve an acceptable compromise?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LO.3 For each of the following independent transactions, calculate the recognized gain or loss to the seller and the adjusted basis to the buyer.
a. Bonnie sells Parchment, Inc. stock (adjusted basis $17,000) to Phillip, her brother, for its fair market value of $12,000. b. Amos sells land (adjusted basis $85,000) to his nephew, Boyd, for its fair market value of $70,000. c. Susan sells a tax-exempt bond (adjusted basis $20,000) to her wholly owned corporation for its fair market value of $19,000. d. Ron sells a business truck (adjusted basis $20,000) that he uses in his sole proprietorship to his cousin, Agnes, for its fair market value of $18,500. e. Martha sells her partnership interest (adjusted basis $175,000) in Pearl Partnership to her adult daughter, Kim, for $220,000.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Below you will find two situations involving revenue recognition related to separate divisions of the Jamestown Corporation, the paperback book division and the alarm systems division. For each situation:
‘ Explain the revenue recognition issue presented. Provide codification references.
‘ Compute the revenue to be recognized in the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012.
Situation 1: Paperback book division
The paperback book division sells large quantities of novels to a few book distributors that in turn sell to several national chains of bookstores. The division allows distributors to return up to 30% of sales, and distributors give the same terms to bookstores. While returns from individual titles fluctuate greatly, the returns from distributors have averaged 20% in each of the past 5 years. A total of $7,000,000 of paperback novel sales were made to distributors during the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012. On November 30, 2012, $2,200,000 of fiscal 2012 sales was still subject to return privileges over the next six months. The remaining $4,800,000 of fiscal 2012 sales had actual returns of 21%. Sales from fiscal 2011 totaling $2,500,000 were collected in fiscal 2012, with less than 18% of sales returned. All of the criteria for revenue recognition when the right of return exists are applicable to the paperback book division.
Situation 2: The alarm systems division works through manufacturers’ agents in various cities. Orders for alarm systems and down payments are forwarded from agents and the division ships the goods f.o.b. shipping point. Customers are billed for the balance due plus actual shipping costs. The firm received orders for $6,000,000 of goods during the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012. Down payments of $600,000 were received, and $5,000,000 of goods were billed and shipped. Actual freight costs of $100,000 were also billed. Commissions of 10% on product price were paid to manufacturers’ agents after the goods were shipped to customers. Such goods are warranted for 90 days after shipment, and warranty returns have been about 1% of sales. Revenue is recognized at the point of sale by the alarm division.
f. Assume that you are the corporate controller for Jamestown Corporation. Write a business memo, in good form to President Jeffrey Simmons explaining the accounting issues involved in the two situations. Your memo should not exceed one typewritten page.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sosa Co.’s stockholders’ equity at January 1, 2010 is as follows:
Common stock, $10 par value; authorized 300,000 shares;
Outstanding 225,000 shares
$2,250,000
Paid-in capital in excess of par
900,000
Retained earnings
2,190,000
Total
$5,340,000
During 2010, Sosa had the following stock transactions:
Acquired 6,000 shares of its stock for $270,000.
3,600 treasury shares at $50 a share.
Sold the remaining treasury shares at $41 per share.
No other stock transactions occurred during 2010. Assuming Sosa uses the cost method to record treasury stock transactions, the total amount of all additional paid-in capital accounts at December 31, 2010 is:
a) $870,000.
b) $891,600.
c) $908,400
d) $927,600.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
statement of Cash Flows – Indirect Method
The comparative balance sheets of Jorge, Inc at December 31, 201 I and 20 I0 are as follows:
Assets 12/31/11 12/31/10
Cash 476,880 292,960
A/R 113,920 104,480
Merchandise inventory 320,880 308,560
Investments 0 120,000
Equipment (at cost) 352,560 276,560
Accumulated total Deprec. (83,200) (74,000)
Total Assets $1,181,040 $1,028,560
Liabilities & Owners Equity
A/P (operations) 247,360 238,400
Common Stock $10 Par 64,000 48,000
Additonal paid in Capital 240,000 140,000
Retained Earnings 629,680 602,160
Total Liabilites & Owners 1,181,040 1,028,560
a. Net income during 2011 was $75,520
b. The equipment was acquired for cash and there were no disposals of equipment.
c. The inv stments were sold for $120,000.
d. 1,600 s ares of common stock were issued at $72.50 each
e. Cash div idends declared and paid, $48,000.
**Please preare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method of presenting cash
flows from operating activities.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Stein Apparel is a retail store specializing in women’s fashions. Stein’s management accountant has gathered the following information for Stein Apparel.
Month Sales Purchases
June $42,000 $17,640
July $48,000 $20,160
August $54,000 $22,680
September $50,000 $21,000
Cash is collected from customers in the following manner:
Month of the sale 25%
First month following the sale 40%
Second month following the sale 20%
Third month following the sale 10%
Uncollectable 5%
Purchases of inventory are paid as follows:
Cash payment in month of purchase 40%
Cash payment in month following purchase 60%
Additional information:
Labor costs equal 19% of sales
Other operating costs are $15,000 per month which includes $4,000 of depreciation.
Labor and operating costs are paid in the month incurred.
The cash balance on August 1 is $4,000.
Required: Show all supporting calculations for credit.
1. Calculate the amount of cash receipts for July, August and September.
2. Calculate the amount of cash disbursements for July, August and September.
3. Calculate the cash balance at September 30.
4. Discuss two important reasons why Stein Apparel should prepare cash budgets.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Stein Apparel is a retail store specializing in women’s fashions. Stein’s management accountant has gathered the following information for Stein Apparel.
Month Sales Purchases
June $42,000 $17,640
July $48,000 $20,160
August $54,000 $22,680
September $50,000 $21,000
Cash is collected from customers in the following manner:
Month of the sale 25%
First month following the sale 40%
Second month following the sale 20%
Third month following the sale 10%
Uncollectable 5%
Purchases of inventory are paid as follows:
Cash payment in month of purchase 40%
Cash payment in month following purchase 60%
Additional information:
Labor costs equal 19% of sales
Other operating costs are $15,000 per month which includes $4,000 of depreciation.
Labor and operating costs are paid in the month incurred.
The cash balance on August 1 is $4,000.
Required: Show all supporting calculations for credit.
1. Calculate the amount of cash receipts for July, August and September.
2. Calculate the amount of cash disbursements for July, August and September.
3. Calculate the cash balance at September 30.
4. Discuss two important reasons why Stein Apparel should prepare cash budgets.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The stockholders’ equity of Verrecchia Company at December 31, 2008, follows:
|
Common stock, $5 par value, 350,000 shares authorized; 170,000 shares issued and outstanding
|
$850,000
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par value
|
600,000
|
|
Retained earnings
|
346,000
|
| |
|
During 2009, the following transactions occurred:
|
Jan. 5
|
|
Issued 10,000 shares of common stock for $11 cash per share.
|
|
Jan. 18
|
|
Purchased 4,000 shares of common stock for the treasury at $15 cash per share.
|
|
Mar. 12
|
|
Sold one-fourth of the treasury shares acquired January 18 for $19 cash per share.
|
|
July 17
|
|
Sold 500 shares of the remaining treasury stock for $14 cash per share.
|
|
Oct. 1
|
|
Issued 5,000 shares of 8%, $24 par value preferred stock for $40 cash per share. This is the first issuance of preferred shares from the 50,000 authorized shares.
|
Prepare the December 31, 2009, stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet assuming that the company reports net income of $72,500 for the year.
|
Stockholders’ Equity
|
|
Paid-in capital:
8% Preferred stock, $24 par value, 50,000 shares authorized, 5,000 shares issued and outstanding:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Common stock, $5 par value, 350,000 shares authorized; 180,000 shares issued:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Additional paid-in capital Paid-in capital in excess of par value-preferred stock:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Paid-in capital in excess of par value-common stock:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Paid-in capital from treasury stock:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total paid-in capital:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Retained earnings:
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Less: Treasury stock (2,500 shares) at cost
|
:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Total Stockholders’ Equity:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Summarized financial data for two competitors is set out below:
|
|
(All balances are as of 12/31/08 or for the year ended 12/31/08)
|
|
Oscar Corp
|
Felix Corp
|
|
Sales revenue
|
800,000
|
600,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
400,000
|
200,000
|
|
Cash
|
90,000
|
25,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
120,000
|
75,000
|
|
Property plant and equipment, net
|
250,000
|
225,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
95,000
|
60,000
|
|
Salaries payable
|
75,000
|
35,000
|
|
Long term liabilities
|
150,000
|
75,000
|
|
Common shares outstanding, beginning of year
|
50,000
|
25,000
|
|
Common shares outstanding, end of year
|
100,000
|
40,000
|
|
No dividends were paid during 2008.
|
|
Compute the following for both companies:
|
|
1. Working capital
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Summarized financial data for two competitors is set out below:
|
|
(All balances are as of 12/31/08 or for the year ended 12/31/08)
|
|
Oscar Corp
|
Felix Corp
|
|
Sales revenue
|
800,000
|
600,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
400,000
|
200,000
|
|
Cash
|
90,000
|
25,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
120,000
|
75,000
|
|
Property plant and equipment, net
|
250,000
|
225,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
95,000
|
60,000
|
|
Salaries payable
|
75,000
|
35,000
|
|
Long term liabilities
|
150,000
|
75,000
|
|
Common shares outstanding, beginning of year
|
50,000
|
25,000
|
|
Common shares outstanding, end of year
|
100,000
|
40,000
|
Find current ratio
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Summarized financial data for two competitors is set out below:
|
|
(All balances are as of 12/31/08 or for the year ended 12/31/08)
|
|
Oscar Corp
|
Felix Corp
|
|
Sales revenue
|
800,000
|
600,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
400,000
|
200,000
|
|
Cash
|
90,000
|
25,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
120,000
|
75,000
|
|
Property plant and equipment, net
|
250,000
|
225,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
95,000
|
60,000
|
|
Salaries payable
|
75,000
|
35,000
|
|
Long term liabilities
|
150,000
|
75,000
|
|
Common shares outstanding, beginning of year
|
50,000
|
25,000
|
|
Common shares outstanding, end of year
|
100,000
|
40,000
|
|
No dividends were paid during 2008.
|
|
Which company appears more liquid? (Name a ratio used to determine)
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Summarized financial data for two competitors is set out below:
|
|
(All balances are as of 12/31/08 or for the year ended 12/31/08)
|
|
Oscar Corp
|
Felix Corp
|
|
Sales revenue
|
800,000
|
600,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
400,000
|
200,000
|
|
Cash
|
90,000
|
25,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
120,000
|
75,000
|
|
Property plant and equipment, net
|
250,000
|
225,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
95,000
|
60,000
|
|
Salaries payable
|
75,000
|
35,000
|
|
Long term liabilities
|
150,000
|
75,000
|
|
Common shares outstanding, beginning of year
|
50,000
|
25,000
|
|
Common shares outstanding, end of year
|
100,000
|
40,000
|
| |
|
|
|
No dividends were paid during 2008.
Which company appears more liquid? (Name a ratio used to determine)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(TCO 1) Which of the following is not a difference between financial accounting and managerial accounting? (Points : 4)
Financial accounting is primarily concerned with reporting the past, while managerial accounting is more concerned with the future.
Managerial accounting uses more nonmonetary information than is used in financial accounting.
Managerial accounting is primarily concerned with providing information for external users while financial accounting is concerned with internal users.
Financial accounting must follow GAAP while managerial accounting is not required to follow GAAP.
2. (TCO 1) Which of the following costs does not change when the level of business activity changes? (Points : 4)
total fixed costs
total variable costs
total direct materials costs
fixed costs per unit
3. (TCO 1) You own a car and are trying to decide whether or not to trade it in and buy a new car. Which of the following costs is an opportunity cost in this situation? (Points : 4)
the trip to Cancun that you will not be able to take if you buy the car
the cost of the car you are trading in
the cost of your books for this term
the cost of your car insurance last year
4. (TCO 1) Shula’s 347 Grill has budgeted the following costs for a month in which 1,600 steak dinners will be produced and sold: materials, $4,080; hourly labor (variable), $5,200; rent (fixed), $1,700; depreciation, $800; and other fixed costs, $600. Each steak dinner sells for $14.00 each. How much is the budgeted variable cost per unit? (Points : 4)
$5.80
$7.74
$6.68
$3.25
5. (TCO 1) Which of the following is an example of a manufacturing overhead cost? (Points : 4)
security at the manufacturing plant
fabric used to produce shirts
cost of shipping product to customers
the salary of the president of the company
6. (TCO 1) Which of the following is a period cost? (Points : 4)
rent on a factory building
depreciation on production equipment
raw materials cost
commissions paid on each unit sold
7. (TCO 1) At December 31, 2010, WDT Inc. has a balance in the Work in Process Inventory account of $62,000. At January 1, 2010, the balance was $55,000. Current manufacturing costs for the year are $292,000, and cost of goods sold is $284,000. How much is cost of goods manufactured? (Points : 4)
$292,000
$299,000
$277,000
$285,000
8. (TCO 2) BCS Company applies manufacturing overhead based on direct labor cost. Information concerning manufacturing overhead and labor for August follows:
Estimated
Actual
Overhead cost
$174,000
$171,000
Direct labor hours
5,800
5,900
Direct labor cost
$87,000
$89,975
How much is the predetermined overhead rate? (Points : 4)
$2.00
$1.90
$30.00
$1.93
9. (TCO 2) During 2011, Madison Company applied overhead using a job-order costing system at a rate of $12 per direct labor hours. Estimated direct labor hours for the year were 150,000, and estimated overhead for the year was $1,800,000. Actual direct labor hours for 2011 were 140,000 and actual overhead was $1,670,000.
What is the amount of under or over applied overhead for the year? (Points : 4)
$10,000 underapplied
$10,000 overapplied
$130,000 underapplied
$130,000 overapplied
10. (TCO 3) Which of the following describes the differences between job-order and process costing? (Points : 4)
Job-order costing is used in financial accounting while process costing is used in managerial accounting.
Job-order costing can only be used by manufacturers; service enterprises must use process costing.
Job-order costing is voluntary while process costing is mandatory.
Job-order costing traces costs to jobs while process costing traces costs to departments and averages the costs among the units worked on during the period.
11. (TCO 3) Caliente Company uses process costing. At the beginning of the month, there were 3,000 units in process, 70% complete with respect to material and 60% complete with respect to conversion costs. 20,000 units were started during the month and 20,000 units were completed. The units in ending work in process inventory were 90% complete with respect to material and 30% complete with respect to conversion costs. How many equivalent units will be used in calculating the cost per unit for materials? (Points : 4)
22,700
23,000
9,700
18,300
12. (TCO 3) Ranger Glass Company manufactures glass for French doors. At the start of May, 2,000 units were in-process. During May, 11,000 units were completed and 3,000 units were in process at the end of May. These in-process units were 90% complete with respect to material and 50% complete with respect to conversion costs. Other information is as follows:
Work in process, May 1:
Direct material
$36,000
Conversion costs
$45,000
Costs incurred during May:
Direct material
$186,000
Conversion costs
$255,000
How much is the cost per equivalent unit for direct materials? (Points : 4)
$24.00
$16.20
$15.86
$13.58
13. (TCO 4) Total costs were $75,800 when 30,000 units were produced and $95,800 when 40,000 units were produced. Use the high-low method to find the estimated total costs for a production level of 32,000 units. (Points : 4)
$80,115
$76,000
$79,800
$91,800
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Transvaal Mining Tools Ltd. of South Africa makes specialty tools used in the mining industry. The company uses an activity-based costing system for internal decision-making purposes. The company has four activity cost pools as listed below: Activity Cost Pool Activity Measure Activity Rate Order size Number of direct labor-hours R 17.60 per direct labor-hour* Customer orders Number of customer orders R 360 per customer order Product testing Number of testing hours R 79 per testing hour Selling Number of sales calls R 1,494 per sales call * (The currency in South Africa is the rand, denoted here by R.) The managing director of the company would like information concerning the cost of a recently completed order for hard-rock drills. The order required 150 direct labor-hours, 18 hours of product testing, and three sales calls. Required: a. Prepare a report summarizing the overhead costs assigned to the order for hard-rock drills. (Omit the “R” sign in your response.) Activity Cost Pool ABC Cost Order size R Customer orders Product testing Selling Total R b. What is the total overhead cost assigned to the order? (Omit the “R” sign in your response.) Total overhead cost R
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use the following contribution margin statement:
Product A Product B Total
sales volume (units) 100 180 280
Revenue $16,000 $96,000 $112,000
Variable costs:
direct materials $3,200 $6,400 $9,600
direct labor $6,400 $16,000 $22,400
Contribution margin $6,400 $73,600 $80,000
Fixed costs $67,200
Profit $12,800
Required:
(a) allocate the shared fixed costs ($67,200) among product A and product B, using direct labor dollars as the allocation basis.
allocation rate=$_________________ per DL$
FC allocated to A=$_______________
FC allocated to B=$_________________
(b) using the allocated costs from (a), compute the profit margin for product A and product B.
If you get a negative number, enter it with a minus sign, i.e., enter negative $1000 as -1000, not as ($1000)
profit margin for A=$________________
profit margin for B=$________________
c) based on the profit margins from (b), should you kill product A or product B in the long term? Explain your decision.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Use the information provided below to prepare the Cost of Good Manufactured Schedule:Bravo had the following costs as of Dec 31, 2010. Enter the correct values in the Green shaded cells.
Table C
Materials used in baking bread ?
Factory Supervisor Salaries 20,000
Bakers wages $32,000
Rent for Executive Offices 36,000
Sales Commissions 10000
Utilities used in the factory 5000
Advertising costs 12000
Delivery truck costs 25000
Depreciation on bake ovens 500
Interest on bank loan 250
Beginning Inventory Materials 10,000
Beginning Work in Process 8000
Ending Inventory Materials 4000
Inventory Purchases 26000
Ending Work in Process 2500
Other Overhead costs 1200
Beginning Finished Goods Inventory 7500
Ending Finished Goods Inventory 6000
Rent for Factory 7500
Cost of Goods Manufactured Schedule
Beginning Work In Process ?
Materials ?
Beginning Inventory Materials ?
Plus: Purchases ?
Materials Available ?
Less: Ending Inventory Materials ?
Materials Used ?
Direct Labor ?
Overhead
Factory Rent ?
Depreciation on bake ovens ?
Utilities used in Factory ?
Other Overhead costs ?
Total Overhead ?
Total Manufacturing Costs ?
Total Work in Process ?
Less: Ending Work in Process ?
Cost of Goods Manufactured ?
Goods Available for Sale ?
Less: Ending Finished Goods Inventory ?
Cost of Goods Sold Schedule ?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Using the following data from the comparative balance sheet of Rodenbeck Company, illustrate vertical analysis. (Round percentages to 1 decimal place, e.g. 10.5.)
|
|
December 31, 2011 |
|
December 31, 2010 |
|
Accounts receivable |
$ 527,990 |
|
$ 406,800 |
|
Inventory |
$ 852,960 |
|
$ 603,240 |
|
Total assets |
$ 3,029,000 |
|
$2,441,700 |
Vertical Analysis
|
Dec. 31, 2011
|
Dec. 31, 2010
|
|
Amount
|
Percentage
|
Amount
|
Percentage
|
| Accounts receivable |
$ |
% |
$ |
% |
| Inventory |
$ |
% |
$ |
% |
| Total assets |
$ |
% |
$ |
% |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Valmont, Inc. experienced the following events in 2012, in its first year of operation.
1. Received $20,000 cash from the issue of common stock.
2. Performed services on account for $50,000.
3. Paid utility expense of $12,500.
4. Collected $39,000 of the accounts receivable.
5. Recorded $9,000 of accrued salaries at the end of the year.
6. Paid a $5,000 cash dividend to the shareholders.
a. Record the events in general ledger accounts under an accounting equation. In the last column of the table, provide appropriate account titles for the Retained Earnings amounts.
b. Prepare the income statement, statement of changes in stockholder’s equity, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for the 2012 accounting period.
c. Why is the amount of net income different from the amount of net cash flow from operating activities?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Veronica Tanner, the president of Tanner Enterprises is considering two investment opportunities. Because of limited resources, she will be able to invest in only one of them. Project A is to purchase a machine that will enable factory automation; the machine is expected to have a useful life of four years and no salvage value. Project B supports a training program that will improve the skills of employees operating the current equipment. Initial cash expenditures for Project A are $100,000 and for Project B is $40,000. The annual expected cash inflows are $31,487 for Project A and $13,169 for Project B. Both investments are expected to provide cash flow benefits for the next four years. Tanner Enterprises cost of capital is 8 percent.
Required.
a. Compute the net present value of each project. Which project should be adopted based on the net present value approach?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Village of Seaside Pines prepared the following enterprise fund Trial Balance as of
December 31, 2009, the last day of its fiscal year. The enterprise fund was
established this year through a transfer from the General Fund.
Debits Credits
Accounts payable 110,000
Accounts receivable 102,000
Accrued interest payable 4,000
Accumulated depreciation 45,000
Administrative and selling expenses 175,000
Allowance for uncollectible accounts 12,000
Capital assets 550,000
Cash 95,000
Charges for sales and services 503,000
Cost fo sales and services 347,000
Depreciation expense 45,000
Due from General Fund 40,000
Interest expense 18,000
Interest revenue 28,000
Transfer in from General Fund 202,000
Revenue bonds payable 475,000
Supplies inventory 7,000
Totals 1,379,000 1,379,000
Prepare the closing entries for December 31.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Vinnie Morelli Corporation has the following overhead costs and cost drivers. Direct labor hours are estimated at 100,000 for the year.
Activity Cost Pool Cost Driver Est. Overhead Cost Driver Activity
Ordering and Receiving Orders $120,000 500 orders
Machine Setup Setups 297,000 450 setups
Machining Machine hours 1,500,000 125,000 MH
Assembly
Parts 1,200,000 1,000,000 parts
Inspection Inspections 300,000 500 inspections
If overhead is applied using activity-based costing, the overhead application rate for ordering and receiving is
A) $1.20 per direct labor hour.
B) $240 per order.
C) $0.12 Per part.
D) $6,834 per order.
If overhead is applied using traditional costing based on based on direct labor hours, the overhead application rate is
A) $9.60
B) $12.00
C) $15.00
D) $34.17
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Waterways puts much emphasis on cash flow when it plans for capital investments.
The company chose its discount rate of 8% based on the rate of return it must pay its owners and
creditors. Using that rate,Waterways then uses different methods to determine the best decisions
for making capital outlays.
In 2009 Waterways is considering buying five new backhoes to replace the backhoes it now
has. The new backhoes are faster, cost less to run, provide for more accurate trench digging,
have comfort features for the operators, and have 1-year maintenance agreements to go with
them.The old backhoes are working just fine, but they do require considerable maintenance.The
backhoe operators are very familiar with the old backhoes and would need to learn some new
skills to use the new backhoes.
The following information is available to use in deciding whether to purchase the new
backhoes.
Old Backhoes New Backhoes
Purchase cost when new $90,000 $200,000
Salvage value now $42,000
Investment in major overhaul needed in next year $55,000
Salvage value in 8 years $15,000 $90,000
Remaining life 8 years 8 years
Net cash flow generated each year $40,425 $53,900
(a) Evaluate in the following ways whether to purchase the new equipment or overhaul the old
equipment. (Hint: For the old machine, the initial investment is the cost of the overhaul. For
the new machine, subtract the salvage value of the old machine to determine the initial cost
of the investment.)
(1) Using the net present value method for buying new or keeping the old.
(2) Using the payback method for each choice. (Hint: For the old machine, evaluate the payback
of an overhaul.)
(3) Comparing the profitability index for each choice.
(4) Comparing the internal rate of return for each choice to the required 8% discount rate.
(b) Are there any intangible benefits or negatives that would influence this decision?
(c) What decision would you make and why?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The readings in my accounting book doesn’t really help me solve this question. Please help. Thank you!
The Post Division of the M.T. Woodhead Company produces basic posts which can be sold to outside customers or sold to the Lamp Division of the M.T. Woodhead Company. Last year the Lamp Division bought all of its 29,400 posts from Post at $1.50 each. The following data are available for last year’s activities of the Post Division:
Capacity in units 305,000 posts
Selling price per cost to outside customers $1.90
Variable costs per post $0.80
Fixed costs, total $241,000
The total fixed costs would be the same for all the alternatives considered below. Suppose the transfers of posts to the Lamp Division cut into sales to outside customers by 17,500 units. What is the lowest transfer price that would not reduce the profits of the Post Division? (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places.)
* $0.80
* $1.45
* $1.90
* $1.25
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For what reason would retailers like The Gap select an accounting period that ends on or near the end of January?
a. The company originally started business operations on that date.
b. Business activity has reached a slow period that is suited to the preparation of its financial statements at the end of the year.
C. The company’s CPAs are attempting to spread out the workload.
d. The Internal Revenue Service requires merchandise companies to select such a date for their fiscal year.
Question 2 1.5 points Save
Which one of the following accounts most likely would appear on the income statement of a merchandise company, but not on the income statement of a service company?
a. Cost of Goods Sold
b. Selling Expenses
c. Administrative Expenses
d. Income Tax Expense
Question 3 1.5 points Save
Gerald’s Department Store
Gerald’s Department Store. is a merchandising company that uses the periodic inventory system. Selected account balances are listed below:
Sales $175,000
Purchases 90,000
Inventory (Beginning) 23,000
Inventory (Ending) 17,000
Purchase returns and allowances 3,000
Purchase discounts 7,000
Transportation-in 4,000
Sales discounts 8,000
Sales returns and allowances 5,000
Refer to Gerald’s Department Store. Calculate Gerald’s net sales.
a. $162,000
b. $167,000
c. $170,000
d. $175,000
Question 4 1.5 points Save
Silvertone Corp. sold merchandise to a customer on credit. The invoice amount was $1,000; the invoice date was June 10; credit terms were 1/10, n/30. Which one of the following statements is true?
a.The customer can take a $10 discount if the invoice is paid on June 30
b. The customer should pay $1,000 if the invoice is paid on July 9
c. The customer must pay a $10 penalty if payment is made after July 9.
d. The customer must pay $1,010 if payment is made after June 20.
Question 5 1.5 points Save
The recognition of cost of goods sold expense in the same period that sales revenue is recognized from the sale of merchandise is a good example of the
a. matching principle
b. full disclosure principle
c. revenue realization principle
d. historical cost principle
Question 6 1.5 points Save
Which one of the following statements is false?
a. The inventory account is updated after every sale and after every merchandise purchase under the perpetual inventory system.
b. The inventory account is updated only at the end of the accounting period under the periodic inventory system.
c. A cost of goods sold account is updated after each sale of merchandise under the periodic inventory system.
d. A purchases account is used only under the periodic inventory system.
Question 7 1.5 points Save
Which one of the following is correct?
a. Inventory losses can be identified and controlled better under the perpetual system.
b. Inventory can only be sold at the end of an accounting period under the periodic system.
c. There is no difference in cost to implement a perpetual as compared to a periodic system.
D, The perpetual system eliminates the need for an annual inventory count
Question 8 1.5 points Save
At the year end inventory count, if goods in transit are shipped FOB destination, they should be included in the inventory count of
a. The seller
b.The buyer
c. The shipping company
d. Neither the buyer nor the seller
Question 9 1.5 points Save
Which method assigns the cost of the most recent items purchased to ending inventory?
a. Specific identification
b.Weighted average cost
c.FIFO
d. LIFO
Question 10 1.5 points Save
Which method assigns the cost of the most recent items purchased to cost of goods sold?
a. Specific identification
b. Weighted average cost
c. FIFO
d. LIFO
Question 11 1.5 points Save
For which type of inventory would a company most likely use the specific identification method?
a. Barbie dolls
b. Cartons of milk
c.Custom designed diamond rings
d. Gasoline in storage tanks at a gasoline station
Question 12 1.5 points Save
Which inventory costing method results in the highest inventory balance during a period of rising prices?
a. Weighted average cost
b. FIFO
c. LIFO
d. Both FIFO and LIFO result in the same inventory balance
Question 13 1.5 points Save
During a period of increasing cost prices, which inventory costing method will yield the lowest cost of goods sold?
a. Any method in which the company uses a periodic inventory system
b. FIFO
c. LIFO
d. Weighted Average Cost
Question 14 1.5 points Save
If the amount assigned to ending inventory is incorrect,
a. The balance sheet is affected, but the income statement is not
b. The income statement is affected, but the balance sheet is not
c. The balance sheet is affected, but cost of goods sold is not
d. Both the balance sheet and the income statement are affected
Question 15 1.5 points Save
When the market value of inventory items has declined below its cost, which method would be the most appropriate in complying with GAAP?
a.Gross Profit
b. LIFO
c. Lower of Cost or market
d. Retail
Question 16 1.5 points Save
In which one of the following situations is the gross profit method of estimating inventory value useful?
a. In determining the replacement cost of inventory for year-end financial statements
b. In calculating the amount of inventory destroyed in a fire when periodic inventory records also are destroyed.
c. In converting ending inventory valued at cost to retail for interim financial statements.
d. In estimating the amount of inventory that should be purchased for the upcoming year.
Question 17 1.5 points Save
How are cash equivalents reported or disclosed in the financial statements?
a.They appear only on the statement of cash flows
b.They are included with short-term investments under current assets on the balance sheet.
c.They are included with cash under current assets on the balance sheet.
d.They are disclosed only in a footnote to the balance sheet.
Question 18 1.5 points Save
Which one of the following is not a cash equivalent?
a. 30-day certificate of deposit
b. 60-day Corporate commercial
c. 90-day U. S. treasury bill
d. 180-day note issued by a local or state government
Question 19 1.5 points Save
Which one of the following procedures is not part of preparing a bank reconciliation of a checking account
a. Tracing deposits listed on the bank statement to the books to identify deposits in transit
b. Arranging canceled checks in numerical order and tracing them to the books to identify outstanding checks
c. Identifying items added on the bank statement which have not been recorded as cash receipts by the company
d. Preparing adjustments to reverse the transactions recorded for checks that are still outstanding
Question 20 1.5 points Save
Which one of the following items would be added to the balance per bank statement in a bank reconciliation?
a. Outstanding checks
b. Deposits in transit
c. Service charge
d. Interest on customer note
Question 21 1.5 points Save
Which one of the following items would be subtracted from the balance per bank statement in a bank reconciliation?
a. Outstanding checks
b. Deposit in transit
c. Service charges
d. Interest on customer note
Question 22 1.5 points Save
Which one of the following procedures is incorrect for setting up and maintaining a petty cash fund?
a. A check is prepared for a fixed amount; when the check is cashed, the money is entrusted to a petty cash custodian.
b. An entry is recorded to establish the fund and obtain the cash.
c. When appropriate documentation is presented, cash payments are made from the fund; the petty cash custodian retains the documentation.
d. When the petty cash fund is replenished, an entry is recorded to recognize an increase in the petty cash account.
Question 23 1.5 points Save
If a company erroneously records a $500 deposit as $400 in its books, which of the following must occur when reconciling the bank statement?
a. The company will have to increase the balance per the bank statement by $100.
b. The company will have to increase the balance per the books by $100.
c.The company will have to decrease the balance per bank statement by $100.
d. None of the above
Question 24 1.5 points Save
Which internal control procedure is followed when management authorizes the purchasing department to order goods and services for the company?
a. Segregation of duties
b. Safeguarding of assets and records
c. Independent verifications
d. Proper authorizations
Question 25 1.5 points Save
Which internal control procedure is followed when storage areas are secured with limited access?
a. Segregation duties
b. Safeguarding assets and records
c. Independent verifications
d. Proper authorizations
Question 26 1.5 points Save
Which internal control procedure is violated when the cashier at the checkout stand also records the daily receipts in the journal?
a. Segregation of duties
b. Independent review and appraisal
c. Independent verifications
d. Proper authorizations
Question 27
Zenephia Corp. invested cash in a 9-month certificate of deposit (CD) on October 1, 2010. If Zenephia has an accounting period which ends on December 31, 2010, when would it most likely recognize interest revenue from the CD?
a. On December 31, 2010 only
b. On July 1, 2011 only
c. Both December 31, 2010 and July 1, 2011
d. On October 1, 2010
Question 28 1.5 points Save
What are the effects on the accounting equation from the purchase of a short-term investment?
a.Assets and owners’ equity decrease
b. No effects–assets increase and decrease by the same amount
c. Assets and liabilities decrease
d.Owners’ equity decreases and liabilities increase
Question 29
Which one of the following is an accurate description of Allowance for Doubtful Accounts?
a. Contra Account
b.Liability Account
c. Revenue Account
d. Expense Account
Question 30
If a company uses the direct write-off method of accounting for bad debts,
a. It is applying the matching principle
b. It will record bad debt expense only when an account is determined to be uncollectible
c. It will reduce the accounts receivable account at the end of the accounting period for estimated uncollectible accounts
d. It will report accounts receivable in the balance sheet at their net realizable value
Question 31
Which one of the approaches for the allowance method of accounting for bad debts emphasizes the net realizable value of accounts receivable on the balance sheet?
a. The percentage of accounts receivable approach
b. The percentage of net credit sales approach
c.The direct write-off method
d.The uncollectible approach
Question 32 Beginning accounts receivable were $10,000. All sales were on account and totaled $700,000. Cash collected from customers totaled $650,000. Calculate the ending accounts receivable balance.
a. $40,000
b.$50,000
c. $60,000
d.$70,000
Question 33
The Allowance for Doubtful Accounts represents:
a. Cash set aside to make up for bad debt losses
b. The amount of uncollectible accounts written off to date
c. The difference between total sales made on credit and the amount collected from those credit sales
d. The difference between the face value of accounts receivable and the net realizable value of accounts receivable
Question 34
Victory Corporation
The data presented below is for Victory Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2010.
.Sales (100% on credit) $1,500,000
Sales returns 60,000
Accounts Receivable (December 31, 2010) 250,000
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts (Before adjustment at December 31, 2010) 3,000
Estimated amount of uncollectible accounts based on an aging analysis 31,000
Refer to Victory Corp. If Victory estimates its bad debts at 2% of net credit sales, what amount will be reported as bad debt expense for 2010?
a. $25,800
b. $27,000
c. $28,800
d. $30,000
Question 35
During 2010, the accounts receivable turnover rate for Stern Company increased from 10 to 14 times per year. Which one of the following statements is the most likely explanation for the change?
a. The company’s credit department has followed up with customers whose account balances are past due in order to generate quicker collections
b. The company has decreased sales to its most credit worthy customers
c. The company has increased the amount of time customers have to pay their accounts before they are past due
d. The company has extended credit to more risky customers in order to increase sales
Question 36
The party to a promissory note that agrees to repay money on the maturity date of the note is called the
a. Lender
b. Maker of the note
c. Payee of the note
d. Recipient of the note
Question 37
How will the payee of the promissory note record the note on its books?
A. The promissory note will be recorded as an asset
b.The promissory note will be recorded as a liability
c. The promissory note will be recorded as revenue
d.The promissory note will be recorded as an expense
Question 38
Discounting a note receivable
a. Requires using an account called discount on notes receivable
b. Is the process of lending money
c. Slows the collection process
d. Is the process of selling a promissory note
Question 39
Walnut Farm received a promissory note from a customer on March 1, 2010. The face amount of the note is $8,000; the terms are 90 days and 9% interest.
Refer to the Walnut Farm. What is the total amount of interest that Walnut Farm will receive when the note is paid?
a. $ 60
b. $ 90
c. $180
d. $720
Question 40 Whitecloud, Inc.
The data presented below is for Whitecloud, Inc. for 2010.
a.Credit sales during the year $2,100,000
b.Accounts receivable – December 31, 2010 295,000
c.Allowance for doubtful accounts – December 31, 2010 28,000
d.Bad debt expense for the year 17,000
Refer to Whitecloud, Inc. What amount will Whitecloud show on its year-end balance sheet for the net realizable value of its accounts receivable?
a. $295,000
b. $267,000
c. $250,000
d. $ 28,000
Question 41 1.5 points Save
Exhibit 8-1 Use the information concerning Lamory, Inc. to answer the questions that follow:
Lamory, Inc. purchased a crane at a cost of $80,000. The crane has an estimated residual value of $5,000 and an estimated life of 8 years, or 12,500 hours of operation. The crane was purchased on January 1, 2009 and was used 2,700 hours in 2009 and 2,600 hours in 2010.
Refer to Exhibit 8-1. What amount will Lamory, Inc. report as depreciation expense over the 8-year life of the equipment?
a. $60,000
b. $72,000
c. $75,000
d. $80,000
Question 42 1.5 points Save
Exhibit 8-1 Use the information concerning Lamory, Inc. to answer the questions that follow:
Lamory, Inc. purchased a crane at a cost of $80,000. The crane has an estimated residual value of $5,000 and an estimated life of 8 years, or 12,500 hours of operation. The crane was purchased on January 1, 2009 and was used 2,700 hours in 2009 and 2,600 hours in 2010.
Refer Exhibit 8-1. If Lamory uses the straight-line method, what is the book value at December 31, 2011?
a. $46,875
d. $51,875
c. $62,500
d. $67,500
Question 43 1.5 points Save
Which of the following accounts would not be reported in the Property, Plant, and Equipment section of a balance sheet?
a.Accumulated Depreciation–Buildings
b.Buildings
c. Depreciation Expense–Buildings
d. Land
Question 44 1.5 points Save
On the balance sheet, the cumulative amount of plant and equipment already expensed is reported in an account called
a. Accumulated Amortization
b.Accumulated Depreciation
c. Amortization Expense
d. Depreciation Expense
Question 45 1.5 points Save
Which of the following costs related to the purchase of production equipment incurred by SAB Company during 2009 would be considered a revenue expenditure?
a.Installation costs for equipment
b.Purchase price of the equipment less the cash discount
c. Repair and maintenance costs during the equipment’s first year of service
d. Transportation charges to deliver the equipment to SAB Company
Question 46 1.5 points Save
Current accounting standards indicate that the costs of intangible assets with an indefinite life, such as goodwill, should
a. not be amortized.
b. be reported on the statement of retained earnings in the year in which acquired.
c. be amortized over a reasonable period of time not to exceed 40 years.
d. be debited to an expense account entirely in the year in which acquired.
Question 47 1.5 points Save
Goodwill can be recorded as an asset when a(n)
a. business has above normal profitability compared to other businesses in its industry.
B.business can determine that it has created customer goodwill and name recognition.
c. offer is received to purchase the business at a price in excess of the value of the assets.
d. business is purchased and payment is made in excess if the value of the net assets.
Question 48 1.5 points Save
Which of the following sets of factors is needed to calculate depreciation on plant and equipment?
a. The asset’s acquisition cost, replacement cost, and its estimated residual value
b. The estimated residual value of the asset, its replacement cost, and its market value
c. The asset’s replacement cost, its estimated life, and its estimated residual value
d. The estimated life of the asset, its acquisition cost, and its estimated residual value
Question 49 1.5 points Save
If a company constructs an asset over a period of time and borrows money, the amount of interest incurred during construction on the borrowed money is
a.capitalized as part of the cost of the plant asset.
b.amortized over the construction period.
c. reported as interest expense on the income statement.
d. reported as depletion on the income statement.
Question 50 1.5 points Save
Research and development costs are
a. treated as an expense when incurred.
b. capitalized but not amortized.
c. capitalized and amortized over the periods that will probably benefit from the research and development.
d. included with the cost of the patent resulting from the research and development.
Question 51 1.5 points Save
Paul Gibbs bought a pub. The purchase price was $695,000. An appraiser provided the following appraisal values: land $320,000: building $370,000 and equipment $60,000. What cost should be allocated to the building?
a. $370,000
b. $695,000
c. $342,867
d. $399,281
Question 52 1.5 points Save
Cookeville Transportation Company sold an old truck on December 31, 2007, for $18,400 cash. The following data was available when the truck sold:
Acquisition cost $75,000
.Estimated residual value at time of acquisition 8,000
.Accumulated depreciation on December 31, 2007 after adjustment 53,600
When this transaction is recorded, it should include a
a. debit of $3,000 to the Loss on Disposal account
b. credit of $21,400 to the Truck account
c.credit of $3,000 to the Gain on Disposal account
d. credit of $5,000 to the Gain on Disposal account
Question 53 1.5 points Save
All of the following are intangible assets except
a. patents
b.goodwill
c.franchises
d. accounts receivable
Question 54 1.5 points Save
Exhibit 8-5 Use the information provided for the Pegleg Shrimp Company to answer the questions that follow.
On January 1, 2009, Pegleg Shrimp Company purchased a ship for $2,000,000. It has a ten-year useful life and a residual value of $50,000. The company uses the double-declining-balance method.
Refer to Exhibit 8-5. What was the depreciation expense for Pegleg Shrimp for the year ended December 31, 2009?
a. $ -0-
b. $195,000
c. $390,000
d. $400,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The most recent monthly income statement for Kennaman Stores is given below:
Total
Store I
Store II
Sales
$2,000,000
$1,200,000
$800,000
Less variable expenses
1,200,000
840,000
360,000
Contribution margin
800,000
360,000
440,000
Less traceable fixed expenses
400,000
220,000
180,000
Segment margin
400,000
140,000
260,000
Less common fixed expenses
300,000
180,000
120,000
Net operating income
$ 100,000
$( 40,000)
$140,000
Kennaman is considering closing Store I. If Store I is closed, one-fourth of its traceable fixed expenses would continue unchanged. Also, the closing of Store I would result in a 20% decrease in sales in Store II. (The decrease in sales would be the result of selling fewer units in store II, not due to reduced selling prices. In addition to sales, what other elements in the budget will be affected?) Kennaman allocates common fixed expenses on the basis of sales dollars.
Required:
Compute the overall increase or decrease in Kennaman’s net operating income if Store I is closed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The most recent monthly income statement for Kennaman Stores is given below:
Total
Store I
Store II
Sales
$2,000,000
$1,200,000
$800,000
Less variable expenses
1,200,000
840,000
360,000
Contribution margin
800,000
360,000
440,000
Less traceable fixed expenses
400,000
220,000
180,000
Segment margin
400,000
140,000
260,000
Less common fixed expenses
300,000
180,000
120,000
Net operating income
$ 100,000
$( 40,000)
$140,000
Kennaman is considering closing Store I. If Store I is closed, one-fourth of its traceable fixed expenses would continue unchanged. Also, the closing of Store I would result in a 20% decrease in sales in Store II. (The decrease in sales would be the result of selling fewer units in store II, not due to reduced selling prices. In addition to sales, what other elements in the budget will be affected?) Kennaman allocates common fixed expenses on the basis of sales dollars.
Required:
Compute the overall increase or decrease in Kennaman’s net operating income if Store I is closed.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Renfree Mines, Inc., owns the mining rights to a large tract of land in a mountainous area. The tract contains a mineral deposit that the company believes might be commercially attractive to mine and sell. An engineering and cost analysis has been made, and it is expected that the following cash flows would be associated with opening and operating a mine in the area:
Cost of equipment required $ 850,000
Annual net cash receipts $ 305,000*
Working capital required $ 225,000
Cost of road repairs in eight years $ 66,000
Salvage value of equipment in nine years $ 200,000
*Receipts from sales of ore, less out-of-pocket costs for salaries, utilities, insurance, and so forth.
The mineral deposit would be exhausted after nine years of mining. At that point, the working capital would be released for reinvestment elsewhere. The company’s required rate of return is 15%. (Ignore income taxes.)
Click here to view Exhibit 13B-1 and Exhibit 13B-2, to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.
Required:
a.
Determine the net present value of the proposed mining project. (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, intermediate and final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Net present value $
b. Should the project be accepted?
No?
Yes?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
REQUIREMENT #1:
During its first month of operation, the Parkview Landscaping Corporation, which specializes in residential landscaping,completed the following transactions:
July 1 Began business by making a deposit in a company bank account of $24,000, in exchange for 4,800 shares of $5 par value common stock.
July 1 Paid the premium on a one-year insurance policy, $2,400.
July 1 Paid the current month’s rent, $2,080.
July 3 Purchased landscaping equipment from Brookwood Company, $8,800. Paid $1,200 down and the balance was placed on account. Payments will be $400.00 per month for nineteen months. The first payment is due 8/1. Note: Use Accounts Payable for the Balance Due.
July 8 Purchased landscaping supplies from Lakeside Company on credit, $780.
July 12 Paid utility bill for July, $308.
July 16 Received cash for landscaping revenue for the first half of July, $2,724.
July 19 Made payment on account to Lakeside Company, $400.
July 31 Received cash for landscaping revenue for the last half of July, $2,620.
July 31 Declared and paid cash dividend of $1,600.
Prepare journal entries to record the July transactions in the General Journal below and a trial balance; adjusted trial balance
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Retained Earnings
2010 2009
R/E @ the beginning 407,000 61,000
Add net income 395,000 373,000
Total 802,000 434,000
Deduct Dividends
On preferred stock 3,000 3,000
On common stock 24,000 24,000
Total 27,000 27,000
R/E @ the End 775,000 407,000
Income Statements
2010 2009
GROSS sales 1,502,000 1,403,000
Returns & Allowances 2,000 3,000
NET sales 1,500,000 1,400,000
Cost of Goods sold 480,000 450,000
Gross Profit 1,020,000 950,000
Selling Expenses 300,000 275,000
Administrative Exp. 200,000 198,000
Total Op. Exp. 500,000 473,000
Income from Ops 520,000 477,000
Other Income 24,000 5,000
544,000 482,000
Interest expense 100,000 70,000
Income Before taxes 444,000 412,000
Income tax expense 49,000 39,000
Net Income 395,000 373,000
Assets
2010 2009
Current Assets:
Cash 200,000 100,000
Temp Investments 350,000 300,000
A/R 250,000 200,000
Inventories 200,000 100,000
Prepaid Exp. 103,000 23,000
Total current Assets 1,103,000 723,000
Long term Investments 250,000 250,000
PP&E(net) 1,000,000 975,000
Total assets 2,353,000 1,948,000
Liabilities
2010 2009
Current liabilities 278,000 241,000
Long-term Liabilities
Mortgage Note 6% 200,000
Bonds payable 9% 800,000 1,000,000
Total LT liabilities 1,000,000 1,000,000
Total liabilities 1,278,000 1,241,000
Stockholder’s Equity
2010 2009
Preferred $3 stock, $50 Par 100,000 100,000
Common Stock $5 Par 200,000 200,000
Retained Earnings 775,000 407,000
Total Stockholder’s equity 1,075,000 707,000
Total Liabilities & Stockholders equity 2,353,000 1,948,000
*The stock is selling at $50 a share
1. Working Capital for year end 2010 ____________________
2.Current Ratio for year end 2010____________________
3.Quick ratio for year end 2010__________________
4. A/R turnover for 2010____________________
5. Days to collect average A/R for 2010 _____________
6. Inventory turnover for 2010___________________
7. Days to sell Average inventory for 2010___________________
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Reynolds Corp is a manufacturing company of kayaks. On June 1, 2011 the company’s ledger contains the following data:
Raw Material Inventory $18,000
Work in Process Inventory $7,320
Manufacturing Overhead Incurred $1,500
Job Cost Sheet
Customer Dir Material Dir Lab Mfg Ovh
Dicks $1,500 $1,200 $840
Sports Authority $1,200 $720 $504
Bass Pro shop $540 $480 $336
$3,240 $2,400 $1,680
During the month of June the following costs were incurred: (a) raw materials purchased on account $2,400,
(b) labor paid $4,560, (c) manufacturing overhead paid $840.
A summary of materials requisition slips and time tickets for the month of June are:
Customer Mat Req Time Ticket
Dicks $300 $240
Sports Authority $360 $600
Bass Pro Shop $1,380 $780
Sears $1,140 $1,740
$3,180 $3,360
General Use $900 $1,200
$4,080 $4,560
Overhead was charged to jobs on the basis of $0.40 per dollar of direct labor cost. The kayaks for Dicks, Sports Authority and Bass Pro Shop were completed during June. The jobs for Dicks and Bass Pro Shop were sold on account for $11,100 and 8,300 respectively.
1. Prepare journal entries for the June transactions: (a) for purchase of raw materials, factory labor costs incurred, and manufacturing overhead cost incurred, (b) assignment of raw material, labor and overhead to production, (c) completion of jobs and sale of goods.
2. Post the entries to Work in process Inventory.
3. Prepare the job cost sheets for all jobs worked during the month.
4. Prepare the journal entries for the sales to Dicks and Bass Pro Shop.
5. What is the balance of the Finished Goods Inventory? What is the total balance of the Work in Process inventory?
6. What is the amount of over or under applied overhead?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Roberts Company manufactures one product. On December 31, 2004, Roberts adopted the dollar-value LIFO inventory method. The inventory on that date using the dollar-value LIFO inventory method was $200,000. Inventory data are as follows:
Inventory at Price index
Year year-end prices (base year 2004)
2005 $205,000 1.05
2006 240,000 1.10
2007 270,000 1.23
Instructions
Compute the inventory at December 31, 2005, 2006, & 2007 using the dollar-value LIFO method for each year. (round all computations to the nearest dollar)
Part B
Martin Co. inadvertently overstates its 2005 ending inventory by $2,000 and understates its 2006 ending inventory by $5,000. Determine the effect of this error on the following accounts over the following period. State whether the account is overstated, understated or correct and by how much if over- or understated.
1. Cost of goods sold in 2005 Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦.
2. Retained earnings at end of 2005 Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦.
3. Net income in 2006 Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦
4. Cost of goods sold in 2007 Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦.
5. Retained Earnings at end of 2007 Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rodman Company has the following balances as of December 31, 20×7.
Materials inventory $ 15 000 dr.
Work in process inventory 35,200 dr.
Finished goods inventory 50,100 dr.
Manufacturing overhead (after allocation) 3,500 dr.
Cost of goods sold 74,500 dr.
Additional information is as follows:
Cost of materials purchased during 20X7 $ 41,000
Cost of direct materials requisitioned in 20×7 47,000
Cost of indirect materials requisitioned in 20X7 8,000
Cost of goods completed in 20X7 105,000
Manufacturing overhead allocated (120% of direct labor) 51,000
Required:
a) January 1, 20X7, materials inventory
b) January 1, 20×7, work in process inventory
c) January 1, 20X7, finished goods inventory
d) Actual manufacturing overhead incurred
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rodman Company has the following balances as of December 31, 20×7.
Materials inventory $ 15 000 dr.
Work in process inventory 35,200 dr.
Finished goods inventory 50,100 dr.
Manufacturing overhead (after allocation) 3,500 dr.
Cost of goods sold 74,500 dr.
Additional information is as follows:
Cost of materials purchased during 20X7 $ 41,000 ‘
Cost of direct materials requisitioned in 20×7 47,000
Cost of indirect materials requisitioned in 20X7 8,000
Cost of goods completed in 20X7 105,000 .
Manufacturing overhead allocated (l20% of direct labor) 51,000 1
Required:
a) January 1, 20X7, materials inventory
b) January 1, 20×7, work in process inventory
c) January 1, 20X7, finished goods inventory
d) Actual manufacturing overhead incurred
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Roland Company operates a small factory in which it manufactures two products: A and B. Production and sales result for last year were as follow:
A B
Units sold 8,000 20,000
Selling price per unit 65 52
Variable costs per unit 35 30
Fixed costs per unit 15 15
For purposes of simplicity, the firm allocates total fixed costs over the total number of units of A and B produced and sold.
The research department has developed a new product (C) as a replacement for product B. Market studies show that Roland Company could sell 11,000 units of C next year at a price of $80, the variable costs per unit of C are $29. The introduction of product C will lead to a 10% increase in demand for product A and discontinuation of product B. If the company does not introduce the new product, it expects next year’s result to be the same as last year’s.
Instructions
Should Roland Company introduce product C next year? Explain why or why not. Show calculations to support your decision.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ron Stein Company recently signed a lease for a new office building, for a lease period of 10 years. Under the lease agreement, a security deposit of $12,000 is made, with the deposit to be returned at the expiration of the lease, with interest compounded at 10% per year. What amount will the company receive at the time the lease expires? (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10,250.20.)
$
(b) Kate Greenway Corporation, having recently issued a $20 million, 15-year bond issue, is committed to make annual sinking fund deposits of $620,000. The deposits are made on the last day of each year and yield a return of 10%. Will the fund at the end of 15 years be sufficient to retire the bonds? If not, what will the deficiency be? (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 100,250.20.)
$
(c) Under the terms of his salary agreement, president Juan Rivera has an option of receiving either an immediate bonus of $40,000, or a deferred bonus of $75,000 payable in 10 years. Ignoring tax considerations, and assuming a relevant interest rate of 8%, which form of settlement should Rivera accept?
Accept bonus nowAccept deferred bonus in 10 years
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sales revenue
800,000
600,000
Total expenses
400,000
200,000
Cash
90,000
25,000
Accounts receivable
120,000
75,000
Property plant and equipment, net
250,000
225,000
Accounts payable
95,000
60,000
Salaries payable
75,000
35,000
Long term liabilities
150,000
75,000
Common shares outstanding, beginning of year
50,000
25,000
Common shares outstanding, end of year
100,000
40,000
No dividends were paid during 2008.
Compute the following for both companies:
1. Working capital
2. Current ratio
3. Debt to assets ratio
4 Earnings per share
5. Which company appears more liquid? (Name a ratio used to determine)
6. Which company appears more solvent? (Name a ratio used to determine.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
ScooterSport Inc. manufactures and sells two styles of scooter, Mountain Cat and City Dawg. These scooters are sold in two regions, the Colorado and Northern California region. Information about the two scooters is as follows:??
The sales unit volume for the territories and products for the period is as follows:??
Mountain Cat City Dawg
sales price $250 $150
Variable Cost of goods sold per unit 92 75
Manufacturing margin per unit $158 $ 75
Variable selling expenses per unit 104 30
Contribution margin per unit $ 54 $ 45
The sales unit volume for the territories and products for the period is as follows:
Colorado North California
Mountain Cat 6,000 3,000
City Dawg 0 3,000
a. Prepare a contribution margin by sales territory report. Round the contribution margin ratio for each product to two decimal places if required. Enter all amounts as positive numbers.
SCOOTERSPORT INC.
Contribution Margin by Territory
Colorado Northern California
Sales $ $
Variable cost of goods sold
Manufacturing margin $ $
Variable selling expenses
Contribution margin $ $
Contribution margin ratio (as a percent) % %
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shaq Security, which began operations in 2011, invests in long-term available-for-sale securities. Following is a series of transactions and events determining its long-term investment activity.
2011
Jan. 20 Purchased 1,500 shares of Johnson & Johnson at $20.00 per share plus a $240 commission.
Feb. 9 Purchased 1,100 shares of Sony at $46.20 per share plus a $245 commission.
June 12 Purchased 1,600 shares of Mattel at $27 per share plus an $195 commission.
Dec. 31
Per share fair values for stocks in the portfolio are Johnson & Johnson, $21.00; Mattel, $25.50; Sony, $38.
2012
Apr. 15 Sold 1,500 shares of Johnson & Johnson at $23.00 per share less a $685 commission.
July 5 Sold 1,600 shares of Mattel at $25.50 per share less a $491 commission.
July 22 Purchased 620 shares of Sara Lee at $22.50 per share plus a $470 commission.
Aug. 19 Purchased 900 shares of Eastman Kodak at $17 per share plus a $198 commission.
Dec. 31
Per share fair values for stocks in the portfolio are: Kodak, $19.25; Sara Lee, $20.00; Sony, $35.00.
2013
Feb. 27 Purchased 2,600 shares of Microsoft at $69 per share plus a $525 commission.
June 21 Sold 1,100 shares of Sony at $48.00 per share less a $2,640 commission.
June 30 Purchased 1,500 shares of Black & Decker at $35.00 per share plus a $435 commission.
Aug. 3 Sold 620 shares of Sara Lee at $31.25 per share less a $435 commission.
Nov. 1 Sold 900 shares of Eastman Kodak at $22.75 per share less a $2,309 commission.
Dec. 31 Per share fair values for stocks in the portfolio are: Black & Decker, $38.00; Microsoft, $71.00.
1.
Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events and any year-end fair value adjustments to the portfolio of long-term available-for-sale securities.
2.
Prepare a table that summarizes the (a) total cost, (b) total fair value adjustment, and (c) total fair value of the portfolio of long-term available-for-sale securities at each year-end.
3.
Prepare a table that summarizes (a) the realized gains and losses and (b) the unrealized gains or losses for the portfolio of long-term available-for-sale securities at each year-end. …..
* please answer it with the same numbers ( Thank you )
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sharpens Inc. produces knife sets for use in commercial kitchens. They sell them for $400 each. Selected data for the company’s operations last year follow:
Units in beginning inventory 0
Units produced 3,000
Units sold 2,500
Units in ending inventory 500
Variable costs per unit:
Direct materials $120
Direct labor 80
Variable manufacturing overhead 40
Variable selling and administrative 20
Fixed costs:
Fixed manufacturing overhead $300,000
Fixed selling and administrative $200,000
a. Assume that the company uses variable costing, compute the unit cost for one knife set. Show computations.
b. Assuming that the company uses absorptions costing, compute the unit cost for the one knife set. Show computations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sheldon Corp. reports regular taxable income of $150,000 in the current year. It’s regular tax is $41,750. Sheldon takes into account the following facts when calculating the $150,000 amount.
* Sheldon deducts $90,000 of MACRS depreciation for regular tax purposes. Depreciation for AMT purposes. Depreciation for AMT purposes is $60,000.
* Sheldon sells equipment for $28,000. THe equipment regular tax basis at the time of sake is $16,000, and its AMT basis is $25,000.
* Sheldons ACE is $340,000.
Sheldon is NOT a small corporation exempt from the AMT and has NO AMT adjustment for the US Production Activities deduction.
1. What is Sheldons AMT?
2. What minimum tax credit does Sheldon obtain in the current year? In what years can Sheldon use it?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Shin Company sells one product. Presented below is information
for January for Shin Company.
Jan. 1 Inventory 300 units at $10 each
4 Sale 100 units at $16 each
5 Sale 140 units at $16 each
11 Purchase 450 units at $12 each
13 Sale 360 units at $17.50 each
20 Purchase 480 units at $14 each
27 Sale 300 units at $18 each
1. Assume Shin uses a periodic system and FIFO. Use the information above to determine the ending inventory and cost of goods sold as of January 31st.
2. Assume Shin uses a periodic system and LIFO. Use the information above to determine the ending inventory and cost of goods sold as of January 31st.
3. Assume Shin uses a perpetual system and the average cost assumption (moving average). Use the information above to determine the ending inventory and cost of goods sold as of January 31st.
4. Assume Shin uses a perpetual system and LIFO. Use the information above to determine the ending inventory and cost of goods sold as of January 31st.
5. If you were to recalculate Q.1 using a perpetual system rather than the stated periodic system, indicate whether you feel that cost of goods sold for the period will be higher, lower, or the same as you calculated for Q.1.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Sidney Smith, an attorney, paid $30,000 during the year for his children to attend Jewish schools. On his
tax return, Mr. Smith deducted $18,000, based on the argument that 60% of his children’s instruction
was religious and that payments related to that type of instruction constituted contributions to the
temple for conducting its religious functions. He did not attempt to deduct the 40% of the tuition that
was related to secular education. Further, Smith argued that the IRS had allowed members of the
Church of Scientology to deduct the portion of fees paid to the church that were related to religious and
education, and that disallowance of his deduction would constitute unequal application of the law.
Write a letter, including proper citations to relevant authority, to Mr. Smith explaining whether the
$18,000 is deductible or nondeductible. He lives at 1142 Southshore Avenue, Tampa, Florida 33192.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 2
Two officers of Corporation B disguised dividends as commissions and thus lowered the income tax on Corporation B’s corporate income tax return. Their objective was to reduce the possibility that of governmental regulation for having “windfall profits”; although their intent was not to evade taxes, they were aware that characterizing dividends as “commissions” would reduce taxable income. Officer 1 changed the accounting records so that the dividends were reclassified as commissions and took the records to the tax preparer. Officer 2 did nothing except encourage Officer 1 to do what he did. Can Officer 2 be charged with any wrongdoing since he didn’t commit an overt act?
Required: For the above situation, provide the code sections under Title 26 and Title 18 that you believe are applicable and give brief reasons for each charge you recommend. If you believe a section is appropriate but do not believe the taxpayer is likely to be found guilty under that section, please briefly state the reason(s) you believe the taxpayer is unlikely to be found guilty. (Please avoid using a “scattergun” approach, i.e., listing sections in hopes that they will “stick”.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 4.9. High Low, Profit Equation [Lo 2] Rhetorix, Inc. produces stereo speakers. Each unit (a pair of speakers) sells for $900. Below is information on production/sales and costs for 2010.
Production and sales in unit productn costs Selling and Admin Costs
January 105 $88,860 $23,570
February 117 $97,600 $25,200
March 95 $83,007 $22,495
April 106 $89,600 $23,720
May 115 $96,200 $24,950
June 125 $103,500 $26,250
July 128 $105,670 $26,690
August 132 $108,550 $27,200
September 138 $112,978 $28,030
October 126 $104,200 $26,400
November 124 $102,750 $26,150
December 108 $91,050 $23,900
Total 1421 $1,183,965 $304,645
Average cost per unit $83,319,141 $21,438,776
“B. The company estimates that production and sales in 2011 will be 1,550 units. Based on this estimate, forecast income before taxes for 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 5-2A Preparing journal entries for merchandising activities-perpetual system L.O. P1, P2
July 1
Purchased merchandise from Black Company for $6,000 under credit terms of 1/15, n/30, FOB shipping point, invoice dated July 1.
2
Sold merchandise to Coke Co. for $800 under credit terms of 2/10, n/60, FOB shipping point, invoice dated July 2. The merchandise had cost $500.
3
Paid $100 cash for freight charges on the purchase of July 1.
8 Sold merchandise that had cost $1,200 for $1,600 cash.
9
Purchased merchandise from Lane Co. for $2,300 under credit terms of 2/15, n/60, FOB destination, invoice dated July 9.
11
Received a $200 credit memorandum from Lane Co. for the return of part of the merchandise purchased on July 9.
12
Received the balance due from Coke Co. for the invoice dated July 2, net of the discount.
16
Paid the balance due to Black Company within the discount period.
19
Sold merchandise that cost $900 to AKP Co. for $1,250 under credit terms of 2/15, n/60, FOB shipping point, invoice dated July 19.
21
Issued a $150 credit memorandum to AKP Co. for an allowance on goods sold on July 19.
24
Paid Lane Co. the balance due after deducting the discount.
30
Received the balance due from AKP Co. for the invoice dated July 19, net of discount.
31
Sold merchandise that cost $3,200 to Coke Co. for $5,000 under credit terms of 2/10, n/60, FOB shipping point, invoice dated July 31.
Prepare journal entries to record the above merchandising transactions of Bask Company, which applies the perpetual inventory system. (Identify each receivable and payable; for example, record the purchase on July 1 in Accounts Payable”Black.) (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 9-5 Warranties
Bombeck Company sells a product for $1500. When the customer buys it, Bombeck provides a one-year warranty Bombeck sold 120 products during 2010. Based on analysis of past warranty records, Bombeck estimates that repairs will average 3% of total sales.
Required:
1. Prepare a journal entry to record the estimated liability.
2. Assume that during 2010, products under warranty must be repaired using repair parts from inventory costing 4950. Prepare the journal entry to record the repairs of products.
Problem 9-10 Contingent Liabilities
Several independent items are listed for which the outcome of events is unknown at year end.
a. A company offers a two year warranty on sales of new computers. It believes that 4% of the computers will require repairs.
b. A company is involved in a trademark infringement suit. The company’s legal experts believe that an award of $500,000 in the company’s favor will be made.
c. A company is involved in an environmental cleanup lawsuit. The company’s legal counsel believes that the outcome may be unfavorable but has not been able to estimate the costs of the possible loss.
d. A soap manufacturer has included a coupon offer in the Sunday newspaper supplements. The manufacturer estimates that 25% of the 50c coupons will be redeemed.
e. A company has been sued by the federal government for price fixing. The company’s legal counsel believes that there will be an unfavorable verdict and has made an estimate of the probable loss.
Required:
1. Identify which of the items (a) through (e) should be recorded at year-end
2. Identify which of the items (a) through (e) should not be recorded but should be disclosed in the year-end financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem P1-1 Budgets in Managerial Accounting
Santiago’s Salsa is in the process of preparing a production cost budget for May. Actual costs in April were:
Santiago’s Salsa
Production Cost Budget
April 2011
Production – Jars of salsa $25,000
Ingredient cost (variable) $20,000
Labor cost (variable) $12,000
Rent (fixed) $5,000
Depreciation (fixed) $6,000
Other (fixed) $1,000
Total $44,000
Required:
Part a: Using this information, prepare a budget for May. Assume that production will increase to 30,000 jars of salsa, reflecting an anticipated sales increase related to a new marketing campaign.
Part b.1: Does the budget suggest that additional workers are needed? Suppose the wage rate is $20 per hour. How many additional labor hours are needed in May?
Part b.2: What would happen if management did not anticipate the need for additional labor in May? Narrative answer:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem P1-3 Budgets in Managerial Accounting
Matthew Gabon, the sales manager Office Furniture Solutions, prepared the following budget for 2011:
Sales Department
Budgeted Costs, 2011 (Assuming Sales of $11,000,000)
Salaries $400,000 Fixed
Commissions $150,000 Variable
Advertising $75,000 Fixed
Charge for Office Space $3,000 Fixed
Office Supplied & Forms $2,000 Variable
Total $630,000
After he submitted his budget, the president of Office Furniture Solutions reviewed it and recommended that advertising be increased to $100,000. Further she wanted Matthew to assume a sales level of $11,000,000. The level of sales is to be achieved without adding to the sales force.
Matthew’s sales group occupies approximately 250 square feet of office space out of total administrative office space of 20,000 square feet. The $3,000 space charge in Matthew’s budget is his share (allocated based on relative square feet) of the company’s total cost of rent, utilities, and janitorial costs for the administrative office building.
Provide a revised budget consistent with the president’s recommendation.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem P1-5 Performance Reports
At the end of 2011, Cyril Fedako, CFO for Fedako Products, received a report comparing budgeted and actual production costs for the company’s plant in Forest Lake, Minnesota:
Units 60,000
Original Budget Actual Costs Actual – Original
Material (variable) $3,200,000 $3,500,000 $300,000
Direct labor (variable) $2,300,000 $2,500,000 $200,000
Supervisory salaries (fixed) $475,000 $500,000 $25,000
Utilities (variable) $125,000 $135,000 $10,000
Machine maintenance (fixed) $350,000 $380,000 $30,000
Depreciation of building (fixed) $90,000 $90,000 $0
Depreciation of equipment (fixed) $250,000 $255,000 $5,000
Janitorial (fixed) $220,000 $235,000 $15,000
Total $7,010,000 $7,595,000 $585,000
His first thought was that costs must be out of control since actual costs exceed the budget by $ 585,000. However, he quickly recalled that the budget was set assuming a production level of 60,000 units. The Forest Lake plant actually produced 65,000 units in 2011.
a. Given that production was greater than planned, should Cyril expect that all actual costs will be greater than budgeted? Which costs would you expect to increase, and which costs would you expect to remain relatively constant?
b. Cyril is extremely busy” the company has six other plants. Therefore, he cannot spend time investigating every departure from the budget. With this in mind, which cost( s) should Cyril concentrate on in his investigation of budget differences?
Cyril should only investigate significant departures from the budget. Only three of the differences are more than 5 percent of the revised budget amounts. Assuming he defines differences in excess of 5 percent to be significant, Cyril should investigate supervisory salaries, machine maintenance, and janitorial costs.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have two product lines, Basic and Premium. You currently sell 700 units of Basic at a price of $25/unit, and 350 units of Premium at a price of $50/unit. Basic requires $2.5 of direct materials per unit and $5 of direct labor per unit. Premium requires $5 of direct materials per unit and $15 of direct labor per unit. There is no variable overhead, for simplicity. The total fixed costs (shared by Basic and Premium) are $17,500.
Required:
a) allocate the shared fixed costs ($17,500) among Basic and Premium, using direct labor dollars as the allocation basis (hint: notice that the direct labor numbers above are per unit. To do the allocation, you will have to compute the total amounts of direct labor $ used by each product line).
allocation rate = $___________________ per DL$
FC allocated to Basic = $__________________ (total, not per unit)
FC allocated to Premium = $_________________ (total, not per unit)
b) using the allocated costs from (a), compute the profit margin for each product line.
profit margin for Basic = $_____________________
profit margin for Premium = $__________________
Additional information for c)-d) below: You are thinking of changing the product mix to 350 units of Basic, 700 units of Premium. This is a long-term change.
c) Estimate the fixed costs (capacity costs) for the new product mix. Use direct labor $ as the allocation basis.
(hint: Compute the allocation rate using the original product mix. After that, multiply by the new amounts of the cost driver.)
allocation rate = $___________________ per DL$
FC allocated to Basic = $_____________
FC allocated to Premium = $__________
d) Compute the profit margin for Basic and Premium for the new product mix.
profit margin for Basic = $______________________
profit margin for Premium = $___________________
Is it a good idea to change the product mix? (enter 1=yes, 2=no) _________________
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A prominent law firm that has more than 30 offices located worldwide is considering going to a cloud service for all of its document desktop applications, storage and information management needs. Desktops will not possess any applications or stored files and all mobile activity will require web access or use of a jump drive. The firm partners expect client billing revenue will increase by 35% while costs will be reduced by 20%. Identify the revenue and costs considerations and other relevant issues that should be considered. What do you reccommend the firm do with relation to the cloud. Discuss quantitative/qualitative aspects. (This is a make or buy decision). Identify any tools such as regression analysis or CVP that will support the decision making process related to the question. If needed, use calculations or lists i.e. differential/avoidable costs as required for each question. Must list differential/avoidable costs! Please be as detailed and lengthy as possible.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Q. Cindy CPA completed field work on September 23, 2008, and issued the following report to the directors of The CMA Corporation:
To the Directors of The CMA Corporation:
We have audited the balance sheet of The CMA Corporation as of July 31, 2008 and the related statements of income and retained earnings. In accordance with your instructions, a complete audit was conducted.
We conducted our audit in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. We believe that our audit was appropriate in the circumstances.
In many respects, this was an unusual year for The CMA Corporation. The weakening of the economy in the early part of the year and the strike of plant employees in the summer of 2008 led to a decline in sales and net income. After making several tests of sales records, nothing came to our attention that would indicate that sales have not been properly recorded.
In our opinion, with the explanation given above and the exception of some minor errors that are considered immaterial, the aforementioned financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of The CMA Corporation at July 31, 2008, and the results of its operations for the year then ended, in conformity with pronouncements of the Financial Accounting Standards Board.
Cindy CPA, CPA
September 23, 2008
Required: List and explain deficiencies and omissions in Cindy’s report. Do not discuss the type of opinion (unqualified, qualified, adverse, or disclaimer). Organize your answer by paragraph (introductory, scope, explanatory, and opinion).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
QAssume you are considering a client’s controls over purchases and cash disbursements. System documentation was accomplished through flowcharts and narratives and, in conA?¬junction with a transaction walkthrough, revealed the following potential deficiencies:
a. Costs of carrying inventory have increased significantly since the prior year.
b. Purchase prices are sometimes unusually high or fluctuate significantly from month to month.
c. Purchase discounts are frequently not taken.
d. During lunch, the controller commented to you that on two occasions during the year duplicate payments had been made for a single transaction.
e. Cash disbursements records do not always reconcile with general ledger control accounts.
Required: For each potential deficiency, indicate a control or controls that manageA?¬ment could implement to reduce the likelihood of errors or frauds
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Q.Jerry Jacks, engagement partner for the December 31, 2007, CMA, Ine., financial statement audit, is aware that events and transactions that took place after December 31, 2007 (but before he issues his report dated February 28, 2008), may affect the company’s financial statements. The following material events or transactions have come to Hirsch’s attention.
1. On January 3, 2008, CMA, Inc., received a shipment of raw materials from Canada. The materials had been ordered in October 2007, and shipped FOB shipping point in November 2007.
2. On January 15, 2007, the company settled and paid a personal injury claim of a forA?¬mer employee as the result of an accident that occurred in March 2006. The company had not previously recorded a liability for the claim.
3. On January 25,2008, the company agreed to purchase for cash the outstanding stock of Broward Co. The acquisition is likely to double the sales volume of CMA, Inc.
4. On February 1, 2008, a plant owned by CMA, Inc., was damaged by a flood, reA?¬sulting in an uninsured loss of inventory.
5. On February 5, 2008, CMA, Inc., issued and sold to the general public $2,000,000 in convertible bonds.
Required: For each of the events or transactions, discuss audit procedures that should have brought the item to the auditor’s attention, and the form of (and reasons for) discloA?¬sure in the financial statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This question from book : accounting principles 9th for Jerry J. Weygandt, Paul D. Kimmel, Donald E. Kieso
Chapter 3
E3-4 Emeril Corporation encounters the following situations:
1. Emeril collects $1,000 from a customer in 2010 for services to be performed in 2011.
2. Emeril incurs utility expense which is not yet paid in cash or recorded.
3. Emeril’s employees worked 3 days in 2010, but will not be paid until 2011.
4. Emeril earned service revenue but has not yet received cash or recorded the transaction.
5. Emeril paid $2,000 rent on December 1 for the 4 months starting December 1.
6. Emeril received cash for future services and recorded a liability until the revenue was
earned.
7. Emeril performed consulting services for a client in December 2010. On December 31, it
billed the client $1,200.
8. Emeril paid cash for an expense and recorded an asset until the item was used up.
9. Emeril purchased $900 of supplies in 2010; at year-end, $400 of supplies remain unused.
10. Emeril purchased equipment on January 1, 2010; the equipment will be used for 5 years.
11. Emeril borrowed $10,000 on October 1, 2010, signing an 8% one-year note payable.
Instructions
Identify what type of adjusting entry (prepaid expense, unearned revenue, accrued expense, accrued
revenue) is needed in each situation, at December 31, 2010.
Please help with this question
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rantzow-Lear Company buys and sells securities expecting to earn profits on short-term differences in price. The company’s fiscal year ends on December 31. The following selected transactions relating to Rantzow-Lear’s trading account occurred during December 2011 and the first week of 2012.
2011
Dec.17 – purchaused 100,000 Grocer’s Supply Corporation preferred shares
Dec. 28 – received cash dividends of $2,000 from the grocer’s supply corporation preferred shares
Dec. 31 – recorded any necessary adjusting entry relating to the Grocers’s Supply Corporationprefferrd shares. The market price of the stock was $4 per share.
2012
Jan. 5- sold the grocer’s supply corporation preferred shares for $395,000.
Required: 1. Prepare the appropriate journal entry for each transaction
2. Inficate any amounts that Rantzow-Lear Company would report in its 2011 balance sheet and income statement as a result of this investment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Rapache Clothiers is a small company that manufactures tall-men’s suits. The company has used a standard cost system. In May 2012, 11,200 suits were produced. The following standard and actual cost data applied to the month of May when normal capacity was 14,000 direct labor hours. All materials purchased were used.
Cost Element
Standard (per unit)
Actual
Direct materials 8 yards at $4.30 per yard $371,050 for 90,500 yards
($4.10 per yard)
Direct labor 1.2 hours at $13.50 per hour $201,630 for 14,300 hours
($14.10 per hour)
Overhead 1.2 hours at $6.00 per hour $49,000 fixed overhead
(fixed $3.50; variable $2.50) $37,000 variable overhead
Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. At normal capacity, budgeted fixed overhead costs were $49,000, and budgeted variable overhead was $35,000.
Instructions
Compute the total, price, and quantity variances for (1) materials and (2) labor, and (3) the total variance for manufacturing overhead.
Total materials variance $ UnfavorableFavorable
Materials price variance $ FavorableUnfavorable
Materials quantity variance $ UnfavorableFavorable
Total labor variance $ UnfavorableFavorable
Labor price variance $ UnfavorableFavorable
Labor quantity variance $ UnfavorableFavorable
Total overhead variance $ FavorableUnfavorable
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ravena Labs., Inc. makes a single product which has the following standards:
Direct Materials 2.5 ounces at $20 per ounce
Direct Labor 1.4 hours at $12.50 per hour
Var. Manuf. Overhead 1.4 hours at ? per hour
Variable Manuf. Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. The following data are available for October:
3750 units of compound were produced during the month.
There were no beginning direct materials inventory
The ending direct materials inventory was 2000 ounces
Direct materials purchased: 12000 ounces for $225,000
Direct labor hours worked: 5600 hours at a cost of $67,200
Variable Manufacturing Overhead costs incurred amounted to $18,200
Variable manufacturing overhead applied to products: $18,375
The variable overhead spending variance for October is:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ravena Labs., Inc. makes a single product which has the following standards:
Direct Materials 2.5 ounces at $20 per ounce
Direct Labor 1.4 hours at $12.50 per hour
Variable Manufacturing Overhead 1.4 hours at ? per hour
Variable manufacturing overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. The following data are available for October:
3750 units of compound were produced during the month.
There was no beginning direct materials inventory
The ending direct materials inventory was 2000 ounces
Direct materials purchased: 12000 ounces for $225,000
Direct labor hours worked: 5600 hours at a cost of $67,200
Variable manufacturing overhead costs incurred amounted to $18200
Variable manufacturing overhead applied to products: $18,375
The variable overhead efficiency variance for October is:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ravena Labs., Inc. makes a single product which has the following standards:
Direct Materials 2.5 ounces at $20 per ounce
Direct Labor 1.4 hours at $12.50 per hour
Var. Manuf. Overhead 1.4 hours at ? per hour
Variable Manuf. Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. The following data are available for October:
3750 units of compound were produced during the month.
There were no beginning direct materials inventory
The ending direct materials inventory was 2000 ounces
Direct materials purchased: 12000 ounces for $225,000
Direct labor hours worked: 5600 hours at a cost of $67,200
Variable Manufacturing Overhead costs incurred amounted to $18,200
Variable manufacturing overhead applied to products: $18,375
The variable overhead spending variance for October is:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ravena Labs., Inc. makes a single product which has the following standards:
Direct Materials 2.5 ounces at $20 per ounce
Direct Labor 1.4 hours at $12.50 per hour
Var. Manuf. Overhead 1.4 hours at ? per hour
Variable Manuf. Overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. The following data are available for October:
3750 units of compound were produced during the month.
There were no beginning direct materials inventory
The ending direct materials inventory was 2000 ounces
Direct materials purchased: 12000 ounces for $225,000
Direct labor hours worked: 5600 hours at a cost of $67,200
Variable Manufacturing Overhead costs incurred amounted to $18,200
Variable manufacturing overhead applied to products: $18,375
The variable overhead spending variance for October is:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ravena Labs., Inc makes a single product which has the following standards:
Direct materials 2.5 ounces at $20 per ounce
Direct labor 1.4 hours at $12.50 per hour
Var. manufacturing overhead 1.4 hours at ? per hour
Variable manufacturing overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor hours. The following data are available for October:
3750 units of compound were produced during the month
There was no beginning direct materials inventory
The ending direct materials inventory was 2000 ounces
Direct materials purchased: 12000 ounces for $225000
Direct labor hours worked: 5,600 hours at a cost of $67,200
Variable manufacturing overhead costs incurred amounted to $18,200
Variable manufacturing overhead applied to products: $18375
The direct materials quantity variance for October is:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Pattia Winery is one of the finest wineries in the country. One of its famous products is a red wine called Old Vines. Recently, management has become concerned about the increasing cost of making Old Vines and needs to determine if the current selling price of $10 per bottle is adequate. The winery wants to achieve a 25 percent gross profit on the sale of each bottle. The following information is given to you for analysis:
Unit cost per bottle
Materials $3.5
Labor $2.3
Overhead $3.3
Batch size 10,550
Cost
Direct Material
Olen grapes 22,155
Chancellor grape 9,495
Bottles 5,275
Total direct materials costs $36,925
Direct Labor
Pickers 2,110
Crusher 422
Processor 8,440
Bottler 13,293
Total direct labor costs $24,265
Overhead
Deprec. Equip 2,743
Deprec. build 5,275
Utilities 1,055
Indirect labor 6,330
Supervison 7,385
Supplies 9,917
Repairs 1,477
Misc 633
Total overhead cost $34,815
Total Production cost $96,005
Compute the prime costs per unit and the conversion costs per unit. Round your answer to two decimal places. If an amount box does not require an entry, leave it blank.
Prime Costs Conversion Costs
Direct materials $ $
Direct labor $ $
Overhead $ $
Totals $ $
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Peggy’s Ribbon World makes award rosettes. Following is information about the company:
Variable cost per rosette———–$1.11
Sales price per rosette————–2.90
Total fixed costs per month——–879.00
1: Suppose Peggy’s would like to generate a profit of $750. Determine how many rosettes it must sell to achieve this target profit. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to next whole number.)
Target units:__________
2: If Peggy’s sells 1,070 rosettes, compute its margin of safety in units, margin of safety in dollars, and as a percentage of sales. (Round your intermediate calculations, break-even sales dollars and percentage answers to 2 decimal places. Round your margin of safety answer to the next whole number.)
Margin of safety (units):__________rosettes
Margin of safety in dollars:$__________
Percentage of sales:__________%
3: Calculate Peggy’s degree of operating leverage if it sells 1,070 rosettes. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to 4 decimal places.)
Degree of operating leverage:__________
4: Using the degree of operating leverage, calculate the change in Peggy’s profit if it raises the sales price of each rosette by $.40. (Assume costs do not change.) (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 4 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)
Effect on profit:__________%
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performance Castings Inc. casts blades for turbine engines. Within the Casting Dept alloy is the first melted in a crucible, then poured into molds to produce teh castings. On March 1, there were 900 pounds of alloy in process, which were 60% complete as to conversion. The Work In Process balance for these 900 pounds was $140,940, deterimed as follows: Direct Materials $135,000 adn Conversion 5,940 = 140,940. During March the casting Department was charged $1,241,000 for 8,500 pounds of alloy and $33,900 for direct labor. Factory Overhead is applied to the department at a rate of 150% of direct labor. The department transferred out 8700 pound of finished castings to the Machining Departement. The March 31 inventory in process was 45% complete as to conversion. Questions:
A. Prepare the March Journal entry for the Casting Department for the materials charged to prodcution.
B. Prepare the March Journal entry for the Casting Department for the conversion costs charged to production.
C. Prepare the march Journal entry for the Casting Dept. for the completed production transferred to teh Machining Dept.
D. Determine the Work In Process Casting Dept. March 31 Balance.
E. Compute the Change in cost per equivilant unit for direct Materials and Conversion from the prvious month. Change in Materials ________________ $_____________________
Change in Conversion _______________ $________________________
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performance Castings Inc. casts blades for turbine engines. Within the Casting Dept alloy is the first melted in a crucible, then poured into molds to produce teh castings. On March 1, there were 900 pounds of alloy in process, which were 60% complete as to conversion. The Work In Process balance for these 900 pounds was $140,940, deterimed as follows: Direct Materials $135,000 adn Conversion 5,940 = 140,940. During March the casting Department was charged $1,241,000 for 8,500 pounds of alloy and $33,900 for direct labor. Factory Overhead is applied to the department at a rate of 150% of direct labor. The department transferred out 8700 pound of finished castings to the Machining Departement. The March 31 inventory in process was 45% complete as to conversion. Questions:
A. Prepare the March Journal entry for the Casting Department for the materials charged to prodcution.
B. Prepare the March Journal entry for the Casting Department for the conversion costs charged to production.
C. Prepare the march Journal entry for the Casting Dept. for the completed production transferred to teh Machining Dept.
D. Determine the Work In Process Casting Dept. March 31 Balance.
E. Compute the Change in cost per equivilant unit for direct Materials and Conversion from the prvious month. Change in Materials ________________ $_____________________
Change in Conversion _______________ $________________________
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Performance Castings Inc. casts blades for turbine engines. Within the Casting Dept alloy is the first melted in a crucible, then poured into molds to produce teh castings. On March 1, there were 900 pounds of alloy in process, which were 60% complete as to conversion. The Work In Process balance for these 900 pounds was $140,940, deterimed as follows: Direct Materials $135,000 adn Conversion 5,940 = 140,940. During March the casting Department was charged $1,241,000 for 8,500 pounds of alloy and $33,900 for direct labor. Factory Overhead is applied to the department at a rate of 150% of direct labor. The department transferred out 8700 pound of finished castings to the Machining Departement. The March 31 inventory in process was 45% complete as to conversion. Questions:
A. Prepare the March Journal entry for the Casting Department for the materials charged to prodcution.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company just starting business made the following four inventory purchases in June:
|
June 1
|
150 units
|
$390
|
|
June 10
|
200 units
|
$585
|
|
June 15
|
200 units
|
$630
|
|
June 28
|
150 units
|
$495
|
| |
|
$2,100
|
A physical count of merchandise inventory on June 30 reveals that there are 200 units on hand. Using the LIFO inventory method, the value of the ending inventory on June 30 is
a. $536.
b. $653.
c. $1,447.
d. $1,564
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pietro’s Pizza has established the following standards for making one pizza:
Dough: 0.6 pounds at $3 per pound
Labor: 0.3 hours at $10 per hour
Actual sales volume for the past month was 11,000 units. Actual dough and labor quantities and prices were as follows:
Dough: 4,950 pounds (total) at $2.75 per pound
Labor: 4,400 hours (total) at $15 per hour
Required:
(enter favorable and unfavorable variances as positive and negative numbers, without F or U)
(a) What are the input price and quantity variances for dough?
input price variance = $___________(enter negative numbers with a minus, i.e., negative $100 is -100, not ($100))
input quantity variance = $__________ (enter negative numbers with a minus)
(b) What are the input price and quantity variances for labor?
input price variance = $_______________ (enter negative numbers with a minus)
input quantity variance = $ _____________ (enter negative numbers with a minus)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pillar Steel Co., which began operations on January 4, 2011, had the following subsequent transactions and events in its long-term investments.
2011
Jan. 5 Pillar purchased 64,000 shares (30% of total) of Kildaire’s common stock for $1,875,540.
Oct. 23 Kildaire declared and paid a cash dividend of $3.20 per share.
Dec. 31
Kildaire’s net income for 2011 is $1,167,000, and the fair value of its stock at December 31 is $35.00 per share.
2012
Oct. 15 Kildaire declared and paid a cash dividend of $2.50 per share.
Dec. 31
Kildaire’s net income for 2012 is $1,477,200, and the fair value of its stock at December 31 is $38.00 per share.
2013
Jan. 2 Pillar sold all of its investment in Kildaire for $2,217,600 cash.
Assume that Pillar has a significant influence over Kildaire with its 30% share of stock.
Required:
1. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events for Pillar.
2.
Compute the carrying (book) value per share of Pillar’s investment in Kildaire common stock as reflected in the investment account on January 1, 2013.
3.
Compute the net increase or decrease in Pillar’s equity from January 5, 2011, through January 2, 2013, resulting from its investment in Kildaire.
Part 2
Assume that although Pillar owns 30% of Kildaire’s outstanding stock, circumstances indicate that it does not have a significant influence over the investee and that it is classified as an available-for-sale security investment.
Required:
1.
Prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions and events for Pillar. Also prepare an entry dated January 2, 2013, to remove any balance related to the fair value adjustment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pinnacle Manufacturing Company
Common-Size Income Statement-Machine Tech Division
Three Years Ending December 31, 2009
2009 2008 2007
Dollar Value % of Div. Sales Dollar Value % of Div. Sales Dollar Value % of Div. Sales
Sales $5,670,915 100.00% $5,790,017 100.00% $5,299,644 100.00%
Sales Returns and Allowances 9,518 0.17% 13,411 0.23% 13,901 0.26%
Cost of Sales* 1,824,751 32.18% 1,993,730 34.43% 1,830,458 34.54%
Gross Profit 3,836,646 67.65% 3,782,876 65.34% 3,455,285 65.20%
OPERATING EXPENSES-Allocated
Salaries-Management 94,153 1.66% 93,206 1.61% 84,906 1.60%
Salaries-Office 13,008 0.23% 11,582 0.20% 11,354 0.21%
Licensing and certification fees 32,315 0.57% 27,465 0.47% 24,435 0.46%
Security 22,732 0.40% 24,888 0.43% 23,322 0.44%
Insurance 3,851 0.07% 4,055 0.07% 4,016 0.08%
Medical benefits 818 0.01% 958 0.02% 889 0.02%
Advertising 6,708 0.12% 6,948 0.12% 6,129 0.12%
Business publications 1,958 0.03% 1,864 0.03% 246 0.00%
Property taxes 1,490 0.03% 6,948 0.12% 6,500 0.12%
Bad debts 34,296 0.60% 41,063 0.71% 37,341 0.70%
Depreciation expense 247,813 4.37% 181,217 3.13% 161,609 3.05%
Accounting fees 11,074 0.20% 11,828 0.20% 11,286 0.21%
Total operating expenses-Allocated 470,216 8.29% 412,022 7.11% 372,033 7.01%
OPERATING EXPENSES-Direct
Salaries-Sales 204,801 3.61% 211,855 3.66% 195,255 3.68%
Wages Rental 506,186 8.93% 546,228 9.43% 500,630 9.45%
Wages-Mechanics 1,146,126 20.21% 1,229,015 21.23% 1,159,488 21.88%
Wages-Warehouse 193,851 3.42% 208,437 3.60% 202,481 3.82%
Garbage collection 28,458 0.50% 27,313 0.47% 33,017 0.62%
Payroll benefits 143,924 2.54% 114,664 1.98% 107,075 2.02%
Rent- Warehouse 28,949 0.51% 28,949 0.50% 27,223 0.51%
Telephone 1,823 0.03% 2,349 0.04% 2,852 0.05%
Utilities 14,837 0.26% 10,419 0.18% 10,148 0.19%
Postage 4,846 0.09% 5,218 0.09% 5,604 0.11%
Linen service 596 0.01% 321 0.01% 397 0.01%
Repairs and maintenance 9,689 0.17% 10,536 0.18% 10,568 0.20%
Cleaning service 3,348 0.06% 3,185 0.06% 2,889 0.05%
Legal service 11,658 0.21% 12,161 0.21% 9,209 0.17%
Fuel 15,036 0.27% 13,323 0.23% 10,345 0.20%
Travel and entertainment 5,072 0.09% 4,055 0.07% 3,719 0.07%
Pension expense 6,554 0.12% 10,203 0.18% 5,175 0.10%
Office supplies 6,188 0.11% 5,791 0.10% 6,331 0.12%
Miscellaneous 8,386 0.15% 4,622 0.08% 5,956 0.11%
Total operating expenses-Direct 2,340,328 41.29% 2,448,644 42.30% 2,298,362 43.36%
Total operating expenses 2,810,544 49.58% 2,860,666 49.41% 2,670,395 50.37%
OPERATING INCOME $1,026,102 18.07% $922,210 15.93% $784,890 14.83%
* Details of manufacturing expenses are not included in this schedule.
Material Mistatements
Account Balance Estimate of Amount of
Potential Mistatements
Property Tax $1,490 $4,000
Depreciation Expense $ 247,813 $40,000
Pension Expense $10,203 $3,000
Miscellaneous $8,386 $2,000
E. Explain whether you believe the information in requirement c or d provides the most useful data for evaluating the potential for misstatements. Explain why.
F. Your aging analysis of accounts receivable and discussions with management indicate that collections of accounts receivable have been somewhat slower than in the previous year. Evaluate whether or not you believe the allowance for uncollectible accounts is fairly valued. If you believe the account is misstated, calculate the potential misstatement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pinnacle Manufacturing Company
Common-Size Income Statement-Machine Tech Division
Three Years Ending December 31, 2009
2009 2008 2007
Dollar Value % of Div. Sales Dollar Value % of Div. Sales Dollar Value % of Div. Sales
Sales $5,670,915 100.00% $5,790,017 100.00% $5,299,644 100.00%
Sales Returns and Allowances 9,518 0.17% 13,411 0.23% 13,901 0.26%
Cost of Sales* 1,824,751 32.18% 1,993,730 34.43% 1,830,458 34.54%
Gross Profit 3,836,646 67.65% 3,782,876 65.34% 3,455,285 65.20%
OPERATING EXPENSES-Allocated
Salaries-Management 94,153 1.66% 93,206 1.61% 84,906 1.60%
Salaries-Office 13,008 0.23% 11,582 0.20% 11,354 0.21%
Licensing and certification fees 32,315 0.57% 27,465 0.47% 24,435 0.46%
Security 22,732 0.40% 24,888 0.43% 23,322 0.44%
Insurance 3,851 0.07% 4,055 0.07% 4,016 0.08%
Medical benefits 818 0.01% 958 0.02% 889 0.02%
Advertising 6,708 0.12% 6,948 0.12% 6,129 0.12%
Business publications 1,958 0.03% 1,864 0.03% 246 0.00%
Property taxes 1,490 0.03% 6,948 0.12% 6,500 0.12%
Bad debts 34,296 0.60% 41,063 0.71% 37,341 0.70%
Depreciation expense 247,813 4.37% 181,217 3.13% 161,609 3.05%
Accounting fees 11,074 0.20% 11,828 0.20% 11,286 0.21%
Total operating expenses-Allocated 470,216 8.29% 412,022 7.11% 372,033 7.01%
OPERATING EXPENSES-Direct
Salaries-Sales 204,801 3.61% 211,855 3.66% 195,255 3.68%
Wages Rental 506,186 8.93% 546,228 9.43% 500,630 9.45%
Wages-Mechanics 1,146,126 20.21% 1,229,015 21.23% 1,159,488 21.88%
Wages-Warehouse 193,851 3.42% 208,437 3.60% 202,481 3.82%
Garbage collection 28,458 0.50% 27,313 0.47% 33,017 0.62%
Payroll benefits 143,924 2.54% 114,664 1.98% 107,075 2.02%
Rent- Warehouse 28,949 0.51% 28,949 0.50% 27,223 0.51%
Telephone 1,823 0.03% 2,349 0.04% 2,852 0.05%
Utilities 14,837 0.26% 10,419 0.18% 10,148 0.19%
Postage 4,846 0.09% 5,218 0.09% 5,604 0.11%
Linen service 596 0.01% 321 0.01% 397 0.01%
Repairs and maintenance 9,689 0.17% 10,536 0.18% 10,568 0.20%
Cleaning service 3,348 0.06% 3,185 0.06% 2,889 0.05%
Legal service 11,658 0.21% 12,161 0.21% 9,209 0.17%
Fuel 15,036 0.27% 13,323 0.23% 10,345 0.20%
Travel and entertainment 5,072 0.09% 4,055 0.07% 3,719 0.07%
Pension expense 6,554 0.12% 10,203 0.18% 5,175 0.10%
Office supplies 6,188 0.11% 5,791 0.10% 6,331 0.12%
Miscellaneous 8,386 0.15% 4,622 0.08% 5,956 0.11%
Total operating expenses-Direct 2,340,328 41.29% 2,448,644 42.30% 2,298,362 43.36%
Total operating expenses 2,810,544 49.58% 2,860,666 49.41% 2,670,395 50.37%
OPERATING INCOME $1,026,102 18.07% $922,210 15.93% $784,890 14.83%
* Details of manufacturing expenses are not included in this schedule.
Material Mistatements
Account Balance Estimate of Amount of
Potential Mistatements
Property Tax $1,490 $4,000
Depreciation Expense $ 247,813 $40,000
Pension Expense $10,203 $3,000
Miscellaneous $8,386 $2,000
E. Explain whether you believe the information in requirement c or d provides the most useful data for evaluating the potential for misstatements. Explain why.
F. Your aging analysis of accounts receivable and discussions with management indicate that collections of accounts receivable have been somewhat slower than in the previous year. Evaluate whether or not you believe the allowance for uncollectible accounts is fairly valued. If you believe the account is misstated, calculate the potential misstatement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pizza Pizazz is a local restaurant. Price and cost information follows:
Price per pizza $13.01
Variable cost per pizza
Ingredients 2.29
Direct labor 1.02
Overhead (box, etc.) 0.23
Fixed cost per month $2,841.00
1. Determine Pizza Pizazz’s break-even point in units and sales dollars.
Break-even units:
Break-even sales dollars:
2. Determine the restaurant’s margin of safety if it currently sells 400 pizzas per month. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to the nearest whole number. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Margin of safety:
3. Determine the number of pizzas that Pizazz must sell to generate $1,800 in profit. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to next whole number.)
Target sales in units:
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Pizza Pizazz is a local restaurant. Price and cost information follows:
Price per pizza ——–$13.31
Variable cost per pizza
Ingredients——– 2.24
Direct labor——– 1.10
Overhead (box, etc.)——.30
Fixed cost per month——-$4,448.20
1. Calculate Pizza Pizazz’s new break-even point under each of the following independent scenarios (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to next whole number.):
a. Sales price increases by $1.90 per pizza.
Break-even point:______units
b. Fixed costs increase by $460.00 per month.
Break-even point:______units
c. Variable costs decrease by $.45 per pizza.
Break-even point:______units
d. Sales price decreases by $.60 per pizza.
Break-even point:______units
2: Assume that Pizza Pizazz sold 475 pizzas last month. Calculate the company’s degree of operating leverage. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places)
Degree of operating leverage:________
3: Using the degree of operating leverage, calculate the impact on profit caused by a 13.00 percent increase in sales revenue. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)
Effect on profit:_______%
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
When planning a financial statement audit, a CPA must understand audit risk and its components. The firm of Pack & Peck evaluates the risk of material misstatement (RMM) by disaggregating RMM into its two components: inherent risk and control risk.
Required:
For each illustration, select the component of audit risk that is most directly illustrated. The components of audit risk may be used once, more than once, or not at all.
Note if each illustration below is Control risk, Detection risk or Inherent risk
1. A client fails to discover employee fraud on a timely basis because bank accounts are not reconciled monthly.
2. Cash is more susceptible to theft than an inventory of coal.
3. Confirmation of receivables by an auditor fails to detect a material misstatement.
4. Disbursements have occurred without proper approval.
5. There is inadequate segregation of duties.
6. A necessary substantive audit procedure is omitted.
7. Notes receivable are susceptible to material misstatement, assuming there are no related internal controls.
8. Technological developments make a major product obsolete.
9. The client is very close to violating debt covenants.
10. XYZ Company, a client, lacks sufficient working capital to continue operations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The plant manager decides that what is needed is an objective appraisal of what should be done. He hires
June Collins of Collins and Collins, CPAs. June recommends that the Charlotte plant should use standard cost
variance analysis. While not all three product managers agree that this is the best course of action the plant
manager makes the final decision and asks June to perform the analysis. June asks that the three product
managers aggregate their production information. The following schedule is the result of the request.
Variance Analysis
Variance Stated as Variance
Materials Price Variance Per ounce price Favorable
Materials Quantity Variance Ounce per unit Unfavorable
Labor Rate Variance Per hour Unfavorable
Labor Efficiency Variance Time per unit Favorable
Required:
1. Explain how each of the above variances could be explained.
2. Explain how the variances could explain the following situations: For instance: Inspection time increase
could be caused by either poor material leading to sub-quality products or using cheaper more
inexperienced labor. This would result in a favorable materials price variance and/or an unfavorable
labor efficiency variance indicating that the workers are taking too long to construct the product.
Each of the below situations are to be considered independent
Scrap Material decreased
Return Orders increased
Rework Time decreased
Average Unit Cost increased
Unexpected Downtime increased
Sales was less than budgeted
Volume-related revenue was less than anticipated (in this instance the company is selling
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Post Division of the M.T. Woodhead Company produces basic posts which can be sold to outside customers or sold to the Lamp Division of the M.T. Woodhead Company. Last year the Lamp Division bought all of its 32,000 posts from Post at $1.50 each. The following data are available for last year’s activities of the Post Division:
Capacity in units 325,000 posts
Selling price per cost to outside customers $1.85
Variable costs per post $1.00
Fixed costs, total $221,000
The total fixed costs would be the same for all the alternatives considered below. Suppose the transfers of posts to the Lamp Division cut into sales to outside customers by 17,500 units. What is the lowest transfer price that would not reduce the profits of the Post Division? (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places.)
$1.85
$1.42
$1.00
$1.46
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
PRACTICE PROBLEM (problem 6-15) Activity-Based Costing
Riverdale Printing Company is the publisher for many of the local newspapers and magazines. They publish nine periodicals and several other types of literature, including handouts and pamphlets. They have recently adopted an activity-based costing system to assign manufacturing overhead to products. The following data relate to one of their products, The Riverdale Weekly, and the ABC cost pools:
The Riverdale Weekly annual production 20,000 units
Direct material per unit $31 Direct labor per unit $6
Manufacturing overhead cost pools: Cost Pool Cost Cost Driver
Materials ordering $800,000 Number of purchase orders
Materials inspection 400,000 Number of receiving reports
Equipment setup 2,000,000 Number of setups
Quality control 900,000 Number of inspections
Other 15,000,000 Direct labor cost
Total mfg. overhead $19,100,000
Cost Pool All Products The Riverdale Weekly
Materials ordering 100,000 orders 1,000
Materials inspection 2,000 receiving reports 300
Equipment setup 100 setups 1
Quality control 4,000 inspections 400
Other $10,000,000 direct labor $120,000
a. Calculate the overhead rate per unit of activity for each of the five cost pools.
Cost Pool Cost Total cost
driver activity Cost pool rate
Materials ordering
Materials inspection
Equipment setup
Quality control
Other
Total mfg. overhead
b. Calculate the total overhead assigned to the production of The Riverdale Weekly.
Costs Activity Usage Cost Pool Rate Total Cost Allocated
Materials ordering
Materials inspection
Equipment setup
Quality control
Other
Total mfg. overhead
c. Calculate the overhead cost per unit for The Riverdale Weekly.
d. Calculate the total unit cost for The Riverdale Weekly.
Suppose that Riverdale Printing allocates overhead by a traditional production volume-based method using direct labor dollars as the allocation base and one cost pool. Determine the overhead rate per direct labor dollar and the per unit overhead assigned to The Riverdale Weekly.
e. Discuss the difference in cost allocations between the traditional method and the activity-based costing approach.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Preparation of a Statement of Cash Flows)
Presented below is a condensed version of the comparative balance sheets for Sondergaard Corporation for the last two years at December 31.
2010 2009
Cash $157,000 $78,000
Accounts receivable 180,000 185,000
Investments 52,000 74,000
Equipment 298,000 240,000
Less: Accumulated depreciation (106,000) (89,000)
Current liabilities 134,000 151,000
Capital stock 160,000 160,000
Retained earnings 287,000 177,000
Additional information:
Investments were sold at a loss (not extraordinary) of $7,000; no equipment was sold; cash dividends paid were $50,000 and net income was $160,000.
(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2010 for Sondergaard Corporation. (List multiple entries from the largest positive to the smallest positive amount followed by the most negative to the least negative amount,
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Presented below is the trial balance of Vivaldi Corporation at December 31, 2010.
|
|
Debit |
Credits |
|
Cash |
$197,000 |
|
|
Sales |
|
$7,900,000 |
|
Trading securities (at cost, $145,000) |
153,000 |
|
|
Cost of goods sold |
4,800,000 |
|
|
Long-term investments in bonds |
299,000 |
|
|
Long-term investments in stocks |
277,000 |
|
|
Short-term notes payable |
|
90,000 |
|
Accounts payable |
|
455,000 |
|
Selling expenses |
2,000,000 |
|
|
Investment revenue |
|
63,000 |
|
Land |
260,000 |
|
|
Buildings |
1,040,000 |
|
|
Dividends payable |
|
136,000 |
|
Accrued liabilities |
|
96,000 |
|
Accounts receivable |
435,000 |
|
|
Accumulated depreciation-Buildings |
|
352,000 |
|
Allowance for doubtful accounts |
|
25,000 |
|
Administrative expenses |
900,000 |
|
|
Interest expense |
211,000 |
|
|
Inventories |
597,000 |
|
|
Extraordinary gain |
|
80,000 |
|
Long-term notes payable |
|
900,000 |
|
Equipment |
600,000 |
|
|
Bonds payable |
|
1,000,000 |
|
Accumulated depreciation-Equipment |
|
60,000 |
|
Franchise (net of $80,000 amortization) |
160,000 |
|
|
Common stock ($5 par) |
|
1,000,000 |
|
Treasury stock |
191,000 |
|
|
Patent (net of $30,000 amortization) |
195,000 |
|
|
Retained earnings |
|
78,000 |
|
Additional paid-in capital |
|
80,000
|
|
|
$12,315,000
|
$12,315,000
|
Prepare a balance sheet at December 31, 2010, for Vivaldi Corporation. Ignore income taxes. (List liabilities, long-term investments, and intangible assets from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 3.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 1: Crespo Deodorant produces using a process cost system under the first in, first out method. All material is assumed to be added at the beginning of the process. The company started the period with 5,000 units 60% completed with a cost of $45,000. During the period, 15,000 units were transferred into the second department. Ending inventory was 2,000 units 30% completed. Direct labor costs were $89,000, factory overhead was $100,000 and direct materials transferred into the process were $360,000.
Part a: Complete the chart below.
|
Layers
|
Actual Units
|
%
|
EUP
|
Materials
|
Conversion Cost
|
Total Cost
|
|
Beginning Inventory
|
5,000
|
60%
|
12,000
|
|
|
|
|
Started and Completed
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Ending Inventory
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
I’m having difficulties with this problem. I’ve read the 3 different versions we have of this chapter, which the teacher keeps changing. I’ve started completing it, but I’m not understanding it. This is a virtual class so it’s very hard to follow up with the teacher. Thank you, any guidance will help.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Problem 16-16
Fast Delivery is a small company that transports business packages between New York and Chicago. It operates a fleet of small vans that moves packages to and from a central depot within each city and uses a common carrier to deliver the packages between the depots in the two cities. Fast Delivery recently acquired approximately $6million of cash capital from it owners, and its president, Don is trying to identify the most profitable way to invest these funds.
1. One manager believes that the money should be used to expand the fleet of city van at a cost of $720.000. He argues that more vans would enable the company to expand its services into new markets, thereby increasing the revenue base. More specifically he expects cash inflow to increase by $280.00 per year. The additional vans are expected to have an average useful life of four years and a combined salvage value of $100,00 Operating the vans will require additional working capital of $40,000 which will be recovered at the end of the fourth year.
2. In contrast, the company chief accountant, believes that the funds should be used to purchased large trucks to deliver the package between the depots in the two cities. The conversion process would produce continuing improvement in operating saving with reductions in cash outflow as the following.
Year 1, $160,000, Year 2, $320,000, Year 3, $400,000, Year 4, $440,000.
The large trucks are expect to cost $80,000 and to have a 4 year useful life ans a $80,000 salvage value. the training cost are expect to amount to $16,000 Fast Delivery management has established a 16 percent desired rate of return.
a. Determine the net present value of the two investment alternatives
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
New Phone Inc., a diversified manufacturer, has five divisions that operated throughout the United States and Costa Rico. New Phone Inc. has historically allowed its divisions to operate autonomously. Corporate intervention occurred only when planned results were not obtained. The corporation’s management has high integrity, but the board of directors and audit committee are not very active. New Phone Inc. has a policy of hiring competent and aggressive people. The company has a code of conduct, but there is little monitoring of compliance employees. Management is somewhat conservative in terms of accounting principles and practices, but employee compensation packages depend highly on performance. New Phone Inc. does not have an internal audit department, and it relies on your firm to review the controls in each division. Cheryl Smith is the general manager of the Intercept Division. The Intercept Division produces a variety of standardized parts for small smart phones. Smith has been the general manager for the last seven years, and each year he has been able to improve the profitability of the division. She is compensated based largely on the divisions’ profitability. Much of the improvement in profitability has come through aggressive cost cutting, including a substantial reduction in control activities over inventory. The periodic FIFO method of accounting for inventory is used. During the last year a new competitor, Deflector Inc., entered Intercept’s markets and has offered substantial price reductions, intense marketing and friendly customer service in order to grab market share. Smith has responded to the competitor’s actions by matching the price cuts and increasing customer service in the hope of maintaining market share. Smith is very concerned because he cannot see any other areas where costs can be reduced so that the division’s growth and profitability can be maintained. If profitability is not maintained, her salary and bonus will be reduced. Smith has decided that one way to make the division more profitable is to manipulate inventory because it represents a large amount of the division’s balance sheet. She also knows that controls over inventory are week. She views this inventory manipulation as a short-run solution to the profit decline due to the competitor’s price cutting. Smith is certain that once the competitor stops cutting prices or goes bankrupt, the misstatements in inventory can be corrected with little impact on the bottom line. In your paper identify and evaluate the strengths and weaknesses of New Phone Inc.’s control environment. Write an auditor’s internal control opinion report based upon the New Phone Inc.’s internal controls. Also, discuss the factors New Phone Inc.’s control environment that have led to and facilitated Smith’s manipulation of inventory. Finally, discuss what controls should be put in place to strengthen New Phone Inc.’s control environment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Noteworthy, Inc., produces and sells small electronic keyboards. Assume that you have the following information about Noteworthy’s costs for the most recent month.
Depreciation on factory equipment———————$800
Depreciation on CEO’s company car———————-100
Speakers used in the keyboard————————1,100
Production supervisor’s salary————————–2,200
Glue and screws used in the keyboards——————370
Wages of persons who install the speakers————2,800
Cost to run an ad on local radio stations—————-600
Utilities for the factory———————————-1,200
Personnel manager’s salary—————————-2,500
Wages of person who attaches legs to keyboards—1,950
1: Calculate the total product cost for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Total product cost:$_______
2: Calculate the prime cost for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Prime cost:$_______
3. Calculate the conversion cost for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Conversion cost:$_______
4: Calculate the manufacturing overhead for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Manufacturing overhead:$_______
5: Calculate the direct labor for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Direct labor:$_______
6: Calculate the total variable cost (with # units produced as the activity) for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Total variable cost:$_______
7: Calculate the total fixed cost (with # units produced as the activity) for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Total fixed cost:$_______
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Noteworthy, Inc., produces and sells small electronic keyboards. Assume that you have the following information about Noteworthy’s costs for the most recent month.
Depreciation on factory equipment———————$800
Depreciation on CEO’s company car———————-100
Speakers used in the keyboard————————1,100
Production supervisor’s salary————————–2,200
Glue and screws used in the keyboards——————370
Wages of persons who install the speakers————2,800
Cost to run an ad on local radio stations—————-600
Utilities for the factory———————————-1,200
Personnel manager’s salary—————————-2,500
Wages of person who attaches legs to keyboards—1,950
1: Calculate the total product cost for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Total product cost:$_______
2: Calculate the prime cost for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Prime cost:$_______
3. Calculate the conversion cost for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Conversion cost:$_______
4: Calculate the manufacturing overhead for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Manufacturing overhead:$_______
5: Calculate the direct labor for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Direct labor:$_______
6: Calculate the total variable cost (with # units produced as the activity) for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Total variable cost:$_______
7: Calculate the total fixed cost (with # units produced as the activity) for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Total fixed cost:$_______
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Noteworthy, Inc., produces and sells small electronic keyboards. Assume that you have the following information about Noteworthy’s costs for the most recent month.
Depreciation on factory equipment $ 800
Depreciation on CEO’s company car 100
Speakers used in the keyboard 1,100
Production supervisor’s salary 2,200
Glue and screws used in the keyboards 370
Wages of persons who install the speakers 2,800
Cost to run an ad on local radio stations 600
Utilities for the factory 1,200
Personnel manager’s salary 2,500
Wages of person who attaches legs to keyboards 1,950
1. Calculate the total product cost for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Total product cost:$________
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Noteworthy, Inc., produces and sells small electronic keyboards. Assume that you have the following information about Noteworthy’s costs for the most recent month.
Depreciation on factory equipment———————$800
Depreciation on CEO’s company car———————-100
Speakers used in the keyboard————————1,100
Production supervisor’s salary————————–2,200
Glue and screws used in the keyboards——————370
Wages of persons who install the speakers————2,800
Cost to run an ad on local radio stations—————-600
Utilities for the factory———————————-1,200
Personnel manager’s salary—————————-2,500
Wages of person who attaches legs to keyboards—1,950
Calculate the prime cost for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Prime cost:$_______
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Noteworthy, Inc., produces and sells small electronic keyboards. Assume that you have the following information about Noteworthy’s costs for the most recent month.
Depreciation on factory equipment———————$800
Depreciation on CEO’s company car———————-100
Speakers used in the keyboard————————1,100
Production supervisor’s salary————————–2,200
Glue and screws used in the keyboards——————370
Wages of persons who install the speakers————2,800
Cost to run an ad on local radio stations—————-600
Utilities for the factory———————————-1,200
Personnel manager’s salary—————————-2,500
Wages of person who attaches legs to keyboards—1,950
Calculate the prime cost for Noteworthy. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Prime cost:$_______
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Nutall Corporation is considering dropping product N28X. Data from the company’s accounting system appear below:
Sales $ 830,000
Variable expense $ 416,000
Fixed manufacturing expenses $ 266,000
Fixed selling and administrative expense $ 214,000
All fixed expenses of the company are fully allocated to products in the company’s accounting system. Further investigation has revealed that $204,000 of the fixed manufacturing expenses and $119,000 of the fixed selling and administrative expenses are avoidable if product N28X is discontinued.
Required:
a.
According to the company’s accounting system, what is the net operating income earned by product N28X? (Input the amount as a positive value. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
$
b-1.
What would be the effect on the company’s overall net operating income of dropping product N28X? (Input the amount as a positive value. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Net operating income would be by $ .
b-2.
Should the product be dropped?
Yes or No?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
o Problem 1: On 1/1/11 your client received a 14 year note for $150,000 in exchange for services rendered. The note calls for an annual payment of interest on 12/31 at a contractual (stated) rate of 6%. Given the credit standing of the customer, an interest rate of 12.25% has been imputed as the effective rate. The principal amount of the note is due at maturity.
Required:
* Part A- At what amount should the sale be recorded on 1/1/11? NOTE: Enter the data above in four cells, and then use the appropriate financial function in your software to compute present value, rather than formulas from present value tables. The PV cell(s) should reference only data cells, not show actual amounts.
* Part B- Prepare an amortization schedule for the Note Receivable using the following
columns:
Date Cash Received Interest Revenue Discount Amortized Carrying Value
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
What was the last official pronouncement of the Financial Accounting Standards Board in the year 2011? Briefly describe the pronouncement in your own word.
a. Provide the official definitions of:
Asset retirement obligation
Current liability
Reasonably possible
Warranty
Goodwill
b. What must an entity disclose about its asset retirement obligations?
c. What are three examples of estimates that are used in accounting that are not contingencies? Can you explain why they are not contingencies?
d. Under what conditions must an employer accrue a liability for employees’ compensation for future absences?
e. Once goodwill has been recognized by a company, how will it be accounted for in subsequent accounting periods?
What is the authoritative literature addressing revenue recognition when right of return exists?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Okay so I did half of it and the other half I can’t figure out so please help me with it. The ones that are blank are the ones I need helf with and the ones that are already answered please don’t worry about them because they are correct so please help me with the others.
The comparative financial statements of Blige Inc. are as follows. The market price of Blige Inc. common stock was $60 on December 31, 2012.
Here are the link to solve the problems. Please delete the space at the end before .gif to view properly
Link 1
http://east.cengagenow.com/ilrn/books/waac24h/images/ch17/waac24h_ch17_pr17_4a. gif
Link 2
http://east.cengagenow.com/ilrn/books/waac24h/images/ch17/waac24h_ch17_pr17_4a1. gif
Determine the following measures for 2012, rounding to one decimal place, except for dollar amounts, which should be rounded to the nearest cent. Assume 365 days a year.
1. Working capital: $ 1443000
2. Current ratio: 3.0
3. Quick ratio: 2.4
4. Accounts receivable turnover: 5.3
5. Number of days’ sales in receivables: 68.4
6. Inventory turnover:
7. Number of days’ sales in inventory:
8. Ratio of fixed assets to long-term liabilities:
9. Ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity:
10. Number of times interest charges earned:
11. Number of times preferred dividends earned:
12. Ratio of net sales to assets: %
13. Rate earned on total assets: %
14. Rate earned on stockholders’ equity: %
15. Rate earned on common stockholders’ equity: %
16. Earnings per share on common stock: $
17. Price-earnings ratio:
18. Dividends per share of common stock: $ .5
19. Dividend yield: .8%
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Online degrees and courses are widely used by colleges and universities around the world. Some students feel that the online courses should be cheaper than in class courses as they should use less direct labor (faculty) and absorb less overhead (variable and fixed) and other variable costs such as student fees for activities should be eliminated since online students do not access those services. Provide your response to this issue with a cost accounting based opinion. Identify any tools such as regression analysis or CVP that will support the decision making process related to the question. If needed, use calculations or lists i.e. differential/avoidable costs as required for each question. Must list differential/avoidable costs! Please be as detailed and lengthy as possible.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The overhead costs that Lucca Industries, Inc., used to compute its overhead rate for the past year are as follows:
Indirect materials $79,200
Maintenance 14,900
Outside service contract 17,300
Indirect labor 79,100
Factory supervison 42,900
Depreciation 85,000
Factory Insurance 8,200
Property taxes 6,500
Heat, Light, power 7,700
Miscellaneous 5,760
Total Overhead $346,560
The allocation base for the past year was 45,600 total machine hours. For the next year, all overhead costs except depreciation, property taxes, and miscellaneous overhead are expected to increase by 10 percent. Depreciation should increase by 12 percent, and property taxes and miscellaneous overhead are expected to increase by 20 percent. Plant capacity in terms of machine hours used will increase by 4,400 hours. Compute the overhead rate for next year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P11-1 Depreciation Method The Winsey Company purchased equipment on January 2, 2010, for $700,000. The equipment has the following characteristics: Estimatesd service life 20 years Estimated residual value $50,000 100,000 hours 950,000 units of output During 2010 and 2011, the company used the machine for 4,500 and 5,500 hours respectively and purchased 40,000 and 60,000 units respectively. Compute he depreciation for 2010 and 2011 under each of the following methods: 5. Double-declining-balance 6. 150%-declining-balance 7. Compute the company’s return on assets (net income divided by average total assets, as discussed in chapter 6) for each method for 2010 and 2011, assuming that income before depreciation is$100,000. For simplicity, use ending assets, and ignore interest, income taxes , and other assets.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P11-14 Changes and Corrections of Depreciation During 2010, the controller of the Ryel Company asked you to prepare
correcting journal entries for the following three situations:
1. Machine A was purchased for $50,000 on January 1, 2005. Straight-line depreciation has been recorded for five years,
and the Accumulated Depreciation account has a balance of $25,000. The estimated residual value remains at $5,000,
but the service life is now estimated to be one year longer than estimated originally.
2. Machine B was purchased for $40,000 on January 1, 2008. It had an estimated residual value of $5,000 and an estimated
service life of 10 years. It has been depreciated under the double-declining-balance method for two years. Now, at the
beginning of the third year, Ryel has decided to change to the straight-line method.
3. Machine C was purchased for $20,000 on January 1, 2009. Double-declining-balance depreciation has been recorded for
one year. The estimated residual value of the machine is $2,000 and the estimated service life is five years. The computation
of the depreciation erroneously included the estimated residual value.
Required
Prepare any necessary correcting journal entries for each situation. Also prepare the journal entry necessary for each situation
to record the depreciation for 2010. (Assume that the debit is to Depreciation Expense.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P16-9 (EPS with Stock Dividend and Extraordinary Items) Agassi Corporation is preparing the comparative
financial statements to be included in the annual report to stockholders. Agassi employs a fiscal
year ending May 31.
h1eome from operations before income taxes for Agassi was $1,400,000 and $660,000, respectively, for
fiscal years ended May 31, 2013 and 2012. Agassi experienced an extraordinary loss of $400,000 because of
an earthquake on March 3, 2013. A 40% combined income tax rate pertains to any and all of Agassi Corporation’s
profits, gains, and losses.
Agassi’ s capital structure consists of preferred stock and common stock. The company has not issued
any convertible securities or warrants and there are no outstanding stock options.
Agassi issued 40,000 shares of $100 par value, 6% cumulative preferred stock in 2009. All of this stock
is outstanding, and no preferred dividends are in arrears.
There were 1,000,000 shares of $1 par common stock outstanding on Jtme 1, 2011. On September 1,
2011, Agassi sold an additional 400,000 shares of the common stock at $17 per share. Agassi distributed a
20″/o stock dividend on the common shares outstanding on December 1, 2012. These were the only common
stock transactions during the past 2 fiscal years.
Instructions
(a) Determine the weighted-average number of common shares that would be used in computing earnings
per share on the current comparative income statement for:
(1) The year ended May 31,2012.
(2) The year ended May 31,2013.
(b) Starting with income from operations before income taxes, prepare a comparative income
statement for the years ended May 31, 2013 and 2012. The statement will be part of Agassi
Corporation’s annual report to stockholders and should include appropriate earnings per share
presentation.
(c) The capital structure of a corporation is the result of its past financing decisions. Furthermore, the
earnings per share data presented on a corporation’s financial statements is dependent upon the
capital stntcture.
(1) Explain why Agassi Corporation is considered to have a simple capital structure.
(2) Describe how earnings per share data would be presented for a corporation that has a complex
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P5-4B
Parkland Department Store is located near the Lyndale Shopping Mall. At the
end of the company’s fiscal year on December 31, 2012, the following accounts appeared in its adjusted trial balance.
Accounts Payable $ 73,300
Accounts Receivable 45,500
Accumulated Depreciation”Buildings 52,500
Accumulated Depreciation”Equipment 42,600
Buildings 190,000
Cash 28,000
Common Stock 140,000
Cost of Goods Sold 412,000
Depreciation Expense 23,400
Dividends 15,000
Equipment 100,000
Gain on Disposal of Plant Assets 4,300
Income Tax Expense 15,000
Insurance Expense 8,400
Interest Expense 7,000
Interest Payable 2,000
Inventory 43,000
Mortgage Payable 62,500
Prepaid Insurance 2,400
Maintenance and Repairs Expense $ 6,200
Retained Earnings 19,200
Salaries and Wages Expense 111,000
Sales Revenue 626,000
Salaries and Wages Payable 3,500
Sales Returns and Allowances 8,000
Utilities Expense 11,000
Additional data: $20,000 of the mortgage payable is due for payment next year.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a multiple-step income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a classified balance sheet.
[ (a) Net income $28,300, Tot. assets $313,800 ]
(b) Calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate.
(c) The vice president of marketing and the director of human resources have developed a proposal whereby the company would compensate the sales force on a strictly commission basis. Given the increased incentive, they expect net sales to increase by 25%. As a result, they estimate that gross profit will increase by $50,500 and expenses by $27,800. Compute the expected new net income. (Hint: You do not need to prepare an income statement.) Then, compute the revised profit margin ratio and gross profit rate. Comment on the effect that this plan would have on net income
and the ratios, and evaluate the merit of this proposal.
Really need help with Multi income statement part!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
P5-4B
Parkland Department Store is located near the Lyndale Shopping Mall. At the
end of the company’s fiscal year on December 31, 2012, the following accounts appeared in its adjusted trial balance.
Accounts Payable $ 73,300
Accounts Receivable 45,500
Accumulated Depreciation”Buildings 52,500
Accumulated Depreciation”Equipment 42,600
Buildings 190,000
Cash 28,000
Common Stock 140,000
Cost of Goods Sold 412,000
Depreciation Expense 23,400
Dividends 15,000
Equipment 100,000
Gain on Disposal of Plant Assets 4,300
Income Tax Expense 15,000
Insurance Expense 8,400
Interest Expense 7,000
Interest Payable 2,000
Inventory 43,000
Mortgage Payable 62,500
Prepaid Insurance 2,400
Maintenance and Repairs Expense $ 6,200
Retained Earnings 19,200
Salaries and Wages Expense 111,000
Sales Revenue 626,000
Salaries and Wages Payable 3,500
Sales Returns and Allowances 8,000
Utilities Expense 11,000
Additional data: $20,000 of the mortgage payable is due for payment next year.
Instructions
(a) Prepare a multiple-step income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a classified balance sheet.
[ (a) Net income $28,300, Tot. assets $313,800 ]
(b) Calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate.
(c) The vice president of marketing and the director of human resources have developed a proposal whereby the company would compensate the sales force on a strictly commission basis. Given the increased incentive, they expect net sales to increase by 25%. As a result, they estimate that gross profit will increase by $50,500 and expenses by $27,800. Compute the expected new net income. (Hint: You do not need to prepare an income statement.) Then, compute the revised profit margin ratio and gross profit rate. Comment on the effect that this plan would have on net income
and the ratios, and evaluate the merit of this proposal.
Do you have any solution for this problem… Especially for A part… Can you show me exact solutions for (a) Net income $28,300, Tot. assets $313,800…
Thanks..
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Paddle Away, Inc., makes one model of wooden canoe. Partial information for it follows.
Number of canoes produced and sold——490
Total costs
Variable costs ——$73,500
Fixed costs———159,740
Total costs————$233,240
Cost per unit
Variable cost per unit————$150.00
Fixed cost per unit—————$326.00
Total cost per unit—————-$476.00
1: Suppose that Paddle Away raises its selling price to $710 per canoe. Calculate its new break-even point in units and in sales dollars. (Round your break-even units answer to the next whole number. Round your sales answer to the nearest whole number. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
New break-even units :______ canoes
Break-even sales: $______
2: If Paddle Away sells 690 canoes, compute its margin of safety in dollars and as a percentage of sales. (Use the new sales price of $710.) (Round margin of safety to the nearest whole number. Round percentage of sales to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” & “%” signs in your response.)
Margin of safety: $______
Percentage of sales:______%
3: Calculate the number of canoes that Paddle Away must sell at $710 each to generate $116,000 profit. (Round your answer to the next whole number.)
Target sales units:______ canoes
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Paige Candy Company offers a coffee mug as a premium for every ten 50-cent candy bar wrappers presented by customers together with $1.00. The purchase price of each mug to the company is 90 cents; in addition it costs 60 cents to mail each mug. The results of the premium plan for the years 2010 and 2011 are as follows(assume all purchases and sales are for cash):
2010 2011
Coffee mugs purchased 720,000 800,000
Candy bars sold 5,600,000 6,750,000
Wrappers redeemed 2,800,000 4,200,000
2010 wrappers expected to be redeemed in 2011 2,000,000
2011 wrappers expected to be redeemed in 2012 2,700,000
(a) Prepare the general journal entries that should be made in 2010 and 2011 related to the above plan by Paige Candy.
(b) Indicate the account names, amounts, and classifications of the items related to the premium plan that would appear on the Paige Candy Company balance sheet and income statement at the end of 2010 and 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Pattia Winery is one of the finest wineries in the country. One of its famous products is a red wine called Old Vines. Recently, management has become concerned about the increasing cost of making Old Vines and needs to determine if the current selling price of $10 per bottle is adequate. The winery wants to achieve a 25 percent gross profit on the sale of each bottle. The following information is given to you for analysis:
Compute the prime costs per unit and the conversion costs per unit. Round your answer to two decimal places. If an amount box does not require an entry, leave it blank.
Prime Costs Conversion Costs
Direct materials $ $
Direct labor $ $
Overhead $ $
Totals $ $
Batch size 10,550
Cost
Direct Material
Olen grapes 22,155
Chancellor grape 9,495
Bottles 5,275
Total direct materials costs $36,925
Direct Labor
Pickers 2,110
Crusher 422
Processor 8,440
Bottler 13,293
Total direct labor costs $24,265
Overhead
Deprec. Equip 2,743
Deprec. build 5,275
Utilities 1,055
Indirect labor 6,330
Supervison 7,385
Supplies 9,917
Repairs 1,477
Misc 633
Total overhead cost $34,815
Total Production cost $96,005
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Listed below are the unadjusted general ledger account balances of Franklin Co. at December 31, 2010 (amounts are presented at their normal balance):
Cash 10,400
Accounts Receivable 2,500
Office Supplies 950
Prepaid Insurance 2,400
Building 100,000
Accumulated Depreciation ‘ Building60,000
Truck 36,000
Accumulated Depreciation – Truck 0
Accounts Payable 8,000
Unearned Rent Revenue 1,600
Note Payable 10,000
Common Stock 25,000
Retained Earnings 26,750
Dividends 2,500
Sales Revenue 43,400
Rent Revenue 4,000
Cost of Goods Sold 12,000
Wage Expense 9,500
Insurance Expense 0
Depreciation Expense ‘ Building 2,500
Depreciation Expense ‘ Truck 0
Supplies Expense 0
Additional information for Franklin Company is available on December 31, 2010, the end of an annual accounting period.
a. Franklin Company purchased a 2-year insurance policy on January 1, 2010 and debited Prepaid Insurance for $2,400.
b. On November 1, 2010, a tenant in a building owned by Franklin Company paid two months rent in advance. The amount received was credited to Unearned Rent Revenue.
c. A physical count of office supplies at December 31 revealed that there was $400 of supplies on hand.
d. The truck was acquired on August 1. Franklin estimates the truck will have a useful life of 5 years and no salvage value. The depreciation on the building has already been recorded.
e. Wages of $2,000 earned by factory employees for the last week of December were not paid until the first pay date in January.
Required: Using the templates provided:
1. Post the unadjusted balances at December 31 to ‘T’ accounts.
2. Prepare the necessary adjusting journal entries in proper format (omit explanations). Reference each adjusting journal entry with the letter corresponding to the information provided above. Accounts may need to be created.
3. Post the adjusting entries to the ‘T’ accounts.
4. Prepare an adjusted trial balance at December 31, 2010.
5. Prepare an income statement, statement of retained earnings and balance sheet in proper format for 2010.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LJB Company, a local distributor, has asked your accounting firm to evaluate their system of internal controls because they are planning to go public in the future. The President wants to be aware of any new regulations required of his company if they go public so he met with a colleague of yours at a local restaurant. The President of the company explained the current system of internal controls to your colleague. Your colleague has since been promoted to a tax position so she has passed on the information below so you can generate recommendations for the partner at your accounting firm to share with the President of LJB Company.
Since LJB Company is a relatively lean organization, they have a lot of faith in their long-term employees. They have one accountant who serves as Treasurer and Controller which streamlines many of their processes. In this dual role, he purchases all of the supplies and pays for these purchases. He also receives the checks and completes the monthly bank reconciliation. The accountant is so busy that the company handles petty cash a bit differently. All employees have access to the petty cash in a desk drawer and are asked to only place a note if they use any of the cash.
The accountant has recently started using pre-numbered invoices and wants to buy an indelible ink machine to print their checks. The President is waiting to hear from you if this is a necessary purchase before authorizing.
On payday, the checks are picked up by the accountant and left in his office for pick-up. Before he leaves for the weekend, he will move the checks into a safe in his office.
The President is still quite embarrassed because he had to fire one of his employees for viewing pornography on a company computer. He later found out this individual was a convicted felon who served time for molesting children. The company had a hard time getting the employee to admit it was him because the company does not assign individual passwords. The President expressed his frustration because both he and the accountant both interview and approve all of the new hires.
Required:
Based on the above information, prepare a Word document to address the following:
1. Inform the President of any new internal control requirements if the company decides to go public. (7 points)
2. Advise the President of what the company is doing right (they are doing some things well) and also recommend to the President whether or not they should buy the indelible ink machine. When you advise the President, please be sure to reference the applicable internal control principle that applies. (13 points)
3. Advise the President of what the company is doing wrong (they are definitely doing some things poorly). Please be sure to include the internal control principle that is being violated along with a recommendation for improvement. (20 points)
You must prepare a formal report for the partner to distribute to the President so no abbreviations or short-hand answers.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LO.2 (DL variances) Calista & Lane, CPAs, set the following standard for its inventory
audit of Triumph Co.: 350 hours at an average hourly billing rate of $250. Th e fi rm
actually worked 330 hours during the inventory audit process. Th e total labor variance
for the audit was $3,500 unfavorable.
a. Compute the total actual payroll.
b. Compute the labor effi ciency variance.
c. Compute the labor rate variance.
d. Prepare the entry to assign labor costs to inventory, record the labor variances, and
accrue payroll costs.
e. Write a memo to the appropriate personnel regarding feedback about the labor
effi ciency variance. Th e memo should also off er a brief explanation that is consistent
with the labor rate and effi ciency variances.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LO.2 (WA EUP; cost per WA EUP) Waltham Mfg. makes skateboards and uses a
weighted average process costing system. On May 1, 2010, the company had 400
boards in process that were 70 percent complete as to material and 85 percent complete
as to conversion. During the month, 3,800 additional boards were started. On
May 31, 300 boards were still in process (40 percent complete as to material and 60
percent complete as to conversion). Cost information for May 2010 is as follows:
Beginning WIP Inventory costs
Direct material $ 4,349
Conversion 4,658
Current period costs
Direct material 60,775
Conversion 46,750
a. Calculate EUP for each cost component using the weighted average method.
b. Calculate cost per EUP for each cost component.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Longview Company is considering automating its manufacturing facility. Company information before and after the proposed automation follows:
Before Automation After Automation
Sales revenue————–$194,000 ————- $194,000
‘ Variable cost————–108,000—————-40,000
Contribution margin———-$86,000 ————–$154,000
‘ Fixed cost——————15,000—————–64,000
Net income——————-$71,000—————–$90,000
1: Calculate Longview’s break-even sales dollars before and after automation. (Round your contribution margin ratio to 4 decimal places and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Break-even sales dollars before automation:$__________
Break-even sales dollars after automation:$__________
2: Compute Longview’s degree of operating leverage before and after automation. (Round your answers to 4 decimal places.)
DOL before automation:__________
DOL after automation:__________
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Lower of cost or market
|
|
Quantity in Inventory
|
Cost
|
Market
|
|
Bike – Model A4467
|
10
|
120
|
|
1,100
|
|
Bike – Model A4468
|
|
|
|
1,680
|
|
Bike – Model A4469
|
16
|
|
190
|
2,560
|
|
What is the total cost of inventory under LCM?
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lugano’s Pizza Parlor is considering the purchase of a large oven and related equipment for mixing and baking “crazy bread.” The oven and equipment would cost $143,200 delivered and installed. It would be usable for about 15 years, after which it would have a 10% scrap value. The following additional information is available:
a.
Mr. Lugano estimates that purchase of the oven and equipment would allow the pizza parlor to bake and sell 80,000 loaves of crazy bread each year. The bread sells for $1.35 per loaf.
b.
The cost of the ingredients in a loaf of bread is 40% of the selling price. Mr. Lugano estimates that other costs each year associated with the bread would be as follows: salaries, $25,000; utilities, $3,000; and insurance, $1,000.
c.
The pizza parlor uses straight-line depreciation on all assets, deducting salvage value from original cost.
(Ignore income taxes.)
Required:
1.
Prepare a contribution format income statement showing the net operating income each year from production and sale of the crazy bread. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
– Sales Revenue $ 108000
– Variable expenses:
Deduct Depreciation 143200
Contribution Margin $35200
Selling and administrative expenses:
– Cost of ingredients 43200
– Salaries 25000
-Utitilities 3000
-Insurance 1000
Expenses in total= $72200
– Net Operating Loss $107400
2a.
Compute the simple rate of return for the new oven and equipment. (Round your answer to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)
Simple rate of return 7.5%
2b.
If Mr. Lugano accepts any project with a simple rate of return greater than 13%, will he acquire the franchise?
No
3a.
Compute the payback period on the oven and equipment.
Payback period 18 years
3b.
If Mr. Lugano accepts any investment with a payback period of less than five years, will he acquire the franchise?
No
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The management of an amusement park is considering purchasing a new ride for $80,000 that would have a useful life of 10 years and a salvage value of $8,000. The ride would require annual operating costs of $20,000 throughout its useful life. The company’s discount rate is 8%. Management is unsure about how much additional ticket revenue the new ride would generate-particularly because customers pay a flat fee when they enter the park that entitles them to unlimited rides. Hopefully, the presence of the ride would attract new customers. (Ignore income taxes.)
Click here to view Exhibit 13B-1 and Exhibit 13B-2 to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.
PV= 1/(1+r)^n
PV of annuity= 1/r [1 – 1/(1+r)^n)
Required:
How much additional revenue would the ride have to generate per year to make it an attractive investment? (Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, intermediate and final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Additional revenue $
references
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:
Selling Price ………………………………… $139
Units in beginning inventory …………….. 0
Units produced …………………………….. 6700
Units sold …………………………………… 6400
Units in ending inventory …………………. 300
Variable costs per unit:
Direct materials …………………………….. $43
Direct Labor …………………………………. $35
Variable manufacturing overhead ……………$5
Variable selling and administrative ………….. $6
Fixed costs:
Fixed manufacturing overhead …………….. $227,800
Fixed selling and administrative ………………. 83,200
What is the net operating income for the month under absorption costing?
a. $(15,900)
b. $19,200
c. $10,200
d. $9,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Marble Corporation had the following balances in its stockholders equity accounts at December 31, 2010
Common stock, $10 par, 50,000 shares authorized 20,000 shares issued…….$200,000
Paid in Capital xcess of Par Par Value Common…..250,000
Retained Earnings………………500,000
Treasury Stock 1,000 shares…..(20,000)
Total stockholders equity……..$930,000
The following transactions occured during 2011:
February 3 sold and issued 3,000 shares of common stock for $22 per share
May 10 declared a $0.50 per share dividend on common stock
October 12 sold 500 shares of the treasury stock for $20 per share
December 31 net income for the year was determined to be $75,000
Based on the above information, prepare a statement of stockholders equity for 2011. Use the form below
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
MArble corporation had the following balances in its stockholders equity accounts at December 31, 2010.
common stock, $10 par, 50,000 shares authorized, 20,000 shares issued…$200,000
paid-in capital in excess of par value, common……250,000
retained eranings…….500,000
treausry stock, 1,000 shares……..(20,000)
total stockholders equity……….$930,000
The following transactions occured during 2011:
February 3 – sold and issued 3,000 ahares of common stock for $22 per share
May10 – declared a $0.50 per share dividend on common stock
October – 12 Sold 500 shares of the treausury stock for $20 per share
December – 31 Net income for the year was determined to be $75,000
Based on the above information, prepare a statement of stockholders equity for 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mary and Charles have owned a beach cottage for several years and have always used it for vacations. When they acquired the property, they had no intentions of renting it. Becaue family circumstances have changed they are considering using the cottage for only two weeks a year and renting it for the remainder of the year. Their AGI approzimates $80,000 per year, and they are in the 30% tax bracket (combined federal and state) Interest and real estate taxes total $8,000 per year and expected to continue at this level for the forseeable future. If Mary and Charles rent the property, their incremental revenue and expenses are projected to be:
Rent Income — $20,000
Rental Commissions — ($3,000)
Maintenance Expenses ($8,000)
Depreciation expense ($10,000)
If the cottage is converted to rental property they plan to be actively involved in key rental and maintenance decisions. Given the tax effects of converting the property to rental use, would the cash flow from renting the property be enough to meet the $12,000 annual mortage payment?
I don’t understand how it could even possibly meet the mortage payment and how this problem works.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mathis Co. at the end of 2012, its first year of operations, prepared a reconciliation between pretax financial income and taxable income as follows:
Pretax financial income $600,000
Estimated litigation expense 1,500,000
Installment sales (1,200,000)
___________
Taxable income $900,000
The estimated litigation expense of $1,500,000 will be deductible in 2014 when it is expected to be paid. The gross profit from the installment sales will be realized in the amount of $600,000 in each of the next two years. The estimated liability for litigation is classified as noncurrent and the installment accounts receivable are classified as $600,000 current and $600,000 noncurrent. The income tax rate is 30% for all years. What is the income tax expense?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Mayfield Company expects to have a cash balance of $46,000 on January 1, 2010. These are the relevant monthly budget data for the first two months of 2010.
1. Collections from customers: January $88,307, February $164,307.
2. Payments to suppliers: January $58,307, February $93,307.
3. Wages: January $30,000, February $40,000. Wages are paid in the month they are incurred.
4. Administrative expenses: January $21,000, February $28,000. These costs include depreciation of $1,000 per month. All other costs are paid as incurred.
5. Selling expenses: January $15,417, February $20,417. These costs are exclusive of depreciation. They are paid as incurred.
6. Sales of short-term investments in January are expected to realize $12,000 in cash. Mayfield has a line of credit at a local bank that enables it to borrow up to $25,000. The company wants to maintain a minimum monthly cash balance of $20,000.
Complete the cash budget for January and February below. (List multiple items under receipts, disbursements and financing from largest to smallest amounts, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)
MAYFIELD COMPANY
Cash Budget
For the Two Months Ending February 28, 2010
January February
Beginning cash balance $
$
Add: Receipts
RepaymentsCollections from customersWagesBorrowingsSelling expensesPayments to suppliersSale of short-term investmentsAdministrative expenses
WagesBorrowingsRepaymentsPayments to suppliersSale of short-term investmentsCollections from customersAdministrative expensesSelling expenses
Total receipts
Total available cash
Less: Disbursements
WagesAdministrative expensesSale of short-term investmentsRepaymentsPayments to suppliersSelling expensesCollections from customersBorrowings
WagesRepaymentsAdministrative expensesBorrowingsSelling expensesCollections from customersSale of short-term investmentsPayments to suppliers
Sale of short-term investmentsRepaymentsPayments to suppliersAdministrative expensesCollections from customersSelling expensesWagesBorrowings
BorrowingsWagesAdministrative expensesPayments to suppliersCollections from customersSale of short-term investmentsRepaymentsSelling expenses
Total disbursements
Excess (deficiency) of available cash over disbursements
Financing
RepaymentsWagesSelling expensesPayments to suppliersCollections from customersBorrowingsSale of short-term investmentsAdministrative expenses
BorrowingsSale of short-term investmentsCollections from customersSelling expensesPayments to suppliersRepaymentsWagesAdministrative expenses
Ending cash balance $
$
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Melissa Valdez is planning to expand her clothing business by opening another store. In planning for the new store, Melissa believes that selling prices and costs of the various products sold will be simlar to that of the existing store. In fact, she thinks that variable and fixed costs for the new store will be similar to that of the existing store, except that rent for the new store will be $300 per month more than the rent paid for the existing store. The followig information is available for the existing store for the year ended December 31, 2004:
Sales $200,00
Variable cost 130,000
Fixed cost 48,800
Deteremine the sales required for the new store to break even. Determine the sales required for the new store to earn a profit of $20,000 per year (keep in mind that the $300 increase in rent is a monthly amount and the fixed cost of $48,000 is an annual amount)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Melville Company produces a single product called a Pong. Melville has the capacity to produce 60,000 Pongs each year. If Melville produces at capacity, the per unit costs to produce and sell one Pong are as follows. Use the data for questions 7 to 9.
Direct materials
$15
Direct labor
12
Variable manufacturing overhead
8
Fixed manufacturing overhead
9
Variable selling expense
8
Fixed selling expense
3
The regular selling price for one Pong is $80. A special order has been received by Melville from Mowen Company to purchase 6,000 Pongs next year. If this special order is accepted, the variable selling expense will be reduced by 75%. However, Melville will have to purchase a specialized machine to engrave the Mowen name on each Pong in the special order. This machine will cost $9,000 and it will have no use after the special order is filled. The total fixed manufacturing overhead and selling expenses would be unaffected by this special order.
Assume Melville anticipates selling only 50,000 units of Pong to regular customers next year. If Mowen Company offers to buy the special order units at $65 per unit, the effect of accepting the special order on Melville’s operating income for next year should be a:
Answer
$60,000 increase.
$36,000 increase.
$90,000 decrease.
$159,000 increase.
Assume Melville anticipates selling only 50,000 units of Pong to regular customers next year. At what selling price for the 6,000 special order units would Melville be economically indifferent between accepting or rejecting the special order from Mowen? (That is the price at which the total contribution with or without the special order would be the same.)
Answer
$38.50.
$37.00.
$51.50.
$49.00.
Assume Melville can sell 58,000 units of Pong to regular customers next year and sale of 6000 units to this special order customer will result in losing the contribution on sales to regular customers at the regular price due to the 60,000 unit maximum production capacity. If Mowen Company offers to buy the special order units at $65 per unit, the effect of accepting the special order on Melville’s operating income next year should be a:
Answer
$192,000 increase.
$36,000 increase.
$47,000 increase.
$11,000 increase.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Last month, Willsted Company sold 460 units for $26.00 each. During the month, fixed costs were $2,510 and variable costs were $7.30 per unit.
1: Determine the unit contribution margin and contribution margin ratio. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places.Omit the “$” & “%” signs in your response.)
Unit contribution margin:_______
Contribution margin ratio:_______ %
2: Calculate the break-even point in units and sales dollars. (Round your intermediate calculations and break even sales dollars to 2 decimal places.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Break-even units:_______ units
Break-even sales dollars:$_______
3: Compute Willsted’s margin of safety in units and as a percentage of sales. (Round your margin of safety to the next whole number.Round your percentage of sales to 4 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)
Margin of safety:_______ units
Percentage of sales:_______ %
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For the next six months, Kurtz Company projects the following information (in units).
July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.
Retail demand 800 300 450 450 600 600
Dealer demand 600 750 900 1,050 1,200 1,350
Shop capacity 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500
Painting capacity 1,050 1,050 1,350 1,800 1,800 1,800
Demand drives production for that month and cannot be carried over from one month to another. Retail customers are satisfied first.
25. The production for July is projected to be:
A) 300 units.
B) 900 units.
C) 1,050 units.
D) 1,500 units.
26. The number of dealer units that will be produced and sold in September is:
A) 900 units.
B) 1,050 units.
C) 1,500 units.
D) 600 units.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
NASA has requested that Campbell Soup make special “ready to eat” meals for their International Space Station and Mission to Mars. The process would be the same for the soups NASA is ordering except an additional step to freeze dry the products to meet the specifications for the “ready to eat” meals used in space. Discuss the costs and other factors that Campbell Soup should consider for this special order and also provide your conclusion assuming you had sufficient information. (This is a special order question). Identify any tools such as regression analysis or CVP that will support the decision making process related to the question. If needed, use calculations or lists i.e. differential/avoidable costs as required for each question. Must list differential/avoidable costs! Please be as detailed and lengthy as possible.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Natalie has prepared the balance sheet and income statement of Cookie & Coffee
Creations Inc. for the first year of operations, but does not understand how to prepare the cash
flow statement.The income statement and balance sheet appear below. Recall that the company
started operations on November 1, 2012, so all of the opening balances are zero.
Additional information:
1. Recall from Chapter 15 that the company bought kitchen equipment (a commercial oven)
for $17,000 on November 1, 2012, and signed a $12,000 note payable to help pay for it.The
terms provide for semiannual fixed principal payments of $2,000 on May 1 and November 1
of each year, plus interest of 5%. All other furniture, fixture, and equipment were purchased
during the year for cash.
2. Recall from Chapter 14 that the company originally issued 25,930 common shares for
$25,930, of which 750 shares were repurchased from the lawyer for $500.
COOKIE & COFFEE CREATIONS INC.
Income Statement
Year Ended October 31, 2013
Sales $462,500
Cost of goods sold 231,250
Gross profit 231,250
Operating expenses
Salaries and wages expense $92,500
Depreciation expense 9,850
Other operating expenses 35,987 138,337
Income from operations 92,913
Other expenses
Interest expense 413
Income before income tax 92,500
Income tax expense 18,500
Net income $ 74,000
COOKIE & COFFEE CREATIONS INC.
Balance Sheet
October 31, 2013
Assets
Current assets
Cash $32,219
Accounts receivable 3,250
Inventory 17,897
Prepaid expenses 6,300 $ 59,666
Property, plant, and equipment
Furniture and fixtures $12,500
Accumulated depreciation”furniture and fixtures (1,250) 11,250
Computer equipment 4,200
Accumulated depreciation”computer equipment (600) 3,600
Kitchen equipment 83,000
Accumulated depreciation”kitchen equipment (8,300) 75,000 89,850
Total assets $149,516
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Current liabilities
Accounts payable $ 5,848
Income tax payable 18,500
Dividends payable 700
Salaries payable 2,250
Interest payable 188
Note payable”current portion 4,000 $ 31,486
Long-term liabilities
Note payable”long-term portion 6,000
Total liabilities 37,486
Stockholders’ equity
Paid-in capital
Preferred stock, 2,800 shares issued and
outstanding $ 14,000
Common stock, 25,930 shares issued, 25,180
outstanding 25,930 39,930
Retained earnings 72,600
Total paid-in capital and retained earnings 112,530
Less: Treasury stock”common (750 shares), at cost (500)
Total stockholders’ equity 112,030
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $149,516
Instructions
(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for Cookie & Coffee Creations Inc. for the year ended
October 31, 2013, using the indirect method.
(b) Prepare a statement of cash flows for Cookie & Coffee Creations Inc. for the year ended
October 31, 2013, using the direct method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Job order costing system
Custom Products, which uses a job order cost system, completed the following
transactions during the current month.
(a) Materials costing $65,000 were used on various jobs
(b) Time cards of direct workers indicate direct labor costs of $100,000 for the month
(c) Overhead is applied to jobs at a rate of 80% of direct labor cost
(d) Jobs with total accumulated costs of $150,000 were finished during the month
(e) Units costing $175,000 were sold during the month at sales prices totaling
$350,000. All sales were on account (accounts receivable). Custom Products
uses a perpetual inventory system.
In the space provided, prepare a general journal entry summarizing for the month each of the above categories of transactions. Explanations may be omitted.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On July 15, 2011, the city of Higgins Lake issued tax-supported term bonds having a face value of
$10,000,000 and maturing in 20 years. The bonds are dated July 15, 2011, and pay interest of 6 percent
semiannually on January 15 and July 15 of each year. The bonds were sold at a price of 102 and were
intended to finance construction of a new city jail. The premium on sale of the bonds was recorded
directly in the debt service fund and was immediately invested for eventual retirement of the debt.
For the fiscal year ending June 30, 2011, the city council approved a budget for the newly established
term bond debt service fund in the amount of $444,500, which includes $432,500 that will be transferred
from the General Fund as follows: (1) $300,000 on January 14, 2012 for the January 15, 2012 interest
payment due and (2) $132,500 on June 30, 2012 for investment in the debt service fund for retirement of
principal, and $12,000 of estimated revenue for interest on investment of premium.
Required: Make all journal entries, including the budget entry and closing entry, required in the term
bond debt service fund for the fiscal year ending June 30, 2012. Investment revenue during the year was
$11,800, all of which added to the investment balance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kazaam Company, a merchandiser, recently completed its calendar-year 2011 operations. For the year, (1) all sales credit sales, (2) all credits to Account Receivable reflect cash receipts from customers (3) all purchases of inventory are on credit, (4) all debits to Accounts Payable reflect cash payments for inventory, and (5) Other expenses are paid in advance and are initially debited to Prepaid Expense. The company’s balance sheets and income statement follow.
KAZAAM COMPANY
Income Statement
For Year Ended December 31, 2011
Sales $496,250
Cost of Goods sold 250,000
Gross profit 246,250
Operating expenses
Depreciation expense $18,750
Other expenses 136,500 155,250
Other gains (losses)
Loss on sale of equipment 5,125
Income before taxes 85,875
Income tax expense 12,125
Net Income $73,750
KAZAAM COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31,2011 and 2010
2011 2012
Assets
Cash $53,875 $76,625
Accounts receivable 65,000 49,625
Merchandise Inventory 273,750 252,500
Prepaid expenses 5,375 6,250
Equipment 159,500 110,000
Accum. Depreciation – equip (34,625) (44,000)
Total Assets $522,875 $451,000
Liabilities and Equity
Accounts Payable $88,125 $116,625
Short term notes payable 10,000 6,250
Long term notes payable 93,750 53,750
Common stock, $5 par value 168,750 156,250
Paid in Capital in excess of par, common stock 32,500 0
Retained earnings 129,750 118,125
Total Liabilities and equity $522,875 $451,000
Additional Information on Year 2011
a. the loss on the cash sale of equipment was $5,125 (details in b)
b. Sold equipment costing $46,875 with accumulated depreciation of $28,125 for $13,624 cash.
c. Purchased equipment costing $96,375 by paying $25,000 cash and signing a long term note payable for the balance.
d. Borrowed $3,750 cash by signing a short term note payable.
e. Paid $31,375 cash to reduce the long term notes payable.
f. Issued 2,500 shares of common stock for $18 cash per share.
g. Declared and paid cash dividends of $62,125.
Required
1. Prepare a complete statement of cash flows; report its operating activities using the indirect method. Disclose any noncash investing and financing activities in a note.
Analysis component
2. Analyze and discuss the statement of cash flows prepared in part 1, giving special attention to the wisdom of the cash dividend payment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kelly’s Boutique is contemplating several means of financing their acquisition of $100,000 in special equipment. One alternative is to borrow $100,000 from a local bank for 10 years at 12 percent per annum. The bank has asked them to produce a 1-year cash budget broken down by months (January through December). Sales of $30,000 are expected in the first month, with each month thereafter increasing 2 percent. Purchases are based on an expected cost of sales of 55% and a required ending inventory of 70% of next month’s cost of sales. Beginning inventory was $11,000. Sales for January next year are expected to be $40,000. Sales in the previous November and December were $29,000 and $28,000, respectively. Expenses include advertising expense of $1000, depreciation expense of $800, interest expense of $1000, payroll expense of $8000, supplies expense of $500, and utilities expense of $600 per month throughout the year. All expenses except depreciation are paid in the month during which they are incurred. Collections in the month of sale are expected to be 50%, collections in the first month following a sale 40%, and in the second month 10%. Payments in the month of purchase are expected to be 75%, payments in the first month following a purchase 15%, and payments in the second month to be 10%. Purchases in the previous Nov and Dec were $16000 and $17000. Proceeds from the $100000 loan are expected in June, and $100000 of equipment will be purchased in July. The beginning cash balance in January was $22000. Please create a cash budget with formulas.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kelly’s boutique is contemplating several means of financing their acquisition of $100,000 in special equipment. One alternative is to borrow $100,000 from a local bank for 10 years at 12 percent per annum. The bank has asked them to produce a 1-year cash budget broken down by months(January through December). Sales of $30,000 are expected in the first month, with each month thereafter increasing 2 percent. Purchases are based on an expected cost of sales of 55 percent and a required ending inventory of 70 percent of next month’s sales. Beginning inventory was $11,000. Sales for January next year are expected to be $40,000. Sales in the previous November and December were $29,000 and $28,000, respectively. Expenses include advertising expense of $900, depreciation expense of $800, interest expense of $1,000, payroll expense of $8,000, supplies expense of $500, and utilities expense of $600 per month throughout the year. All expenses except depreciation are paid in the month during which they are incurred. Collections in the month of sale are expected to be 50 percent, collection in the first month following a sale 40 percent, and in the second month 10 percent. Payments in the month of purchase are expected to be 75 percent, payments in the first month following a purchase 15 percent, and payment in the second month to be 10 percent. Purchases in the previous November and December were $16,000 and $17,000, respectively. Proceeds from the $100,000 loan are expected in June, and $100,000 of equipment will be purchased in July. Monthly payments of $1,400 on the loan also begin in July. The beginning cash balance in January was $22,000.
Using the Ch6-04 file to start your work, create a cash budget that is based on the assumptions listed in the previous paragraph. Use excels grouping feature to group operating cash receipts, operating cash payment, cash from (to) operating activities, cash from (to) investing activities, and cash from (to) financing activities and also to group the twelve monthly columns together.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Kirsten Corporation makes 100,000 units per year of a part called a B345 gasket for use in one of its products. Data concerning the unit production costs of the B345 gasket follow:
direct materials …. 0.15
direct labor …. 0.10
variable manufacturing overhead ….. 0.13
fixed manufacturing overhead …. 0.24
total manufacturing cost per unit …. 0.62
An outside supplier has offered to sell Kirsten Corporation all of the B345 gaskets it requires. If Kirsten Corporation decided to discontinue making the B345 gaskets, 25% of the above fixed manufacturing overhead costs could be avoided.
Required:
Assume Kirsten Corporation has no alternative use for the facilities presently devoted to production of the B345 gaskets. If the outside supplier offers to sell the gaskets for $0.46 each, should Kirsten Corporation accept the offer? Fully support your answer with appropriate calculations
direct
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
| Kitchen Magician, Inc. has assembled the following data pertaining to its two most popular products. |
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Blender |
Electric Mixer |
|
|
|
|
| Direct Material |
$6.00 |
$11.00 |
|
|
|
|
| Direct Labor |
$4.00 |
$9.00 |
|
|
|
|
| Manufacturing overhead @ 16 per machine hour |
$16.00 |
$32.00 |
|
|
|
|
| Cost if purchasing from an outside supplier |
$20.00 |
$38.00 |
|
|
|
|
| Annual Demand (Units) |
20,000 |
28,000 |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Past experience has shown that the fixed manufacturing overhead component included in the cost per machine hour averages $10. Kitchen Magician’s management has a policy of filling all sales orders, even if it means purchasing from outside suppliers. |
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 1. If 50,000 machine hours are available, and management desires to follow an optimal strategy, how many units of each product should the firm manufacture? How many units of each product should be purchased? |
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 2. With all other things constant, if management is able to reduce the direct material for an electric mixer to $6 per unit, how many units of each product should be manufactured? Purchased? |
|
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
| |
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
| |
|
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
KRUG INC.
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31, 2012 and 2011
2012 2011
Assets
Cash $ 26,400 $ 30,550
Accounts receivable, net 14,050 12,150
Inventory 90,100 70,150
Equipment 49,900 44,500
Accum. depreciation”Equipment (22,500 ) (18,300 )
Total assets $ 157,950 $ 139,050
Liabilities and Equity
Accounts payable $ 23,350 $ 25,400
Salaries payable 1,050 600
Common stock, no par value 107,000 100,000
Retained earnings 26,550 13,050
Total liabilities and equity $ 157,950 $ 139,050
KRUG INC.
Income Statement
For Year Ended December 31, 2012
Sales $ 47,575
Cost of goods sold (17,950 )
Gross profit 29,625
Operating expenses
Depreciation expense $ 4,200
Other expenses 8,550
Total operating expense 12,750
Income before taxes 16,875
Income taxes expense 3,375
Net income $ 13,500
Additional Information
a. No dividends are declared or paid in 2012.
b. Issued additional stock for $7,000 cash in 2012.
c. Purchased equipment for cash in 2012; no equipment was sold in 2012.
1. Use the above financial statements and additional information to prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2012, using the indirect method. (Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lads and Lassies (L&L), an SEC registrant, has its year end on the Saturday closest to January 31. Fiscal 2006, 2005, and 2004, which include 52 weeks each, ended on January 28, 2006, January 29, 2005, and January 31, 2004, respectively.
L&L manufactures and sells exclusive children’s clothing to the most discerning clientele. Its products offer high quality and modern style, including everything from a colorful collection of cashmere sweaters to perfect vintage washed tees. The products are sold through its boutiques, each of which resembles a New England seaside cottage.
The boutiques also include the Sassy Spa for Spoiled Pip-Squeaks (Sassy Spa), which was introduced in the third quarter of fiscal 2005. These spas for children offer hair and nail care, make-up application, massage services, and even etiquette classes.
L&L has the following information that needs to be analyzed to determine the appropriate income statement presentation.
1. Net Sales
L&L had net sales of $74.5 million in fiscal 2005 and $86.5 million in fiscal 2006; an increase of $12 million, or 16.1 percent. The increase in net sales was driven, in part, by an increase in revenue from services provided by Sassy Spa, which increased from $3.9 million in fiscal 2005 to $11.2 million in fiscal 2006. The remaining increase in total net sales of $4.7 million was because of an increase in the average transaction value, driven by higher average retail sales on a per unit basis due to the favorable customer response to the use of more vintage prints in its garments.
2. Gross Profit
Gross profit, which represents net sales less cost of sales, increased from $28 million in fiscal 2005 to $30.4 million in fiscal 2006; an increase of $2.4 million, or 8.6 percent.
Cost of sales includes expenses incurred to acquire and produce inventory for sale, such as product costs, freight-in and import costs, and direct labor costs for Sassy Spa employees. However, cost of sales excludes depreciation. Cost of sales increased from $46.5 million in fiscal 2005 to $56.1 million in fiscal 2006; an increase of $9.6 million, or 20.6 percent, primarily as the result of an increase in the cost of Sassy Spa services.
3. Gain on Sale of Corporate Headquarters
L&L relocated its corporate headquarters to Wilton, Connecticut. In connection with the relocation, L&L sold the abandoned building and realized a gain of $1.7 million on the sale.
4. Class Action Settlement
L&L became aware that the “vintage” materials provided by one of its fabric suppliers were not, in fact, vintage. During fiscal 2006, L&L settled a class action lawsuit related to the legal case against the supplier in connection with this scandal and received proceeds of $2.7 million.
Required:
? Determine the appropriate income statement presentation (sales, cost of sales, gross profit, operating income or expense, non-operating income or expense) for each item noted above. Note that L&L presents a subtotal for operating income on the income statement.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Larner Corporation is a diversified manufacturer of industrial goods. The company%u2019s activity-based costing system contains the following six activity cost pools and activity rates:
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
Activity Rates
|
|
Supporting direct labor
|
|
$ 7.00 per direct labor-hour
|
|
Machine processing
|
|
$ 3.00
|
per machine-hour
|
|
Machine setups
|
|
$ 40.00
|
per setup
|
|
Production orders
|
|
$ 160.00
|
per order
|
|
Shipments
|
|
$ 120.00
|
per shipment
|
|
Product sustaining
|
|
$ 800.00
|
per product
|
Activity data have been supplied for the following two products:
|
|
| |
J78
|
W52
|
|
Direct labor-hours
|
1,000
|
40
|
|
Machine-hours
|
3,200
|
30
|
|
Machine setups
|
5
|
1
|
|
Production orders
|
5
|
1
|
|
Shipments
|
10
|
1
|
|
Product sustaining
|
1
|
1
|
Required:
Determine the total overhead cost that would be assigned to each of the products. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
|
Activity Cost Pool
|
J78
|
W52
|
|
Supporting direct labor
|
$
|
$
|
|
Machine processing
|
|
|
|
Machine setups
|
|
|
|
Production orders
|
|
|
|
Shipments
|
|
|
|
Product sustaining
|
|
|
|
Total overhead cost
|
$
|
$
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Larner Corporation is a diversified manufacturer of industrial goods. The company’s activity-based costing system contains the following six activity cost pools and activity rates: Activity Cost Pool Activity Rates Supporting direct labor $ 7.00 per direct labor-hour Machine processing $ 3.00 per machine-hour Machine setups $ 40.00 per setup Production orders $ 160.00 per order Shipments $ 120.00 per shipment Product sustaining $ 800.00 per product Activity data have been supplied for the following two products: Total Expected Activity J78 W52 Direct labor-hours 1,000 40 Machine-hours 3,200 30 Machine setups 5 1 Production orders 5 1 Shipments 10 1 Product sustaining 1 1 Required: Determine the total overhead cost that would be assigned to each of the products. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Activity Cost Pool J78 W52 Supporting direct labor $ $ Machine processing Machine setups Production orders Shipments Product sustaining Total overhead cost $ $
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Laura Eddy opened Eddy’s Carpet Cleaners on March 1. During March, the following transactions were completed.
Mar. 1 Invested $10,377 cash in the business.
1 Purchased used truck for $6,120, paying $3,060 cash and the balance on account.
3 Purchased cleaning supplies for $1,176 on account.
5 Paid $1,752 cash on one-year insurance policy effective March 1.
14 Billed customers $4,870 for cleaning services.
18 Paid $1,664 cash on amount owed on truck and $414 on amount owed on cleaning supplies.
20 Paid $1,940 cash for employee salaries.
21 Collected $1,497 cash from customers billed on March 14.
28 Billed customers $2,646 for cleaning services.
31 Paid gas and oil for month on truck $214.
31 Withdrew $708 cash for personal use.
The chart of accounts for Eddy’s Carpet Cleaners contains the following accounts: No. 101 Cash, No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 128 Cleaning Supplies, No. 130 Prepaid Insurance, No. 157 Equipment, No. 158 Accumulated Depreciation-Equipment, No. 201 Accounts Payable, No. 212 Salaries Payable, No. 301 L. Eddy, Capital, No. 306, L. Eddy, Drawing, No. 350 Income Summary, No. 400 Service Revenue, No. 633 Gas & Oil Expense, No. 634 Cleaning Supplies Expense, No. 711 Depreciation Expense, No. 722 Insurance Expense, and No. 726 Salaries Expense
Journalize the March transactions. Use page J1 for the journal. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2. If amounts are the same, list alphabetically.)
General Journal
J1
Date Account/Description Debit Credit
Mar. 1
Mar. 1
Mar. 3
Mar. 5
Mar. 14
Mar. 18
Mar.20
Mar. 21
Mar. 28
Mar. 31
Mar. 31
Prepare a trial balance at March 31 on a worksheet. Enter the following adjustments on the worksheet and complete the worksheet. (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)
Earned but unbilled revenue at March 31 was $638.
Depreciation on equipment for the month was $263.
One-twelfth of the insurance expired.
An inventory count shows $394 of cleaning supplies on hand at March 31.
Accrued but unpaid employee salaries were $503.
EDDY’S CARPET CLEANERS
Worksheet
For the Month Ended March 31, 2010
Trial Balance
Adjustments
Adjusted Trial Balance
Income Statement
Balance Sheet
Account Titles Dr. Cr. Dr. Cr. Dr. Cr. Dr. Cr. Dr. Cr.
Cash
Accounts Receivable
Cleaning Supplies
Prepaid Insurance
Equipment
Accounts Payable
L. Eddy, Capital
L. Eddy, Drawings
Service Revenue
Gas & Oil Expense
Salaries Expense
Totals
Depreciation Expense
Accumulated Depreciation
Insurance Expense
Cleaning Supplies Expense
Salaries Payable
Totals
Net Income
Totals
Prepare the income statement and owner’s equity statement for March and a classified balance sheet at March 31. (List amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2. List assets in order of liquidity and liabilities from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2. If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)
EDDY’S CARPET CLEANERS
Income Statement
Revenues
$
Expenses
$
Total expenses
Net income
$
EDDY’S CARPET CLEANERS
Owner’s Equity Statement
$
Add:
Less:
$
EDDY’S CARPET CLEANERS
Balance Sheet
Assets
Current Assets
$
Total current assets
Property, plant and equipment
$
:
Total assets
$
Liabilities and Owner’s Equity
Current liabilities
$
Total current liabilities
Owner’s Equity
Total liabilities and owner’s equity
$
Journalize adjusting entries. Use page J2 for the journal.
General Journal
J2
Date Account/Description Debit Credit
Mar. 31
(To adjust accounts receivable.)
Mar. 31
(To adjust depreciation.)
Mar. 31
(To adjust insurance.)
Mar. 31
(To adjust cleaning supplies.)
Mar. 31
(To adjust salaries.)
Journalize the closing entries. Use page J3 for the journal. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.)
General Journal
J3
Date Description/Account Debit Credit
Mar. 31
(To close revenue account.)
Mar. 31
(To close expense accounts.)
Mar. 31
(To close net income.)
Mar. 31
(To close drawings.)
Post the March transactions and adjusting entries using the three-column form of account. Post the closing entries and complete the closing process. (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)
Cash
No. 101
Date
Explanation
Ref.
Debit
Credit
Balance
Mar. 1 J1
1 J1
5 J1
18 J1
20 J1
21 J1
31 J1
31 J1
Accounts Receivable
No. 112
Date
Explanation
Ref.
Debit
Credit
Balance
Mar. 14 J1
21 J1
28 J1
31 Adjusting J2
Cleaning Supplies
No. 128
Date
Explanation
Ref.
Debit
Credit
Balance
Mar. 3 J1
31 Adjusting J2
Prepaid Insurance
No. 130
Date
Explanation
Ref.
Debit
Credit
Balance
Mar. 5 J1
31 Adjusting J2
Equipment
No. 157
Date
Explanation
Ref.
Debit
Credit
Balance
Mar. 1 J1
Accumulated Depreciation – Equipment
No. 158
Date
Explanation
Ref.
Debit
Credit
Balance
Mar. 31 J2
Accounts Payable
No. 201
Date
Explanation
Ref.
Debit
Credit
Balance
Mar. 1 J1
3 J1
18 J1
Salaries Payable
No. 212
Date
Explanation
Ref.
Debit
Credit
Balance
Mar. 31 Adjusting J2
L. Eddy, Capital
No. 301
Date
Explanation
Ref.
Debit
Credit
Balance
Mar. 1 J1
31 Closing J3
31 Closing J3
L. Eddy, Drawing
No. 306
Date
Explanation
Ref.
Debit
Credit
Balance
Mar. 31 J1
31 Closing J3
Income Summary
No. 350
Date
Explanation
Ref.
Debit
Credit
Balance
Mar. 31 Closing J3
31 Closing J3
31 Closing J3
Service Revenue
No. 400
Date
Explanation
Ref.
Debit
Credit
Balance
Mar. 14 J1
28 J1
31 Adjusting J2
31 Closing J3
Gas & Oil Expense
No. 633
Date
Explanation
Ref.
Debit
Credit
Balance
Mar. 31 J1
31 Closing J3
Cleaning Supplies Expense
No. 634
Date
Explanation
Ref.
Debit
Credit
Balance
Mar. 31 Adjusting J2
31 Closing J3
Depreciation Expense
No. 711
Date
Explanation
Ref.
Debit
Credit
Balance
Mar. 31 Adjusting J2
31 Closing J3
Insurance Expense
No. 722
Date
Explanation
Ref.
Debit
Credit
Balance
Mar. 31 Adjusting J2
31 Closing J3
Salaries Expense
No. 726
Date
Explanation
Ref.
Debit
Credit
Balance
Mar. 20 J3
31 Adjusting J3
31 Closing J3
Prepare a post-closing trial balance at March 31. (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)
EDDY’S CARPET CLEANERS
Post-Closing Trial Balance
March 31, 2010
Trial Balance
Account Titles Dr. Cr.
Cash $ $
Accounts Receivable
Cleaning Supplies
Prepaid Insurance
Equipment
Accumulated Depreciation
Accounts Payable
Salaries Payable
L. Eddy, Capital
L. Eddy, Drawings
Service Revenue
Gas & Oil Expense
Salaries Expense
Depreciation Expense
Insurance Expense
Cleaning Supplies Expense
$
$
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Lessard Corporation manufactures a product with the following full unit costs at a avolume of 2,000 units:
Direct materials $ 400
Direct labor 160
Manufacturing Overhead (30% variable) 300
Selling Expenses (50% variable) 150
Administrative Expenses (10% variable) 140
Total Per Unit $ 1,150
A company recently approached Lessard’s management with an offer to purchase 200 units for $900 each. Lessard currently sells the product to dealers for $1,300 each. Lessard’s capacity is sufficient to produce the extra 200 units. No selling expenses would be incurred on the special order. If Lessard’s management accepts the offer, profits will:
A. Decrease by $50,000
B. Increase by $47,200
C. Increase by $127,000
D. Decrease by $80,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Let’s say that a company produces a single product with a sale price of $25 per unit. The variable cost per unit is $15 and the company incurs fixed costs of $50,000 per month. What is the breakeven point for this company? How much would we expect in profit for every unit sold above breakeven? What if the company has its budget set at a $35,000 target profit? How many units must it sell?
Let’s work through an example so that we can all see how to apply these concepts! Using the data ONLY in Problem 7.12, pp. 301 and 302, let’s calculate/prepare:
1. The product unit cost using absorption;
2. Income statement for the month using absorption costing;
3. The product unit cost using contribution approach; and
4. Income statement for the month using variable costing.
Questions:
1. What would the value of ending inventory be, using absorption costing?
2. What would the value of ending inventory be, using the contribution margin approach?
3. Which method (absorption or contribution margin) provides us with the most accurate net income? Please explain.
4. How many units must be sold to reach a profit target of $50,000?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
LIFO (Last- In First Out)
Sales- 85,529
Cost of goods sold-42,503
Operating Expenses (including depreciation)- 30,634
Depreciation- 14,044
Cash paid for inventory purchases- 35,047
FIFO (First In- First Out)
Sales- 85,529
Cost of goods sold- 31,094
Operating Expenses (including depreciation)- 30,634
Depreciation- 14,044
Cash paid for inventory purchases- 35,047
Determine net income under each approach. Assume a 30% tax rate. (Round your calculations and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 5,250.) For both LIFO and FIFO.
Determine net cash provided by operating activities under each approach. Assume that all sales were on a cash basis and that income taxes and operating expenses, other than depreciation, were on a cash basis. (Round your calculations and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 5,250.) For both LIFO and FIFO
Calculate the quality of earnings ratio under each approach. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 3.15.) For both LIFO and FIFO.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Linda Blye opened Cardinal Window Washing Inc on July 1st2010. During July the following transactions werecompleted.
July
1. Issued 11,000 shares of common stock for $11,000cash.
1. Purchased used truck for $9,000, paying $2,000 cash and thebalance on account.
3. Purchased cleaning supplies for $900 on account
5. Paid $1,800 cash on 1-yr insurance policy effective July1st
12. Billed customers $3,200 for cleaning services
18. Paid $1,000 cash on amount owed on truck and $500 onamount owed on cleaning supplies
20. Paid $2,000 cash for employee salaries
21. Collected $1,400 cash from customers billed on July12th
25. Billed customers $2,500 for cleaning services
31. Paid $260 for gas and oil used in the truck duringmonth
31. Declared and paid $600 cash dividend
Chart of Accounts:Cash, Accounts Receviable,cleaningsupplies,prepaid insurance,equpiment,accumulateddepreciation-equpiment, accounts payable,salaries payabe,commonstock,retained earnings,dividends,income summary,service revenue,gas&oil expense, cleaning supplies expense,depreciationexpense,insurance expense,salaries expense.
INSTRUCTIONS.
1) Journalize the july transactions
2) Post to the ledger accounts ( Use T Accounts)
3)Prepare trial balance at July 31st
4)Journalize 1)services provided but unbilled and uncollectedat July 31st were $1,700
2)depreciationon equipment for the month was $250
3) one-twelfth of the insurance expired
4)an inventory count shows $360 of cleaning supplies on hand atJuly 31st
5)accrued but unpaid employee salaries were $400
5) Post adjusting entries to the T Account
6) Prepare an adjusted trial balance
7) Prepare the income statement and a retained earningsstatement for July and a classified balance sheet at july31st
8) journalize and post closing entries and complete theclosing process
9) Prepare a post-closing trial balance at July 31st
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Linda Blye opened Cardinal Window Washing Inc on July 1st2010. During July the following transactions werecompleted.
July
1. Issued 11,000 shares of common stock for $11,000cash.
1. Purchased used truck for $9,000, paying $2,000 cash and thebalance on account.
3. Purchased cleaning supplies for $900 on account
5. Paid $1,800 cash on 1-yr insurance policy effective July1st
12. Billed customers $3,200 for cleaning services
18. Paid $1,000 cash on amount owed on truck and $500 onamount owed on cleaning supplies
20. Paid $2,000 cash for employee salaries
21. Collected $1,400 cash from customers billed on July12th
25. Billed customers $2,500 for cleaning services
31. Paid $260 for gas and oil used in the truck duringmonth
31. Declared and paid $600 cash dividend
Chart of Accounts:Cash, Accounts Receviable,cleaningsupplies,prepaid insurance,equpiment,accumulateddepreciation-equpiment, accounts payable,salaries payabe,commonstock,retained earnings,dividends,income summary,service revenue,gas&oil expense, cleaning supplies expense,depreciationexpense,insurance expense,salaries expense.
INSTRUCTIONS.
1) Journalize the july transactions
2) Post to the ledger accounts ( Use T Accounts)
3)Prepare trial balance at July 31st
4)Journalize 1)services provided but unbilled and uncollectedat July 31st were $1,700
2)depreciationon equipment for the month was $250
3) one-twelfth of the insurance expired
4)an inventory count shows $360 of cleaning supplies on hand atJuly 31st
5)accrued but unpaid employee salaries were $400
5) Post adjusting entries to the T Account
6) Prepare an adjusted trial balance
7) Prepare the income statement and a retained earningsstatement for July and a classified balance sheet at july31st
8) journalize and post closing entries and complete theclosing process
9) Prepare a post-closing trial balance at July 31st
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A list of financial statement items is given below.
(a) Accounts receivable
(b) Rent payable
(c) Retained earnings
(d) Cost of sales
(e) Prepaid rent
(f) Supplies expense
(g) Equipment
(h) Dividends
(i) Depreciation expense
(j) Copyrights
(k) Accrued liabilities
(l) Wages payable
(m) Land
(n) Notes payable
(o) Service revenue
(p) Inventory
(q) Advertising expense
(r) Common stock
(s) Cash
(t) Gross profit
Identify which of the statement each of these accounts belongs on by using the following codes: I=income statement, B=balance sheet, SE=statement of stockholders’ equity. Two of the accounts will have more than one statement on which they will actually appear. You should just enter the lettered item (such as a, b, c, etc) and answer (B, I, or SE).
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Java Source, Inc. (JSI), is a processor and distributor of a variety of blends of coffee. The company buys coffee beans from around the world and roasts, blends, and packages them for resale. JSI offers a large variety of different coffees that it sells to gourmet shops in one-pound bags. The major cost of the coffee is raw materials. However, the company’s predominantly automated roasteing, blending, and packing processes requires a substanial amount of manufacturing overhead. The company uses relatively little direct labor.
Some of Jsi’s coffees are very popular and sell in large volumes, while a few of the newer blends sell in very low volumes. JSI prices its coffees at manufacturing cost plus a markup of 25%, with some adjustments made to keep the company’s prices competitive.
For the coming year, JSI’s budget includes estimated manufacturing overhead costs of $2,200,000. JSI assigns manufacturing overhead to products on the basis of direct labor-hours. The expected direct labor cost totals $600,000, which represents 50,000 hours of direct labor time. Based on the sales budget and expected raw materials costs, the company will purchase and use $5,000,000 of raw materials (mostly coffee beans) during the year.
The expected costs for direct materials and direct labor for one-pound bags of two of the company’s coffee products appear below.
Kenya Dark Viet Select
Direct materials $4.50 $2.90
Direct labor (0.02 hours per bag) $0.24 $0.24
JSI’s controllers believe that the company’s traditional costing system may be providing misleading cost information. To determine whether or not this is correct, the controller has prepared an analysis of the year’s expected manufacturing overhead costs, as shown in the following table:
Activity Cost Pool
Activity Measure Expected Activity
for the Year Expected Cost
for the Year
Purchasing Purchase orders 2,000 orders $560,000
Material handling Number of setups 1,000 setups $193,000
Quality control Number of batches 500 batches $90,000
Roasting Roasting hours 95,000 roasting hours $1,045,000
Blending Blending hours 32,000 blending hours $192,000
Packaging Packaging hours 24,000 packaging hours $120,000
Total maufacturing
overhead costs
$2,200,000
Data regarding the expected production of Kenya Dark and Viet Select coffee are presented below.
Kenya Dark Viet Select
Expected sales 80,000 pounds 4,000 pounds
Batch size 5,000 pounds 500 pounds
Setups 2 per batch 2 per batch
Purchase order size 20,000 pounds 500 pounds
Roasting time per 100 pounds 1.5 roasting hours 1.5 roasting hours
B lending time per 100 pounds 0.5 blending hours 0.5 blending hours
Packaging time per 100 pounds 0.3 packaging hours 0.3 packaging hours
Requirements:
b. Using the data developed in (2a) above, compute the amount of manufacturing overhead cost per pound of Kenya Dark coffee and the Viet Select Coffee. Round all computations to the nearest whole cent.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Java Source, Inc. (JSI), is a processor and distributor of a variety of blends of coffee. The company buys coffee beans from around the world and roasts, blends, and packages them for resale. JSI offers a large variety of different coffees that it sells to gourmet shops in one-pound bags. The major cost of the coffee is raw materials. However, the company’s predominantly automated roasteing, blending, and packing processes requires a substanial amount of manufacturing overhead. The company uses relatively little direct labor.
Some of Jsi’s coffees are very popular and sell in large volumes, while a few of the newer blends sell in very low volumes. JSI prices its coffees at manufacturing cost plus a markup of 25%, with some adjustments made to keep the company’s prices competitive.
For the coming year, JSI’s budget includes estimated manufacturing overhead costs of $2,200,000. JSI assigns manufacturing overhead to products on the basis of direct labor-hours. The expected direct labor cost totals $600,000, which represents 50,000 hours of direct labor time. Based on the sales budget and expected raw materials costs, the company will purchase and use $5,000,000 of raw materials (mostly coffee beans) during the year.
The expected costs for direct materials and direct labor for one-pound bags of two of the company’s coffee products appear below.
Kenya Dark Viet Select
Direct materials $4.50 $2.90
Direct labor (0.02 hours per bag) $0.24 $0.24
JSI’s controllers believe that the company’s traditional costing system may be providing misleading cost information. To determine whether or not this is correct, the controller has prepared an analysis of the year’s expected manufacturing overhead costs, as shown in the following table:
Activity Cost Pool
Activity Measure Expected Activity
for the Year Expected Cost
for the Year
Purchasing Purchase orders 2,000 orders $560,000
Material handling Number of setups 1,000 setups $193,000
Quality control Number of batches 500 batches $90,000
Roasting Roasting hours 95,000 roasting hours $1,045,000
Blending Blending hours 32,000 blending hours $192,000
Packaging Packaging hours 24,000 packaging hours $120,000
Total maufacturing
overhead costs
$2,200,000
Data regarding the expected production of Kenya Dark and Viet Select coffee are presented below.
Kenya Dark Viet Select
Expected sales 80,000 pounds 4,000 pounds
Batch size 5,000 pounds 500 pounds
Setups 2 per batch 2 per batch
Purchase order size 20,000 pounds 500 pounds
Roasting time per 100 pounds 1.5 roasting hours 1.5 roasting hours
B lending time per 100 pounds 0.5 blending hours 0.5 blending hours
Packaging time per 100 pounds 0.3 packaging hours 0.3 packaging hours
Requirements:
c. Determine the unit product cost of one pound of the Kenya Dark coffee and one pound of the Viet Select coffee.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
You have been given the following information about the production of Gamma Co., and are asked to provide the plant manager with information for a meeting with the vice president of operations.
Standard Cost Card
Direct materials (7 pounds at $3 per pound) $21.00
Direct labor (0.9 hours at $5) 4.50
Variable overhead (0.9 hours at $4 per hour) 3.60
Fixed overhead (0.9 hours at $8 per hour) 7.20
$36.30
The following is a production report for the most recent period of operations.
Variances
Costs Total Standard Cost Price Quantity
Direct materials $464,100 $99,225 F $8,400 U
Direct labor 99,450 8,316 U -450 U
Instructions
(Round cost per pound and rate paid per hour to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50.)
(a) How many units were produced during the period?
(b) How many pounds of raw material were purchased and used during the period? pounds
(c) What was the actual cost per pound of raw materials? $ per pound
(d) How many actual direct labor hours were worked during the period? hours
(e) What was the actual rate paid per direct labor hour? $ per hour
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Harder company manufactures a product thats sells for $50 per unit. Harder incurrs a variable cost per unit of $30 and $3,400,000 in total fixed costs to produce this product. It is currently selling 200,000 units.
Instructions: Complete each of the following requirements, presenting labeled supporting computation
(a) Compute and label the contribution margin per unit and contribution margin ratio.
(b) Using the contribution margin per unit, compute the break-even point in units.
(c) Using the contribution margin ratio, compute the break-even point in dollars.
(d) Compute the margin of safety and margin of safety ratio.
(e) Compute the number of units that must be sold in order to generate net income of $400,000 using the contribution margin per unit.
(f) Should Harder give a commission to its salesman based on 10% of sales, if it will decrease fixed costs by $400,000 and increase sales volume 10%? Support your answer with labeled computations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
SOmeone please help even if you answer each section in a seperate post.
Performance Castings Inc. casts blades for turbine engines. Within the Casting Dept alloy is the first melted in a crucible, then poured into molds to produce teh castings. On March 1, there were 900 pounds of alloy in process, which were 60% complete as to conversion. The Work In Process balance for these 900 pounds was $140,940, deterimed as follows: Direct Materials $135,000 adn Conversion 5,940 = 140,940. During March the casting Department was charged $1,241,000 for 8,500 pounds of alloy and $33,900 for direct labor. Factory Overhead is applied to the department at a rate of 150% of direct labor. The department transferred out 8700 pound of finished castings to the Machining Departement. The March 31 inventory in process was 45% complete as to conversion. Questions:
A. Prepare the March Journal entry for the Casting Department for the materials charged to prodcution.
B. Prepare the March Journal entry for the Casting Department for the conversion costs charged to production.
C. Prepare the march Journal entry for the Casting Dept. for the completed production transferred to teh Machining Dept.
D. Determine the Work In Process Casting Dept. March 31 Balance.
E. Compute the Change in cost per equivilant unit for direct Materials and Conversion from the prvious month. Change in Materials ________________ $_____________________
Change in Conversion _______________ $________________________
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Can someone help explain IN DETAIL how to get the answers for the second part of the question where it asks about how it would appear AFTER the proposed changes?
Outback Outfitters sells recreational equipment. One of the company’s products, a small camp stove, sells for $50 per unit. Variable expenses are $32 per stove, and fixed expenses associated with the stove total $108,000 per month.
At present, the company is selling 8,000 stoves per month. The sales manager is convinced that a 10% reduction in the selling price would result in a 25% increase in monthly sales of stoves. Prepare two contribution format income statements, one under present operating conditions, and one as operations would appear after the proposed changes. Show both total and per unit data on your statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Hewtex Electronics manufactures two products, tape recorders and electronic calculators, and sells them nationally to wholesalers and retailers. The Hewtex management is very pleased with the company’s performance for the current fiscal year. Projected sales through DecemA?¬ber 31, 2010, indicate that 70,000 tape recorders and 140,000 calculaA?¬tors will be sold this year. The projected earnings statement, which appears below, shows that Hewtex will exceed its earnings goal of 9% on sales after taxes.
The tape recorder business has been fairly stable for the last few years, and the company does not intend to change the tape recorder price. However, the competition among manufacturers of electronic calculators has been increasing. Hewtex’s calculators have been very popular with consumers. In order to sustain this interest in its calcuA?¬lators and to meet the price reductions expected from competitors, management has decided to reduce the wholesale price of its calculator from $22.50 to $20.00 per unit effective January 1, 2011. At the same time, the company plans to spend an additional $57,000 on advertising during the fiscal year 2011. As a consequence of these actions, manageA?¬ment estimates that 80% of its total dollar revenue will be derived from calculator sales as compared to 75% in 2010. As in prior years, the sales mix is assumed to be the same at all volume levels.
The total fixed overhead costs will not change in 2011, nor will the variable overhead cost rates (applied on a direct labor hour base). However, the cost of materials and direct labor is expected to change. The cost of solid state electronic components will be cheaper in 2011. Hewtex estimates that material costs will drop 10% for the tape recordA?¬ers and 20% for the calculators in 2011. However, direct labor costs for both products will increase 10% in the coming year.
Hewtex Electronics
Projected Earnings Statement (totals in thousands)
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010
Tape Electronic
Recorders Calculators Total
Total Per Unit Total Per Unit
Sales $1,050 $15.00 $3,150 $22.50 $4,200.0
Production Costs:
Materials $ 280 $ 4.00 $ 630 $ 4.50 $ 910.0
Direct labor 140 2.00 420 3.00 560.0
Variable overhead 140 2.00 280 2.00 420.0
Fixed overhead 70 1.00 210 1.50 280.0
Total $ 630 $ 9.00 $1,540 $11.00 $2,170.0
Gross margin $ 420 $ 6.00 $1,610 $11.50 $2,030.0
Fixed Selling & Admin Exp. 1,040.0
Income before taxes $ 990.0
Income taxes (55%) 544.5
Net Income $ 445.5
Required:
1. Assuming the sales mix remains constant at all volume levels, how many units in total and of each product does Hewtex Electronics need to sell in 2010 to breakeven? Solve the problem using both (a) the dollar per unit contribution margin and (b) the contribution margin percentage.
2. Compute the new cost structure, unit mix, and revenue mix for 2011 based on the changes that apply for 2011.
3. Assuming the sales mix remains constant at all volume levels, how many units in total and of each product does Hewtex Electronics need to sell in 2011 to breakeven? Solve the problem using both (a) the dollar per unit contribution margin and (b) the contribution margin percentage.
4. What volume of sales, in dollars, is required in 2011 if Hewtex Electronics is to earn a profit after taxes equal to 9% of sales? Also indicate the dollar and unit sales required of each product.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Hokie Corporation is considering two mutually exclusive projects. Both require an initial outlay of $10,000 and will operate for five years. The probability distributions associated with each project for years 1 through 5 are given as follows:
Probability Distribution for Cash Flow Years 1-5 (the same cash flow each year)
Project A Project B
Probability Cash Flow Probability Cash Flow
0.15 $4,000 0.15 $2,000
0.7 5,000 0.7 6,000
0.15 6,000 0.15 10,000
Because Project B is the riskier of the two projects, the management of Hokie Corporation has decided to apply a required rate of return of 15 percent to its evaluation but only a 12 percent required rate of return to project A.
a. Determine the expected value of each project’s annual cash flows.
b. Determine each project’s risk-adjusted net present value.
c. What other factors might be considered in deciding between these two projects?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Your hospital has been approached by a major HMO to perform all their MS-DRG 470 cases
(major joint procedures). They have offered a flat price of $10,000 per case. You have reviewed
your charges for MS-DRG 470 during the last year and found the following profile:
Average Charge $15,000
Average LOS 5 Days
Cost/Charge Variable Cost %
Routine Charge $3,600 0.80 60
Operating Room 2,657 0.80 80
Anesthesiology 293 0.80 80
Lab 1,035 0.70 30
Radiology 345 0.75 50
Medical Supplies 4,524 0.50 90
Pharmacy 1,230 0.50 90
Other Ancillary 1,316 0.80 60
Total Ancillary $11,400 0.75 50
1. In the above data set, assume that the hospital’s cost to charge ratio is 0.80 for routine
services and 0.75 for all other ancillary services. Using this information, what would the
average cost of MS-DRG 470 be?
2. Estimate the variable cost per MS-DRG 470 using the departmental cost/charge ratios
and variable cost percentages.
3. The HMO in the above example has indicated that their doctors use less expensive joint
implants. If this less expensive implant is used, your medical supply charges would be
reduced by $2,000. What is the estimated reduction in variable cost?
4. Management has studied work patterns in the housekeeping department and estimates
the number of hours to be worked as follows. Hours worked = (1,500 hours per month)
+ (0.50 Af— RVUs). For the coming month, management expects RVUs to be 5,800. What
should budgeted labor for the month be?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I have 5 all together. Here is #2 of 5:
2 – Miller and Davis, partners in a consulting business, share profits and losses in the ratio of 3:2, respectively. Prior to recording the admission of Shaw as a new partner, Miller has a capital balance of $80,000, and Davis has a capital balance of $40,000.
Required:
For each of the following independent cases, prepare the journal entry that was made to record the admission of Shaw into the partnership.
1) Shaw purchased 20 percent of the respective capital balances of Miller and Davis, paying $20,000 cash directly to each of them.
2) Shaw invested $30,000 cash in the partnership for a 20 percent ownership interest. Total capital after recording his admission was $150,000.
3) Shaw invested $40,000 cash into the partnership for a 20 percent ownership interest. Total capital after recording his admission was $160,000.
4) Shaw invested $50,000 into the partnership for a 20 percent interest. Goodwill is to be recognized.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(i) For the following group of assets, compute the composite depreciation rate, the composite life and the amount of depreciation recorded for the first year of ownership of the asset group, assuming that the group of assets was purchased on January 1:
Asset Original Cost Salvage Value Estimated Life in years
A $11,000 $ 500 5
B $ 7,000 $ 200 4
C $ 12,500 $ 800 3
D $16,000 $1,000 6
(ii) If Asset B is sold for $1,000 at the end of 3 years, what journal entry should be made? I need to answerthis question.
|
|
|
|
(n) |
depr. |
|
|
|
orig |
salvage |
est. life |
cost |
|
|
asset |
cost (oc) |
value (sv) |
in years |
oc – sv |
sv / n |
|
A |
$11,000 |
$500 |
5 |
$10,500 |
$2,100 |
|
B |
$7,000 |
$200 |
4 |
$6,800 |
$1,700 |
|
C |
$12,500 |
$800 |
3 |
$11,700 |
$3,900 |
|
D |
$16,000 |
$1,000 |
6 |
$15,000 |
$2,500 |
| TOTAL |
|
$46,500 |
$2,500 |
4.31 |
$44,000 |
$10,200 |
Composite life equals the total
depreciable cost divided by the total depreciation per year.
= $44,000 / $10,200 = 4.31 years.
Composite depreciation rate equals depreciation
per year divided by total historical cost.
=$10,200 / $46,500 = 22%
Dep Recorded for Year 1 = $10,200
Item (i) hs been completed, I need help with item (ii), please. Thank you
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
i need DEBT TO ASSETS RATIO
|
Summarized financial data for two competitors is set out below:
|
|
(All balances are as of 12/31/08 or for the year ended 12/31/08)
|
|
Oscar Corp
|
Felix Corp
|
|
Sales revenue
|
800,000
|
600,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
400,000
|
200,000
|
|
Cash
|
90,000
|
25,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
120,000
|
75,000
|
|
Property plant and equipment, net
|
250,000
|
225,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
95,000
|
60,000
|
|
Salaries payable
|
75,000
|
35,000
|
|
Long term liabilities
|
150,000
|
75,000
|
|
Common shares outstanding, beginning of year
|
50,000
|
25,000
|
|
Common shares outstanding, end of year
|
100,000
|
40,000
|
|
No dividends were paid during 2008.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
I regular Items
shown below is information relating to operations of Ayers, Inc. for 20 10.
Continuing Operations:
Net Sales
Costs and expenses (including income taxes)
$7,000,000
6,100,000
Current-year profit generated by segment of the business
discontinued in May (net of income taxes)
gain on disposal of discontinued segment (net of income
taxes)
extraordinary loss (net of income tax benefit)
600,000
200,000
(350,000)
Th e company had 25,000 shares of common stock outstanding for six months of the year and
1 5,000 shares of stock outstanding throughout the remainder of the year. It had no preferred
st ck.
In the space below complete the income statement for Ayers, Inc. including at least 3
different earnings per share figures – 1) earnings per share from continuing operations 2)
earnings per share before extraordinary item and 3) net earnings per share:
Ayers, Inc.
Condensed Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 20 I0
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Iaukea Company makes two products from a common input. Joint processing costs up to the split-off point total $48,600 a year. The company allocates these costs to the joint products on the basis of their total sales values at the split-off point. Each product may be sold at the split-off point or processed further. Data concerning these products appear below:
Product X Product Y Total
Allocated joint processing costs $ 18,800 $ 29,800 $ 48,600
Sales value at split-off point $ 25,850 $ 37,800 $ 63,650
Costs of further processing $ 23,300 $ 17,600 $ 40,900
Sales value after further processing $ 48,800 $ 56,500 $ 105,300
Required:
a.
What is the net monetary advantage (disadvantage) of processing Product X beyond the split-off point? (Input the amount as a positive value. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Net $
b.
What is the net monetary advantage (disadvantage) of processing Product Y beyond the split-off point? (Input the amount as a positive value. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Net $
c.
What is the minimum amount the company should accept for Product X if it is to be sold at the split-off point? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Minimum acceptable amount $
d.
What is the minimum amount the company should accept for Product Y if it is to be sold at the split-off point? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Minimum acceptable amount $
My work for A &B
A) 48800-25850= 22950 – 23300 = -350 Disadvantage
B) 56500 – 37800= 18700 – 17600 = 1100
C) My textbook does not help solve this
D)My textbook does not help solve this
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Ice Mountain Company exchanged machinery with an appraised value of $1,755,000, a recorded cost of $2,700,000 and Accumulated Depreciation of $1,350,000 with Green Corporation for machinery Green owns. The machinery has an appraised value of $1,695,000, a recorded cost of $3,240,000, and Accumulated Depreciation of $1,782,000. Green also gave Ice Mountain $60,000 in the exchange. Assume depreciation has already been updated.
1.Prepare the journal entry for Green Company assuming that the exchange had commercial substance.
2. Assume that the exchange lacked commercial substance. Prepare the journal entry for Green Company.
3. Assume that the exchange lacked commercial substance. Prepare the journal entry for Ice Mountain Company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Identify accounts by category and financial statement(s). Listed here are a number of financial statement captions. Indicate in the spaces to the right of each caption the category of each item and the financial statement(s) on which the item can usually be found. Use the following abbreviations:
Category Financial Statement
Asset A Balance Sheet BS
Liability L Income Statement IS
Owners’ Equity OE
Revenue R
Expense E
Gain G
Loss LS
Accumulated depreciation _____ ______
Long-term debt _____ _____
Equipment ______ ______
Loss on sale of short-term investments _____ ______
Net income _____ _____
Merchandise Inventory _____ _____
Other accrued liabilities _____ ______
Dividends paid _____ _____
Cost of goods sold _____ _____
Additional paid-in capital _____ _____
Interest income _____ _____
Selling Expense _____ _____
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Lichty Car Wash has some equipment that needs to be rebuilt or replaced. The following information has been gathered concerning this decision:
Present Equipment New Equipment
Purchase cost new 47,000 45,000
Remaining book value 20,000 none
Cost to rebuild now 20,000 none
Major maintenance at the end of 3 year 5,000 3,000
Annual cash operating cost 9,000 7,000
Salvage value in 5 years 2,000 6,000
Salvage value now 8,000 none
Lichty uses the total-cost approach and a discount rate of 10% in making capital budgeting decisions. Regardless of which option is chosen, rebuild or replace, at the end of five years Mr. Lichty plans to close the car wash and retire.
If the new equipment is purchased, the present value of all cash flows that occur now is:
a. $(45,000)
b. $(39,000)
c. $(37,000)
d. $(34,000)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, 2009, Pink Company finished consultation services and accepted in exchange a promissory note with a face value of $400,000, a due date of December 31, 2012, and a stated rate of 8%, with interest receivable at June 30th and December 31st. The fair value of the services is not readily determinable and the note is not readily marketable. Under the circumstances, the note is considered to have an appropriate imputed rate of interest of 10%. (Hint: the imputed rate is similar to the market rate).
a) Determine the present value of the note.
b) Prepare a Schedule of Note Discount/Premium Amortization for Pink Company under the effective interest method. (Round to whole dollars.)
c) Prepare any necessary journal entries in 2009 to record the issuance of the note and any interest journal entries that may be required based on the terms of the note.
d) Prepare any necessary journal entries in 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On January 1, 2011, Piper Co. issued ten-year bonds with a face value of $1,000,000 and a stated interest rate of 10%, payable semiannually on June 30 and December 31. The bonds were sold to yield 12%. Table values are:
Present value of 1 for 10 periods at 10%………………………. .386
Present value of 1 for 10 periods at 12%………………………. .322
Present value of 1 for 20 periods at 5%………………………… .377
Present value of 1 for 20 periods at 6%………………………… .312
Present value of annunity for 10 periods at 10%………………. 6.145
Present value of annunity for 10 periods at 12%………………. 5.650
Present value of annunity for 20 periods at 5%……………….. 12.462
Present value of annunity for 20 periods at 6%……………….. 11.470
(a) Calculate the issue price of the bonds.
(b) Without prejudice to your solution in part (a), assume that the issue price was $884,000. Prepare the amortization table for 2011, assuming that amortization is recorded on interest payment dates.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Java Source, Inc. (JSI), is a processor and distributor of a variety of blends of coffee. The company buys coffee beans from around the world and roasts, blends, and packages them for resale. JSI offers a large variety of different coffees that it sells to gourmet shops in one-pound bags. The major cost of the coffee is raw materials. However, the company’s predominantly automated roasteing, blending, and packing processes requires a substanial amount of manufacturing overhead. The company uses relatively little direct labor.
Some of Jsi’s coffees are very popular and sell in large volumes, while a few of the newer blends sell in very low volumes. JSI prices its coffees at manufacturing cost plus a markup of 25%, with some adjustments made to keep the company’s prices competitive.
For the coming year, JSI’s budget includes estimated manufacturing overhead costs of $2,200,000. JSI assigns manufacturing overhead to products on the basis of direct labor-hours. The expected direct labor cost totals $600,000, which represents 50,000 hours of direct labor time. Based on the sales budget and expected raw materials costs, the company will purchase and use $5,000,000 of raw materials (mostly coffee beans) during the year.
The expected costs for direct materials and direct labor for one-pound bags of two of the company’s coffee products appear below.
Kenya Dark Viet Select
Direct materials $4.50 $2.90
Direct labor (0.02 hours per bag) $0.24 $0.24
JSI’s controllers believe that the company’s traditional costing system may be providing misleading cost information. To determine whether or not this is correct, the controller has prepared an analysis of the year’s expected manufacturing overhead costs, as shown in the following table:
Activity Cost Pool
Activity Measure Expected Activity
for the Year Expected Cost
for the Year
Purchasing Purchase orders 2,000 orders $560,000
Material handling Number of setups 1,000 setups $193,000
Quality control Number of batches 500 batches $90,000
Roasting Roasting hours 95,000 roasting hours $1,045,000
Blending Blending hours 32,000 blending hours $192,000
Packaging Packaging hours 24,000 packaging hours $120,000
Total maufacturing
overhead costs
$2,200,000
Data regarding the expected production of Kenya Dark and Viet Select coffee are presented below.
Kenya Dark Viet Select
Expected sales 80,000 pounds 4,000 pounds
Batch size 5,000 pounds 500 pounds
Setups 2 per batch 2 per batch
Purchase order size 20,000 pounds 500 pounds
Roasting time per 100 pounds 1.5 roasting hours 1.5 roasting hours
B lending time per 100 pounds 0.5 blending hours 0.5 blending hours
Packaging time per 100 pounds 0.3 packaging hours 0.3 packaging hours
Requirements:
1. Using direct labor-hours as the base for assigning manufacturing overhead cost to products, do the following:
a. Determine the predetermined overhead rate that will be used during the year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Java Source, Inc. (JSI), is a processor and distributor of a variety of blends of coffee. The company buys coffee beans from around the world and roasts, blends, and packages them for resale. JSI offers a large variety of different coffees that it sells to gourmet shops in one-pound bags. The major cost of the coffee is raw materials. However, the company’s predominantly automated roasteing, blending, and packing processes requires a substanial amount of manufacturing overhead. The company uses relatively little direct labor.
Some of Jsi’s coffees are very popular and sell in large volumes, while a few of the newer blends sell in very low volumes. JSI prices its coffees at manufacturing cost plus a markup of 25%, with some adjustments made to keep the company’s prices competitive.
For the coming year, JSI’s budget includes estimated manufacturing overhead costs of $2,200,000. JSI assigns manufacturing overhead to products on the basis of direct labor-hours. The expected direct labor cost totals $600,000, which represents 50,000 hours of direct labor time. Based on the sales budget and expected raw materials costs, the company will purchase and use $5,000,000 of raw materials (mostly coffee beans) during the year.
The expected costs for direct materials and direct labor for one-pound bags of two of the company’s coffee products appear below.
Kenya Dark Viet Select
Direct materials $4.50 $2.90
Direct labor (0.02 hours per bag) $0.24 $0.24
JSI’s controllers believe that the company’s traditional costing system may be providing misleading cost information. To determine whether or not this is correct, the controller has prepared an analysis of the year’s expected manufacturing overhead costs, as shown in the following table:
Activity Cost Pool
Activity Measure Expected Activity
for the Year Expected Cost
for the Year
Purchasing Purchase orders 2,000 orders $560,000
Material handling Number of setups 1,000 setups $193,000
Quality control Number of batches 500 batches $90,000
Roasting Roasting hours 95,000 roasting hours $1,045,000
Blending Blending hours 32,000 blending hours $192,000
Packaging Packaging hours 24,000 packaging hours $120,000
Total maufacturing
overhead costs
$2,200,000
Data regarding the expected production of Kenya Dark and Viet Select coffee are presented below.
Kenya Dark Viet Select
Expected sales 80,000 pounds 4,000 pounds
Batch size 5,000 pounds 500 pounds
Setups 2 per batch 2 per batch
Purchase order size 20,000 pounds 500 pounds
Roasting time per 100 pounds 1.5 roasting hours 1.5 roasting hours
B lending time per 100 pounds 0.5 blending hours 0.5 blending hours
Packaging time per 100 pounds 0.3 packaging hours 0.3 packaging hours
Requirements:
1. Using direct labor-hours as the base for assigning manufacturing overhead cost to products, do the following:
b. Determine the unit product cost of one pound of the Kenya Dark coffee and one pound of the Viet Select coffee.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Java Source, Inc. (JSI), is a processor and distributor of a variety of blends of coffee. The company buys coffee beans from around the world and roasts, blends, and packages them for resale. JSI offers a large variety of different coffees that it sells to gourmet shops in one-pound bags. The major cost of the coffee is raw materials. However, the company’s predominantly automated roasteing, blending, and packing processes requires a substanial amount of manufacturing overhead. The company uses relatively little direct labor.
Some of Jsi’s coffees are very popular and sell in large volumes, while a few of the newer blends sell in very low volumes. JSI prices its coffees at manufacturing cost plus a markup of 25%, with some adjustments made to keep the company’s prices competitive.
For the coming year, JSI’s budget includes estimated manufacturing overhead costs of $2,200,000. JSI assigns manufacturing overhead to products on the basis of direct labor-hours. The expected direct labor cost totals $600,000, which represents 50,000 hours of direct labor time. Based on the sales budget and expected raw materials costs, the company will purchase and use $5,000,000 of raw materials (mostly coffee beans) during the year.
The expected costs for direct materials and direct labor for one-pound bags of two of the company’s coffee products appear below.
Kenya Dark Viet Select
Direct materials $4.50 $2.90
Direct labor (0.02 hours per bag) $0.24 $0.24
JSI’s controllers believe that the company’s traditional costing system may be providing misleading cost information. To determine whether or not this is correct, the controller has prepared an analysis of the year’s expected manufacturing overhead costs, as shown in the following table:
Activity Cost Pool
Activity Measure Expected Activity
for the Year Expected Cost
for the Year
Purchasing Purchase orders 2,000 orders $560,000
Material handling Number of setups 1,000 setups $193,000
Quality control Number of batches 500 batches $90,000
Roasting Roasting hours 95,000 roasting hours $1,045,000
Blending Blending hours 32,000 blending hours $192,000
Packaging Packaging hours 24,000 packaging hours $120,000
Total maufacturing
overhead costs
$2,200,000
Data regarding the expected production of Kenya Dark and Viet Select coffee are presented below.
Kenya Dark Viet Select
Expected sales 80,000 pounds 4,000 pounds
Batch size 5,000 pounds 500 pounds
Setups 2 per batch 2 per batch
Purchase order size 20,000 pounds 500 pounds
Roasting time per 100 pounds 1.5 roasting hours 1.5 roasting hours
B lending time per 100 pounds 0.5 blending hours 0.5 blending hours
Packaging time per 100 pounds 0.3 packaging hours 0.3 packaging hours
Requirements:
2. Using activity-based costing as the basis for assigning manufacturing overhead cost to products, do the following:
a. Determine the total amount of manufacturing overhead cost assigned to the Kenya Dark coffee and to the Viet Select coffee for the year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available for Moore Company:
Mixing Department
Work in process, June 1 (100% complete complete for direct material, 60% complete for conversion costs) 1,500 units
Units completed in June 9,850 units
Work in process, June 30 (80% complete for direct materials, 30% complete for conversion costs) 1,050 units
The following information is available for Valentine Company:
Dyeing Department
Work in process, June 1 (100% complete for direct materials, 50% complete for conversion costs)
1,200 units
Units completed in June 8,500 units
Work in process, June 30 (60% complete for direct materials, 40% complete for conversion costs) 950 units
Compute:
a. The number of units started in each department during June.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to Charter Company:
Service Departments Producing Departments
Personnel Maintenance Fabrication Assembly
Budgeted overhead $80,000 $144,000 $280,000 $320,000
Direct labor hours 4,000 5,000 16,000 20,000
Machine hours 24,000 16,000
Number of employees 8 10 30 50
Charter Company does not divide costs into fixed and variable components. Personnel costs are allocated based on the number of employees, and maintenance costs are allocated based on machine hours. Predetermined overhead rates for Fabrication and Assembly are based on direct labor hours. (Round amounts to dollars) If the direct method is used to allocate service department costs, the predetermined overhead rate for the Fabrication Department (rounded to 2 decimal places) would be:
A. $16.00
B. $21.38
C. $22.89
D. $24.78
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to Charter Company:
Service Depts
Personnel
Budgeted overhead: $80,000
Direct labor hours: 4,000
Machine hours: 0
Number of employees: 8
Maintenance
Budgeted overhead: $144,000
Direct labor hours: 5,000
Machine hours: 0
Number of employees: 10
Producing Departments
Fabrication
Budgeted overhead: $280,000
Direct labor hours: 16,000
Machine hours: 24,000
Number of employees: 30
Assembly
Budgeted overhead: $320,000
Direct labor hours: 20,000
Machine hours: 16,000
Number of employees: 50
Charter does not divide costs into fixed and variable cost components. Personnel costs are allocated based on the number of employees and maintenance costs are based on machine hours. Predetermined overhead rates for Fabrication and Assembly are based on direct labor hours. (Round amounts to dollars) If the direct method is used to allocate service department costs, the predetermined overhead rate for the Fabrication Department (rounded to 2 decimal places) would be:
A. $16.00
B. $21.38
C. $22.89
D. $24.78
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to Family Video Company.
1. Cash balance per bank, July 31, $9,950.31.
2. July bank service charge not recorded by the depositor $38.36.
3. Cash balance per books, July 31, $9,979.08.
4. Deposits in transit, July 31, $2,055.00.
5. Bank collected $1,233.00 note for Family in July, plus interest $49.32, less fee $27.40. The collection has not been recorded by Family, and no interest has been accrued.
6. Outstanding checks, July 31, $809.67.
Prepare a bank reconciliation at July 31. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50.)
$
Add:
Less:
Adjusted cash balance per bank
$
$
Add:
Less:
Adjusted cash balance per books
$
Journalize the adjusting entries at July 31 on the books of Family Video Company. (For multiple debit/credit entries, list amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2.Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50.)
Date Description/Account Debit Credit
July 31
(To record collection of note receivable by bank)
July 31
(To record bank service charge.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to Gilmore Company.
1. Cash balance per bank, July 31, $7,489.
2. July bank service charge not recorded by the depositor $45.
3. Cash balance per books, July 31, $7,441.
4. Deposits in transit, July 31, $1,861.
5. Note for $1,161 collected for Gilmore in July by the bank, plus interest $36 less fee $20. The collection has not been recorded by Gilmore, and no interest has been accrued.
6. Outstanding checks, July 31, $777.
(a) Complete the bank reconciliation at July 31, 2010 below:
GILMORE COMPANY
Bank reconciliation
July 31, 2010
Cash balance per bank statement $
Add: Adjusted cash balance per bankAdjusted cash balance per booksCollection of note receivableBank service chargeDeposits in transitOutstanding checks
Less: Collection of note receivableDeposits in transitOutstanding checksAdjusted cash balance per bankBank service chargeAdjusted cash balance per books
Adjusted cash balance per bankDeposits in transitCollection of note receivableBank service chargeAdjusted cash balance per booksOutstanding checks $
Cash balance per books $
Add: Deposits in transitBank service chargeAdjusted cash balance per booksAdjusted cash balance per bankOutstanding checksCollection of note receivable
Less: Adjusted cash balance per booksCollection of note receivableOutstanding checksDeposits in transitAdjusted cash balance per bankBank service charge
Outstanding checksDeposits in transitAdjusted cash balance per booksAdjusted cash balance per bankCollection of note receivableBank service charge $
(b) Journalize the adjusting entries at July 31 on the books of Gilmore Company. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)
Date Account/Description Debit Credit
July 31 Interest revenueMiscellaneous expenseNotes receivableAccounts receivableCash
Interest revenueAccounts receivableNotes receivableCashMiscellaneous expense
Accounts receivableCashMiscellaneous expenseInterest revenueNotes receivable
Accounts receivableInterest revenueNotes receivableCashMiscellaneous expense
(To record the collect of notes receivable)
July 31 Interest revenueAccounts receivableCashMiscellaneous expenseNotes receivable
Accounts receivableMiscellaneous expenseCashNotes receivableInterest revenue
(To record bank service charges)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to Leslie’s floor store sales on account and accounts receivable.
Accounts receivable balance, January 1, 2012 $ 52,500.00
Allowance for doubtful accounts, January 1, 2012 $ 4,725
Sales on account, 2012 $ 925,000
Cost of goods sold, 2012 $ 615,000
Collections on accounts receivable, 2012 $ 835, 000
After several collections attempts, Leslie’s wrote off $3,100 of accounts that could not be collected Leslie’s estimates that bad debt expense will be 0.5 percent of sales on account.
A. Compute the following amounts.
(1) Using the allowance method, the amount of uncollectible accounts expense for 2012.
(2) Net realizable value of receivables at the end of 2012
B. Explain why the uncollectible accounts expense amount is different from the amount that was written off.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information pertains to Tanzi Company. Assume that all balance sheet amounts represent both average and ending balance figures. Assume that all sales were on credit. Note: In the calcuation, round the earnings per share amount to the nearest cent.
|
Assets
|
| Cash and short-term investments |
$36,295 |
| Accounts receivable (net) |
$29,590 |
| Inventory |
$38,477 |
| Property, plant and equipment |
$234,471 |
| Total Assets |
$338,833 |
|
|
|
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
|
| Current liabilities |
$68,880 |
| Long-term liabilities |
$89,407 |
| Stockholders’ equity-common |
$180,546 |
| Total Liabilities and stockholders’ equity |
$338,833 |
|
| Income Statement |
| Sales |
$89,866 |
| Cost of goods sold |
$40,440 |
| Gross margin |
$49,426 |
| Operating expenses |
$21,599 |
| Net income |
$27,827 |
|
| Number of shares of common stock |
6,652 |
| Market price of common stock |
$34 |
What is the price-earnings ratio for this company?
(I need a detailed answer please where you first calculate earnings per share)
The formula for the price-earnings ratio is the following:
market price per share of common stock/earnings per share on common stock
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following items were taken from the financial statements of M. Wright Company. (All dollars are in thousands.)
Long-term debt $812 Accumulated depreciation $5,427
Prepaid expenses 867 Accounts payable 1,221
Property, plant, and equipment 11,183 Notes payable after 2013 203
Long-term investments 257 M. Wright, Capital 12,836
Short-term investments 3,420 Accounts receivable 1,289
Notes payable in 2013 430 Inventories 1,615
Cash 2,298
Instructions
Prepare a classified balance sheet in good form as of December 31, 2012. (List assets in order of liquidity. List current liabilities from largest to smallest e.g. 10, 5, 3, 2, with notes payable first and long-term liabilities from largest to smallest e.g. 10, 5, 3, 2. Present all numbers as positive and subtract as necessary.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following is a pre-closing trial balance for sun city’s General fund as of June 30, 2009:
Debit Credit
Cash 116,500
Taxes Receivable-Current 29,000
Estimated uncollectible current taxes 3,000
Accounts Payable 7,800
Due to other funds 5,500
Tax anticipation notes payable 50,000
Reserve for encumbrances 5,000
budgetary fund balance 1000
Fund Balance 70,200
Estimated Revenues 100,000
Revenues 102,000
Appropriations 99,000
Encumbrances 5,000
Expenditures 93,000
Totals 343,500 343,500
(1) Providde the entries to close the budgetary and operating statement accounts.
(2) What is the fund balance as of June 30, 2009 after all closing entries have been made? Show your work.”
(3) what is the total fund balance as of june 30
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For each of the following specific audit procedures, indicate the type of audit procedure(s) it represents: (1) inspection of records or documents, (2) inspection of tangible assets, (3) observation, (4) inquiry, (5) confirmation, (6) recalculation, (7) reperformance, (8) analytical procedures, (9) scanning, (1/7), and (9/7).
a. Sending a written request to the client’s customers requesting that they report the amount owed to the client.
b. Examining large sales invoices for a period of two days before and after year-end to determine if sales are recorded in the proper period.
c. Agreeing the total of the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger to the accounts receivable general ledger account.
d. Discussing the adequacy of the allowance for doubtful accounts with the credit manager.
e. Comparing the current-year gross profit percentage with the gross profit percentage for the last four years.
f. Examining a new plastic extrusion machine to ensure that this major acquisition was received.
g. Watching the client’s warehouse personnel count the raw materials inventory.
h. Performing test counts of the warehouse personnel’s count of the raw material.
i. Obtaining a letter from the client’s attorney indicating that there were no lawsuits in progress against the client.
j. Tracing the prices used by the client’s billing program for pricing sales invoices to the client’s approved price list.
k. Reviewing the general ledger for unusual adjusting entries.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following table presents Generic Motors Company’s production budget. GM’s inventory policy is to have ending inventory equal to20% of next month’s sales.
|
February |
March |
April |
| Ending inventory |
|
|
5,000 |
| Beginning inventory |
2,000 |
|
|
| Budgeted sales |
13,000 |
17,000 |
18,000 |
| Budgeted production |
|
|
|
Required:
(a) Fill in the missing numbers in the table above.
(Hint if you get stuck: What is the relation between ending inventory for one month and beginning inventory for the following month?)
b) Why do firms want to hold inventory of finished goods? (an alternative could be to produce exactly the amount they are going to sell, and hold zero inventories)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following trial balance was prepared incorrectly. The amounts in the general ledger were
correct but some of the account balances were reported incorrectly in the report. All of the
accounts should have a normal balance.
Cash
40,000
Accounts receivable
80,000
Inventory
120,000
Prepaid rent
15,000
Equipment
340,000
Accumulated depreciation
200,000
Accounts payable
70,000
Salaries payable
20,000
Note payable
200,000
Common Stock
20,000
Retained earnings
50,000
Commission revenue
180,000
Facility expense
50,000
Wage expense
60,000
Depreciation expense
20,000
Professional services expense
15,000
785,000
695,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fresh Air Products Company manufactures and sells a variety of camping products. Recently the company opened a new plant to manufacture a deluxe portable cooking unit. Cost and sales data for the first month of operations are shown below:
Manufacturing Costs
Fixed Overhead $120,000
Variable overhead $3 per unit
Direct labor $12 per unit
Direct material $30 per unit
Beginning inventory 0 units
Units produced 10,000
Units sold 8,000
Selling and Administrative Costs
Fixed $200,000
Variable $4 per unit sold
The portable cooking unit sells for $110. Management is interested in the opening month’s results and has asked for an income statement.
Instructions
Assume the company uses absorption costing. Calculate the production cost per unit and prepare an income statement for the month of June, 2011.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
As the fund manager for a large mutual fund, you are preparing for a conference call with all your major investors. You plan to e-mail everyone with an attachment that will serve as a guide for the upcoming call. You know investors’ time is limited, so you want to be focused in your brief report. Because there are numerous figures to discuss, you will be including 1 or more charts all in the same document.
For each of the following points, prepare both a paragraph of commentary and an appropriate chart to support it. (I CHOSE WALMART AS IT WOULD BE THE EASIEST ONE). PLEASE NOTE EACH POINT NEEDS A PARAGRAPH AND CHART TO GO WITH IT. tHANK YOU TO WHOEVER HELPS WITH THIS!!
‘Find the last 4 years’ sales and profit or net income data for a major retail corporation.
‘Calculate profit as a percentage of sales; be careful to place the decimal point correctly.
‘Prepare a paragraph of explanation/interpretation of the data as if this were a small part of a lengthy report to potential investors.
‘Prepare a chart to display all the information in a meaningful way.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Galati Products, Inc., has just purchased a small company that specializes in the manufacture of electronic tuners that are used as a component part of TV sets. Galati Products, Inc., is a decentralized company, and it will treat the newly acquired company as an autonomous division with full profit responsibility. The new division, called the Tuner Division, has the following revenue and costs associated with each tuner that it manufactures and sells:
Selling price $20
Expenses:
Variable $10
Fixed (based on a capacity of
98,000 tuners per year) 6 16
Net operating income $4
Galati Products also has an Assembly Division that assembles TV sets. This division is currently purchasing 29,000 tuners per year from an overseas supplier at a cost of $20 per tuner, less a 10% purchase discount. The president of Galati Products is anxious to have the Assembly Division begin purchasing its tuners from the newly acquired Tuner Division in order to “keep the profits within the corporate family.”
Required:
For (1) and (2) below, assume that the Tuner Division can sell all of its output to outside TV manufacturers at the normal $20 price.
1a. What is the minimum transfer price for Tuner Division? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Minimum transfer price $
1b.
What is the maximum transfer price that Assembly Division is ready to pay? (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Maximum transfer price $
1c.
Are the managers of the Tuner and Assembly Divisions likely to voluntarily agree to a transfer price for 29,000 tuners each year?
Yes
No
2.
If the Tuner Division meets the price that the Assembly Division is currently paying to its overseas supplier and sells 29,000 tuners to the Assembly Division each year, what will be the effect on the profits of the Tuner Division, the Assembly Division, and the company as a whole? (Input all amounts as positive values. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Do not round intermediate calculations. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
a. Profits of the Tuner Division will(decrease? increase? unchanged) by $ .
b. Profits of the Assembly Division will(decrease? increase? unchanged) by $ .
c. Profits of the company as a whole will(decrease? increase? unchanged) by $ .
For (3) through (6), assume that the Tuner Division is currently selling only 59,000 tuners each year to outside TV manufacturers at the stated $20 price.
3a.
What is the minimum transfer price for Tuner Division? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Minimum transfer price $
3b.
What is the range of transfer price the manager’s of both divisions should agree? (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
The transfer price can be a lowest of $ and a highest of $ .
3c.
Are the managers of the Assembly and Tuner Divisions likely to voluntarily agree to a transfer price for 29,000 tuners each year?
Yes
No
4a.
Suppose that the Assembly Division’s overseas supplier drops its price (net of the purchase discount) to only $15 per tuner. Should the Tuner Division meet this price?
No
Yes
4b.
How much potential profit will the Tuner Division lose if the $15 price is not met? (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Profit of the company will(increase? decrease?) by $
5.
Refer to (4) above. If the Tuner Division refuses to meet the $15 price, should the Assembly Division be required to purchase from the Tuner Division at a higher price for the good of the company as a whole?
No
Yes
6.
Refer to (4) above. Assume that due to inflexible management policies, the Assembly Division is required to purchase 29,000 tuners each year from the Tuner Division at $20 per tuner. What will be the effect on the profits of the company as a whole? (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
a. The Tuner Division will have an(increase? decrease?) in profit by $ .
b. The Assembly Division will have a(increase? decrease?) in profit by $ .
c. The company as a whole will have an(increase? decrease?) in profit by $ .
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Galley Corp., a merchandiser, recently completed its 2011 operations. For the year, (1) all sales are credit sales, (2) all credits to Accounts Receivable reflect cash receipts from customers, (3) all purchases if inventory are on credit, (4) all debits to Accounts payable reflect cash payments for inventory, (5) Other expenses are all cash expenses and (6) any change in Income Taxes Payable reflects the accrual and cash payment of taxes. The company’s balance sheets and income statements follow.
GALLEY CORPORATION
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31, 2011 and 2010
2011 2010
Assets
Cash $174,000 $117,000
Accounts receivable 93,000 81,000
Merchandise inventory 609,000 534,000
Equipment 333,000 297,000
Accum. depreciation equip (156,000) (102,000)
Total assets $1,053,000 927,000
Liabilities and Equity
Accounts payable $69,000 $96,000
Income taxes payable 27,000 24,000
Common stock, $2 par value 582,000 558,000
Paid in capital in excess of par value, common stock 198,000 162,000
Retained earnings 177,000 87,000
Total liabilities and equity $1,053,000 $927,000
GALLEY CORPORATION
Income Statement
For year Ended December 31, 2011
Sales $1,992,000
Cost of goods sold 1,194,000
Gross Profit 798,000
Operating Expenses
Depreciation Expense $54,000
Other Expenses 501,000 555,000
Income before taxes 243,000
Income tax expense 42,000
Net income $201,000
Additional Information on Year 2011 Transactions
a. purchased equipment for $36,000 cash
b. Issued 12,000 shares of common stock for $5 cash per share
c. Declared and paid $111,000 in cash dividends
Required
Prepare and complete statement of cash inflows and cash outflows from operating activities according to the indirect method.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gambino’s Pizza operates strictly on a carryout basis. Customers pick up their orders at a counter where a clerk exchanges the pizza for cash. While at the counter, the customer can see other employees making the pizzas and the large ovens in which the pizzas are baked.
Match the principles of internal control with the examples of each principle that you might observe when picking up your pizza.
Documentation procedures – -12345
Independent internal verification – -12345
Physical controls – -12345
Segregation of duties – -12345
Establishment of responsibility – -12345
1. The counter clerk, in handling the pizza, compares the size of the pizza with the size indicated on the order.
2. The counter clerk is responsible for handling cash. Other employees are responsible for making the pizzas.
3. The counter clerk uses your order invoice (ticket) in registering the sale on the cash register. The cash register produces a tape of all sales.
4. Employees who make the pizzas do not handle cash.
5. A cash register is used to record the sale.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Gannon Company has budgeted sales revenues as follows:
JUNE JULY AUGUST
Credit sales $27,000 $29,000 $18,000
Cash sales 18,000 51,000 39,000
Total sales $45,000 $80,000 $57,000
Past experience indicates that 60% of the credit sales will be collected in the month of sale and the remaining 40% will be collected in the following month.
Purchases of inventory are all on credit and 50% is paid in the month of purchase and 50% in the month following purchase. Budgeted inventory purchases are:
June $60,000
July 50,000
August 21,000
Other cash disbursements budgeted: (a) selling and administrative expenses of $9,500 each month, (b) dividends of $22,700 will be paid in July, and (c) purchase of a computer in August for $5,000 cash.
The company MUST maintain a minimum cash balance of $10,000 at the end of each month. The company borrows money from the bank at 9% per year interest if necessary to maintain the minimum cash balance of $10,000. Borrowed money is repaid in months when there is an excess cash balance. The beginning cash balance on July 1 was $10,000 of which none is borrowed.
Instructions:
Prepare a cash budget for the months of July and August and Prepare separate schedules for expected collections from customers and expected payments for purchases of inventory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Gannon Company has budgeted sales revenues as follows:
June July August
Credit sales $27,000 $29,000 $18,000
Cash sales 18,000 51,000 39,000
Total sales $45,000 $80,000 $57,000
Past experience indicates that 60% of the credit sales will be collected in the month of sale and the remaining 40% will be collected in the following month.
Purchases of inventory are all on credit and 50% is paid in the month of purchase and 50% in the month following purchase. Budgeted inventory purchases are:
June $60,000
July 50,000
August 21,000
Other cash disbursements budgeted: (a) selling and administrative expenses of $9,500 each month, (b) dividends of $22,700 will be paid in July, and (c) purchase of a computer in August for $5,000 cash.
The company MUST maintain a minimum cash balance of $10,000 at the end of each month. The company borrows money from the bank at 9% per year interest if necessary to maintain the minimum cash balance of $10,000. Borrowed money is repaid in months when there is an excess cash balance. The beginning cash balance on July 1 was $10,000 of which none is borrowed.
Instructions:
Prepare a cash budget for the months of July and August.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Gardner Corporation has collected the following information after its first year of sales. Net sales were $1,644,800 on 102,800 units; selling expenses $238,900 (39% variable and 61% fixed); direct materials $554,332; direct labor $280,200; administrative expenses $277,800 (19% variable and 81% fixed); manufacturing overhead $356,500 (71% variable and 29% fixed). Top management has asked you to do a CVP analysis so that it can make plans for the coming year. It has projected that unit sales will increase by 11% next year.
Compute (1) the contribution margin for the current year and the projected year, and (2) the fixed costs for the current year. (Assume that fixed costs will remain the same in the projected year.) (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)
Contribution margin-Current year $
Contribution margin-Projected year $
Fixed costs-Current year& projected year $
Compute the break-even point in units and sales dollars for the current year. (Round calculations for unit costs to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.25. Round final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)
Breakeven point (units) units
Breakeven point (dollars) $
The company has a target net income of $308,000. What is the required sales in dollars for the company to meet its target? (Round answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)
$
If the company meets its target net income number, by what percentage could its sales fall before it is operating at a loss? That is, what is its margin of safety ratio? (Round answer to 1 decimal place, e.g. 10.5.)
%
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Felde Company had $140,030 of net income in 2011 when the selling price per unit was $160, the variable costs per unit were $83, and the fixed costs were $709,280. Management expects per unit data and total fixed costs to remain the same in 2012. The president of Felde Company is under pressure from stockholders to increase net income by $214,830 in 2012.
Compute the number of units sold in 2011.
Compute the number of units that would have to be sold in 2012 to reach the stockholders’ desired profit level.
Assume that Felde Company sells the same number of units in 2012 as it did in 2011. What would the selling price have to be in order to reach the stockholders’ desired profit level? (Round answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
FIGLEAF.COM
POST-CLOSING TRIAL BALANCE
MAY 31, 2005
CASH 475,000
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE 75,000
ALLOW FOR UNCOLLECTIBLE ACCTS 5,000
NOTES RECEIVABLE 200,000
RAW MATERIALS 50,000
WORK IN PROCESS, PEGASUS 25,000
WORK IN PROCESS, CERBERUS 65,000
WORK IN PROCESS, ACHILLES 10,000
FINISHED GOODS 75,000
MOLDING MACHINES 1,000,000
ACCUMULATED DEP(100K/YEAR) 491,667
OFFICE FURNITURE/EQUIPMENT 75,000
ACCUMULATED DEP(5K/YEAR) 14,583
PATENTS 25,000
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE 125,000
NOTES PAYABLE 25,000
COMMON STOCK 600,000
RETAINED EARNINGS 813,750
TOTALS $2,075,000 $2,075,000
TRANSACTIONS FOR THE MONTH OF JUNE:
1) PURCHASED RAW MATERIALS (CEMENT, DYES, STONES) TOTALLING $350,000.
2) REQUISITIONED INTO PRODUCTION IN MONTH OF JUNE: $350,000.
3) 2 JOBS FINISHED IN JUNE:
A) PRODUCTION OF 400 PEGASUS STATUES (PRICE: $750/EACH) COSTS:
1) RAW MATERIALS USED: $125,000 IN RAW MATERIALS.
2) DIRECT LABOR COSTS: ACTUAL HOURS WORKED ON THIS JOB: 1900. AVERAGE COST PER HOUR: $20
3. OVERHEAD: THE COMPANY USES A PREDETERMINED OVERHEAD RATE BASED ON DIRECT LABOR HOURS CALCULATED AT THE BEGINNING OF THE FISCAL YEAR. THE TOTAL OVERHEAD ESTIMATED AT THE BEGINNING OF THE YEAR WAS $2,000,000. THE COMPANY ESTIMATED IT WOULD USE 50,000 HOURS OF DIRECT LABOR FOR YEAR.
B): PRODUCTION OF 600 CERBERUS STATUES: PRICE: $600 EACH.
1) RAW MATERIALS USED: $175,000.
2) DIRECT LABOR: ACTUAL HOURS WORKED: 2,000. AVERAGE COST PER HOUR: $20
3) OVERHEAD APPLIED AGAIN USING THE ABOVE PREDETERMINED OVERHEAD RATE.
C) A THIRD JOB,PRODUCTION OF 200 ACHILLES STATUES, IS STILL ON THE FACTORY FLOOR AT THE END OF THE MONTH. THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS AVAILABLE: PRICE: $500 EACH.
1) RAW MATERIALS USED SO FAR: $50,000
2) DIRECT LABOR HOURS USED: 900 AT $20/HOUR
3) OVERHEAD AGAIN IS APPLIED AT THE PREDETERMINED OVERHEAD RATE.
ADDITIONAL DATA:
ACTUAL COSTS INCURRED IN THE MONTH OF JUNE:
1) RENT EXPENSE IS $10,000/MONTH. A??3 OF THIS IS FACTORY RENT.
2) UTILITY EXPENSE IS $4,250 FOR THE MONTH OF JUNE. $3,250 IS FOR FACTORY UTILITY COSTS; THE REMAINING IS FOR THE ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICES.
3) THE SALARIES FOR THE MONTH ARE $321,000. THIS INCLUDES: $96,000 INCURRED FOR DIRECT LABOR COSTS (ALREADY RECORDED); $125,000 FOR ADMINISTRATIVE AND SALES SALARIES; THE REMAINING IS FOR INDIRECT LABOR COSTS.
4) ALL DEPRECIATION ON THE MOLDING MACHINES IS A FACTORY EXPENSE.
5) 2/3 OF THE PROPERTY TAX EXPENSE IS LEVIED ON THE FACTORY; THE PROPERTY TAX ESTIMATED FOR EACH MONTH IS $4,000.
6) ADDITIONAL MISCELLANEOUS MANUFACTURING OVERHEAD AMOUNTED TO $70,000.
INFORMATION NECESSARY TO PREPARE ENTRIES:
ALL SALES ARE ON ACCOUNT.
ALL PURCHASES OF INVENTORYARE ON ACCOUNT.
ALL OTHER EXPENSES ARE PAID IN CASH.
DURING THE MONTH THE COMPANY PAID $125,000 ON ACCOUNT AND RECEIVED $75,000 ON ACCOUNT.
SALES FOR THE MONTH:
1) SOLD BEGINNING INVENTORY IN FINISHED GOODS FOR $150,000
2) SOLD ALL OF THE PEGASUS ORDER OF 400 STATUES ‘ PRICE $750 EACH.
REMAINING IN FINISHED GOODS INVENTORY: THE CERBERUS ORDER.
REMAINING IN WORK IN PROCESS INVENTORY: THE ACHILLES ORDER.
YOU WILL NEED TO A) PREPARE THE JOURNAL ENTRIES TO RECORD THE TRANSACTIONS FOR THE MONTH INCLUDING THE FLOW OF INVENTORY AND APPLIED OVERHEAD.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
fIGLEAF.COM
POST-CLOSING TRIAL BALANCE
MAY 31, 2005
CASH 475,000
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE 75,000
ALLOW FOR UNCOLLECTIBLE ACCTS 5,000
NOTES RECEIVABLE 200,000
RAW MATERIALS 50,000
WORK IN PROCESS, PEGASUS 25,000
WORK IN PROCESS, CERBERUS 65,000
WORK IN PROCESS, ACHILLES 10,000
FINISHED GOODS 75,000
MOLDING MACHINES 1,000,000
ACCUMULATED DEP(100K/YEAR) 491,667
OFFICE FURNITURE/EQUIPMENT 75,000
ACCUMULATED DEP(5K/YEAR) 14,583
PATENTS 25,000
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE 125,000
NOTES PAYABLE 25,000
COMMON STOCK 600,000
RETAINED EARNINGS 813,750
TOTALS $2,075,000 $2,075,000
TRANSACTIONS FOR THE MONTH OF JUNE:
1) PURCHASED RAW MATERIALS (CEMENT, DYES, STONES) TOTALING $350,000.
2) REQUISITIONED INTO PRODUCTION IN MONTH OF JUNE: $350,000.
3) 2 JOBS FINISHED IN JUNE:
A) PRODUCTION OF 400 PEGASUS STATUES (PRICE: $750/EACH) COSTS:
1) RAW MATERIALS USED: $125,000 IN RAW MATERIALS.
2) DIRECT LABOR COSTS: ACTUAL HOURS WORKED ON THIS JOB: 1900. AVERAGE COST PER HOUR: $20
3. OVERHEAD: THE COMPANY USES A PREDETERMINED OVERHEAD RATE BASED ON DIRECT LABOR HOURS CALCULATED AT THE BEGINNING OF THE FISCAL YEAR. THE TOTAL OVERHEAD ESTIMATED AT THE BEGINNING OF THE YEAR WAS $2,000,000. THE COMPANY ESTIMATED IT WOULD USE 50,000 HOURS OF DIRECT LABOR FOR YEAR.
ADDITIONAL DATA:
ACTUAL COSTS INCURRED IN THE MONTH OF JUNE:
1) RENT EXPENSE IS $10,000/MONTH. A??3 OF THIS IS FACTORY RENT.
2) UTILITY EXPENSE IS $4,250 FOR THE MONTH OF JUNE. $3,250 IS FOR FACTORY UTILITY COSTS; THE REMAINING IS FOR THE ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICES.
3) THE SALARIES FOR THE MONTH ARE $321,000. THIS INCLUDES: $96,000 INCURRED FOR DIRECT LABOR COSTS (ALREADY RECORDED); $125,000 FOR ADMINISTRATIVE AND SALES SALARIES; THE REMAINING IS FOR INDIRECT LABOR COSTS.
4) ALL DEPRECIATION ON THE MOLDING MACHINES IS A FACTORY EXPENSE.
5) 2/3 OF THE PROPERTY TAX EXPENSE IS LEVIED ON THE FACTORY; THE PROPERTY TAX ESTIMATED FOR EACH MONTH IS $4,000.
6) ADDITIONAL MISCELLANEOUS MANUFACTURING OVERHEAD AMOUNTED TO $70,000.
INFORMATION NECESSARY TO PREPARE ENTRIES:
ALL SALES ARE ON ACCOUNT.
ALL PURCHASES OF INVENTORYARE ON ACCOUNT.
ALL OTHER EXPENSES ARE PAID IN CASH.
DURING THE MONTH THE COMPANY PAID $125,000 ON ACCOUNT AND RECEIVED $75,000 ON ACCOUNT.
SALES FOR THE MONTH:
1) SOLD BEGINNING INVENTORY IN FINISHED GOODS FOR $150,000
2) SOLD ALL OF THE PEGASUS ORDER OF 400 STATUES ‘ PRICE $750 EACH.
REMAINING IN FINISHED GOODS INVENTORY: THE CERBERUS ORDER.
REMAINING IN WORK IN PROCESS INVENTORY: THE ACHILLES ORDER.
YOU WILL NEED TO A) PREPARE THE JOURNAL ENTRIES TO RECORD THE TRANSACTIONS FOR THE MONTH INCLUDING THE FLOW OF INVENTORY AND APPLIED OVERHEAD.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
fIGLEAF.COM
POST-CLOSING TRIAL BALANCE
MAY 31, 2005
CASH 475,000
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE 75,000
ALLOW FOR UNCOLLECTIBLE ACCTS 5,000
NOTES RECEIVABLE 200,000
RAW MATERIALS 50,000
WORK IN PROCESS, PEGASUS 25,000
WORK IN PROCESS, CERBERUS 65,000
WORK IN PROCESS, ACHILLES 10,000
FINISHED GOODS 75,000
MOLDING MACHINES 1,000,000
ACCUMULATED DEP(100K/YEAR) 491,667
OFFICE FURNITURE/EQUIPMENT 75,000
ACCUMULATED DEP(5K/YEAR) 14,583
PATENTS 25,000
ACCOUNTS PAYABLE 125,000
NOTES PAYABLE 25,000
COMMON STOCK 600,000
RETAINED EARNINGS 813,750
TOTALS $2,075,000 $2,075,000
TRANSACTIONS FOR THE MONTH OF JUNE:
1) PURCHASED RAW MATERIALS (CEMENT, DYES, STONES) TOTALING $350,000.
2) REQUISITIONED INTO PRODUCTION IN MONTH OF JUNE: $350,000.
3) 2 JOBS FINISHED IN JUNE:
A) PRODUCTION OF 400 PEGASUS STATUES (PRICE: $750/EACH) COSTS:
1) RAW MATERIALS USED: $125,000 IN RAW MATERIALS.
2) DIRECT LABOR COSTS: ACTUAL HOURS WORKED ON THIS JOB: 1900. AVERAGE COST PER HOUR: $20
3. OVERHEAD: THE COMPANY USES A PREDETERMINED OVERHEAD RATE BASED ON DIRECT LABOR HOURS CALCULATED AT THE BEGINNING OF THE FISCAL YEAR. THE TOTAL OVERHEAD ESTIMATED AT THE BEGINNING OF THE YEAR WAS $2,000,000. THE COMPANY ESTIMATED IT WOULD USE 50,000 HOURS OF DIRECT LABOR FOR YEAR.
YOU WILL NEED TO A) PREPARE THE JOURNAL ENTRIES TO RECORD THE TRANSACTIONS FOR THE MONTH INCLUDING THE FLOW OF INVENTORY AND APPLIED OVERHEAD.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From Financial & Managerial Accounting, 13th ed; Exercise 8.5:
Jensen Tire had 2 large shipments in transit at Dec. 31. One was a $125,000 inbound shipment of merchandise (shipped Dec. 28, F.O.B. shipping point). which arrived at Jensen’s receiving dock Jan. 2. The other shiopment was a $95,000 outbound shipment of merchandise to a customer, which was shipped and billed by Jensen Dec. 30 (terms F.O.B. shipping point) and reached the customer Jan. 8.
In taking a physical inventory on Dec. 31, Jensen counted all goods on hand and priced the inventory on the basis of average cost. The total amount was $600,000. No goods in transit were included in this figure.
What amount should appear as inventory on the company’s balance sheet at Dec. 31? Explain. If you indicate an amount other than $600,000, state which asset or liability other than inventory also would be changed in amount.
Would greatly appreciate some help. TX!!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
From Financial & Managerial Accounting, 13th ed; Exercise 9.9:
For several years, a number of Food Lion, Inc., grocery stores were unprofitable. The company closed, and continues to close some of these locations. It is apparent that the company will not be able to recover the cost of the assets associated with the closed stores. Thus, the current value of these impaired assets must be written down (see Case in Point on page 381).
A recent Food Lion income statement reports a $9.5 million charge against income pertaining to the write-down of impaired assets.
a. Explain why Food Lion must write down the current carrying value of its unprofitable stores.
b. Explain why the recent $9.5 million charge to write down these impaired assets is considered a noncash expense.
Any help is greatly appreciated. TX!!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Financial Ratios
12/31/11 12/31/10
Current Assets 1,200,000 900,000
Total Assets 4,000,000 3,000,000
Current Liabilities 320,000 400,000
Bonds Payable (long term) 1,500,000 1,200,000
Total Liabilities
Capital Stock $10 Par value 1,000,000 1,000,000
Retained Earnings 1,180,000 400,000
* These bonds are the only long term liabilites.
Dividends of $50,000 were declared and paid in 2011. Compute the following:
Current Ratio at the end of 2010 ? to 1
Current Ratio at the end of 2011 ? to 1
Working Capital at the end of 2010 $
Working Capital at the end of 2011 $
Debt ratio at the end of 2010 %
Debt ratio at the end of 2011 %
Earnings per share for 2011** $
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
For financial reporting, Clinton Poultry Farms has used the declining-balance method of depreciation for conveyor equipment acquired at the beginning of 2008 for $2,560,000. Its useful life was estimated to be six years, with a $160,000 residual value. At the beginning of 2011, Clinton decides to change to the straight-line method. The effect of this change on depreciation for each year is as follows:
($ in 000s)
Year Straight Line Declining Balance Difference
2008 $ 400 $ 853 $ 453
2009 400 569 169
2010 400 379 (21 )
$ 1,200 $ 1,801 $ 601
Required:
(2)
Prepare any 2011 journal entry related to the change. (Enter your answers in dollars not in thousands. Use the declining balance provided in the question. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
General Journal Debit Credit
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Flandro Company uses a standard cost system and sets predetermined overhead rates on the basis of direct labor-hours. The following data are taken from the company’s budget for the current year:
Denominator activity (direct labor-hours) 12,900
Variable manufacturing overhead cost $56,760
Fixed manufacturing overhead cost $141,900
The standard cost card for the company’s only product is given below:
Direct materials, 3 yards at $2.60 per yard $7.80
Direct labor, 2 hour at $10 per hour 20.00
Manufacturing overhead, 154.00% of direct labor cost 30.80
Standard cost per unit
$58.60
During the year, the company produced 5,000 units of product and incurred the following costs:
Materials purchased, 32,000 yards at $2.50 per yard $80,000
Materials used in production (in yards) 26,000
Direct labor cost incurred, 12,000 hours at $8.1 per hour $97,200
Variable manufacturing overhead cost incurred $34,300
Fixed manufacturing overhead cost incurred $33,700
Requirement 1:
Redo the standard cost card in a clearer, more usable format by detailing the variable and fixed overhead cost elements. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Direct materials $
Direct labor
Variable manufacturing overhead
Fixed manufacturing overhead cost
Standard cost per unit
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fleet Inc. is an athletic footware company that began operations on jan 1, 2012. the following transactions relate to debt investments acquired by Fleet Inc. which has fiscal year ending on december 31:
2012
Mar 1. Purchased $36,0000of madison Co. 5% 10-year bonds at face value plus accrued interest of $15. the bonds pay interest semiannually on february 1st and august 1
apr 16 purchased $45,0000 of Westville 4%, 15-year bonds at face value plus accrued interest semianually on april 1st and october 1st.
aug 1. received semiannuall interest on the madison co. bonds
sep 1 sold $12,0000 of madison co bonds at 98 plus accrued interest of $50
oct 1 received semiannual interest on westville bonds
dec 31 accrued $500 interest on Madison Co. bonds
dec 31 accrued $450 interest on westville bonds
2013
feb 1 received semiannual interest on the madison co bonds
apr 1 received semiannual interest on the Westville bonds
Instructions
1. Journalize the entries to record the transactions
2. if the bond portfolio was classified as available-for-sale, what impact would that have on financial statement disclosure
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fleet Inc. is an athletic footware company that began operations on January 1, 2012. The following transactions relate to debt investments acquired by fleet Inc which has a fiscal year ending december 31.
2012
Mar. 1 Purchased $36,000 of Madison Co. 5% 10-year bonds at face value plus plus accrued interest of $150. The binds pay interest semiannually on Feb 1 and Aug 1
Apr 16 Purchased $45,000 of Westville 4%, 15- year bonds at face value plus accrued interest of $75. The bonds pay interest semiannnualy on Apr 1 & Oct 1
Aug 1 Received semiannual interest on the Madison Co. bonds
Sept 1 Sold $12,000 of Madison Co, bonds at 98 plus accrued interest of $50.
Oct 1 Received semiannual interest on Westville Bonds.
Dec 31. accrued $500 interest on Madison Co. bonds
31. accrued $450 interest on Westville bonds
2013
Feb 1 Received semiannual interest on the Madison Co bonds
Apr 1 Received semiannual interest on the Westville bonds
Instructions
1. Journalize the entries to record these transactions
2. if the bond portfolio was classified as available for sale, what impact would this have on financial statement disclosure?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following activities took place in the work in process inventory account during April:
Beginning balance $ 15,000
Direct materials used 120,000
Total manufacturing labor incurred in April was $162,500, 80% of this amount represented direct labor. The predetermined manufacturing overhead rate is 120% of direct labor cost. Actual manufacturing overhead costs for April amounted to $150,000. Two jobs were completed with total costs of $120,000 and $85,000, respectively. They were sold on account for $265,000 and $155,000, respectively.
a) Compute the balance in work in process inventory on April 30.
b) Record the journal entry for direct materials used in April.
c) Record the journal entry for total manufacturing labor incurred in April.
d) Record the journal entry to allocate manufacturing labor to the appropriate accounts.
e) Record the journal entry for allocated manufacturing overhead for April.
f) Record the entry to move the completed jobs into finished goods inventory.
g) Record the entry to sell the two completed jobs on account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following activities took place in the work in process inventory account during April:
Beginning balance $ 15,000
Direct materials used 120,000
Total manufacturing labor incurred in April was $162,500, 80% of this amount represented direct labor. The predetermined manufacturing overhead rate is 120% of direct labor cost. Actual manufacturing overhead costs for April amounted to $150,000. Two jobs were completed with total costs of $120,000 and $85,000, respectively. They were sold on account for $265,000 and $155,000, respectively.
a) Compute the balance in work in process inventory on April 30.
b) Record the journal entry for direct materials used in April.
c) Record the journal entry for total manufacturing labor incurred in April.
d) Record the journal entry to allocate manufacturing labor to the appropriate accounts.
e) Record the journal entry for allocated manufacturing overhead for April.
f) Record the entry to move the completed jobs into finished goods inventory.
g) Record the entry to sell the two completed jobs on account.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Should the following be in Brown’s inventory account at 12/31/10?
|
|
$80,000 of goods purchased by Brown. Terms were FOB Shipping point and they left the vendor’s warehouse on 1/1/11
|
|
|
$30,000 of goods held on consignment for Lucky’s.
|
|
|
$25,000 of fire damaged merchandise.
|
|
|
at discounted amount, would be in probably at LCM
|
|
$45,000 of products shipped to customer of Brown on 12/20/10 FOB Destination. Goods arrived on 1/3/11
|
|
|
$10,000 of product held by Discount Hardware on consignment from Brown
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following data are accumulated by Reynolds Company in evaluating the purchase of $104,000 of equipment, having a four-year useful life:
Net Income
Year 1 $38,000
Year 2 23,000
Year 3 11,000
Year 4 (1,000)
Net Cash Flow
Year 1 = 64,000
Year 2 = 49,000
Year 3 = 37,000
Year 4 = 25,000
A.) Assuming that the desired rate of return is 15%, determine the net present value for the proposal. Use the table of the present value of $1
B.) Would management be likely to look with favor on the proposal? Explain.
Present Value of $1 at Compound Interest
Year 1 @ 15% = 0.870
Year 2 @ 15% = 0.756
Year 3 @ 15% = 0.712
Year 4 @ 15% = 0.636
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available for Lock-Down Company, which produces special-order security products and uses a job order cost accounting system.
April 30 May 31
Inventories
Raw materials $ 37,000 $ 50,000
Goods in process 9,500 18,600
Finished goods 56,000 33,500
Activities and information for May
Raw materials purchases (paid with cash) 181,000
Factory payroll (paid with cash) 500,000
Factory overhead
Indirect materials 18,000
Indirect labor 82,000
Other overhead costs 94,000
Sales (received in cash) 1,600,000
Predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost 55 %
Compute the following amounts for the month of May. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
1. Cost of direct materials used. $
2. Cost of direct labor used. $
3. Cost of goods manufactured. $
4. Cost of goods sold.* $
5. Gross profit. $
6. ?????????? $
*Do not consider any underapplied or overapplied overhead.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available for Lock-Down Company, which produces special-order security products and uses a job order cost accounting system.
April 30 May 31
Inventories
Raw materials $ 36,000 $ 49,000
Goods in process 11,500 22,000
Finished goods 66,000 30,800
Activities and information for May
Raw materials purchases (paid with cash) 190,000
Factory payroll (paid with cash) 395,000
Factory overhead
Indirect materials 11,000
Indirect labor 73,000
Other overhead costs 105,000
Sales (received in cash) 1,240,000
Predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost 65 %
1. Raw materials purchases for cash.
2. Direct materials usage.
3. Indirect materials usage.
Prepare journal entries for the above events for the month of May. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Events General Journal Debit Credit
1.
2.
3.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available for Lock-Down Company, which produces special-order security products and uses a job order cost accounting system.
April 30 May 31
Inventories
Raw materials $ 36,000 $ 49,000
Goods in process 10,100 18,500
Finished goods 64,000 36,400
Activities and information for May
Raw materials purchases (paid with cash) 191,000
Factory payroll (paid with cash) 415,000
Factory overhead
Indirect materials 14,000
Indirect labor 80,000
Other overhead costs 96,000
Sales (received in cash) 1,220,000
Predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost 65 %
1. Factory payroll costs in cash.
2. Direct labor usage.
3. Indirect labor usage.
Prepare journal entries for the above events for the month of May. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Events General Journal Debit Credit
1.
2.
3.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available for Lock-Down Company, which produces special-order security products and uses a job order cost accounting system.
April 30 May 31
Inventories
Raw materials $ 39,000 $ 53,000
Goods in process 11,500 17,500
Finished goods 60,000 31,000
Activities and information for May
Raw materials purchases (paid with cash) 189,000
Factory payroll (paid with cash) 410,000
Factory overhead
Indirect materials 13,000
Indirect labor 79,000
Other overhead costs 95,000
Sales (received in cash) 1,280,000
Predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost 65 %
Prepare the journal entry to allocate (close) overapplied or underapplied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
General Journal Debit Credit
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The following information is available for Moore Company:
Mixing Department
Work in process, June 1 (100% complete for direct materials, 60% complete for conversion costs) 1,500 units
Units completed in June 9,850 units
Work in process, June 30 (80% complete for direct materials, 30% complete for conversion costs) 1,050 units
2) The following information is available for Valentine Company:
Dyeing Department
Work in process, June 1 (100% complete for direct materials, 50% complete for conversion costs) 1.200 Units
Units completed in June 9,500 units
Work in process, June 30 (60% complete for direct materials, 40% complete for conversion costs) 950 units
Compute:
1. The number of units started in each department during June.
2. equivalent units for direct materials and conversion costs for each Department
Use weighted Average Method
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Department A Department B Department C Total
Sales $300,000 $280,000 $120,000 $700,000
Variable Expenses
160,000 175,000 105,000 440,000
Contribution Margin
140,000 105,000 15,000 260,000
Fixed Expenses
65,000 35,000 40,000 140,000
Net Income
$75,000 $70,000 $(25,000) $120,000
Ellen Electric has an offer from a potential supplier to provide 40,000 units at $65 each that Ellen Electric now manufactures at a total cost of $75 per unit. The manufacturing costs for 40,000 units are: direct materials $900,000; direct labor $450,000; variable overhead $900,000; and fixed overhead $750,000. All costs except $500,000 in fixed overhead will be avoided if the parts are purchased.
(B) Would your answer change if Ellen Electric could use the capacity that would become available to produce additional income of $125,000? Explain
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Department G had 3,300 units, one-third completed at the beginning of the period, 13,843 units were completed during the period, 1,772 units were one-fifth completed at the end of the period, and the following manufacturing costs were debited to the departmental work in process account during the period:
Work in process, beginning of period $28,550
Costs added during period:
Direct materials $110,223
Direct labor $73,482
Factory overhead $24,494
a) Assuming that all direct materials are placed in process at the beginning of production and that the first-in, first-out method of inventory costing is used, what is the total cost of the departmental work in process inventory at the end of the period?
b) Assuming the same as above, what is the total cost of 3,600 units of beginning inventory which were completed during the period?
c) Assuming the same FIFO method, what is the total cost of the units “started and completed” during the period?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
draw a document flowchart to depict each of the following situations
(a) an individual from the marketing department of wholesale company prepares five copies of a sale invoice, and each copy is sent to a different department
(b) the individual invoices from credit sales must temporarily be stored until they can be matched against
customer payments at later date
(c) A batch control tape is prepared along with a set of transactions to ensure completeness
of data
(d) the source document data found on employee application forms are used as input to create new employee records on a computer master file
(e) Delinquent credit customer are sent as many as four different inquiry letters before their accounts are turned over to a collection agency
(f) physical goods are shipped back to the supplier if they are found to be damaged upon arrival at the receiving warehouse
(g) the data found on employee time cards are keyed onto a hard disk before they are processed by a computer
(h) the data found on employee time cards are first keyed onto a floppy diskette before they are entered into a computer job stream for processing
(i) A document flowchart is becoming difficult to understand because too many lines cross one another(describe a solution)
(j)three people all in different department look at the same document before it is eventually filed in fourth department
(k) Certain data from a source document are copied into a ledger before the document itself is filed in another department
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dual effects on balance sheet equation and journal entries.
Assume that during 2008, a U.S. retailer, engages in the following six transactions.
Bullseye Corporation applies U.S. GAAP, and reports its results in millions of U.S. dollars.
1.The firm issues 20 million shares of $0.0833 per value common stock for a total of $960 million cash.
2. It purchases merchandise costing $1500 million on account.
3. The firm acquires a new store location, consisting of a building costing $3200 million and land costing $930 million. It pays cash to the owner of the property.
4. The firm purchases fixtures for the new store costing $860 million on account.
5. The firm pays the merchandise supplier in transaction (2) the amount due.
6. The firm pays the supplier of the fixtures in transaction (4) half of the amount due in cash. The firm pays the other half by issuing 8.6 million common shares to the supplier. At the time of this transaction, Bullseye Corporation shares traded at $50 per share in the market.
a. Indicate the effects of these six transactions on the balance sheet equation using this format:
Transaction Number Assets = Liabilities + Shareholders Equity
(1) +$960 $0 +$960
Subtotal $960 = $0 + $960
b. Give the journal entries for each of the six transactions.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dunay Corporation is considering investing $905,000 in a project. The life of the project would be 9 years. The project would require additional working capital of $38,000, which would be released for use elsewhere at the end of the project. The annual net cash inflows would be $186,000. The salvage value of the assets used in the project would be $48,000. The company uses a discount rate of 17%. (Ignore income taxes.)
Click here to view Exhibit 13B-1 and Exhibit 13B-2 to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables.
Required:
Compute the net present value of the project. (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Round discount factor(s) to 3 decimal places, intermediate and final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Net present value $
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Dutton Company prepared the tabulation below at December 31, 2008.
Net Income $275,000
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
Depreciation expense, $25,000
Decrease in accounts receivable, $55,000
Increase in inventory, $12,000
Decrease in accounts payable, $6,600
Increase in income taxes payable, $1,500
Loss on sale of land, $5,000
Net cash provided (used) by operating activities
Instructions:
Show how each item should be reported in the statement of cash flows. Use parentheses for deductions
Net income
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
depreciation expense
decrease in accounts receivable
increase in inventory
decrease in accounts payable
increase in income tax payable
loss in sale of land
net cash provided(used) by operating activities
?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E 2-2
Stine Company uses a job order cost system. On May 1, the company has a balance in Work in Process Inventory of $3,500 and two jobs in process: Job No 429 $2,000, and Job No 430 $1,500. During May, a summary of source documents reveals the following:
MATERIALS LABOR
JOB NUMBER REQUISITION SLIPS TIME TICKETS
429 $2,500 $1,900
430 3,500 3,000
431 4,400 $10,400 7,600 $12,500
GENERAL USE 800 1,200
___________ _____________
$11,200 $13,700
Stine Company applies manufacturing overhead jobs at an overhead rate of 60% of direct labor cost. Job No. 429 is completed during the month.
(a) Prepare summary journal entries to record (i) requisition slips, (ii) the time tickets, (iii) the assignment of manufacturing overhead to jobs, and (iv) the completion of Job No. 429.
(b) Post entries to Work in Process Inventory, and prove the agreement of the control account with the job cost sheets (Use a T account)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
E4-10 Wilmington, Inc. manufactures A?¬ ve models of kitchen appliances at its Mesa plant.
The company is installing activity-based costing and has identiA?¬ ed the following activities
performed at its Mesa plant.
1. Designing new models.
2. Purchasing raw materials and parts.
3. Storing and managing inventory.
4. Receiving and inspecting raw materials and parts.
5. Interviewing and hiring new personnel.
6. Machine forming sheet steel into appliance parts.
7. Manually assembling parts into appliances.
8. Training all employees of the company.
9. Insuring all tangible A?¬ xed assets.
10. Supervising production.
11. Maintaining and repairing machinery and equipment.
12. Painting and packaging A?¬ nished appliances.
Having analyzed its Mesa plant operations for purposes of installing activity-based costing, Wilmington, Inc. identiA?¬ ed its activity cost centers. It now needs to identify relevant
activity cost drivers in order to assign overhead costs to its products.
Instructions
Using the activities listed above, identify for each activity one or more cost drivers that
might be used to assign overhead to Wilmington’s A?¬ ve products.
Weygandt, Jerry J. (2011-12-01). Managerial Accounting: Tools for Business Decision Making, 6th Edition (Page 179). Wiley. Kindle Edition.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eastern University prides itself on providing faculty and staff a competitive compensation package. One aspect of this package is a faculty and staff child tuition benefit of $4,000 per child per year for up to four years to offset the cost of a college education. The faculty or staff member’s child can attend any college or university, including Eastern University, and receive the tuition benefit. If a staff member has three children in college one year, the staff member receives a $12,000 tuition benefit. This money is not taxed to the individual staff or faculty member.
Eastern University pays the benefit directly to the university where the staff/faculty member’s child is enrolled or if the student is attending Eastern, it reduces the amount of tuition owed by the faculty/staff member. The university then charges this payment to a benefits account. This benefits account is then allocated back to the various colleges and departments based on total salaries in the college or department
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Eaton Co. uses the retail inventory method to estimate its inventory for interim statement purposes. Data relating to the computation of the inventory at July 31, 2007, are as follows: The Inventory balance at cost on Jan/31/2007 is $200,000 and is determined to be $300,000 at retail prices. Purchases made during the year cost $1,200,000 and are determined to be $1,600,000 at retail prices. In addition, Sales for the period are $1,600,000, estimated normal shoplifting losses are $20,000, markdowns are $140,000, markdown cancelations are $30,000, markups are $130,000. Abnormal spoilage is $40,000 cost and $65,000 retail. Freight costs are $17,000. Purchase discounts are $15,000 and employee discounts are $15,000.
a) Under the lower-of-cost-or-market (conventional) method, calculate Eaton’s estimated inventory at July 31, 2007.
b) Under the average cost method, calculate Eaton’s estimated inventory at July 31, 2007.
c) Under the LIFO method, calculate Eaton’s estimated inventory at July 31, 2007.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An ECG partner has not been diligent in fulfilling contractual obligations for a business strategy engagement, which requires timely response because the final presentation to the client will occur in a matter of weeks. The partner did not encourage the consulting team to conduct some very critical market research and analysis of a new business opportunity for a long-standing client. Instead, data was used from a similar study done 3 years ago while the partner was employed by another consulting firm. This data, which overstates the current market opportunity, was shared with the client during an interim presentation along with a recommendation to consider a strategic move into the business market. The presentation could influence the client’s decision to invest significant resources into a new venture that is not as appealing strategically or financially now as it was in the past. If the issue becomes more widely known, business factors, inherent risks with certain responses to this situation, the possible loss of a key client, questions about firm’s credibility, and the potential negative affect to the firm’s upcoming IPO must also be considered.
Define critical steps in the decision-making process
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Edington Plumbing Company is a newly formed company specializing in plumbing services for home and business. The owner, Steve Edington, had divided the company into two segments: Home Plumbing Services and Business Plumbing Services. Each segment is run by its own supervisor, while basic selling and administrative services are shared by both segments.
Steve has asked you to help him create a performance reporting system that will allow him to measure each segment’s performance in terms of its profitability. To that end, the following information has been collected on the Home Plumbing Services segment for the first quarter of 2011.
Budgeted Actual
Service revenue $30,000 $31,200
Allocated portion of:
Building depreciation 13,200 13,200
Advertising 6,000 5,040
Billing 4,200 3,600
Property taxes 1,440 1,200
Material and supplies 1,800 1,440
Supervisory salaries 10,800 11,280
Insurance 4,800 4,200
Wages 3,600 3,960
Gas and oil 3,240 4,080
Equipment depreciation 1,920 1,560
Prepare a responsibility report for the first quarter of 2011 for the Home Plumbing Services segment. (List budget amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2. If answer is 0, please enter 0 for the amount and NA for the variance. Enter all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Elizabeth Company reported the following amounts in the stockholders’ equity section of its December 31, 2010, balance sheet.
Preferred stock, 10%, $100 par (10,000 shares authorized, 2,000 shares issued) $200,000
Common stock, $5 par (100,000 shares authorized, 20,000 shares issued) 100,000
Additional paid-in capital 125,000
Retained earnings 490,000
Total $915,000
During 2011, Elizabeth took part in the following transactions concerning stockholders’ equity.
1. Paid the annual 2010 $10 per share dividend on preferred stock and a $8 per share dividend on common stock. These dividends had been declared on December 31, 2010.
2. Purchased 1,700 shares of its own outstanding common stock for $41 per share. Elizabeth uses the cost method.
3. Reissued 700 treasury shares for land valued at $30,700.
4. Issued 500 shares of preferred stock at $107 per share.
5. a 10% stock dividend on the outstanding common stock when the stock is selling for $50 per share.
6. Issued the stock dividend.
7. Declared the annual 2011 $10 per share dividend on preferred stock and the $8 per share dividend on common stock. These dividends are payable in 2012.
(a) Prepare journal entries to record the transactions described above.
(b) Prepare the December 31, 2011, stockholders’ equity section. Assume 2011 net income was $330,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Empire Corporation needs to set a target price for its newly designed product R2’D2.
The following data relate to this new product.
Per Unit Total
Direct materials $8
Direct labor $15
Variable manufacturing overhead $7
Fixed manufacturing overhead $2,000,000
Variable selling and administrative expenses $6
Fixed selling and administrative expenses $1,000,000
These costs are based on a budgeted volume of 100,000 units produced and sold each year. Empire
uses cost-plus pricing methods to set its target selling price. The markup on total unit cost
is 35%.
Instructions
(a) Compute the total variable cost per unit, total fixed cost per unit, and total cost per unit for
R2’D2.
(b) Compute the desired ROI per unit for R2’D2.
(c)Compute the target selling price for R2’D2.
(d)Compute variable cost per unit, fixed cost per unit, and total cost per unit assuming that
80,000 R2’D2s are sold during the year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
enus Chocolate Company processes chocolate into candy bars. The process begins by placing direct materials (raw chocolate, milk, and sugar) into the Blending Department. All materials are placed into production at the beginning of the blending process. After blending, the milk chocolate is then transferred to the Molding Department, where the milk chocolate is formed into candy bars. The following is a partial work in process account of the Blending Department at March 31, 2012:
ACCOUNT Work in Process”Blending Department ACCOUNT NO.
Date Item Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
Mar. 1 Bal., 5,500 units, 4/5 completed 21,010
31 Direct materials, 220,000 units 704,000 725,010
31 Direct labor 139,800 864,810
31 Factory overhead 34,920 899,730
31 Goods transferred, 221,000 units ?
31 Bal., ? units, 2/5 completed ?
Instructions:
Hide
Hint(s)
1. Prepare a cost of production report, and identify the missing amounts for Work in Process”Blending Department. If an amount is zero, enter in a zero (0). When computing cost per equivalent units, round to two decimal places.
Venus Chocolate Company
Cost of Production Report-Blending Department
For the Month Ended March 31, 2012
Unit Information
Units charged to production:
Inventory in process, March 1
Received from materials storeroom
Total units accounted for by the Blending Department
Units to be assigned cost:
Equivalent Units
Whole Units
Direct Materials
Conversion
Inventory in process, March 1
Started and completed in March
Transferred to Blending Department in March
Inventory in process, March 31
Total units to be assigned cost
Cost Information
Costs per equivalent unit:
Direct Materials
Conversion
Total costs for March in Blending Department
$
$
Total equivalent units
Cost per equivalent unit
$
$
Costs charged to production:
Direct Materials
Conversion
Total
Inventory in process, March 1
$
Costs incurred in March
Total costs accounted for by the Blending Department
$
Cost allocated to completed and partially completed units:
Inventory in process, March 1 balance
$
To complete inventory in process, March 1
$
$
Cost of completed March 1 work in process
$
Started and completed in March
Transferred to Molding Department in March
$
Inventory in process, March 31
Total costs assigned by the Blending Department
$
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Excel Homework Problem #3
Navigation Inc. produces gyroscopes for electronic navigation systems used in aircraft. Company income statements for the last three years using absorption costing are:
| |
|
|
|
Year 1 |
|
Year 2 |
|
Year 3 |
| Sales |
|
|
2,250,000 |
|
2,025,000 |
|
3,375,000 |
| COGS: |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| |
Beginning inventory |
|
246,600 |
|
371,382 |
|
802,620 |
| |
COGM |
|
1,459,000 |
|
1,592,500 |
|
1,370,000 |
| |
Goods ava. For sale |
|
1,705,600 |
|
1,963,882 |
|
2,172,620 |
| |
Ending Inventory |
|
371,382 |
|
802,620 |
|
178,100 |
| COGS |
|
|
1,334,218 |
|
1,161,262 |
|
1,994,520 |
| |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Gross Margin |
|
|
915,782 |
|
863,738 |
|
1,380,480 |
| Selling and Admin Exp |
|
|
510,000 |
|
484,000 |
|
640,000 |
| NOI |
|
|
405,782 |
|
379,738 |
|
740,480 |
The beginning inventory in Year 1 was 1,800 units valued at $137 per unit, which included $48 per unit of allocated fixed manufacturing overhead. After selling 10,000 units in Year 1, the company anticipated increased sales of 13,000 units in Year 2 and scheduled production accordingly. Unfortunately, a slump in aircraft sales in Year 2 due to a nation-wide recession resulted in sales of only 9,000 units and a higher than desired ending inventory. By the end of Year 2, the economy was much improved and aircraft sales were rebounding sharply. Navigation planned for improved sales of at least 14,500 units in Year 3. Production was scheduled to meet the anticipated demand while lowering inventory levels. Actual production and sales figures for the three years were as shown:
| |
|
Year 1 |
Year 2 |
Year 3 |
| |
|
|
|
|
| Production in units |
|
11,000 |
12,500 |
10,000 |
| Sales in units |
|
10,000 |
9,000 |
15,000 |
Additional information:
a. Variable manufacturing costs per unit were $49.00 for direct materials, $25.00 for direct labor, and $15.00 for variable manufacturing overhead in each of the three years. Fixed manufacturing overhead was $480,000 in each year.
b. The company uses First in first out (FIFO) inventory flow assumption to value inventory.
c. The company applies fixed manufacturing overhead per unit to each year’s product based on each year’s production (i.e. the fixed manufacturing overhead per unit is different each year).
d. Variable selling and administrative costs each year were $26.00 per unit. Fixed selling and administrative costs were $250,000 in each of the three years.
Required:
1. Compute the absorption costing unit product cost for each year. (Show each variable cost per unit, fixed cost per unit, and total cost per unit.)
2. Compute the variable costing unit product cost for each year.
3. Prepare variable costing income statements in contribution format for each of the three years.
4. Show a reconciliation to explain the difference between variable costing net operating income and absorption costing net operating income each year.
Additional instructions:
1. Submit the problem on electronic media (CD, flash drive, etc.) in the manila envelope provided. The project will be graded on the accuracy of the answers, the appearance of the schedules and statements, and the use of the functionality of Excel.
2. Use good form for the income statement. Include the calculation of COGS using beginning and ending finished goods inventory.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Exercise 14-9 (Algorithmic)
Entries for Issuing and Calling Bonds; Gain
Vidovich Corp. produces and sells renewable energy equipment. To finance its operations, Vidovich Corp. issued $425,000 of 25-year, 8% callable bonds on January 1, 2012, with interest payable on January 1 and July 1. The fiscal year of the company is the calendar year.
Journalize the entries to record the following selected transactions:
2012
Jan. 1 Issued the bonds for cash at their face amount.
July. 1 Paid the interest on the bonds.
2018
July. 1 Called the bond issue at 97, the rate provided in the bond indenture. (Omit entry for payment of interest.)
Issued the bonds for cash at their face amount.
Paid the interest on the bonds.
Called the bond issue at 97, the rate provided in the bond indenture. (Omit entry for payment of interest.) For a compound transaction, if an amount box does not require an entry, leave it blank.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
‘ Explain the revenue recognition issue presented. Provide codification references.
‘ Compute the revenue to be recognized in the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012.
Situation 1: Paperback book division
The paperback book division sells large quantities of novels to a few book distributors that in turn sell to several national chains of bookstores. The division allows distributors to return up to 30% of sales, and distributors give the same terms to bookstores. While returns from individual titles fluctuate greatly, the returns from distributors have averaged 20% in each of the past 5 years. A total of $7,000,000 of paperback novel sales were made to distributors during the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012. On November 30, 2012, $2,200,000 of fiscal 2012 sales were still subject to return privileges over the next six months. The remaining $4,800,000 of fiscal 2012 sales had actual returns of 21%. Sales from fiscal 2011 totaling $2,500,000 were collected in fiscal 2012, with less than 18% of sales returned. All of the criteria for revenue recognition when the right of return exists are applicable to the paperback book division.
Situation 2:The alarm systems division works through manufacturers’ agents in various cities. Orders for alarm systems and down payments are forwarded from agents and the division ships the goods f.o.b. shipping point. Customers are billed for the balance due plus actual shipping costs. The firm received orders for $6,000,000 of goods during the fiscal year ended November 30, 2012. Down payments of $600,000 were received, and $5,000,000 of goods were billed and shipped. Actual freight costs of $100,000 were also billed. Commissions of 10% on product price were paid to manufacturers’ agents after the goods were shipped to customers. Such goods are warranted for 90 days after shipment, and warranty returns have been about 1% of sales. Revenue is recognized at the point of sale by the alarm division.
f. Assume that you are the corporate controller for Jamestown Corporation. Write a business memo, in good form to President Jeffrey Simmons explaining the accounting issues involved in the two situations. Your memo should not exceed one typewritten page.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Fastenalt is an industrial supply manufacturer that provides HVAC Specialty Thermostats to manufacturers and retailers. Fastenalt has experienced substantial growth in the past three years and is known for its high quality thermostats and reliable on-time delivery. These characteristics have resulted in high customer satisfaction. Fastenalt focuses on the strategic objectives of quality, reliability and growth. Fastenalt’s operating capacity is 4,000 thermostats per month and is currently selling 3,500 thermostats each month. Fastenalt has received a request for a special order of 800 specialty thermostats for $150,000 from Hank’s Retailer. Hank’s is the largest hardware retailer in the metropolitan area and surrounding region. Hank’s is not a current customer of Fastenalt’s. Production costs for the thermostats would be the same however Fastenalt would incur additional set-up costs of $20,000 to complete Hank’s order. No marketing costs would be associated with the special order. If Fastenalt accepts the special offer, Hank’s requires that Fastenalt fill the entire order of 800 units.
The following information is for Fastenalt’s current operations:
Sales & production data for 4,000 Specialty Thermostats
Amounts per unit (Thermostat)
Sales price $250.00
Direct materials 64.00
Direct labor 50.00
Variable overhead 35.00
Fixed overhead 25.00
Variable marketing 15.00
Fixed marketing 12.00
Required: Complete each of the following questions. CLEARLY SHOW CALCULATIONS TO SUPPORT EACH ANSWER. – NO SUPPORTING CALULATIONS = NO CREDIT.
1. Does Fastenalt have the capacity to accept the special order from Hank?
2. If Fastenalt accepts Hank’s special order, what is Fastenal’s cost from lost sales of current customers?
3. Using a relevant cost analysis should Fastenalt accept Hank’s special order?
4. If Fastenalt does not have excess capacity to accept Hank’s offer, what is the minimum price Fastenalt should accept from Hank’s for the special order?
5. If Fastenalt has excess capacity, what is the minimum price Fastenalt should accept from Hank’s for the special order?
6. Refer back to Fastenalt’s original capacity of 4,000 units. Discuss the strategic implications of accepting Hank’s offer.
7. Discuss the strategic implications of rejecting Hank’s offer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On February 1, 2007 the Caper Manufacturing Co. began construction of a building to be used as corporate offices. The building was completed on September 30,2008.
Expenditures on the project were as follows:
March 1, 2007 $ 200,000
April 30, 2007 600,000
August 31, 2007 1,000,000
November 30, 2007 1,300,000
June 1, 2008 500,000
July 31, 2008 100,000
September 1, 2008 600,000
On January 1, 2007, the company obtained a $1 million, 5 year construction loan with a 10 % interest rate. The company’s other interest-bearing debt included two long-term debt notes of $1,000,000 and $500,000 with interest rates of 6% and 8% respectively. Both notes were outstanding during all of 2007 and 2008. The company’s fiscal year-end is December 31.
a) Prepare the journal entry recording the amount of interest that Carter should capitalize in 2007 using the specific interest method.
b) Prepare the journal entry recording the amount of interest that Carter should capitalize in 2008 using the specific interest method.
c) What is the cost of the building at December 31, 2007 and December 31, 2008?
d) Calculate the amount of interest expense that will appear in the 2007 and 2008 income statements.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A Corporation has 2 divisions: Division 1 and Division 2. Division 1 makes product A, product B and product C. Those products are sold to both to outside customers and to Division 2. Division 2 uses products A,B, and C in manufacturing products D, E and F respectively. Recently products a A,B, and C have been in short supply. As a result, Division 2 has been operating below capacity because of the lack of these products. Finally, Division 1 was told to sell all its products to Division 2. Here the facts about this products:
Division 1:
product A Product B Product C
transfer price $10 $10 $15
variable manufacturing cost $3 $6 $5
contribution per unit $7 $4 $10
fixed cost (total) $50,000 $100,000 $75,000
Division 1 has a capacity of 50,000 units per month. The processing constraints are such that capacity production can be obtained only by producing at least 10,000 units of each products. The remaining capacity can be used to produce 20,000 units of any combination of the three products. The Division 1 cannot exceed the capacity of 50,000 units.
Division 2 has sufficient capacity to produce about 40% more than it is now producing because the availability of products A,B, and C is limiting production. Also, Division 2 can sell all the products that it can produce at the prices indicated above.
Division 2
product D Product E Product F
selling price $28 $30 $30
variable cost:
inside purchases 10 10 15
other variable costs 5 5 8
total variable cost 15 15 23
contribution per unit 13 15 7
fixed cost (total) $100,000 $100,000 $200,000
Question:
What production pattern optimizes total company profits?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A Corporation has 2 divisions: Division 1 and Division 2. Division 1 makes product A, product B and product C. Those products are sold to both to outside customers and to Division 2. Division 2 uses products A,B, and C in manufacturing products D, E and F respectively. Recently products a A,B, and C have been in short supply. As a result, Division 2 has been operating below capacity because of the lack of these products. Finally, Division 1 was told to sell all its products to Division 2. Here the facts about this products:
Division 1:
product A Product B Product C
transfer price $10 $10 $15
variable manufacturing cost $3 $6 $5
contribution per unit $7 $4 $10
fixed cost (total) $50,000 $100,000 $75,000
Division 1 has a capacity of 50,000 units per month. The processing constraints are such that capacity production can be obtained only by producing at least 10,000 units of each products. The remaining capacity can be used to produce 20,000 units of any combination of the three products. The Division 1 cannot exceed the capacity of 50,000 units.
Division 2 has sufficient capacity to produce about 40% more than it is now producing because the availability of products A,B, and C is limiting production. Also, Division 2 can sell all the products that it can produce at the prices indicated above.
Division 2
product D Product E Product F
selling price $28 $30 $30
variable cost:
inside purchases 10 10 15
other variable costs 5 5 8
total variable cost 15 15 23
contribution per unit 13 15 7
fixed cost (total) $100,000 $100,000 $200,000
Question:
If you were the manager of Division 1, what products would you sell to the Division 2 if there were no outside markets for products A,B or C?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cory Bryant runs a courier service in downtown Phoenix. He charges clients $0.50 per mile driven. Cory has determined that if he drives 2,700 miles in a month, his total operating cost is $931. If he drives 5,900 miles in a month, his total operating cost is $1,507. Cory has used the high-low method to determine that his monthly cost equation is: Total Monthly Cost = $445 + $0.18 per Mile Driven.
1: Determine how many miles Cory needs to drive to break even. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to next whole number.)
Break-even units:_______miles
2: Calculate Cory’s degree of operating leverage if he drives 6,100 miles. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to 4 decimal places.)
Degree of operating leverage:_______
3: Suppose Cory took a week off and his sales for the month decreased by 23 percent. Using the degree of operating leverage, calculate the effect this will have on his profit for that month. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 4 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)
Effect on profit:_______%
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cotton White, Inc., makes specialty clothing for chefs. The company reported the following costs for 2010.
Factory rent————————————$36,000
Company advertising————————–24,000
Wages paid to seamstresses—————–75,000
Depreciation on salespersons’ vehicles——30,000
Thread——————————————1,000
Utilities for factory—————————23,000
Cutting room supervisor’s salary———–30,000
President’s salary—————————75,000
Premium quality cotton material———–40,000
Buttons—————————————–750
Factory insurance—————————-18,000
Depreciation on sewing machines———–6,000
Wages paid to cutters———————-50,000
2: Compute the cost of direct labor for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Direct labor cost:$___________
3: Compute the cost of manufacturing overhead for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Manufacturing overhead:$___________
4: Compute the total manufacturing cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Total manufacturing cost:$___________
5: Compute the prime cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Prime cost:$___________
6: Compute the conversion cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Conversion cost:$___________
7: Compute the total period cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Total period cost:$___________
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cotton White, Inc., makes specialty clothing for chefs. The company reported the following costs for 2010.
Factory rent———————————$36,000
Company advertising———————–24,000
Wages paid to seamstresses—————75,000
Depreciation on salespersons’ vehicles—–30,000
Thread—————————————-1,000
Utilities for factory————————-23,000
Cutting room supervisor’s salary————-30,000
President’s salary—————————–75,000
Premium quality cotton material————-40,000
Buttons——————————————-750
Factory insurance——————————18,000
Depreciation on sewing machines————–6,000
Wages paid to cutters————————-50,000
1: Compute the cost of direct labor for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Direct labor cost:$___________
2. Compute the cost of manufacturing overhead for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Manufacturing overhead:$___________
3. Compute the total manufacturing cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Total manufacturing cost:$___________
4. Compute the prime cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Prime cost:$___________
5. Compute the conversion cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Conversion cost:$___________
6. Compute the total period cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Total period cost:$___________
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cotton White, Inc., makes specialty clothing for chefs. The company reported the following costs for 2010.
Factory rent———————————$36,000
Company advertising———————–24,000
Wages paid to seamstresses—————75,000
Depreciation on salespersons’ vehicles—–30,000
Thread—————————————-1,000
Utilities for factory————————-23,000
Cutting room supervisor’s salary————-30,000
President’s salary—————————–75,000
Premium quality cotton material————-40,000
Buttons——————————————-750
Factory insurance——————————18,000
Depreciation on sewing machines————–6,000
Wages paid to cutters————————-50,000
1: Compute the cost of direct labor for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Direct labor cost:$___________
2. Compute the cost of manufacturing overhead for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Manufacturing overhead:$___________
3. Compute the total manufacturing cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Total manufacturing cost:$___________
4. Compute the prime cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Prime cost:$___________
5. Compute the conversion cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Conversion cost:$___________
6. Compute the total period cost for Cotton White. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Total period cost:$___________
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Crea ing a stockholder’s equity section ofthe balance sheet:
Ange s, lnc. was authorized to issue 1,000,000 shares of common stock with a par value of $1 per share.
On J nuary 1, 2011, they sold 500,000 shares for $10 a share.
They were also authorized to issue 200,000 shares of 7% preferred stock with a par value of $100. On
Janu 1,2011, they sold 100,000 shares of preferred stock for $100 a share.
Duri g 2011, they had net income of $1,000,000 and paid $700,000 out in dividends. At December 31,
2011: the common stock was trading for $11 a share and the preferred stock was trading for $101 a share.
Pleas prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet. (Some of the above information is
relev: nt to this task and some is not.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Please create journal entries for the following transactions for Wilson Inc.
l. On January 1, 2012, company sells 500,000 additional shares of stock for cash. The sale price is
$2.00 per share. The par value is $.01 (one cent) per share.
2. On January 1,2012, the company signs a lease and pays one year of rent in advance. One year of rent
is $120,000.
3. On January 2,2012, company buys Office Equipment for $120,000, paying $50,000 in cash and the
balance in a note payable.
4. On January 3, 2012, company bills Brown, Inc. for $30,000 (Canadian dollars) offees (the revenue
account is Consulting Fees Earned). On January 3, 2011, the exchange rate is $1 Canadian dollar
buys $.95 U.S. dollars.
5. On January 31, 2012, company allocates $25,000 of direct labor costs to work in process.
6. On January 31, 2012, company makes the appropriate adjusting journal entry for the rent.
7. On January 3, 2012, Brown, Inc. pays the company $30,000 Canadian dollars which the company
converts to U.S. dollars. The exchange rate is $1 Canadian dollar buys $1 U.S. Dollar.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Customers send requests for auto insurance into the Asheville sales office, where sales clerks prepare policy request forms. They file a copy of the form and forward the original to the input preparation section, where data entry clerks use networked PCs to key and key-verify the data contained on the documents to a disk (“policy requests”).
Each evening, computer operations retrieves the policy request data from the network, edits the data on the computer for accuracy (e.g., all required fields completed), sorts the data in policy number sequence, and prints a summary report listing the edited policy requests. The summary report is sent to the sales office, where the sales clerks compare the report to the copy of the policy request form that they previously filed. If everything checks out, they notify computer operations to go ahead with processing. When notified, computer operations processes the correct policy request data against the policyholder master data to create a new policy record. Each evening, a disk, which was created during the processing run, is used to print premium notices that are sent to the customer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Darter Company manufactures two products, Product F and Product G. The company expects to produce and sell 2,600 units of Product F and 6,000 units of Product G during the current year. The company uses activity-based costing to compute unit product costs for external reports. Data relating to the company’s three activity cost pools are given below for the current year:
activity cost pool estimated overhead expected activity
product F product G total
machine setups 10,400 80 180 260
purchase orders 88,440 810 1,200 2,010
general factory 65,340 2,340 3,600 5,940
Required:
Using the activity-based costing approach
1. Determine the overhead rate for each of the three cost pools.
2. Determine the total amount of overhead charged to Product G.
3. Determine the overhead cost per unit for Product G..
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Data related to the expected sales of snowboards and skis for Winter Sports Inc. for the current year, which is typical of recent years, are as follows:
Products Unit Selling Price Unit Variable Cost Sales Mix
Snowboards $230 $160 20%
Skis 380 180 80%
The estimated fixed costs for the current year are $501,120.
Instructions:
1. Determine the estimated units of sales of the overall (total) product necessary to reach the break-even point for the current year.
units
2. Based on the break-even sales in units in part 1, determine the unit sales of both snowboards and skis for the current year.
snowboards: units
skis: units
3. Assume that the sales mix was 80% snowboards and 20% skis. Determine the estimated units of sales of the overall product necessary to reach the break-even point for the current year.
units
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Data related to the expected sales of snowboards and skis for Winter Sports Inc. for the current year, which is typical of recent years, are as follows:
Products Unit Selling Price Unit Variable Cost Sales Mix
Snowboards $230 $160 20%
Skis 380 180 80%
The estimated fixed costs for the current year are $501,120.
Instructions:
1. Determine the estimated units of sales of the overall (total) product necessary to reach the break-even point for the current year.
units
2. Based on the break-even sales in units in part 1, determine the unit sales of both snowboards and skis for the current year.
snowboards: units
skis: units
3. Assume that the sales mix was 80% snowboards and 20% skis. Determine the estimated units of sales of the overall product necessary to reach the break-even point for the current year.
units
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Date: Transactions: Units: Cost per unit: Total cost:
March 1 Beginning inventory 20 $200 $4,000
March 5 Sale ($300 each) 15
March 9 Purchase 10 220 2,200
March 17 Sale ($350 each) 8
March 22 Purchase 10 230 2,300
March 27 Sale ($375 each) 12
March 30 Purchase 8 250 2,000
Total: $10,500
a) Calculate ending inventory and cost of goods sold at March 31, 2012 using the specific identification method. The March 5 sale consists of bikes from beginning inventory, the March 17 sale consists of bikes from the March 9 purchase, and the March 27 sale consists of four bikes from beginning inventory and eight bikes from the March 22 purchase.
b) Using FIFO, calculate ending inventory and cost of goods sold at March 31, 2012
c) Using LIFO, calculate ending inventory and cost of goods sold at March 31, 2012
d) Using weighted-average cost, calculate ending inventory and cost of goods sold at March 31, 2012
e) Calculate sales revenue and gross profit under each of the four methods
f) Comparing FIFO and LIFO, which one provides the more meaningful measure of ending inventory? Explain.
g) If Greg’s Bicycle Shop chooses to report inventory using LIFO instead of FIFO, record the LIFO adjustment.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Debate on cost allocation in the municipality of Statendam
It started with a letter
Statendam, November 5, 2001
To: Henk Jacobs, director finance department
From: Bob Jansen, manager refuse collection department
Dear Henk,
Someone told me that you had to see the teachers of one or your children last night, so you could not be present at the council meeting. Well, you have really missed something! The Conservative-Liberal Party seized the opportunity to use the 2002 budget for an attack on the municipal privatization policy. My department was seen as a possible spearhead of a new policy. The Conservative-Liberal Party thinks that only financial considerations should determine whether a municipality performs its duties itself or leaves them to the market. The Conservative-Liberal Party has conducted a small survey to compare the refuse collection rate for private persons in Statendam with the rates of four municipalities of similar sizes. Two of these four municipalities have contracted refuse collection out to a private enterprise and the two remaining municipalities work together with other municipalities in a joint refuse collection scheme . Table 1 shows the figures presented by the Conservative-Liberal Party.
Table 1. Refuse collection rates for private persons in different municipalities (2001)
Approach to refuse collection, a municipal duty* Refuse collection rate (waste collection levy) per household
Refuse collection, a municipal duty, contracted out to a private enterprise $190 to $197.50
Refuse collection through a joint scheme of a number of municipalities $202.50 to $217.50
Refuse collection by the municipality itself, i.e. Statendam $209
* The services offered by the municipalities mentioned above hardly differ, as far as I can tell. All the municipalities collect different kinds of waste separately, i.e. vegetables, fruit and garden waste are composted and other waste goes to the regional dump. Waste is collected once a week and people can dispose of special kinds of waste such as glass, cartons of juice or milk, etc., and household chemical waste at the usual places. All the municipalities in Table 1 use rates that cover the costs involved. In addition, Statendam and the other municipalities use separate rates for the collection and processing of industrial waste.
The group leader of the Conservative-Liberal Party thinks that his survey demonstrates that Statendam should contract out refuse collection. If the VAT-exempt status of public services disappears in the future, contracting out will become even more advantageous, according to the Conservative-Liberal Party .
You know that I have no fundamental objections to contracting out government tasks. However, I do think that discussions about this subject should be based on solid facts and figures, and our council’s discussion is not. What the Conservative-Liberal Party is doing in its little table, is comparing apples and oranges. It is reasonable to compare the rate of our municipality with that of a municipality in a joint scheme, but it is unfair to compare it with the rates of private enterprises. And why is that? Well, the overhead costs of private enterprises are almost negligible; only the cost of employing a director and keeping accounts, that’s it. Quite a contrast with the overheads of a municipality. Our accounting system has to meet all kinds of government regulations, which makes it expensive. And we have a costly administrative system, i.e. municipal council, municipal executive, and support staff. What’s more, my department is really at a disadvantage because of the way our organization’s overheads are allocated. All the overhead costs are added up and then each department is allocated overhead costs that are proportionate to the number of employees in the department in question. This calculation method puts my department at a disadvantage. A relatively large number of people are employed in my department, while we hardly use support services in such areas as housing, automation, financial policy, personnel policy, financial accounting, and human resources. And my department is hardly a burden on the administrative system. I submit my budget and report twice a year. And that’s it. My department is very seldom involved in complex projects, which tax the administrative system.
When the Conservative-Liberal Party was carrying on yesterday, I was quite disheartened for a moment. I am running an efficient department which can hold its own with its competitors, including private enterprises. I can prove that our labour productivity and the utilization ratio of our fleet are excellent. But I may come off badly because I am saddled with far too large overheads. This is not fair, admit it. That’s why I want to ask you to do me a favour. Next week the alderman has to be well prepared for the council’s discussion about privatization proposals. I could write a policy document for the alderman, but it would not impress many people. They would probably think I was a bit biased. For that reason, I would like you to provide the alderman with information that shows that we are not more expensive than private enterprises at all, as far as refuse collection is concerned.
Please let me know what you are going to do.
Best regards,
Bob
Assignment 1 ‘ Basic, Mid-Level and Advanced
You are the director of the finance department. You know that in a few days’ time the alderman will have to be provided with information which she can use during the municipal council’s discussion about privatization. You also realize that the tricky overheads problem will play an important part in the discussion. There is not enough time left to look into the municipality’s overhead costs and you are too busy to write a detailed report on this subject, although you could come up with a few essential considerations. Your assignment is to write them on one sheet of paper.
Start of Assignment 2
Analysis
A month has passed since the council debated the overhead costs of refuse collection. Bob Jansen has had enough time to do some calculations for himself. As far as the ‘products’ collected are concerned, he distinguishes two cost centres (which are products), namely:
– tonnes of refuse collected and processed for private persons;
– tonnes of refuse collected and processed for businesses.
In addition, he distinguishes three so-called cost pools. The first two relate to the overheads of the municipal organization as a whole, to which he referred in his letter of November 5, 2001, and the third cost pool relates to the overheads of his own department:
– central administrative department (personnel, finance and information); annual budget of $1.6 million;
– central coordination (political management and central management of the municipality); annual budget of $1.1 million;
– management of the refuse collection department and planning its activities; annual budget of $0.3 million.
At present each department is allocated costs from the first two cost pools that are proportionate to the number of employees in the department in question (expressed as a full-time equivalent (fte)). The total number of employees of the municipality to which the costs from the first two cost pools are allocated amounts to 550 ftes; the number of employees in the refuse collection department is 99 ftes. Each of the two cost units is allocated costs from the third cost pool that are proportionate to the work done for the cost unit in question, i.e. about 70% of the work is done for private persons and about 30% for businesses. Table 2 contains the number of tonnes and the direct costs for each type of waste for the year 2001.
Bob Jansen starts his calculations by determining full unit costs per tonne of waste, for private persons and for businesses. To that end, as is customary in his municipality, he decides to allocate the central overheads (i.e. overheads from the first two cost pools) to the two cost centres proportionate to the tonnes of waste collected for private persons and the tonnes of waste collected for businesses respectively.
Table 2. Number of tonnes and direct costs per type of waste (2001)
Type of waste Number of tonnes Direct costs
Private persons 21,000 $2.6 million
Businesses 14,000 $0.9 million
Assignment 2 Basic, Mid-Level and Advanced
Please calculate the full unit cost per tonne of waste from private persons and that per tonne of waste from businesses, using the data mentioned above.
Start of Assignment 3
In 2001 the average amount of waste per private person (i.e. per house) amounted to 1,415 kilos (= 1.415 tonnes). Bob Jansen now wants to know how much the central overheads allocated to his department have to be decreased in order to arrive at a full rate per household which might meet the Conservative-Liberal Party’s market-based requirements (see Table 1).
Assignment 3 ‘ Mid-Level and Advanced
Please show how much the central overheads allocated to the refuse collection department have to be decreased in order to meet the market-based requirements mentioned above. Please suggest how this could be achieved by changing the apportionment keys for the first two cost pools. A few tips:
– use Bob Jansen’s letter for your suggestions;
– discuss to what extent the cost allocation principles for support department costs and joint costs apply to the first two cost pools.
Start of Assignment 4
Implementation
The municipal council’s discussion about the privatization of refuse collection, a municipal duty, has not resulted in clear conclusions. A majority of the municipal council has passed a motion in which the municipal executive is instructed to look closely into the overheads problem. The director of the finance department, Henk Jacobs, is in charge of this inquiry. He is due to report back within four months.
Assignment 4 ‘ Advanced Only
Please outline a possible decision-making process concerning the allocation of overheads. You might choose different cost allocation principles for the various cost pools.
Indicate too how, after one or more cost allocation methods have been selected, cost allocation should be implemented.Inlcude suhc tables and callculations as you deem approppriate.
Start of Assignment 5
Why ‘integral management’?
After Henk Jacobs has completed his inquiry, the municipal executive and senior officials have heated discussions about the municipality’s cost allocation policy. The key question is: should municipal departments be able to influence the size of the overheads allocated to them. Henk Jacobs suggests in his report that a considerable part of the overheads allocated to each of the departments should be proportionate to the number of employees working in the department in question. Several of the municipality’s managers are in favour of this. For this reason, they do not like the response of the alderman for staff matters, Linda Tolsma. She says:
‘At the beginning of every council term, I come to an agreement with the public sector personnel unions on the number of people employed by our municipality. Last time I agreed to decrease the number of employees by 5% (from 620 to 590 ftes). After such an agreement has been made, it is translated into so-called target numbers of employees per organization unit (i.e. per department) on the basis of policy-based proposals for new policies and savings. I cannot face the unions if the agreement has not been honoured. If you, as managers, were free to deviate from fixed target numbers of employees, for example to decrease the size of the overheads allocated to you, then I would run the risk of ending up with a total number of employees equalling 570 ftes instead of 590 ftes. Well, that would be a disaster. So I think you should stick to the agreements on employment that are reached at the beginning of each council term. The matter can be reconsidered before a new council term. And another thing, it is vitally important to prevent any unrest in our organization, so we must see to it that we do not have to negotiate every single adjustment to the number of employees with the unions. The kind of complete agreement I make gives a sense of security and clarity, not only to the employees, but also to us.’
The head of the welfare department, Richard van Delden, is speaking for many of his colleagues when he says:
‘How can you be held accountable for providing services and products and for managing the money involved if you are not given a free rein to decide for yourself how you are going to use your resources? The costs involved include not only your own costs, such as the direct staff costs of your department, but also the support department costs that are allocated to you. In this municipality all of us have decided to use integral management. So we are supposed to be fully accountable for both the policy-based and the financial aspects of the work done by our departments. If I interpret the alderman’s response correctly, we are going to be judged on the products agreed on, although our hands are tied by the agreed way of using resources. I am not allowed to use freelancers for certain projects, for example, although it would be a good idea – even if their hourly wages are a bit higher than the permanent staff’s. If my department was allowed to use freelancers, it would not run the risk of understaffing and it would be not be allocated so many overhead costs.’
Assignment 5 ‘ Advanced Only
Please analyse the above discussion. You should use responsibility accounting principles and should also try to find a solution to the differences of opinion described above.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Debate on cost allocation in the municipality of Statendam
It started with a letter
Statendam, November 5, 2001
To: Henk Jacobs, director finance department
From: Bob Jansen, manager refuse collection department
Dear Henk,
Someone told me that you had to see the teachers of one or your children last night, so you could not be present at the council meeting. Well, you have really missed something! The Conservative-Liberal Party seized the opportunity to use the 2002 budget for an attack on the municipal privatization policy. My department was seen as a possible spearhead of a new policy. The Conservative-Liberal Party thinks that only financial considerations should determine whether a municipality performs its duties itself or leaves them to the market. The Conservative-Liberal Party has conducted a small survey to compare the refuse collection rate for private persons in Statendam with the rates of four municipalities of similar sizes. Two of these four municipalities have contracted refuse collection out to a private enterprise and the two remaining municipalities work together with other municipalities in a joint refuse collection scheme . Table 1 shows the figures presented by the Conservative-Liberal Party.
Table 1. Refuse collection rates for private persons in different municipalities (2001)
Approach to refuse collection, a municipal duty* Refuse collection rate (waste collection levy) per household
Refuse collection, a municipal duty, contracted out to a private enterprise $190 to $197.50
Refuse collection through a joint scheme of a number of municipalities $202.50 to $217.50
Refuse collection by the municipality itself, i.e. Statendam $209
* The services offered by the municipalities mentioned above hardly differ, as far as I can tell. All the municipalities collect different kinds of waste separately, i.e. vegetables, fruit and garden waste are composted and other waste goes to the regional dump. Waste is collected once a week and people can dispose of special kinds of waste such as glass, cartons of juice or milk, etc., and household chemical waste at the usual places. All the municipalities in Table 1 use rates that cover the costs involved. In addition, Statendam and the other municipalities use separate rates for the collection and processing of industrial waste.
The group leader of the Conservative-Liberal Party thinks that his survey demonstrates that Statendam should contract out refuse collection. If the VAT-exempt status of public services disappears in the future, contracting out will become even more advantageous, according to the Conservative-Liberal Party .
You know that I have no fundamental objections to contracting out government tasks. However, I do think that discussions about this subject should be based on solid facts and figures, and our council’s discussion is not. What the Conservative-Liberal Party is doing in its little table, is comparing apples and oranges. It is reasonable to compare the rate of our municipality with that of a municipality in a joint scheme, but it is unfair to compare it with the rates of private enterprises. And why is that? Well, the overhead costs of private enterprises are almost negligible; only the cost of employing a director and keeping accounts, that’s it. Quite a contrast with the overheads of a municipality. Our accounting system has to meet all kinds of government regulations, which makes it expensive. And we have a costly administrative system, i.e. municipal council, municipal executive, and support staff. What’s more, my department is really at a disadvantage because of the way our organization’s overheads are allocated. All the overhead costs are added up and then each department is allocated overhead costs that are proportionate to the number of employees in the department in question. This calculation method puts my department at a disadvantage. A relatively large number of people are employed in my department, while we hardly use support services in such areas as housing, automation, financial policy, personnel policy, financial accounting, and human resources. And my department is hardly a burden on the administrative system. I submit my budget and report twice a year. And that’s it. My department is very seldom involved in complex projects, which tax the administrative system.
When the Conservative-Liberal Party was carrying on yesterday, I was quite disheartened for a moment. I am running an efficient department which can hold its own with its competitors, including private enterprises. I can prove that our labour productivity and the utilization ratio of our fleet are excellent. But I may come off badly because I am saddled with far too large overheads. This is not fair, admit it. That’s why I want to ask you to do me a favour. Next week the alderman has to be well prepared for the council’s discussion about privatization proposals. I could write a policy document for the alderman, but it would not impress many people. They would probably think I was a bit biased. For that reason, I would like you to provide the alderman with information that shows that we are not more expensive than private enterprises at all, as far as refuse collection is concerned.
Please let me know what you are going to do.
Best regards,
Bob
Assignment 1 ‘ Basic, Mid-Level and Advanced
You are the director of the finance department. You know that in a few days’ time the alderman will have to be provided with information which she can use during the municipal council’s discussion about privatization. You also realize that the tricky overheads problem will play an important part in the discussion. There is not enough time left to look into the municipality’s overhead costs and you are too busy to write a detailed report on this subject, although you could come up with a few essential considerations. Your assignment is to write them on one sheet of paper.
Start of Assignment 2
Analysis
A month has passed since the council debated the overhead costs of refuse collection. Bob Jansen has had enough time to do some calculations for himself. As far as the ‘products’ collected are concerned, he distinguishes two cost centres (which are products), namely:
– tonnes of refuse collected and processed for private persons;
– tonnes of refuse collected and processed for businesses.
In addition, he distinguishes three so-called cost pools. The first two relate to the overheads of the municipal organization as a whole, to which he referred in his letter of November 5, 2001, and the third cost pool relates to the overheads of his own department:
– central administrative department (personnel, finance and information); annual budget of $1.6 million;
– central coordination (political management and central management of the municipality); annual budget of $1.1 million;
– management of the refuse collection department and planning its activities; annual budget of $0.3 million.
At present each department is allocated costs from the first two cost pools that are proportionate to the number of employees in the department in question (expressed as a full-time equivalent (fte)). The total number of employees of the municipality to which the costs from the first two cost pools are allocated amounts to 550 ftes; the number of employees in the refuse collection department is 99 ftes. Each of the two cost units is allocated costs from the third cost pool that are proportionate to the work done for the cost unit in question, i.e. about 70% of the work is done for private persons and about 30% for businesses. Table 2 contains the number of tonnes and the direct costs for each type of waste for the year 2001.
Bob Jansen starts his calculations by determining full unit costs per tonne of waste, for private persons and for businesses. To that end, as is customary in his municipality, he decides to allocate the central overheads (i.e. overheads from the first two cost pools) to the two cost centres proportionate to the tonnes of waste collected for private persons and the tonnes of waste collected for businesses respectively.
Table 2. Number of tonnes and direct costs per type of waste (2001)
Type of waste Number of tonnes Direct costs
Private persons 21,000 $2.6 million
Businesses 14,000 $0.9 million
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On December, 31, 2008, Tie One On reported net income for the year of $265,000 and the following account balances:
Cash $175,000
Accounts receivable 21,000
Prepaid rent 6,000
Eqipment and furnishings 230,000
Accumulated depreciation-Equipment and furnishings ($43,000)
Accounts payable 39,000
Wages payable 13,000
Owners’ equity (including net income of $265,000) 337,000
After this information was prepared the bookkeeper discovered that they failed to prepare two adjusting entries. Thees were not reflected in the balances shown. Here is the information on these two entries:
1. The prepaid rent account was paid on April 1, 2008, for one year for $6,000. The account has not been adjusted since.
2. A bill received in January 2009 for utilities incurred in December 2008 for $1,400 was mistakenly not entered into the system.
Please calculate the year-end balances for the following account : Asset You can enter your answer in the following format:
Assets=$X(Show your work in parentheses, number only, no titles necessary)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On December 31, 2010, Berclair, Inc. had 200 million shares of common stock and 4 million shares of 10%, $100 par value cumulative preferred stock issued and outstanding. Berclair issued a 6% common stock dividend on July 1, 2011. On March 1, 2011, Berclair purchased 24 million shares of its common stock as treasury stock. 4 million treasury shares were sold on October 1. Net income for the year ended December 31, 2011, was $160 million.
Also outstanding at December 31 were incentive stock options granted to key executives on September 13, 2006. The options are exercisable as of September 13, 2010, for 30 million common shares at an exercise price of $56 per share. During 2011, the market price of the common shares averaged $70 per share.
The options were exercised on September 1, 2011.
Compute Berclair’s basic and diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2011
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On both December 31, 2010, and December 31, 2011, Kopp Co.’s only equity security investment had the same fair value, which was below its original cost. Kopp considered the decline in value to be temporary in 2010 but other-than-temporary in 2011. At the end of both years the security was classified as a noncurrent asset. Kopp could not exercise significant influence over the investee. What should be the effects of the determination that the decline was other-than-temporary on Kopp’s 2011 net noncurrent assets and net income?
A) Decrease in both net noncurrent assets and net income.
B) No effect on both net noncurrent assets and net income.
C) Decrease in net noncurrent assets and no effect on net income.
D) No effect on net noncurrent assets and decrease in net income.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Department A Department B Department C Total
Sales $300,000 $280,000 $120,000 $700,000
Variable Expenses
160,000 175,000 105,000 440,000
Contribution Margin
140,000 105,000 15,000 260,000
Fixed Expenses
65,000 35,000 40,000 140,000
Net Income
$75,000 $70,000 $(25,000) $120,000
Ellen Electric has an offer from a potential supplier to provide 40,000 units at $65 each that Ellen Electric now manufactures at a total cost of $75 per unit. The manufacturing costs for 40,000 units are: direct materials $900,000; direct labor $450,000; variable overhead $900,000; and fixed overhead $750,000. All costs except $500,000 in fixed overhead will be avoided if the parts are purchased.
Required:
(A) What should Ellen Electric do in this situation? Explain fully and show your computations.Would your answer change if Ellen Electric could use the capacity that would become available to produce additional income of $125,000? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Department A Department B Department C Total
Sales $300,000 $280,000 $120,000 $700,000
Variable Expenses
160,000 175,000 105,000 440,000
Contribution Margin
140,000 105,000 15,000 260,000
Fixed Expenses
65,000 35,000 40,000 140,000
Net Income
$75,000 $70,000 $(25,000) $120,000
Ellen Electric has an offer from a potential supplier to provide 40,000 units at $65 each that Ellen Electric now manufactures at a total cost of $75 per unit. The manufacturing costs for 40,000 units are: direct materials $900,000; direct labor $450,000; variable overhead $900,000; and fixed overhead $750,000. All costs except $500,000 in fixed overhead will be avoided if the parts are purchased.
(A) What should Ellen Electric do in this situation? Explain fully and show your computations.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Charles Austin of the controller’s office of Thompson Corporation was given the assignment of determining the basic and diluted earnings per share values for the year ending December 31, 20013. Austin has compiled the information listed below.
1. The company is authorized to issue 8,000,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. As of December 31, 2012, 2,000,000 shares had been issued and were outstanding.
2. The per share market prices of the common stock on selected dates were as follows.
Price per Share
July 1, 2012 $20.00
January 1, 2013 $21.00
April 1, 2013 $25.00
July 1, 2013 $11.00
August 1, 2013 $10.50
November 1, 2013 $9.00
December 31, 2013 $10.00
3. A total of 700,000 shares of an authorized 1,200,000 shares of convertible preferred stock had been issued on July 1, 2012. The stock was issued at its par value of $25, and it has a cumulative dividend of $3 per share. The stock is convertible into common stock at the rate of one share of convertible preferred for one share of common. The rate of conversion is to be automatically adjusted for stock splits and stock dividends. Dividends are paid quarterly on September 30, December 31, March 31, and June 30.
4. East Aurora Corporation is subject to a 40% income tax rate.
5. The after-tax net income for the year ended December 31, 2013 was $11,550,000.
The following specific activities took place during 2013.
1. January 1″ a 5% common stock dividend was issued. The dividend had been declared on December 1, 2012, to all stockholders of record on December 29, 2012.
2. April 1″ a total of 400,000 shares of the $3 convertible preferred stock was converted into common stock. The company issued new common stock and retired the preferred stock. This was the only conversion of the preferred stock during 2013.
3. July 1″ A 2-for-1 split of the common stock became effective on this date. The board of directors had authorized the split on June 1.
4. August 1″a total of 300,000 shares of common stock were issued to acquire a factory building.
5. November 1″a total of 24,000 shares of common stock were purchased on the open market at $9 per share. These shares were to be held as treasury stock and were still in the treasury as of December 31, 2013.
6. Common stock cash dividends”Cash dividends to common stockholders were declared and paid as follows.
April 15″$0.30 per share
October 15″$0.20 per share
7. Preferred stock cash dividends”Cash dividends to preferred stockholders were declared and paid as scheduled.
Instructions
(a) Determine the number of shares used to compute basic earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013.
(b) Determine the number of shares used to compute diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013.
(c) Compute the adjusted net income to be used as the numerator in the basic earnings per share calculation for the year ended December 31, 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Charles Austin of the controller’s office of Thompson Corporation was given the assignment of determining the basic and diluted earnings per share values for the year ending December 31, 20013. Austin has compiled the information listed below.
1. The company is authorized to issue 8,000,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. As of December 31, 2012, 2,000,000 shares had been issued and were outstanding.
2. The per share market prices of the common stock on selected dates were as follows.
Price per Share
July 1, 2012 $20.00
January 1, 2013 $21.00
April 1, 2013 $25.00
July 1, 2013 $11.00
August 1, 2013 $10.50
November 1, 2013 $9.00
December 31, 2013 $10.00
3. A total of 700,000 shares of an authorized 1,200,000 shares of convertible preferred stock had been issued on July 1, 2012. The stock was issued at its par value of $25, and it has a cumulative dividend of $3 per share. The stock is convertible into common stock at the rate of one share of convertible preferred for one share of common. The rate of conversion is to be automatically adjusted for stock splits and stock dividends. Dividends are paid quarterly on September 30, December 31, March 31, and June 30.
4. East Aurora Corporation is subject to a 40% income tax rate.
5. The after-tax net income for the year ended December 31, 2013 was $11,550,000.
The following specific activities took place during 2013.
1. January 1″ a 5% common stock dividend was issued. The dividend had been declared on December 1, 2012, to all stockholders of record on December 29, 2012.
2. April 1″ a total of 400,000 shares of the $3 convertible preferred stock was converted into common stock. The company issued new common stock and retired the preferred stock. This was the only conversion of the preferred stock during 2013.
3. July 1″ A 2-for-1 split of the common stock became effective on this date. The board of directors had authorized the split on June 1.
4. August 1″a total of 300,000 shares of common stock were issued to acquire a factory building.
5. November 1″a total of 24,000 shares of common stock were purchased on the open market at $9 per share. These shares were to be held as treasury stock and were still in the treasury as of December 31, 2013.
6. Common stock cash dividends”Cash dividends to common stockholders were declared and paid as follows.
April 15″$0.30 per share
October 15″$0.20 per share
7. Preferred stock cash dividends”Cash dividends to preferred stockholders were declared and paid as scheduled.
Instructions
(a) Determine the number of shares used to compute basic earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013.
(b) Determine the number of shares used to compute diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013.
(c) Compute the adjusted net income to be used as the numerator in the basic earnings per share calculation for the year ended December 31, 2013.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chi Omega Sorority is planning its annual Riverboat Extravaganza. The Extravaganza committee has assembled the following expected costs for the event:
Dinner (per person)
$ 7
Favors and programs (per person)
3
Orchestra
2,600
Tickets and advertising
1,800
Riverboat Rental
5,200
Floor show and strolling entertainers
1,400
The committee members want to charge $30 per person for the evening’s activities.
Required:
1. Compute the break-even point for the Extravaganza (in terms of the number of persons that must attend.) Assume that only 250 person attended the Extravaganza last year. If the same number attend this year, what price per ticket must be charged in order to break
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Chi Omega Sorority is planning its annual Riverboat Extravaganza. The Extravaganza committee has assembled the following expected costs for the event:
Dinner (per person) $ 7
Favors and programs (per person) 3
Orchestra 2,600
Tickets and advertising 1,800
Riverboat Rental 5,200
Floor show and strolling entertainers 1,400
The committee members want to charge $30 per person for the evening’s activities.
3. If Chi Omega want to make a profit of $5,000 and charge $30 per ticket, how many people must buy tickets? Chi Omega decides to sell tickets for $35 each and the costs will remain the same as shown in the table above. If they believe they can sell 800 tickets, what will be their margin of safety in dollars and as a percent of sales?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cincinnati Soap Company manufactures powdered detergent. Phosphate is placed in process in the Making Department, where it is turned into granulars. The output of Making is transferred to the Packing Department, where the packaging is added at the beginning of the process. On July 1, Cincinnati Soap Company had the following inventories:
Finished Goods $15,620
Work in Process-Making 6,070
Work in Process-Packing 7,910
Materials 3,430
Departmental accounts are maintained for factory overhead, which both have zero balances on July 1.
Manufacturing operations for July are summarized as follows:
a. Materials purchased on account $194,560
b. Materials requisitioned for use:
Phosphate-Making Department $128,520
Packaging-Packing Department 44,700
Indirect materials-Making Department 5,030
Indirect materials-Packing Department 1,800
c. Labor used:
Direct labor-Making Department $91,820
Direct labor-Packing Department 61,980
Indirect labor-Making Department 17,780
Indirect labor-Packing Department 31,880
d. Depreciation charged on fixed assets:
Making Department $16,760
Packing Department 13,840
e. Expired prepaid factory insurance:
Making Department $3,180
Packing Department 1,270
f. Applied factory overhead:
Making Department $43,820
Packing Department 48,410
g. Production costs transferred from Making Department to Packing Department $264,920
h. Production costs transferred from Packing Department to Finished Goods $416,940
i. Cost of goods sold during the period $418,470
1. Journalize the entries to record the operations, identifying each entry by letter. For a compound transaction, if an amount box does not require an entry, leave it blank or enter “0”.
Item Account Debit Credit
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2. Compute the July 31 balances of the inventory accounts.
Materials: $
Work in Process-Making Department: $
Work in Process-Packing Department: $
Finished Goods: $
3. Compute the July 31 balances of the factory overhead accounts. If required, use the minus sign to indicate a credit balance.
Factory Overhead-Making Department: $
Factory Overhead-Packing Department: $
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
One client had indicated that they were interested in purchasing $35,500 worth of products, so the bookkeeper recorded the transaction. However, the client has not actually committed to the purchase.
The bookkeeper may have made a mistake when computing cost of good sold. She included total production costs for 2011 and did not adjust ending inventory for the $35,500 worth of units left at the end of the year. The amount of ending inventory was determined using a physical count.
Nybrostrand Company
31-Dec-11
Trial Balance (accounts in alphabetical order)
Debit
Credit
Accounts payable
67,000
Accounts receivable
24,500
Cash
16,700
Common stock
10,000
Depreciation expense
24,350
Cost of goods sold
254,000
Equipment (net of depreciation)
425,000
Insurance
1,400
Inventory
25,000
Long-term debt
145,000
Marketing
4,500
Paid-in capital
90,000
Property taxes
8,900
Rent
18,000
Retained earnings
?
Revenues
456,000
Salaries
67,500
Utilities
6,700
Total
876,550
768,000
Prepare an income statement for the company in good format. Always include the name of the company and the priod covered in the title. Don’t forget dollar signs where appropriate. You do not need to include the balance sheet. Consequently, you will not need all the accounts listed above. How does the income or loss compare to the original income statement? Explain the importance of the matching concept.
The submission should be 2 to 4 pages and need to include answers to all the questions listed above. Show computations, discuss the results and include references in APA format.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
College Painters had the following account balances at 12/31/08.
|
|
Full service revenue
|
100,000
|
Prepaid Rent
|
1,000
|
|
Retained earnings, January 1, 2008
|
15,000
|
Painting supplies expense
|
18,000
|
|
Note payable, due June 2009
|
5,000
|
Cash
|
12,000
|
|
Salaries payable
|
2,500
|
Note payable, due January 1, 2010
|
8,500
|
|
Equipment
|
40,000
|
Employee advances receivable
|
2,000
|
|
Advertising expense
|
3,500
|
Salaries expense
|
40,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
4,000
|
Accumulated depn – equipment
|
5,000
|
|
Painting prep revenue
|
15,000
|
Rent and utilities expense
|
15,000
|
|
Office supplies expense
|
1,000
|
Common Stock
|
2,500
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
25,000
|
|
Prepare, in good form, a classified balance sheet as of 12/31/08 and an income statement and a statement of
|
|
retained earnings for the year then ended.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Colorado Industries manufactures electronic testing equipment. Colorado also installs the equipment at customers’ sites and ensures that it functions smoothly. Additional information on the Manufacturing and Installation Departments is as follows (capacities are expressed in terms of the number of units of electronic testing equipment):
Equipment Manufactured Equipment Installed
Annual capacity 400 units per year 300 units per year
Equipment manufactured 300 units per year 300 units per year
and Installed
Colorado manufactures only 300 units per year because the Installation Department has only enough capacity to install 300 units. The equipment sells for $40,000 per unit (installed) and has direct material costs of $15,000. All costs other than direct material costs are fixed. The following requirements refer only to the preceding data. There is no connection between the requirements.
Required
1.Colorado’s engineers have found a way to reduce equipment manufacturing time. The new methodwould cost an additional $50 per unit and would allow Colorado to manufacture 20 additional units a year. Should Colorado implement the new method? Show your calculations.
2.Colorado’s designers have proposed a change in direct materials that would increase direct material costs by $2,000 per unit. This change would enable Colorado to install 320 units of equipment each year. If Colorado makes the change, it will implement the new design on all equipment sold. Should Colorado use the new design? Show your calculations.
3.A new installation technique has been developed that will enable Colorado’s engineers to install 10 additional units of equipment a year. The new method will increase installation costs by $50,000 each year. Should Colorado implement the new technique? Show your calculations.
4.Colorado is considering how to motivate workers to improve their productivity (output per hour). One proposal is to evaluate and compensate workers in the Manufacturing and Installation Departments on the basis of their productivities. Do you think the new proposal is a good idea? Explain briefly.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Which company appears more solvent? (Name a ratio used to determine.)
|
Summarized financial data for two competitors is set out below:
|
|
(All balances are as of 12/31/08 or for the year ended 12/31/08)
|
|
Oscar Corp
|
Felix Corp
|
|
Sales revenue
|
800,000
|
600,000
|
|
Total expenses
|
400,000
|
200,000
|
|
Cash
|
90,000
|
25,000
|
|
Accounts receivable
|
120,000
|
75,000
|
|
Property plant and equipment, net
|
250,000
|
225,000
|
|
Accounts payable
|
95,000
|
60,000
|
|
Salaries payable
|
75,000
|
35,000
|
|
Long term liabilities
|
150,000
|
75,000
|
|
Common shares outstanding, beginning of year
|
50,000
|
25,000
|
|
Common shares outstanding, end of year
|
100,000
|
40,000
|
|
No dividends were paid during 2008.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The company faces two choices that Mr. Smith must evaluate with your assistance: continue with the current smaller sized stores, or select larger stores for the firm’s strategic growth or construction plan. The initial cost will be $2,100,000 for each of the smaller sized stores and $3,700,000 for each of the five larger ones. Projected present value of cash flows for the smaller units projected for the firm’s five-year strategic plans are $450,000 for each year while the projected cash flows for the larger units are projected to be $740,000 per year. Because the projects must be financed from different sources, unfortunately, financing costs will be different. Mr. Smith’s data indicates that the current and projected 120-day treasury bill rate is 9.75% and the firm’s expected market return is 12.5% for the plan period. The beta for the African art industry and the planned new stores is 1.15. However, the bond rates for the projects are 10% for the smaller stores and 12.7% for the larger store funds. Thus, the details have been provided for the analysts, namely you, to:
1. Determine the capital asset pricing model rate for the firm.
2. Combine that rate with the specific debt rates for each store model, using a tax rate of 34%.
3. Determine the weighted average cost of capital (WACC) for each project.
4. Find the net present value (NPV) for each alternative purchase.
5. Use the NPV and profitability index analyses (because each project will have a different WACC rate) to advise/convince Mr. Smith of your selection of the most desired, profitable project for the company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A company sells merchandise on a consignment basis to dealers. The selling price of the merchandise averages 25% above cost of merchandise. The dealer is paid a 10% commission on the sales price for all sales made.
The following info is given:
Manufacturing cost of goods shipped on consignment_______________$250,000
Sales price of merchandise sold by dealers________________________$220,000
Payments made by dealers after deducting commission_____________$139,000
Prepare summary entries on the books of the consignor for these consignment sales transactions prepare summary entries on the books of the consignee for these consignment sales transactions. Prepare the parts of the company financial statements that relate to these consignment sales.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Company uses the perpetual system for tracking inventory. The following
|
|
inventory transactions occurred during the month.
|
|
Date
|
Units
|
Unit Cost
|
Total
|
|
Beginning inventory
|
1-Jan
|
100
|
10
|
1,000
|
|
Purchase
|
5-Jan
|
20
|
11
|
220
|
|
Sale
|
7-Jan
|
2
|
|
Purchase
|
10-Jan
|
30
|
12
|
360
|
|
Sale
|
11-Jan
|
15
|
|
Under LIFO method of costing inventory, what was the cost of goods sold for the items sold on
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Complete the chart below, indicating the Calvet Trust entity accounting income for each of the alternatives. For this purpose, use the following information.
Interest Income, taxable $300,000
Interest income, tax-exempt 30,000
Interest income, tax exempt but AMT Preference item 20,000
Long term capital gain 25,000
Trustee Fee 5,000
Trust Agreement Provisions
Fees and capital gains allocable to corpus —————————————–
Capital gains allocable to corpus, one half of fees allocable to income ————————————–
Capital gain allocable to income, silent concerning allocation of fees ————————————–
Fees and exempt income allocable to corpus, silent —————————————–
concerning allocation of capital gain/loss
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Comprehensive Problem 2
Ocean Atlantic Co. is a merchandising business. the account balances for Ocean Atlantic co. as of July 1, 2012 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows:
110 Cash 63,600
112 Accounts Receivable 153,900
115 Merchandise Inventory 602,400
116 Prepaid Insurance 16,800
117 Store Supplies 11,400
123 Store Equipment 469,500
124 Accumulated Depreciation-Store Equipment 56,700
210 Accounts Payable 96,600
211 Salaries Payable –
310 Capital stock 75,000
311 Retained earnings, Aug 1 2011 480,300
312 Dividends 135,000
313 Income summary
410 Sales 3,221,100
411 Sales Returns and Allowances 92,700
412 Sales Discounts 59,400
510 Cost of Merchandise Sold 1,623,000
520 Sales Salaries Expense 334,800
521 Advertising Expense 81,000
522 Depreciation Expense –
523 Store Supplies Expense –
529 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 12,600
530 Office Salaries Expense 182,100
531 Rent Expense 83,700
532 Insurance Expense –
539 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 7,800
During July, the last month of the fiscal year, the following transactions were completed:
July 1, Paid rent for July, $4000.
3, Purchased merchandise on account from Lingard Co., Terms 2/10,n/30,FOB shipping point, $25,000.
4, Paid freight on purchase of July 3, $1000.
6, Sold merchandise on account to Holt Co., terms 2/10,n/30, FOB shipping point, $40,000. The cost of the merchandise sold was $24,000.
7, Received $18000 cash from Flat Co. on account, no discount.
10, sold merchandise for cash $90,000. The cost of the merchandise sold was $50,000.
13, Paid for merchandise purchased on July 3, less discount.
14, Received merchandise returned on sale of July 6, $7000. The cost of the merchandise returned was $4500.
15, Paid advertising expense for last half of July, $9000
16, received cash from sale of July 6, less return of July 14 and discount.
19, purchased merchandise for cash, $22000.
19, Paid $23,100 to Corino Co. on account, no discount
Record the following transactions on page 21 of the journal
20, sold merchandise on account to Reedley Co., terms 1/10,n/30, FOB shipping point, $40000. The cost of the merchandise sold was $25000.
21, for the convenience of the customer, paid freight on sale of July 20, $1100.
21, received $17600 cash from Owen co. on account, no discount.
21, purchased merchandise on account from Munson Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB Destination, $32000.
24, Returned $5000 of damaged merchandise purchased on July21, receiving credit from the seller.
26, Refunded cash on sales made for cash, $12000. The cost of the merchandise returned was $7200.
28, paid sales salaries of $22800 and office salaries of $15200.
29, purchased store supplies for cash, $2400.
30, Sold merchandise on account to Dix co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $18,750. The cost of the merchandise sold was $11,250.
30, received cash from sale of July 20, less discount, plus freight paid on July 21.
31, Paid for purchase of July 21, less return of July 24 and discount.
Instructions
1. Enter the balances of each of the accounts in the appropriate balance column of a four-column account. Write Balance in the item section, and place a check mark (?) in the posting reference column. Journalize the transactions for July.
2. Post the journal to the general ledger, extending the month-end balances to the appropriate balance columns after all posting is completed. In this problem, you are no required to update or post to the accounts receivable and accounts payable subsidiary ledgers.
3. Prepare and unadjusted trial balance.
4. At the end of July, the following adjustment data were assembled. Analyze and use these data to complete (5) and (6).
a) Merchandise inventory on July 31 $ 565000
b) Insurance expired during the year $ 13400
c) Store supplies on hand on July 31 $3900
d) Depreciation for the current year $11500
e) Accrued salaries on July 31: Sale salaries $3200 Office salaries $1300 ($4500)
5. Enter the unadjusted trial balance on a 10-column end-of-period spreadsheet (work Sheet), and complete the spreadsheet.
6. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. Record the adjusting entries on page 22 of the journal.
7. Prepare an adjusted trial balance
8. Prepare an income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a balance sheet.
9. Prepare and post the closing entries. Record the closing entries on page 23 of the journal. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both the Balance columns opposite the closing entry. Insert the new balance in the retained earnings account.
10. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
(Computation of Actual Return, Gains and Losses, Corridor Test, and Pension Expense)
Erikson Company sponsors a defined benefit pension plan. The corporation’s actuary provides the following information about the plan.
January 1 December 31
2012
2012
Vested benefit obligation $1,500 $1,900
Accumulated benefit obligation 1,900 2,730
Projected benefit obligation 2,500 3,300
Plan assets (fair value) 1,700 2,620
Settlement rate and expected rate of return 10%
Pension asset/liability 800 ?
Service cost for the year 2012 400
Contributions (funding in 2012) 700
Benefits paid in 2012 200
(If answer is zero, please enter a 0, do not leave any fields blank.)
(a) Compute the actual return on the plan assets in 2012.
$
(b) Compute the amount of the other comprehensive income (G/L) as of December 31, 2012. (Assume the January 1, 2012, balance was zero.)
$
(c) Compute the amount of net gain or loss amortization for 2012 (corridor approach).
$
(d) Compute pension expense for 2012.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Compute the following ratios at December 31, 2010.
(a) Current. (e) Days in inventory.
(b) Receivables turnover. (f ) Cash debt coverage.
(c) Average collection period. (g) Current cash debt coverage.
(d) Inventory turnover. (h) Free cash flow.
Armada Company has these comparative balance sheet data:
ARMADA COMPANY
Balance Sheets
December 31
2010 2009
Cash $ 25,000 $ 30,000
Receivables (net) 65,000 60,000
Inventories 60,000 50,000
Plant assets (net) 200,000 180,000
$350,000 $320,000
Accounts payable $ 50,000 $ 60,000
Mortgage payable (15%) 100,000 100,000
Common stock, $10 par 140,000 120,000
Retained earnings 60,000 40,000
$350,000 $320,000
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computer Boutique sells computer equipment and home office furniture. Currently, the furniture product line takes up approximately 50% of the company’s retail floor space. The president of Computer Boutique is trying to decide whether the company should continue offering furniture or just concentrate on computer equipment. If furniture is dropped, salaries and other direct fixed costs can be avoided. In addition, sales of computer equipment can increase by 13%. Allocated fixed costs are assigned based on relative sales.
Computer
Home Office
Equipment
Furniture
Total
Sales
$1,200,000
$800,000
$2,000,000
Less cost of goods sold
700,000
500,000
1,200,000
Contribution margin
500,000
300,000
800,000
Less direct fixed costs:
Salaries
175,000
175,000
350,000
Other
60,000
60,000
120,000
Less allocated fixed costs:
Rent
14,118
9,882
24,000
Insurance
3,529
2,471
6,000
Cleaning
4,117
2,883
7,000
President’s salary
76,470
53,350
130,000
Other
7,058
4,942
12,000
Total costs
340,292
380,708
649,000
Net Income
$159,708
($ 8,708)
$151,000
Prepare an incremental analysis to determine the incremental effect on profit of discontinuing the furniture line.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Computer Boutique sells computer equipment and home office furniture. Currently, the furniture product line takes up approximately 50% of the company’s retail floor space. The president of Computer Boutique is trying to decide whether the company should continue offering furniture or just concentrate on computer equipment. If furniture is dropped, salaries and other direct fixed costs can be avoided. In addition, sales of computer equipment can increase by 13%. Allocated fixed costs are assigned based on relative sales.
Computer
Home Office
Equipment
Furniture
Total
Sales
$1,200,000
$800,000
$2,000,000
Less cost of goods sold
700,000
500,000
1,200,000
Contribution margin
500,000
300,000
800,000
Less direct fixed costs:
Salaries
175,000
175,000
350,000
Other
60,000
60,000
120,000
Less allocated fixed costs:
Rent
14,118
9,882
24,000
Insurance
3,529
2,471
6,000
Cleaning
4,117
2,883
7,000
President’s salary
76,470
53,350
130,000
Other
7,058
4,942
12,000
Total costs
340,292
380,708
649,000
Net Income
$159,708
($ 8,708)
$151,000
Prepare an incremental analysis to determine the incremental effect on profit of discontinuing the furniture line.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A copier company has been using the same Copier A for 5 years. This copier can copy approximately 50 sheets a minute. The company has an opportunity to purchase a new Copier B that can process approximately 60 sheets a minute. The old machine will continue to be used for jobs that aren’t rush jobs. The new machine will create a need for additional fixed selling expenses, an additional supervisor, and the two employees to use the machine. No other fixed costs will change.
Please list out whether each of these costs are relevant ( R) or not relevant ( NR). Format your answer as follows: a) R, b) R, and so forth.
a. Copier revenue
b. Book value-Copier A
c. Disposal value-Copier A
d. Variable selling expenses
e. Fixed selling expenses
f. Depreciation of Copier A
g. General and administrative overhead fixed
h. Direct labor
i. Indirect labor
j. Market value of Copier B
Home Improvement Company, a retail home store, has two major divisions-outdoors and indoors. Here is the data on their income and expenses:
Total Indoor Outdoor
Sales $85,000 $50,000 $35,000
Variable expenses 35,000 15,000 20,000
Contribution margin 50,000 35,000 15,000
Fixed expenses:
Advertising 5,000 2,000 3,000
Supervisor salaries 19,000 10,000 9,000
Store insurance 2,000 1,000 1,000
General administrative 11,000 8,000 3,000
overhead
Total fixed expenses 37,000 21,000 16,000
Net operating income (loss) $13,000 $14,000 (1,000)
Due to the loss, the general manager is considering closing the outdoor division and just focusing on the indoor division. If the division were closed, the supervisor salary and the advertising costs could be eliminated. Should the division be closed? Please show your computations to support your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
A corp. makes 8000 units of part G25 each year. This part is used in one of the company’s products. The company’s accounting department reports the following costs of producing the part at this level of activity:
Per unit
Direct materials $6.70
Direct labor $8.10
Variable Manufacturing Overhead $1.10
Supervisors salary $2.00
Depreciation of Special equipment $4.20
Allocated general overhead $2.10
An outside supplier has offered to make and sell the part to the company for $21.20 each. If this offer is accepted, the supervisor’s salary and all the variable costs, including direct labor, can be avoided. The special equipment used to make the part was purchased many years ago and has no salvage value or other use. The allocated general overhead represents fixed costs of the entire company. If the outside supplier’s offer were accepted, only $2000 of these allocated general overhead costs would be avoided. In addition, the space used to produce the part G25 would be used to make more of one of the company’s other products, generating additional segment margin of $16,000 per year for that product. What would be the impact on the company’s overall net operating income of buying part G25 for the outside supplier?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Becton Labs, Inc.,
produces various chemical compounds for industrial use. One compound, called
Fludex, is prepared using an elaborate distilling process. The company has
developed standard costs for one unit of Fludex, as follows:
| |
Standard Quantity
|
Standard Price or Rate
|
Standard Cost
|
|
Direct materials
|
1.3 ounces
|
$5.70 per ounce
|
$7.41
|
|
Direct labor
|
.7 hours
|
$12.30 per hour
|
8.61
|
|
Variable manufacturing overhead
|
.70 hours
|
$2.70 per hour
|
1.89
|
| |
|
|
$17.91
|
|
During November, the following activity was
recorded relative to production of Fludex:
a. Materials purchased, 10,500 ounces at a cost
of $56,700.
b. There was no beginning
inventory of materials; however, at the end of the month, 2,500 ounces of
material remained in ending inventory.
c.The company employs 40
lab technicians to work on the production of Fludex. During November, they
worked an average of 60.00 hours at an average rate of $13.00 per hour.
d. Variable manufacturing
overhead is assigned to Fludex on the basis of direct labor-hours. Variable
manufacturing overhead costs during November totaled $5,520.
e. During November, 4,000 good units of Fludex
were produced.
The company’s management is anxious to
determine the efficiency of the Fludex production activities.
Requirement 1:
For direct materials used in the production of
Fludex:
(a)
Compute the price and
quantity variances. (Indicate the effect of
each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for
unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input
all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your
response.)
Materials price variance (Click to select)UFNone
Materials quantity variance (Click to select)UNoneF
(b)
The materials were
purchased from a new supplier who is anxious to enter into a long-term
purchase contract. Would you recommend that the company sign the contract?
(Click to select)NoYes
Requirement 2:
For direct labor employed in the production of
Fludex:
(a)
Compute the rate and
efficiency variances. (Indicate the effect of
each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for
unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input
all amounts as positive values. Round your answers to the nearest dollar
amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Labor rate variance (Click to select)FNoneU
Labor efficiency variance (Click to select)UNoneF
(b)
In the past, the 40
technicians employed in the production of Fludex consisted of 20 senior
technicians and 15 assistants. During November, the company experimented with
fewer senior technicians and more assistants in order to save costs. Would
you recommend that the new labor mix be continued?
(Click to select)NoYes
Requirement 3:
(a)
Compute the variable
overhead rate and efficiency variances. (Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F”
for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no
effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Round
your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in
your response.)
Variable overhead rate variance
$
(Click to select)NoneFU
Variable overhead efficiency variance
$
(Click to select)UFNone
(b)
What relation can you see between this
efficiency variance and the labor efficiency variance?
(Click to select)Independent.Directly related.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
At the beginning of 2012, the management of Patrick’s Practice Sets has decided to begin a small manufacturing process that will print the practice sets and then bind them. The manufacturing process begins with the printing of the practice sets. The practice sets are then collated and bound. After they are inspected, they are transferred to finished goods. This is a process costs system and the company elects to use the FIFIO method of accounting for product costs. Assume there are no significant material or labor variances.
DIrect materials
Paper is added 100% at the beginning of the process
Binding is added 100% as the last step in the manufacturing process
Conversion costs
Direct labor and factory overhead are added equally throughout the process
At the beginning of the accounting period, it is estimated that production will be 60,000 practice sets. Estimated factory overhead for the period is $30,000. This information is to be used to determine rate for the factory overhead.
Direct materials
Purchase of paper 12,000 reams @ $3.00 a ream
Each ream contains 500 sheets of paper and each practice set contains 100 sheets of paper.
The company starts printing of 55,000 practice sets
Purchase of 60,000 units of binding @ $.15
Used 46,000 units of bindings this period
Estimated and actual direct labor costs totaled $96,500
Actual factory overhead costs totaled $27,000
Ending work in process is 100% complete as to paper
25% complete as to conversion costs
0% complete as to binding
The finished good inventory at January 1, 2012 had a balance of 30,000 practice sets and at December 31, 2012 had an ending balance of 40,000 practice sets.
The selling price of each practice set is $10.00
Assume all material purchases and sales were made on account.
Assume all other transactions were on the cash basis
Operating expense this period totaled $80,000
1. Prepare an equivalent units schedule. The schedule should have a minimum of the following information. (XXX represents a number)
Whole Units Direct Materials Direct Materials Conversion Costs
Paper Binding
Beginning XXX XXX XXX XXX
Start/Comp XXX XXX XXX XXX
Ending XXX XXX XXX XXX
2. Calculate the cost per equivalent unit for the direct materials (paper) direct materials (bindings) and conversion costs. (Do not round your numbers)
3. Prepare a cost production report using FIFO costing.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Blake Company incurred the following equipment related costs:
Purchase of factory equipment ($27,000 list price. $2,000 cash discount given)
25,000
Installation charges related to factory equipment
15,000
Repainting executive offices
5,000
Buying land for new office building
100,000
General contractor’s fee on new office building
40,000
Cost of regularly scheduled maintenance on new factory equipment
6,000
Cost to put in parking lot for office building
30,000
Cost to wire new building
14,000
Cost of major remodel of factory
150,000
Determining classification of debt as of 12/31/08
Current
Long term
$100,000 note at 7% interest, payment terms are $10,000 (plus interest) per year for the next 10 years. Borrowed 11/1/08. First payment due 10/31/08
$350,000 note at 7% interest, due in equal annual installments of $85,362. Borrowed 7/1/08. First payment due 6/30/09
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Boston Metropolitan Bank which started operations a year back wants to estimate its loan loss provision for the year 2009. The loan loss provision is intended to capture the expected losses that the bank is expected to incur due to loan defaults. On Dec. 31st, 2008 the debit balance in the Provision account was $500,000. Given the rapidly changing U.S. economy, the bank knew that using a simple percentage of loan assets based on past experience to estimate its loan loss provision may not be appropriate. Therefore it wants to simulate its expected losses due to loan defaults to arrive at a more realistic measure of the loan loss provision. The Bank knows that while agricultural loan losses often tend to be normally distributed, retail loan defaults follow a triangular distribution. The bank has the following data available at its disposal.
Max Loss Min Loss Most Likey Loss Mean Std. Dev
Agricultural Loans $1m $60,000 $500,000 200,000
Retail Loans $700,000 $75,000 $300,000
What journal entry should be entered on Jan 1st 2009 to record the loan
loss provision?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Boyle’s Home Center, a retailing company, has two departments, Bath and Kitchen. The company’s most recent monthly contribution format income statement follows:
Departments: Bath Kitchen
Sales: Total $ 4,220,000 Bath $ 1,070,000 Kitchen $3,150,000
Variable expenses: Total $1,326,000 Bath $415,000 Kitchen:$911,000
Contribution margin: Total: $2,894,000 Bath:$655,000 Kitchen $2,239,000
Fixed expenses: Total: $2,160,000 Bath: $860,000 Kitchen:$1,300,000
Net operating income (loss): Total: $ 734,000 bath: $ (205,000 ) Kitchen: $ 939,000
A study indicates that $378,000 of the fixed expenses being charged to the Bath Department are sunk costs or allocated costs that will continue even if the Bath Department is dropped. In addition, the elimination of the Bath Department would result in a 14% decrease in the sales of the Kitchen Department.
Required:
If the Bath Department is dropped, what will be the effect on the net operating income of the company as a whole? (Input the amount as a positive value. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
in net operating income $
What I did:
Contribution Margin of Bath – (Contribution Margin of Kitchen*14%) to get total lost contribution margin = 655000 – 313460= 341540
Then I subtracted the less avoidable fixed costs ($860000 – 378000)= 482000
Then I subtract 341540 and 482000 = -140460.
This is decrease in overal net operating income $-140460.
IS THIS RIGHT? THANKS.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Brandilyn Toy Company manufactures a line of dolls and a doll dress sewing kit. Demand for the dolls is increasing, and management requests assistance from you in determining the best sales and production mix for the coming year. The company has provided the following data:
Product Demand
Next year
(units) Selling
Price
per Unit Direct
Materials Direct
Labor
Marcy 31,000 $39.00 $3.20 $6.00
Tina 46,000 $26.00 $3.10 $2.40
Cari 33,000 $18.00 $4.70 $7.80
Lenny 41,000 $14.00 $2.60 $6.60
Sewing kit 490,000 $17.00 $1.50 $1.80
The following additional information is available:
a.
The company’s plant has a capacity of 129,100 direct labor-hours per year on a single-shift basis. The company’s present employees and equipment can produce all five products.
b. The direct labor rate of $12.00 per hour is expected to remain unchanged during the coming year.
c. Fixed costs total $396,000 per year. Variable overhead costs are $5.00 per direct labor-hour.
d. All of the company’s nonmanufacturing costs are fixed.
e. The company’s finished goods inventory is negligible and can be ignored.
Required:
1.
Determine the contribution margin per direct labor-hour expended on each product. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Product Contribution
margin per DLH
Marcy $
Tina $
Cari $
Lenny $
Sewing Kit $
2.
Calculate the the total direct labor-hours that will be required to produce the units estimated to be sold during the coming year. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Product Total
DLHs
Marcy
Tina
Cari
Lenny
Sewing Kit
Total DLHs required
4.
What is the highest price, in terms of a rate per hour, that Brandilyn Toy Company should be willing to pay for additional capacity (that is, for added direct labor time)? (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Highest price $ per hour
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bravo Baking identified the costs below to determine its cost of one unit of product and its monthly operating costs.The units produced is 14,000.
Table A Variable Fixed
Materials used in baking bread 2.29
Factory Supervisor Salaries 0.12
Bakers Wages 2.29
Rent for Execitive offices 3000
Factory Supervisor Salaries 3500
Utilities used in the factory 0.50
Advertising costs 1000
Delivery truck depreciation 400
Depreciation on bake ovens 0.07
Interest on bank loan 500
Total costs $5.27 $8400.00
Price Charged per unit $7.77
I need the solutions to the below questions by using the information in Table A
Using the costs from Table A compute the below questions.
A) Breakeven units (rounded to 2 decimal places)
B) Break-even sales dollars
C) Contribution Margin
D) Contribution Margin Ratio (%)
Part II Complete the following requirements
A) If Bravo requires a profit of $5,000 how many units must it sell?
B) What is the total revenue from A above?
C) If Bravo actually sells 8,000 units (Hint: Use Break Even $ from B Above)
1) What is the margin of safety in Dollars
2) What is the margin of safety percentage?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Bruno Company has decided to expand its operations. The bookkeeper recently completed the balance sheet presented below in order to obtain additional funds for expansion.
BRUNO COMPANY
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2010
Current assets
Cash $260,000
Accounts receivable (net) 340,000
Inventories at lower of average cost or market 401,000
Trading securities-at cost (fair value $120,000) 140,000
Property, plant, and equipment
Building (net) 570,000
Office equipment (net) 160,000
Land held for future use 175,000
Intangible assets
Goodwill 80,000
Cash surrender value of life insurance 90,000
Prepaid expenses 12,000
Current liabilities
Accounts payable 135,000
Notes payable (due next year) 125,000
Pension obligation 82,000
Rent payable 49,000
Premium on bonds payable 53,000
Long-term liabilities
Bonds payable 500,000
Stockholders’ equity
Common stock, $1.00 par, authorized
400,000 shares, issued 290,000 290,000
Additional paid-in capital 180,000
Retained earnings ?
Prepare a revised balance sheet given the available information. Assume that the accumulated depreciation balance for the buildings is $160,000 and for the office equipment, $105,000. The allowance for doubtful accounts has a balance of $17,000. The pension obligation is considered a long-term liability. (List current assets in order of liquidity. List multiple entries for Property, plant and equipment, Long-term investments and Current liabilities from largest to smallest amounts, e.g. 10, 5, 3.)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The budget committee of Hardesty Company collects the following data for its San Miguel Store in preparing budgeted income statements for May and June 2012.
Sales for May are expected to be $800,000. Sales in June and July are expected to be 10% higher than the preceding month.
Cost of goods sold is expected to be 75% of sales.
Company policy is to maintain ending merchandise inventory at 20% of the following month’s cost of goods sold.
Operating expenses are estimated to be:
Sales salaries $30,000 per month
Advertising 5% of monthly sales
Delivery expense 3% of monthly sales
Sales commissions 4% of monthly sales
Rent expense $5,000 per month
Depreciation $800 per month
Utilities $600 per month
Insurance $500 per month
Budgeted Income Statement
May June
Sales 800,000 880,000
I need to know how to do the rest of the cost of goods section?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Budgeted cash sales
|
15,000
|
18,000
|
16,000
|
|
Budgeted credit sales
|
20,000
|
21,000
|
22,000
|
|
Budgeted inventory purchases
|
22,000
|
24,000
|
28,000
|
|
Budgeted selling and admin expenses
|
3,000
|
2,000
|
2,500
|
|
Credit sales are expected to be collected 60% in month of sale; 40% in month following
|
|
Inventory purchases are expected to be paid 50% in month of purchase; 50% in month following
|
|
All selling and admin expenses are expected to be paid in full in month incurred. Depreciation expense is
|
|
included in budget at $500 per month
|
|
Company budgets the purchase of equipment in February for $45,000
|
|
Company maintains a minimum cash balance of $10,000
|
|
Interest rate for any borrowings is 6%. Borrowings (and repayments) are always made on the last day of the month
|
|
Prepare a cash budget for January, February and March.
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Budgeted sales revenue for the coming five months is as follows:
Month Sales revenue
August $110,000
September $105,000
October $150,000
November $110,000
December $170,000
You estimate that you will collect 30% of sales revenue in the month of sale, 35% in the following month, 30% two months after the sale, and the remaining 5% three months after the sale.
Required:
a) Compute budgeted cash inflows for November and December.
November = $
December = $
(Hint: pay attention to the timing, e.g. “35% is collected in the following month” means 35% of August revenue is collected in September, i.e., cash receipts (inflows) for September include 35% of previous month’s sales revenue.)
b) Is it possible for a firm to run out of cash even though it is profitable? If no, explain why not, if yes, give an example of how that can happen.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cabigas Company manufactures two products, Product C and Product D. The company estimated it would incur $167,140 in manufacturing overhead costs during the current period. Overhead currently is applied to the products on the basis of direct labor hours.
Data concerning the current period’s operations appear below:
Product C Product D
Estimated volume 2,000 units 2,700 units
Direct labor hours per unit 2.00 hours 0.80 hour
Total Hours 4000 hour 2160 hours
Direct materials cost per unit $21.50 $24.10
Direct labor cost per unit $24.00 $ 9.60
Required:
Compute the predetermined overhead rate under the current method, and determine the unit product cost of each product for the current year.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
|
Calculate Ending Inventory and Cost of Goods Sold under FIFO, LIFO, and weighted average
|
|
Beginning inv
|
25
|
110
|
2,750
|
|
Purchased 10/1
|
10
|
125
|
1,250
|
|
Purchased 10/14
|
20
|
125
|
2,500
|
|
Purchased 10/25
|
10
|
130
|
1,300
|
|
65
|
7,800
|
|
On hand at 10/31
|
35
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Camping for Fun, Inc., produces a variety of camping products on a year-round basis. The best-selling item is a compact portable camping stove made from sheets of rust-free aluminum. Production of this stove requires two main operations: cutting/assembly and coating. The basic direct materials use are aluminum sheeting, a polyurethane base coating, and a gas jet assembly. Quantity, time, and cost standards for the camping stove are as follows:
Direct materials consist of sheet aluminum (two 2-by-3-meter sheets per stove at $1.15 per sheet), 1.2 liters of coating materials per stove at $.80 per liter, and a gas jet assembly purchased at $11.30. Direct labor in the Cutting/Assembly Department is expected to produce 50 stoves per hour at $9.50 per hour. Direct Labor in the Coating Department can handle 32 stoves per hour at $8 per hour. Normal capacity is 126,000 stoves per year.
The firm actually produced 120,000 units during the year, and the production records contain the following information:
For direct materials, the firm used 241,200 sheets of aluminum at $1.10 per sheet, 148,500 liters of coating at $0.77 per liter, and 120,100 gas jet assemblies costing a total of $1,369,140. Direct lobor in the Cutting/Assembly Department amounted to 2,800 hours at $9.25 per hour; in Coating Department, it amounted to 3,560 hours at $7.50 per hour.
Using the information provided, determine the following (remember to indicate whether the variance is favorable or unfavorable):
a. Standard hours allowed for the Cutting/Assembly and Coating Departments for the year(by department)
b. Direct materials price variances (by material)
c. Direct materials quantity variances (by material)
d. Direct labor rate variances (by department)
e. Direct labor efficiency variances (by department)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cardinal Castles, Inc., makes one type of birdhouse that it sells for $30 each. Its variable cost is $14 per house, and its fixed costs total $13,840 per year. Cardinal currently has the capacity to produce up to 2,000 birdhouses per year, so its relevant range is zero to 2,000 houses.
1: Prepare a contribution margin income statement for Cardinal assuming it sells 1,100 birdhouses this year. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Cardinal Castles, Inc.
Contribution Margin Income Statement
Sales revenue:__________
less: variable costs:__________
contribution margin:__________
less: fixed costs:__________
income from operations:__________
2: Without any calculations, determine Cardinal’s total contribution margin if the company breaks even. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Total contribution margin:$__________
3: Calculate Cardinal’s contribution margin per unit and its contribution margin ratio. (Round your contribution margin ratio answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” and “%” signs in your response.)
Unit contribution margin:$__________
Contribution margin ratio:__________%
4: Calculate Cardinal’s break-even point in number of units and in sales dollars. (Round your unit answer to the next whole number. Round your sales dollars answer to the nearest whole number. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Break-even units:__________units
Break-even sales dollars:$__________
5: Suppose Cardinal wants to earn $20,000 this year. Determine how many birdhouses it must sell to generate this amount of profit.
Target unit sales:__________units
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Cardinal Paz Corp. carries an account in its general ledger called Investments, which contained debits for investment purchases, and no credits, with the following descriptions.
Feb. 1, 2012 Sharapova Company common stock, $100 par, 200 shares $37,400
April 1 U.S. government bonds, 11%, due April 1, 2022, interest payable April 1 and October 1, 110 bonds of $1,000 par each 110,000
July 1 McGrath Company 12% bonds, par $50,000, dated March 1, 2012 purchased at 104 plus accrued interest, interest payable annually on March 1, due March 1, 2032 54,000
Prepare entries necessary to classify the amounts into proper accounts, assuming that all the securities are classified as available-for-sale.
Fill in the debit/credit values.
Description/Account Debit Credit
Debit Investments (AFS)
Equity Investments (AFS)
Interest Revenue 2000
Investments
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Carter Company manufactures cappuccino makers. For the first eight months of the year the company reported the following operating results while operating at 80% of plant capacity:
Sales (500,000 units) $75,000,000
Cost of goods sold 45,000,000
Gross profit 30,000,000
Operating expenses 24,000,000
Net income $6,000,000
An analysis of costs and expenses reveals that variable cost of goods sold is $80 per unit and variable operating expenses are $30 per unit.
In September, Carter Company receives a special order for 40,000 machines at $120 each from a major coffee shop franchise. Acceptance of the order would result in $10,000 of shipping costs but no increase in fixed expenses.
Instructions
(a) Prepare an incremental analysis for the special order. Should Carter Company accept the special order? Justify your answer.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Case 3.2, Measuring Income Fairly
Kim Morris purchased Print Shop, Inc., a printing business, from Chris Stanley. Morris made a cash down payment and agreed to make annual payments equal to 40 percent of the company’s net income in each of the next three years. (Such “earn-outs” are a common means of financing the purchase of a small business.) Stanley was disappointed, however, when Morris reported a first year’s net income far below Stanley’s expectations.
The agreement between Morris and Stanley did not state precisely how “net income” was to be measured. Neither Morris nor Stanley was familiar with accounting concepts. Their agreement stated only that the net income of the corporation should be measured in a “fair and reasonable manner.”
In measuring net income, Morris applied the following policies:
Revenue was recognized when cash was received from customers. Most customers paid in cash, but a few were allowed thirty-day credit terms.
Expenditures for ink and paper, which are purchased weekly, were charged directly to Supplies Expense, as were the Morris family’s weekly grocery and dry cleaning bills.
Morris set her annual salary at $60,000, which Stanley had agreed was reasonable. She also paid salaries of $30,000 per year to her husband and to each of her two teenage children. These family members did not work in the business on a regular basis, but they did help out when things got busy.
Income taxes expense included the amount paid by the corporation (which was computed correctly), as well as the personal income taxes paid by various members of the Morris family on the salaries they earned working for the business.
The business had state-of-the-art printing equipment valued at $150,000 at the time Morris purchased it. The first-year income statement included a $150,000 equipment expense related to these assets.
Q1 Discuss the fairness and reasonableness of these income-measurement policies. (Remember, these policies do not have to conform to generally accepted accounting principles. But they should be fair and reasonable.)
Q2 Do you think that the net cash flow generated by this business (cash receipts less cash outlays) is higher or lower than the net income as measured by Morris? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Case Study 2
Springfield Express is a luxury passenger carrier in Texas. All seats are first class, and the following data are available:
Number of seats per passenger train car 90
Average load factor (percentage of seats filled) 70%
Average full passenger fare $ 160
Average variable cost per passenger $ 70
Fixed operating cost per month $3,150,000
a. What is the break-even point in passengers and revenues per month?
b. What is the break-even point in number of passenger train cars per month?
c. If Springfield Express raises its average passenger fare to $ 190, it is estimated that the average load factor will decrease to 60 percent. What will be the monthly break-even point in number of passenger cars?
d. (Refer to original data.) Fuel cost is a significant variable cost to any railway. If crude oil increases by $ 20 per barrel, it is estimated that variable cost per passenger will rise to $ 90. What will be the new break-even point in passengers and in number of passenger train cars?
e. Springfield Express has experienced an increase in variable cost per passenger to $ 85 and an increase in total fixed cost to $ 3,600,000. The company has decided to raise the average fare to $ 205. If the tax rate is 30 percent, how many passengers per month are needed to generate an after-tax profit of $ 750,000?
f. (Use original data). Springfield Express is considering offering a discounted fare of $ 120, which the company believes would increase the load factor to 80 percent. Only the additional seats would be sold at the discounted fare. Additional monthly advertising cost would be $ 180,000. How much pre-tax income would the discounted fare provide Springfield Express if the company has 50 passenger train cars per day, 30 days per month?
g. Springfield Express has an opportunity to obtain a new route that would be traveled 20 times per month. The company believes it can sell seats at $ 175 on the route, but the load factor would be only 60 percent. Fixed cost would increase by $ 250,000 per month for additional personnel, additional passenger train cars, maintenance, and so on. Variable cost per passenger would remain at $ 70.
1. Should the company obtain the route?
2. How many passenger train cars must Springfield Express operate to earn pre-tax income of $ 120,000 per month on this route?
3. If the load factor could be increased to 75 percent, how many passenger train cars must be operated to earn pre-tax income of $ 120,000 per month on this route?
4. What qualitative factors should be considered by Springfield Express in making its decision about acquiring this route?
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Catlet Co. uses a periodic inventory system. Its records show the following for the month of May in which 65 units were sold.
|
Date |
Explanation |
Units |
UnitCost |
TotalCost |
|
May 1 |
Inventory |
30 |
|
$9.44 |
$283.20 |
|
|
May 15 |
Purchases |
25 |
|
12.44 |
311.00 |
|
|
May 24 |
Purchases |
35
|
|
13.44 |
470.40
|
|
|
|
Totals |
90
|
|
|
$1,064.60
|
|
Compute the ending inventory at May 31 and cost of goods sold using the FIFO and LIFO methods. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50.)
|
FIFO |
LIFO |
| Ending Inventory |
$ |
$ |
| Cost of goods sold |
$ |
$ |
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
An analysis of the income statement and the balance sheet accounts of Hayes Export Co. at December 31, 2011 provides the following information:
Income statement items:
Gain on Sale of Plant Assets $ 12,000
Loss on Sales of Marketable Securities 16,000
Analysis of balance sheet accounts:
Marketable Securities account:
Debit entries $ 78,000
Credit entries 62,000
Notes Receivable account:
Debit entries 55,000
Credit entries 60,000
Plant and Equipment accounts:
Debit entries to plant asset accounts 150,000
Credit entries to plant asset accounts 140,000
Debit entries to accumulated depreciation accounts 100,000
1.
Except as noted in 4 below, payments and proceeds relating to investing transactions were made in cash.
2.
The marketable securities are not cash equivalents.
3.
All notes receivable relate to cash loans made to borrowers, not to receivables from customers.
4.
Purchases of new equipment during the year ($150,000) were financed by paying $50,000 in cash and issuing a long-term note payable for $100,000.
5.
Debits to the accumulated depreciation accounts are made whenever depreciable plant assets are sold or retired. Thus, the book value of plant assets sold or retired during the year was $40,000 ($140,000 – $100,000).
Instructions
a.
Prepare the investing activities section of a statement of cash flows. Show supporting computations for the amounts of (1) proceeds from sales of marketable securities and (2) proceeds from sales of plant assets. Place brackets around amounts representing cash outflows.
b.
Prepare the supplementary schedule that should accompany the statement of cash flows in order to disclose the noncash aspects of the company’s investing and financing activities.
c.
Does management have more control or less control over the timing and amount of cash outlays for investing activities than for operating activities? Explain.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Analyzing and Computing Average Issue Price and Treasury Stock Cost
Following is the stockholders’ equity section from the Campbell Soup CompanyAc€ balance sheet.
| Shareholders’ Equity (millions, except per share amounts) |
|
August 3, 2008 |
|
July 29, 2007 |
| Preferred stock: authorized 40 shares; none issued |
|
$ __ |
|
$ __ |
Capital stock, $0.0375 par value; authorized 560 shares; issued 532 shares |
|
20 |
|
20 |
| Additional paid-in capital |
|
337 |
|
331 |
| Earnings retained in the business |
|
7,927 |
|
7,132 |
Capital stock in treasury, 186 shares in 2008 and 163 shares in 2007, at cost |
|
(6,812) |
|
(6,015) |
| Accumulated other comprehensive loss |
|
(136) |
|
(123) |
| Total shareowners’ equity |
|
$1,336 |
|
$1,345 |
Campbell Soup Company also reports the following statement of stockholders’ equity.
(Millions, except per share amounts) |
|
Capital Stock |
|
Additional Paid-in Capital |
|
Earnings Retained in the Business |
|
Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income (Loss) |
|
Total Share- owners’ Equity |
| Issued |
|
In Treasury |
| Shares |
|
Amount |
|
Shares |
|
Amount |
| Balance at July 29, 2007 |
|
532 |
|
$20 |
|
(163) |
|
$(6,015) |
|
$331 |
|
$7,132 |
|
$(123) |
|
$1,345 |
| Comprehensive income (loss) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| Net earnings |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1,165 |
|
|
|
1,165 |
Foreign currency translation adjustments, net of tax |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
112 |
|
112 |
| Cash-flow hedges, net of tax |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11 |
|
11 |
Pension and postretirement benefits, net of tax |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(136) |
|
(136) |
| Other comprehensive loss |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(13) |
|
(13) |
| Total comprehensive income |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1,152 |
Impact on adoption of FIN 48 (Note 10) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(18) |
|
|
|
(18) |
| Dividends ($0.88 per share) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(352) |
|
|
|
(352) |
| Treasury stock purchased |
|
|
|
|
|
(26) |
|
(903) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
(903) |
Treasury stock issued under management incentive and stock option plans |
|
|
|
|
|
3 |
|
106 |
|
6 |
|
|
|
|
|
112 |
| Balance at August 3, 2008 |
|
532 |
|
$20 |
|
(186) |
|
$(6,812) |
|
$337 |
|
$7,927 |
|
$(136) |
|
$1,336 |
(b) At what average price were the Campbell Soup shares issued? (Round your answer to two decimal places.)
$ 2
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Andy’s Skateboards, Inc. reported a retained earnings balance of $300,000 at December 31, 2008. In June 2009, Andy’s internal audit staff discovered two errors that were made in preparing the 2008 financial statements that are considered material:
a. Merchandise costing $50,000 that was on consignment at various consignee locations was mistakenly omitted from the 2008 ending inventory.
b. Equipment purchased in January 2, 2008 for $150,000 was appropriately capitalized and depreciated using straight-line depreciation, a 10-year useful life, and $5,000 salvage value. The capitalized amount included $30,000 for repairs of the equipment which suffered major damage when it was struck by a forklift during installation.
Required:
What amount should Andy’s Skateboards report as a prior period adjustment to beginning retained earnings at January 1, 2009? (Ignore taxes)
Give the journal entries that Andy’s Skateboards would make in June 2009 to correct the errors made in 2008. Assume that depreciation for 2009 is made as a year-end adjusting entry. (Ignore taxes)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Answer the following questions in detail and showing all work:
1.NBS, Inc. is a technology consulting firm focused on Website development and integration of Internet business applications. The president of the company expects to incur $719,600 of indirect costs this year, and she expects her firm to work 8,000 direct labor hours. NBS’ systems consultants earn $350 per hour. Clients are billed at 150% of direct labor cost. Last month NBS’ consultants spend 100 hours on Windstream’s project.
a. Compute NBS’ indirect cost allocation rate per direct labor hour.
b. Compute the total cost assignment to the Windstream project.
c. Compute operating income from the Windstream project.
2. Brannon Company manufactures ceiling fans and uses the activity-based costing system. Each ceiling fan consists of 20 separate parts totaling $95 in direct materials, and requires 2.5 hours of machine time to produce. Additional information:
Activity Allocation Base Cost Allocation Rate
Materials handling Number of parts $.08
Machining Machine hours $7.20
Assembling Number of parts $.35
Packaging Number of finished units $2.70
a. What is the cost of materials handling per ceiling fan?
b. What is the cost of machining per ceiling fan?
c. Compare and contrast the ABC costing to more traditional costing methods. What are the main benefits of ABC?
3. Explain, in your own words, what “Management by Exception” is and how it is used. (detailed info located in chapter lecture notes)
4. Explain how management uses “performance variances” to help run a profitable company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Answer the following questions in detail and showing all work:
1.NBS, Inc. is a technology consulting firm focused on Website development and integration of Internet business applications. The president of the company expects to incur $719,600 of indirect costs this year, and she expects her firm to work 8,000 direct labor hours. NBS’ systems consultants earn $350 per hour. Clients are billed at 150% of direct labor cost. Last month NBS’ consultants spend 100 hours on Windstream’s project.
a. Compute NBS’ indirect cost allocation rate per direct labor hour.
b. Compute the total cost assignment to the Windstream project.
c. Compute operating income from the Windstream project.
2. Brannon Company manufactures ceiling fans and uses the activity-based costing system. Each ceiling fan consists of 20 separate parts totaling $95 in direct materials, and requires 2.5 hours of machine time to produce. Additional information:
Activity Allocation Base Cost Allocation Rate
Materials handling Number of parts $.08
Machining Machine hours $7.20
Assembling Number of parts $.35
Packaging Number of finished units $2.70
a. What is the cost of materials handling per ceiling fan?
b. What is the cost of machining per ceiling fan?
c. Compare and contrast the ABC costing to more traditional costing methods. What are the main benefits of ABC?
3. Explain, in your own words, what “Management by Exception” is and how it is used. (detailed info located in chapter lecture notes)
4. Explain how management uses “performance variances” to help run a profitable company.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aon Company produces three products: A, B, and C. The selling price, variable costs, and contribution margin for one unit of each product follow:
Product
A B C
Selling price $120 $180 $130
Variable costs:
Direct materials 71.40 65.40 80.70
Direct labor 10.50 28.00 14.00
Variable
manufacturing overhead 2.10 5.60 2.80
Total variable cost 84.00 99.00 97.50
Contribution margin $ 36.00 $ 81.00 $ 32.50
Contribution margin ratio 30% 45 % 25 %
Due to a strike in the plant of one of its competitors, demand for the company’s products far exceeds its capacity to produce. Management is trying to determine which product(s) to concentrate on next week in filling its backlog of orders. The direct labor rate is $7 per hour, and only 3,560 hours of labor time are available each week.
Required:
1.
Compute the amount of contribution margin that will be obtained per hour of labor time spent on each product. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Contribution margin per labor hour for A is?
Contribution margin per labor hour for B is?
Contribution margin per labor hour for C is?
2.
Which orders would you recommend that the company work on next week”the orders for product A, product B, or product C?
Product A
Product C
Product B
3.
By paying overtime wages, more than 3,560 hours of direct labor time can be made available next week. Up to how much should the company be willing to pay per hour in overtime wages as long as there is unfilled demand for the three products? (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Maximum amount $ per hour
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AP6-4A
The Creekside Inn is a restaurant in Tucson, Arizona. It specializes in southwestern style meals in a moderate price range. Will Feld, the manager of Creekside, has determined that during the last 2 years the sales mix and contribution margin ratio of its offerings are as follows.
Percent of Total Sales Contribution Margin Ratio
Appetizers 10% 80%
Main entrees 50% 30%
Desserts 10% 60%
Beverages 30% 80%
Will is considering a variety of options to try to improve the profitability of the restaurant. Her goal is to generate a target net income of $151,300. The company has fixed costs of $1,432,870 per year.
a) Calculate the total restaurant sales and the sales of each product line that would be necessary to achieve the desired target net income. (Round weighted-average contribution margin to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50, and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)
Appetizers $
Main entrees $
Desserts $
Beverages $
Total restaurant sales
b) Will believes the restaurant could greatly improve its profitability by reducing the complexity and selling price of its entrees to increase the number of clients that it serves. It would then more heavily market its appetizers and beverages. She is proposing to drop the contribution margin ratio on the main entrees to 10% by dropping the average selling price. She envisions an expansion of the restaurant that would increase fixed costs by 50%. At the same time, she is proposing to change the sales mix to the following.
Percent of Total Sales Contribution Margin Ratio
Appetizers 20% 80%
Main entrees 30% 10%
Desserts 10% 60%
Beverages 40% 80%
Compute the total restaurant sales, and the sales of each product line that would be necessary to achieve the desired target net income. (Round weighted-average contribution margin to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50, and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)
Appetizers $
Main entrees $
Desserts $
Beverages $
Total restaurant sales
c) Suppose that Will drops the selling price on entrees and increases fixed costs as proposed in the second part of the question, but customers are not swayed by the marketing efforts and the sales mix remains what it was in the first part of the question. Compute the total restaurant sales and the sales of each product line that would be necessary to achieve the desired target net income. (Round weighted-average contribution margin to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50, and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)
Appetizers $
Main entrees $
Desserts $
Beverages $
Total restaurant sales
Need answers ASAP with explanation plz!
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AP6-4A
The Creekside Inn is a restaurant in Tucson, Arizona. It specializes in southwestern style meals in a moderate price range. Will Feld, the manager of Creekside, has determined that during the last 2 years the sales mix and contribution margin ratio of its offerings are as follows.
Percent of Total Sales Contribution Margin Ratio
Appetizers 10% 80%
Main entrees 60% 20%
Desserts 10% 40%
Beverages 20% 80%
Will is considering a variety of options to try to improve the profitability of the restaurant. Her goal is to generate a target net income of $149,400. The company has fixed costs of $1,051,000 per year.
Calculate the total restaurant sales and the sales of each product line that would be necessary to achieve the desired target net income. (Round weighted-average contribution margin to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50, and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)
Appetizers $
Main entree $
Desserts $
Beverages $
Total restaurant sales $
Incorrect.
Will believes the restaurant could greatly improve its profitability by reducing the complexity and selling price of its entrees to increase the number of clients that it serves. It would then more heavily market its appetizers and beverages. She is proposing to drop the contribution margin ratio on the main entrees to 10% by dropping the average selling price. She envisions an expansion of the restaurant that would increase fixed costs by 50%. At the same time, she is proposing to change the sales mix to the following
Percent of Total Sales Contribution Margin Ratio
Appetizers 20% 80%
Main entrees 30% 10%
Desserts 10% 40%
Beverages 40% 80%
Compute the total restaurant sales, and the sales of each product line that would be necessary to achieve the desired target net income. (Round weighted-average contribution margin to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50, and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)
Appetizers $
Main entrees $
Desserts $
Beverages $
Total restaurant sales $
Suppose that Will drops the selling price on entrees and increases fixed costs as proposed in the second part of the question, but customers are not swayed by the marketing efforts and the sales mix remains what it was in the first part of the question. Compute the total restaurant sales and the sales of each product line that would be necessary to achieve the desired target net income. (Round weighted-average contribution margin to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50, and final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)
Appetizers $
Main entrees $
Desserts $
Beverages $
Total restaurant sales $
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
AP7-3A
The chart of accounts of Lopez Company includes the following selected accounts.
112 Accounts Receivable 401 Sales
120 Merchandise Inventory 412 Sales Returns and Allowances
126 Supplies 505 Cost of Goods Sold
157 Equipment 610 Advertising Expense
201 Accounts Payable
In July the following selected transactions were completed. All purchases and sales were on account. The cost of all merchandise sold was 70% of the sales price.
July 1 Purchased merchandise from Fritz Company $7,568.
2 Received freight bill from Wayward Shipping on Fritz purchase $384.
3 Made sales to Pinick Company $1,190, and to Wayne Bros. $1,500.
5 Purchased merchandise from Moon Company $3,251.
8 Received credit on merchandise returned to Moon Company $347.
13 Purchased store supplies from Cress Supply $672.
15 Purchased merchandise from Fritz Company $3,562 and from Anton Company $3,226.
16 Made sales to Sager Company $3,980 and to Wayne Bros. $1,480.
18 Received bill for advertising from Lynda Advertisements $579.
21 Sales were made to Pinick Company $110 and to Haddad Company $3,400.
22 Granted allowance to Pinick Company for merchandise damaged in shipment $46.
24 Purchased merchandise from Moon Company $3,049.
26 Purchased equipment from Cress Supply $840.
28 Received freight bill from Wayward Shipping on Moon purchase of July 24, $428.
30 Sales were made to Sager Company $5,340.
Instructions
(a) Journalize the transactions above in a purchases journal, a sales journal, and a general journal. (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank. For multiple entries on the same day, list in the same order presented in the problem.)
Purchases Journal
P1
Date
Account Credited
Ref.
Accounts Payable Cr.
Merch. Inventory Dr.
Other Accounts Dr.
July 1 Lynda AdvertisementsCress SupplyWayne Bros.Sager CompanyMerchandise InventorySalesHaddad CompanySuppliesMoon CompanyEquipmentAnton CompanyPinick CompanySales Returns and AllowancesCost of Goods SoldAdvertising ExpenseFritz CompanyWayward Shipping P
2 Haddad CompanySuppliesMerchandise InventoryMoon CompanyCress SupplyEquipmentSales Returns and AllowancesCost of Goods SoldSalesWayne Bros.Anton CompanyFritz CompanyAdvertising ExpenseWayward ShippingLynda AdvertisementsPinick CompanySager Company P
5 Moon CompanyFritz CompanyWayne Bros.Anton CompanyMerchandise InventoryPinick CompanySalesHaddad CompanySales Returns and AllowancesCost of Goods SoldSuppliesAdvertising ExpenseEquipmentCress SupplyWayward ShippingLynda AdvertisementsSager Company P
13 Sager CompanySales Returns and AllowancesMoon CompanyAnton CompanyCost of Goods SoldHaddad CompanyLynda AdvertisementsMerchandise InventoryAdvertising ExpenseWayne Bros.SuppliesPinick CompanyCress SupplyEquipmentFritz CompanySalesWayward Shipping 126/P
15 Wayne Bros.Pinick CompanyCress SupplySager CompanyMerchandise InventoryLynda AdvertisementsAnton CompanyHaddad CompanySuppliesAdvertising ExpenseEquipmentSalesSales Returns and AllowancesCost of Goods SoldMoon CompanyFritz CompanyWayward Shipping P
15 EquipmentAnton CompanyCost of Goods SoldSalesCress SupplySales Returns and AllowancesAdvertising ExpenseWayne Bros.Pinick CompanySager CompanyFritz CompanyWayward ShippingMoon CompanyLynda AdvertisementsHaddad CompanyMerchandise InventorySupplies P
18 Sales Returns and AllowancesSuppliesEquipmentSalesPinick CompanyCost of Goods SoldSager CompanyHaddad CompanyMerchandise InventoryAdvertising ExpenseLynda AdvertisementsFritz CompanyWayward ShippingMoon CompanyAnton CompanyWayne Bros.Cress Supply 610/P
24 Wayne Bros.Cress SupplyAnton CompanySuppliesEquipmentLynda AdvertisementsPinick CompanyWayward ShippingSager CompanySales Returns and AllowancesFritz CompanyHaddad CompanyAdvertising ExpenseMerchandise InventorySalesCost of Goods SoldMoon Company P
26 Sales Returns and AllowancesWayward ShippingSalesAdvertising ExpenseSager CompanyEquipmentCress SupplyHaddad CompanyMerchandise InventoryLynda AdvertisementsWayne Bros.SuppliesMoon CompanyCost of Goods SoldPinick CompanyFritz CompanyAnton Company 157/P
28 Lynda AdvertisementsSuppliesSager CompanyEquipmentSalesCost of Goods SoldHaddad CompanyWayne Bros.Pinick CompanyAnton CompanyMoon CompanyMerchandise InventorySales Returns and AllowancesCress SupplyAdvertising ExpenseWayward ShippingFritz Company P
(201) (120) (X)
Sales Journal
S1
Date
Account Debited
Ref.
Accounts Receivable Dr.
Sales Cr.
Cost of Goods Sold Dr.
Merch. Inventory Cr.
July 3 Pinick CompanySalesWayward ShippingEquipmentSales Returns and AllowancesMoon CompanyFritz CompanyWayne Bros.Haddad CompanyAnton CompanyLynda AdvertisementsCress SupplySager CompanyMerchandise InventorySuppliesCost of Goods SoldAdvertising Expense P
3 Lynda AdvertisementsPinick CompanySager CompanyEquipmentWayward ShippingHaddad CompanyMoon CompanySalesSales Returns and AllowancesAnton CompanyMerchandise InventorySuppliesCost of Goods SoldAdvertising ExpenseWayne Bros.Fritz CompanyCress Supply P
16 Fritz CompanyHaddad CompanyMerchandise InventoryWayward ShippingEquipmentWayne Bros.Advertising ExpensePinick CompanySuppliesSalesSales Returns and AllowancesCost of Goods SoldCress SupplySager CompanyMoon CompanyAnton CompanyLynda Advertisements P
16 Cost of Goods SoldAdvertising ExpenseSalesWayne Bros.Fritz CompanyWayward ShippingAnton CompanyLynda AdvertisementsPinick CompanySuppliesMoon CompanyCress SupplySager CompanyHaddad CompanySales Returns and AllowancesMerchandise InventoryEquipment P
21 Advertising ExpensePinick CompanyFritz CompanyHaddad CompanyWayward ShippingMoon CompanyLynda AdvertisementsSales Returns and AllowancesSalesWayne Bros.Cost of Goods SoldAnton CompanyMerchandise InventoryCress SupplySager CompanySuppliesEquipment P
21 Cost of Goods SoldWayne Bros.Haddad CompanySalesFritz CompanyWayward ShippingMoon CompanySales Returns and AllowancesEquipmentSuppliesPinick CompanySager CompanyAdvertising ExpenseCress SupplyMerchandise InventoryAnton CompanyLynda Advertisements P
30 SuppliesCress SupplyCost of Goods SoldFritz CompanyMerchandise InventoryWayward ShippingMoon CompanyAnton CompanyLynda AdvertisementsWayne Bros.Pinick CompanyHaddad CompanyEquipmentAdvertising ExpenseSalesSales Returns and AllowancesSager Company P
(112)(401) (505)(120)
GENERAL JOURNAL
G1
Date Description/Account Debit Credit
July 8 Acc. Payable-Anton CompanyAcc. Payable-Cross SupplyAcc. Receivable-Haddad CompanyAcc. Receivable-Pinick CompanySales Returns and AllowancesMerchandise InventoryAcc. Payable-Fritz CompanyAdvertising ExpenseSuppliesAcc. Payable-Wayward SupplyCashCost of Goods SoldAcc. Payable-Lynda AdvertisementsEquipmentAcc. Receivable-Wayne Bros.SalesAcc. Payable-Moon CompanyAcc. Receivable-Sager Company
SuppliesAcc. Receivable-Sager CompanyMerchandise InventoryAcc. Payable-Anton CompanyEquipmentAcc. Payable-Fritz CompanyAcc. Payable-Cross SupplySalesCashAcc. Payable-Moon CompanyAdvertising ExpenseCost of Goods SoldAcc. Receivable-Pinick CompanyAcc. Receivable-Wayne Bros.Acc. Receivable-Haddad CompanyAcc. Payable-Wayward SupplySales Returns and AllowancesAcc. Payable-Lynda Advertisements
July 22
SuppliesAcc. Receivable-Pinick CompanyAcc. Payable-Wayward SupplyAcc. Payable-Anton CompanyCashEquipmentSalesMerchandise InventoryAcc. Payable-Moon CompanyCost of Goods SoldAdvertising ExpenseSales Returns and AllowancesAcc. Payable-Cross SupplyAcc. Receivable-Wayne Bros.Acc. Payable-Fritz CompanyAcc. Payable-Lynda AdvertisementsAcc. Receivable-Sager CompanyAcc. Receivable-Haddad Company
SuppliesAdvertising ExpenseAcc. Payable-Cross SupplyAcc. Receivable-Sager CompanyAcc. Payable-Anton CompanyCost of Goods SoldAcc. Receivable-Haddad CompanySales Returns and AllowancesEquipmentAcc. Payable-Fritz CompanySalesAcc. Receivable-Pinick CompanyCashAcc. Receivable-Wayne Bros.Acc. Payable-Moon CompanyMerchandise InventoryAcc. Payable-Wayward SupplyAcc. Payable-Lynda Advertisements
(b) Post to both the general and subsidiary ledger accounts. (Assume that all accounts have zero beginning balances.) (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.
General Ledger
Accounts Receivable No. 112
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 31 S1
22 G1
Merchandise Inventory No. 120
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 31 P1
8 G1
31 S1
Supplies No. 126
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 13 P1
Equipment No. 157
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 26 P1
Accounts Payable No. 201
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 31 P1
8 G1
Sales No. 401
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 31 S1
Sales Returns and Allowances No. 412
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 22 G1
Cost of Goods Sold No. 505
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 31 S1
Advertising Expense No. 610
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 18 P1
Accounts Receivable Subsidiary Ledger
Wayne Bros.
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 3 S1
16 S1
Pinick Company
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 3 S1
21 S1
22 G1
Sager Company
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 16 S1
30 S1
Haddad Company
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 21 S1
Accounts Payable Subsidiary Ledger
Cress Supply
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 13 P1
26 P1
Wayward Shipping
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 2 P1
28 P1
Fritz Company
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 1 P1
15 P1
Moon Company
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 5 P1
8 G1
24 P1
Lynda Advertisements
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 18 P1
Anton Company
Date
Explanation Ref. Debit Credit Balance
July 15 P1
(c) Prove the agreement of the control and subsidiary accounts.
Accounts receivable balance:
$
Subsidiary account balances
Wayne Bros. $
Pinick Company
Sager Company
Haddad Company
Total
$
Accounts payable balance
$
Subsidiary account balances
Cress Supply $
Wayward Shipping
Fritz Company
Moon Company
Lynda Advertisements
Anton Company
Total
$
Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question
Question Attempts: 0 of 5 used
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
On April 30, 2010, Alvira Co. had 21,600 units in process that were 85 percent complete as to material, 60 percent complete as to direct labor, and 45 percent complete as to overhead. During May, 561,000 units were started. The 13,700 units in ending inventory were 75 percent complete as to material, 25 percent complete as to direct labor, and 10 percent complete as to overhead.
a. Calculate the physical units to account for in May.
b. How many units were started and completed during May?
c. Determine May’s EUP for each category using the weighted average method. Equivalent Units Direct Material (DM) Direct Labor (DL) Overhead (OH)
d. Determine May’s EUP for each category using the FIFO method. Equivalent Units Direct Material (DM) Direct Labor (DL) Overhead (OH)
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment 1
Descriptive statistics using Excel This assignment is designed to test Unit Objective 1
Due date: 10am Wednesday week 4 (21 March 2012) or as specified by your lecture
This assignment is marked out of 50 and is worth 5% of the assessment in this unit. You must use Excel to generate the relevant output. The data for this assignment is in the file A1_data.xls which can be found at:
Home page >Assessment information>Assignments>Assignment 1>A1 data.
The file has two worksheets, labelled Data, and Results.
The file is arranged so that all the required results can be presented in the worksheet labelled Results. The appropriate places for graphs, comments and tables are set out in this worksheet, and you are required to hand in a printed copy of the Results worksheet only. It is recommended that you first create the graphs and tables in the data worksheets, and then copy them to the appropriate places in the Results worksheet. In fact on some computers it is essential that you work in this way, as some networked computers have difficulty dealing with data analysis tools when data is selected from a different worksheet.
The assignment is to be handed in as a printout of the completed Results worksheet. Do not print out the data. The Results work sheet has been set up to make printing as easy as possible but it is your responsibility to ensure that all required information actually appears on the pages you hand in. Be sure to include your name and student ID on the worksheet.
While the presentation of the assignment is important, and some marks are designated for presentation, elaborate features are not required. Your work must be easy to read.
For questions involving written comments, the size of the textboxes on the Results worksheet are a general indication of the length of comments required (based on 11-point font.) It is however permissible to make some adjustment to the size and shape of the textboxes, especially when this is necessary to arrange the worksheet for printing.
Question
Background
There are many universities and colleges providing tertiary education in the United States, and news magazines such as US News and World Report track various statistics about these institutions which presumably help students decide which ones to apply to. The data available for this exercise comes from 1995.
There are many state-funded institutions and a larger number of private ones.
From the data provided by US News and World Report, a few columns have been selected and placed in the sheet labeled Data in the file A1_Data.xls.
The columns provide:
? Column A: the name of the institution
? Column B: whether it is private or public, (1 = public, 2 = private)
? Column C: the number of offers of places made by the institution
? Column D: the number of students who enrolled
? Column E: the tuition fees charged (dollars per year)
? Column F: the cost of room and board (dollars per year)
? Column G: the amount per student spent by the institution on instruction
All tables, graphs and comments for this question should be places in the designated spaces in the Worksheet Results.
(a) Complete Table (a). Use Countif or another method such as using the histogram tool to find the frequencies for the number of public and private institutions in the sample and hence complete Table (a).
[4 marks]
(b) Display the data in Table (a) as an appropriate pie chart as Graph (b).
[3 marks]
(c) Briefly summarise the information about the number of public and private institutions in the sample. Answer in Textbox (c).
[2 marks]
(d) Sort all the data by column B (the public/private code). [Please note that if you sort the data incorrectly, it will be hard to achieve any credit for the reminder of the assignment. Some comments on sorting in Excel are given in the Excel tips at the end of this assignment question.] In column I, calculate for each institution the sum of tuition fees and room and board. We will call this variable “Costs”.
Hence complete summary statistics for the Costs variable for the two types of institutions (Table (d)). Give your answers in this table to an appropriate number of decimal places.
[9 marks]
(e) Complete the grouped frequency table for the Costs of the two types of institutions in the sample (Table (e)). Find frequency and hence calculate percentage frequency and cumulative percentage frequency for the two types of institutions in the sample.
[6 marks]
(f) State the modal class for both the Public and Private institutions. Are these figures very different? Explain why they might be different including in your answer an explanation of what the modal class of a data set represents in Textbox(f).
[4 marks]
(g) Construct percentage frequency polygons of the costs variable for the two distributions as one chart as Graph (g).
[6 marks]
(h) Discuss the shape of the percentage frequency polygon for the two different types of institutions. Answer in Textbox (h).
[3 marks]
(i) List the four measures of variability given in the table. Do public or private institutions show more variability? Answer in Textbox (i).
[4 marks]
(j) Private school costs would be expected to be higher than those of public schools. Do the data provided here support this? Quote figures from Table (d) to support your argument. Answer in Textbox (j).
[4 marks]
Presentation: 5 marks (If your presentation is easy to read, you will get these 5 marks. Ease of reading is assisted by appropriate font size, borders, colour choice and labelling in graphs, and some care in spelling, grammar and punctuation. )
Excel tips
Sections 1 and 2 of the Unit Guide provide technical information about Excel that you may need in completing this assignment.
Some extra Excel information is given below.
Sorting Data
When sorting a number of columns of data by one variable, remember to highlight the whole block of data (all required rows and columns) first. If you just highlight the column for the variable you are sorting by, then the values of this variable will be separated from the cases to which they belong.
Paste special When copying and pasting a table, for example into a different worksheet, it is frequently necessary to use the option: Edit?Paste Special ? Values.
Textbox In order to insert a textbox, first make sure the Draw toolbar is showing (e.g. select “Toolbars” from the View menu, and ensure “Drawing” is checked) and then click on the textbox icon, , click in one corner of where you want the textbox, and drag to the required size.
Percentage frequency polygons When creating the polygons, remember to introduce fictitious empty classes at both ends in the table (rows have been arranged so there is room) so that each polygon touches the X axis at both ends. Use Excel’s “Scatter graph” option (including connecting lines) to create the polygons. Due to axis-labelling issues, it is inappropriate to use Excel’s Line Graph Chart type to produce frequency polygons.
Choosing which columns of a table to graph The series tab in Step 2 of the Chart Wizard provides a convenient way to specify exactly which data you wish to graph. For example, if you highlight all of a table including frequencies and percentage frequencies, and use XY scatter, Excel will graph frequency polygons and percentage frequency polygons all on the same axes. You can use the series tab to remove the frequency polygons.
Page break preview When organizing the arrangement of material to fit neatly onto pages for printing it is sometimes convenient to select “Page Break Preview” from the view menu. You can then vary the number of columns or rows on a page. However, be aware that adding columns or rows is effected by shrinking the content, so this technique should only be used for minor adjustments.
Obtaining Histogram and other Data Analysis tools
See Section 2.5 of the Unit Guide if you have trouble finding Data Analysis on the Tools menu. Also note that the Data Analysis option does not appear on the Tools menu when a graph is highlighted or if the cursor is in a textbox.
Here is a clear version of the question paper: http://24.83.215.177/A1_Data.xls
Here is the data sheet: http://24.83.215.177/A1_Questions.pdf
I need this urgently. If you can answer this send the answers in the excel sheet to stateover@gmail.com . And reply here. I’ll give you “Lifesaver” karma points. Thank you
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assignment: Comprehensive Problem 4
1.
Comprehensive Problem 4
Part 1:
Selected transactions completed by Everyday Products Inc. during the fiscal year ending December 31, 2012, were as follows:
1. Journalize the selected transactions.
If no entry is required, select “No Entry Required” from the dropdown and leave the amount boxes blank. For a compound transaction, if an amount box does not require an entry, leave it blank.
a. Issued 12,500 shares of $25 par common stock at $32, receiving cash.
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
b. Issued 2,000 shares of $100 par preferred 5% stock at $105, receiving cash.
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
c. Issued $400,000 of 10-year, 6% bonds at 105, with interest payable semiannually.
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
d. Declared a quarterly dividend of $0.45 per share on common stock and $1.25 per share on preferred stock. On the date of record, 85,000 shares of common stock were outstanding, no treasury shares were held, and 17,000 shares of preferred stock were outstanding.
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________
_________________ _________________
Common stock
_________________ _________________
_________________ _________________
Preferred stock
e. Paid the cash dividends declared in (d).
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________
_________________ _________________
f. Purchased 5,500 shares of Kress Corp. at $22 per share, plus a $275 brokerage commission. The investment is classified as an available-for-sale investment.
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________
_________________ _________________
g. Purchased 6,500 shares of treasury common stock at $35 per share.
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________
_________________ _________________
h. Purchased 36,000 shares of Lifecare Co. stock directly from the founders for $18 per share. Lifecare has 112,500 shares issued and outstanding. Everyday Products Inc. treated the investment as an equity method investment.
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________
_________________ _________________
i. Declared a 2% stock dividend on common stock and a $1.25 quarterly cash dividend per share on preferred stock. On the date of declaration, the market value of the common stock was $40 per share. On the date of record, 85,000 shares of common stock had been issued, 6,500 shares of treasury common stock were held, and 17,000 shares of preferred stock had been issued.
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
j. Issued the stock certificates for the stock dividends declared in (h) and paid the cash dividends to the preferred stockholders.
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
k. Received $24,500 dividend from Lifecare Co. investment in (h).
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________
_________________ _________________
l. Purchased $62,000 of Nordic Wear Inc. 10-year, 6% bonds, directly from the issuing company at par value, plus accrued interest of $550. The bonds are classifed as a held-to-maturity long-term investment.
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
m. Sold, at $42 per share, 2,600 shares of treasury common stock purchased in (g).
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
n. Received a dividend of $0.65 per share from the Kress Corp. investment in (f).
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________
_________________ _________________
o. Sold 500 shares of Kress Corp. at $26.50, including commission.
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
p. Recorded the payment of semiannual interest on the bonds issued in (c) and the amortization of the premium for six months. The amortization was determined using the straight-line method.
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
_________________ _________________ _________________
q. Accrued interest for three months on the Nordic Wear Inc. bonds purchased in (l).
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________
_________________ _________________
r. Lifecare Co. recorded total earnings of $205,000. Everyday Products recorded equity earnings for its share of Lifecare Co. net income.
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________
_________________ _________________
s. The fair value for Kress Corp. stock was $18.50 per share on December 31, 2012. The investment is adjusted to fair value using a valuation allowance account. Assume Valuation Allowance for Available-for-Sale Investments had a beginning balance of zero.
Description Debit Credit
_________________ _________________
_________________ _________________
——————————————————————————–
2.
Comprehensive Problem 4
Part 2:
Note: You must complete part 1 before part 2.
After all of the transactions for the year ended December 31, 2012, had been posted [including the transactions recorded in part (1) and all adjusting entries], the data below were taken from the records of Everyday Products Inc.
On your own paper, in the working papers, or using a spreadsheet, prepare the following:
a. Prepare a multiple-step income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012, concluding with earnings per share. In computing earnings per share, assume that the average number of common shares outstanding was 84,000 and preferred dividends were $85,000. (Round earnings per share to the nearest cent.) Save your calculations and enter the requested amounts below.
b. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year ended December 31, 2012. Save your calculations and enter the requested amounts below.
c. Prepare a balance sheet in report form as of December 31, 2012. Save your calculations and enter the requested amounts below.
If required, only use the minus sign to indicate net loss before income tax, net loss, or a deficit balance in retained earnings.
Gross profit $ _________________
Total Selling expenses $ _________________
Total Administrative expenses $ _________________
Total operating expenses $ _________________
Income from operations $ _________________
Net Other expenses and income $ _________________
Income tax $ _________________
Net income $ _________________
Earnings per common share (rounded to the nearest cent) $ _________________
Retained earnings, January 1, 2012 $ _________________
Total current assets $ _________________
Investment in Nordic Wear Inc. bonds $ _________________
Total property, plant, and equipment $ _________________
Total assets $ _________________
Total current liabilities $ _________________
Net Long-term liabilities $ _________________
Total liabilities $ _________________
Total Paid-in capital Preferred 5% stock $ _________________
Total Paid-in capital Common stock, $25 par $ _________________
Total paid-in capital $ _________________
Retained earnings, December 31, 2012 $ _________________
Total stockholders’ equity $ _________________
——————————————————————————–
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assume that you must make a presentation to the marketing staff explaining the difference between product and period costs. Your supervisor tells you the marketing staff would also like clarification regarding prime and conversion costs and an explanation of how these terms fit with product and period cost. You are told that many on the staff are unable to classify costs in their merchandising activities.
Prepare a one-page memorandum to your supervisor outlining your presentation to the marketing staff.
Shown here are annual financial data at December 31, 2011 taken from two different companies.
Pinnacle Retail Slope Board Manufacturing
Beginning Inventory
Merchandise $150,000
Finished goods $300,000
Cost of Purchases 250,000
Cost of goods manufactured 586,000
Ending Inventory
Merchandise 100,000
Finished 200,000
Compute the cost of goods sold section of the income statement at December 31, 2011, for each company. Include the proper title and format in the solution.
Write a half-page memorandum to your instructor (a) identifying the inventory accounts and (b) describing where each is reported on the income statement and balance sheet for both companies.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
This is assuming accountant has requested a minimun cash balance of $7k at the start of each month. All borrowings, repayments, investments are made in even $1k amounts. Please see far below for chart…
|
|
|
July
|
August
|
September
|
Total
|
|
Cash Balance Beginning
|
$7,400
|
$7,200
|
x
|
x
|
|
Cash Receipts
|
16,400
|
20,200
|
x
|
x
|
|
Total cash available
|
$23,800
|
$27,400
|
41,000
|
77,800
|
|
Cash Disbursments:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Payments on account
|
2,600
|
7,800
|
11,400
|
x
|
|
Wage Expenses
|
10,000
|
x
|
12,400
|
34,600
|
|
Overhead Costs
|
8,000
|
9,200
|
8,800
|
26,000
|
|
Total disbursments
|
20,600
|
x
|
32,600
|
x
|
|
Cash excess
|
$3,200
|
x
|
x
|
x
|
|
Min. cash bal.
|
-7,000
|
-7,000
|
x
|
x
|
|
Cash available
|
($3,800)
|
-8,800
|
x
|
-11,600
|
|
Financing:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Borrowings
|
4,000
|
x
|
-1,000
|
x
|
|
Sell investments
|
0
|
0
|
x
|
x
|
|
Receive interest
|
0
|
0
|
x
|
-20
|
|
Ending cash balance
|
7,200
|
x
|
x
|
7,380
|
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Assuming a FIFO method of
process costing, determine the equivalent units of production for labor and overhead.
a. Beginning WIP Inventory (45% complete) 10,000
Units started in production 350,000
Units transferred out 344,000
Ending WIP Inventory (60% complete) 16,000
b. Beginning WIP Inventory (30% complete) 40,000
Units started in production 480,000
Units transferred out ?
Ending WIP Inventory (70% complete) 26,000
c. Beginning WIP Inventory (55% complete) 15,000
Units started in production 405,000
Units transferred out 415,800
Ending WIP Inventory (90% complete) ?
d. Beginning WIP Inventory (25% complete) 10,800
Units started in production ?
Units transferred out 351,600
Ending WIP Inventory (45% complete) 18,300
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
Aztec Company is relocating its facilities. The company estimates that it will take three trucks to move office contents. If the per truck rental charge is $1,000 plus 25 cents per mile, what is the expected cost to move 800 miles? (Points : 1)
A. $1,000
B. $1,200
C. $2,400
D. $3,600
2. Short-term increases in net income caused by producing inventory in excess of sales can occur under which of the following costing methods? (Points : 1)
A. Variable costing.
B. Absorption costing.
C. Direct costing.
D. Short-term increases in net income due to increases in production volume can occur under any of the methods listed.
3. Absorption costing income will be greater than variable costing income if the units produced are: (Points : 1)
A. one-third the units sold.
B. fewer than the units sold.
C. equal to the units sold.
D. greater than the units sold.
4. Which cost accumulation and reporting system treats the costs of all manufacturing components (direct material, direct labor, and both variable and fixed overhead) as product costs? (Points : 1)
A. Absorption costing
B. Variable costing
C. Mixed costing
D. None of the above
5. Since overhead costs are indirect costs, _______. (Points : 1)
A. they require some process of allocation
B. they can be easily traced to production
C. a predetermined overhead rate is not advantageous
D. they cannot be allocated
6. Which cost accumulation and reporting system is required for external reporting and tax purposes? (Points : 1)
A. Absorption costing
B. Variable costing
C. Mixed costing
D. None of the above
7. Regression analysis: (Points : 1)
A. uses the highest and lowest points on the scatter graph to help separate the variable and fixed components of a mixed cost.
B. is not as accurate as the high-low method.
C. is simpler to apply than the high-low method.
D. uses all points on the scatter graph to help separate the variable and fixed components of a mixed cost.
8. Which of the following methods mathematically “fits” a line to the data? (Points : 1)
A. The high-low method only.
B. Regression analysis only.
C. Both the high-low method and regression analysis.
D. Neither the high-low method nor regression analysis.
9. Which of the following statements concerning absorption and variable costing is false? (Points : 1)
A. Most authoritative bodies of accounting professions require the use of absorption costing to prepare external financial statements.
B. Because absorption costing classifies expenses by functional category, cost behavior cannot be observed from an absorption costing income statement.
C. An absorption costing income statement is often referred to as a contribution income statement.
D.Absorption costing treats the costs of all manufacturing components as product costs.
10. M Company derived the following cost equation to explain its monthly manufacturing overhead cost:
OH = $80,000 + $12MH, where MH = machine hours
The standard time required to manufacture one unit is 4 machine hours. The company applies manufacturing overhead to production on the basis of machine hours and its normal annual production is 50,000 units. What is the estimated variable manufacturing overhead cost for a month in which scheduled production is 5,000 units? (Points : 1)
A. $360,000
B. $320,000
C. $240,000
D. $80,000
11. Which of the following statements is true concerning plantwide versus departmental overhead rates? (Points : 1)
A. Plantwide predetermined overhead rates generally tend to provide the most useful information.
B. Homogeneity more likely exists across departments rather than within departments; thus separate departmental overhead rates generally don’t provide useful information.
C. Computing departmental overhead rates requires each department to use the same cost driver for comparability purposes.
D. A company with multiple departments that use different types of work effort should use separate departmental predetermined overhead rates.
12. Which of the following is among the primary reasons for using a predetermined overhead rate in product costing? (Points : 1)
A. Improves the timeliness of information.
B.Allows seasonal variations in utility costs, or other important variations, to be reflected in product costing.
C. Allows fluctuations in activity levels that are unrelated to fixed overhead costs to be reflected in product costing.
D. All of the choices are among the primary reasons for using a predetermined overhead rate.
13. Select the incorrect statement concerning overapplied overhead. (Points : 1)
A. The overhead control account will have a debit balance.
B. The amount of overhead transferred to WIP from the overhead control account exceeded the actual amount of overhead incurred.
C. Overapplied overhead must be closed at year-end because a single year’s activity level was used to set the predetermined overhead rate.
D. Overapplied overhead may result if the company’s actual utilization of capacity is greater than expected.
14. If the level of activity increases, _______. (Points : 1)
A.variable cost per unit and total fixed costs increase
B. fixed cost per unit and total variable cost increase
C.total cost will increase and fixed cost per unit will decrease
D. variable cost per unit and total cost increase
15. Aquatic Motor Company is exploring different prediction models that can be used to forecast indirect labor costs. One independent variable under consideration is machine hours. Following are matching observations on indirect labor costs and machine hours for the past six months:
In a high-low model, which months’ observations would be used to compute the model’s parameters? (Points : 1)
A. 2 and 5
B.1 and 6
C.2 and 6
D.4 and 5
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The Bakery produces tea cakes. It uses a process costing system. In March, its beginning inventory was 450 units, which were 100 percent complete for direct materials costs and 10 percent complete for conversion costs. The cost of beginning inventory was $655. Units started and completed during the month totaled 14,200. Ending inventory was 410 units, which were 100 percent complete for direct materials costs and 70 percent complete for conversion costs. Costs per equivalent unit for March were $1.40 for direct materials costs and $0.80 for conversion costs.
From this information, compute the cost of goods transferred to the Finished Goods Inventory account, the cost remaining in the Work in Process Inventory account, and the total costs to be accounted for. Use the FIFO costing method.
Cost of goods manufactured $
Ending inventory
Total costs $
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The baking process for Pop Tarts leaves about 5% scrap for each ingredient. Kellogg’s design team has identified a new product called “Mini Pop Tarts” that can use about 85% of the scrap material as the key ingredients. The new product will require additional icing, direct labor and machine time along with specific marketing and promotion. No other costs are expected to change and the additional revenue is expected to be in addition to the main line Pop Tarts and thus will not adversely affect current sales but it will increase overall sales by 8%. Should Kellogg use the scrap and process the product further? Discuss the relevant revenue and cost considerations and other relevant issues in your response. Identify any tools such as regression analysis or CVP that will support the decision making process related to the question. If needed, use calculations or lists i.e. differential/avoidable costs as required for each question. Must list differential/avoidable costs! Please be as detailed and lengthy as possible.
Aug 29, 2021 | Uncategorized
The balance sheet and income statement of Cookie & Coffee Creations Inc. for its first
year of operations, the year ended October 31, 2013, follows.
COOKIE & COFFEE CREATIONS INC.
Balance Sheet
October 31, 2013
Assets
Current assets
Cash $32,219
Accounts receivable 3,250
Merchandise Inventory 17,897
Prepaid expenses 6,300 $ 59,666
Property, plant, and equipment
Furniture and fixtures $12,500
Accumulated depreciation”furniture and fixtures 1,250 11,250
Computer equipment 4,200
Accumulated depreciation”computer equipment 600 3,600
Kitchen equipment 83,000
Accumulated depreciation”kitchen equipment 8,000 75,000 89,850
Total assets $149,516
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Current liabilities
Accounts payable $ 5,848
Income tax payable 18,500
Dividends payable 700
Salaries payable 2,250
Interest payable 188
Note payable”current portion 4,000 $ 31,486
Long-term liabilities
Note payable”long-term portion 6,000
Total liabilities 37,486
Stockholders’ equity
Paid-in capital
Preferred stock, 2,800 shares issued $14,000
Common stock, 25,930 shares issued,
25,180 outstanding 25,930 39,930
Retained earnings 72,600
Total paid-in capital and retained earnings 112,530
Less:Treasury stock”common (750 shares),
at cost (500)
Total stockholders’ equity 112,030
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $149,516
COOKIE & COFFEE CREATIONS INC.
Income Statement
Year Ended October 31, 2014
Sales revenue $462,500
Cost of goods sold 231,250
Gross profit 231,250
Operating expenses
Salaries and wages expense $92,500
Depreciation expense 9,850
Other operating expenses 35,987 138,337
Income from operations 92,913
Other expenses
Interest expense 413
Income before income tax 92,500
Income tax expense 18,500
Net income $ 74,000
Additional information:
Natalie and Curtis are thinking about borrowing an additional $20,000 to buy more kitchen
equipment. The loan would be repaid over a 4-year period. The terms of the loan provide for
equal semiannual installment payments of $2,500 on May 1 and November 1 of each year, plus
interest of 5% on the outstanding balance. Dividends on preferred stock were $1,250. Since this
is the first year of operations and the beginning balances are zero, use the ending balance as the
average balance where appropriate.
Instructions
(a) Calculate the following ratios.
1. Current ratio 6. Gross profit rate
2. Receivables turnover 7. Profit margin
3. Inventory turnover 8. Asset turnover
4. Debt to total assets 9. Return on assets
5. Times interest earned 10. Return on common stockholders’ equity
(b) Comment on your findings from part (a).
(c) Based on your analysis in parts (a) and (b), do you think a bank would lend Cookie & Coffee
Creations Inc. $20,000 to buy the additional equipment? Explain your reasoning.
(d) What alternatives could Cookie & Coffee Creations consider instead of bank financing?